This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
0
A Orammatical Sketch
of the
x4kra- or Ga- Language,
with some Specimens of it from the month of
the natives
and
a Vocabulary of the same^
witli an appendix on the Adaiime-Dialeci,
by Rev. J. Zimmermann.
Two Volumes.
Vol. I. Grammatical Sketch of the Akra- or Gft*Lapguage.
Stttttjart^ 1858.
Printed for the Basel Missionary Society
by J. F. Steinkopf.
dbyGoogk
A grammatical Sketch
of the
Akra- or G^-Language,
and
some Specimens of it from the month
of the Natives.
By Rev. J. Zimmermann.
^tttttgart^ 1858.
Printed for the Basel Missionary Society
by J. F. Steinkopf.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
3
C;T IC 1S03
dbyGoogk
Cu^ f i . / c i^.
Preface.
To write a somewhat complete Grammar and Voca-
bulary of a hitherto unwritten language would be the task
of a man's life even if it were his native tongue he had
to deal with; in tempting therefore to give a grammatical
and lexical Sketch of the G3- language a language not
mine own, I must plead for indulgence in the largest sense
of the term. It is not to be more than the first step-
ping-stone. The life and calling of a Missionary in Western-
Africa does scarcely admit of more; as he has neither the
necessary health and strength nor the necessary leisure for
such a work, even were he to neglect his other dulies,
which can not be thought of.
The materials of this works have been gathered from
the mouth of the people during a stay amongst them of
seven years, but much of it was lost during the Bombarde-
ment of Christiansborg in 1854 and an exact arrangement
of those ^ left, at the hand of an educated native, would
have cost several more years of labour, which would have
been not only an unnecessary delay, but also quite dis-
proportionate to other more pressing labours, especially
that of translating the Word of God. I have therefore in
the course of last year arranged the materials as well as
I could; the whole was then revised by an educated
native, of whose remarks I availed myself in the final ar-
rangement. In many things I could only offer a suggestion.
A consequence of the semplicity of the roots in this
language is f. i. the apparent or entire similarity of words
dbyGoogk
VI Preface.
expressing different ideas (as is the case in the Chinese
and also most African languages). Some are distinguished
merely by a higher or lower tone and in some cases this
has been pointed out in these pages, others have entirely
the same form and pronunciation. In the Vocabulary
this appears a great ^obstacle of mastering the words, but
in the use of the language it is but little felt and where
it is felt, the distinction is supplied by combination,
which can be employed to an unlimitted extend; so that
there is in fact an inherent fulness of the language, which
may be developed as much as the richest language of the
globe. Here and there I have given a few compounds, the
rest is easily to be understood, and may easily be formed
even by a foreigner.
If I have in many instances taken the liberty to depart
from the common framework of grammars, it was done be-
cause the organism of the African languages required it.
But though I may have failed to discover a new and more
fitting framework I may perhaps have supplied in the fol-
lowing Sketch a few materials towards reconstructing it.
As to the language in general and some peculiar expres-
sions of the Western Coast of Africa in particular I had
in view especially Europeans and Natives of this Coast.
People in Europe will easily understand it.
As there does not yet exist any thing like a fixed or-
thography and there is great difficulty in fixing it, I have
often given one and the same word in two or three diffe-
rent modes of spelling and leaving the establishment of a
correct Law of orthography to the process of time, the
more so, as it is sometimes extremely difficult to find the
golden middleway betwixt grammatical orthography and
the. different phases of pronunciation or the perceptions
of the ear. It is true: the rule is: „ Write as thou
hearest!" but it is as true, that every individual has
peculiarities of pronunciation and also of hearing. Time
will teach the right way. So much is sure, that — bad
as the new orthography may be — , it is not so bad, as
dbyGoogk
Preface. VIl
the English, ^ea not even as the German Orthography.
But still to learn G9, it must be heard and to read it
flaently, we must read whole sentences together as is the
case in aU other written languages.
The GS- language being closely related to theOtyi, I
would here remark that ,,The grammatical Outline and
Vocabulary of the Otyi-language** etc. etc. by Rev. H. N.
Riis*) (both in English and German), has been to me of
the greatest advantage and ought to be studied by every
one, desirous of getting a knowledge of a language spoken
in this part of Africa.
That the Lord may bless also this pioneer's work for
the eventual victory of his Kingdom in Afirica is the fer-
vent prayer of the compiler.
Akropong, June, 1857.
J. Zimmermann,
Missionary.
*) Basel 1854. fiabnmaier.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
Introduction.
The Akra — or, as it is called by the natives them-
selves, the GS-language is spoken by the people inha-
biting that part of the Gold-coast of Western- Africa, which
is limitted in the South by the sea the river Volta in the
East and the Akwapim-mountains in the North and North-
west, thns forming an triangular plain. It is divided into
the Ga proper and the AdSnme, which is a Dialect
of it; the former being spoken by about 40 — 50,000, the
latter by about 50—60,000 souls. Some small tribes, the
Agotim-people speaking AdSnme, and part of the Popo-
people speaking GS proper, have emigrated and settled
beyond the river Volta in the midst of Ayigbe- speaking
tribes. Whether there are other tribes speaking a dialect
of the GS, is not yet ascertained.
The Ga proper, spoken by the Sea-towns GS (Engl.
Akra or James-town), Kink a (Dutch Akra), Osu (Chri-
stiansborg). La (Labudai) and Tesi (Tessing) is limitted
in the N. W. by the Otyi-language ; in the East and N. E.
by th^ AdaAme-Dialect of the Ga. The AdaAme (s. Ap-
pendix) is limitted in the N. W. by the Otyi and Kyere-
pong, in the East and N. E. by the Ayigbe- (or E^e-)
language which is also spoken by 7 towns on the Western
bank of the river Volta. The principal towns or small
tribes speaking AdaAme are: Naftwa (a small town near
TcSi), Tema, KpoA (Pony), Kpukpra (Prampram),
dbyGoogk
Introduction. DC
Nnno (Ningo) and Add along the sea-coast; AsadSale
(or Asldsale) and Epgni on the western bank of the
riyer Yolta, Osndoku (in the plain on the mountain called
so) ErobQ (two towns on the Krobo- mountain: Yilo
and Manya), Sai (with two towns on the Sai-mountain)
and Agotim (with three towns in the East of the river
Volta). Every principal town has numerous plantation
Tillages, Nuno and AdS, besides some fishing-villages, as
dependencies.
The Adanme- Dialect is to be considered as the mo-
ther-dialect of Ga proper being more primitive and less
mixed with foreign elements, than the latter, which is
some-what mixed with Otyi; but still the Gh has been
chosen as the written dialect, .not only because it has been
longer occupied by Missionaries, but because of the poli-
tical and intellectual supremacy of the Gd- tribe as well
over the Adanme — , as also over most of the surround-
ing tribes.
The GS-language belongs to the one and the same very
extensive stock of languages of Western and Central-
Afirica, with also the Otyi, Kyerepon, Ewe (Dahomey)
Yoruba or Aku etc. As characteristic features of
this stock either in common with the whole family of
Hamitic languages south of the Sahara, or belonging to it
in particular may be mentioned:
1) Every primitive root is formed of one initial con-
sonant and one terminational vowel (very probably a com-
mon feature of Hamitic languages; comp. the Japhetic
with roots of two and the Shemitic with roots of three
consonants). 2) A consequence of this peculiarity is that
vowels cannot initiate roots and with the exception of some
formative vowels (in GS: a, e, o) also no other words;
and that consonants cannot terminate any (with the exep-
tion of some liquids, m, n, n), which have in afrioan
dbyGoogk
X Introduction.
Languages the character of semiconsonantSi 3) As an
other consequence of the 1. feature, mute consonants ton
not (and therefore in reducing these languages to writing
also should not) be reduplicated. 4) Like as Verbs the
roots of all notional words, so pronouns are the roots of
all pure form words and forms; the former consisting more
of the hard and mute consonants, the latter more of soft
and liquid consonants, besides the vowels; and that if a
notional word is used as form or formword, its sounds are
generally weakened. 5) That formverbs or auxiliary verbs
are employed far more extensively than in other languages,
to express the relations of the language, therefore as also
the double verbs, the verbal preposition^ and other verbal
combinations. 6) That combination in general is used also
more extensively than in other languages to express the
relations. 7) That, as the simplicity of the roots does not
allow many modifications for the purpose of distinction,
this want is supplied by augments or pure forms (s. 4.),
by reduplication and combination (5. and 6.) and hence
the very great fulness of forms to be observed in these
languages. 8) The use of nouns (in GS: da, de, he, liewo,
hie, hlnmei, mli, musu, na, nane, nine, no, nd, se, §i,
gisi, te, ten, yi, yin, yitso etc.) as grammatical subjects
or objects to individualize a general notion expressed by
a verb; and hence the multitude of expressions (as in
Hebrew). 9) As connected with this we have to consider
the mass of proverbial sayings in these languages. 10) The
use of certain adverbs expressing the same notion as
the verb, which they are intended to modify, though having
a different root. 11) The use of the infinitive absolute.
12) The expression of the negation by a negative voice.
13) The want of a passive voice* Etc. etc. Comp. al«p
Bishop Vidals Introductory remarks to S. Crowthers Yo-
ruba-Grammar and Vocabulary; this Grammar and Vocab.
dbyGoogk
Introduction. XI
itself, H. N. Eiis Otyi-Gram. and Voc, B. Schlegels ©d^fuffd
gum Aiigla-S)tatcct ber EWe-S^)raci^c (Stuttgart, Steinkopf
1857), Krapfs Kisuaheli-Grammar etc. etc.
Geographical names and remarks, manners and customs
of the people, religious and social notions etc. are adverted
to in the Vocabulary under the respective words or
phrases. Words like „palaver, fetish, tornado, dash, cow-
ries, grandee, caboceer" etc. etc., which belong as it wer^
to the european language spoken in western Afrika (s.
Ablotsire-wiemo , blofowiemo, n.) will not be strangers to
a person studying any of her languages.
More materials for the study of the GS-language,
though only translations, will be found in the four Gospels,
1 — 3. John, Jude, and Revelation, and Genesis and Pro-
phet Daniel translated into G3 (London, Brit, and For.
Bible Society), the translation of Dr. Barth^s Bible Stories
and a Catechism and select Scripture passages (German
and For. School-Book Society, Calw, Wtirttemberg) ; though
only the later of these translations are written in the same
Alfabet and Orthography. Of great value, especially for
grammatical researches is a translation of the Gospel of
St. Matthew and John into te Akra- language by Rev.
A. W. Hanson, a native of Akra (Lond. Brit, and For.
Bible Society, 1843); but the work is becomming scarce.
An english Index to the Vocabulary, an Englisk-G5-Dic-
tionary and a German edition of this Sketch will, God
willing, be added by and by.
d by Google
Contents.
The grammatical sketch of the 6s-langnage.
Part I. Formation of words, forms and sentences.
Sect. 1. Of sounds,
§. 1. The Alphabet 1
§. 2. » Pronunciation 4
§. 3. » Quantity 5
§.4. > Intonation and accentuation 5
§. 5. > Division of the sounds 6
§. 6. » Combination of vowels . ' 7
§. 7. > » » consonants 8
§. 8. » Relation and other peculiarities of the sounds . 9
§. 9. > Elision of sounds 11
Sect 2. Of iJDords, forms and sentences.
§. 10. The process of formation 12
§. 11. Simple roots and stems 14
-^ §. 12. Internal augmentation 15
§. 13. Outward augmentation, initial 18
§. 14. (Continued) > » 20
§. 16. Terminational augmentation 22
^ §. 16. Reduplication of the radical or the end-vowel ... 23
§. 17. Terminational augment »Q, o and u« 24
§.18. » > >a« .• . . . 25
§.19. » » >i« 27
§. 20. » liquid augment and other terminations re-
lated to it . . .^ 28
§. 21. Pure formwords affixed 31
§. 22. Reduplication 33
§. 23. Combination in general 37
§.24. » with a formal component 39
§. 25. Of nouns. Preposition 39
§. 26. » > Postposition 44
§. 27. Of verbs. Inseparable 45
§. 28. > > Separable or separate 47
§. 29. Of verbs rombined with a formal noun 49
§. 30. Compounds of notional words and sentences. Nominal
" compounds 52
dbyGoogk
Contents. XIII
§. 31. Verbal compounds. Verbs with verbs 56
§. 32. Verbs with their subjects , 58
§.33. -Verbs with their objects 60
§. 34. Formation of formwords. Pronouns 65
§. 35. Adverbs. Numerals. Conjunctions and Interjections . 69
Retrospective tables Nr. I — VI. 72
Part n. Application of words forms and sentences
in particular.
§. 36. General division 102
§. 37. Of the verbs and its forms ......'.... 103
§. 38. Forms directly expressed at the verb. Indicative mood 104
§.39. (Continued.) Potential » 108
§.40. > Imperative > 110
§. 41. Infinitive form of the verb 112
§.42. Persons . 114
§. 43. Interrogative sentence 115
§.44. Subjective and Objective combination of the verb in
general 117
§.45. Subjective combination 118
§. 46. (Continued.) 121
§.47. Objective combination 122
§. 48. Definition of subject and object. Class and number . 125
§.49. (Continued.) Person and attributes 133
§. 50. Compound sentence.
1. Centring in one verb 134
2. Centring in different verbs 138
Retrospective Tables Nr. VII and VIII 142
Part in. Different specimen of the language from
the mouth of the natives.
I. Proverbs 158
II. Gft-Histori^s. 1—3 177
ni. Ga-Speeches. 1. 2 187
IV. Gft-Tables. 1. 2 ... 193
V. Ga-Songs. 1. 2 202
dbyGoogk
XIV
Explanation of the Abbreviations.
Ad. Adn., Ad^nme.
adj., adjective.
adv., adverb.
ace. accord., according.
aor., aorist tense.
art., article.
augm., augment.
aux., auxiliary.
.Akwp. Dial., Akwapim Dialect (of the Otyi-Language).
Ay., Ayigbe (language).
b., body; s. b., some body.
C. Dial., Coast Dialect.
coll. collect, collective noun.
com., common noun.
comp., compare.
conj., conjunction.
dan. Dan., danisb.
dem. demonstr., demonstrative.
Dial. D., Dialect; Kr. D., Krobo Dialect.
dim., diminutive.
engl. Engl., englisb.
eur. Eur. europ., european.
etc., et cetera.
Fab., fables.
f. i., for instance.
f. fem., feminine gender.
fig., figuratively.
frequent, frequentative mood.
fut, future tense.
Germ., German.
gen., generally.
gr. Gr., greek.
Hebr., Hebrew.
imperf., imperfect tense.
dbyGoogk
Explanation of the Abbreviations. XV
i. e., id est, that is.
impers., impersonal.
imperat. impert., imperative mood.
ind., indicative mood.
ind. indefinit., indefinite.
inf., infinitive mood or form.
init., initial.
int. interj., interjection
interr., interrogative.
irr. irreg., irregular.
iterat, iterative mood.
lat. Lat., latin.
m. masc, masculine gender.
m. k., moko (some body). ♦
n., noun.
neg., negative (voice).
neutr., neuter.
n. pr., proper noun.
n. V. )
V. n. J
neuter v.
n. k., noko (some thing).
nom., nominative, nominal.
num., numeral.
Ot, Otyi (language).
obj. object., objective.
pi., plural number.
pi. f., plural form.
perf., perfect tense.
pers. prs., person, personal.
pos. posit, posive (voice).
poss., possessive.
pot., potential mood.
pres., present tense.
prs., personal, person.
prob., probably.
pr. n. and n. pr., proper noun.
pron., pronoun.
pr. prov., proverb.
red., reduplication, reduplicates.
rel., relative.
refl., reflexive.
s., see.
s. b., some body (moko).
s. th., some thing (noko).
dbyGoogk
XVI Explanation of the Abbreviations.
sc, scilicet, ndtntid^; namely.
sec, second.
sec. prs., second person.
sing., singular number.
subj., subject, subjective.
Tab., Table.
th. s., the same.
v., verb.
V. n. and n. v., neuter verb.
V. a., a. v.', active verb.
V. imprs., imp. v., impersonal verb.
voc, vocat., vocative (case).
verb., verbal.
=, like, .the same as.
(?), not sure.
dbyGoogk
A grammatical Sketch
of the
Akra- or Ga-Langruage,
and
some Specimens of it from the month
of the Natives.
By Rev. J. ZimmermaniL
Volume L
""^ tM»^»ayjN4r<r « ^ »* ■
Stutt0«rt^ 1858.
i
Printed for the Basel Missionary Society
by J. F. Steinkopf.
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
Part I.
Pormatioii of words, forms
and sentences.
Section 1.
Of sounds.
§ 1. .The alphabet employed to express the sounds of
the GS-Language is the ^Standard alphabet ... by Dr. R. Lep-
sius of Berlin (London, Seeleys, Fleet Street . . . ISSS),**
as far as i^anted, with the exception of the letter „f^, the
sound of which is not represented in the said alphabet.
It contains as yet the following letters:
a bdeeffghiklmnA
ooprsstuvwy.
The Greek circumflex is employed to express the nasal
sound of a vowel, e. g. a (= a in the german words:
Gang, Hang, Fang etc.), (^) (.=.) indicate the shortness
and length of a vowel, e. g. tSre, ahtS etc., the acute (j_)
indicates the accent the gravis {jjj indicates elevation of
the voice, e. g. Ik, blood, la, fire; the sign (T) under a
consonant indicates a vocalisation of this consonant, so
that it forms a separate syllable, e. g. nSo must be pro- '
nounced in two syllables.
According to the organs of spieech the letters may be
arranged in the following manner:
!•
Digitized by VjOOQIC
_ 4 —
1) Yowcls:
a
e 0
e 0
i a
Digitized by VjOOQIC
_ 6 -
The consonant n is like the English and German ng.
The consonant h is always heard as in house, Haas.
The sign s represents the English sh and German sch;
y corresponds With the English y and the German j;
f represents a pecoliar labiolingual which has the same re-
lation to f, as § to s;
T corresponds with the English t, but occurs only in some
Ayigbe (Dahomey) words;
w is somewhat different from the English and from the
German w, though nearer to the latter, it is an u sUghtly
modified by the lips.
§ 3. The quantity of the vowels is generally rery
short, long ones are marked with the usual mark, e. g. da.
But sometimes there occur vowels of such a shortness,
that thejf scarcely form a syllable, but are rather to be
compared to the Hebrew Shewa or the mute vowels of
European languages as ^o** in the English „nation'', e in
the German haben, gaben etc. These have the usual mark
(^) as: t^re or tre, to carry. Comp. Lepsius Standard
Alphabet p. 27. 28,* where the sign (t) is reconunended,
which however in Ga will scarcely be necessary under
vowels.
Some consonants, especially the liquids m n A partake
in so far of the nature of vowels, that they can also be
prolonged, e. g. dii, haft (S. Riis Otyi Gr. § 6).
§ 4. The intonation and accentuation of the
6a-Language are not yet sufficiently ascertained to enable
the writer to .give the systems of both which undoubtedly
exist. A few* hints must therefore suffice.
1) The intonation (elevation or depression of the
voice) of single words is different from that of sentences.
The latter must be left, at least for the present, to the
ear. By the former words which are in other respects
dbyGoogk
-. 6 --
alike, are distinguished from each other. This we indicate
where it is necessary by the gravis (_l.) for the devation
of the Toice, whilst we leave the other without sign, e. g.
ni, and; nl, that, which, who; U,- blood; la, fire; siuno,
to serve; sumg, to love, to like. Some words, especially
adverbs, are rather sung, than spoken and this intonation
is connected with a long quantity, which can be prolonged
according to the will and energy of the speaker, e. g. da,
always; ShQ, continually; sgfi, altogether; soft, far away etc.
2) The accentuation of words is also to be distin-
guished from that of sentences. The former we indicate,
if necessary, by the acute (i_). It is generally on the
root of the word and in compound words not on the
^qualifying component" (SBefiimmuna^wort), but on the
„ fundamental component" (®runbn)Ott). See Riis Otyi 6r.
§ 60. If a possessive pronoun is connected with a noun,
the former has th.e accent (see § 21).
§ 5. Division of sounds.
1) They are first divided into vowels and consonants.
This division is alsQ to be observed in the organization of
the language itself; every primary root (see § 11) consists
of an initial consonant and a vowel, a vowel cannot begin
a root, a consonant cannot end it (comp. ba, di, fo, gu,
ho etc.).
2) The consonants m n n partake as we have seen of
the nature of vowels (s. §* 1) and may be called semi-
vowels; only these of the consonants together with the
vowels can stand at the end of a word or fiyUable in Ga
(and the other languages of the same stock).
3) Another division of sounds is that into strong and
weak sounds: to the latter belong the vowels and the con-
sonants: m n n 1 r y w, of which especially the forms
dbyGoogk
— 7 —
of the language consist; to the former belong the remai-
BiDg consonants: kgh^tdsS, pbffv.
4) The division according to the organs and the for-
maMon of the sounds see § 1.
5) The rules of euphony based on the closeness and
openness of the Towels, as obs^red in the Otyi-Ayigbe-
and Aku- Language are not found to be much in force
in 6a. j^
Combination of sounds.
§ 6. The combination of rowels is either of the
same vowel (Double-vowels) or of two different vowels, and
this ag^ain either so that both are pronounced in one syl-
lable or in two.
Redi^plication of the sajne vowels has been employed
in two manners, first to denote a long vowel (perhaps for-
merly consisting of two), comp. § 16, 1. or so, that both
are still heard, comp. § 16, 2. In the latter case we use
the sign (^), e. g. nyebaa, you shall come, come! you
come, nyebaa, you did not come, bii (pi. of hi, child),
children.
The diphthongs or combinations of two different vo-
wels into one syllable of the G9-Language are the following:
ai, gi, oi, ui; ei, ei; and .
ao, QO, on; eo, eo, iu.
The first series are more closely combined, than the se-
cond, which approaches to two syllables. Perhaps it would
be more correct, to write a semi-consonant instead of the
second vowel (ay, oy etc. and aw, ow etc.) but terminating
forms hinder it, as the plural of fai, hat, could not be
written fa-yi, because it is pronounced faii (one long syl-
lable). The same would be the case, if we wrote (more
colrectly) ae, ge, oe, ui etc. The plural faei would be
incorrect, because the i of the plural is pure. In the
dbyGoogk
~ 8 —
second series, the lower a, q, e» e are combined with th6
lower 0, the higher o and i, the former by necessity, with
the higher u.
Other combinations of vowels, but forming two syllAles
are: ea, ea, ia, ga, oa, ua; ie, ie, ue etc. which, if the
first vowel is not radical > easily change .into, ya, wa, ye,
ye, we etc.
§ 7. i) The combination of consonants is of
far greater importance than that of vowels; because con-
sonants are the conveyers of notions, the bones of the
words and in the Hamitic stock of languages one of them
is sufficient to form'' a root, whilst the Japhetic stock ge-
nerally requires two, the Semitic three; so that especially
by these initial consonants the roots differ and become
their peculiar character. The combination of them there-
fore augments the means of multiplying the roots. They
are especially the following: \
a) tg, d§ (weakened from ky, gy, ti, gi, comp. the Otyi
and other languages); tf, df, (from kwy, gwy?); ny
kp, gb, nm, hw (strengthened p, b, m, w).
These are close combination^, originating in simple sounds.
Less close are the following:
b) kw, wy (from ku, ko; wi, we); and kl, kr; gl, gr;
tr, dr (tl, dl); tsr, d§r; tfr, dfr. pi, pr; bl, br; ml,
mr; fl, fr; fr, fl; wr, wl. kpl, kpr; gbl, gbr; nml.
Comp. § 12 and the hebrew Shewa.
2) The semivowels m n A, which are the only conso-
nants which can in forms and combinations come before
others (comp. § 5, 2.) assimilate to the organic class
of the following consonants, which never give way to them,
e. g. ftk, tg, M, lah, nt, nd, nn, nl, nr, ns, n§; mp, mb,
mm, mf; 6y, ftf, Aw, because y, f and w partake of the
dbyGoogk
palatal character (see $ 1). The 6a -people are however
not yei7 strict in these rales.
3) Other combinations of consonants the language does
not admit and even in foreign words it puts vowels betwixt
the consonants, if otherwise combined or changes the pro-
nunciation, e. g. aspatre and asipatre, shoe; sipisihamle
(from the 'german spitzhammer) -pick-hammer; AtSem for
Akyem; d§i for gi etc. and by this pronunciation the Gfl-
nation is immediately known.
4) It is according to the principal rule $ 5, 2. a matter
of course that all the consonantal combinations, except those
under the second part of thi9 §. are inseparable, be-
cause only initial, and that no other double-consonants can
occur, except the separable M, nn, mm of the same part.
§ 8. Relation and change and other peculia-
rities of the sounds.
1) Besides the relation aiiA- change of the sounds,' by
i?hich their combination is ruled and effected we have to
speak of another, by which one and the same sbond changes
into another and is related to it, as is observed in all lan-
guages, and by which the progress of one and the same
language and its relation to another of the same stock is
to be seen. In general these are in all languages the smr^
as far as the organs of speech are the same, but they
differ as far as these organs differ, the former points back
to Gen. 11, 1., the latter to Gen. 11, 7. 9.
2) About the vowels not much is to be said: ^A*" may
on the one hand be shortened into e» e into e, e into i,
i into the semiconsonant y, or on the other hand into o,
^ into 0, 0 into u and u into w.
3) Just so also the consonants in general change accor-
ding to their organic order (§ 1): the movement to be
observed is from the harder to the softer consonants and
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 10 —
from the throat toward the lips, though it is to be seen
that a retrograde movement is also going on, as is also
the case in the Japhetic and Semitic languages. — The
Gfl-language proper appears in this respect more adyanced
or new than its eastern dialect, the AdSAme, and its nor-
thern and eastern neighbours, the Otyi, Kyerepon and Ayi-
gbe. If we follow the organic order of the 'consonants,
they change in a horizontal and a vertical direction, be-
ginning by k; this may be softened into g (Ot. oponko»
6. okpgngQ, horse), g into.n, or into h; t is softened
into d, d n 1 r change very frequently with each other
not only in the different languages of the family, and in
the different dialects but even in the same town (comp.
atade, atale, dress; huru, htilu, hOnQ, sun etc.), t and d
change with s (here rs^her retrograde, the Otyi nsa, hand,
becomes de in GSl, sa, war, ta;'ns3, wine, dS, nsSi, before,
dSi etc.), s becomes s (Ot. and Ad. si, Gd si) ; y seems to
change in the retrograde movement into d? (Ot. yi, GS:
dSie, to tabs arway); p, b, m, w, when initial, are often
hardened into kp, gb, iim, hw, especially p, which seldom
begins a word (comp. Crowther's Aku [Yoruba] Gram. Seeleys,
Flect-Str., London 1852); p becomes f (Old Gft: pia, po,
pe. Mew GS: fia, fo, fe etc. Ad. pe, Ga fe, to do etc.);
b becomes m (hi, u. young one, diminutive form, and mi;
e. g. iiulami — nwei-la-bi, high-light-child — star fctc.) or
w, e. g. ba, to come, when an auxiliary verb becomes wa
and at last a (comp. Ot. ba and wa = GS hi and mi, see
above). But „m*' may harden into b as well, comp. Ad.
mo, thou; GS bo; Ad. ma, Gd: ba, to come (Ayigbe: va
and fa). In Ayigbe the Gfi b is sometimes v, e. g. vi,
GS: bi, child etc., f. becomes f or S (comp. filafo, Ot. mi-
firaifo, a blind man, Old GS: firafo and fu]:afo; Ot fi, GS:
Sla, house, home etc. etc.
But as we have ahready observed in $ 7, the palatal
dbyGoogk
— 11 —
sounds become also lingual , the Unguals move toward the
labials and backward. K may become t, g = d, ti = n,
andn = mh = yorw, and vice versa; less easily the
hard Unguals change with the hard labials. — The voca-
bulary shows more of these changes.
4) Besides the pecuUarities of sound already mentioned
there are some more of importance. The sound r can not
only not terminate but also not initiate a G&-word (Conf.
Riis Gr. § 12); in foreign words beginning with r it is
either changed into 1 or becomes hr (comp. the Greek ^).
6 also seldom initiates a word and only before a e (e)
0 0 and u, before i it becomes ds. K also becomes ts
^fore i; n becomes ny before e and i and this may be-
come y (Comp. Ad. ftg, Ga ye etc.); p when initial, ge-
nerally becomes either kp or f, though there are exceptions,
s generally becomes s before i, but not always; the simple
s before u is together with^t changed into f, the termi-
nating Uquid (h n m) generally becomes ii or ne, whilst
the Adanme and also the Akwapim dialect of the Otyi like
m (seldom or never n) as well only a e o and n n,m
are used as initial forms s. § 13 and 14.
§ 9. 1) fhe elisio
of the euphonic rgles of i
any consonant omitted,
tvort) becomes a form or
when the auxiUary of th(
wa, a and even this is
preceding vowel a is alsc
wo, we, us (comp. Ot. wo, thou, where ih1& same is the
case, and the „(B6)lvi^d gur 3ipngla*®lfr4^c", ». Rev.
B, Schlegel, Bremen 1857), and some other words; y is
scarcely audible in compounds of the words yi, head; e. g.
dbyGoogk
~ 12 —
yitSo and itSo, bead; yitSgi and itsoi, hair etc. The elision
of n n and m see under 2.
2) But very frequently vowels and the semivowels ft n
and m, when mere forms are cast off. The initial aug-
ments e o and a (see § 13, 14) and sometimes ii n m
give way after pronominal forms and in compounds (§ 21»
31 ff.), but are then indicated by the accent or tone.
Also the terminational vowels a, q, o, if not radical but
only formal, are cut off in compounds, e. g. sina = sia-
na, house -moath = door; hina, hlfttSo, hinmei, higble
(compounds of h!e, face); seo, successor, abifao, fufQo,
suckling etc. pi. form with bii (see § 17, 25, 3.) s^bii,
abifabii, fufgbii etc. -^
Other elisions are mere omissions origlniating in care- .
less speaking and ought not to be fixed by a written form;<
also itso, itsoi, o = wq, ura = wura etc. are to be con-
sidered as such. «.•
Section 2.
nd sentences.
I material of which words
am , as these are the mate-
rial ces. The relations and
div dicate the rules according
to ation is going on.
¥ords is that of roots.
Thi elation al (formal) roots
as all the words are either words of notion or words of
relation (form). The former are all verbs, the latter
the primitive pronouns. These are not only the roots
. ■ 1
I ....Goog.
— 13 —
of form words or relational words but also the elements
of the forms (or the inflection) of the language. Many
form-words however and even some forms were originally
notional words (s. § 24 — 29). All 'the words of the lan-
guage, some adverbs and interjections (§ 35, 2. 5.) excepted
are derived from these roots, though we cannot show the
origin of every word/ Foreign words are partly natura-
Kzed.
2) The process of formation of notional words
and their forms is in general the following:
a) A notional root is formed by a consonant and a vowel,
as: ba, be, be, bi, bo, b( fft,
fe, fe, fa, fi, fo, fd, fo, g
b) The derived stem is forr ba,
leaf; bi, child etc.
c) The derivation or form is le-
ning of the radical be,
fu, to, ke etc.
d) by the strengthening o nt:
dsa, d§e, gba, gbe, kpa, kpe, dfa, tfii^ tSe» tsi, nma;^
bla, ble, fra, fle, kra, dsra, nmle, kplS etc.
e) by a vowel put betwixt the two radicals: sia, d^,
-tfia etc. from s§, dse, tfa etc.
f) by an initial or terminational augment, as: eba,
aba, oba, mba, miba, mimba, baa, baa, j)ai, ban, balg,
bamS, sale, yeli, here, kane, wiri etc.
g) by a pure formword added, as: miba, oya, nyenu,
amete, tule, kewo; ngmgne, bian§ etc.
h) by reduplication of the root or word: susu, titi,
kukwe (=kwekwe?); momo, Aminnoi etc.
i) by adding a notional word which has become a form-
word or mere form, as: baya, yaba, bako, bau;
nanyo, asrafonyo, nyemi, agbami, balabii, gbo-
mo, sfimo etc.
dbyGoogk
— 14 —
k) Two or more words arc joined together (com-
pounds). Here the process of formation of words
and their forms joins that of the formation of sen-
tences.
1) Several of these formations ma; of course occur in one
and the same word.
3) The process of formation of relational words
and forms (as far the latter does not come under part 2 of
this §), is less distinct, as ma^ he expected from the weak
and liquid elements they are formed of. The formal or
relational roots are the most simple forms of the pronouns:
>-, thou; e-, he, she, it; wo, we; nye,
(see^the Adanme-Appendix and a and
Vocabulary, also a and mo, mei in
^oc. ^the GS).
^hich originally were notional words are
3 such respecting their formation; see
$ 35 and the Vocabulary.
§ 11. Simple notional roots and stems (§ 10,
2. a. b.) are formed by a consonant and a vowel.
The former are all verbs, the latter nouns, adjectives (and
adverbs). It is impossible, the means of distinguishing for-
mation being so limited, to find out the primitive meaning
of all. — Tb^ simple root is to be seen in the imperative
mood, sing, number, second person, positive form of the
inflection of some of these radical verbs, in the aorist
tence, ind. mood, positive form of all (if the pronominal
augment is cut off) and in the infinitive of a few. These
forms are also used in the vocabulary. — The simple stems
may partly have lost a former augment, but we take them,
as we find them in the language now. Most of them are
concrete nouns. The infinitive form of a verb is as in
German always an impersonal abstract, sometimes also
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 15 —
a coim^^te, noun. Nearly every consonant of the alpha-
iet connected with any one of the vowels — under above
(Sect. 1) mentioned rules — forms a root, mostly also a
simple stem, as:
Signification
of the root, stem; — root — stem.
ba
bS
be
be
bi
bo
bg
to come,
to beg,
to lance,
to be boiled,
to sweep,
to be absent,
to ask,
to cry,
' tobufl,
to cover.
leaf.
da
-;-
de
—
de
—
di
—
do
—
da
child.
w
cover.
fa
manner.
fa
hole.
»
to be great;
(Ad. to say)
(Ot3 to eat.
to be hot,
to plant,
to leak,
to suffice,
to take of,
to come ofT,
mouth.
hand.
heat (love),
(plant?)
Guinea worm.
half.
vein etc.
Compare for a farther illustration the tables N. I. and the
vocabulary.
§ 12. Under the name of internal augmentation
we may take the formations under § 10, 2. c. d. e. together,
1) By lengthening the radical vowel of prhnary
roots are formed:
a) secondary roots, i. e. other verbs related to them, but
in every other respect independent of them, as: b6,
to quarrel; kg, to grant; lo, to take up (sand etc.),
b) the infinitive (and imperat. mood, sec, prs. sing., pos.
form) of a number of verbs (see the tables N. I. and
the vocab.), mostly active intransitive, e, g. ba, inf.
ba, to come (ccmiing, see und. c); ya, inf. ya, to
go etc.
e) Besides the verbal impers. noun (the infinitive, s. § 11
and 12, 1. b.) a number of other nouns, adjectives
and adverbs not directly connected with a iporb; ba.
dbyGoogk
— 16 —
crocodile; bO (fr. bu, to cover), defence ^.«leiit; fS,
river, brook; fe, dung; gS, adv. staringly; ka, temp-
tation (fr. ka; V. to tempt); crab; ka, heap (fr. kQ,
to break?) etc.
2) By strengthening the radical consonant, by
means of a consonant added either secondary roots
and stems are formed or the language has begun a for-
mation of forms (inflection) i/vhich ii still in process and
not thoroughly developed,
a) The former is especially the case with closer consonan-
tal combinations (see § 7, 1. a.) as:
Secondary roots, stems.
tsa, to dig etc. tS& to call; \^q, father.
tSe, to take off, pluck off; — — v
tsi, to move;
t§o, to shine;
ts5, to turn; to {each.
tsu, to send; to work; to be
red etc.
dSa, to be straight;
dsO, to dance;
dfa, to break, tfa, to strike;
ny€, to be able;
nye, to hate;
kpOy to crumble off;
kpft, to stretch;
gbe, to kill;
txnSiy to scratch; to write;
etc.
t§i, native sword.
t§o, tree, stick,
visible body.
tSu, room, liouse.
dsa, nq^rket.
dso, danx^e.
nye, mother;
yesterday.
ny§, hatred,
kpo, lump.
kp3, thread etc.
gbe, killing;
dog;
voice,
nmfl, food; a kind of wheat,
etc.
b) the latter is the case with less close consonantal com-
biaations, though some of them form also only secon-
dbyGoogk
— 17 —
dary roots and stems compare: kra, to soothsay; gli,
to be in a rage; dSra (or dsSra, dSfira, diYra, comp.
§ 3), price; trade; mra, law; — but this formation
is especially used for inclinational purposes:
ta, to sit, pi. ira (comp. § 12, 2. and table N. I.);
ko, to take something;
kro, klo, kdro, k^lo, to take things, to pick up,
plural form depending on the object, obj. plur.
of gome verbs, s. § 38, 2.;
to, pi. tro, to be satisfied;
da, pi. dra, to grow, to be large;
dfa, pi. dfra, y. n. to break (of earthen- wares, ctia*
bashes etc.);
kpo, obj. pi. kpdro, kplo, to crumble off; etc. (Comp.
some other pi. forms of the verb under 3. and the
Vocabulary.)
3) By a vowel put between the two radicals
the same is effected, but less frequently; comp.
a) M and §la, to burn; Sai and Siai, n. pr. of a moun-
tain and the land, inhabitants and language of it ete.
b) Defect inflectional formations are: aa, the transitive
form (comp. the Hiphil of the Hebrew) of a few verbs,
as: dsie to take out, from dse, to come out; tsie
(h!e) to awaken one fr. (hie tSS, to awake, comp*
§ 29). This formation is not much developed and
neuter verbs are generally also transitive, or the
difference is indicated by other means, s. § 27, 2. a.
§ 28, 2. b.
bb) the (subjective or) obj. pi. form of some veits, as:
tfa moko nd, to strike some body with some thing;
tfia m. k. nii, to strike s.b. with things, s.§37,2ff.
tfa te, to cast a stone (at one); tfia tgi, to cast
stones (at one), to stone.
a
dbyGoogk
— 18 —
§ 13. 1) A richer deyelopment appears in the out-
ward (initial or terminational) augmentation.
The radical pronouns are to be considered as the radical
elements of these augments. We begin with the initial
augments (§ 10, 2. f. and 3.). Those by which words
(stems) and inflectional forms are formed, are the init. liquid
— augment n n m and the init. Yowel — augments a e o.
2) The initial liquid augment n n m (often deve-
loped into mi, min, min, mim) as relational root represents
the first prs. sing, of the personal pronouns. It forms
s*ems, especially collective nouns, as in Otyi (many of them
being Otyi words) and the present tense, ind. pos. of the
verb (as in Otyi the augment or suffix „re" — ); e. g.
a) verbforms: ba, to come; mba, mlba, mimba, be coming;
Anaft mba, Anai^ is coming; together with the pronominal
form: mTmba, miba, 1 am coming; oba, thou art, 6ba, he
is c, womba, we are c, nyemba, you are amemba, they
are c, aba, they are c, (man fommt), the liquid augm.
being neglected in the sing, and 3. indefinite prs. pi.; nke,
mike, minke, be saying; dke (man fagt), it is said; b) stems:
nku, shee-or- tree-butter; nto, a kind of grass; toll, tax.
mplaA, abeam etc. Sometimes these stems have again
lost the augment as may be seen by comparing them with
the Otyi and Adanme, e. g. fote, Ot. mfotie, white ants;
de> Ot. nsa, hand; dd, Ot. nsS, wine etc. Here and there
the augment is cut off by combinations, e. g. nso, sea
(Ot. nsu, water); Ad. wu, Ayigbe: iVu may sometimes also
be heard wuso; ntsoi, groans, sighs, otsoi, thy sighs. In
words like mra, adv. qaickly; mla, law; nmg, to lay (fr.
m5, to set?), nyle, to walk, nwei, heaven; above etc. it
pan not be decided, whether the first liquid is radical and
the second eons, formal, or whether the process is the same
as in kp gb or whether the liquid is the augment.
3) Mere distinct and of a more distinguishing character
dbyGoogk
— 19 —
is the in it. augment ,,8"; its radical pronominal signifi-
cation is in Adng. they, their; in GS the same but in an
indefinite way, like the German „nian", wherefore, the lan-
guage having no passive voice, it serves to express this,
as: afe, man i\)\it, they do, it is done; but it can also be
used of intr. verbs, aba, man fommt, Lat. ventum est, they
come. Another peculiar use of it as pronominal form is
made, if a noun has a possessive case pi. number prece-
ding it, as: we, house; mantsemei awe, the house of the
kings (comp. in some German dialects of the people: bet
Sonigc i^rc^aufet, in Otyi: menua nefi, meineS Sniber*
fcin ^an^, my brother's [his] house). Besides this the
init. augment „a" forms a number of mostly impersonal
individual stems and some others, as: bo, to multiply;
abo, fruitfield; to, to set; ato, ladle; kpe, to meet, akpe,
thousand; sa, to prepare, asa, hall; male, to lie; amale,
lie; Comp. also the words: ^ke (it has been said, "lOX*?),
that; agbene (s. agbe no, this is finished) now (Ot. afeyi);
asa, asan (from sa, iterative auxiliary verb, § 28, 2. b.)
again. Though it is an impersonal augment, it forms some
personal nouns (compare in Otyi the same) of a more in-
distinct character, as: Anyemi, pi. anyemimei, brother; ata,
father (Papa, only in addressing) awo, mother (Mama, as
the former); awu, husband, aha wife; in which the pecu-
liarity is to be observed that the augment can appear only
in the address (vocative case); in all other cases these
Bouns are combined with a possessive pronominal augment,
after which the augment a must drop. Without possessive
pronouns they cannot in Ga properly be used (comp. the
English). For ata and awo tse and nye are used in other
cases; e. g. ata! father! mitse, my father etc.
But the augment „a" forms also the future tense ind.
posit, and the potentiiil mood. In these two cases it is
not derived from the pronoun „a", but from the auxiliary
2*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 20 —
verb ba (to come), i/veakened into wa and a, and even this
a is swallowed up by some pronominal augments, in which
case we represent it by a reduplication of theis vowel e. g.
aba, shall or will (or must) come; fut. tense, ind. posit:
maba, 1 shall come,
ooba (inst. of obaba, owaba, oaba), thou shalt come,
eeba, he shall come,
WQQba, nyeaba, ameaba,
aaba = a(me b)a ba, man tt)irb fommcn, venturum est.
In the (potential) mood the „a'' appears only when the
subject is expressed by a noun. See table N. YII.
S 14. (Initial augments continued.)
1) Whilst the augments n n m, a and o have a mixed
character and the stems formed by them, through not the
forms, are mostly Otyi, the in it. augment e is of a pure
Gfi-character. The radical „e" represents the pers. sub-
jective and possess, pronoun, he, she, it, his, her, it. It
is more individualizing than a, but less than o (thou, thy,
thine, thee). Its peculiar character seems to be of a con-
cluding, perfecting kind; the init. liquid augment is
not individualizing at all, the o augm. most individua-
lizing or distinguishing, the „e*' concludes, the indefinite
„a^, as far as it is pronominal and not derived from ba
(see § 13) serves to distinguish in an indefinite way all
those relations which find no place under n n m, o and e.
The „e^ is a, representing alone the perfect tense, if
the verb has a nominal subject, after the pronominal sub-
ject it drops and is only represented by the elevation of
voice in the pronominal augment, e. g. N. Me, N. has made,
mtfe, I have made; ofe, fefe (= e-fefe), wofe, nyfefe, am^fe,
Me (= a-fefe);
b) the adjective, being as it were a fixed perfect
form; the fixing by which the adjective wordform is dis-
dbyGoogk
Si -^
lioguished from the perfect inflectional form is then
represented by a terminational augmentation of the adj.
generally n (comp. the instances at the end of c.) Some
of these adj. have become nouns, and all may, as in Ger-
man, be used as nouns.
c) But the augment „e*' distinguishes also the nega-
tive inclinational form (or voice). The reason for this may
appear strange, as it is in Otyi the case with the liquid
augm. n n m (Riis Gr. in German § 23) ; but it does not
distinguish the negation from the position, this is done
by the peculiar negative tone or voice (as e. g. the que-
stion also is distinguished by the voice), but rather the
perfection of negation from imperfection, as this is
the character of all the tenses, except the perfect. Here
also it gives way to the pronominal augment; e. g. N.
efee, efeko, ef6h, N. did not make, has not made, will not
make; but mif^e, ofeko, efen etc. Comp. to 1. a—c. the
following instances and the table N. I. and the Vocab.,
lell. e.
Roots,
fo, to do evil.
ye, to be white.
tsu, red.
bo, to ball,
sa, to rot.
Inflections.
prf. pos. kto has
done evil.
prf. neg. efoko.
imp. „ ef66.
fut. „ efOn.
feye, eyeko, eyee,
eyen.
fetsu, etSiiko, etsuu,
etsun.
ebo etc.
^sa etc.
etc. etc.
word-forms.
efOn, evil, bad.
(in compounds:
mofdii, a bad man.
ndf6n, a bad thing).
eyen, 'yen, white.
etsuru (instead of
etsun, s.§20,4.) red.
^bo, poison.
^sa, sin.
2) The most individualizing and therefore also the per-
sonal init. augment is „o", as in Otyi, to which the
dbyGoogk
— 22 —
stems and wordforms formed by, it, partly belong. In G2i
it is the radical pers. subj. and possess, pronoun sec. prs.
sing. (Comp. the Ot. Adnme and Ayigbe). It forms no
inflectional form, but a number of personal nouns and some
formwords in which the original pronoun is still discernible,
as the G3 language likes for the purpose of individualizing
in the hfe of the language to speak to a person, if some-
thing is {o be very individually and personally expressed
(this is in a less degree in every language the case). Comp.
the words: Onukpa, alderman, elder; osofo, priest; okp6ho,
horse; onufu, serpent; ohi^, want, poverty; onyai, canoe-
tree, silkcotton tree; oy^ (,;l)u flej)fi"?) adv. quickly; oh^,
hundred; obo, adv. fully etc. See Voc. lett. o.
§ 15. The terminational augmentation is still
more employed in Ga than the initial. In Otyi and Ayi-
gbe the latter has found a greater development and is also
more fixed. This want in the Ga-lailguage is supplied by
the tentyinational augments, which, though ahey frequently
change with eachother, are seldom dropped. As the init.
augments are to be traced back to the subjective or pos-
sessive prs. pronouns, so the terminational is in general
to the objective personal pronouns: mi, m, n, n; o, le;
wo (or o) nyc, ame (Ad. me, comp. GS mei, me' = people,
gcute). But neither can this be done so clearly, as with
the former nor can the term, augments be so clearly di-
stinguished as the init. ones, because the term, augments
are not only subject to far more changes, but can also not
be fully dislinguished from forms and formwords which
were originally notional words, e. g. the termination ft can
be = mi 1, = mli, the inside (s. § 29), = ni or d§i, to
be (something) see § 33, 3., == ne, from the Otyi de, a
thing (Ga: no, see this in § 25) and a simple termination
of secondary roots and stems of which the origin is un-
dbyGoogk
— 23 —
blown. The same is the case with mo, le» 0> o etc. In
general the limits between one form and the other arc
(flowing) uncertain as is to be expected in a living Ian*
guage not yet fixed in writing.
1 shall take ihose terminat. augments which form not
only wordforms but also inflectional forms in the foUewing
order:
a) Reduplication of the radical consonant; b) the ter-
minal augm. 0, 0 and n; c) the term. augm. a; d) the
term. augm. i; e) tlie term, liquid augment and the
augments mo, le, le, li etc. Other terminat. augments
shall be mentioned among these as far as necessary.
§ 16. The reduplication of the radical vowel
or the ending vowel (see § 6) is of two different kinds,
of which only the first is a grammatical form, though
fiot phonetically defensible, the other is an accidental
combination of sounds, but partly audible.
1) We have employed the reduplication of the radical
or endvowel of the verb in GSi to indicate the length of
it m the negative voice of the imperfect or aorist
tense ind. mood, which distinguishes this tense from the
perf. and fut tense of the same voice. The reason was
that originally, according to the Ad. dialect this form was
really expressed by adding the vowel i or the ending we
(pewe or pei = fee, did not, made no!), which by degrees
>*as dropped and left only the long quantity to express
which by the sign of length (—) would in this case be
very inconveniant, because the space above the vowel must
often be used for other purposes, whilst in writing the
Begalive voice must be strongly distinguished from the po-
sitive. But in this case only one long vowel is to be
heard.
2) In other cases the reduplication of the vowel is not
dbyGoogk
— 24 —
80 much a matter of grammer as of accident. If the word
ends with the same vowel which forms the term, augment
or if the latter assimilates to the former, hoth are written,
and if hoth heard, the augment receives the common sign
(~), if not, this is ommitted. In other, hut inflectional
forms no reduplication of vowels is employed except di-
stinctly heard, e. g. naakpa, adv. goodly, much (fr. ne
akpa). Comp. the following instances and the next follo-
wing §§.:
ad 1. fa, to be sufficient, efaa, is or was not sufficient;
kg) to say; ekee, says or said not; mikee, I said not,
did not say; okee, ekee; wokee, nyekee, amgkee,
akee etc.
ad 2. a) bg, to create; hoO, mibod, ohoO, ebo($, wohoO,
nyebQo, amehgo, ahoO» imperf. ind. posit.;
but fa; — faa (instead of fao), mifaa etc. hd, to give;
hda, mihSa etc. („a" and „a" are the only vowels,
to which the inflectional form o assimilates, and this
Q the only vowel of which a regular assimilation can
be shown.)
b) fa, second, prs. pi. imperat. pos. and first and third
prs. pi. potent, posit., if under the influence of the
former (s. § 18): wofaS, nyefaa, amefaa, afaa, e. g.
nyehfia wgfaa, let us be enough; but nyehUa, nye-
fiia etc.
c) If nouns end with i and the plural augment i is joined,
we write both, though the latter i is not to be dis-
tinguished, but lengthens the former only; e. g. hi,
child; pi. bii etc.
§ 17. The terminal, augment o is in Ga as far
as my knowledge goes, only used as an inflectional form,
but not for the formation of words, and I doubt whether
it csm be traced back to the object, prs. pronominalform
dbyGoogk
— 25 —
0, thee, or wo, o» us (though the init. liquid augment
$13, 1.) might he compared for the latter, or whether it
has any relation to the term, augment o and u, hy which
secondary roots and stems are formed and which are some-
times dropped whilst the inflectional augment o which only
forms the imperfect tense, ind. posit, is never dropped and
seldom changes or assimilates (conf. § 16, 2. h.); comp.
mifeo nakai, I do or did so (always), I use to do (as the
Latin imperf. tense); eyioo, he used or uses to flog thee;
but seo, n., pi. sebii, successor, younger member of the
same brotherhood; abifao, abifabii, n. little child; fufoo, n.,
pi. fufgbii, suckling; kukuo, adj. pi. kukubii, short; pempeo,
adj. pi. pempebii, round (and small) etc. In Adanme (see
Apendix) the Ga-inflectional augment o either remains, e. g.
mpeo = mifeo; or it seems to assimilate more frequently
than in Ga; e. g. mpee = mifeo (Comp. the Otyi in the
later writings). Besides this use in Adanme, the termin.
aogm. 0 (or q or 6) is also used there instead of the pro-
noun (the article) le in GK and nd in Otyi, but with the
peculiarity that the plur. form joins this augment*,
comp. pelo == felo, GS; maker: pelgme (or pelohi) r= feloi
in Ga; makers; peloomei = feloi le, the makers (comp.
also the irregular Otyi pi. form namfonom or namfo nom,
nuanom=^lhe friends, the brothers). Wether therefore
the term, augment o was strengthened into mo and lo
(impers. and pers. augments of verbal substantives, s. § 19)
and lo changed into le (comp. the Ayigbe augm. la = lo
and le in Ga and lo and o in Adngme) or whether they
are a modification of the term, liquidaugment, § 1 9, cannot
l>e decided. The cases in which o assimilates to a and d
see § 16, 2. a.
§ 18. The terminat. augment „a" is applied for
inclinational as well a$ wordforms. The cases in which
dbyGoogk
— 26 —
i
the term, ^a** is only an assimilation to the radical ^^a**
instead of the term. „q"^ (s. § 16, 2. a.). As an iuclina-
tional form it is limited to the second prs. pi. imperat.
posit, and neg. or the pi. of the potential as far as depen-
dent on such an imperatiye (s. § 16, 2. h. and § 40), e. g.
nyefea! do (it)! you shall do it! or ny6haia wdfea nakai!
let us do so.
Respecting the formation of words hy the termination
a it is not always possible to decide whether in words
such as sia, sand; fia, pia, adj. all; atu^, rebellion; afu^,
mist, great mass, mia, to press, bua (na) to gather etc.
^a'^ is the radical and the preceding vowel the formal
vowel (conf. § 12, 3.) or whether „a" is the form; the
latter is scarcely the case, if a has the accent, as in atu^,
and in such cases the preceding vowel is sometimes changed
into the corresponding semi-consonant y or w or even §
or f; but if a is a mere form, it is sometimes dropped in
combinations, as: sia, bouse; si-na, door (though also „sdna*^
may be heard). Very probably it is also sometimes weak-
ened into 6 and e and this termination to be explained by
it; e. g. sia and sie, to stretch out; sia, Ot. fie and fi,
house, home; bie, adv. here and biane, adv. immediately;
tl, to scratch; tia, to scratch together, to gather (money
etc.) etc.
The origin of this term, augment is scarcely the pro-
noun a, as it is neither in Adanme nor in Gd used objecti-
vely (at the end of the verb), comp. the Ad. appendix.
In Ayigbe the term, a is = la and corresponds with the
article le in Gd and o in Adafime. That it is shortened
from the pronoun ame (Ad. subjective a, objective me) is
not very probable. But there is as yet no other way known
to explain it. If used for inflectional purposes or where
it is decidedly the mere termination of words, as in sia
(hie), mla etc., it is very short, and toneless, so that it
dbyGoogk
— 27 —
approaches a semi consonant. To the word of interroga-
tion lo (lit. or) at the end of questions it seems to be ad-
ded, sometimes with tke term. liq. aug. for the purpose
of force of speech and the 1 changes into m, e. g. Aso of^o
nakai mo^n? Dost thou really do so?
§ 19. The term, augment „i", which is the new and
most common plural augment in Gd and forms also a number
of stems; partly of a collective or otherwise plural character,
seems to be derived not directly from one of the pronouns,
kl from the Adangme plural hi and perhaps originally
from a word of notion, indicating a multitude or indefinite
number (compare mo, pi. mei, me. Ad. mo, me, gewte,
people, sing, somebody, ^cniaub; nu, man, male^ pi. hi).
In verbs it is only defeclively used and also for the plural
number; e. g.
aj Pluralform of nouns and adjectives: To, pi. toi,
sheep or goat; fa, pi. fai, river; ekpakpa, pi. ekpakpai, adj.
good etc. If the sing termination is h, the plural form is
according to § 7, 1. a., and 3., and § 8, 3. 4. to be pro-
nouced dsi, n being treated as ng or g, e. g. goh, pi. gd-
dsi, mountain; mSn, pi. mSdsi, town, nation; edin, adj. pi.
edidsi, black etc. This is also the case with many other
terminations or words with a nasal vowel termination re-
lated to or derived from n (s. next §. and Voccab.) ; in the
pluralform they show the original liquid termination; e. g.
DJne, pi. nidsi, hand; nane (in the Akwapem dialect of the
%i nan), pi. nadsi, foot; tsiiru, ad. pi. tSudsi, red etc.
kt sometimes the i drops the n, as: gwanteii, gwantei etc.
b) Forms of secondary roots and collective and other
»ouns: kai to remember; lai, fuel (fr. la, fire); nai, coals;
skwei (from kwe, (o grow), raw ground beans; abgboi
(s* bo, to multiply), boiled ground-beans; wyei, black pep-
Pcr; dfoi and dffi, grass; tsoi, hair; fQfgi, flower, afofroi,
dbyGoogk
— 28 —
blossoms, sunmui, lead; fufudSi (see flu and fu)^ crums;
mudSi (comp. mu and mlu) dirt; nsol or sol, strainer;
hdd§i (without a sing.) twins etc. Less characteristic is the
i in toi, ear (perhaps vessels, see to), tsui (chambers?)
heart; kgi, hoe; se!, country-seat, chair; fai, cap or tur-
ban, fel, cold; fei, manners?, see Vocab.; foi, race (see
Vocab. and comp. the Ot. mirika), be or bei (fr. be, to
strive), strife; gbe and gbei (compos, gbe, to sound?)
voice etc.
c) Together with the reduplication (§ 22) the plural
form forms a peculiar Kind of adjectives and adverbs, e. g.
kpo, a knot; kpoikpoi, knotty; ku, heap; kuikui, heapy
(^auflcj?) and heaply, full of heaps; fe, rag; feifei (some-
times only fei), ragged etc.
d) The verb gbo, to die, has irregularly the pi. form,
gboi, gboio, gboia etc. and the frequentative form generally
takes the augment i (comp. c.)» as: fufui, to swell all over;
dSodsoi, to dance every where or in different groups or
frequently; nunui, to drink in different, companies etc.
§ 20. 1) The terminational liquid augment is in
Ga generally n or it widens into a syllable, in Adnme and
Ot. m is also very frequent, n very seldom or never used
at the end of words. This termin. augment is most fre-
quently used and is the mediator betwixt forms and words
of notion, having sometimes a notional signification or must
be traced back to a word of notion. It is the pronomi-
nal augment of the first person subjective and objective
(mike, nke? I said; kemi, kem*, kemomi, tell me), stands
sometimes for the auxiliary verb dsi or ni, to be (some
thing), e. g. midsi, mini, min, it is I; more frequently, as
also in Ot., Ayigbe and Adanme, for the originally no-
tional word mli (Ot. mu, Ayigbe me, Ad. mi) in-
side, may sometimes be weakened from the word no,
dbyGoogk
- 29 -
pl. nii, thing (or Olyi: de, ade, pi ndc, nnc, ne)
which is yery frequently comhined with other words; in
other cases it seems to stand merely at the conclusion of
a sentence either for the article le^ or as an interrogatory
particle (s. § 18) etc.
2) As an inflectional augment the termination h is
Qsed in GSl to distinguish the future and present tense
(which latter is formed in the positive by the initial
liquid augment) of the negative voice from the aorist and
imperfect tense (reduplication of the endvowel) and the
perfect tense (suffix ko), e. g. ef6n, will not do, mif^A,
1 will not do, — hut ef^e, does not or did not and ef^ko,
has not done.
3) Literally this form of the fut. neg. voice, ind.
mood is not different from a number of adjectives formed
by the init. augm. e and the term, liquid augment, but the
peculiar negative voice oi tone distinguishes it phone-
tically and for the ear, so that it cannot be mistaken (s.
§ 14, 2.) Moreover the term, liquid augm. forms some
secondary roots, mostly of Otyi extraction, as df6n, to
think, to consider, sen, to hang; the aurist tense posit,
ind. of such, when connected with the pronominal augm.
is again literally not distinguished from the fut. negat.
ind., but only by the neg. voice (which we do not indi-
cate by any sign) e. g. midsen, I considered and midsSn,
I will not consider, but phonetically it cannot be mistaken,
fe all such cases the context of the sentence generally de-
cides also in the written language (comp. also the Hebrew,
csp. without vowel signs, as long as the language was li-
ving and Dr. Lepsius' reply to the Rev. Ph. Winnes about
the Chinese language in the ,,5Ba«Ier 2Kif(ton3magajtn, lte«
Cluartal^cft 1856"). Before the termin. augm. q (§ 17)
and a and i (§ 18 and 19) the n is dropped or changes
^nW a mere nasal sound or dsi, e. g. dfSA, imperf. dfeg.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
- 30 -
imperat. pi. dfi§a; kronkroii, adj. pure, clear, holy; pi. kron-
krol; din, adj. black, pi. didsi etc.
4) More frequently the terminal, liq. augm. changes
into a related syllable (see above) or other form of the
liquid character or the nasal sound, as far as wordforms
are concerned, and is in nouns and adjectives only to be
distinguished by the plural form dsi, or by comparison
^ith other related languages or dialects: these terminations
are of difiTerent forms, but in all the liquids are retained,
as: ne, no, ni, me, mo, mo, 1(a), le, lo, li, l(u), r(a), re,
ro, ro, ri, r(u), ru etc. Compare the following instances
and the Vocabulary:
Root:
Normal development: fd, to do evil; efoh, futi posit, efoh,
adj. bad.
Irregular development: ka, to lie (down), kane, to read,
Ot. Akuap. dial. kaii.
na, to tread; ndne, pi. n^dsi, foot. Ot. Ak. nan.
ny6, to fall; nyomo, pi. nySdsi, debt, (but nyon
= n}5lo, see the sequel, pi. nyodsi, slave).
fo, pi. flo, to cut; flo or fdlo, pi. fodsi, hole,
rent etc.
tsu, to be red; etsun, fut. neg.; etsuru, adj.
pi. etsudsi, red,
(mo)? mo, momo, adj. pi. medsi, memedsi,
old etc. etc.
5) The term. liq. augm. (together with the term. aug.
0, s. § 17) has received a peculiar development in GS in
the terminations lo and mo, mo; by the former the per-
sonal nouns, by the latter partly the imperative posit,
and infinitive, and the impersonal nouns of verbs are
formed (comp. the termination ,>er** in German and Engl,
and „en" in Germ., ,,ing" in Engl.) as: fe, to make, felo,
maker; femo, making, deed, ba^ Ttaiftn, S^^un, and ifyaql
dbyGoogk
— 31 —
make; femo, inf. (ma^en), to make. Besides this some
secondary roofs and pi. forms are formed by the termina-
lion mo, e. g. sumo, lo loye; ku, subj. pi. kQmd, to break;
inf. suorao, kQomo. Transitive verbs especially have the
latter termination, intransitive ones generally only lengthen
their radical, ba, to come; imp. pos., inf. and impers. noon
ba; neuter ones take the ending le, le, as dsa, v. trans,
and intrans., lo divide, v. tr. to adore; v. n. to be straight;
dsa, diyision; dsamo, adoration; di^ale^ straitness, righteous-
ness (comp. Hebr. pin, Greek. dcxTj and rfixe^r etc., Lat.
Justus, germ, xx^tew, tc^f, gere^t etc.). — In Adahme the
term, mo, m5 is only m, as: Ad. pem, GS, femi), deed,
lo is sometimes in G3 still = n, e. g. yfQh (from wo, wo,
to watch, comp. wolomo), fetish, daif^um*, lit. watcher; pi.
wodsi; in Ad. also lo, Ot. fo, Kyerepon, ho, Ayigbe to
and la, a, the latter being also the article, which is in Ad.
9, in GS le, in Otyi: nd.
We see, the terminational liquid augment is in every
' direction so much connected not only with other termina-
tions but also with formal and notional words, that we
cannot go farther in the matter and are by the last men-
tioned connection already arrived at the compounds
vhich shall be spoken of in the foil. §§. Compare also
the Table N. 1.
§ 21. 1) Pure forrawords or pronouns we wrote
itt the first writings of the Ga language (of which the four
Gospels were printed by the Brit, and Foreign Bible Soc.
and „Dr. Barlh Bible Stories" by the German and For.
School-Book Soc. at Calw, bem galirei* a3erla9^i)crein) se-
parately according to the German and English use, but the
Structure of the G5 and the other languages of the same
femily as well as the partial precedence of our brother-
Missionaries of the Otyi language in Akropong made it ad-
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 32 —
visable to connect the subjective and objective forms of
the pronoun with their respective verbs and the possessive
forms wilh their respective nouns and formwords derived
from nouns, as is also the case in the Hebrew and some
other languages. By this the many small particles of the
language connected themselves more with their respective
words and the writing becomes more intelligible in dif-
ferent respects. Independent pers. pronouns and most of
the others are separately written with the exception of
mo, somebody and nd, something (but only sometimes),
about which see § 25.
2) The pure formwords thus combined with verbs and
nouns (comp. § 10, 2. g.) are;
a) The subjective personal substantive pronouns of the
verb: mi- (m-, n-, n-)> h o-, thou; e-, he, she, it;
W0-, we, nye-, you, yee; ame- (Ad. a-) they; a-.
Germ, man, they; the form used for the expression
of the passive voice of other languages (s. § 40 ff.
and the Adn. App.).
b) The objective personal substantive pronouns of the
verb: -mi (-m [-n], -h), me; -o, thee; -le, him,
her (it); -wq (-o), us; -nye, you; -ame (Ad. -me),
them.
c) The possessive personal substant. pronouns of nouns
are: mi- (m-, n-, n-), my (lit. of me, comp. the
Greek forms fwv, <fov^ dvrov and the Hebrew), o-,
thy; e- his, hers, its; wo-, our, nye-, your; ame,
their, a- (their), the latter only used if a possessive
case of the plural number precedes the noun, e. g.
mantSemei asei, the kings their throne. Germ. ,,ber
Stini%t i^r S^ron", in some dialects, the throne of
the kings; comp. § 13, 3.
3) The literal form of the pronouns under a, is the
same as that under c, those under b, differ only in the
dbyGoogk
I
— 33 —
third prs. sing, and plur. and by being suffixed instead
of prefixed, Comp. again the Hebrew, e. g. the use of the
pronom. augm. -t< and ^^, ^-, together with the fall form
"0^9 ^^ and then the Ad. subjectiye form a- and objex-
tiye form -roe together with the full Gft form ame. —
Examples: mibf, I asked; mibi, my child.
oM, thou askedst; 6bi, thy child.
ebi, he asked; ^bi, his, her child.
woM, we asked; w^bi, our child.
nyebf, you asked; ny^bi, your child.
fbi they asked ; ( hi, their child.
M
But: Bimi, ask me;
ebfo, he asked thee;
ebiie, he asked him her. etc. etc.
The pronominal augment is of course put before other
init. augments and after other termin. augments. Most
init. augments are dropped after the init. pronominal aug-
ments: e. g. the fut. tense posit, ind. is: aba, will come;
maba, ooba, eeba wooba and wgaba, nyeaba, ameaba, ama-
ba; the init. augm. a, e and o in nouns and adj. give way
after a possess, pronoun, e. g. okpongo, horse; mikpongo,
okp. ekp., wokp. nyekp. amekpongo, akp. The init. liq.
augm. sometimes is dropped, sometimes remains, as: onko-
mg and okomo, thy sadness. The object, pron. augment
follows other term, augments without altering them: e. g.
kemomi, tell me! edsieole, he saves him; etaoo, besought
thee; etaooo, he seeks thee or sought thee always etc.
§ 22. 1) An intervening branch between the augmen-
talion of the root by forms and formwords and the com-
position in the process of formation of words and forms
is the reduplication (s. § 10, h.). The end and aim
of it as well as of every form of the language (and even
3
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 34 —
of the IdDguage itself) is to distinguish (to divide), but not
by adding a new form or word, but by repealing the same
word, it is a twin-formation in the organism of the language;
in the hamitie languages, as it seems, more developed and
perfect, than in the Japhetic and even the Semitic. To this
twin -form also the signification of it answers. Not a new
phase of the original notion of the root is generally indi-
cated by it, but the same repeatedly (Ihe life of the lan-
guage allows also not only the duplication, but the multi-
plication of the word, comp. forms, as: dabidabidabidabidabi !
no, no, never! ewiewiewiewie etc. bespoke repeatedly and
continually etc.).
2) The reduplication is not only used for inflectional
as well as word-forms, but is, as a combination, also a
syntactical form and not only different members of the
sentence can be reduplicated, but whole sentences (e. g.
eya eba, eya eba, eya eba, he came and went repeatedly
and continually). The following forms and their applica-
tions are the most flrequent and notable:
a) A simple root is reduplicated for the purpose of for-
ming secondary roots with a corresponding notion,
as: bobo, to squeece the bush together, when cut,
that it may burn; from bo, to ball, to squeece; susu
(comp. su), to measure, to think: sisi and sisiu (Ot.
sisi and sisiw), to deceive; titi, to scratch etc.
b) Every verb is reduplicated for the purpose of expres-
sing a frequency or a continued repetition (a
single repetition of the same act, the iterative,
see ®^Ieger« ®(^IuffeI jur Ewe-Sprac^e, ©tuttgatt
1857), is in Ga expressed by the auxiliary verb sa
(§ 28, 2. b.) of the same act or that several different
groups of people do or suffer the same thing; this
we call the frequentative mood of the verb, of which
every tense of the positive and neg. voice may occur,
dbyGoogk
— 35 —
e. g. ame^e^e nii, amenunu dai, amedSodSoi (about
the augm. i in the last case see § 19), they ate (in
different groups and situations or frequently), they
drank (different) wines, they danced; aakumokumo
ametsui le, v^ voixi i^te ^itifet nacf^einanber ah^
brcd&en (people will break their houses one by one),
root: ku, to break, subj. and obj. pluralform kumo,
iterative kumokumo.
c) Nouns and adjectiyes are formed by it from other simple
stems or roots; as: tsatsa, a country matrass made
of grass; ekpakpa (Ot. pa and papa) aclj. good; kra-
kra, adj. hot; kloklo, luckwarm etc.; sometimes the
simple and reduplicated forms of adj. aroused, but
differently, see $ 33, 3.
d) A peculiar kind of adjectiyes and adyerbs, the root of
which is sometimes not in the 69, but in an other
related language, but as far as they are adyerbially
used they often only serye to strengthen the notion
of the yerb, haying the same notion, but being pho-
netically quite different (comp. The Aku- (Yoruba-)
gramm. of Rey. S. Crowther, but especially the „in-
tcoductionary remarks to it by the late Rev. 0. E.
Vidal, M. A. Bishop of Sierra Leone); e. g. futafuta
(Ot. the same), adj. and adv. white; eye futafuta, or
eye futafutafuta, to be very very white, comp. ye, to
be white.
deAdeden, adv. (from Ot. den, hard), wa dendeden,
to be very very hard, comp. wa, to be hard.
reveve, adv. (from Ayigbe ve, to be hard) hardly,
strongly.
pep^pe and pepepepe (fr. pe, just), exactly.
falefale, adj. clean; adv. cleanly.
yeyeye, adj. and adv. unquiet, — ly (from ye, to eat,
to trouble);
3*
dbyGoogk
— 36 —
kpalekpale» a4j. and adv. bald, baldly (from kpa, to be
bald, kpale, baldness); etc. etc.
e) Vy a reduplication of the plural of a number of con-
crete nouns adjectives and adverbs may be continually
formed answering in part toftti^ adjectives with the
ending y in English and „\^^^ in German, e. g. kQ,
heap, kuikui, adj. and adv. heapy, heaply; kpo, lump,
knot; kpgikpoi, knotty, s. prov. 53; kukudsikukudsi,
adv. in short (kuku) jumps (sc. to run, to walk etc.)
etc. etc. This form is to be considered inflectional
or as a continual formation of new words.
^i) A peculiar reduplication of a more syntactical kind oc-
curs in the numbers, definite and indefinite;
aa) the definite numbers are repeated to express the same
relation as is expressed in Hebrew by the repetition
of numbers or in Engl, by the same and the par-
ticle by betwixt; e. g. ekome kome, one by one,
enyo enyo, two by two (Germ, je ein^, {e jwei, jwci
unl) jwei);
bb) by repeating a noun with the adj. or indef. numeral
fS, each, all, betwixt, the relation which in Engl,
is expressed by the words each and every; (Germ.
j[eber> jcbe, {cbc^) is indicaded, compare: mofemb,
every -body, {eberman, pi. mei K; n6fen5, every
thing; tSo fg tso every tree etc.; but with the neg.
of the verb: mokomoko, nokonoko etc., s. $ 34, 2.
g) A similar relation is expressed by the repetition of
nouns or their number indicating the price of any
thing, as: Aho enemei kp§ kpd, these things are
sold one string (cowries) each; miheame dsakpo
dsakpo, 1 bought them half a string each; but: Ahdo
neke toi ne dale enyo enyo, these sheep are sold
two dollars each, etc. It is to be observed respec-
ting the reduplication and many other forms, that the
dbyGoogk
- 3r --
language is not )ret fixed, but the formations are still
Yery rapidly going on.
$ 23. 1) In the preceding $$ we have seen the pro-
cess of formation of inclinational and word-form as far as
it is going on by the addition or augmentation of pure
forms and formwords or a reduplication of the word. We
haye now to consider this process as it is effected by th«
combination of another word of notion with the
word of which the relation is to be defined, be it
now for a momentary purpose (Inflection or Syntax) or a
fixed one (formation of words). Combinations are very fre-
quently and very variously employed in the Gfi language.
We must first divide also the combinations with notional
words into two great classes: vie: first shose combinations
in which one of the components has become a mere
form though it is or was a word of notion, as gbekSnn,
a male-child; ebabi, he will ask; hefatamo, attach-
ment etc. (In this case the formal component has generally
DO accent); and secondly combinations, in which both com-
ponents are notional words and remain such, as: Slatse,
housefather; nsonlo, seafish. To the latter class also those
combinations of which the signification of the components
can no more be assertained, must be added, especially ver-
bal compositions as: fata, fite; futu etc.
2) In cases in which compositions are neither a form
of inclination nor of words and therefore the components
separately written, they are of a syntactical nature, but are
in other respects formally the same and have the same
purpose (comp. the same ihing in the preceding §).
^) The qualifying component of a compound is either
the preposition or the apposition of the fundamental com-
ponent, as: m ants 6, king; bafe, will do (s. $ 28, 2. a.);
^kgnu, a male child etc.
dbyGoogk
- 38 —
4) There are in the GSi-language many verbs qualified
by substantives, and form together with them notionally
compounds though they formally are separated, as: ta,
to sit; ta si, lit. to sit the ground, i. e. to sit do^rn;
ta no, to sit upon (to sit the surface) etc. These be^-
come also formal compounds as soon as the verb is turned
into a noun or takes the nominal form, e. g. sitamg, down-
sitting; no tamo, lit. up silting^ the sitting upon (Germ.
ba^ 9lufji^ctt unb Slieberjt^en).
b) Besides these there are a number of double-verbs,
which are a peculiarity of this family of languages; vie.
a notional verb is qualified by another notional verb and
expresses together with it a new notion, though formally
both remain separated and are never (except irregularly)
joined into one word, e. g. he (Ot. gye), to except; ye
(Ot. di or de) to eat, to exercise, to enjoy, he noko ye,
to believe something, reg. noun: hemo kg yeli, belief^
faith (irreg, heyeli, faith; comp. heyeli, liberty) Ot. gye bi
dl, noun: gyedi; more frequently the notion of one verb
is given up and it serves as a mere formword to express
a certain relation of the other (s. above 1. and next fol-
lowing SS.) but retains still more or less its notional form
and is separated from the other component; e. g. nd noko
hd moko, lit. to take something give somebody, to give
someth. to somebody; na-fe, lit. to get to do, i. e. to have
accomplished, already done etc. The verb which in such
cases serves only to express the relation of the other
becomes by degrees also formally a relational or form -or
auxilary verb, i. e. it loses the notional forms, and at last
it becomes a mere form of which by and by even the
origin can no longer be found. Comp. mind noko mihS
moko, I gave something to somebody, mike noko b2i moko
(only one pronominal augm. left); Ad. M to take and de,
to say; but nd-ko» to be saying (pres. tense) 6d: iilfi,
dbyGoogk
— 39 —
mike; Ot. tese, periiaps originally = de-se, lit. to take to
say etc. Comp. kafe, do not do! bafe, jfafe etc.
(anmetf. Sbmit man im Deutf^en ken ttrfrntng btt
hit 3eit»5tter teptntmenten Somfirier ge*, er* [fit4mUn,
glantcn unb erlawBen], bt^, Bet*, nad|* k. auffud^en, fo
Mxhtn fie ftc^ aw^ oW nrfrrflnflli^e 3^ittt)iJrter eweifen;
i- S. na^ ». na^en, ge^, gen ^. geten, ge^en?? k. 3n
biefen ©jjrac^en ijl'« mJgli^, »eil ber entttjirflunfl^gang in
alien ®tnfen tjorliegt.)
S 24. 1) Compounds in which one of the com-
ponents has become a mere form to express the re-
lation of the other component, though its form may still
be that of a word of notion are very frequent and of nearly
all the classes mentioned in the preceding- $. under 2. 3.
4. 5. We divide them therefore into nouns and verbs.
2} Nominal compounds of this kind must again be sub-
divided into:
a) Compounds formed by preposition of the qualifying
component and in this case the fundamental compo-
nent is of so general a character that it indicates
only the relation of the qualifying one. This is espe-
cially the case with the words n6 a thing and mo
(mo, mo, m5) a person; (nyo) nQ, a man, male;
yo, a woman, female; bi, a child, young one, tse,
father, possessor etc. (hebr. ^y3), nye, mother etc.
b) Compounds formed by apposition of the qualifying
component, in this case the latter is a adjective or
a nominal apposition and the former again a noun
of a general notion, esp. again mo and nd (s. a.).
$ 26. 1) We have seen in the $S 1 1—20 that the torro$
can develop and have partly developed themselves out of
the simple radical elements of the pronouns; but we have
also seen, that the language is not only progressing and
dbyGoogk
— 40 —
augmenting but also regresfiing, weakening again and it is
impossible always to show the way, by which a form was
formed, some are even on the one hand, related to words
of notion as well as on the other to elements of form
(comp. e. g. the present augment n n and m with the first
pers. sing, of the pronoun and the word nd and M in
Adft. S 24 and S 13, 1.).
Be It now as it may, we saw that the terminations \q
and mo distinguish the personal from the impersonal
noun formed of the verb. By the two words mo (md and
mg and mO) and no a similar division is made; mo = man,
somebody (icmanb) and no == thing, something (ctiDQS); in
Adanme both are nd, pi. nihi. The pi. form of mo is
mei, people, persons; that of no nil, things. Both are
frequently combined with other words and appear some-
times as mere forms: e. g. Nyonmo, God; gbomo, man;
kramo, Mahomedan soothsayer, semo, successor, tsutsumo,
the first; lumo, prince, governor; this mo is scarcely to
be distinguished from the abovementioned impersonal
form mg; but in the pi. form the latter has moi, the for-
mer always mei. This latter is again used for other pur-
poses. In Adnm. the personal pi. form is me (comp. alfie
in Ga) and so in Ga also „mei" is used very frequently
as an (older) personal plural form even where in the sing,
mo does not appear (comp. the sequel). The mode of
affixing is different, either it is simply affixed to the sin-
gular (if this is not expressed by a singular form or affix)
as: tse> father, pi. tsemei,, father-people, fathers (Comp. in
Otyi the termuaation nom, e. g: agyanom); nye, mother,
pi. nyemei; nyemi, brother, sister (German: ®ef^»ifier),
pi. nyemimei etc., or there is a peculiar form of the sin-
gular (as mo, s. above) which gives way to the plur. form;
e. g. blofdnyo, European, pi. blofdmei; Ganyo, pi. Ga-^
mei^ Giman, -men; nanyo (ong. nannyo, comp. the
dbyGoogk
— 41 —
Ot. damfo), pL nanemei; friend (in this latter case the
e l>etween n and m is put in for euplionys sake) etc. The
termination mo or nyo, pi. mei can be afiBxed to some
noons or adv. of place, situation, time and personal
nouns formed by it (comp. the Otyi „-fo")» c. g. bie (this
place), adv. here, biemei^^or biebii, see the sequel), the
people here; most frequently to proper nouns, as: Anaii-
mei, Tetemei etc. Anah and his people etc. (comp. the
Greek: ^pt neqi AXe^txvdqov^'y j^cct nsqi Ma^tKv xai Mu'
jttw". Job. 11, 19.). About mo, mei prefixed see § 26.
A similar use is made of nd, pi. nil, thing; it is the
corresponding impersonal af&x to the personal mo,
mei; as mo is the corresponding impersonal augment
to the personal „lg''; e. g. blofond, something European;
pi. blgfonii; guono (gug = trade), ware, pi. gugnii, wares;
nyeno (nye, n. and adv. yesterday), the thing of yester-
day, pi. nyenii; tsutsuno, pi. -nii, the first (thing), sekpe-
>nd, nagbend, -nii, the last etci By this word names are
given to things, never seen before by adding it to the
noon signifying their action etc. nmSnd, something to
write with; nmMi, writing implements; na, art (of any
kind), nan6, pi. -nii; implement, instrument etc. etc. An
'other form of nii is nibii.
2) As mo and nd is used to distinguish personal and
impersonal nouns, nyo, nu and yo are used to distin-
guish the sex. Nyo is no longer separately used as a noun
but nu = man, male; yo = woman, female; nyo is the
same as nQ, but in a more general sense, as „man'* is also
nsed in English. It is added to nouns of nationality, lan-
guage, dwelling-place etc., as: Blgfonyo, European (brg in
Otyi, blgfo in 69 indicating something or somebody Euro-
pean; the Otyi termination fo is sometimes retained in 69
besides the 69-terminations); 6anyo, 69man, EnliSinyo,
Englishman; asrafonyo, soldier; pi. asrafoi wolenyo (fr. wu>
dbyGoogk
— 42 —
sea, or wo, fishing in the sea), irreg. pi wolei, fisber etc.
If there is not taken any notice of the sex, as this is ge-
nerally neglected in these languages, the common plural*
forms md or i take the place of the sing, form nyo, which
is then generis communis (iii AdL it has stUl the fonn ^nd^
which is personal and impersonal). But if the sex is to
be distinguished, nyo pi. irreg. hi is the masc and y5, pL
irreg. yei, the fern, form, Gdnyo, pi. GShf, GSunan, -men;
Gayo, pi. Gayei, GSwoman, -women; oblanyo, pi. oblab^
youth, young man; oblayo, pi. oblayei, maid, young wo-
man, etc. etc.; nyo is only used of men, not of animals,
nu, pi. hi, is used to indicate the male sex of animals too,
yo remains the same, as: okpongo horse; okpongonu, pL
-h! and okpongoyO, pi. -yei. Not only the sex of ani-
mals, but also that of trees is distinguished by these affixes;
e. g. abolobanU, a male breadleaftree, abolobayd, a female
dto. Comp. $ 48. The pL of nu, hi, is sometimes himei ;
wu, when beginning a sentence or in the vocative awn,/
husband, has the pi. wumei, awumei; nS, and, pi. Mmei,
anSmei; bi, pi. bii, child (son or daughter); binu, pi. MU,
son; biyo, pi. biyei, daughter; gbekg, pi. gbek^bii (see the
sequel) child (according to age); gbekenu, pi. -hi and
-bihi, male -child; gbekeyo, pi. -yei and -biyei, female
child etc.
3) A still more extended and diversifed use is made
of the word bi, pi. bii (weakened into mi, mii, comp. Ot.
ba ma, wa, a) child, young one (comp. Ot. ba, mma; Ayi-
gbe vi). It indicates descent, familiar and civil relation, it
is the diminutive affix and a peculiar kind of plural form
of some nouns with sing. term, augment o (s. $ 17) and
many other without sing, augment, forming as „mei** (sec
above) personal nouns of adv. and impers. nouns, etc. etc.
Comp. the Hebr. p and tun; e. g. bi, pi. bii; chUd, young
one, little one; young relation; slave; word of endearm^
dbyGoogk
— 43 —
used 1»7 elder people towards younger ones etc. nabi, grand-
child; nyemi (= njrebi), pi. nyemimei, lit. mother-child,
foil brother or sister according to the Gl-usage; brother
or sister (©cfd^wi^r); tSebi, fater-child, i. e. brother or
sister from the fathers side, half-brother, -sister (if in
contrast to this the former is used, the old form nyebi,
-bii remains); tsinabi, pi. -bii, calf; okpongobi, foal; tobi,
lamb or kid; wobi, chicken; wo, hoiiey, wobi, pi. -bii, bee;
— webii, domestics; manbii, citizens; kuse or kose (ko =
bush, se hinder part, back part), country, plantation; kose-
nyo, pi. kosebii, ^intcrwalbler; country people; Osubii,
Osu-people; Akropon-bii, Akropong-people; — tebi (fr. te,
stone), little stone (©tein^^en, ©teinlein), in the lan-
guage of children „a new tooth"; nulami, pi. -mii (from
ftwei-la-bi = high-light-child) star (s. Ot. asoroma); tSa-
^vt, pi. tsatsubii, a kind of ants; — gbek^, child, pi. gbe-
kaii; abifao, or*(gbek6-) fufoo, pi. abifabii, fufobii, suck-
ling (fufo == milk); seo, pi. sebii (different from semo, pi.
Sfimei und. 1. successor) the next following younger brother
or sister (see se irf the voc); blemabii (blema = old time,
Ot. tete), forfathers, ancients; nmenebii, the people of
to day, the present or young generation; yindbii, people
of a generation (yind); tSutsubii, the first people (s. und. 1.
tJulsumo, -mei); sebii, late people, late-comers; yibii, head-
children, fruit etc. A reduplication of bi is the adj. bibio,
pl. bibii, small, little (comp. fio, fifio). Comp. the term,
•mi for diflf. kinds of fruits.
4) A similar use is made of the words tse, pl« -mei>
father and nye, pl. -mei, mother; Besides being used of
eyery description of relationship of elder people towards
younger ones^ they are together with the forms of address
(vocative: ata, awo, s. § 13> 3.) the addresses given by
every unmarried young person to married persons of middle
age; people of higher age are called ni, grandfath^ or na.
dbyGoogk
— 44 —
grandmother. Bui as the Hebrew bV2 the words tSe and
in a less decree also nye, if the sex is to be expressly
indicated, are farther generalized and signify „ author, pos-
sessor, inhabitant^ etc. comp. mantse, town- (or- people-)
father, king; nySdsiatse, possessor of slaves; niiatSe, pos-
sessor of things, rich man; sikatse, poss. of gold; tsinat^e*
t§inaiatse, poss. or grover of cattle, toiat§e, poss. of sheep
and goals, shepherd; kplotonye, a woman raising pigs
(comp. Sienent^ater, (B6)mm^Tt\xtitx in some German dia-
lects without any ofiFence used); Osutsemei, AkropontSe-
mei etc. inhabitants of Osu, Akropong etc. these latter
words with many others of the same kind are scarcely
used in the sing, form, so that „lsemei" sometimes occurs
instead of the simple „mei" as a pluralform. The formal
character of „tse" „tsemei" is also seen by the circum-
stance, that in Otyi the termination „fo" in Ayigbe „tQ"
often take its place. Comp. also the wbrds Sientse (Ot.
damfo), sianye and slenye, friend; tSunye, a lizzard living
in rooms; nientse, dientse, pi. -mei, Adn. nitse (lit. who
is father) = self, selves, midientse, myself.
6) About the word nanyo, pi. nanemei, friend, neigh-
bour, fellow, it is only to be remarked that as „fellow** in
English it sometimes is only used to express the same
class, kind, form etc. of a person or thing indicated by the
word it defines, as the syllables „mit" in German and
cum-, com- in Latin, e. g. nanyogbomo, fellowman, Ttitf
ntenfc^ ; nanyono, the thing belonging to it, alike to it, fit-
ting it etc.
6) About words defined by one of the nouns no, si;
A6, he, mh; Me, se; yi, yiten, masei etc. see compound
verbs $ 29.
$ 26. 1) But also of compounds of which the qualif-
ying component is an apposition or rather postposition
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 45 —
and therefore suffixed, $ 24, b., some belong to this kind.
Every adjective may be used as a noun as in German and
partly in English, but if this noun is to be defined whether
it is personal or impersonal, the nouns mo and nd,
s. S 25, 1., are. prefixed, e. g. ekpakpa, good, the good
(ber obet bic obcr ba« „®viU% mokpakpa, a good person,
pi. meikpakpai; ndkpakpa, pi. niikpakpai, a good thing.
These (kinds of) compounds are less closely connected and
the plural form is therefore always expressed in both of
the components, which is not always the case with those
formed by the preposition of the qualifying component.
2) In the formation of sentences therefore appositions
whether nouns, adjectives or relative sentences expressing
these, follow the noun which they qualify, but preposi-
tions, i. e. words or sentences having the relation expres-
sed in European languages by the genitive or possessive
case, precede the word which they qualify.
3) Compounds of the kind mentioned in the first part
of this $ have the accent indicating the unity of both com-
ponents on the qualifying component or the apposition,
as: mokpakpa, ndfdn, niif6d§ianii etc. The same is the'
case with the syntactical form of them, as: kolo f6n, a
wild beast; atade fefeo, a beautiful dress; tso kpelen-
^)16, a large tree etc. Appositive adjectives have, if
there are two forms, the reduplicated form.
S 27. 1) Compound verbs of which one com-
ponent has assumed, though a notional word, a
more formal character ($ 24, 1.) are more frequent,
than the nouns of this kind and must as all verbal com-
pounds be divided into those which are inseparable and
must or can bo written together, or which are separable
and can or must be written so; the latter are again com-
binations of two verbs or of a verb and a noun.
dbyGoogk
- 46 -
3) a) Verbal inseparable compounds are generally
such that the original notion of neither component can be
exactly given, though the roots are to be found in the lan-
guage. Here we have only to mention a few forms in
virhich one of the components has decidedly a formal cha-
racter though a notional form, as: m8d§e, to send (a thing,
not a person) (mS, to set); ladse, to be lost; to lose (Ad.
la, in 69 „to hang, to fasten''); kSdse, to lie on one back
(ka, to lie); dsadSe, to straighten (dsa, to be straight);
SedSe m. k. ml, to make one's pit of the stomach to
reach, to comfort; from: ml se, the pit of the stomach
reaches, to be comforted; wadse, to harden, strengthen,
from wa, to be hard, strong etc. In these words the verb
dse, to come out, forth, away etc. seems to be added to
the root, qualifying it, for the purpose of making an in-
transitive verb transitive or a similar purpose (Comp. the
Hiphil of the Hebr. and a few examples in §. 12, 3.b. aa.),
but the form is only exceptional, the roots being generally
intransitive and transitive without alteration; ba, to come;
to make to come, let come; or other combinations are
used, see 2. and 3. of this §. A similar, but less clear
case is with a number of compound verbs of which a com-
ponent is ke, kg (perhaps only the hard form of d§c from
ge, comp. tsS, to come out, to awake etc.), as: tSake, to
change (s. tsa, v.) ; fiike, to take the meat from the bones ;
yeroke or y^rgke, to pull something to pieces; kpleke, to
descend; Srftke, to miscarry; §rake, to let something rot
(s. sa) etc.
These verbal compounds must be written together as
there is only exceptionally a form of the verb put betvnxt,
as: miladseko or milakodSe, 1 have not been lost or have
not lost; the latter form indicating that „dSe** may also
(Miginally have been a noun and object of the verb (comp.
dbyGoogk
— 47 —
dso foi, sa foi, wo foi, hie foi in the sequel), as well as
a verb.
b) To this class may be reckoned the verbfonns with
the prefix ^ka'' and the suffix „ko''. The root ka signifies
„to try", to venture (comp. the related ^ka), but prefixed
to a Terb it expresses the negative form of the impera-
tiTe and potential mood as: Kafe, do not do (so)! plur.
nyekafea, you shall not do (so)! roikafe, may I not do!
akafe, may it not be done! Comp. K^kwe nl 6fe; see, do
not do it! lit. Try to see and do it.) Rev. 22, 9.: „Opa
M^"; — and ovx and fit] in Greek. (In Adn. it is „ko",
as „kope"! in Otyi these neg. forms are formed as the neg.
forms of the indicat.; in Ayigbe such combinations are very
frequent.)
The root „ko'' has the notion of unity in Otyi and 6d
and the words ko, indef. article or pronoun, a, an (Germ,
cin, cine, ein), adv. once, only; then (cinmal, etnfi; bo^),
eko, ekome, numb, one; ekoro, adj. and adv. single; singly;
krgng, ad. and adv. simple (cinfa^), unmixed, clear;
clearly: kroftkron, clear (holy), etc, are derivatives of it,
but it is lost. Suffixed to the verb it distinguishes the
perfect tense of the negat. form of the ind. mood from
the aorist and fut. tense, as: nuf^ko, of^ko, ef^ko etc.
I have not done, thou etc. (perhaps lit. I have not once
done).
Formerly ka was separately written, now both ka and
ko are written together with the verb.
§28.. 1) Verbal separable or separated compounds
are those of which the notion of the compound is one,
but the components are separable or even always separated
(s. § 27, 1.). Most of them bdong to the class we are
speaking about, of which one of the components has assu-
med a more formal character.
dbyGoogk
— 48 —
2) Such compounds consist of two verbs, of
which the one expresses a relation of the other:
a) The verbs ba, to come and ya, to go are prefixed
to verbs to express the relation of direction or
movement to or from a place which sometimes
in English is expressed by the preposition to, some-
times not at all. Whenever a preceding verb implies
a movement to or from a place, this movement must
be expressed in the next following verb which expres-
sed the end and aim of this movement, e. g. Ed§e
Abrotsiri ebaye dsra ye bie, he came from Europe
to trade here; Wo se ko eete emS left eyaM ewe-
kumei, he will go once to his town to visit his re-
lations; comp. table II. and VII. Formerly we wrote
these verbs separately, now we write them together
for convenience sake (Comp. in Otyi the prefixes be
and ko).
b) The same verbs together with dSe, dse, to come forth,
away; to come from, out; ts6, to turn; tso, to show;
ye (neg. be), to be (somewhere); ke, n6, to take;
ha, to give, to let; na, to get; sa, to repeat (or go
on to do, comp. Hebr. Pp^) fe,.to make; to do; to
outdo etc. are connected with other veits to express
a relation of them, though they are formally separated
and retain more or less the form of notional verbs.
In European languages these relations are either ex-
pressed by forms or by (auxiliary) verbs or preposi-
tions or adverbs or not at all; e. g. Enyieo ke-yaa
6S, lit. He walks and goes 69, He walks .(over) to
GS; eta okpono no ke-ba bie, he rode over to this
place; edseo Abrotsiri ebaa, it comes from Europe;
ed§iemi ke-dse bu le mli; he drew me out of the
pit; eko ke-ba (he brought it hither, he took it
hither); etre neke dsatgu ne ke-miya, h6 is carrying
dbyGoogk
— 49 —
this load away; gbomo ne d§e Keta ke-tSd AdS
ke-ba bie, this person came from Keta through
Ada to this place. In these instances the verb „ke"
connected with formal verbs ya, ba, d§e and tSo can-
not be expressed in English; it indicates that by
walking, riding, carrying etc. the coming or going is
accomplished. Differently ke and its correlate nd
(Ot. de and fa) is employed in the following sentences:
Eke neke §ika ne womi ny5m6, or: EA5 neke §ika
ne ewomi nySmo, lit.: He took this gold paid me
a debt, he paid me a debt with this gold; mike-
hSle, I gave (it) to him. The language generally
does not connect two objects with one verb, nor is
there any form expressing different cases nor a pre-
position, therefore verbs are employed to hinder the
former and supply the latter. Oke wolo ne yahft
onyont§o, lit. Take this book go give thy master,
give this book to thy master; kanemo neke sane ne
otsomi, read this story show me, read this story to
me! Mina mite Osu ni mike minyemimei ayawie!
Could 1 go to Osu and speak with my brethren!
Enako eya, he is ndt yet going. Esa eba, he is
come again. Eda femi, he is greater than I etc.
These compound verbs can and generally must be
separated.
§ 29. 1) But the most frequent of this class of com-
pound verbs are combined with an original noun
(§27, 1.) standing to the verb in the relation of a (gram-
matical) subject or object, but now more or less only
expressing a certain relation of the verb it is combined
with. Some of these nouns have lost their notional signi-
fication and are no longer used as nouns, most are still
Qsed» but all of them retain the grammatical form and si-
4
dbyGoogk
— 50 —
tuation as nouns; we therefore write them separately. Tlie
most common are: Mli, connected with an other doud,
the termination n (s. § 20, l.)> inside, interior; he, out-
side, bod;yself; hewo, outside; nO (side), masei, side,
nearness; no, surface, cover; si (and sisi), the lower
part, ground; na, mouth, brim, end; hie, face; se, back;
te or ten (= te mli) middle; yi, head; yiten, crown of
the head; tsui heart; musu, belly, de, hand etc. (Comp.
Riis Otyi Gram. § 134 — 141 and the use of the Hebrew
words: ^D, T, D^3D, etc., also the Ayigbe and Aku [Yoruba]
language). The relation of the verb expressed by these
words is either its transitiveness or intransitiveness (for
which also some forms and form -verbs are used see the
preceding §§) or its locality and from this the relation of
time manner, cause etc.
2) The formal noun is connected with the verb as its
grammatical subject and precedes it: in this case the no-
minal form of the compound, which ought to be written
together retains the same order, the verb becoming the
fundamental, the gram, subject the qualifying word, as:
Mli hi, to be kind, mimli hi, I am kind, noun: mlihile,
kindness; he wa, to be strong, hewale, strength; na no,
to be dainty; nanomO, daintiness; hie kd, to be desirous,
hlekS, desire, lust; yi wa, to be hard (-headed), yiwale,
hardness; tsui sii, to be short of breath, tsuisu, fainting;
musun ts6, to yearn (^n, anXayxi^i^eiv), musuntsS, year-
ning etc.
3) The formal noun is connected with the verb as its
grammatical object and follows after it: in this case
the nominal form of the compound assumes the inverted
order, the object becoming the qualifying word, so that
such compounds have frequently the same form as those
mentioned ynder 2., and the difference if necessary must
be expressed by a rdational sentence, e. g. miyiwale nl
d by Google
— 51 -
awami yi (see wa yi in the sequel), the hardness which
I suffered (by some body) and miyiwale, my (own) hard-
ness. Comp. ba mli, to be fulfilled, noun: mliba, fulfill-
ment; fata he, to join, hefatamo, joining; ta no, to sit
upon, pi. tra no; notamo, notramo, sitting upon; ta §i, to
sit down, pi. tra si; Sitamo, sitramo, downsitting; pi. Mta-
rooi, downsittings of one, Sitramoi, — of many; gba na,
to trouble, nagbamo, trouble; egba mina, he troubled me;
kpata h!e, to destroy; mikpata ehle, I destroyed it; but
compare: mihle kpata, I perished, noun of both: hiekpata-
mo, perishing, destruction; t§i se, to push; setSimo, pu-
shing; ye ten, to be in the midst (of ye no noun is for-
med); na tSui, to take a heart, courage, tSuina, courage
etc. etc.
4) Sometimes the grammat. subject and object is wan-
ted, sometimes two of these words are combined, to ex-
press the relation, e. g. mihe wa mihe, I have pain (my
body is hard to my body); but mihe wa, I am strong and
mihe wami, I am recovered; mihie kS eno, my face relies
on his surface, I trust in him; mind mihle mifd eno, I
take my face cast (it) on him, I hope in him, to him;
etc. or: miba mihe si, I bring myself down, humble my-
self (here as often „he** expresses the reflexive relation of
the verb).
5) Remarkable are those compounds, in which the
grammatical object has no direct relation to the logical or
real object, but this latter is put in a direct relation to
the [verb and the grammatical object v expresses the same
relation as the ablative case of the Latin and accusative
absolute or sometimes the dative case of the Greek lan-
guage, e. g. da Si (from the Otyi: da ase, orig. to lie
down) to thank, midale Si, I thank him; wa m. k. yl, to
be hard to somebody with the head or with respect to
the bead; to persecute him; ewale yi, he persecuted him,
4*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
- 52 -
not: ewa eyi (Comp. eyUe kplebii, he flogged him with
a scourge; ekpale fai, he begged him; elfami no, he
struck me with something; am^tfiale tei, they cast stones
at him etc.).
6) In the inverted form of speech the object,
grammatical or logical, may for emphasis* sake precede
the subject and verb (predicate), but can never stand be-
twixt them and it is always to be considered that the
object should be repeated as is sometimes done, the pre-
ceding object standing absolutely; e. g, mihe eta, dsee
mokroko he, me he touched and not another.
7) To this kind of verbal compounds are also to be
added a number of verbs connected with a word of no-
tion, very probably a noun, but it may be also a verb, the
original signification of which can no longer be ascertained,
as it now only serves to modify the verb (comp. a similar
form § 27, 2. a.): e. g. dso foi, to ran, hie foi, sa foi,
the same; wo foi, to run and wo m. k. foi, to make some-
body to run; foi seems to have the orig. notion of run-
ning, as the verbs dso, hie, sa, wo are of a very general
notion; nouns: foidse (irreg.) foihie (?), foisa, foiwo; tsi
la (tsi = to move, ta = to touch?), to mention, tsi n. k.
tS, to mention something; bu m. k. fo, to condemn; bu-
bem, to justify; bu mei ateh, to judge etc.; here atu, to
receive with joy (atu is exclamation of children embracing
somebody) dse fu, to stink (fu = bad smell); dse kpo,
to come out, kpodse, forthcoming etc. Comp. also the
adverbs § 35, 2.
§ 30. 1) We have now to consider the rest of the
notional compounds, viz. those of which both compo-
nents are notional words and remain such (see
§ 23, 1.); i. e. though the qualifying component serves
to define a certain relation or modification of the funda-
dbyGoogk
— 53 —
mental component, it does so only by its notion added
to the notion of the other and forming one new no-
tion with it, and by its place in the sentence; for as
I have already remarked it is the same law of the language
by which Init. and term, augments, prefixes and suffixes,
formwords, formal nouns and verbs and notional words are
joined to a word to define it and become one word or
at least one notion with it or by which word is joined to
word and sentences are formed, nay even the combination
of sounds belongs as well to the formation of sentences
as to that of words being often different at the beginning
or at the end of sentences (Compare the tables).
2) As stated in § 23 we have to consider compounds
of nouns with nouns, and of verbs with verbs, of nouns
with adjectives and of verbs with nouns (and adverbs, see
these), these are either separately written or connected
and serve either to form inclinational — or word -forms
or forms (members, parts) of sentences.
3) Nouns are combined with nouns by putting the
qualifying component before the fundamental compo-
nent the latter generally having the uniting accent: by
this combination is expressed the relation of the genitive
or possessive case of European languages, the „ status con-
structus^ of the Hebrew. If this combination is very close
and common, we write both components together (formal
compounds), if less close and common, we separate them,
so that only the notion becomes one; a wordform is for-
med by the former, a form of part of a sentence by the
latter; in this case one or both of the components may
be sentences, their place and relation remains the same*
Comp. Solemotsu, house of prayer, church, wont§u, temple
of an idol, fetish-house; bay elg, leaf-eater, a kind of ante*
lope; sosumotso, measure -stick; tunte, gun -ball etc. or;
gbdi^bii anntsumQy children's work; mitse we, my father'^
dbyGoogk
— 54 -
house, wonyontSomei awekamei, the families of our masters
etc. or: Moni dSi wQ-NyoAmo le suomo> the loye of
him who is our God; Njronmo nii ni efe, the things God
has done, what God has done; heni midSe le mei n\ mfle,
lit. Whom I knew of where 1 came from; etc.
In these latter cases of compound sentences ihe words
mo, nd, pi. mei, nii (s. § 25), and the similarly used words
be (time) he (place) bo (manner) connected with a relatiye
sentence take the place of one or both of the components.
About the forms: moni, meini; noni nini or niini, heni,.
beni, boni, dani, koni s. § 34 f., § 50 and the Vocabulary.
4) But nouns are also combined with nouns and espe-
cially with adjectives by placing the qualifying component
behind the fundamental one. This we called apposition
or postposition. In this case the qualifying component has
the accent. These combinations are less close than those
under 3. The relation expressed by this combination is
the same which is expressed by the adjective, if used ap-
positively and not predicatively and by other appositions
(nouns and appositive sentences) in other languages. Their
regular place in G9 is behind the word or sentence they
qualify; comp. Gbomo kp^kpa, a good person; gbekS
bibio, a little child; yo okuUfo^ a woman a widow;
with a little modification of the signification: okuldfoyo,
a widow woman; comp. § 25, 2. about the formal noun
„yo"; gbomo ohi^fo, a man a poor one (ein SKattn^ ein
^rmer), a poor man, the language having no abject, for
Hpoor^; gbek§ abif^o, gbek^ fuf(io, a suckling, gbomo
Adesa, a human person, being; abifao, fufoo having al-
ready the notion of „suckUng'' and adesS of „ human being''
and „gbek6**, ^gbomo"" only in general „younger person",
^person", wherefore gbekS can be used of old men com*
pared with elder ones and gbomo of God, angels, men
on the one and animals etc. on ihe other band as soon
dbyGoogk
— 55 —
as personality is attributed to them, comp. the init. aagm.
„o'' in Otyi and GS and the termination „mo^ in GS.
Proper names as most indiriduating take generally the
place of the adjective and the Accent, as: Nyontso NyoA-
mo, NyontsQ Jesii, mantSe Ddwid etc. Moni d§i wo-
nyoDtso Nyonm6 le; but if the former should be more
individuating and have the emphasis, it must be postponed
in the form of an adjective sentence, cut short, as : Nyon-
mo, wony6ntsQ le, or full, Nyonmo moni d§i wony6ntSQ
le, Dav^id, mantS^ le, or Da^id nl dsi mant§4 le etc.
Of this kind of compounds only a few are so closely
united thai they may be written together, comp. § 25 and
¥^ords as sSnekpSkpa, good palawer, gospel, frequently
shortened into saneSkpa, so:^ gbomo^kpa, a good person,
or: a common, real man, lele^kpa, a common vessel (not
a steamer) etc. though they may also be separately written
and have both the pi. form, as: sSdsi akpai etc.
§ 31. 1) Verbal compounds in which both
components retain their notional character we call all
those combinations of which the verb is the centre, be
tbey closely and formally united and written together and
only into one common notion (comp. § 27 — 29). We gel
three different kinds, viz:
a) verbs combined with verbs to indicate different rela-
tions or to form quite new words and notions;
b) verbs combined with their subjects to express the
subjective relation of a predicate or a sentence^ and
c) verbs combined with their objects, to indicate the
objective relation of a predicate or sentence.
By this process before mentioned all the words and
forms of inclination, words, and sentences are originally
formed, except a part of the adverbs and interjections; but
also conjunctions included (s. § 35, 1 — 5.)*
dbyGoogk
— 56 ~
2) The combination of verbs with verbs without
conjunctions and without forming two sentences is a fea-
ture which seems now pecuUar to the family of languages
the GS belongs to, but may originally have been the case
in other languages too.
About those combinations, in which one of the verbs
only serves as an auxiliary or relational verb, and which
are the most common, see § 27 — 29; here only too other
kinds are to be mentioned, viz. a, those compounds of
which the signification and therefore also the relation of
the components separated can no longer be traced and we
have therefore no other place for them, and b, those of
which both components are not only separated and retain
their notion, if standing alone, but it also can not be shown>
that one and which of both serves to define the re-
lation of the other, though they form in the combination
one notion,
a) Under the class of verbal compounds of which the
original notion of both components and their mutual
relation can no longer be traced, and which must
therefore simply be considered as secondary roots,
we count all those verbs of two or more syllables
each of which could formally be a root by itself and
none of [which can now be considered as a mere
form, as: file, to perish; to spoil; kite, v. defective,
only used in the imp. and pot. mood, e. g. kite, go!
go on! (perhaps = ke-te, see ke in § 28, 2. b.);
^ b5te, to enter; — in these cases the termination „te**
which has no accent, may be only a hardened form
instead of ne, le, which are forms, comp. the old
pronunciation of fene, kane in writings of the last
century and in the mouth of old people (also by
Hanson in his „ Gospels of* St. Matth, and John'O
fende, kande etc. farther: butUi to overturn; futUi
dbyGoogk
— 67 —
to mix, f^ta, to join; kp^ta, to reconcile, kp^te» to
cleave, kpiti, to pick (s. titi), kpcJto, to rot, to mix
as dough etc.; lutu, to be disturbed, muddy (of water);
site, to pull (comp. §a, the same) ; etc. These forms
are either to be considered as original redupUcations,
in which one of the consonants changed and the
vowel remained the same (as is very probably the
case with the Hebrew perfect form as it appears in
the Lexicon, so that htop would be formed by a par-
tial reduplication of the root i:op,^Dp, h\Dp) or the
process of their formation was originally the same as
that described in. $ 12, 2. b., the inserted consonant
(r, 1) hardening into t and the short vowel becoming
the accented one, as: bu, blu, biilu, butu; kpa, kpra,
kp^ra, kp^ta; both of these formations are related to
each other and of both single instances can be traced.
A similar formation took place with verbs like piW,
to wound (from pla, Ot. pra), loko, to go round
(comp. words as: logoligi, dokodiki, kosonkosd; afu-
tufata etc.); in words as: Ula, to Hnger, dida, to
waver, to shake, hoso and woso, to shake (as a bell)
etc. the original reduplication is sUll visible. Still
as we have seen in § 27, 2. a., the possibility of
combining two verbs into one and as the form of
these verbs indicates two verbs combinedj we place
them among the compound verb,
b) Of quite a different kind are those double verbs
which though forming one notion not only are se^
parate, each having its own form and relation, but
neither serving as a mere form as is the case with
those mentioned § 28. Also here we have to distin-
guish two different applications of this combination,
viz. two verbs are continually combined to express
a fixed notion, as: he noko ye, to believe someth..
dbyGoogk
— 58 —
M noko M in. k. to give someth. to somebody,
dSadse noko tsd m. k. to explain something to some-
body etc. (the t^o latter combinations are sometimes
weakened, so that one of the components becomes
formal, therefore they are mentioned § 28, sometimes
they appear both as full notional verbs); or two verbs
with their subjects and objects are simply joined to-
gether without a conjunction but only for a passing
purpose, still expressing one notion and forming one
compound sentence, as: £ba mind ekemi, he came
to me told me^ mitao^makwe, I will seek (and) see;
etc. The reason of such forms is that there are nei-
ther participles to connect such verbs in one sentence,
as e. g. he came to mft- saying, nor are the con-
junctions so frequently used as in other languages
and even those used bear strong marks of having
been originally verbs and short sentences, now used
as conjunctions (compare the conj. ke § 28; ni, hi,
ake, edsake, etsoake» ef%ke» akeSi, koni etc. §35,4.
§ 50, 51.
§ 32. The combination of verbs with their sub-
jects is in general the same as in other languages only
more close, as we find this especially in old languages
(comp. the Hebrew, Greek, Latin), it expresses the rela-
tion of the verb to the subject. As we have already seen
that the relation expressed by the casual forms of other
languages is not so much expressed by a form, as by the
place of the noun and the accent, so we find it also here.
The subject (subjective or nominative case) is placed im-
mediately before its verb and closely connected with it,
wherefore we write it also together with it, if it is a pro- ^
noun. Every word or accessory sentence connected with
the subject therefore must be placed before the verb and
dbyGoogk
— 69 —
combined iiirith the subject either as preposition (possessive
or gdritiye case) or apposition in the form of an a^jectiye
or an adjective noun or sentence and should the object
or part of it be put in adrance for emphasis sake, it must
be done in the form of an abridged sentence or absolute
objective case; and if not all that belongs to the subject
caa be inserted before the verb, a new sentence roust be
began and the verb repeated; e. g. miba, eba, woba, aba;
with emphasis mi le miba, I (not another) came; le le
eba; amenon ameba, even they came; gbek6 le yaa, the
child goes; gbek^ t§e le mli fu, the child's father is angry
(lit. the child's fathers inside is swollen) ; moni dsi maAtse
dien!§e bofo le te, he who is the king's own messenger
went; dse koloi keke, si gbomei dientSe amehdo ye cl§a
k UQ, Ut. (they are) not cattle only but men even they
sell on (being in) the market place. Gbekebii le, nyekafea^
ame noko, §i hi keke woke-ana! (Respecting) the children
do them nothing, for men only we have to do with! —
The vocative case, or the form of the address, the 2 pers.,
stands in the same relation to the imperat. mood of the
verb, as the nominative to the indicative; only sometimes
the verb, mostly the subj. is left out, as: Ata! (sc. bo toil)
Father! (sc. hear!) or: Feme! (sc. bo, feme), do (thou
this)! If there are two or more subjects combined with
one verb, they are generally connected by the word „ke",
also originally a verb, but now having lost its notion (to
take, see § 28) only used to connect words especially
nouiis of the same relation (e. g. subjects, objects, pos-
sessive words etc.), but never sentences which are always
connected with ^ni" (Comp. ni = ke and na = ni in Otyi);
e. g. Anan ke Mensa ba mind, A. and M. came to me.
In such cases the word preceding ke, if a pronoun, has
the subjective form (s. § 21, 2. a. b.), that following
it the objective form, as: mikele te Add, 1 with him
dbyGoogk
— 60 —
went to AdS; wherefore both have to be connected with
„ke" which here plainly shows its verbal character. If the
independent form of the pfonoun is used (comp. § 34), the
subjective verbform of it must be repeated, as: Mike bo,
wote Ada, I and thou, we went to AdS; this is also the
case if for emphasis' sake the subject i9put absolutely, as:
Neke gbomei ne, amefeko nakai; (as for) these men, they
have not done so; in this case the absolute subject is to
be considered as an abridged sentence and part of the
object or the whole may be placed betwixt it and the pro-
noun representing it, e. g. Neke gbomei ne, dane ame-
feo neke, These man, always they do so.
§ 33. 1) A similar combination connects the
verb with its object, only the latter is placed after
the verb, and all that belongs to the object is again pre-
poned. or postponed to it, so that by these definitions of
the object, if preponed to it, it may be considerably se-
parated from its verb. But the relation to the object is
far more variegated than that to the subject 1 , by the
different relations expressed by the object and 2, by the
difference of the verbs which either want an object or not,
being transitive or intransitive. The GS language in general
has retained more words in a direct objective relation, than
the European languages besides this most intrans. verbs
are also transitive; the want of casual forms, adverbs and
prepositions may be a reason for it or rather a consequence
of it; e. g. ba, to come, is also used trans, to let come,
to produce; esp. the infin. form often becomes the object
of a verb intrans., e. g. hi yeli, good to eat, fd femo, stop
to do (see the double verbs 31, 2. b. partly serving the
same purpose); and every intransitive verb may have a
direct object though not necessarily, e. g. he ye hela ko,
to be sick (of) a sickness, mihe mlye hela fdn, lit. my
dbyGoogk
— 61 —
body is ailing (under) a bad sickness. Or it may be ex-
pressed thus : every part of a sentence (conjunctions excep-
ted) not standing in the relation of the subject to the verb
must stand to it in the relation of the object, there being
neither different forms for the dative nor the ablative nor
the instrumental nor locative cases nor prepositions serving
this purpose; and if therefore there is more than one ob-
ject in a sentence, auxiliary or relative verbs are generally
provided for them. We have therefore to distinguish the
following objects, 1) the passive (personal or impersonal
europ. lang. accus. or obj. case), 2) the receptive (dative
case), 3) the instrumental (lat. ablat.), 4) resultive,
5) the obj. of place, 6) the object of time, 7) the obj.
of manner. We might add the nominative object for cases
in which the object contains the predicate and the verb is
only a copula, but the language treats the predicates for-
mally just as a resultive or one of the other objects. About
the ^^b dsi, neg. dsee, to be (something) see the seq. 3.
Sdnetimes the definition of the verb will require some or
most of these ol^ects.
2) The objective combination of the verb is effected
in the following manner:
If a verb has only one object of any kind mentioned,
it is followed by it, as: Gbomo tsuo nii, man works
(things, comp. niitsumo, work); esumoo Nyonmo, he
loves God. „Nme kome fiteo nmei fe, pr. 5, one nut
spoils all the nuts/' Etomi, lit. it tires me, 1 am tired etc.
— EhSle, he gave him, sc. something; eno sika ehSle, ekg
Sika hfile* Ht he took gold he gave him, he gave him gold
(pass, and receptive object connected). If the recept. obj.
is only a objective pronominal form, the auxiliary „nd, k^*'
may be omitted, as : Eh^e Sika, as in English without the
prep, to, he gave him gold; if one of the two objects is
ommitted, because known, the auxiliary may still be used,
dbyGoogk
— 62 —
as: Eke sika hfi, he gave gold (to the person mentioned),
or: eke-hale, he gave (it) to him. Efo enyemi, he weeps
(for) his brother, or: efo ehfi enyemi, he weeps for his
brother; etsd le, he showed (it to) him, he taught him;
edsadse Nyonmo wiemo et§6 gbekgbii, he taught the chil-
dren the word of God (lit. he explained the word of God
showing the children). — Etfa te, he cast a stone; etfa
moko te, he cast someb. with a stone, or eke te tfa
m. k.; ehe abolo dSakpo, he bought bread for one far-
thing, or end dsakpo ehe abolo; with a recept/ obj* ehe
abolo dSakpo ehSmi, he bought one farthirig^sworth bread
for me. Tsofatse enuu tSofS ehas helam^* pr, 6, a phy-
sician does not drink medicine for the sick. — £t§d obla-
nyo, he became a youth. EdSfird feo edSurd" pr. 276,
benefit produces benefit. „Ka fog loflo", a crab does not
beget a bird. „Alomte efoA miau bo^^ pr. 1 , a cat will
not cease miau crying (miaQ standing in the possessive
relation to bO); ele kanemo, he knows to read (roddkig),
ele wolo kanemo, he knows to read a book (book-readiil|);
but compare: Eny6 ndf^no efe, lit. he is aJBe. every thing
he does, i. e. to do every thing (comp. § 31, 2. b.). Ekpe
ablogw^ ehSmi, he made a chair for me. End Sika dale
edfe efe ga ehS enyonl§o biyo ayemforo le, he made a
ring of four dollars worth gold for his master's doughter
who is bride. — Eba Osu, he came (to) Osu ; ameke d§a-
t§ui te Akropong ameke-yahfi osofoi le, they went to Afcro-
pong with loads for ihe missionaries. Eba mli, lit. it came
inside, i. e. it is fulfilled (comp. § 29), eba t§u le nili, he
came in- (side of) the room, also: eba t§u l^n; eba mSn,
he came into- town; eta mihe, he touches my outside, he
touches me etc In all these cases the original nouns mli,
n; he, no, nd, hewo, na as enumerated Jn § 29 are gram-
matically to be considered as the original object of place
(also serving as obj. of time, manner, and even the passive
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 63 —
and all other objects) and the iivords connected with them
as standing in the possessive (or appositive) relation to it;
the same is the case with adverbs, being also originally
nouns, as : ete nwei, he went up (lit. to or towards heaven),
eba sisi, he came down; eye se, he is behind; but etSuo
nii ye tsu le se, he works (things being) behind the house
etc. — Eba nye, he came yesterday; ehSmi nmene,
he gave (it to) me to day; eete wo, he will go to mor-
row; ehe mlye afi kome, he is (or has been) sick one
year; enyle nyonnyon te, he walked the whole night;
efeo nakai dd, he does so always. While objects of
place, if connected with other objects, generally require
one of the auxiliary verbs: ba, ya or ye, objects of time
are generally added Mithout any and frequently put before
the sabject. — Obj. of manner are mostly expressed by
nouns having become adverbs, as: Eba mra; he quickly
came; efe nakai, he did so etc. to which may be added
obj. of frequency etc. as: eba sii enyo, he came twice;
kanemo kpli ekpa to i ete, count six strings (cowries) three
times etc.
As already mentioned one or more objects may for
emphasis' sake be put in advance, as: Dane ekemi nakai,
always he told me so etc.
3) By the auxiliary verb ye, irreg.; neg. be, to be,
to exist, jt(^ r>ni)(i\Un, to be somewhere, to have; adjec-
tives, adverbs and nouns containing the predicate are joined
to the subject and it might be called a copula, but its
variegated use shows, that the language treats it as another
verb, compare: Eye, he exists, eye mli, eyen, it is true
(lit. it is inside); eye nakai, it is so; eye feo, it is beau-
tiful, eye hiegble, or efe hfegble, it is a shame, shameful;
e^e sika, he has gold; eben, it is not so; ebe feo, it is
not nice; ebe noko, he has nothing etc. If the adjective
has two forms, a simple and a reduplicated one, the simple
dbyGoogk
— 64 —
one is pre di call vely, the reduplicated one appositively
used, as: Gbomo fefeo, a beautiful person; gbomo ye
feo, the person is beautiful. Similar is the case with the
auxiliary verb „dsi", neg. irreg. „dsee", to be (something) ;
(in Otyi ye = to make, to be, in Adng. pe, neg. pi, to
make, to be); as: midsi otsulo, 1 am thy servant, amedsi
gbomei komei ni misumoo, they are some people which I
love etc. But still here are two irregularities to be obser-
ved, which show the formal character of the verb, first the
predicate takes very frequently not the place of the object,
but that of the subject and the subject takes the place and
form of the object: gbomo dsimi, I am a man; minye-
mi dsile, he is my brother (sometimes le dsi minyemi,
edsi minyemi) ; secondly it is weakened into „ni" and ,,n",
as: Namo dsi? or: Namo ni? or: Namon? who is (it)?
Midsi; or mini; or min, it is I. The neg. form (the
only one, it has) dsee, is differently used, either as for-
mal verb as: edseemi, edseeo (and edsee bo), edseele,
edSee gbomo; it is not I; — thou; — he; he is not a
man, i. e. a monster, a brute (comp. Germ. „Unmenf(f>"),
or as a mere form or form word = no, not, and then con-
nected with the posit, form, dsee mi dsi, dsee bo d§i, dsee
le dsi, dsee gbomo dsile, dsee gbomo ni, dsee gbomoA.
By this formverb any part of a sentence can be negationed,
except the verb, if not in its nominal form, as : Dsee gbo-
mei blo5 neke, si koloi, not men cry so, but beasts; dsee
nakai afeo, not so it is done; dsee siiomo ameke amesu-
moole, Si amenyomowo keke faa kwra, lit. it is not the
service they said they will not serve him, but only their
wages are not enough at all.
The infinit. pronominal form »a** cannot be used with
dsi and scarcely with ye.
Both verbs dsi and ye are defective dsi having only
this one form and ye only yo (= yeo) besides, for other
dbyGoogk
— 65 —
rdatioiMy especialljf the fofure tense, fe, to do, to beeome;
\i6, to turn, become etc. are used for the former, e. g.
GbekS ne afe (or atSo) na, this child will be a man; and
hi, to remain, ha, ^a etc. for (he latter, e. g. ebahl dSei>
he will be (remain) there, eye d§ei, he was there, eyo
dsei, he is there etc.
By these relations and combuiations of the verb with
its subject and object every sentence however complicated
and variegated is connected into one whole having its centre
in the verb.
§ 34. 1) Hitherto we have spoken of the formation
of words, forms and consequently sentences only as far as
notional v¥ords and forms and formwords directly connected
with theas are concerned. But we find the same process
of formation also in pure formwords, ^as far as their
limited number, the weak elements they are formed of and
their short forms will allow. We have seen that the roots
of all pure forms and formwords are a few of the p^so-
nal pronouns used at the same time as augments of verbs
and nouns: They are the liquid augment: ft n m (I);
0 (thou); e (he, she it), a (they), perhaps o, wo (we);
the forms nye, you, and especially ame, they are already
secondary. A formation of the liquid augment is, mi, I;
of 0, bo (Ad. mo) thou; of e, le, he, she, it; him, her,
it; the (definite article. Ad. q), alio used in GS at the end
of sentences as well as words to express their definite re-
lation. Ad. ng (comp. the same use, though not so exten-
sive of the Greek article to); — farther ne, ene, demonstr.
pron« this; the reduplication lele or le le, dehionstr. pron.
even the same. Less plain is the origin of no, (hat; na*,
nS? m$? inter, pronouns, what? n), rel. pron. who, which;
comp. interrog.' pron. meni, what? All the rest of the
pronouns are either original nouns or adjectives or com-
Zimmermann, Akra-Gramm. 5
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 66 —
binations with such. Pare pronouns we therefore have
only the following:
Personal pronouns:
Radical pers. pron. Independent forms,
ft- n- m- (mi-) I-; mine. mi, I.
o- thou; thine. bo, thou,
e- he, sh^, it; his etc. le, he, she (it),
wo, 0 we; ours. wo, we.
(nye) you; yours. nye, you.
a (ame) they; theirs. (ame) they.
Objective form:
— mi (m*, n*, n') me.
— o, thee.
— le, him, her (it).
— 0, -WQ, us.
— nye, you.
— (ame) them.
The possessive pronominal augments are the same as the
pronominal subj«5tive verbal augments and therefore initial
(in the place of the possessive or preponed qualifying com-
ponent of the compounds, not in that of the adjective).
Demonstrat. subst. pron.: Ene, this; no, that (lele, the
same).
Demonstr. adj. pronouns: le, the def. article); ne, this,
Interrogat. subst. prop, me', meni (= me dsi, what is
it?), ne? what?
Relative pronoun: n), who, which.
2) But here also notional words are used to supply
the want partly beconnng formwords and being used as
pronouns either alone or in combination with pure pro-
nouns. These are especially the already mentioned words:,
mo, pi. mei, a man; person, somebody (comp. Germ, mem,
jemanb; niemanb); nd, pi. nii, thing, something (etioaf);
dbyGoogk
— 67 —
We (old noun), here; dSei, dSemei (old. collective noun),
there; he, place (\ritbout pi. form), be, time; bo manner;
ko (s, § 27, 2. b.) one, a, an (indef. art.), fS, n. the whole
(®efainmt^cit Hebr. h)D)y all, every; te, middle (?); nakai,
neke, orig. noun, such, so; and some others.
By these or combinations with them all the rest of the
pronouns are supplied. The plur. of mo; mei, me, me,
is used to form the pronoun ame» they (comp. the Adn.);
mo and nd and their pi forms are combined with ene>
m, and serve for the demonstrat. substantive and some-
times also adjective pronoun, if persons and things are to
be distinguished, as: mone (somet. mene), pi. menemei,
this (person); none, pi. nii ne or niine, this (thing); na-
kai — le, dem. pr. such; peke — ne, dem. pr. such, even
this, of which nakai and neke precede and le and ne suc-
ceed the noun they define or demonstrate, as: Nakai gbo-
mo le, such a man; neke gbomo ne, this same man, even
this man (but compare „ gbomo neke'S a certain man [etn
®eTDiffer]); the demonstr. subst. pronoun n^'is strengthe^d
into non (perhaps = no d§i, s. 33, 3.) and used adjective-
ly even the same, the very same, as: nd noA, the very
same thing, nakai gbomo le noil, even the very same man.
Ble, here, d§ei, dsemei, there are used as adverbial pro^-
nouns of place; biane, immediately; agbene, now; — of
time (compare the adv. nmene, nmengme, nmenenmene,
to day, and others); nakai, neke, so; — of manner. All
these can again be strengthened by ne, le» non, as: hie
ne> just here, d§ei noii> even there, nakai noil, ev^n so;
neke ne (just), so; or combined with nouns, as: biegbe,
dSeigbe, nakaigbe> this way, hither; thither; thus etc.
By mo and the interog. pron. n6 is formed nuamo"?
who; pi. namei? But as soon as a definite noun is com-
bined with it, mo is superfluous, as: NS gbomo? or MS
gbomo? "What man? N€gbe (sometimes nfgbe)? What
/
Digitized by VjOOQIC
~ 68 —
way, where, whither? But with respect to time and man-
ner te and te-t6n, the former at the beginning, the latter
at the end of the interrog. sentence is used, as: M6 be,
mllgbt (ng be, n6 gbl) and te beni, te gbl nl — ? what
time? what day? When? Te t6n? flow? Te afe ten?
How shall it be made or done? often simply for how?
Te obake ten? How wilt thou say? etc.
To the relative pronoun „ni^ also mo, n5, he, be,
bo is preponed to define it or use it substantively, as:
moni, he who, the person who, noni, the thing which,
what, gbomo le, moni, the man who, a little stronger than
„gbomo nl^ and especially used if the article le follows
a noun directly; but such relative sentences have „le" ge-
nerally at the end, as: Gbomo ni ba nye le, the man
who came yesterday; heni, where; beni, when; boni, how,
Comp. also dl, dSni, before, hewo nl therefore, koni,
that etc. among the conjunctions.
Of indefinite pronouns of which none is a pure
pfbnoun, the Allowing are to be mentioned: ko, indef. adj.
pronoun or indef. article, a, an; moko, pi. meikomei, some-
body; people; noko, pi. nokomei and niikomei, something;
heko, somewhere; beko, somewhen, once; gbiko, th. s.;
but mokomoko, nokonoko, hekoheko, gbikogbiko are only
used with the neg. voice of the verb they belong to and
must then be given by, not any body, — thing, nowhere,
never. Comp. also ekoii, once more, again, with the neg.
voice dOn, never again, not again. F6 or fia (old pia)
all, every is used as shown in § 22 with the redupUcation
of the word it belongs to, if in the sing., so also here:
Mof^mo or mofiamo, pi. mei fd, — fia, every body, all
(men); ndf^no, pi. nii fg, everything; het§he, everywhere;
befgbe, always, at any time; bofSbo, anyhow. See the
table N. IV. and Y.
dbyGoogk
— 69 —
§ 39. 1) Yfe have now left four classes o{ words, the
formation and combination of which we have only occasio-*
nally mentioned.
They are the adverbs, numerals, conjunctions
and interjections. Some of the adverbs and interjec-*
tions excepted, these all, though formwords, belong accor-
ding to the process of .their formation and form as well
a% their combination to the classes of notional words al-
ready mentioned, but their formal character is partly so
much developed that we cannot join them to those, as we
M with the verbs and nouns serving as pre- and post-
positions.
2) The adverbs are either original and still used nouns,
or adjectives or natural sounds imitated; they have no pe-
culiar form of their own and take the place of the ob-
ject: as: Eba mra, became quickly; ewie deAdedeA,
bespeaks hard; efe yeyeye, he is unquiet; enyle ihfl
(the § can be lengthened at pleasure), he walked very
long;^ edso foi yered^d^d^ . . . (lengthenend at pleasure)
he rans (^o)>^op^i))>^o)>^o!|p); eSa foi kukud§ikukud§i
it rans in a gallop etc.
3) The numerals are formed from one to «ix like
adjectives, from seven to ten like nouns, but take as
cardinal numerals the place of adjectives, e. g. Gbomei
ekpa, — nyonma, six men, ten men; ohd, hundred and
akp^, thousand, are nominal forms; they all can have the
plural form i, and are joined together by „ke**, as:
Akp6 ke ohai kpanyo ke liyonmai enumg kg ekpa === 1856.
There is no form for the ordinal numbers which must
therefore be expressed by circumscription, as: Klenklenmo,
— nd, the first, moni or noni dsi enyo, ete, he who is
or what is the second, third etc. Compare also the al-
ready mentioned forms and combinations enyo enyo, by
two, ete ete, by three etc. § 22 and Sii enyo, sii ete etc.
dbyGoogk
— 70 —
and toi enyo^ toi ete twice, trice, § 33. The indefinite
numerals are either nouns or indef. pronouns, adjectires
or adverbs and are treated as such.
4) More difficultly to be defined is the process of the
formation and combination and therefore also the place of
the conjunctions. They connect two or more sentences
into one compound sentence and express the relation of
them, so that the one sentence becomes a part of t%e
other or both have a common central verb or both hare
the same relation. As such they have either the form and
character of auxiliary verbs and are derived from them as,
e. g. „ke" connecting two objects or subjects or de-
finitions of such into one, or „ni^ (and) and ^si**
(but) from dsi, to be, connecting two sentences; or
they are themselves shortened sentences used for such a
purpose, as: akesi, ake n), edSake (== edSi ake or edSe
ake» comp. the Ot. efise)» etSdak^, elftaket lit. it turned
that etc. =s because; or they are nouns, pronouns or ad-
verbs, taking the place of such, but serving the same pur-
pose of connecting sentence to sentence, e. g. bde (be =
time) eeba, than he will come. Eye he wo le miya, he
is here therefore I will go; wiemoi nl ewie le edsa, the
words which he spoke are just; babao nl eke le babao
nl efe dSi nd, as much as he said as much he did (lit*
•much which he said much which he did is it.)
5) The interjections as their name indicates are not
parts of the sentence they are put betwixt, but must be
considered as independent, but generally abridged sentences
expressing an emotion. As such they may be verbs, nouns,
pronouns, adjectives or adverbs and of the latter class
especially natural sounds imitated; e. g. do! is very pro-
bably the vocative word: mother! ata! father! mitSe!
my father! though only expressing an emotion of astonish-
ment, fear etc.; 1^1$A! anokwdle! true! omalee! tniei (lit.
dbyGoogk
— 71 —
thou liest hot!) o! oh! odSogbal wellt pflml well! bom!
oat. sound etc.
6) If we therefore according to the process of forma-
tien of words, inclinational forms, formwords and sentences
hare so to divide words, we have only foor classes, yii.
verbs, nonns, adjectives and pronouns, the latter three again
standing in the same relation to the former and depending
on it, because either forming its subject or object or part
of these used to define them. The whole process of for-
mation, beginning at the radical verb, is, with the ex<^ep-
tion of the internal augmentation which may be considered
as belonging to the combination of sounds, either preposi-
tion or postposition to define the verb or the definitions
of the verb, the verb itself being the foundation of the
organism of the language, the defining preposition and
postposition, whether forms, formwords, nouns and
adjectives, or sentences expressing such, containing the
law of its development, by which the whole body of
the language is formed. We have now only to classify
words, forms and sentences according to their use etc. and
can then proceed to give examples of the language and
the contents of it, as far as we have them, in the voca-
bulary, where further information is also to be given about
each word as much as necessary.
dbyGoogk
- w -
47able t
Reti'ospective tables of for-
mations of S 10— 35.
I. Process of formation of notional
words and their forms § 11-22.
1. Primaiy forms of words.
Roots. ^
ba, primary root, to come,
da, „ n to be grown, large, old.
fe, „ ft lo make,
ke, „ w to say; etc. § 10, 2. a.
ba, came, aorist. tence ind. pos. § 11.
ba, come! imperat. pos. 2. prs. sing. § 11.
ba, n. leaf; simple stem § 11.
da, n. mouth; „ ^ « «
*0> n, lal; n n n n
etc.
2. Internal au^entation.
Lengthening of the radical voweL
b$, secondary root; to quarrel. § 12, 1. a.
Ke, „ ,, to grant, n n n n
ya, infinit. lo go, going. „ „ „ b.
ba, „ to cQme, coming,
ba, n. crocodile. Slem § 12, 1. c.
bfl,^. tent. „ „ „ „ „
fa, n. river,
wa, a. strong.
g9, adv. staringly.
» » w «
» w » »
» M W »
n n n n
dbyGoOgk
— 73 —
Table L
Strengthening of the radical consonant
f^^^^ Close combination,
tsa, second, root, to dig. § 12, 2. a.
^e, „ ,,10 call. „ „ „ „
dfa, „ „ to break. « « « »
^P*» 9} » to stretch, draw. „ „ „ „
nma, „ „ to write. „ „ „ «
ise, n. fathfer. Stem » n n n
tso, n. tree. „ „ « „ n
nm3, n. food. „ „ „ „, „
Loose combination,
ba, second, root, to soothsay. § 12, 2. b.
%^ « ,1 to be in a rage. „ „ „ „
dSra, J
dsira, ( • o.
d§6ra, ( "• P"^®* ^^^"^ ff ff ff n
dsara, )
Ira, pi. form of ta, to sit! w w w ».
Uq,' Slo I '^'^ '®™ ®' "^^^ ^® ^^'^®' " « »» -
trg, pi. form tg, to be satisfied, etc.
Insertion of i betwixt the two radicals.
sla = sd, second, root, to burn. § 12, 3. a.
§ia, n. sand. Stem § 12, 3. a.
dSie, second, root, to let come out. § 12, 3. b. aa.
from dse, to come out.
tSIe (hie) second, root, tr. v. to awake, § 12, 3. b. aa.
from (hie) t§g, y. n. to awake,
tfia, pi. of ita, to strike. § 12, 3. bb.
3. Initial au^entation generally drop-
ping after pronouns etc.
iRnot. Init. liquid augment m, n, in.
ml ba' i P^^®* tense, ind. posit, of ba. § 13, 2. t.
(6 ba, the same with the prononunal augment.)
dbyGoogk
— 74 —
I Root.
A ke, )
ml ke, [ the same of ke> to say, is sajring.
mlA ke, I
n te,
ml te,
mm te,
n
ii
Table L
the s. of te, to conceal, is concealing.
to, n. a kind of grass. Stem § 13, 2. b.
ku, n. sbee-butter. „ w « » >i
Initial augment a.
b^, aor. t. ind. posit, indefinite 3 prs. pi. § 13, 3.
w6 (their), house. § 13, 3.
to, n. laddie. Stem § 13, 3.
sa, n. hall. „ w » »»
la, n. vocative virord, father. $ 13, 3.
wo, n, „ „ mrther. „ „ „
wu, n. „ case, husband. „ „ n
na,. n. „ „ wile, n n n
^Iba, fut. tense, ind. pos. will come.
^Iba, pot. mood pos. shall, must come.
(Comp. Table N. YII.)
S 13, 3.
Initial augment e.
felba, prf. t. ind. pos. has come. S 14, 1. a.
6|ba, „ „ ^ „ with the pron. e, he has come,
(^ba, „ „ „ „ withthepr.a,nianijiflefommcn.)
h mO, adj. whole. Stem § 14, 1. b.
febo, n. poison, gall. „ ,, „ w „
fe§a, n. evil, sin. » « » » w
ef6n, a. bad. „ » « » ,»
e fdn, Alt tense ind. neg. of fd. § 14, 1. c.
e f65, aor. „ „ „ „
e f6ko perf. w » >» >»
n M n n
n n n n
(0
0
0
0
t
0
0
0
Initial augment o.
M, thou camest. $ 14, 2.)
yd, adv. quickly. Stem $ 14, 2.
bd, adj. full. » n fj »
hd, num. n. hundred. „ n n n
h!a, n. want. „ ,, « ,»
nufu, n. serpent. „ » n f^
kp(}ngo» n. horse. „ m » »
dbyGoogk
~ 75
Root.
niikpa, n. elder.
s^to, n. priest.
ny&i, n. silk-cotton tree.
bl^nyo, n. young man.
bUyo, n. woman.
Table L
Stem $ 14, 9.
4 Terminational augmentation. § 15.
e
e
mi
o
e
wo
(
e
wo
a
ny€
nyeka
mi
0
e
Reduplication of the endvowel.
baa, aor. t. ind. neg. came not. § 16, 1.
fee, „ „ w . „ did not. „ „ „
feo, n n n n Ip.S. IdidnotWCCp. §16,1.
k^e, n n ft n 2.p.s.thouclidst notsay. „ „ „
boo, >9 M » n 3. p. s. he did not create. „ ^ >i
foS, n i» « ft l.p.pl. wedidnolstop. „ „ „
bo& imprf. t. ind. pos. creates or created. § 16, 2. a.
boO, n n n m 3. p. S. hC CfCatCS. „ „ ,i n
baa, „ „ „ „ 1. p. pi. we come. « „ „ «
hSa, M 99 » n indefinite 3. p. pi. it is giyen.
$16, 2. a.
baSt impert. pos. 2. p. pi. come (you)l $ 16, 2. b.
(See term. aug. q and a.)
baa, imp. neg. 2. p. pi. do (you) not come. $16,2.b.
bii, pi. of bi, child (see term. augm. i). n n n n
nii, pi. of nd (irreg.), thing.
Term. augm. o» o, u.
feo, imperf. t. ind. pos. does or did. $17.
boo, n n n „ 1. p. s* I pass, usc to pass.
$17.
„ 2. M „ thou takest. $ 17.
„ 3. „ „ he watches. „ „
Stem. $ 17.
i^OO, n n n
bUO, 99 99 99
seo, n. successor,
feo, adj. beautiful,
siu, V. to deceive,
tao, Y. to seek,
hao, Y. to trouble.
Second, root. $ 17.
Term, augment a (and e).
oydjfea, impert. pos. 2. p. pi. of fe, to do. $ 18.
nyela|fea, „ neg. 2* 9999 999999 99 9*99
dbyGoogk
76 —
Root.
Table X.
$ 19, a.
n n n
n n n
n n n
ft n
WO fea, pot. pos. 1. p. pi of fe, to do. § 18.
ame tea, „ „ 3. „„ >»>»>»>» n n
fea, „ „ indef. 3. p. pi. of fe to do. $ 18.
fia, adj. all. Stem. $ 18.
sla, D. house, home. Stem. „ „
mla, V. to press. Sec. root. „ „
biia, V. to gather. „ „ „ „
(hie, n. face. Stem. „ „)
Term, augment i.
fai, pi. of fa, river,
toi, „ „ to, sheep.
gddSi, „ „ gon, mountain,
madsi, „ „ man or mfi, town,
nidsi, „ „ nine, hand.
t§udsi, „ „ tsuru, red.
kroi, „ „ kroii, clear,
kai, second, root, to remember,
lai, n. fuel. Stem,
hadsi, n. (dual form) twins,
mudsi, n. dirt. >» « »
ame gboi, aor. ind. pos. 3. p. pi. of-gbo to'ofeb^ S 19> b.
kuikui, adj. heapy. Redupl. $ 19 b.
Term, liquid augment.
f^n, ) fut. t. ind. neg. of fe» to do, will not do.
e f6n, f $ 20, 2.
e fdn, fut. t. ind. neg. of fd, to cease. § 20, 2.
e f(\n, adj. bad. Stem. „ „ „
dteii, V. to consider. Sec. root. „ n n
san, adv. nicely. Stem. „ „ „
g6n, n. mountain. „ „ „ „
Terminational augments related to the term, liquid
augment.
|nine> n. pi. nidSi, hand. Stem. S20,2.
fine, n. pi. fidsi, wing. „ « « ,,
Ikane, n. pi. kanei? light. „ » n n
kane (Ot. kan), v. to read. Sec. root. „ « »»
nyomd, n. pi. nyodsi, debt. Stem. « », »»
sumo (fr. Ad. suo), v. to love. See. root. „ „ „
tSQlo, n. pi. tsQdsi, servant. Stem. n » »
ifilfi (Ad. le), n. pi. ledsi, vessel, ship. Stem. „ „ n
dbyGoogk
— 77 —
Table L
Root.
f^la or fla, n. pi. fadSi, boil Stem. $20,4.
tsuru, a. pi. tSudSi) red. Stem. m m ««
dstiro, a pi. dsQdsi, right. Stem. n n f*
wiri, V. to row. Second, root. / „ „ ^
here, v. (fr. he) to receive. Sec. root. „ „ ^
gbale, V. (gba) to turn in or about. Second, root,
S 20, 4.
Terminational augments lo, mo, le, le, li in their
peculiar application.
felo, n. (fr. the verb fe, to make) maker; pi. loi.
Stem or branch. § 20, 5.
nalo, n. (from the noun na, art) artificer. Branch.
S 20, 5.
kSlo, n. a brave man. Branch. § 20, 5.
dsamo, inf. of dsa, v. tr. to adore. „ „ „
dsamQ, n. adoration. „ „ „
dsale, inf. of dsa, v. n. to be straight. „ „ „
dsale, n. straightness, righteousness. w »» m
dsale, adv. slraightly. ,» « w
femo! impert. pos. 2. pr. s. „do it!" „ „ „
kumo, pi. x)f kfi, V. to break. „ w w
yeli, inf. of ye to eat. w « ,»
hole, irreg. pi. of the v. viro, to lift up. „ „ „
5. Pronominal init. (subjective and pos-
sessive) and term, (objective) augment ^
or combination with pure formwords*
§ 10, 2. g. S 21. CComp. § 30 and 31.)
™ b*'^' } " ^^^^^ thee. Aor. t. ind. pos. 1 p. s. of
hi, to ask, comb, mih the sec. pr. sing, of
the obj. pronoun. $21. Comp. $ 3 1 , 1 . b. c.
0 bim'' 1 ^^^" ^^^^^^^ "^^- '^ "
e bile , he asked him. „ „
wo binye, we asked you. „ „
nye|bi>VQ, you asked us. ^ n
dbyGoogk
ame
a
mi
— 78 —
Table T.
Root.
blame » they asked them,
biame, man fragte f?e (they were asked). $ 21.
bi, my child, Ut. the child of mine. $ 21. Comp.
$ 30, 3.
bi (their), child. $ 21. Comp. $ 13, 3. and 30, 3,
6. Redaplication of words and sen-
tences. § 22.
hobo, V* to squeece (the bush), sec. root (comp.
the root bo). $22, 2. a.
susu, V. to measure, to think. »* »« m n
Siu,'} ^- *^ ^^'^^^- - - •-•
titi, V. to scratch. » » „ «
yeye, frequentative mood of ye, to eat. „ „ „ b.
dSodsoi, frequentative mood of dso, to
dance.
kumQkumo, frequentative mood of ku,
to break.
tsatsa, n. a. country-matrass. » >» ^ <^*
kpakpa, a. good.
kpalekpale, a. bald (fr. kpa).
futdfuta, a. and adv. \vhite; whitely.
dended^n, a. and adv. hard, hardly.
kuikui, a. and adv. heapy, heapily. ^
(From ka, a heap.)
kporkpoi, a. and adv. knotty, knottily.
See prov. 63.
e komekome, num. one by one. „ „ „ f. aa.
e nyoenyo or enyo enyo, two by two. „ ^ ,» « w
mofSmo, num. inf. every body. „ „ » w bb.
ndfind, « n « thing.
l§o f6 tso, every tree (comp. § 34, 2.)-
mokomoko, (no) body. „ „
nokonoko, (no) thing. „ „
gblkogblko, (n)ever. „
hekoheko, (no) where. „ „
nu ko nu ko, (no) water. „ „
kpS kpS, a string each. » » » g*
M n n n
n n n n
n n WW
WW WW
WW w n.
WW WW
WW w ©•
WW WW
WW WW
WW WW
WW WW
W M W »»
WW WW
WW WW
w »» w »»
dbyGoogk
— 79 —
Table L
Root,
ya eba, eya eba, he came and went repeatedlj and
frequently. 8 22, 1. 2.
Kq nakai da da, ef^o nakai da dft!"* he always does
so and he always does so! $ 22, 1. 2.
(Compare with these forms the general loye of
repetition by the people in speech and song and the
same thing in the Hebrew language, though not so
much developed.)
Table IL
II. Combination. § 23-33.
1. Combinations with notional words used
as formwords and forms.
§23,1. §24-29.
a. Nouns.
aa. The fundamental component is fomial, the qua-
lifying notional and prefixed. § 25.
Combinations with the formal nouns „mo** and „no",
to distinguish persons and things. § 25, 1.
Qoaiif.
Comp.
Sydn
gbo
kra
lu
Fuodam. Component. § 23.
mo; n. pr. God. § 24, 1. 2. a. § 25, 1.
mo, n. man.
mo, n. soothsayer. „ „ $> n
mo, n. successor. „ „ « »
mo, n. governor. „ „ „ „
dbyGoogk
— 80 —
Table H.
Qualif.
Comp.
tse
nye
nyemi
nane
Ga
bie
AnaiL
guo
nye
nakpe
mi
nmH
Fundam. Comp. % 23.
Plur. form: — mei.
mei, pi. form of tse, father. $24, 1.2. a. $25, 1.
mei, pi. form of nye, mother. w w « «
mei, pi. form of nyemi, ®cf4n)tfter. „ „ „ «
mei, pi. form of nanyo, friend. „ ^ » ^t
mei, pi. form of GSnyo, Gaman. „ „ „ ,«
mei, pi. form of byenyo, a man here. ^ w « »*
mei, Anang and his people. n t^ n t9
n5, n. pi. guonii, ^ares. » » «« »«
no, the thing of yesterday. , „ „ „ ^
n6, the last (thing). ,*„»,»»
no, my thing (nsed like mine). „ „ „ 99
nd, writing implement. n n n r^
With nyo, na and yO, to distinguish the sex. § 25, 2.
G^
G^
obl^
obU
nyemi
nyemi
bi
hi
tsind
tsind
nyo, pi. Gaht, a GSman. § 25, 2.
yo, „ GSyei, a GSwoman. „ „
nyo, „ oblahi, a young man. . „ „
yo, „ oblayei, a young woman. „ „
nu, „ nyemihi, brother. „ „
yo, „ nyemiyei, sister. „ „
nu, „ bihl, son. „ „
yo, „ biyei, daughter. „ „
nu, „ t§inahi, a bull. „ „
yo, „ tsinayei, a cow. „ „
With the termination bi, pi. bii; mi, pi. mii, for
different purposes. § 25, 3.
na bi, pi. -bii, grand-child. § 25, 3.
tSe bi, father-child; @ticfgcf(6n)tflcr. „ „
nye bi, mother-child. „ „
nyemi, „ „ ©ef^mjicr. „ „
to bi, lamb; kid. „ ,9
wo bi, honey*child, bee. . w w
we bii, n. pi. domestics. „ „
man bii, „ citizens. „ „
kuse bii, „ country-people. „ ' „
te bi, n. stone-child, new tooth. „ „
set bii, pl- of seo, successor. „ „
gbekg.bii, pl. of gbekS, child. „ „
tSatSu|bii, ants. >, m
dbyGoogk
— 81 —
Table IL
Comp.
Uema
nmene
agbo
nula
Fundam. Comp.
bii, n. pi. people of old. § 25, 3.
bii, „ the people of to day. „ „
bii, „ head-children, i. e. fruit. „ „
mil. „ figs. „ „
mi, pi. -mii, star. „ „
With the term. „tse" and „nye" for different purposes.
§ 25, 4.
man
man
niia
Osu
Ada
sla
slen
§!a
tsu
dien
tse, n. pi. -tsemei, king. § 25, 4.
nye, n. pi. -nyemei, queen. „ „
tse, n. pi. -tsemei, rich man. „ „
t§emei, n. pi. the people of Osu. „ „
tsemei and AdSmei, people of Ada. „ ,,
tse, n. house-father. „ „
tse, n. friend. „ „
nye, n. female friend. „ „
nye, n. a lizard living in rooms. „ ««
tse, pron. self, himself. ,| ^
bb. The qualifying component is fonnal the ftmdamental
notional and snfBzed. § 25, 5.
nanyo
nanyo
nanyo
gbomo, n. fellow-man, companion. § 25, 5.
niitsulo, n. fellow-labourer. „ „
kuku, n. fellow-piece. „ „
Comp. Geim. SDiit*; lat. Com, con- etc.
cc. The qualifying component, postponed or snfBzed, is
notional, the fundamental comp. formal. § 26.
Fund.
Comp.
mo
no
mo
no
mei
nii
Qoalif. Comp.
kp^kpa, n. a good person. § 26, 1 — 3.
kpdkpa, n. a good thing. „ „
f6n, n a bad. person. „ „
f6n, n. a bad thing. „ „
Zimmermann, Akra*Gramni.
dbyGoogk
— 83 —
Table
b. Verbs.
at. ItaML mitpmUt coBpoinds. § 27, i. 2.
Verbal componnds with the formal components „d§e^
and ,,ke". § 27, 2. a.
mi
Ik
li
si
wo
dse, y. to send. $ 27, 2. a.
dSe, „ to be lost, to lose. „ „
dse, „ to lie backwards. „ „
d§e,M to straighten. „ „
dSe UL k. ml, to comfort. „ ^
dse, V. to harden. „ „
ke, T. to change. „ „
ke, „ to lose the tiieat fh)m
the bones. ^ „
y6T6 ke, „ to pull to pieces. „ „
kpl^ ke, „ to decend, let decend. „ „
svk ke, „ to miscarry. „ „
§r^ ke, „ to let rot. „ „
SSsS::!"-'""""'^ ■ -
DifFereBt forms of tbe prf. t. ind. neg.
(1. p. smg.)
With the formal component „ka^. § 27, 2. b.
U fe, imp. neg. 2« p. s. $ 27, 2. b.
nyek^ fea, „ „ 2. p. pi. „ „
mik^ fe, pot. neg. 1. p. s. „ „
ak^ fe, „ „ indef. 3. p. pi. „ „
amek^ fea, „ „ 3. p. pi. „
s. § 18 and Ad. Ap.
N. ef^ ko, prf. t. ind. neg., N. has not done. §27jK2.b.
mif6 ko, „ „ 1. p« s. „ „
of6 ko, „ „ 2. „ n n
efc ko, „ 9) 3* „ , n n
M ko, „ „ indeL 3. p. pL man
fiat nt(|t get^an, it has not been
done.
dbyGoogk
— 83 --
Table n.
M. Veri>^ s^aiaUa or septntei €M9«iids with
Terbg. §28.
With the formal verbal compooents ^^ba'* and ^^ya'S
§ 28, 2. a.
Mjfe, pot. po9. compoimd CoDJagation comp.
Table N.Vli. §28,2.a.
ya fe, pot. poa. comp. Codj., comp. Table N. VII. „ „
CDa le, « w n n n jy
eya le, „ n f* n n n
ba f6, aor. t. ind. poa. n „ w m «
ya 16, „ n w . M M »
nyeb^ fea, impert. aii4poi.pea. comp.Conj., c. „ ,, „
^y®y« lOa, n n n n n ry
etc.
Combination of verbs with auxiliary verbs.
ke- hS, to (tafcc a«d) give. § 28, 2. b.
no- na, ,) » » n »»
ke- fd, to forgive. „ „
n5- f6, to do (with someth.) „ „
ke- ba, to take (something) and come, i. e. to bring. „ „
ke- ya, th. s. „
ke- dse, to bring out, come out wiUi. „ „•
ke- ts6, to turn with someth. „ „
nyfe ke-ba, walk to (hither). „ „
nyie ke-ya, walk to (thither). „ „
nyie ke-dSe, walk from. « «
nyie ke-ts6, walk through. „ „
nyie ye, walk aomewhcre. „ „
wie t§d m. k., speak to someb. „ „
kenuk.
kenoko
n^
n^ko
mindko
s&
min^
da
fe hd m. k., do to som^.
wie, speak with s. b.
be, quarrel with s. b.
tf^ m. k. strike someb. with s. th.
fe, to have accomplished doing,
fe, to have not yet accomplished doing,
miife noko, I have not yet done any thing,
fe, to repeate to do, to do repeatedly,
efe, he did it again,
mife, could 1 do!
fe m. k. to be greater than s. b.
eia
6*
dbyGoogk
— 84
Table H.
cc. Terbs (Combined with a fonnal nonn as tbdr gram-
matical subject or object § 29.
Verbs combined with their grammatical subject. § 29, 2.
Subj.noun. Verb. Compound doud.
mil M, to be kind; mlihQe, kindness. § 29» 2.
inimli hi, I am kind; mimlihlle, my k. » »>
he ¥ra, to be hard, stony; hewaie, hard-
ness, strength. „ „
65, to be dainty; na^dmo, daintiness. „ „
kpafa, to perish; hiekpatamo, perishment. „ „
kd, to be desirous, hlekd, desire. „ „
wa, to be ceuel; yiwale, cruelty. „ „
sQ, to be fainting, tSuisQ, fainting. „ „
na
h!e
hie
yi
tsui
musu mli
musun
musu
.! ' I to yearn, musuntSd, yearning.
etsd (prf.t.), to have diarhoea, musutSdmd,
diarhoea.
With their grammat. object without a logical object
§ 29, 3. (See adverbs.)
Verb. Object noun,
ba mli, ) to come in, be fulfilled, mlibfi,
ba n, th. s. ) fulfilment. $ 29, 3.
ye mli, \ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^^^
yen, J " "
(without nonn.)
be n, \ neg. irreg. of the former, to be un-
be mli, J true, not so. n n
ya no, to go on, proceed, ngya. „ „
no-fie no, „ „ „ „
ke-ya no, „ with something, bring it
forwards. „ „
ba Si, to come down, sink; Siba. „ m
ba sisi, to come down; §isiba. „ „
ya nwei, to go up, 6weiya. „ „
With their grammatical object and a logical object
na na, to see the end, understand; nana. § 29, 3.
na §isi, to see the ground, undent.; SiSinfi. „ „
ftme na, to shut; naiime. » „
ba m. k. Si, to bumble someb. Si^ibfi. „ „
See d>ove „ 3.
dbyGoogk
— 86 —
Verb.
ye
ta
tra
ta
tra
ta
tra
ta
tra
wa
wa
wa
miwa
kpata
mikpata
Table IL
Object noan.
hewQ, (to be) for (somebody's) sake,
n. k. mli, to sit in someth., mlitamo. $ 29, 3.
n „ pi. form; mlitramo.
he, to touch, hetamo. „ „
he, pi. form; hetramo. „ „
no, to sit upon; notamg. „ „
no, pi form; notramg. „ „
se* to sit behind, setamo. „ „
setalo, prs. n. ^intetfa§e. „ „
sfi,. pi. form; setramo, setrafoi and setra-
loi, ^interfagen. „ „
he, to pain, ache; hewale s. a. „ „
yi, to use cruelly, yiwale, s. a. „ 5.
m. k. yi, to treat one cruelly. ' „ „
le yi, I treat bim cruelly. „ „
m. k. hie, to destroy someb. hiekpatamo,
s. a. „ 0.
ehle (comp. wa yi), I destroy him. „ „
With their grammatical subject and object
Subj. Verb.
he YfA
mihe Yf&
hie ki
mihie ki
amehle kimo
ftd hie f6
ttumusuA tSdmi ye
mihie k&
hie hi
Object. Compoand noun.
he, to hare pain. § 29, 4.
mihe, my body pains me (my-
self) or, one of my limbs
pains me. ,, „
no, to rely upon, to trust. „ „
eno, I rely upon him. „ „
n. hienokSimo and no hleka-
mo s. Tocab.
eno, pi. form; they rely upon
him. H fi
m. k. no, to trust in or hope
upon somebody. „ „
mihie nofdmd, my hope upon
some body; but: eno hie-'
fdmd, his hope which is
hoped upon him, his trust-
worthiness. ^ „
m. k. hewo, my heart (lit. bow-
els) is yearning for s. b. „ „
mihe no, I trust in myself. „ „
he no, to take care for one self. „ „
dbyGoogk
SuVj, Verb
gb6
sumcj
mimia
mib^
miw6
— 86 —
Beflexiye combinations.
■table H.
Object.
Compound noin.
he na, to trouble one self. $ 29, 4.
he, to kill one self. » „
he, to love one self. ^ ^
mihie, I press my face, i. e. I hold
out, persevere. ^ w
mihe si, 1 humble myself. . n ry
hesiba, u. humility. „ „
mihe no, I exalt myself. ^ „
heno\v6mo, exaltation. „ „
etc.
dso
sa
hie
wo
>vo
tsi
here
dse
dse
dsie
kpa
but: mikpa
and mikpa
Mixed combinations.
foi, V. to run (a run?), foidse,' running. $27, 7.
foi, „ „ foisa? ' „ „ „
foi, „ „ foihie? „ n ,f
foi, „ „ foiwo? „ „ „
m. k. foi, make someb. to run. „ „
ta, V. to mention; tatsi, mention. „ „
ato, V. to receive with joi. „ „
fu, V. to stink; fu, fudse, bad smell. „ „
kpo, V. to come forth; kpodse, forth-
coming, „ „
kpo, V. to bring forth, reverf, kpodsie-
mo, revelation. „ „
fai, V. to take down the hat, to beg
(pardon etc.), faikpamo, begging. „ ,♦
le fai, I begged him. „ 5.
efai, I took his hat ofT. ;„ „
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 87 —
Table IZL
n. Combination (continued) § 30-33.
2. Combinatiofis of noti<mal words into
compounds and parts of sentences and of
sentences into compound sentences.
S 30-33.
a) Nouns. § 30.
PrepoBitiye or possessive combinatioii.
QaaL comp.
we
lasu
la
w6n
won
SQlemQ
b^
Anan
ko
gbomo
gbekSbii
miiSetnei
Moni dsi nye le
N;o]&mo
Fund. cemp.
kA, n. lit. house-heap, family,
l^le, n. steam vessel,
su, n. lit. fire dust, smoke, steam,
tse* n. fetish-priest (or possessor.)
tsu, n. fetish-house,
tsti, n. house of prayer, chapel.
yelQ, n. leafeater, an antelope.
w6, n. Anang's house.
16, n. bush-meat, beast,
lo, n. beast, animal.
nine, n. man's hand.
an<it§umo, children's (their) bu-
siness (s. § 13, 3.).
abfi, the children of my fathers.
suomo, the love of one who is
the mother.
nii ni efe, what God did.
$ 30, 3.
Postpositive or adjective combination.
Fnndaro.
gbomo
kolo
gbekg
t§o
Qoalif. comp.
kp^kpa, good man.
toh, bad, wild beast«
bibio, little chikL
kp4tenkple» large tree*
okuUfo, a womaD> a widow
4.
dbyGoogk
— 88 —
Fundam,
nd
pi. h{
yo
pi. yei
nnmo
gbekg
gbek§
gbekg
gbek^
gbomo
gbomo
mantle
Dawid
Dawid
Dawid
sane
Ifilel
I Qualif. comp.
Table III*
mo
a ! "• «^^
man.
medSi
mo > ,j
ohiafo, poor old man.
abifao, young child,
f^feo, beautiful child,
abifao fefeo i t .*# i
young child,
^desa nl gboQ, a human mor-
tal person,
nl he mlye le, the sick man.
Ny6ngmo, our father God.
Dowuona, king Dowuona.
mantse le, David, the king,
nl dsi manlSe le „ „ „
moni d§i mantse le » „ „
akpa, gospel.
akpa, or lele kpakpa, conunon
vessel.
S 30, 4.
b. Verbs. § 31—33.
Mixed verbal compounds. § 31, 2. a.
fi
b6
fu
bill
kp£
kp^
kp(5
1(5
te,
te,
tu,
tu,
ta,
ta,
le,
to,
kg,
la,
dida,
V. to spoil, inf. and imp. n. fitemo. §319 2. a.
V. to enter, inf. and imp. n. b6temo. » „
V. to mix, inf. and imp. n. futumo. „ „
V. to overturn, inf. and imp. n. bAtumQ. „ „
V. to join, inf. and imp. n. f^tamo. „ »
V. to reconcile, inf. and imp. n. kpa-
tamo. „ r
V. to cleave, inf. and imp. kpetemo. „ „
V. to knead, inf. and imp., n. kpo-
tomo. n n
V. to go round, inf. and imp. n. lo-
komo. „ „
V. to linger, inf. and imp. n. lilamQ. „ „
(Comp. la, lata.)
V. to waver, inf. and imp. n. didamo. „ „
(da, to run a race, to vie.)
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
— 89 —
stable in.
wojso
ho. so
Pi
I T. D. and tr. ta shake, inf. and imp.
Id T. to wound, be wounded, piUmo.
aa. Terbs with verbs. § 31.
Notional double verbs. § 31, 2. 8.
he- ye, double verb, to take-eat, to believe,
he n. k. ye, to believe s. th. §31, 2.b.
ba m. k. nd- ke moko, to come to somebody saying. „ „
ka& kwe, to try (and) see, to try to see. ,, „
imka makwe, I will try and see. „ „
ny§- fe, to be able to do n »
miny§e mife, 1 cannot do it. „ „
minye ene mafe, 1 am able to do this, I can
do this. „ „
minyeA make. I cannot say it. „ ^
Comp. le femo, le yeli where the infinit.
form is used nominal and becomes the ob-
ject of the verb. § 33.
bb. Terbs with noons and a^ectives. § 32.
«) Subjective oombinattozL S 32.
Subj.
mi
mi le mi
mihu mi
gbek§
gbekg le
gbekS ko
mit§e le
Nyonmo b(Jfo
Gbomo kpakpa mli
Ghomei ke koloi
pi nl anySfi aka-
Verb.
ba, I came.
, I (not an other) came,
ba, I also (i) came.
te, (a) child went.
te, the child went.
te, a child went.
ba, my father came.
ba, a messenger of God came
hi, a good man's inside is good,
i. e. he is kind.
$32.
dbyGoogk
— 90 —
Subj.
Verb.
Table ITL
neame^ ye, many men and beasts which
cannot be counted are, i. e. § 32.
There are many men and beasts which
cannot be counted.
^} Objective combinatiozL $ 33.
Verb.
Bi
Bi
Bi
Ye
TSuaiQ
Ba
Ba
\a
Ya
Nyenylea
Object.
mi! ask me! § 33.
(Camp. § 32 at the end abont the vo-
cative form of the subj.)
gbomo ne! ask this man! § 33.
onyontSo! ask thy master! „
nii! eat something! „
oniitsumo (or onii)! do thy work! ,,
ntfa! come quickly! Comp. §35,2. „
bie! come bither! „
dsei! go there! „
Akrop<m! go to Akropong! „
bleo! walk (yee) slowly! n
r) Subjective and objective combination. S 32. 33.
Subj. Verb
mi dsie
NyoAmo sumo
Jesu ehere
Silafo etsdd
^TsofStSe enuu
ehas
„Ke okplom ye
ohwam M yeo
EhS
Eke
ha
EtLd
eha
Object.
le, 1 saved him. § 32. 33.
dseii, God loved the world. „
woyiwala, Jesus has saved the
life of our head, i. e. saved us. „
filafo gbe.!'* Pr. 3. ,,a blind man
does not show the way to a
blind man!"" »
tsofS
helatSe, »,a physician does not
drink medicine for the sick'*
pr. 6. „
nii le,"
eko,*" pr. 14. „if the okplom (an
animal) eat something, the
ohwam also eats some.^ n
le Sika, or:
Sika,
le, or:
sika,
le; he gave him gold. „
dbyGoogk
— 91 —
Table m.
Subj. Verb.
Object.
Israelbii le tfia
mo —
— m bvit
Sabat le tei, the children of Is-
rael stoned him who broke
the Sabat (with stones). §32.
33
Ehe
abolo dsakpo, he bought bread
(for) a farthing. „
Etsuo
nii.
yo
t§u le se? he works behind the
house § 33.
2,
Eba
nye, he came yesterday „
n
or:
Nye
eba
mino, yesterday he came to me. „
Dane
n
efiteg
etade nakai, always he spoils his
cloth so. M
n
Eye
mli, or. „
3.
eye
n, it is so (or true). „
»♦
Eye
nakai, it is so. ^
»
Eye
feo, it is beantiful „
n
Efe
mi hiegble, it n^es me ashamed: „
w
Eye
falefale, it is clean. „
It
Efe
enii falefale^ she does her work
cleanly.
99
i) Peculiar use of the auxiliary verb „d§i,* neg.
S 33, 3.
Midsi
le, I am he (lit. him).
or: Le dsi
nu> « w 91
' AmedSi
gbomei komei nl
misumo
le, they are some people whom
I loved. '
Gbo dsi
mi, I am a stranger.
Lumo dsi
le, he is governor.
Gbomo akpa dsi
neke lumo ne, this governor is
a good man
Lumo le
gbomo akpdii
or;
gbomo akpani the governor, a good nan is (he).
Edsee
gbomo, he is not a man*
or: Ds^e
gbomo
dsi
)e, he is not a man.
Dsee
gbomei
$33,3.
d by Google
Sabj. Verb,
Si koloi (sc. „
— 92 —
Table ZV.
Object.
neke,
„ ) (they are) not men cry so
but beasts (cry so). § 33, 3.
Ill Process of formation of formwords.
§ 34. (35).
1. Formation of pure formwords (pro-
nouns). % 34, 1.
Primary formal roots.
Radical fomu.
n > mi, 1.
ml
0, thou. § 34, 1.
e, he> she it.
0, wo, we.
a, they, ;,umn.''
Mependent forms. (Secondary formal roots.)
mi, I, (Ad ami).
bo (Ad mo) thou.
le, he, she, it. § 34, 1.
wo, we.
nye, you.
— (ame, Ad. a, they; see the sequel.)
dbyGoogk
— 93 —
Table IV.
Sabjectdve combination with verbs and possessive combi-
nation with nouns.
Subj. and
Pos8. form.
m- I n - J I-; mine (Ad. 6-; ye-).
0-
e-
wo-
nye-
(ame-
a-
(•
thou; thine. § 34, 1.
he. she, it; his, hers, its.
we; ours,
you; yours.
they; theirs). (Ad. a-),
they (man); (theirs). Indefinite form.
See § 13, 3.
Objective combination with verbs.
Obj. form.
n > mi, me.
mi
0, thee.
le, him, her, it.
(0), wo, us.
nye, you.
ame [Ad. — me] them.)
Demonstr., interrog. and rel. Sabst pronouns.
ell l5S:)demonstr.8ubst. pron.
n§, J
(nS), > who, what; interrog. subst. pron. § 34, 1.
m€, »
d), rel. subst. pr. who, whidi.
Adjective pronouns.
le, demonstr. adj. pr., def. article,
the (Ad. -9.) § 34, 1.
le, » « « (the), at the
end of sentences to define them.
Ad. ne). „ n
tie, dem. adj. pr., this.
n), relat. a4j. pron.^ who» which. „ „
dbyGoogk
u --
Table IV.
2. Nouns, and adjectives and verbs used
as pronominal formwords. § 34^ 3.
Sing.
mo,
he
diefit§e»
bie,
be,
. he,
bo,
te,
fia,
pia,
ko,
nakai
ngke
Plar.
roei; somebody, people.
mi; something, — things.
— , body, self. Comp. % 29, 4.
dientsemei, self, selves. § 25, 4.
d§emei; (old noun) there.
— ; ,, here.
— ; time.
— ; place.
— r ; manner.
adj. 1
. „ > every; aU.
komei; one; some.
I orig. nouns, such, so.
pi. nekemei, nekenii etc
§ 34, 2.
Verb „dsi.«
— A = ni, = dsi, to be something etc.
3. OombimitioHS of pronooiis of both
classes. § 34, 2.
a
(=a
no
mo
no
na
m6
me
mei
7) 1 u^y»
see above.
non (= no d§i ?) adj. dem. pron.
vDe saRie.
Qoo, subst. dem. pron^ that same,
ne, pl« m^nemei, subst. dem. pron.
this (person),
n^, nii Qe> nibii ii^>, substk dem.
pron. (thing),
mo, pi. namei, subst. int. pr., who?
m(~m6dli?>^ „ n what?
§ 34, 2.
dbyGoogk
Sing,
mo
neke —
nakai —
neke —
nakai —
gbomo
nakai
neke
bie,
dsei,
biane,
agbene,
nakai
neke
nakai
neke
dsei
ng
-- M —
Table HT-
Plur.
ni, pi. meini, mei nl, sub. rel. ft. who. § 34, 2.
ne, such, even such, this. „ „
le, such, even the. n «
ne noh, even this same. „ „
le non, even the same. „ „
neke, adj. pr. certain, t L
neke, a certain man. „ „
I adv. dem. pr. so. „ „
„ „ here, hither, „ „
dSemei, „ „ there, thither. „ „
„ „ immediatdy. ^ „
now.
ne '
ne •
non ) ^^^^ „^
^^^} even 80.
non, just there, even there.
I (lit. this so) dem. pr. so.
nggbe.
J adv. int. pr. where, whither?
te
te
te
he
be
bo
mo
no
moko
noko
mo
no
t§o
he
heko
he
be
gbl
gM (ni dgi)J ,
be (ni dSi) J ^^^^ •
ten? how?
ni, adv. rel. pr. of place, where
ni, „ „ „ „ time, when,
ni, „ „ „ „ manner, how.
ko, pi. meikomei, some body: subst.
indefinite pron.
ko, pi. nokomej, niikomei; something,
moko, used with the neg. voice of
the verb, (no)body, (not) anybody,
noko, (no)thing, (not) any thing.
fSmo, every body,
fgnd, every thing.
ko, indef. adj. pr. indef. art. a, an.
f€ -^ , every, used with* reduplication
of the subst. as:
fg t8o,. every tree,
ko, somewhere, adv. ind. pr.
heko, (no) where „ „ „
fae, every where. „ „ n
V j somewhen. „ ,» »
dbyGoogk
— 96 —
Sing.
beko
gbiko
be
gbl
bo
mi le
bo le
le le
wo le
nye le
ame le
mi non
bo „
mi hQ
midienfsey
bodieDt§e»
PIu r
beko
Table IV.
gblko 1 ^°®)" '^^^^' (")®^^^ ^^J- *"*• P"^- $3*»2.
Kbe .
fggbi J ever, always. n « n „ »
ko, somehow. « »♦ w » «
mi-, I (even I), witii emphasis. „ ^
(or mine even mine).
0-, thou; thine etc. „ „ „ „
e-, he, she, it „ „ „ „
W0-, we.
nye- yon.
ame- they,
mi, even I.
0 etc.
mi, I also.
1 myself,
etc.
etc. etc.
dbyGoogk
Zinnermaon, Akra-Gramm, 7
/
Digitized by VjOOQIC
98 —
The pronouns according to their
Substantive
PersonaL
Demonstrative.
Independ. Subj. and poss. Obj.
ene, pi. enemei.
mi n-, n-. m, mi-
mi,m
mone, pi. menemei.
bo 0-
-0
none, pi. niine.
le e-
-le
no, pi. nomei.
wo wo-
-wo
neke — ne.
nye nye-
-nye
nakai — le.
ame ame-
-ame
no — le.
a-
ene non-
Subst. compoun
Compounds,
minoii mi-
i pron.
-mi
-0
mone noh.
(none non).
no — non.
bon6n o-
len6n e-
-le
Adverbially used
wonon WQ-
-wo
nakai, such, so.
nyenon nye-
-nye
neke, „ „
amenon ame-
-ame
bie, here.
midientse mi-
-mi
dsei, there.
etc.
mi neke, I for instance
bo neke, thou for instance
bene, then.
biane, immediately.
agbene, now.
etc.
About mih^, oh6
§ 29, 4.
About min6, 6n6,
elc, see
^n5 etc.
nakai non.
neke non.
bie noit.
dsei non.
see § 25, 1.
mi le mi-
bo le 0-
le le e-
-mi.
nakai non k5.
, neke „ „ etc.
-0.
-le.
nakai le.
neke ne.
etc.
mi mi-
-mi.
bie ne.
bo 0-
-0.
le e.
-le.
etc.
-le (Ad..Q)
Def. article.
le (Ad. ne)
The same after sentences.
Adjective
-ne.
-neke.
-non.
dbyGoogk
-^ M —
different relations § 34.
Table V.
pronouns.
Interrogative.
Belative.
Indefinite.
namo?
moni, pLmeini...
moko, pi. meikomei.
pi. namei?
noni, pi. niini . . .
mof^mo.
meni?
mof^mo nl . . .
mokomoko.
ne?
n5f6nd nl . . .
noko, pi. niikomei.
me?
nof^Do.
nokonoko.
substantive pronouns.
te ten, le — te6?
boni . . .
tafitt how noHch?
n6gbe? nigbe?
heni . . .
te be (ni dsi)?
be&i • . .
tegbl^ „ ?
gWL nl . . .
bonon n) . .
henoii n) . .
benoti n\ . .
etc.
bQtebo n\ . .
hefebe n\ . .
^
(gbltegbl ni)
(befdbe ni) .
(boko).
heko.
hekobeko.
beko.
gbiko.
gMkogUko.
gblfdgbl, dd.
pronouns.
*- enyie?
how much-?
how many-?
— ni . . .
— non ni ,
ko, indef. article,
■fe — every.
dbyGoogk
— 100 —
Table VI.
IV. Notional words used as adverbs,
numerals^ conjunctions and interjections-
§35.
1. Adverbs. % 34, 2.
t. Of place.
We, here.
dSei, there.
heko, somewhere » etc. see
pronouns § 34.
ftwei, above, up.
SBi, beneath, down.
se> behind,
kpo, outside.
mli, inside etc. see § 28.
Sia, home, at home.
teA, amidst.
yiieiif on the top etc.
b. Of tine.
benet now.
agbene, now; abr. sent.
tSutSu, at first.
UeilUefi, at first.
di, first before.
biane> immediately.
mra, quickly.
mqmo, (a.) ah*eady.
Amene, to day.
nye, yesterday.
W0, to morrow.
nye se, the day
before ye^erday,
some ^ys ago.
W0 se, the day after to mor-
row, by and by.
da, always.
gbiko, once.
lebi, in the morning.
matkS, early.
mafikpa, early.
ademaAk^, early.
ffine, at midday.
gbfke, in the evening.
dSelSeremo (see dSe tSere,v.)
at daytime.
dSenamo, (see dSe na), at
nighttime,
nyofi, at night,
nyoifi ieii, at midnight.
c Of manner.
nakai, so, thus.
Deke, n n
dSogba, well.
Ueo, slowly.
oyd, quickly.
Si kome, at once.
niAlo, „ „
kwa, entirely, together.
kwra, with the neg. voice
(not) at all.
tutu, too much,
much,
babao, much,
fio, little,
bibio, little,
pi, much.
ekoA, with neg. ioit; again.
dbyGoogk
- m —
TabUVL
If yes!
dabi! no!
lelfin! tnily!
V
ekole, perhaps, ete.
2. Nnmeralg. % 35, 3.
a. Definite.
oh^ ke eko, 101.
6ko, ekome,
1.
oh^ ke enyo, 102.
*oyo,
6te
2.
ohai enyo, 200.
3
„ „ ke eko 201.
4.
akp6, 1000.
6noitio»
6.
dkpei enyo, 2000.
6kpa,
6.
akpei nyonmii, 10000.
kp^wo.
7.
etc.
kp^nyo,
8.
b. hdefinita.
n$ht^.
9.
eko, some.
ny(NQmii,
10.
pi. ekomei.
„ ke ^kome,
11.
pT, many.
H *nyo,
12.
fg, fi§, pis, every, all.
n n ete,
13. etc.
fio, few.
nyoftmai enyo,
20.
enyie?
„keekome,21.
how much?
ete,
30.
how many?
oU,
100.
etc. 8. § 34 and 35, 2.
3. Cottjattctions. % 35, 4
ni (only conaetting
; senten-
Si, bat, for.
ces, not single
words),
ake, that, as.
and.
akesi, because, for.
ho, also.
ke, if. •
hewQ, nohewo nl,
hecaase;
kedSi, if, (neg. ke dSee).
hence, therefore.
le, V. see § 28, 2. b. more
do, lo, or:
than.
edSake, etSoake, efiakef be-
dSni, before.
canse.
koni, ni, that. etc.
4
. Interjections*
a! ah!
hum! nat. sound.
aol woe!
m^tie! hear!
0! oh!
etc.
adSe! woe!
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— ilw —
Part II.
Application of words, forms
and sentences.
§ 36. After we have shown the process of formation
of words and their forms as well as of sentences and their
forms, from the formation of a simple root to the forma-
tion of a compound sentence, it remains now to be shown
how all these words, forms and sentences are separately
applied in the organism of the language; and as we have
seen the verb more than is the case in Japhetic and Se-
mitic languages to be not only the centre of the whole
organism, so that nouns, adjectives (adverbs) and pronouns
depend upon it, but also to be applied to express most of
the relations, expressed in other languages by the prepo-
sitions, cases, conjunctions etc., we begin with the appli-
cation of the verb and its forms together with the
words and sentences and theit forms, which depend on
the verb directly (as s-ubject or object to it), and go
then on to the application of words, forms and sen-
tences defining a subject or objecit, or the application of
nouns, adjectives, pronomis etc. their forms and to the
sentences expressing them.
dbyGoogk
— iu —
Section 1.
L Application of the verb, its forms
and combinations.
§ 37. 1) The verb foims the sentence and is its centre.
Erery other word or part of a sentence is only a defni-
tion of the verb or its definitions. — Every sentence is a
judgment or decision of the person speaking either of what
he knows and therefore indicates (indicative mood) and
what he will and therefore commands (imperative), wishes
or permits (potential), or what he wants to know and there-
fore asks (question). Each of the sentences so modified
he may state as positive or negative (positive or nega-
tive voice); he may state as present, past or future,
as perfect or imperfect or without limits (the tenses:
present, perfect and future, or imperfect and aorist); he
may speack of himself or to an other or of an other (1., 2.
and 3. pers.), of definite or indefinite persons (s. the
sequel), of one or more persons (number) and of all these
as subjects or objects of the verb (subj. and obj.
combination). All these different relations are expressed
by and in the verb and its ''dependences with the forms
and formwords mentioned in Part I.
2) The moods (indicfative, imperative and potential) are
expressed by forms, formwords and combinations.
The question is expressed by the peculiar interroga-
tive tone or voice and some interrog. formwords.
The positive or negative voice is expressed by forms,
formwords, combinations and peculiar pos. or neg. tone
or voice.
The tenses by forms and formwords.
yGoogk
— 104 -
The persons, the definition of them, by which the
passive yoice of other languages is expressed (s. § 38 — 40)»
and the number and their subj. or obj. use, by the
same and the place of the different words and sentences.
§ 38. 1) Th§ moods, voices, tenses, persons
and their definitions, numbers and subj. or obj. re-
lations, as far as the persons are expressed by pronouns
or pronominal augments of the verb are directly expressed
in the verb by their different forms and formwords with
those modifications which are necesary because of the eu-
phonic rules and combination of the sounds. . Many of the
forms are not thoroughly applied, as the language forms
only those modifications and definitions which are neces*
sary for the distinction of the different notions of it. This
is especially the case with the plural and frequentative for-
mations of the verb, which we therefore mention only oc-
casionidly. Besides this there may be many forms not yet
ound out by us. Those known and their application are
the following.
L loods.
a) Indicative mood,
aa) Aorist tense,
a) pos, voice (without peculiar form):
(Ke, impert. k^mo, inf. kfimo, v. tr. to say, tell.)
NyoAmo k^ gbomg, God told (it to) man.
mik^, I told thee,
ok^mi, thou toldst me.
ek^le, he (she, it) told him (her),
wok^nye, we told you.
nyek^WQ, you told us.
amek^wo, they told us.
Indef. subj. akeame, people told them (man fagte i^Ken),
they were toldw
dbyGoogk
— 105 —
oblahi ke onukpai, the youog men told the old ineD.
lifmene oblahi kemi sane ko» to day the young men told
me a palawer; etc.
Redqi^. form: mik^el^y I repeatedly told him; etc.
Combined form: miyak^le, I went to tell him; etc.
» „ mibak^le, I came to tell him; etc.
With the iteratiye auxiliary verb sa:
mis^ mik^le, i told him again*
With the perfective aux. v. na:
min^ mikele» i did tell him; etc.
Without object: mike, I told; etc.
With two or more subjects and objects joined by auxiliary
t S 8 t 6 6 1 • » 10 10 11
verbs: Bo kele ke nakai sane le kemi ye mitSu le mu
13 13 13 IS 1 S t • 6 « 13
nye se afi le, thou and he told me this history last
It 911 10 10
year in my room.
With the pi. numb, of the obj. expressed at the verb.
Kq, to take; mik(J ene, I took this.
miki^lQ enemeiy I took these things.
wokj^lQ „ we took these things.
YfQki ene, we took this; etc.
With the pi. number of the subj. expressed at the verb:
ta, to sit; eta, he sit» ametra, amet&ra, they sat.
With the pi. of both expressed at the verb: KQ, to break;
Mikule, I broke it; amekdmoley they broke it; mikfimQ-
ame, I broke them; redupl. form: amekiimokQmQ tSui
le, they broke the houses etc.
The use of the indicative mood is plain; that of the
aorist tense is the same as in Engl, and German the im-
perf., in Latin the perfect, in Greek the aorist tense, it is
the narrative tense.
fi) Neg. voice (init. augm. e and reduplication of the
term, vowel of the verb): Ekeer said i^t mikee, okee ete«
1 stfd w^U I ^d BOt say^ thoa etc«
dbyGoogk
— 106 —
Redp. mikekee: Comb, miyakee, mibakee.
iterat. Misaa mikee: misaa mike.
Perfective. Minaa mikee; mlnaa mike.
With pi. form: Ametraa Si, they did aot sit down Blc.
bb) Imperf. tense (formed by the term. o).
a) Pos. keo, say, use to say. /9) Neg. = aor. s. above
mikeo, I say, use to say.
ok^o, etc.
ek^o, etc.
wok^Qo, we tell thee.
Redupl. kekeo. Comb, mibakeo, yakeo.
Herat, saa-keo.
Perfective: naa-keo?
With pi. forms: gboio; fr. gbo, to die.
amegboio, they die.
amekumokumoS , they break.
amekoIoS nii, they take things.
The imperfect tense (= the latin) is used especially
descriptive, but without limits of time, as the aorist.
cc) Present tense.
a) Pos. (form, by the init. liq. aug.) /9) Neg. = the
aor. or fut. neg. see these.
N. mike, nke, N. is saying; is about to say.
mike, minke, I am saying; etc.
dke, thou art saying,
eke, he is saying.
WQmike, wonke, we are sajing.
nyemlke, nyenke, you are saying,
amemlke, amei^ke, they are saying,
fike, man ^a^t, it is said.
Red. nkeke. Comb, nyake, mbake.
The rest of the forms is analogous to this and not
otherwise efiFected by Uie init. liq. aug.
The present tense is used, as indicafed, when m aetion
dbyGoogk
~ 107 —
is to be staded as {^t now going on or about to be ddne,
wherefore it is sometimes used for the immediate flittirc
and the neg. voice is in this case the same for both. But
when an action is to be represented so, it has also the
present tense even if past; e. g. beni amemfe nakai, ^hen
they were doing so etc.
dd) Perfect tense (init. augm. e).
a) Pos. (with elevation of /9) Neg. (term ko).
voice and a light accent
on the init. augm.):
N. fete, N. has said. N. ekeko, N. has not said,
m\\^, 6ke, 6ke; mikekg, okgko, ek^ko etc.
w^ke, nyfeke, am^ke ^ke.
The other forms are analogous to these. The perfect
tense is used as in English German and Greek with the
difference that sometimes it is used also as the pluperfect
and fut. perfect in Europ. languages. Many verbs are as
in Otyi (and also in Greek) only used in the perfect tense
or change their signification or notion. They shall be re-
. ferred to in the Yocab. The auxiliary v. na and sa only
have the neg. form, the notional verb belonging to them
not (see this through all the tenses), as: en^o feba, he
^ not yet come. Comp. form pos. ^bake, neg. ebak^ko;
feyake; eyakeko.
ee) Future tense.
cc) Pos. (init. augm. S). p) Neg. (init. augm. e and
term. liq. aug.)
N. ake, N. will say. N. ekgn, N. will not say.
make, I shall say. miken, I shall not say.
ooke, thou wilt say. * okeA, etc.
eekfi, he Mill sj^. ekei, „
Wijoke, we will say. wokeA, „
nyeake, you will say. my^^j «
dbyGoogk
— 108 —
I they will say. amekeii, I shall not say.
aiiieake> i
amake»
aake, man roiib fagen,
it will be said.
Red. pos. akeke, adsodSoi (s. § 19) etc. neg. edSodSoilk.
Comb. ab^ke» ayake; ebakefi, eyakeifi etc.
Iterat. masa make; misaA mike (or mikeA?)
Perfective: mana make; minaA make (or mikeA).
With an obj. makeo; mikeAo.
With pi. forms: makijlo; mikolo^*
„ „ rt makdmo; mikOmgn; etc.
The future tense is generally employed as in other
languages; its form is a remnant of the auxil. ?. ba, to
come^ and as we have seen the present tense (ee) employed
for the immediate future and both having only one neg.
voice, it may be that this future tense is of a later origin.
Besides the strict use of this form for a relation of time,
it sometimes seems to express a relation of modality too
(Comp. Riis Ot. Gr. § 178) as the nature of this tense
as well as the form of it implies such a double use; e. g.
mate (fut. t. of the defect, v. ya, to go), I will go, i(J
loiO obex tt)etbe %ti)tn; miyan, neg. I will not go etc. but
the form of the potential mood, pos., being nearly the
same as that of the future tense in the pos. voice, and
more-over the fut. tense pot. pos. being also formed by
the init. aug. a, it is impossible to distinguish both forms,
as there is also much identity betwixt the nature and use
of both (see b.).
b) The potential mood.
§ 39. The pot. mood pos. is formed by the init.
augm. a, if not combined with a subj. pronominal augment,
after this the ^a*^' drops and is only indicated by a sharp
accent on the pron. aupnent. The neg. voice of it, as
dbyGoogk
— 109 —
that of the impert. mood is formed by the prefix ^ka''.
The pot. mood is used to express a command, will or
wish of the person speaking, if not expressed directiy in
the imperatiye mood and is therefore often applied like
the Greek optative. It always follows the imperatiye mood,
if a sentence is begun wi(h this, because the imperative
mood (combined with an expressed or not expressed voca-
tiye case as its subject), can only initiate sentences. If
such an imperat. is the pi. numb. (sec. pers.) which has
the term. aug. a (§ 18), the following pi. potential moods
take this termination also. —
According to the nature of this and the following mood
they cannot be conjugated throughout all the tenses; nor
is it possible at present to show the exact limits of them,
as their forms are so very much limited and difficult to
be found out. The auxiliary verb hS, to give, to let, is
therefore also frequently employed to express both of them.
aa) Aorist tense (without a form indicating it).
a) Pos. /?) Neg.
N. ^ke, N. shall say. N. ak^ke, N. shaH not say.
mike, 1 will say. . mikdke, I shall „ „
6ke» thou shall say. ok^ke* thou shall „ „
ike, he shall say. ek^ke, he shall „ „
w($ke, wQkea, we shdl say. wok^ke, WQk^k^; we shall
not say.
nyike, nyikea, you shall say. nyek^ke, nyekAkea.
amtte, am^kea, they shall say. amek^ke, amekAkea.
Ake, Mea, it shall be said. aUike, akttea,
The rest of the forms, if employed, are analogous to
these. About the combination of the potent, mood wi
the imperat., see the latter c. cc.
bb) Future tense.
a) Pos. (m the ind. pos.) /9 Neg.
ftke* dUike*
dbyGoogk
110 -^
make.
maUike?
ooke.
ook^ke.
eeke.
eek^. •
wooke(a).
MrQok^ke(a).
iiyeake(a).
nyeak^ke(a).
aineake(a).
ameak^ke(a).
dake(a).
aak^ke(a).
abake(a).
ak^ale(a).
ayake(a).
ak4yake(a).
Aakayakumokumo tSui le, man foQ nxi)t %ti)t\\, btefe
^ciufer dbjubred^en, these houses shall not be (going to
be) broken down!
There are perhaps many more forms of the pot. mood;
several tilnes* a present tense occurred to me in sentences
like: kahS ndQo, let it not grieve thee; but it is a matter
of course that many of these forms and also of those men-
tioned occur very seldom and it suffices therefore to show
the general way of their formation.
c) Imperative mood.
§ 40. The imperative mood, which has in the
pos. voice 2. pers. sing, either the simple root or the
lengthened root or the term, mo without expressing the
person (the vocative, which forms the subj. of it), and in
the 2* pers. pi. the subj. pronominal augm. with the term,
aug. a (§ 18), in the neg. voice the prefix ^ka**, has no
tenses except the present or aorist as we may call it. It
is used to express a direct command, wish, prayer efe.
and therefore only initiates compound sentences, all the
following verbs depending on it take the potent. mooA,
only the plural term. augm. a terminates also the (plun)
verbs following. It has only the second prs. sing, and plur.
Commands, exhortations, prayers etc. addressed to the 1.
and 3. prs. sing, and plur. are expressed by Ibe impera-
dbyGoogk
~ HI —
tive of the auxiliary t. hS, to let and the potent, connected
with it.
aa) Pes. voice: Ba! Come (thou)! Ny^baa! Come(yee)!
Bi! ask! Bile! ask him! Ny^biale, ask (you) him. Kemo!
•say! Ny^kea, say (you)! Susumo! measure! Ny&usua,
measure (you)! Yake! Go to say! Ny6yak^aame! Go to
tell them I etc.
Combined with a vocative: Anyemi, ba! Brother, come!
Anyemimei, nyibaa! Brethren, come! Ata, ba! Papa, come!
Atamei, nyebaa! Fathers, come! (Comp. § 13, 3.) Mitse,
iemomi neke sane h\ My father, tell me this story!
bb) Neg. voice. K^ke! Don't (thou) say (it)! Nyekd-
kea! Don't (yee) say (it)! K^fe! Nyek^fea! K6ba! Nye-
i^al Awomei, nyek^fea neke! Mothers, do not do so!
etc. etc.
cc) Combinations with the aux. v. h^, to let. To.
express a command etc. to the 1. or 3. prs. sing, and pi.
the impert. mood of „ha" is used with the sec. pers, sing,
and plur. and followed by the pot. mood, as:
or) Pos. Hd n) mike or m^ke^ let me tell!
Ny^hSa mikea or make(a), „ „ „
Hd n\ ike or eeke, let him tell!
Nyehaa 6ke(a) or eeke(a), m » »
Ha ni w(Jya or woote, let us go!
Nyehfta (w(Jyaa) or wootea, „ », „ •
fla v\ am^fe or ame^fe, let them do!
Nyebli am^ea or ameafea, „ „ „
fi) Neg. Kaha ni mdke, let me not say!
Nyek6haa m6ke(a), « „ „ „
Nyek^haa woofea, let us not do!
or Nyehaa wgkifea, ^ « « „
Ha nl ekafe, let him not do!
Ny^hai akabafea nakai, let it not be done sol
etc. etc.
dbyGoogk
~ IIJ —
Sometimes also other tenses are connected with the
impert, of hi, f. i. KahS ndoo tutu! (do. v. impers.
to grieve) let it not grieve thee too much!
Inst in the same way as the imperat. of hS, other
imperat initiating a sentence are connected with following
pot. moods, if the sentence is a compound one, as:
k^mole nl ^ba, tell him that he shall come (i. e. to
come).
F^mo mra ni o6gbe na, be quick that thou get ready!
Ny6yaS ni nyey^floa tsei ke- ba! Go to (or and) cat
wood (trees irreq. pi. of tso, tree) (and) bring
(them-)!
Nyek^yaa, koni nyeakdyaladsea. Don't go, that yon jpay
not be lost! — A peculiar expression is: Kakwe ni
ofe! See! do not do it! in which the original notion
of ka (to venture, to try) seems still to be visible.
About the auxiliary hS is to be remarked that as a
causative auxiliary (as to let, to cause etc. in Engl.) it
can be connected with all the moods and tenses; see To-
cab. and specimen of the language.
B. The inflnitive form.
§ 41, 1. The forms mentioned in § 38 — 40 are the
principal forms directly combined with the verb (compare
about them table Yll at the end of Ais section); parti-
cularities as e. g. plur. forms of veits and whidi, auxi-
liary use of them, the form of their imperat. and inM-
tive, irregularities and defects must be referred to in the
Vocabulary, as the limits of this Outline will not allow us to
insert all here. But we have to speak a few words, be-
fore' we consider interrogatory sentences, about that fonn
of the verb called infinitive, which is ndlher strictly
a mood nor a tense of it, but rather the impersonal
d by Google
— 113 -
Boon signifying the action as an abstract thing or being,
and no longer as an action or moTement. Its correlate is
the personal noun formed of the verb, indicating the sub-
ject of it (femg, making, felo, maker). Its different
forms we saw in Section 2. of the Part I. Its application
is that of a noun and as such it ma^ become the subject
or object of an other verb and its own subject or ob-
ject or both combined with it in the possessive combina-
tion, e. g. ' Trema kanemg M6 mfna, the counting
of cauris is not agreable to me. Gbomei ayiwale taa
Nyoi^mq^ mlihile n5 the hard (headed) ness of men
does not surpass God's kindness. As a noun it may be
connected with an adjective or any other apposition too.
Some verbs require especially such objects, as: le, to know,
to understand, mile femo, kanemo etc., wo, to undertake,
ewoo bs, he did not undertake to come; verbs as: ya, ba,
tsu (to send) etc. have infinitives combined with them as
objects of purpose, a peculiar kind of resultive objects,
and the latter verb has a persona^ppassive object besides:
Eya kwemo (different fr. 6yakwe), 6ba femo, he is going
to look, he is coming to do; etSule ebii akwetno, he sent
him to look after his children but others are combined
withs verbs expressing their objects into double verbs, as:
nyg, to be able; enye efe, he is able to do; mlnyee maye,
I cannot eat; milee yell, I do not know to eat (something
unknown) etc. About the use of the infinitive abso-
lute see § 43, 5. and § 47, 3. It is nearly the same as
in Hebrew. Other forms of the infinitive did not occur to
me in Gd; if it shall be negationed, it most be done ty
an appositive sentence, as: Shomo nl nyeke nyesumgo
le (Ga-speeches |Jr. 1) the service you said you will not
serve etc. Heyeli ni mibee miyee, my (un)belief (which
I do not believe) or by the neg. auxil. verb „d§ee,** §33,
3. etc. Of tenses there is no peculiar infinitive (as f. i.
Zimmermanil, Akra-Gramm. 8
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 114 —
In Otyi) but of the perfect tense some adjectives and
nouns are formed (comp. § 14).
C. Persons of the verb.
§ 42, 1. A few remarks are necessary about ,4he use
of the personal augment subjective and objective of the
verb. The personal pronouns, „e" excepted, refer to real
persons, as there is a strong tendency in the african lan-
guages to distinguish persons and things, concrete and ab-
stract things etc. s. Table VIII.; but the GS-language has
no peculiar form of the pronominal augments for things
and still it shows the same tendency; it therefore seldom
employs pronouns as: mi, o, le, wo, nye, ame, to repre-
sent things, except personified ^ and frequently drops the
pers. pronoun altogether or puts a demonst. pronoun or
a noun Instead, if. referring to a thing; e. g. do-it! cannot
be translated: femgle, but either femo! do (it, the thing
known); or femo nd^femg en^ (see the pronouns § 34)
femo no etc. Sometimes the sing. „e^' is used instead of
„ame,^' if subj. and if referring to a plurality of things
(comp. the sing, form of the verb for pi. neutral nouns and
pronouns in Greek), sometimes the indefinite „a^ can be
used instead, but if obj., generally the pronoun is left out
altogether in such cases. The indefinite pronoun „a" is used
not only to express the passive voice, taking then the place
of the (gram.) subject or having the logical subject for its
object, as: ayimi, man f^lug tnid^, i. e. 1 was beaten etc.,
but also combined . with intransitive verbs, to leave the
person or persons acting undefined, as: ab^, ventum est,
man fam; people came; adso, man tatt|te etc.
2. If the nominal subject canndt inunediately precede
its verb, the pronominal subject is put instead, the same
is done, if the subject stands as an absolute nominative,
dbyGoogk
— 115 —
as: Gbotnei v\ ba mva6 le, nye amete ekoA, the people
who came to me, yesterday they Trent away again. Neke
gbomel ne, amehU, these men, they are not good.
3. The same is the case with the object, if it prece^
des the subject and stands absolutely, though it is fre«
quently left out, as, Minyemi It?, misumoole naakpa, my
brother, I love him very much. Neke nibii ne mihee,
these things I don't buy^elc.
D. iHterrogative sentence or question.
§ 43, 1. The place of the words and parts of sen*
tences of questions do not differ from those of other sen*
tences, nor has the verb a peculiar form (or it, they are
only distinguished by the interrogative voice, as in
other languages and, if necessary, by interrogative
formwords (as in the L. G. and H. lang.).
2. A simple interrogative sentence has always an
interrog. formword. These are: a) The interrogative pro-
nouns and numerals § 34, 35, 3. b) the interr. formwords:
^ni (adsi? = is it?); nto (perhaps Olyi negative = is
it not so?): ^so, then; etc. initiating the sentence, and:
16 (= aid, lo, or); be, neg. of ye, to be, not; mo, then;
moan; term, n (see § 20.) etc. c) Some conjunctions
standing instead of these particles, as: Bele, then; keke
le, no le etc. Comp. § 50. 51 and Vocab.
a. Name ba? Who came? iWeni ofeo? What art
thou doing? Ne gbomg dSile? What man is he? MS
gbomo dsile? Th. s. Te efe ten? How did he manage?
Enyle otaoQ? How miich (or many) dost thou want?
N^gbe oyaS? Whither doest thou go? NSgbe eyo?
Where is it? Te be nl d§i? When is it? Te gbl ni
oba? What day didst thou come? Trema enyie okane?
How many cowries didst thou count? etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 116 —
b. Ani nycsumooini dofi? (Is it that) you no longer
lore me? Ani d§ee nakai ok^? Is it not so thou saidst?
Nto mik^o? Did I not tell thee? ASaam^feneke nil ne?
And so they have done these things? — Am^nu 16?
Have they heard it or (not)? Osumomi, b6? Thou lovest
me, is it not? Ny^ba mo? You will come then? Nakai
nibii le ofeg moan? Such thiogs thou couldst do? Olel^n?
Dost thou know him?
c. Bele ehan? Then he does not come? Keke le
6fe? Then thou wilt do it? etc. — About the answers
to questions under b and c it is to be remarked, that if
they are put in the negative, the affirmative or posi-
tive answer affirms the negation, the neg. answer ne-
gatives it, as: Obaa 15? A (mibaa)! Yes, (sc. I don't
come); or: Dabi (mlba)? No (sc. I am coming).
3. The questions under b and c moreover imply the
questioning of the contrary too and this second question
is indicated by the interrog. particle, e. g. Am^nu lo
(amenuko)? etc. wherefore in double interrogative
sentences there is not always need of them or they take
their place as what they are, sc. conjunctions etc, e. g.
„Mitda lo mitaa?'' Shall I mention (the tale or fable, see
these) or (shall I) not (mention it)? Een lo eben? Is
it true or not?
4. Indirect questions generally differ in GS more
from direct questions than in other languages; f. i. Egbo
16? Is he dead (or not)? Egbo lo egbdko dsl milee;
I don't know whether he is dead or not (lit: He is dead
or he is not dead is [what] I donH know. EdJa d§io,
ebah dSio milee; or: Eeba 0 ebaia 0 milee. Whether
he will come or not 1 don't know. Only the questions
under a, become regular relative sentences as in other
languages: Mile moni ba, I know who came. Minaa
heni ete, I did not see where he went, etc.
dbyGoogk
— 117 —
.^t^otations of questions are either indirectly or
directly introduced, mostly in the latter way: Yabile moni
ba e&d, go, ask him who came to hkn^, or: Yabile ake:
Namo ba eAd? — Yabile ake: EmT eS^ko lo? Go ask him
whether he is not yet comforted?
5. Though .the succession or order of the words of
interrogatory sentences is the same as in others, still
as also Ib these the word which has the accent is either
put in advance or otherwise laid stress upon, this is done
in interrogatory sentences with the word or part of them
which is specially put in question, e.g. Namo ba? Who
came? Eba 16? Has he come? but: Ba eba 16? Has he
really come? (Comp. § 47, 3* and the Hebrew infinitive
absolute). Ledi6njSe eba 16? He himself came?
DSee dSa odSu? ani tSo ot§o? Didst thou not really
steal? wilt thou indeed deny it? Aso dSee dfineofeona*
kai nii? Didst thou not always do such things? etc. etc.
E. Application of tbe anbjective and objective
combination of tbe verb.
$ 44. 1. Every verb has a subject, though in the
imperat. mood it is not always expressed. But the suIh
ject is sometimes only grammatical, the logical sub-*
ject is then either left unexpressed, or is a definition (at-*
tribute) of the graounatical subject, or it takes the place
of the object. The verb ^dSi,"* to be has logically two
subjects, wherefore in European languages ope is called
predicate, the verb copula; but in Gft it has a gramnat.
subject and object as any other verb, only the latter fre^
qnently changes place and form with the former or is left
out (comp. §30,3.)- See § 31.
2. Every verb can or may also have an object, but
not every verb wants it. Those which can be without itf
dbyGoogk
— 118 —
are intransitiYe, those mrhich require it are transitive.
To intransitive verbs the object is sometimes added by
aujdliary verbs. The object may be the same with the
subject and is then reflexive. Also the oliject may be
only grammatical, the logical object being an attribute
or definition of it or otherwise expressed. ^About the dif-
ferent objects see § 32. — If understood without expres-
sion the object may be left out also after trans, verbs.
3. There may be two and more subjects or objects
combined with a verb: this is done by auxiliary verbs or
by the different place of the objects or by simply adding
one object to another, in case there can not be a misunder-
standing, comp. § 31 and 32.
4. As far as the pronominal subjective or objective
augments or combinations are concerned see § 38 — 40.
§ 21. § 34 etc.
a. Subjective combination of the verb.
§ 45, 1. The subject is mostly unexpressed in the
imperat. mood pos. and neg. in the 2. prs. sing., as : FemQ
ene! Do (thou) this! Kafe nakai! Don't do so! A noun
or pronoun in the vocative case which in the imperative
mood takes the place of the subj. must either be implicitly
added or may really precede the imperat. mood also in
the sing, number; in the plu. number thi^ must be done.
But such a vocative may also stand a^ a simple exclama-
tion or interjection and then a verb in the imperat. mood
is implicitly, added; as: „Mit§e!^ (sc. kwemo mi ete.) , my
father! (sc. look at me! or someth. similar). Some nouns
are only used for vocative purposes, as: ata! father! awo!
mother! a few others, if without any other attribute, show
the enit. augment a, as: awu, husband! anS; wife! anye-
mi, brother! because only in the vocative situation <i. e.
spoken to) they can simd without a defining attribute; in
dbyGoogk
— 119 —
all other cases (i. e. spoken ©0 they require a possesaire
attribute, as in English.
2. If the logical is also the grammatical subject,
DothiDg needs be said, but that it immediately precedes
tbe 9erb either in the form of a noun or if this is already
mentioned, in that of a pronoun, or it is cond>ined with
it in the form of a personal subj. augment. But if the
logical and grammat. subject is different, the latter
takes the place of the subject. The following cases are
to be obsenred:
a. The verb expresses an action which its logical
subject suffers, i. e. is the object of, but the active
subject is not mentioned. For these cases we have in
other languages the passive voice, which is wanting in
6a, this therefore is supplied by a grammat. subject,
Damely the indefinite 3 prs. pi. ^a,"* they (man) and the
logical subj. takes place and form of the grammat. ob-
ject, as:
ajimi,^ man f(|(ug mid^, I was beaten,
ajio, « „ bid^/ thou wast „
ayile, „ „ i^n, he (she) was „
ayiwo, n » und, we were „
ayinye, „ „ tn^, you „ „
ayiame, » n Ite, they „ „
ayigbekS„ „ ein Stinb, a child was beaten etc.
This form is of course especially appUed with tran-
sitive verbs (which alone in other languages have a
passive voice), but as the pronoun a is a real subject,
it can ako be applied with intransitive verbs, if the
fiction is to be expressed without a definite subject, e.
g. 6ba, man fam, ventum est; and moreover as every verb
may have an object, the same form is used, if only the
verb and its object are laid stress on and defined, abii
mra, man fam fd()nefl^ people quickly came, aya hmene or
dbyGoogk
— 120 —
ilimene Sya, ^eute ge^t man, to day people are going etc.
Comp. the obj. mei and nii. § 47, 3.
b. The notion of the verb is of a peculiar kind,
H expresses an action ivithont active subject the active
subject of which is not or seldom mentioned, because^ im-
plicitly understood, the logical subject is passive and there-
fore again the object e. g. fe, to want, ef^mi,' I am wanted,
efe Sika, money is wanted; do, v. n. to be hot; v. th to
love; impers. v. to grieve; to, v. n. to be full, satisfied;
imprs. V. to tire; in these two latter cases the grieving
or tiring subj. must not necessarily be mentioned, though
it may be done, e. g.
edomi, it grieves me. etomi, it, tires me, I am tired.
etoo, etc.
etole.
etrowo (pi. form).
etronye.
etroamo.
In these cases the subj. is left out as understood of
itself or is added in a subjective sentence, edomi, ake
oboomi toi, it grieves me that thou didst not obey me;
but it may also be added, as: gbenyfemo tomi, the journey
tired me.
c. We see from these examples, that such impersonal
verbs are somewhat different from those of Europ.
languages; and just those impers. verbs are not
exactly expressed impersonal, but generally have an inse-
parable subject without which the verb can either not be
used at all, or its notion is quite different, they are either
intransitive or trans., and in the latter case their object
may be considered as the logical subj.
aa. Intrans. Nyonmo no, God rains, i. e. it rains.
N. fa, 6. sprenkles, it drizzles.
N. t6e, 6. began, (sc. to rain).
dbyGoogk
-0 „
n
thee.
-Ifi ^
n
him.
-wo »
n
us.
•nye „
n
you.
-ame ,.
w
them,
— 121 —
N. ba, G. comes (sc. to Um).
N. si, G. knocka. it thunders.
fel ye, lit cold eats, it is cold (fel, n. cold ye, t. to
eat, enjoy; to manage, to commit; to trouble,
to knaw, gnaw elc).
bb. Transit,
fei yemi, I feel cold, cold troubles me.
hdniQ ye, to hunger; hdmo yemi, I am hungryi etc.
kamai ye, to thirst, be thirsty, etc. etc,
tSui ye, (the heart eats), to be troubled. mitSui yemi (see
th. sequel), I em troubled.
d. The latter example leads us to the numerous class
of verbs combined with a gram, subject, by which
its notion is modified and which therefore notionally
cannot be separated from it. We have seen their forma?
tion in § 39.
Their logical subject is expressed by an attribute or
definition of the gram, subject, as: he wa, to be strong;
mihe wa, I am strong; yi wa, to be cruel; hie wa, to be
kind; na nd, to be dainty etc. s. § 29» 2.
§ 46. 1. The subject may be a noun or a pronoun
or a sentence, it may be a singular or a plural, and therQ
may be two or more subjects, of which again one may be
active, the other more instrumental, but in every case it
precedes its verb directly and if separated by other words,
must be represented by the pronoun combined with the
verb.
2. The subject generally alone expresses the number
by its sing, or plural form (see § 48 and Table VUI.) but
some verb also express it. But if a verb has a plurality
of different subjects, they are connected by the auxi-
liary verb ,,ke," so that only the first of them takes the
form of a subj., the next that of an object of ke and
therefore only the number of the first agrees with tha|
dbyGoogk
— 122 —
of the rerb-; by the same auxnary instrnmeDtal subjects
are added to the actire subj. Comp. Mikele ta tSa mli,
I with him sit in the room/ but ¥rQtra tsn mli, we sit
ete. Mike tso yio okpongo, 1 witli a stidi beat the horse.
This latter case can be also expressed with „tSo'' taking
the place of the instrumental object: Miyi okpongo tso.
The same form yerb which is used to connect two sub-
ject is also used to express intr. yerbs transitiye, as: Ob-
lay o le ke gbekg le eka U, the girl has laid the child
down (Ut. the girl with the child is lain down). Okele
ta si, set him down! (Ke has no imperat. mood, there-
fore the pronoun „o" is used before it.) In these cases
the second subject becomes the object not of ke only,
but of the transitiye yerbal con^ination „ke-ta Si," „ke-
kd §i, ke-ba, ke-ya, ke-hS etc.
3. If the subject is an (accessary) sentence, this
sentence is treated as one word being geneally one of
the formal nouns § 34, 2. with an adjectiye or appositiye
sentence and the article as a demonstratiye pronoun at
the end of it, which as the Greek article „to" giyes a
unity to it, as: Moni dsi wo-NyoAmo le bo nwei ke
sikpon, Ut. He (the person) who is our God created
heayen and earth. Noni miSe gbeye le ba nuno, what
I feared came oyer me etc. etc. Comp. § SO.
b. Objective combination of the verb.
§ 47. 1. Intransiliye yerbs can either be used tran-
sitiye by an auxiliary yerb, or they are also used transi-
tiyely without one or they may haye an accessary object
of time, place, manner, condition etc. just as transitiye
verbs, and we haye therefore to consider both classes
alike as soon as the former haye any object; to the ob-
jects we count also the adjectiyes if predicatiyely used, ai
stated § 33, because they are treated so by the language*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 123 —
as well as nouns containing a predicate* The regular
place of the obj. and its attributes is after the
Tcrb.
2. As the subject, so also the object may be logical
and grammatical or only grammatical, the logical
object then forming an attribute of the grammatical.
This case with verbs combined with
a gi p. § 29, 3. 4.), if they are tran-
sitiy [the outside), ta-mli, to touch
(the _ upside), to sit upon; ta se, to
touch (the back), to sit behind; ta hie, to sit before, ta
nd or masei» to sit at the side, etc. Eta mi he, he touched
me, etra amemli, he stirred them up; eta okpohgo no»
he sat on a horse; ametra mantse se» they sat behind
the king; — maiitse hie, 66, masei, hewo, — before,
besides, at the side of, around the king etc. Eyeo Awei
ke sikpon ke nso ke nibii K nl yo amemli Iq ke ledientse
ewebii le nl dsi esafo le titri le ang, he rules over
heaven and earth and sea and all things that are therein,
but especially over his people who are his- church, etc.
The noun nhe"^ is also used pronominally = self and the
reflexive object expressed by it, as: Mita mi he, 1 touch
myself; amegba amehe na, they troubled themselves: gbc
kg le ye ledientsQ ehe awui, the child hurt his own self;
miba minon mihe si, just myself I humble etc.
3. The object, the 3 prs. sing, of the personal pronO"
minal augment excepted, has no peculiar place in thQ
sentence. To the indefinite pron. subj. augment ,,a'' answer
the formal noiins ^mo,^ pi. mei and „nd,'' pi. nii or ni^
M as objects, which are often substituted if the obj. is
not definitely expressed and yet cannot be omitted; egbeo
mo, (it kills one), it is mortal; a t^reg mei ke baa,
people are carried hither; elee noko, he knows nothing;
tSu nil, to .work (things) etc.
dbyGoogk
— 124 —
A peculiar kind of objects Meds especially to he
mentioned, yiz. if the yerb used has its own inflnitiye
for its object. As other olijectiyely used infinitives
it is to be considered as a resultive object, but
as the Hebrew infinitire absolute to which it is nearly
similar in use, it is employed especially for the purpose
of giring emphasis to the verb and therefore it generally
takes the first place in the sentence, is negationed instead
of the verb and especially employed in questions in which
the verb itself or the action indicated by it is to be que-
stioned comp. § 43, 5. Bn eba, he is realfy come. DSee
ba eba, Si eye momo; he has not come, but he was
already here. Ba eba 16? Is he really come? Aso
dSee malemo omalcQ ne? Dost thou now not really
tell a lie? Dabi, dSee malemQ mimaleo; no, I do cer-
tainly not tell a lie. Lelen, shomo mike misum(^Qle don,
it is true, (as for) service, I said, I serve him not any
more etc.
4. As to the place of the objects, there is a ceKtoin
order according to which they follow each other, if there
are more then one connected with a verb. If the verb
requires a personal (receptive) object besides a impersonal
one and one of the objects is not joined to the verb by
an auxiliary verb, the personal follows the verb immedia**
tely, the impersonal stands after the personal, the latter
therefore, be it the only object or together with others,
is, if expressed by an objective personal pronoun written
together with the verb, as: Esumomi he loved me;,
ehftle nii, he gave him things; ek6 enyemi Sika, he gave
bis brother gold. The next place is taken by the imper-*
sonal passive, the instrumental and resultive object; the
last place the objects of place, time and manner take, so
that if there are two of these latter, that which has the
most importance precedes the others, if all three are used,
Digitized by VjOOQIC
-- 125 ~
tbe object of place is added at the end by an auxiliary.
Secb are in general always used if the construction of the
sentence would become heavy and unintelligible; besides this
if there are several objects, one of them, requiring more
emphasis, then the others, and especially the object of
time is frequently put before the subject of the verb, the
object of instrumentality if joined by the aux. v. „kfi** ta«
kes the place betwixt subj. and verb as the object of „kfi*^
and is jasi^ treated as a second subject, comp. § 46, 2.
Comp. Esumoomi, he loves me. Amegbe gbomo, they
Mi€|d a man. Efo etade, he washed his cloths. Ebale
Mk^; he gave him gold. Etfale te, he cast a stone at
bim. Et§d numo agbene, he has become an old man now.
£^,>^kropon nm^, he came to Akr. 'o day ; Nmene eba
Akfi^n truka, to day he came to Akropong unexpectedly.
Nye ewomi nydmd darei enyo ye n^itsu h mli beni mije
fane niyenii.le se, yesterday he paid me a debt (of) two
dollars (being) in (-side of) my room after the time 1 had
taken dinner, etc. Comp. § 33, 2. About adjective objects
see § 33, 3.
5. Every object may be expressed in a sentence; these
objective sentences must be treated as one word, as is
the case with the subjective sentences, and as such they
take their respective places. More about them see in the
sequel § 50.
II. Application of the definition of sub-
jects and objects.
§ 48. 1. Before we however precede to show the
apidication of compound sentences in pai^icular we have
dbyGoogk
— 126 —
to speak of the application of forms, words and sen ten*
ces defloing the subject or object as to their class, number
person, quality, quantity etc. Only the first two of these
are expressed by a form, viz. the sing, and plur. form,
all others by form and notional words and sentences, used
as attributes of subj. or obj.; about the former sefe § 13,
3.; § 19, a. § 20. § 25; 26; 34; about the latter § 21 ;
29; 32; 33; 34; 35.
2. The relation of the number and cld9% of nouns
is the only one expressed by inflectional forms of nouns
and adjectives. As far as it is expressed in the rei*
itself and in its pronominal subjective prefixes and objective
sufixes we spoke about it in § 38 — 40. Here we have
to speak about its application to the s^ect and object of
the verb if standing separated from the verb and as it is
the same in objects and subjects as well as definitions or
attributes of these, if nouns, adjectives or pronouns, to
nouns, adjectives and pronouns in general, being an inflec-
tional definition of all. For convenience's sake we speak
A, of the number of nouns, B, of adjectives and C, of
pronouns: A, Nouns have as we have seen in Part I.
Sect 2. (of formations) different forms to express the number,
which partly indicate different classes of nouns. The Afri-
can languages, at least those belonging to the family to
which the Otyi, Ga etc. belong (but comp. also Krapfs
Grammar of the Suaheli language), though they do not
or seldom distinguish sexes and cases of nouns, they dis-
tinguish betwixt personal and impersonal, individual and
collective, concrete and abstract etc. nouns and to this
classification must be partly ascribed the difference of their
forms of number, as these latter were very probable all
and are partly still notional words combined with the
simple stem or other forms of the nouns, to indicate
sometimes the sing, and plur., mostly only the plur. number.
dbyGoogk
— 127 —
These forms of number are either regular or irregular, the
former again either formal nouns or a simple augment.
A. Regular nnmber of notus:
aa. Formal nouns used to indicate it:
a) personal forms: sing, mo, pi. mei; sing, nu, nyo,
pL mei; sing, nu, nyo, pi. hi; sing, yo, pi yei; sing, bi,
pi. bii; sing, -o, pi. bii; sing, tse, pi. tSemei; sing, nye,
pi. nyemei; pi. (i^ithont sing» form) mei; tsemei, bii;
comp. § 25. § 26.
The sing, mo (person) pi. mei is used to indicate
persons without any other distinction, mei sometimes
alone to indicate the pi.:
mo, pi. mei, person. (mei, persons, people).
Nyonrao, without pi. God. tse, pi. tSemei; father,
gbomo, pi. mei, man. nye, pi. nyemei; mother,
lumo, pi. mei, governor. nyemi, pi. nyemimei; ®e^
fcl^mfier.
semo, pi. mei, successor, wu, pi. wumei; husband.
steward,
kramo, pi. mei, soothsayer. n9, pi, nSmei; wife,
tsuieumo, pi. mei, the first Mensamei, pi; Mensa and
person. his people etc,
klentlenmo, pi mei, the first person,
nagbemo, pi mei, the last person, etc. etc.
The masc. sing, -nyo, femin. yo, com. pi mei, is
used as a gentile or a similar termination; and if the sex
is especially to be expressed in the pi also, with the pi.
-hi and -yei; as:
GSnyo, a Gtoan pi c. Gamei, GSpeople; pi m. Gdhi;
GSmen.
Gftyo, a Gftwoman pi c. Gamei, GSpeople; pi f. Gayei;
GSwomen.
dbyGoogk
— 128 —
Ibanyo or nannyo, n. c. pi. nanemei; friend.
blofdnyo, n. masc. blofdmei, pi. c; a European, Europeans.
(but abla from the Ot. abroiYa, pi. ablai, European woman.)
The terminations -nyo, pi. hi; -yo, pi. yei indicate
number and sex, as:
oblanyo, pi. oblahl, a young man.
oblayo, pi. oblayei, a young woman.
The nouns na, pi. hi, man, male, and yO, pi. yei, wo-
man, female, are combined with a lot of pers. nouns, to
indicate sex and number, whilst other pi. forms are used
if the sex is not to be expressed; as:
nyemi, brother or sister (Germ. ®cfc()mfler) pi. c. nye-
mimei.
nyeminu, pi. hi, brother.
nyemiyO, pi. -yei, sister,
hi, pi. bii, child; offspring,
bind, pi. -hi; son, male child.
biy6, pi. -yei; doughter, feniale child.
gbek§, child, little one;^pl. gbek^bii.
gbekgnQ, pi. -hi, -bihl, male children.
gbekgyO, pi. -yei, -biyei, female children.
The same nouns are also used of animals, if sex and re-
lation is to be distinguished. * *
The uoun bl, pi. bii weakened into mi, mil is used as
a filial termination in the widest sense, as a termination
indicating offspring, fruit etc. and lastly as a mere dimi-
nutive termination, as:
bi, pi. bii, child, offspring,
nabi, pi. -bii, grandchild,
tsfibi, pi. bii, fatherchild (6tiefgefcl&tt>ijler).
tobi, pi. -bii, lamb kid.
wobi, pi. bii, honey-child, bee.
tebi, pi. bii, stone-child (Stein d^ en, Stein le in) new tooth,
nolami, pi. mil, star.
dbyGoogk
— 129 —
agbami, mii fig. •
inmotnU -mii a fruit used for soup) see unter /7.
The diminutive termination -o, pi. bii is used, to in-
dicate this relation of persons, as well as of things (see/?),
as: seo, pL sebii successor (with respect to age, rank);
abifao, pi -bii; fufgo, pi. -bii, young, suckling child etc.
The plur. term, bii alone is used to form pers. plur.
nouns, indicating the home, occupation and similar rela-
tions of dependence of these persons: maAbii, pi. n. citi-
zens; webii, domestics; kusebii, country people; asafobii,
people belonging to a company (military expression), ta
mii bii, people of the army; Akroponbii, people of Akro-
pong; nmenebii, people of to day; blemabii, people of
old. Comp. /?.
The plur. tsemei, fathers (and perhaps here and there
to indicate the sex: nyemei, mothers) is used in a similar
way, (comp. for hi, the Hebr. p and ro for tse, bj;D),
without its singular, to indicate citizenship «tc. as: Osu-
tsemei, AkropoAtsemei etc. people of Osu, Akropong etc.
All words combined with tse, nye etc. take of course
also their plural form.
/?) Impersonal forms: -hi and -o, pi. -bii; mi, mii;
no, pi. nii.
The diminutive terminations -bi and -o, pi. bii; mi,
mii; are also used to indicate this relation of things as
well as of persons; and therefore the pi. forms -bii and
-mii are used also of things as collective termina-
tions: as:
wobi, pi. -bii; honey-child, bee. '
lebi pi. -bii, lit. stone-child (Stein (3^ en, StmUxn) new
tooth (in the language of children),
nulami, -mii, star. ^
agbami, -mii, fig.
ZimmermaCnn, Akra-Gramm. 9
dbyGoogk
— 130 —
pempeoy pi. pempebii; (s. adj. pi. forms B), little » graio,
little ball» globule.
kukuQ, pi. -bii; piece (@tii(f^en).
tSatSubii, a kind of ants,
balabii, a kind of locusts,
j'ibii (head-children), fruit (of trees).
nd, thing, pi. nibii, things, little things.
Nd, pi. nii; thing, is the impersonal correlate to the
personal mo, pi. mei, and indicates thing:
tSutSund, pi. tSutSunii, the first (thing),
nagbend, pi. -nii, the last (thing).
ftanO, pi. -nii, implement, etc. etc.
bb* Ftur. termination -i.
But by far the most common reg. pi. form is the ter-
mination i with the modification it requires of the preced-
ing terminational sound of the sing. form. It is applied
to all classes of nouns, adjectives (and numerals), there
being no peculiar sing, form corresponding to it. It might
be called the now plur. form, being a mere form without
signification of itself. A few collective nouns have it, but
others not, having dther no peculiar form at all or the
Otyi collective form (init. lig. augm.) or taking even plural
forms.
Comp. Gbg, pi. gbgi, stranger, kaselg, pi. -i, disciple;
niitSulg, -i, labourer; tSu, pi. tsui, house, room; gbe» -i,
pot; wg, -i; fowl; to, -i, sheep or goat etc.
TSQlg, pi. tSQdsi, servant; wgA, pi. wgdSi, fetish;
nydA, nyddSi, slave; — wolo, pi. wodSi, skin, paper, book;
fla, fadSi, boil; lele, ledSi, vessel etc. S. § 19
TSui (rooms?), heart; toi, ear; kgi. hoe; sunmui or
sumui, lead; abobgi, groundbeans; akwSi, the same if cooked;
lai, fuel; mudSi, dirt; — a dual form: hadSi, twms
dbyGoogk
— 131 —
(comp. Hkn, sheebutter, toia, food; iita» net, any thing
double; etc.),
Dai, (different) lYines; nui (dif.) ivaters, Sikai (dif.
pieces of) gold; IM (dif.) blood etc.
The simple pi. form i distinguishes the impers. ab-
stract termination mo, mo, md (inf. forms) form the pers.
term, mo, as: wiemQ, pi. iviemoi, speaking; ^rord; femo>
-i, act; and lumo, pi. -mei, governor.
B. Irregular pi. forms of noons.
T§o, tree. pi. tSei; nd, thing, pi. nii and nihil; nu,
man, pi. h! (see the reg. Adn. pi. form-hi) and himei; yO,
woman, pi. yei; nyOft, night, pi. nyOnyOA? (perh. rather
nightly). The sing. term, nyo has sometimes only the
pi. term, i, as: wolenyo, fisher, pi. wolei, asrafonyo, sol- *
dier, pi. asrafoi etc.
Many nouns have naturally no pi. form, because they
are collective; of others having none the cause is not so
plain, these are: hie, face; we, house, dwelling place
(comp. sia and tSu) be, time; he, place; bg manner etc.
we, he, bo, sfa and some others have also no formal
noun, indicating locality connected with them, e. g.
ameyaa amewe le, they go to their house(s) (Comp.
Am§yaa tsu mli, they go into the room), miya sla, 1 go
home, ebe heko, he is in no place, nowhere, because they
themselves serve as such and this may also be the reason
of their having no plural. — Comp. Table Vlll.
C. Number of adjectives.
a. The adjectives generally have the pi. form i without
a peculiar sing, form, but with the same modification ef-
fected by the i; as: Ekpakpa, pi. -i, good; ef§n, jd. efd-
9*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 132 —
dSi bad; ey^h, pi. eyedSi, ¥fhite; edin, pi. edidsi, black;
momoi and irreg. mcmedSi, old; wulu, pi. wudSi, great>
large etc.; kronkron, pi. kronkrol, clear; kron, pi. krol,
simple, pure etc.
b. Those which have the sing, diminutive term. „o,"
have the pi. -bii, as the nouns of this kind: bibio, pi. bi-
bii (=:bibibii), small, little; pepeo, -bii, small and round;
kukuo, -bii, short etc. but fefeo, beautiful has fefeoi, except
applied to a diminutive noun.
c. The form of the adjectives formed by a reduplica-
tion of the plur. form of nouns (§ 22, 2. e.) excludes no-
tionally and formally a farther pi. formation.
d. Numerals take the pi. form just as adjectives, as:
ekomei, some (fr. ekome, one], nyohmai, tens; ohai, hun-
dreds; akpei, thousands; but by: enyo, two — nehO, nine
reduplication is applied to indicate their only possible
plurality, as: enyo enyo, two and two, by twos.
D. Number of pronoims.
a. Formal or radical pronouns express the dif-
ference of number by entirely different forms of the words,
as: mi, 1, wo, we etc. but
b. Notional pronouns or nouns used as formwords
take the same pi. form they have as nouns with some
little irregularities, or none at all, comp. § 34 and Table
V and VUI.
3. a. The pi. form of compound nouns and pro-
nouns is generally applied to both components and if the
qualifying component is a preponed plural, the funda-
mental component has the indefinite possessive pronomial
augment „a'' besides; as:
niiatse (pi. of ndtSe, possessor of a thing) possessor of
thiogSi rich man; mantsemei abii, children of kings (kings'
Digitized by VjOOQLC
— 133 —
children) princes; maiitSemei, kings (pi. of mantSe); but
if the difference of their town or country is to be ex-
pressed: mddsi atSemei; gbekSnu, a male child, gbekebii
hi or gbekgbihl, male children; tSeiayibii, fruit oftrees,
etc. mokpakpa, a good man, pi. meikpakpai etc.
b. The pi. of the verb, if it has a plur. form, some-
times corresponds with the pi. of the subject, sometimes
with that of the object, sometimes with both, comp.
§ 38—40 and the Vocab., also Table VII.
d. In a few cases the sing, pronom. augment „g^ of
the verb corrsponds with a plur. imprs. noun (comp.
$42, 1.) because the plur. pronom. augm. „ame'' has a
personal character, in most cases this is not noticed, or
the collision entirely avoided.
§ 49. 1. If the subject or object of a verb is a per-
sonal pronoun combined with the verb, not only the num-
ber and class but also the person is defined by it, but
if a noun or pronoun stand separately the person must be
destinguished. This is generally only necessary with sub-
jects and objects in the first and second person, most
separately expressed subj. and obj. being the third person;
but if the first and second person is not clearly defined
with the personal pronoun connected with the verb, a
noun connected with the independent form of the pronoun
must be used, as: Mi, Anan, ba, I AnaA came. Bo,
Kwate, yile, thou Kwate didst beat him. Edse mi, numo,
be scolded me an old man. Edsie bo, wolenyo le» 16?
Did he save thee the fisherman? etc.
2. But with this kind of personal distinction we have
already entered the province of attributive distinction or
definition in general. This distinction is made by nouns,
adjectives, adverbs, numerals and pronouns a^ well as
sentences expressmg such, combined with the subject or
object as shown in § 23 — 35 ; in one and the same sen-
dbyGoogk
- 134 ^
ience several of these attributes may be used, and as the
subject as ivell as the object may also be expressed by
sentences, every part, of a simple as well as a compound
sentence, as far as it centres in one verb has been trea-
ted; only about the combination of these sentences and
the use of the conjunctions, by which they are connected,
and about the connection of independent sentences, having
each an own central verb and the conjunction used for
this purpose, we have to add some remarks.
IIL Application of compound sentences
and conjunctions in particular.
1. Compoand sentences centring in one verb.
§ 50. In compound sentences either the subject or
the object of the central verb or an attribute of the sub-
ject or object is expressed with a sentence instead of a
word; wherefore these sentences are treated by the lan-
guage respecting their place and the formwords defining
them as one word.
a. Subjective sentences are either those in whidi
the subject is expressed with a sentence preceding the
verb to which they confain the subject, or such as expre^
a grammai. subject and follow the object being joined to
the principal sentence by the conjunction „ake,^ that; as:
Moni dsi WQ Nyonmo le bg nwei ke sikpon. Pr. 28:
„Moni taoomi nakai le, em! eSe ehe."* Pr. 135.
Pr. 149: „Noni bako da le, eye nSo sg,** Meini
sumoQ Nyonmo le sumog amenanemei hu. Niini ndd
mina eba mine. All sentences of this kind may be also
considered as adjective sentences , because the words
dbyGoogk
~ lis —
^mdniy meini, noni, mini, heni, beni, boni" can be resolyed
into a formal noun (mo, nd, be, he, bo) and the relatiYe
nl (Comp. § 34). The second subj. sentence in Pr. 28
e4>irtaiiis only the logical sabj., mi being the gramm. one.
— An other kind of snch sentences are those having a
conditional sentence as subj. as: Ke moko sumomi le
d>oonu toi, if any body love me he obeys me = Moni
sunooomi le boomi toi. OsumoQmi dSikule obogmi toi,
if thou would love me, thou wouldst obey me. Comp.
Job. 8, 19. etc.
The other kinds of subj. sentences express only a
preceding gram. subj. of an impersonal verb, as: Edomi
ake ofe ene, it grieves mi, that thou didst so = ofema
ne domi, this thy doing grieves me. Efe Sika, ake a*
kpdle» money is wanting to redeem him.
b. Objective sentences are similarly construed, but,
as the obj. itself, far more multifarious. They are joined
to the principal sentence either by relative substant. or ad-
vert)ial pronouns containing the corresponding noun or
demonstr. pronoun also, or by various conjunctions or
without any; as: Milee moni ba, 1 don't know who
came. Mafe noni misumoQ, I shall do what I like.
„Moko yaa heni aagbele/' nobody goes to (a place)
where they will kill him. Milee beni mibagbo, I
don't know when I shall die. TSdmdmi boni mafe.
Show me how to act. Kemomi ddni minuyemokro*
ko na, tell me before I hear it from.another. Womi
gbe koni maya, dismiss me that I may go. Hdminoko
n\ maye, give mi something to eat, or shorter: Himi
noko maye. „Hdmi nQ mauQ,** give me water I will
drink i. e. to drink.
Minu ake otSemi, 1 heard that thou calledst me.
Ele ake ebeh, he knows that it is not true. Ebile
ake: »Te oyg ten?"" He asked him (saying): How
dbyGoogk
— 136 —
art thou? Ekpami fai, ake mihSle gbe. He begged
me to give him leave. Kwemo ake eye dsei 16!
Look whether he is there or (not)! Amebu wQfS
tfem ake bului dSiwQ, they consider us altogether that
we are fools = as fools. Efeg ehe tamo nyontso
dientSe, he bears himself (is) like the master himself.
^Oke wohe eSai le afawo tamo boni woke -faa meini
feo efoA siowo le!" Lit. Take our sins forgive us
like as we lake (and) forgive them who do evil (and)
ofiTend us. = forgive us our tresspasses as we forgive
etc. Eba mli take (= tamo ake) boni mike; it came
to pass as 1 said. Blofdmei leo nii fe meidid§i, Euro-
peans know (things) more than black people = Blo-
fdmei aniile fe meididSi and, the knolledge of Europeans
surpasses that of black people. Mfsumo ene fe ake
noni ob^male, 1 like this better than if thou wouldst
tell a lie. — Eba mind, edsake esumoomi, he came
to me because he loves me. Eke akesi elee neke
sane ne. . He said that he does not know this mat-
ter, D§e na hewo le ese gbeye, it was night there-
fore he was afraid. (Comp. Connection of independent
sentences.)
Very frequently the objective sentence precedes its
principal being in this represented by a pronoun or not;
if the obj. sentence contains a conditional object of manner
or of causality, it is generally put in advance. The pro-
nouns and conjunctions connecting both sentences remain
the same. Conditional conjunctions are: ke> kedsi (neg.
kedSee, comp. § 35, 4.), dsi, dsikule, kule etc.
„Ke d§e na le gbomei K dio," Pro. 11. If it is
night all men are black. Comp. Pro. 12. 14. 16. 17. 23.
24. 33. Prv. 36. 52. 57 etc. (Ke and kedSi are most-r
ly construed with the aorist tence, never with the
imperfect. Eba dSi milee, I don't know whether he
dbyGoogk
— 137 —
came. Ebaa dsikule misumo. Would he come I
would like it. Job. 11, 21. 32.: „Owura, ona oye bie
dsikule )ni qyemi le nan agbo!^ „Lord, if thou hadst
been here> my brother had not died.^
Comp. Pr. 45. 90 etc. Moni sumoo b6i le> akele
abe, he who loves quarrel, with him people will quar-
rel Noni ii6 ona le, no non oke afite ohe, what is
pleasure to thee, even by that thou wilt ruin thyself.
Beni eba le, mite momo, when he came, 1 had alrea-
dy gone. „Heni gwanten sumoo le dsei endg eyeA
etaa," where the sheep loves it there it puis its white (spots)
Prv. Bgni otsuQ onii le nakai awoQo nydmd, as thou
workest, so thou shalt be paid etc.
c. Attributive sentences are those by which a sub-
ject or object is defined or distinguished, standing instead
of a possessive preponed component or a adjective or ap-
positive postponed component (§ 30). They follow the
word or sentence they define as adjective sentences
being joined to them by the adj. relative pronoun „nl**
„who, which;" or they precede it as substantive
sentences, initiating with the substant. and adverbial re**
lat. pronouns: moni, noni; beni, heni, bgni; as: Pr. 13.:
Nu nl ake bagbe la le, ataoole krohkron, water by
which fire is to be quenched people do not want
clear. Pr. 20. 21. 96. 97.
Moni dsi mantSe le hi ba, the son of him who is
the king came. „Moni hdmd ye le ni egbo le, abii
edeka si,'^ after the box of him who died by hunger
people do not ask. Pr. ^HiefimalQ be n) afeo ebii ahe,*'
when (left out) the leopard Is absent; than they play
with his young ones. — Only with the absent leopard's
young ones people play.
dbyGoogk
— 138 ~
2. Compound senteaces centring in different verbs
(Co-ordinate sentences).
The relation betwix) sach sentences is expressed as
copulatiye, adversative and causative by the re-
spective three iLinds of conjunctions, or if the
relation is manifest by itself^ the sentences may be joined
without copjunction at all.
a. The most general copulative conjunction is ^ni,*'
„and** (to be distinguished from ^nl,^ who, what rel. proo.
and conj.); it joins the sentences simply to each other,
miya ni dba, 1 am going and thou art coming etc. A
peculiar use is made of it, though seldom, in sentences
hke: „AwgQ ni alaa,^ lit.: people do not sleep and not
dream = without sleep no dream; but this use is more
proverbial; in common language people would say: KedSi
awoOy alaa.
The disjunctive conjunction „alo, lo,*' or;"" is used
also just as in English: Obaa lo obaa? Dost thou come
or not? Ewo9 alo etsuo nii, he sleeps or he is busy.
The conjunctions ekole -alo = either -or. Ekole eeba
alo mIya n) mi miyasrale, either he will come or I will
go to visit him. About questions see § 43.
The verbal conjunction „dSi, dSio, -o^ is used like
the Engl, ^whether*' and „dSio-, -o; dsio, -o = whether
-or. Wodio dsio woyeo dsio wofg tfem gbomei d8iwQ,
whether we are black or white, we all are men. Ebaa
d§i milee, 1 don't know whether he comes.
The verbal conjunction „asa, asan** (see the auxil. v. sa)
is used like the Engl. „also'' „if'' referring to whole sen-
tences, single words or parts of a sentence have only ad-
ded the adv. * ^ha*" which expresses the same: Gbogbo-
tfolQ dSimiy ni asaA (or ni misa) mifgO minyontSg nii ahe^
d by Google
— 139 —
I am a mason, and 1 also wash my masters cloth. (But:
mihu rnifb^ minyontso nii ahe =^ I also wash etc. I too
wash etc..
b. The particular adversatiye coi^junction is „Si,"
„hut" (very probable originally the same as „ni" and by
old people still used so, both deriving from the verb d§i).
ProT. 31. Bo le oke ona nanyo kpakpa, si olee noni ekeo
ye ose, thou say est thou gotst a good friend, hut doest
not know what he says behind thy back. Prv. As an ad-
versative conjunction generally requires a corresponding
conceding conjunction or particle (comp. the greek fi€V
-rff) sometimes „mon." (it is true), jn?at fuv, is put, but
generally only an other emphasis is given to that part
which is to be contradicted (see above: Bo le oke> si ...,
thou sayest . . . , but etc.). If the first sentence is to
be entirely revoked also this emphasis is not necessary:
Comp. Misumole mon, si misumoo eniitsumo ne, him 1
do love, but 1 don't love this his business; and Prv. 35.
Moko fee hatso sisi, si nokotSo §i§i afeQ» nobody plays
nnder a thornbush, but under the ngkQtree (a fruit tree)
people play.
c. The principal causative conjunctions are: hewQ,
nohewo (always followed by „le" or „ni") hence, there*
fore; edsake (= edSe or edSi ake), etfake (=etSd ake).
ef9ake» because, for; sometimes „si^ alone is also
used for the latter or. connected with edsake etc. as: Ehe
miye hewo le eban, he is sick, therefore he does not
come. Edsu noko, nohewo le awole tsun, he stole
something, therefore he was put in prison. Enyen eba,
ed§ake ehe miye, he cannot come, because (or for) he is
sick. Etsu ebi keba; si ledientse enaa dekd, he sent his
son (hither), for he himself has no time. Efee, edSa-
kesi akekole dsogban, he did not do it, for it has not
been welltold to him, etc.
dbyGoogk
— 140 —
Sometimes several of these conjunctions are used and
sentences connected by them may be considered as hav-
ing only one central verb, the conjunctions (see §35, 4.)
being often still used as auxiliary verbs.
How two or more sentences are connected into one
by auxiliary verbs, especially „ke," and how two verbs
are connected without conjunction at all we have seen
§ 28. 31. 44 ff.
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
- u? ^
The forms of the
L Indi^iiTe
Positive voice.
Aarist
Simple form.
Plural form.
Freqaenlative.
Compound forra*
(ke, to say).
(ku, to break).
(wie to speak).
(fe, to make).
N. ke, N. said.
N. kumg nii.
N. wiewie.
N. bate.
mik^, 1 said.
mikuiiiQ nii.
miwiewie.
mibate.
etc.
okumo nii.
owiewie.
obaf6.
ok^.
ekumo nii.
amewiewie
ebatt.
eke.
wQkumo nii.
etc.
wobaf6.
woke.
nyekumo nii.
(ku, to break).
nyebaK.
nyeke.
amekumQ nii.
mikuku uoko.
amebaf^.
ameke.
akumo nii.
mikumokumo
abaf6.
ak^.
(ta, to sit).
nii.
N. yate.
N. ke gbotno.
(mita §i
akurngkOmg
miyaW.
mikeo, 1 told
Ota §i
nii.
oyate etc,
thee etc.
eta si),
(ta, to touch).
ameyatr^ si.
ok^mi.
WQtra si.
mitatan.k.he.
ameyakdimg
ekele.
nyetra §i.
mitratra nii
nii.
wokeo.
ametra si.
ahe.
ameyagboi.
nyekewQ.
atra &l
ametratra nii
ameyaf6fe.
amekenye.
(gbo, to die).
ahe.
ameyatratra
akeame.
amegboi etc.
(ta si, to sit
si.
akeame noko.
down).
amebad§odS6i
etata si.
etc.
ametratra §i.
(d§o, to dan-
ce).
/
amedSodsoi
.
etc.
N.k^QjN.says
or said.
mik^O.
ok^Q. etc.
N. kCimo6 nii.
mitraa ainehe
etc.
ametraa Si.
N. wiewieo.
mikQkug.
amekumekQ-
mQfi.
Imperfeci
N. bateo.
N. yateo.
miyaf^Q.
dbyGoogk
— t43 —
Table VIL
yerb $37—40-
BOOd § 38.
NegatiTC voice.
tense.
Simple fonn.
Plural.
Freqaentative.
Compound form.
(fe, to make).
(tfia, obj. pi.
(fu, to swell).
N. bakee.
N.efee, N.did
of tfa, to
mifufuu.
miyakee.
not do.
strike).
ofufuu. '
ameyafee e'c.
mifee.
N. tfiaale tei.
efufuu.
nyebawiewiee
efee etc.
mitliaa ame
wQfufuui.
ameyakpleke-
(ba, to come).
nii etc.
p.yefufuui.
kplekeeetc.
N. ebaa'
wotraa §i.
amefufuui.
amebatratraa
N. baa.
nyetraa Si.
afufnui,
§i.
mibaa etc.
ametraa §i.
atratraa si.
ameyakumo-
(tfa.yto strike).
atraa §i.
akQmokumoo.
kumoo etc.
N. tfaale nd.
(and ataa gi,)
amegbogboii.
ameyakoloo*
mitfaaondetc.
wogboii.
etc.
wobakoioko-
ametraa o nd.
nyegboii etc.
mikolokolQQ
loo /
atfaale no etc.
mikumoQ nii.
nii.
ameyabgboo.
(sumo, to lo-
okQmoo nii.
wokolokoloo
nyebasusuu.
ve).
amekumoonii.
nii etc.
etc.
N. swnoQ
(ko, obj. pi.
ameboboo re-
nakai.
kolo to
dupl. see.
(tao, to seek).
take).
roots.
imtaoole etc.
mikoloo nii.
amesusuu re-
dupl. sec.
roots.
tense.
The same as the aorist tense.
dbyGoogk
- 144 -
Positive voice.
L bdicatirt
Imperfect
Simple form.
Plural form.
Frequenlatlve.
Compound form.
ak^omi.
amegboie.
ametratr^a §i.
oyaKe.
ak^oo.
ete.
amedsods6ie.
etc.
akeole etc.
«
etc.
ameb^a.
amehaa.
amekciQ.
,
f. Present
N. mliike N.
N.ntraamehe.
N. nwiewie.
N. mbafe.
is saying.
amenkumo.
N. ntratra
N. nyafe.
N. mike N. is
(bu si, to lie
amehe.
5bafe.
saying.
down).
amembibi si.
eyake.
N. nke N. is
amembumosi.
amenyeye nii.
abadSodsoi.
saying.
etc.
etc.
etc.
mmke, mike.
oke.
eke.
wonke.
nyehke,
'
amenke ake.
N. feke,N.has
said,
mike.
6ke.
%ke.
woke,
nyfeke.
am^ke.
ike.
ikemi.
N. fekdmo nii.
mlkumo etc.
mitra amehe
etc.
am^gboi
Gbomei fegboi
ete.
N. fetratra
amebe.
am^kumoku-
mo nii etc.
am^dsodsoi.
Yei le 6dso-
dsoi 6tc.
Perfect
N. 6bake.
N. feyake.
miyake, etc.
mlbake, etc.
dbyGoogk
— 145 —
Tftble VIL
«88.
tense.
Negative voiGe,
Sinple form.
Plural.
Frequentative.
Compound form.
The same as the aorist tense.
tense,
N. efeA, s. fut.
tense,
or N. efee, s.
aor. tense.
The
or
same as m
flitare
the aorist
tense.
tense.
N. ek^ko, N.
N. ekum6ko
N. etratr&ko
N. ebak^ko.
has not said.
nii.
amehe.
N. eyak^ko.
mik^ko.
N. etrfto
amekumokn-
etc.
ok^ko.
ameke.
mgko.
ek^ko.
ametr^ko Si.
etc.
WQk^ko.
amegboiko
nyek^ko.
etc.
amek^ko.
ak^komi.
etc.
Zimmerroann, Akra*Gramm.
10
dbyGoogk
— 14« -^
P0Biti?e voiee.
Futwn
9iin|yie.forRi.
PiQfM fortn*
Frequentative.
Componnd fonm
N. wfike or
N. akOmo nii.
N. atratra
N. abake.
&ke.
etc.
amehe.
N. ayake.
N. will say.
Gbemdi^fmL
mawiewi^.
roayake.
make.
etc.
oowiewie.
oovake.
ooke.
ame&tra Si.
Yei le adso-
eeyake.
eeke.
etc.
dsoi etc.
aayake. etc.
wooke.
■ .
nyeake.
ameake, ama-
u.
aake. .
i
«
2. Potential
Aori9i
N. ake, N.
N. dkumo.
N. atratra a-
N. ^bake.
shall
mfkumo etc.
mehe.
N. ^yake.
or must say.
am^tra Si.
N. ^wiewie. •
mfbake.
mfke.
ametraa Si.
miwiewie.
6bake.
6ke.
am^gbot.
etc.
aake.
6ke.
am^gboia etc.
Yei le ^dSo-
wiJbake.
miJke, wiJkea.
dSoi.
wdbakea.
ny^ke, w6-
Yei le «4So.
etc.
k^.
dSoia.
ameke, ^^-
kea.
«ke, dkea.
Pre^eii^
nke,ameinke?
1 See % 39.
1 at the end.
dbyGoogk
M9V« 9 3S*
— IIT —
Negative toiee.
Table Til
Simple form.
Plural form.
Frcqdentative.
Compound form.
N. ek66.
N. ckumiJii.
N. elratran
N. ebakift.
mik^fi.
mikumoft.
amehe.
N. eyafcA.
oUn.
ametri&n §i.
amewiewieft.
mibawiei^.
ek^n.
amegboin.
amedSodSoiii.
oyakumoA n!i.
elc.
elc.
etc.
etc.
mood. $ 39.
tense.
N. akae.
mik^ke.
okdke.
ek&ke.
wok^e, wo-
k^kea.
etc.
N. ak&kumQ
nil.
mikdkuroo nii.
mikikolg nii.
amek^tra §i.
amekdtraa §i.
amekdgboia.
etc.
N. ak^tratra
amehe.
mik^kuku.
ainek^kumQ-
kumo nii.
amekttumo-
kumoa nii.
elc.
N. akibake.
N. akayake.
mik^yake*
wok^yake.
WQk^yakea.
ak^yakea.
elc.
10*
dbyGoogk
T»bl« vn.
— 148 -
Positive Toioe.
2. Pakottal
^tOure
Simple Ibrm.
Plural forn.
Freqoemative.
Compouod form.
N. ake.
N. akumo.
N. awiewie.
N. abake-
make.
ameatra Si.
etc.
n fiyake.
ooke.
aiB^atraa Si.
etc.
eeke.
wooke, woo-
kea.
etc.
3. ImperttiYe
ba! cornel
ki^omo!
susamo !
b&fe!
n^^baa! come
ny^kQlga!
titimo!
y^kwe!
(yon)!
Kmo, do (it)!
ny^traa Si!
nyedSodSoia!
nyebSkea!
ny^fea , do
nyekdmoa!
etc.
nyeytfda!
(you it)!
Infinitii
re forms.
Root.
fe,femo,doing.
kiJlomg.
susumo.
is wanting.
ba,bd, coming.
Sitramo.
titimo.
dSa,d§d, divid-
kdomo.
wiewfemg.
ing.
etc.
etc.
„ sale, fitting.
„ samo, pre-
paring.
ye, yeli, eating
i
dbyGoogk
Mod. § 39.
tense.
mood.
kdba! don't
come !
nyek^baa !
ktfe!
Dyektfea!
I4d ^
Negative voice.
Simple form.
Plural form.
FrequentaliYe.
Compound form.
N. akake.
makake ?
ameakake.
ameakakea.
etc.
N. akakumQ
nil.
makakumo
nii?
etc.
makawiewie?
makayake?
k^Qlo!
nyek&koloa!
nyek&traa Si !
etc.
kawiewie!
nyekawiewiea!
etc.
kabafe!
nyekabafea!
etc.
Personal form.
Root.
fe, felo, maker. ta, sing, form talo» sitter,
yc, yelQ, yelilo, eater. plur. form tralo, sitter.
kO, kulQ, breaker. wiewielQ, murmurer.
Remark to Table YII. Some of these forms of the
verb, especially plural, frequentative and compound forms
and forms of the potential have not yet occurred to me
and are only indicated according to the analogy of the
others, as naturally of so many forms some very seldom
are used.
dbyGoogk
-- 160
*»bie vm.
Glutei iiil Bulbar of noui.
§48.
Concrete personal nouns.
^
Singular.
Plural
Gender.
mo; man» person
mei, people
common.
semo, successor
semei
M
lumo, governor
lumei
n
tSe, father
tSemei
m.
n^e, mother
nyemei
f.
ata, father!
alamei!
m.
awo, mother!
awomei!
f.
(a)nyemi,®efd^»ijler!
nyemimei !
com.
(a)wu, husband!
awumei !
m.
(a)na, wife!
anamei !
f.
na, man
hi, htaiei
m.
y5, woman
yei (yeimei?)
f.
ni, grandfather
nimei
m.
na, grandmother
namei
f.
Ganyo, Gaman
Gamei
c.
Blofonyo, European
Blofomei
c.
nanyo, friend
nanemei
c.
Si^ntSe, friend
siSntgemei
m.
Sienye, friend
sienyemei
f.
niiatse, rich person
niiatsemei
c.
helatse, sick ^
helats§mei
c.
Mensa, n. pr.
Mensamei
c.
iE^%mM
Hh
nyemiyo, sister
nyemiyei
bti
I
ii, child (sonordaugh-
e.
ter)
Uqu, son
biU
m«
biyo, daughter
biyei
I
gbekg, child
gbekebii
c.
gbekSdfu, mate child
gbek^bihi
m.
gbekdyo, female child
gbek^biyei
f.
oblanyo, youth
oblahl
m.
oblayo, maid
oblayei
f.
wolenyo, fisherman
wolei
c.
asrafonyo, soldier
asrafoi
m.
dbyGoogk
^Me VJLLL
eiisies mi ivrtir tf loilf. ft 4a
CkmerHe per$mial muns.
Stngalar.
Plural.
jGeader.
okulafo, widowed per-
son
okalafoBu, widower
okulafo^o, widow
ohiafo, poor person
odasefo, witness
adsindfo, counseller '
gbo, stranger
tsulo, servant
ny5n, slave
odehe, free person
elc.
okulafoi
okulafoh!
okulafoyei
ohiafoi
odasefoi
adiindfoi
gbQi
tsDdSi
nyddsi
odehei
etc.
commoa.
m«
f.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
Ckmcrete personal cdUecUve nouns
OsutSemd, Osu-
people
c.
kusetSemei, country*
people
c.
manbii, citizens
c.
AkropofilMi, citizens
(d AkropoA
c.
asafo, company
asafoi
c.
akatSo, tribe
akutSei
c.
m96, nation
mddsi
e»
ta, army
tai
c.
weka, family
wekuiy wekumei
c.
webii, domestics
e.
(tabilo, a warrior)
tabii, tabiloii people of
the army
c.
Persi
Tnal diminutive nouns.
bi, child, yoimg one
bii
c
abifiio, litUe chUd
abif&bti
a
fafoo, suckling
fufobii
c*
gbekg, child, Uttle one
gbekSbii
c.
dbyGoogk
lia
flhUblo TIXL
Oisf 08 $aA imbar %t imm. I 46.
Personal dmmmtiDe nouns.
Singular.
Plural.
Grader.
seo, successor, young-
er member of one
brotherhood
nabi, grandchild
Uebi, father-child
nyebi, mother-child
sebii
nabii
tSebii
nyebii
conmion.
c.
c.
c.
Personal abstract nouns formed of verbs, noums and adjectives
by the personal termination „lo".
felo, maker
felQi
c.
niil§ulo> labourer
niiti^oi
c.
gbogbotfalo, mason
pi. i
c.
folQ, parent
„ i
c.
yo folo, midwife
„ i
f.
siselo, beggar
« i
c.
d§alQ, a righteous
person
„ i (s.dSa,v.)
c.
„ a worshipper
.i
c.
„ a divider
. i
c.
ekaio» a brave man
„ i (s. feka, n.)
c.
amalelo, a lier
V i
c.
eSafelo, a sinner
. i
c.
Mlo, an artificer
n i
c.
niilelo, a wise person
« i
c.
gbobalo, a child bom
after one who died
Impersona
. i
i concrete individual nom
c.
ns.
n5, thing, vessel etc.
nii
c.
A&nd, implements
Mnii
c.
Amdnd, vessel for food
Amdnii
c.
fufond, „ for milk
fufonii
c.
etc.
dbyGoogk
Wtble via.
— 1»8 —
Classes %U Buiker #f Mins. §. 48.
Impersonal concrete individual nouns.
Singular.
adeka, box
abo, frait-jSeld
asa» hall
ama, pitch
ato ladle
awale, spoon
tso, tree, stick
^bulobatSonu, a male
breadleaftree
abolobatiloyo , a fe-
male dto.
tsu, room
Sla, house
kpata, roof
etc. etc.
Plural
pi.
-1
-tsei
-hi
-yei
-i
-i
-i
Gender.
common.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
m.
f.
c.
c.
c.
Diminutive impersonal nouns.
n5, thing
Aolami, star
wobi, bee
agbdmi, jBg
tebi, new tooth
enmoaii, a fruit used
for sup
pempeo, a little round
globule
See also next part.
nibii
nulamii
wobii .
agbamii
pempebii
Collective impersonal nouns.
(yibii eko, some or
one fruit)
(nO, thing)
yibii, fruit of trees
nibii, collectively used
of things
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
c.
dbyGoogk
- 154 -
Tkble VIIL
daises mi iniber if mws. $ 48.
Siagnlar.
Plural.
Gender.
lami, a kiod of berries
tamii
coimnon.
-mi
-mii, many kinds of
berries
c.
iklUy sheebutter
nkui, difi. kinds of it
c.
imSi, food
-i, n
c.
dd, ^ine
-i,
c.
Ik, blood
-i,
c.
la, fire
-i,
c.
nu, water
-i, «
c.
„^
akwei, ground beans
c-
—
aboboi, food of it
c.
— (la, fire)
lai, fuel
c.
•_
nai, coals
c.
etc.
etc.
wiemo, speaking
femo, deed, doing
kemo, saying
bimo, interrogation
d§a, division
dSale, right, righteous-
ness
dSamg, adoration
yeli, eating, treading
etc.
Abstract impersonal nouns.
i
etc
dbyGoogk
166 <-
^ble VXtt
(aaues u4 nuilia of t^ectiTes. § 48.
Pure AefjecHves amp. %. 20.
Sing, apposilive
form.
Predicative or
nominal form.
Reduplicated
form also used
adverbially.
Plural.
*f5n, bad
ef6ii . . .
- __
ef6d§i ^^
'yen, white
eyen . . .
— —
eyedsi =C
'din, black
edifi . . .
, — —
edidsi T^
'tSnru, red
etsuni . .
— —
eflsudsi tl
ediludii S ^
'dsur6, right
edSurd . .
— —
'wulu, great
ewulu . .
— —
ewudsi .ti g
'mu, whole
emu
— —
emod^i? -^l
emedsi -1 |
'mo, momo
emomo
emomo,momo
old
ememed§i| "
emomoi? J
ftm5n, raw
enm5n . .
enmdAmdn ?
eumddsi S
Mixed forms of adjectives, % 20. 22.
'kpa,'akpaj<§
'kpakpa ) S.
ekpakpa
ekpakpa, (naa-
kpa)
-i
fefeo,beautifut
feo
fefeo
-i
tantan, hateful
tan
tantan
-i
kroA, pure
kroft ..."
(kroMroA) .
-61
kronkroh „
kroftkroA
kronkron
-Oi
'fe, ragged
efe
efefei
-i
kplei, great
kplei
kpleikplei
-i
kpeteiikple „
kpetenkple
kpeteAkple
-i
ku, short
kuku
kuku
-i
DimnuHve form.
bibio, little
bibio . . .
bibio. . . bibii;bibiibibii
m „
Mo . . .
flfio . . .
Mi?
fid
flo
floflo . . .
kuktio, short
kukoo . .
kukuo . .
kukubii
pempeo,
round
pempee . .
pempeo . .
pempebii
ktttrukuo „
th. 8.
tfa. s.
-bii
eto.
etc.
etc.
etc.
dbyGoogk
Table Vra.
Classes and number of a^fecti? es. § i&.
BedupUeated form. $ 22. and $ 19, b.
Sing, appositive
form.
Predicative or
nomiaal form.
Reduplicated
form also used
adverbially.
PlaraL
(futa, white)
fuUfuta „
kpalekpale
deaden, hard
(kui) broken
heapy
(kpQi?) knotty
futafuta
bald. th. 8.
deAdedeft
kuikui . .
kpoikpoi
futafuta
th. 8.
deAdeden
kuikui . .
kpoikpoi
-i?
-i
-6i?
Classes and forms of a^'ectiyes (numerals). § 48.
Segular adjective numerals.
Apposit. sing. form.
Predicative
and nominal form.
Redupl. form. PInr.
ko, kome, one,
alone
^ko, ekome
ekome kome, -i
6nyo, two
^le, three
6nyo
ae
enyo enyo —
ete ete —
6dfe, four
^dfo
edfe edfe —
^numo, five
^numo
enumo enumo —
^kpa , six
6nyie, how much?
6kpa
6nyle?
Formed like nouns.
ekpa ekpa —
6nyie 6nyie? —
kpi&wo, seven
kpanyOy eight
nghO, nine
kp^wo
kpanyo
nehQ
kpawokpawo —
kpanyo kpanyo —
nghii njhu —
nyoAm^, ten
oh^, hundred
nyonm6
ohi ....
nyoHmahma -i
oh^h^ -i
akp^, thousand
akp6 ....
akp^kp^ -i,
akpei akpei —
dbyGoogk
157 —
Table VUL
Classes and forms of a^'ecti? es (numerals). § 48.
Formed like nouns.
ApposH. sing. form.
fid )
pia> every, all
fe ) •
pi, much, many
etc.
Predicative
and nominal form.
Redupl. form. Plnr.
th. S.
etc.
fia fla
pi& pia
pipi
etc.
Classes and mimbar of pronouns. § 48.
Fwre pronotms.
Siog.
mi
0
e
le
eo6
Plur.
WO
nye
a
(ame)
enemei
etc.
Personal. Iropers.
mi, wo —
0, nye —
e, ame, a e, a
le, ame —
etc.
Independ. forms.
Personal. Impers.
mi, WO
bo, nye —
le, ame —
ene,
ene
etc.
Mixed with notional formwords.
neke nekemej
mone menemei
none niine
meni? me' nil?
namo? namei?
mofemo mei fg
ndfeno nil fig etc.
neke neke
mone none
menemii niine
namo? m6ni?
namei? m^'nii?
mofemo nofSnd
mei fg nil f6
Compare for the
rest the Tables
N IV&V.
dbyGoogk
158 --
Different specimen of the lan^a^e from
the mouth of the natives.
L Pro? erbs.
1. Alomt^ efdn tniad bO. The cat does not cease miau
crying.
2. Ka foQ loflo. A crab does net beget a bird.
3. Silafo etSdd filafo gbe. A btind man does not show
the way to a blind man.
4. Kole Aya ftSoA. *) The Kole (river) goes into the sea.
5. I^me kpme fiteo nmei fg. One nut spoils all.
6r TSoflitJie enuu tsoK ehdft belatse. ') A physician
does not drink medicin for the sick.
7. TutSofa ke la yee. ') Gunpowder and fire do not agree.
8. Sikpofi ko enyee gbonyo. No land hates a dead body.
9. Blomo dSee nmft d) ayeo. QoMrel is not food which
is eaten.
10. WiemQ kpakpa d§eo mlifQ. A good wwd remoYes
anger.
11. Ke dse na le> gbomei K dig.*) If it is night, all men
are black.
1) nSoA = nSo mlL The proverb is used like „ Winds
have ears/ to warn persons not to speak oat a secret
2) About tSofStSe and helatSe see § 25, 4. About enuu
— ehSd § 28, 2.b.
3) ke moko ye, to agree with somebody.
4) DSe na, to become night
dbyGoogk
— 149 ~
12. Ke okp^AgQ edSim le, moni U eno le hft e^iimlo.O
If the horse is mad, he who sits opoft it is not
also mad.
13. Nu uV) ake-bagbe la le, ataoole kroftkro^^ Water to
quench fire (with) is not wanted clear.
14. Ke okplom ye nii le, ohwam hQ yeo ekb. If the
okplom (an animal) eat something » the ohwam also
eats some. ^)
15. Ake hii^meii enyo kwee to mli. Not with both eyes
people look into a bottle.
16. Ke Ulei kome ke Uleii akp^ kpe le, eioQ biti.*) If
one tongue meet with a thousand tong^ies, it faints.
17. Ke onaa lo le» oyeQ k^mi. If thou find no fish^ thou
eatest bread.
18« Hmni egbee fio gbemo. A quiet man makes not the-
noise of an elephant.
10. Dare kome gnonii yee kpainkpawo WQ. ^) One dollar
(worth) wares do not eat a fowl of mx pc^nce (i. e.
does not allow to eat).
20. Aduddn n) kpa gbonya bewo le, ekele ate* A fly
which hova^ around a dead body, will go ^ith it.
21. Tso n\ ake*tfa dfeian^j kolo le, ake tfaa Sla nd.^> A
slick with which people strike a beast in the grass
1) d§im, V. n. only used in the perfect tense edsim
(Ot agyiHii), to be mad.
2) About ke-ghe see § 28, 2.b.
3) Suum cuique. — No body shall take all to himselt
4) To biti, to faint (from the O^).
5) kpainkpawo or kpenkpawo instead of kpai kpawo,
Beyen strings of cowries; s. kpa, n., Vocftb.
6) dfeian = dsei amli, inside of the grass,
7) sia jad = house' thing, no, thing standing jarono-
minally for kolo (beast, animal, cattle) atee^dy mentioned*
dbyGoogk
— 160 —
(of the ^rilderness), they do not strike one of the
house with it.
22. Nu Me ye feo, Si ehll mli wq. *) The face of water
is beaatifiil, but it is not good to sleep in it.
23. Ke oda le, no obk> mliwo.') If thou get, thou askest
to put more to it.
24. Ke of6 olilei oU okp^ le, onan kolo ko .6SS 6kpe. ')
If thou cut off thy tongue, roast and gnaw (it), thoa
wilt not get an animal to roast and gnaw.
25. Noni ake-feo taki le and-fee bS. What a taki (a figure
on carts) is made with, with that they make no
M (also such a figure).
26. Kokont^ taoo halu. Dried cassada wants sun (else
it spoils).
27. Akpokplento taoor el^ elee le, no dSi noni esuo ekoe
ewoo enoilo mli le. The land-tortoise does not want
to know its blood, that is why it contracts its neck
(and) puts (it) into its shell
28. Moni taoomi nakai le, em! e§e ehe. Whosoever wants
me so (as I am), rejoices (or is content).
29. Mei fia yakwoO tSo: akpokplonto tekwo*) le, amane
d>a. Every body uses to go and climb a tree: the
land-tortoise went and climbed: trouble has come.
30; Mo enyee mo yaka. No body hates one without
cause.
1) mliwo, infinitive of wo mli, to sleep in(side).
2) no = then, in this case, comp. 27; mliwo, inf. of
wo mli.
3) About the combination of these verbs see § 31, 2.b.
6Sa 6kpe are the (fat.) perfect tense, depending on the fat
neg. onan, thou wilt not have found, rosted And gnawed etc.
4) See § 50, 2. about compound sentences^ without con-
junction* tekwo=yakwo; ya, defective v., fut., ace, and
perf. te, see Yocab.
dbyGoogk
— 161 —
31. Bo le^ oke, ona .nanyo kpakpa, Si olee noni ekeo
ye ose. As for thee, thou sayest, thou hast got
a good friend ; but thou knowest not what he says
behind thy back.
32. Gbomo etaa lo 0 yaka. A man is not meager without
cause.
33. Ke enadsi nyle Ie» ntiblii ye mli. If the engadshi
(birds of yellow colour, dwelling in great flocks in
their hanging nests on trees and always accompa-
nied by some beautiful red ones, called ntiblii)
wander, the entiblii are amongst.
34. Kedsi tso futu tei amli le, efd midSra. If wood mix
with stones, its cutting is difficult.
35. Moko fee hatso Sisi, §i uQkotSo SiSi afeo. No body
plays under a thornbush (lit. torchtree, a tree full
of thorns), but under the noko-tree (bearing sweet
beries, noko) people play.
36. Kedsi hdmo, mlye gbQ le eke-dSe eman. If hunger
is eating a stranger, he brought it from his town.
37. Ohfafo ebuu maii. A poor man does not watch (oyer)
the town.
38. NudsQ ekwoQ goft. A brook does not ascend a
mountain.
39. Gbomo tsio koyo. A man moves the wind.
40. Mokome efee man. One makes no town (or people).
41. Ohiafo ble egbee. The pipe of the poor does not
sound.
42. Adeda kuku ekuu sii enyo. A short (or broken) bill-
hook does not break twice.
43. To gbonyo see kakla. A dead sheep (or goat) does
not shun the knife.
1) ta lo, lit. to be in want of flesh, to be meager, thin.
Zimmermann, Akra-Gramni. 11
dbyGoogk
— 162 -
44. B&i enyo ehti bu kome mli. Two crocodiles do not
live in one hole (or pool).
45. Beni oda kd akpakai roli, bele tsunye mibo: A wo!
When the oda (a large lizzard living on walls) lies
in a basket (for carrying men, espec. Europeans and
noble natives), then the housemother (a small lizzard
living in rooms) is crying: „Exaltedl** (a kind of
cheering). Rem. Only Europeans, Mulattoes, kings,
noblemen and educated people are allowed to be
carried in baskets on the heads of men; awd! is
a cheer used by this occasion.
46. Ke sasabonsam*) te ya no le, aye we etOQ. If the
earth-devil go to costume , in the witch's house he
lodges.
47. Mantsebii edsoo foi kwee yitso. A prince does not
run to look at the head (which is cut off; because
8very head cut off in an execution must be brought
and showed to the king).
48. Alomte ke: „lMlikpamo n5,'' hewo ni ehee nyon. The
cat says: „Slretching is sweet," wherefore it does
not buy a slave (because slaves make trouble).
49. Moko ke kploto h§i§ klan sitd. No body gives a pig
V) a hyena to keep it.
50. AH ke: Moni gbeml edgomi, ake moni fd mitsere.
The partridge says : He who kills me does not grieve
me as he who plucks my feathers.
51. Moko ke enidsi enyo susuu fa. 1^6 body measures
the river with both of his feet.
52. Kedsi sisa mita ode le, onine osuq. If a spectre is
shaking hands with thee, thy arm shrinks.
53. Batafobi bi enye ake: „Awo, meni yo ohie kpoikpoi
le?" Ekele ake: «Wo se le ona momo." The young
1) See Vocab.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— 163 —
wild hog asked its mother: „Mama, what are the
knotty things in thy face?" She told it: By and by
thou wilt have seen it already.
54. Ke didei dse f^ mli ni eke ake: bft he mlye le, bele
ehe mlye lelen. If the didei (a river fish) leaves
the river and says that the crocodile is sick , then
it is truly sick.
55. Alanmali fee kpoi amli. The alangmali (a small lobster)
does not play in knotty (or rocky) places (but in
the seasand).
56. Ofoi yitSon etaS Ik. The head of the horse-fly does
not get into want of blood.
57. Ked§i obe floto le, oyaa Wei. If thou hast no bag,
thou doest not go to Wei (a place, where corn is
bought).
58. lA ye lllei siSi, ni atS^Q ladSd. Blood is under the
tongue, and people ^pit spittle (and not blood).
59. Moko lee moni fo Okaikoi. No body knows who has
bom Okaikoi, a certain man, whose parents were
unkdbvm).
60. Moko end5 sadso emd9 abono. No body takes the
shadsho (a very larg tree with soft wood which
cannot he used) and builds a bam (with).
61. Oda le, ake musunkd ko ye, nohcwo le ebu 5i eto.*)
The oda (-lizzard) knows that there is belly-ache,
therefore it lies on its belly against (the time of it).
62. Ani ke ake: ^Tui!" le,^) to egbo? Is, 'if people say
„Tui!" the sheep dead?
1) hu si, to lie on the belly; to, aux. v. to put away,
prepare, do some* thing against a certain| emergency. Mike
mito, I said it before, already.
2) „Tui!** An interjection to drive small cattle away
(lit. flee!), ^le" is the def. article defining the accessory
sentence. ■
Digitized by VjOOQIC
- 164 —
63. Bonso da kpetenkple mon ; Si nsonkotoko gbeole. The
whale is Iruly (grown) very large, but the sea-por-
cupine kills him.
64. Ke lilei ke, eke ahO le, eke dsen yee he gho. If the
tongue say it be very long, it cannot vie with
the boa.
65. Moko enmee t§o he, ni eyaye koyo abo. Nobody lets
go a tree and swings in the air.
66. Anylee fig se, ni adu tsone. Nobody follows an ele-
phant and falls into a trap (because that animal will
a void traps by its cunning).
67. Kedsi noko be oden Iq, kamla nl gbekgbii mititi onine
se. If nothing is in (the palm of) thy hand, do not
close it, lest children pinch the back of it.
68. Man kuku ake-sa tsile. With a piece of a herring
they angle the tshilefish (a large fish caught yearly
in August and September on the sand -bank oppo-
site the Akra-country).
69. Nine se ke kekg ten yee he gbQ. The back of the
hand and the inside (or middle) of the fist do not
unite.
70. Toil enyo, 0 §i enuu sfidsi ehyo. Two ears, but they
do not hear two stories.
71. Moko etsdd gbekS Nyoiuno. Nobody shows 'iieaven
Ad 64. ke, to be long; ke n. k. ye he gbo, to vie
with 8. th^
Ad 65. ye noko abe , to swing in something about.
Ad 67. de, the palm of the hand; nine, hand, arm;
mititi, pres. tense pot. posit, depending on ni „that**, after
a negative ^lest." Comp. the German proverb: Sin ©c^elm
tfl, bcr tttc^r gibt, a(^ er l^at. He is a rogue who gives more
than he has.
1) About ^enuu**, sing. numb, applied to the pi. toil, s. § 42.
dbyGoogk
— 16$ —
(or God^ as whdse face, outside, heaven is consi-
dered) to a child (because it will see or know him
by itself).
72. Gbo hlAmeii^) kpleikplei, §i enaa man mlinii. The
eyes of a stranger (may be) very lafge, but he does
not see the inner things of the town (or nation).
73. Tu fee ye AbrotSiri, ni ebamdmd ye GS. A gun does
not burst in Europe and wound (people) in Ga.
74. AnmoQ klmtu kpo. A planket is not made into
a knot.
75. Afi efee nmotse. The partridge is not greater (or
more) than the planter; at the same time a pun:
The partridge (makes not) is not the planter.
76. YitSo taa si, ni nakutSo bu fai. The head does not
sit down and the knee put on a hat.
77. Tonye akweo aheo tobi. The mother of the sheep
(or goat) is looked at (if) the lamb (or kid) is bought.
78. Dun foo yo. The dung (-antelope) does not beget
the yo (-antelope).
79. V Bio momo h! fe bio he. An old broom is better than
a new one (because sharper, comp. the contrary in
the German: Sleue SBefen fe^ten gut, new brooms
sweep well).
80. Sio yee tamii. An elephant does not eat small berries
(tamii, a very sweet kind of berries, similar to ripe
coffee-berries).
81. DSu baa dSu kome. Monday does not come one
monday (only).
82. Gbomo taa Si, n) and tso aye') odase. A person
1) In prov. 70 the auxil „ye", in 72 „d§i** are om-
mitted.
Ad 82. ta Si, hi si, to sit, to dwell, to exist, s. § 33, 3.
2) ye odase, to witness.
dbyGoogk
-- 166 —
does not sit, whilst they take a tree (or stick) to
be witness.
83. Fa t§io fe yi se. A river moves a river on.
84. Ke oke tSo wo bu mli ni onaa noni yo mli le, ke
oke onine wo mli le, ona noni dsi. If thou put
a stick into a hole ai^ doest not see what is in:
if thou put thy hand in^ thou knowest what it is.
85. Ke atere ni onaa le, ke akpo na si le, ona. If some-
thing is carried (on the head) and thou do not see
it, if it is left down, thou seeest.
86. Ho lei and flo ho. With the (long) taU of the ho
(-monkey) the ho is bound.
87. Nine lakaa mo. The hand does not deceive one.
88. Abui nl he do la lo> esda kpS. A hot needle burns
the thread.
89. Gbomo fdn h! fe sia tlo. A bad person is better than
an empty house.
90. Moni ko: ^End"" lo» ayee asiile. Him who says: It
is sweet, people when eating do not leave, i. e.
People do not eat without a person who says: It
is sweet (because it would be a great shame accor-
ding to good native fashion, not to invite him, as
every body present is invited when they are
eating).
91. Ko olee, onanyo so le, okaa to ohddlo. If thou doest
not know what is behind thy neighbour's back, thou
doest not venture (to buy) a sheep for him (s. ka,
V. Vocab.)
92. Mantsesei dsee lai kakadan nl mei enyo ta no. A
throne is not a long piece of wood that two per-
sons may sit on it.
93. Moko hdmdtsdmd dSee mo simo. To go before some
body is not to leave him.
94. Suie be nl ayeo lolowa. There is no cabbage, there-
dbyGoogk
— 167 —
fore (lit. then) people eat inferior herbs (lolowa, a
kind of herbs eaten vfhen better ones are scarce).
95. Ke o§i nme le, eko ya omama mli. If thou pound
palmnuts, some goes at thy cloth.
96. Tso n\ te la mil le, ena hSlL A stick which goes
into fire, will begin to burn (lit. its end bums).
97. Lo nl nd le, amane ye he. About a sweet fish is
danger.
98. Moko enod sigbemohe efee wohe. No body makes
a place where people fall (lit. a falling-place) a sleep-
ing place.
99. Nabu lee, ake else mlfe fei. The mouth does not
know, that its master is afraid. (S. fei, n. Voc.)
100. Moko ke mama he taa mama momo teA. ^No man
putteth (a piece of) new cloth into an old garment.**
Mt. 9, 16.
101. Awoo ni alaa. No sleep, no dream. § 50, 2. a.
102. Soro*) kwe, soro*) kwe bie. (It is) different to look
and dififent to look hithen
103. Nine abeku ahliSi, n) gbonyo Sig mo. The left hand
does not remain (quiet), when a dead body knocks
against one.
104. Moni hdmd ye le ni egbo le, aMi edeka Si. Whom
the hunger ate and he died, people do not ask
after his box.
105. Odomirifa ye noko nl eyeo dSikuIe etiaft ka. Would
Odomirifa (n.pr.) have something to eat, he would
not dig crabs.
1) ^Soro" is an impers. verb., sometimes irregularly
without gram. subj. = to be different : Soromi or esoromi,
it is different with me etc.
Ad. 103. If a person is said to have died by poison,
they carry him about, and the person he knocks at has
killed him.
dbyGoogk
— 168 —
106. Moko enaa tSo ni eke ehMmeii isrS ^) na. Nobady
sees a tree (or stick) and rubs his eyes at it.
107. Mo hie-memo ke tsdmd^) h, edsee mo dSemQ. To
warn some body is not to scold him.
108. Se nuu iviemg. The back does not hear a word.
109. Ke odSu mantSe he le, oke eko dsuo ohe. If thou
wash a king, thon washest thyself with some (of
his soap, water etc.).
110. Moko ke asdmanukpa^) daa tetfSl. No body vies with
the orangutang in stone-casting.
111. Nye be tsofl Hatred has no medicine.
112. Heni-gwanten sumoo le, dsei en6o eyen elaa. Where
the sheep likes it, there it places its white (spot).
113. Moko naa tamg Opale na. Nobody sees hke Opale.
114. IlienmalQ*) be ni afeo ebii ahe. The leopard is absent,
therefore they play with his young one's.
115. Moko enmdd kpe ni esi egonti. Nobody makes a knot
and leaves his thumb (i. e. without his thumb).
116. I^S tamg oblaii. A wife is like a giant.
117. Moni nmd kpo le, le ele fenemo. He who makes ari
knot, knows to loose it.
118. Soro moko yit§on, soro moko yitson. Different one's
head, different the others (i. e. Every body has his
own head).
119. Ga se gbe dsi gbe. The way after (the people of)
HSiy that ;s the way.
1) tsr3 na, pi. form of tsS na, v. to rub at.
2) hie-wiemo ke tsdmd, infinit. of the double verb:
wie m. k. hie tsSle, to warn one, s. Voc.
3) asaon^ukpa, n. lit. spectre-elder.
4) H!enmalQ=face-scratcher, an epithet of the Leopard
(compare: OIowo, kotse etc.). .
Ad 119. The Gd-people consider themselves a leading
dbyGoogk
— 169 —
120. Miwo t§u^) mihao, si ote mikpfii. I thatch you a
house; but you conceal my strings .(for to bind it).
121. Gbeke edfaa akpokplonto, §i gbekS le wao d(^. A
child does not break a landtortoise, but a child
knows how lo break a snail.
122. Beni omia onanyo ko le» onanyo hQ mimlao. When
thou pressest a friend of thine, thy friend also is
pressing thee.
123. Ohwam! kedsi ote ni bai le eha te^ le hewg le»
dsemo; si wose le, ke nme le t§u le, owaye') eko.
Ohwam! if thou go (and see) that the leaves have
covered the palmtree (round about), remove them;
for by and by, if the palmnuts are ripe, thou wilt
eat some.
124. Noni bako dS le, eye nso se. What has not come
before, is behind the sea. (It can be stated so,
because people have not seen it).
125. Moko enaa moko obM, ni ehuru eyi §i.') No body
sees the giant (-slave) of another and springs up
(for joy).
126. Kele mli ye nii kule, onufu ye noko n\ eyeo. If in
length would be. something, the serpent would have
something to eat.
127. Abe mama ni abio yO si! One has no cloth and asks
after a woman!
128. Suilafo fee mlu mli. A blind man does not play in
the dust.
129. Timtim dSee amada teomg; §i ehe saomo mli yo. To
1) wo t§u, to thatch a house (with grass, which is
bound up by strings).
2) owaye, old form=ooye (from obaye. The ohwam
(an animal) eats palmnuts. .
2) hom-yi Si, lit. to jump and come down.
dbyGoogk
— - 170 —
boast is not to plant plantains, but in cleansing about
them it consists.
130. Ahio man ni oheo^) beu?^) Do people dwell in a
town where there is no warm (bread)?
131. Moko ehoo nii eyamdS AmanmaSa, ake eetao eweku-
mei abaye. Nobody cooks food and puts it on the
dusthill (outside of thowns) to seek his relations that
they may eat.
132* Ke otSo kolo tsokpemo le, ke ewo hQ emd eua. If
thou show a beast (or brute) stick-chewing (a custom
of the natives to keep their teeth clean), even if
it sleep, it sticks in its mouth.
133. Kokote wonu ekpa efie §i: §i masro^) sika dsosru?
The kokote sup is poured out : and I should esteem
the gold-dshosru (a quantity of Gold = 1 JB Sterling)?
134. Okukuba ke elei ke le, sone efSi. (No sooner) the
okukuba (a bush-animal) said : his tail is long (than)
the weasel boasted.
135. Tso nl aklonto be he le, ekwD dSra. A tree which
has no fork, its ascent is difficult.
136. D§e ana ni ase wehe. It will get night and a sleep-
ing-place Will be found.
137. Babi gboo &. A young crocodile does not die in
Uie river (its element).
138. Ke oke wo nkpla able le, ehie soQO. If with the fowl
thou art unhusking com, it will not esteem thee
(see hie so, v.).
139. Atfaa mo te^ ni awo sukukuli atSo ehie. Nobody casts
1) Oheo = Otyi: ohyew, something warm.
2) ben = be mli.
Ad 133. Eokote is a very precious fish. Kpa, to
tilt; fie si, to pour down.
3) See sro, »oro, v. Voc.
dbyGoogk
— 171 —
a stone at one, and takes up a clod and ^hows it
to him.
140. Moni etQ kg moni hdm5 ^eole h: namo ahd ahS?
One is satisfied and one is hungry: to whom do
people sell?
141. Moni tSuQ nil hdo le, eyaa ke emusu flo. He who
works for thee does not go with an empty belly.
142. BlQfo-okpo kg: Moni yeg nii ehSao le, le ogbeu la
ohda. The European dove says: He who eats some-
thing and gives thee (some), for him thou quenchest
the fire.
143. Moko enod adeda etoo lema he. No body takes a
billhook and cuts an ax (with it).
144. Wonu nd kolo le na, si nine enaa eke-fS. Soup is
sweet to (the mouth of) an animal; but a hand it
has not got to take it out with.
145. Ke dsulg ke , ele dsQ, 6yadsu okplem. If a thief say,
he knows how to steal, let him steal a canon.
146. Moko ke enumo etoo nyonma he. No body puts fife
for ten,
147; Kg odi adudon se Ig, owuleo ofla mil. If thou care
for the fly (to kill), thou wilt hurt thy boil.
i48. Ohi lo, si oye mlgbo. Thou abhorrest meat, but thou
eatest Uver.
149. Kg akpokplonto hewQ kulg atfaa tu. If it were for
the land-tortoise sake, no gun would be fired.
150. fiehdlo ko ehdko ba dd. A cabbage-dealer has never
sold (mere) leaves (if you hear himself).
151. Kasdlg yeo nii kaku mil. The potter eats out of a
potshard.
152. Kg oyg Iglg mli Ig, odsieo mil nu. If thou art in a
vessel, thou takest out the water.
153. Obgn n\ ayaa hewo le okg: Nso Ifi nmg. Thou art
dbyGoogk
— 172 —
i^ot in when people go therefore thou saidst: The
sea is quiet.
154. Ke fio Ke: etS lo h, dSee tSokpo kome u\ enan.^)
If the elephant say: he is thin (of flesh), not only
one tray full he has (hut still more).
155. Gbo ed§aa kondlo. A stranger does not divide the
meat of the ko (or; komeat, a festive food).
156. 6a weku tamo mampam fg, ke okpa \q, bele ohe gbla.
A Gfi family is like the fat of the land-crocodile:
if thou anoint (thyself with), thy skin cracks.
157. TSebi ke: D§e na; si nyebi kei D3e nako. A father-
child says: It is night; but a mother-child says: It
is not night. (Perhaps relating to the family quar-
rels springing from polygamy).
158. Momosa le Kwaw Mensa; mitao Fete ay a, Si mibasro
nl atsule Gua. Once Kwaw Mensa (pr. n.) was
wishing to go to Fete (about 10 miles); but it was
different, when he was sent to Cape Coast (about
60 miles).
159. Ke otao nme le, ya Tutu. If thou wish for palmnuts,
go to Tutu (an Akwapim-town, where plenty palm-
trees are).
160. Moko endd nine abeku etsdo emaAgbe* No body
shows the way to is town with the left hand.
161. TSina wqIq See tSma. A cowherd does not fear
a cow.
162. Gbe kd gbe edSee. A dog does not bite a dog till
(blood) comes out.
163. Wq ni edSQQ le> akokobesa eke-yaa. A fowl which
is not tame, with supspices it goes (i. e. it is eaten).
1) enan = ena le, comp. § 20, 1. at the end.
Ad 156. Used to warn people, not to try to deriye
too much advantage of a GSi-family.
dbyGoogk
— 173 —
164. Grbobilg lee kolo helatSe hewo n\ etfale id. A hunter
does not know sick game therefore he shoots it (tfa
tu, to shoot).
165. Loflo n) edSen tSere le, nira ekaseo flikimol A bird
which does not get feather(s), quickly it learns to
fly! (Used of precocious people).
166. Fiofio adudon ye gbe toi. Little by little a fly eats
the ear of a dog.
167. Ke lo ko ke, ewo fo ahfi le, eke kploto yee he gbo.
If an animal say, it be very fat, it does not reach
to the pig.
168. Oia gbn fa fe to gbfi. The days of poverty are more
than the days of superfluity.
169. Osumo nyont§Qmei nyohma ke kpawo. Thou wilt serve
seventeen masters. Mt. 6, 24.
170. Gbi nl amd kploto le, batafo atSd hftm5. The day
when the pig will be caught, the wild hog will lead
the way.
171. Sisi ke Awei yee gbo. Earth and heaven do not come
together.
172. Ke akpokplonto ke: wa hewo, dSikule awoo tako ye
sikpoA ne no. If the land-tortoise would say (it is):
for hardness sake, people would not take up pads
upon this earth (i, e. If it would depend on the
saying of the land-tortoise, that it is too hard etc.
because of its hard shell).
173. Asantemei wonu Ad, §i no fo mli tsd. The soup of
the Ashanti's is tasteful, but there is too much salt
in it (relating to their cruelties).
174. Ehe wa tamo.ba. He is as hard as a crocodile.
175. Hdmd yele take klan. He is as hungry as a hyena.
176. Moko yee yele na ye sQ mli. No body buys yams in
the ground.
177. GbekS mS koi ni onukpa hlQ SiSi. A child builds a
dbyGoogk
— 174 —
second story and an old man dwells down stairs
(relating to the changes of live).
178. Tantra dsimi, dsa no mifo ye. I am a tantra (-fish);
in the market I bear.
179. Ahdd alomte ye floto mli, §i adSieole faA. A cat is
not sold in a bag, but openly produced.
180. Aaye koko enmon dsikule aaye yekose. Would people
eat koko (a kind of yams) raw, they would eat (it
so) in the country (or plantation, lit. behind the
bush).
181. Wa ke, ehewo dsikule tO egbee ye kon. The snail
says, if for his sake, no gun would sound in the bush.
182. Ke niyenii ye sia le, akee ake ayadsu bayele ke-ba
§Ia. If food be in the house, people do not say,
yams shall be stolen and brought.
183. Ananu taa si, n\ abe gugo akase le. A spider does
not sit, that people may teach it to speak through
the nose (it knows it already or is represented so
in their fables, see these).
184. Klan kplaa tsin0. A hyena does not drive a cow.
185. Ke gbe ke edseke ahu le, ehoo man he. If a way
says, it is very long, it does not pass the town (it
leads to).
185. Dede mife kolo, si eke: Kokon. Dede is a fool, but
she says it is Koko. (Dede and Koko, proper names
of women).
185. Kakraka feo gbele nii, §i egboo. The chafer does as
if it would die (lit. makes things of death), but it
does not die. (These creatures are very trouble-
some in the houses.)
186. Wo nane egbee ebi. The foot of a fowl does not
kill its chicken.
187. Onukpa boo mSdsi and toi. Anjelder does not listen
to the chattering (lit. ihe thing) of towns.
dbyGoogk
— 175 —
i88. Ke okaUa fo5 le, oboA oke-woQ. If thy knife cot
thee, tbou puttest it in thy sheath (and doest not
cast it away).
189. Ohenyelo ke: otaoo egbo. Thy enemy aays, thou
wishest, that he may die.
190. Lebi da^ dseo fu mon, siwiemo kpakpa dSeoA (=d§eo
mil). In the morning the month emites a bad smell,
but a good word comes out from it.
191. NiiatSe foo dsoi f^, si efoko yafodSo di. A rich man
composes every dance , but he has never composed
. a dance of weeping.
192. Ke owye yO adfaman le, onaa mlifQ. If thou marry
a harlot, thou doest not get angry.
194. Sane fon nl yo dSen hewo ni ke afo bi n) awieo
alsdole. For bad palawers sake which are in the
world it is that if a child is bom, it is instructed.
195. Ke owo mama n\ esaao le, nl atseoo oblafo. If thou
wear a cloth which does not fit thee (it happens)
that thou art called an executioner.
196. NyomdtSe naa mlifu. A debtor does not get angry.
197. Nyoii edsee gbi kome ni efo kpen (=kpem05 see
§ 20). Thee moon (s. „ny6n** in the Vocab.) does
not appear one day (only) and cease to shine.
198. Ke ohe waa oke: Tako ehil. If thou art weak, thou
sayest: The pad is not good. (Men and women
carry the loads on their heads and use pads).
199. Dsee noko, si noko dsi no. It is nothing; but that
is something. („Dsee noko!'' is a general evasive
answer to enquiries).
200. Ke batafo ke: dsee enan, ena non. If the wild hog
say: it is not his foot-step, it is it still.
201. Moko efee kolo sii enyo. Nobody is twice a fool.
202. Eto tso egba eno. He cut a tree and fell it over
himself.
dbyGoogk
— 176 —
203. MoXo hfe gboo Sii enyo. No body is twice ashamed.
204. Moni ena dfi le, eke eh!. He who has wine, says
it is good.
205. Mlikpamo dSi nii dSikale alomte ye eko. If stretchiog
would be riches, the cat would have some.
206. YitSo kome eyaa adSinft. One head does not go a
councelling.
207. Ohia n\ ehia Akwamunyo hewo ni eke Ayigbenyo
nio. *) For poverty's sake which empovcr's the Akwa-
muman he says he is an Ayigbeman (people who
are despiced in the GS«country).
208. Ke ofie kolo le ni o hfiSle gbe, etS5 one. If thoa
drive away a beast and give it no way, it turns
over thee.
209. Noni gbek^bii fe ye klotia le, no onukpai le feo ye
, mS le mli. What the children do at the ends (of
the town), that the elder people do in the lovra.
210. Moko ke sisai gbaa ta. Nobody arranges battle with
spectres.
211. Moko den dSee oden. Somebody's hand is not thj
hand.
212. Noko nl ayee le, ahoo. What is not eaten, is not
cooked.
213. fie ebe kose dsikule kule wo kolo wulu dSile^ If no
elephant would be behind the bush, the buffalo
would be a great animal.
214. Opasafo ke: Midasefo ye Atyem. The liar says: My
Witness is in Akyem.
215. Tsu moko nwei ni hwan esiSi atfere. To send some
body up and draw away the ladder under him.
216. Abolo flo ehn yeli. Bread alone is not good to eat.
217. Noko ekd onufu! Something has bitten the serpent!
1) nio^dSio, an old imperf. tense of dsi?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
— m —
2t8. Adam ke : ewon di^ ebininei. The Adorn (*mmikej)
says: Jfis eye be his felMi (or charm).
219. Akeo ekome ddni akeo enyo. People say one before
they say two.
220. Toi ni gbaa nabu na. The ear (is it) which trou-
bles the mouth.
II. 6s-ffi8torieg.
(It is to be remarked that I give the Histories as I
got them merely as specimen of the language, and there-
fore not take any respect as to their truth).
1. Asamankao ta.
No hewQ nl ASantemei ke
Mankata wu le Si§i d§i ene:
Ake, Asantenyo kb ba Gua
niihemo; ni beni ete dsa le
UQ le, ena yo ko nl hd Ion-
Ira, ni ekele ake: Olo le>
enyfe dsi ekome? Ni etsdle
na. Keke le na le kele ake:
DSe no ohSmi! Ni yd le kele
ake: MidSee ng. No mli le
ASantemei yeo Guamei ke G§-
mei ano. Agbene nakai na
Zimmermann, Akra*Gramm«
1. The war of Asamang-
kao. (About 1824.)
Werefore the Ashantis with
Mac Carthy (Governor of
Sierra Leone) made war the
reason is this: It is said, that
an Ashanteman came to Cape
Coast to buy things; and when
he went to the market, he
saw a woman selling stink-
fish, and he said unto her:
Thy fish, how much one. And
she showed him the price.
Then the man said unto her
(saying): Take some oS for
mi! And the woman said:
I do not take off. — In that
time the Ashantis ruled over
the Cape -Coast- and Akra-
12
dbyGoogk
~ tT8
le noil keie ^e : Mivrooo
nyomo kwra dot» U milole
ekfi na! Ni yo le kele An:
Bete ouyontSo le nlyoASante
le, le ehe lo diSmi? Keke
le nu ke yd le ake : Meba 0
oke nakai? Beni fe se le nii
le eboDe dsemg ake : Onyon-
tsQ u\ yo Ablotsiri le, Osei
ke.: Ebaye .... Ni yO le
hCi kele ake: Bo hG onyon-
ISQ ni yo Asante le, Kon^)
ke: Eba ni . . . . Keke le
nil le ke: Meba oke nakai?
ni ebol kitakSmg, ake aamd
yO le ke ya ASante. Ni yO
le dSo foi ke te m6h, ni eya-
dSadse sadSi le f6 ni nO le
efele le. Ni nfl le yiA ete
emaA ni eyakp; ni Osei ha
amdle ni agbele, ake: Mehe-
wo ni ehaa agbele ye dsei?
peot^e. — Then that same
man said unto her: I do not
pay thee any more at all, but
I take it by force! And the
woman said unto him: Then
thy master which is in AshantI,
he buys the fish for me (i. e*
he will pay it). Then the
man said unto the woman:
Why sayest thou so? After-
wards the man began to scold
her, saying: Thy master who
is in Europe, Osei (King of
Ashanti) says of him: He
shall come and .... And
the woman also told him:
And also thy master who is
in Ashanti, the King says:
He shall come and
Then the man said: Why say-
est thou so ? - and he began
to swear, that the woman
shall be caught and brought
to Ashanti. And the woman
ran off to the fort and told
all the thitags which the man
had done unio her. And the
man went off to his town and
told it; and Osei let him be
caught and killed, saying:
Wherefore he let himself not
be killed there?
1) meba=meni ba, what came, or: vr)iy?
2) Kon, Danish = King.
d by Google
— 179 —
Ni Osei le Isu ebofoi ke-
ba, ake ayan5 yo le ahSame,
m Gaa-lumo le hu ekplge,
ake enole eha. Beni neke
sane ne ba le, lumo le nmS
ke te Ablotsiri, ake mon, no
sane n) eba ne. Ni Kon, le hQ
nm3 wolo eM Dan-Kong, ni
le hu engmS wolo ke-ba bie
mon, ake aha tsofa ke tunte,
nl ake-yawa. Ni Nlisi-Kon
le hu wo lele gbe ke labilgi
ke asafoiatSemei. Amesafoia-
Uenukpa le, atsele Ma]llka-
t a. Beni Mankata ne ba le,
ehle asrafoi akpe ; menemei
fe le tabiloi son. Ebayin
ke-mlya neke ta ne; ni beni
eya le, eke yomo ko kpe ye
gbe te len, ni nakai yomo le
ke-le ake: ^Owura, mikpao
fai, ni oku ose dS; si tabiloi
ni oke-nyie ne ^aa; mon,
kd ose ni oyatao meikomei
hu ofata amehewo; si Asan-
temei fa tsd!" Adse Man-
kala na le ake: „0! mitabi-
loine sa mihie, boni mikeame
awu!" Ni eyin ni ete ekea-
me yawu. Beni amewu ahu
k agbene Mankata tsofS le
eli. Ni Fantemei le ni kele
And Osei sent bis mes-
sengers down, that the wo-
man may be delirered unto
them; and the Cape -Coast
Governer also did not allow,
that she was delivered. When
this thing happened, the Go-
vernor wrote to Europe saying:
Well, this matter has happe-
ned! And the King also wrote
a letter to the Danish King;
and this also wrote a letter
to the fort here, that powder
and lead may be given out.
And^ the English King also
despatched a vessel with war-
riors and captains. Their
chief-captain was called Mac
Carthy. When Mac Carthy
came, he had thousand sol-
diers; these all were good
warriors. He went oflf to
this war, and when he went,
he met with an old woman
in the way, and this old woman
told him: „ Master, I beg thee
return first; for the warriors
thou leadest, are not enough;
rather return to seek some
more to them; for the Ashan-
tis are too many!" Mac Car-
thy expressed himself saying:
„0h! these my warriors fit
me, that I will fight with
them!" And he went off and
fought with them, When they
had fought a long time, then
12*
dbyGoogk
— 180 —
te ta le, beni amena, ake
ametSofS fe ni amehfe le etS
le, amebol biomo ake: „Yeii
atudru asa!"*) Ni ake Asan-
temei ke Fantemei fe ye wie-
mo kome le» ame ba nu ni-
bii ni Fantemei keo ye amen-
sra len le. Keke le Asante-
inei na hcTvale ni amekpM
amehle kpoto. Agbene ke
Mankata kwe, boni Asan-
temei kele yeo hSa le ni
asan etsofS ni ehie le e\A le,
eke >^ebii le t^ famg^) klante,
ni eke ASantemei kpe h!e
ahu. Beni fe se') ni hoo*)
le agbene eAma wolo keha
etsudsi le eko ke-te Gua-mon,
ni abahdle tsofS; si beni bo-
foi le ku amese ba le, ni
ayagble adekai le ana le,
eyimQ ') obdbS ke loi ke
akpanoi. N6 hewo ni fe na-
kai le: meini ake wolo le
yah§, amemiye oyai ni amelee,
beni ame hole nomei ameha
meini ke wolo le ba hd
Mac Carthy's powder was
done. And the Fantis which
had gone with him to war,
when they saw, that their
powder altogetherwhich they
carried was done, they began
to cry : „Unfer $wl»cr ip au« !"
And as the Asbantis and the
Fantis all have one tongue,
they could hear what the Fan-
tis said in their camp. Then
the Ashantis got strength and
destroyed them as clay. Now,
if Mac Carthy looks how the
Ashantis deal with him and
that also his powder is done,
he with all his people draws
the sword and meets the
Ashatis face to face for a long
time/ After wards, when there
was no move, then he wrote
a letter and gave it to one
of his servants to bring it to
Cape Coast-Castle, that they
may give him powder; but
when the messengers retur-
ned, and the boxes were ope-
ned, they were full of pieces
of meat and bisquits. The
reason of this was: those to
whom the letter was given.
1) Otyi = „Wotsofa eta!"
2) f§mo, pi. form of fa, to draw.
3) Lit. When (it) became afterwards, without expres-
sed subj.
4) ni hoo- and not passed, without subj.
5) hole , irreg. pi. form of wo, to lift up, to take up.
dbyGoogk
- 181 -
ane te. Fe se Ifi MaUata
ktsu eko6, ni ake nakai
non ba. Ke 0 MaAkata kwe
boni , Asantemei kele wuq
hSa, ni asan enaa tsofa, ni
ekeame awu le? eke esafoia-
ts^nei le ke menu eke-te.
ta h fe ake: WQtsof^ eta,
ni Asantemei le hu ke^ivQ
WUQ ne, nohewo le kg moni
osumQ le ofe ohe helpo ! ')
Keke le lele etsi ehe ke-te
se, ni eyakpasa tSo ko, ni
ekpa enine mli ke epitisa-
wa') le ni egbe ehe. *) EMe
pitisawa le ye eden ke-kpa-
sa tSo le. Ni beni ekpasaa
Si le, kedjJH Asantemei le mi-
ba end le, amemlSe gbeye,
edsake amesusuo, ake ehie
ka; si beni yi yawula si le, ®)
ameyoy ake dSee gbe egbo,^)
were in a hurry, when they
gave the things to those who
had given them the letter.
Afterwards Mac Carthy sent
again and the same was
brought. When Mac Carthy
beheld how the Asantis were
fighting with him, and that
also he did not get powder,
he said unto his captains and
all whom he had gone to war
with, saving : Our powder is
done, and the Ashantis also
are fighting with us in this
way , therefore whosoever
wish it, may help himself.
Then he himself withdrew him-
self backwards, leaned against
a tree, drew with his hand
a pistol and killed himself.
So he had the pistol in his
hand and leaned against tiie
tree. And while he leaned
there, if the Ashantis were
coming near him, they we-
re a fraid, because they
1) Ke here and above used like „when** (s. German
)9fnn mb tt)tnn.)
2) helpo, Danish: help.
3) pitisawa^ a European word, pistoL
4) Such a death is esteemed brav and honorable by
tiie Natives and as tiiey honur Mac Carthy very much, it
may be a mere supposition*
5) beni yi yawula Si, lit: when the head came down
to the ground = at last.
6) Infinitive absolute negationed.
dbyGoogk
-- 182 ~
Si ehle kft. Ni amebawole,
ni tunefo eyitSo ke-te amen-
sra h mli, ni amedSie emli
ansoi h, ni noho le ni fe
le, amekpe mun^le ^ amewo
he ni ameke Sika wo mli;
ni le gbomofSo mu le ame-
tsuko ') ke-te Asante. Fq
le ameke -Si ti, ni etsui le
amedSa ni ameye. Ye neke
ta ne mli non amemd Man-
kala tetremantre kpdio, ni
ye gbeyeSemg na le ameke,
ekpd; keke le ekpS, ni ke
ekpS, asrafoi le ni be d§ei
le beni Mankata tfa qhe tu
le hie foi ke^ba ASantemei
)e and, smesusuQ ake ame-
safoitSe le ye dSei, ni agbeo-
ame. Ni yit§o le ni ameke-
te Asante le etsd amewon
ni amedsaa imienenmene-
Ni MaAkata ledientSe n!
wgwieo ehe no edamo le
ke-te be mli ni etSofS ke
eniyenii tS, ni edsoo foi ahu
ke-te egbele mli.
1) mnnele, Dan. uniform
2) tsuko, double v. = to
thought that he is alire; but
at last they perceiyed that
he was really not dead, but
alive. And they took him up,
and cut is head and brought
it into their camp, and took
out the brains, .and the scull
• which was left they sowed
into his uniform and filled it
with gold, and himself, the
whole body , they roasted and
brought him to Ashanti. The
fat (of him) they boiled into
a lump, and his heart they
divided and ate. In this same
war they caught Mac Carthy's
trumpeter, and upon fear the
commanded him to blow, then
he blew, and when he blew,
the soldiers who were not
there when Mac Oarthy shot
himself ran and came to the
ASantis thinking that their cap-
tain was there, and were killed.
And the head which they
brought to Ashanti has become
their fetish which they wor-
ship tillthis very day.
And Mac CarChy himsdf of
whom we speak here, he
stood on the (dace where
he had stood till the time
when bis powder and provi*
skm was done, and he did not
flee at all until his death.
(SWontituiifl).
roast.
dbyGoogk
~ 181 —
2. 6S-mad§i blema sSdSi.
Neke nii ne ni migba ebe
sane ne, gbalo le, ^) egbami,
ake ed§e n§Q mli ni ebo ade^)
k^ ewekumei fid §i kome, ni
amtyo nso ne na. No mli
h mokonioko be bie ; si nme-
nenmene Gamei ') ni yo ne»
kosebiibii dsiame, ni kose
hn ameyo. Neke na ne ke
ewekumei ya wuo. *) Gbi
ne^) ehe ye n§o na, ni lele
ko damo §i, koni emli |^
mei le tseo le, ake eba, ni
ekwo ahima ®) ke-te eyadSie-
ame keba sikpon. Na le,
egbei dsi La-Kote-Aduao§i.
Kom^) gbomei ni yo iele ie
mli ®) Okesi-Blofomei d§iame,
ni amekele hi §i. No se
Kink9 •)-ke Osu*®)-ke NliSi-
Blofomei ha baba. Koni ame-
U ameh9le >¥olo, ake Sik-
pon. ne ettd, koni ke lele fid
lele ni abadamo §i le, ^^) eke
wolo atSdame, koni ameya-
wole By6n^, edSake ItkpoA
oe endft. Nakm meini ye
88^') le hfile; ni ekeame, ake
wodSi ne afite, si amefele^')
jre Sika-tSo he, koni eke-ye
odase, ake sikpoA »e end.
Ni amefe oakai.
Old stories oftheAkra-
people.
1) the historian, apposition.
2) be ade, Otyi, to begin
to exist.
3) the G5-people of to day.
4) ya wuo, to go a fishing.
6) Gbi ne (or neke) on a
certain day.
6) fishing-canoe.
7) koni, emphatieally=ni,
and.
8) Oke§ = Koll -tobacco;
Portugie.
9) Dutch- 10) the Danes in
' Osu or Ghrisdansbwg.
11) and tluit if any veisd
(which) should anker
etc.
12) formerly.
13) 8C. the letters or what
waa wntten in it
dbyGoogk
-" 184 -
Ye ko le se le mafitSemei
enyo, AkwamumaAtSe ^Q Ga-
maiitSe ni atSele Okdkoi h
yo ; koni ameyee *) kwra ;
amewuQ dane, ni G3-maiitse
le kpee amena, ^) ni edso
foi ke-ba La-Kole le A6, ni
ebole abo, ') koni cwu ta le
ehftle. Ni La-Kole le Ad si-
katso ke-j^a hS AtSim-mantse,
ni ekearae aba abawu. Ni
agbe ameK*) Ifem, ni ame-
yi^) fio pe amena gbe, ni
amedso foi ke-te filau^) se,
ni ameh! dSemei ke - basi
Amen^j^mene. Ni no se le
Ga-mantSe le ke ewebii le
fg babi nsQ ne na.
1) they did not agree.
2) kpe na, to prevail.
3) bo m. k. abo, to take
refuge with s. b.
4) sc. the Akwamu-people.
5) yi, head, number.
6) filau, river Volta.
3« Kutftmanso ta.
Beni ayawu neke ta ne,
GSimei ke Akwapimmei ke
AdSmei &l dSu, ^ ni eng gbii
nyonma ke ekome le amese
heni ameyabo nsra') ye le.
Kek« le Akwamemei ke 6S-
mei ke mfidSi krokomei le
nl fata Ga he le baye won,')
koni moko akadso foi , ni
beni ameyeo woA le lolo le
Gbughramei *) yaye Late -
gbe ^) heni ASantemei le bo!
ofoyeli^) ye le. Keke le
Gbugbramei le mdmd ASan-
The Katamanso war
(about 1826).
1) broke up on Monday.
2) bo nsra, to encamp.
3) ye woft, to eat fetish, by
which two parties bind
themselves for a certain
purpose.
4) Prampram-people.
5) ye-gbe, took possession
of the way to Late.
6) ye ofd, to forage*
d by Google
— 1«6 —
Iraaei le enyo, m atnefo mo-
kome yi aiere *) mokome, ni
akele yatSd Owura Hanson
Baaben ke Owusuyaomei. ^)
Ni ameke: „Bele wgte heni
agbe gbomo le ye le, edSake
dsei amefa ye." Ni eno gbil
nyonma ke enyo le ameSe
Katamanso^^) ni amewQ dSei,
m dsetserend le ameht d§ei
^enauiQ. *) Ni gbH ni dsi
gbH nyonma ke edfe le no
gbeke nmledsi ekpa *) le,
Asantemei le bu, ni meiko-
mei ke, bene®) lo se ame-
nyie ; meikoniei ha ke : Bene
amebawn. Ni ASanlemei kQ
amese ^on. Ni dSe batSere,
ni Gamei le sa amehe. Keke
le lebi nmedgl ekpa le Blo-
fdmei ete le sa amehe aroete
nsrai le fe mli ni amewo Ga-
me! le ahewale^, ni ameka-
se gbeye. Agbene amekfl
amese ekon ke-ba amensra
le mli. Keke ni amebadio
amehe fio, ni aroenu A§an-
temei le ahe, ni amesa ame-
he. Keke le etSee h^) Asan-
temei le ninaame; keke ni
Asante-asafoatSe le ekome
tSutsa batfa tfi; ni GSmei le
ho ke-bawQ amedeA/) ni
amebof wn. Keke le etsee
le Gftmei le bafie Asanten^i
le ha batSd amehie, ni ame
ha ameGe Gamei le ke-ba se
1) tare, v. n. to carry on the
head ; v. a. to give
one to carry.
2) two Mulattoes and their
people, who were pre-
sent
3) A place near the Akwa-
pim-momitains between
Osu and Late.
4) (till) nightfal.
5) in the evening at 6 o'clock.
6) perhaps (lit. this time).
7) wo hewale, to encourage.
8) etSee, it is not long =
shortly afterwards.
10) took it (the fight) into
their hand*
dbyGoogk
~ 186 —
. kpM. 0 Keke le beni maA-
tse Ankla asafoiatSe le na,
ake ta le efite ^) le, eke, ayake
Ankla le> ake etsi eya se fio.
Ni eke: Ayabi esafoiatSe le»
ake eya segbe lo ^ba hie?
Ni maAtSe Okanta ke: Aya-
kele ake, emli fliele, ') lo
ekpoo, *) alo bie ebaye abla-
de*) le ye? Si m6 d§i noni
la le efite, nl el§i eya se,®)
ni ebie, ake eba hie lo eya
se; §i enaa nii adsi? ^) M
etsi eba se fio. Keke le eke,
ayake Kwatei Kodso, ake eh3
ni asa tSofa.®) Ni Kwatei
KodSo ke, ayakele ake : Dabi,
si eAme eyi si') fio, si nS-
dgia§ibii**»Jbako; sikeSe")
tSofS §di be le, dsee moko
aake enanyo. Keke le beni
eka he ewieo **) lolo le, keke
nt nftdiSiasibii le pue. Ni eke
befo le ake: „Ya ni oyake
Ankla!'' Ni eyin ete. Ni
ASantemei le fe ekome, *^
ni Gdmei hQ fe ekome, ni
blofomei le babol amekplemii
Sikamo. **) Keke le se etSee
le ameke*bawo ASantemei le
adeft ekofi. Ni agbene ASan-
temei le badSo foi. Ni GS-
nnei le pila Osei,^') ni ete.
Ni beni ete le, etSee keke ni
egbo. Ni moni ai^d-ta nole **)
ka kita, ake eke Gameiwun
doA.
1) conriderably.
2) that tke battle was lost^
3) mli fii, to be merry.
4) kpoo, to get rich.
5) ye ahlade, to act nobly.
6) so that he should go back.
7) adSi, interrog. particle.
8) to bum the powder (and
by that to kill themselyes).
9) Ame yi Si, to have pa-
tience.
10) people from ^east(nnder
the feet, s. Yoc.
11) ke Se, if (it) reaches.
12) ka he fe n. k. continue
to do s. th.
13) became one (army).
14) to load their cttiiM>ns.
16) Name ai the kings of
A&tnti, == Sj^er.
16) who was set upon (se.
the thr(ne).
dbyGoogk
— 187
DL Clft-8]^€hes deliyered by tke speakers of the fifi-tribe
durmg tbe disturbances in Jannary 1854.
1. (About 3000 armed people from Osu, Te§i, Ninwa
and Tema vrere assembled the 12 Ih. of Jan. in Kpesina
near Osu, at nighttime. The people having formed a large
circle with their chiefs, headmen, captains, speakers etc. in
advance, and having saluted each other in due form, choose
their speakers and witnesses to accompany them to the
different groups. The speaker (otSame). AnaA from Osu
came forward and said);
„Osu ni ameyOy *) ni ame-
^Miu le, ake lumo eba; §i
«ke, ayatfa tQ ahffle. Ni
amebabaa oblah! bM le ana.
Keke ni amebayin ameyatfa
ti) le. Beni fe se le, ake
a^afla* lumo le, ni amete
ameyaflale. DSetSereno le,
akg ayat§e onukpai ye m6A,
ni amebayin amgte. Aso
noni akeo noni akeeo , *)
amenuu mli eko; si fe se
mon KiSi ni amenu asem-
sro, ^) ake onia abatSu. *)
„There wa? Osu, hearing
that the governor (Cruick-
shank) has come ; but he has
said, they may come and fire
(a salute) for him. And they
gathered theyoung men. Then
they arose and fired (the sa-
lute). Afterwards it was said,
people shall go and salute the
Governor, and they went and
saluted him. Next morning
it was said, that the elders
(grandees) were called in the
fort; and they went. And
now? what was to be told
them what not , they heard
1) „ni" ameyo," relating formula see Tables.
2) Compare § 50^ 2. a.
3) Otyi = sane sroto , a strange word.
4) tsu onia, to raise toll or tax.
dbyGoogk
— 188 —
DSee no nt onukpai le kele
ake: M^Woyasusu he, koni
wona eko wobakeo'?"" Ni
onakpai le basusu he, ni
amebalo ha ke-ya md na,
ni ametsu ake ajake lumo,
ake wiemo ko ni etsi ehSame-
le, eba, koni amesusu ame-
kele, bgni ameke amesane
^ahala mli-hS. Si ni ame-
hs atsele le, oke amehQ
ameba m5n; ni onukpai le
hQ ke, ameyaa. Ni enma
samamo^) ^olo eha akeba-
M onukpai le, ni nV) amena
samamo wolo ie, ni amedSo
foi ameyatetei ') amehe. Ni
ye nili ahQ le lumo t§u bft
ayake oMah! le, ake ameba
mdn, n\ ekeame wiefio; ni
oblaM le fS babua amehe na
ye md na le ke Mulatofoi
le fS, ni amehft ayakele, ake
amebabua amehe na ye md
na, §i dba. Si ekplSd ba.
Ni Mulatofoi kpaame fai, akt
amehS ni ate, si ke atSi
nothing of it;- but is iw^a
rather afterwards, before tli.e
heard a strange palawer, tha
a tax shall be raised, l^ii
not then the grandies ssl2
to him saying: „„We will gc
and think about, that we ma^
get something to tell thee ?" *^
And they got up with one
accord and went before the
fort, and they sent to tell
the Governor, saying (re-
specting) the word which he
had mentioned to them, he
may come, that they ma^
(think and) tell him how they
had chosen the matter (to give).
But because they had him
called, he said, they rather
shall come into the fort; and
the grandees (also) said, they
will not go. And he wrote a
sunmions (letter) and Sent it
to the grandees, and when they
saw the letter they ran away
and concealed them- selves
(here and there). After a
considerable time the Gover-
nor sent to tell the young
men, they shall come into the
fort, that he may speak a little
with them. And all the young
1) sama, v. engl; to summon.
2) n\ = beni or nonl, when or because » as.
3) Compounp redupl. form.
dbyGoogk
— 189 —
amena *) le le , bele ameke
amefe agboi. Ni amef^ amelo
ho kete md len, ni lumo le
keame ake : Le ni ehS ayatse
eman onukpai le ke-ba eno,
ni etu gbe ^) ko ewo ame-
den^) ni amekele, ake ame-
yadten , *) koni amena eko
amebakgle; si kpla ne ame-
bakeko le noko, nohewo n\
eke, etseame, koni ameya-
lao nomei ke-ba Ho lebi. Si
^0 le wonu, ake onia hewo
ni atseoanie; Si n5 hewo ni
wotsu, ake ababua nyefe na,
koni wofg wokpe mli, boni
wofe!"
1) tsi-na, lo retain.
2) gbe, voice, word, lan-
guage (used by old people rr=
wiemo, f. i. AdSnme = Adah-
gbe etc.).
3) tu wo m.k. den, to give
over to s. b.
4) dfen, Otgi verb =^ susn.
men assembled themselves be-
fore the fort with all the Mu-
lattoes, and sent to tell him,
that they had assembled them-
_selves before the fort, but he
may come. But he did not
consent to come. And the
Mulattoes begged them , that
they may go, for if they should
be retained , then they would
die with them altogether. And
they all went with one accord
into the fort, and the Gover-
nor told them saying, he (was
it who) had his towngrandees
called to come to him and
given a matter over to them,
and they had told him, that
they will go to consider, that
they may have something to
tell him; but till now they
had told him nothing, there-
fore he had thought to call
them, that they may go and
seek those and bring them
on Saturday morning. — But
we have heard that for the
poUtax' sake they were called,
and now therefore we have
sent, to assemble you all, that
we all may decide, how we
will act!"
(The i^sultat of this speech was an agreement upon
oath betwixt these towns, not to allow the grandees to go
dbyGoogk
— 190 —
to the fort nor to pay any tax, even if the Governmeiil
should fight with them, and to make war with any party
breaking the agreement.)
2. Jan. 14. 1854.
(About the same number is assembled on the said
Saturday, immediatly under the loaded cannons and rockets
of Fort Christiansborg. The Mulattoes, some Missionaries
from Christiansborg and a deputation from King Taki from
Dutch Akra are assembled in a group of their own, to try
whether they can do something for peace. The Kpon-
(Pony-) people have joined the rest, all are armed except
the peacemakers. Mr. J. Briandt from Osu brings the mes-
sage of the Mulattoes over to the people, after the necessary
ceremonial, saying [in extract]):
„01e, dsee nokon! Gua
amralo ni ba eke Owura
Bannerman bawie ye onia-
tSumo ne hewQ, nohewo le
etse anukpai le, koni eke-
ame, ake ababoi tsumo ekoii.
§i ameke, ametsuu. Agbe-
ne le eke Owura Banner-
man, ake lele 6ya ; si ekwe,
koni ekeame adsadse , ni
ehmale wolo. Dsee no eno-
fie no. Ni beni ete le se,
koni Ow. Bannerman batse
man onukpai le, ni ekeame.
Ameke > am^te ameya susu.
„Thou knowesl! it is noth-
ing! — The Governor from
Cape Coast which came has
spoken vrith Mr. Bannerman
about this poUtax, therefore
he has called the grandees,
that he may tell them that
it will be raised again. But
they said, they will not pay
it. Now be told Mr. Banner-
man, that he himself he is
going ; but he may see, that
he may settle (the matter)
and write him a letter. Then
it was that he went. And
when he was gone, then Mr.
Bannerman called the gran-
dees and told them. They
said, they will go and con-
sider. And they went and
came to town. Then he wai-
dbyGoogk
~ 191 —
!6 ameyiA kt-ba roan. Ene
le ekweame kweamegbe ahQ,
ake ameba, lo — ; fg krdnS!
A, nakai lo? .... Ene ye
mli ahd le ebanu, ake Osu
ke La ke Tesi ke Tema ke
Kpon ebakpe ye Kpesina, ni
amepam eyi uo k. n
Dsee no le hQ eke, bele ke
ameba pe 'ni ameka noko ne-
femo le, matfa okplem roa-
woame? Tfa amanye aba!"
(Badu Asonkg, Osu Otsame
le, heto):
„Nyeboa beni kpawo kpawo
toi kpawo le ke toi ! Ameke :
Dsee nokon! si amenyontSo-
mei dsi nekegbomei ne, ni s3-
dSi ni amekeame yeo le eft65
amena. Dsi ake me? *) Kedsi
biane oM to one, ni oke : Mike-
le ate m5n ni minyontSo agbla
etoi)^) ahSmi le: beni okele
te le, aSdle ye oden. Ked§i
oke: Miyawu nso le, beni
ote le^ tfe! amdo aheo nii*)
k. n. Agbene hQ le ake : Nd
le d§i aatsu onia! Ni
ted a long while for them,
whether they would come
or (not) ; — (but) all (was)
silent. Yes, so it was, or
(not)? (Answer: „yes!" by
the wilnesses) After
this a long while then he
heard, that Osu and La and
Tesi and Tema and Kpon
had met at Kpeshimouth, and
he conspired against him etc.
.... Was it not, that then
also he said: Well, as soon
as they come and venture to
do something like this, I shall
fire cannons at them? Let
happiness come!""
(Answer of Badu Asgnko,
the speaker of Osu):
„Listen to what the seven
(and) seven times seven said :
they said: It is nothing! but
their masters are these men,
and the things which they
do with them is not agre-
eable to them. What then?
If now for instance thy wife
tresspass against thee aud
thou say: 1 will take her
into the fort, that mv master
may chastise her for me:
when thou goest , she is
snatched from thee. If thou
say: 1 will go and bathe in
the sea: when thou goest,
at once thou art caught and
punished, etc. And now it
is also said: Above this there
shall poUtax be raised!
1) Lit: Is as what? peculiar expr.
2) gbla m. k. toi, to pull one's ear.
3) h. m. k. nii, to punish one for money.
dbyGoogk
192 —
meikomei hd amebii ke nii
ye onalsumo ne hewQ ; §i
Amene ye mli dhQ le ake,
aatsu onia ne ekon! ....
§i onia le ametsuu, 6fe! ame-
tsuu! .... Atamei, dseeboni
nyeken,^) lo?" (Helo): „A!
WQhaa foi tongo!" ^)
And some have sold tlieir
children and things because
of this polltax (the first time) ;
and to day — after a long
time — it is said, it shall
be raised again! .... But
the tax they do not pay, heh !
they do not pay ! . . . . Fa-
thers! Is this not what yoa
said?" (Answer of all) : „A!
we give not one penny!**
KinkS-Otsame Alimo
wiemo (HetO).
. . . . Ke ameke ametsuu
onia le, no le womlnu no;
si su6mg ni ameke amesu-
m6o Nlisiblofd don le, no
le edsaa efe! edsaa! Simeini
dsoro si ne fe le, gbl ni l^fli-
simei le bahe mo ne, ani
ameyee won? nlo amefe ame-
ye m6 len? Kwe le! nraene
dani amekeo, ake amenlse
atQa! No le, ke ameke na-
kai le, en66, efe! endo! —
.... Si nyetaoa wiemg kpa-
kpa nyehSmi! ....
The speech of the speaker
of Dutch-Akra (Answer).
.... If they say they do
not pay a tax, that we can
understand; but the service
they said they do not serve
the English - European any
longer, that is not right, heh!
it is not right. For all who
are lying here about; the day
when the English bought this
fort, have they not then ea-
ten fetish? Were they not
then all in the fort? Lo, to
day it is before they say, that
they revolt! That, if they
say so! that is not tasteful,
heh! that is not tasteful! —
.... But seek a good word
for me! ....
1) Sen = ke dsi.
2) foT tongO! interj. s. Vocab. orig. only used by chil-
dren, but employed by this powerful speaker and theHce
much used.
dbyGoogk
193 —
Badu Asonko heto.
.... Stiomo ni woke ake
wosum{>Q Nligimei don le, no
le wokwa: w(}siimoame moA;
si onia le wotsuu, ni mo len
ha onukpai le baa; si ke efd
onukpai le asedi ke onia le
sedi, bele m5 len edso; si
ke eke, ekpl^g le, bele wo
hu wonyen noko woofe ! Tfa
omanye aba! —
Badu Asonkos answer.
The service (of) which we
said, that we do not serve
the English any longer, that
we take back : we will serve
them, but the tax we don't
pay, and into the fort the
grandees do not go; but if
he cease to demand the gran-
dees and to demand the tax,
then the nation has rest;
but if he say, he will not
agree, we also cannot help
it! Let happiness come! —
IT. Gs-adesaf.
1. Anann keAnanateke
sisai ete.
„Miia^) lo mitaanye?"
„„Womhere no!""
„Dsee')Ananuke ebiAna-
nute ^) ni ameyo ; ni h6m6 ba
naakpa , ni wo ke ebi koo;
ni kedsi hSmo boi ame yeli,
ameya lumu no\ ni ameya-
IT. 6a -Fables.
1. Spider and Spiderson
and three ghosts.
„Shall I tell ornottell you?"
„„We take it up!""
„Were there not Spider
and his son Spiderson. And
hunger came very hard; and
the cock ami his son had
nothing to pick and when the
hunger began to eat them,
they went upon the rubbish
and sought nuts to crack and
1) ta adesa, to tell a fable. S. Vocab.
2) A common narrative formula.
3) -te, -te, -tete, name of the firstborn son, ananu,
spider. S. Voc. „adesa.**
Zimmermaon, Akra-Gramtn. 13
dbyGoogk
— 194
taoo Amei ni ametso ame-
kpe; ni otSii enyo lo ete figdS
nIamenanmekuliO kome. Ni
gbl ko le Ananute te nme h
eko taoiDQ, ni ena eko pe; si
beni etsoo hQ le, nme le ny6
obisi bu mli, ni fele awyere-
ho ') naakpa. Si mldso ^)
anySS aye le, Ananute bote
bu \m; ni b6ni eya le, eyati
sisai ete no , sisa yen ke sisa
tsuru ke sisa din, ni, abQ
dsen*) tam, amedsuko ame-
he lo ameseko ameyi d9. Ke-
ke ni amebile ake: »N^gbe
oyaa? ni meni otaoo?" Ni
eka ekosem^) etsoame, ake
homo eba amem^, ni yfQ
'Nanu ke ebi koo, ni le humi
eyakpa si ahu, ni ena nme-
kuli le, beni etsoo hii le,
nme le lu ke bote obisi bii
mli, nohewo enyte ese ne.
— Keke ni ameyi ete ^) le
tt ame here no ake: ^Aso
eat, and two or three week
(passed) before they foun^
one single nut: And one da^
Spiderson went to seek fbi
a nut, and found just one
but when he cracked it, ii
fell into a rats' hole and grie-
ved him very much. But i1
being bitter not to be able
to eat it, Spiderson went into
the hole and when he was
going, he stept upon three
ghosts, a white (white are
the fetishes) ghost and a red
ghost, and a black ghost, who^
even since the world was
created, had never washed
themselves nor shaven their
heads. Then they aske^ him:
„Whither art thou going ?
and what seekest thou ? And
he related his sad palawer
to them ; that hunger had
come to their town and the
cock 'Nanu and his son had
nothing to pick; and he the
poor fellow had gone (and)
wandered about a long time,
and he had found a single nut;
also this when he cracked it,
jumped off and fell into a rats'
hole , therefore he was walk-
ing here after it. Then they
three together answered say-
1) kuli, single grain.
2) Otyi = grieve.
3) Gram. Subj. left out.
4) bo dsen, to create the world.
5) ka kosem, Otyi, to relate the history of ones mis-
fortunes.
6) yi ete, yii ete, three heads, used of persons.
dbyGoogk
~ 195 —
Bmelnli tSaii heyvQ latSa etSao
pam ne!" Ni ameyafS yere
ke-dse am^nmdSi ^) ke-ba, ni
amekele ake: „Na yedSi! ')
tsemo ni oho he totoi lemon,
si oke ekpakpai le afie/' Ni
efe take boni amekele le, ni
beni ekwe le, efe yere akpa;
ni eye afe') gbi! ete ye ame-
nd, ni efi naakpa. No se le
ekeame, ake amewole gbe, *)
koni eke noko ayahS enye-
mimei ni ygsla le. Ni ameyaffi
yere amewo bedeo mB, ni ame-
N^ole ghe. §i beni amekele ya
ni ameyadsie le gbeO le, ame-
ke ake : „Nmene ots6 ^nan-
Dyo; si wobakeo sane ko ; si
kake moko, ni kala neke lala
ne gbikogbiko ; ni lala le
noni amela amet^le 1^ ne^
»„Asaman fufu C6!*)
Asaman koko 06!
Asaman tuntum do!
Mitri anya tQ a mebeye den
nyie?
ing: „And for a mere single
nnts sake thou art perspiring
80 much?" And they went
and digged yams from their
plantation-ground and brought
it, and they told him : „See
(here are) yams! peel it, and
cook the peel of it only, but
the good ones cast away !"*
And he did as they told him,
and "when he looked, it had
become good yams; and he
remained about three days
with them and became very
fat. After that he said unto
them, that they may dispatch
him, that he may bring
something to his brethren at
home. And they digged yams
and put it into a basket and
dispatched him. But when
they accompanied him on the
way, they said: „To day thou
hast become our friend, and
we will tell thee something,
but tell it to no body and
do not sing at any time this
song ; and the song which
they tought him was this:
(Solo):
„„Weisser Geist, hoho!
Rother Geist, hoho I
Schwarzer Geist, hoho!
(Chor):
Wurd' mein Kopf iibertreten,
1) nmd§i, plantation-ground.
2) pi. of yere.
3) afe (s. fe v.) may be, about*
4) wo m. k. gbe , to dispatch.
5) dsie m. k. gbe , to accompany oiie on the way;
6) 06! 66! is often added to words and sentences in
calling or singing.
dbyGoogk
— 196 —
Ode tri fi* ase,
Ode nan fi' ase:
Ode tri fi' ase!
Woara yawabosom panyiri!**"
Keke ni enyle ni ese Sla.
Beni amenale le, amenya ehe
naakpa. §1 yedsi le nl Ana-
nute ke-ba le, Ananu yatSe
enanemei, ni amedsie eji^
hu naakpa. Ni ameye yere
afe nydn kome soft, edsake
el^re pi Iso; ni agbene le
Ananu ke ewebii fia fi. Ni
asan Ananute yanSo yedsi ke-
ba dane.
Ni ye dhu le Ananu ke Ana-
nute ake: „Mibi, beni ofe le
fa, mi hQ mafata ohe fio, ni
bo hu odsQ ohe." Si Ana-
nute ekpleS etse» edsake
Ananu be d§en kpakpa. Si
kele Ananu tsd na ko, beni
Ananute [bay a le> koni ele
hegbe ni ete. Gbi nyOA nl
dse atsere np ni Ananute ate
le , Ananu yagbu Ananute
kotoku nl eke-yaa le sisi, ni
en5 lamlu wo mli. Ni se
ademaAkS le, beni Ananu fie
Was wiirde mir gescfaehen ?
Den Kopf , den wirft er weg !
Den Fuss, den wirft er wegl
Den Kopf, den wirft er weg!
Du, du beleidigtest dieHaupt-
fetische!""
Then he walked off and came
home. When the/y saw him,
they rejoiced over hinn very
mufh. But (because of) the
yams which Spiderson had
brought, Spider called bis
friends and they praised him
also very much. And thej'
ate yams about a whole
month, because he had car-
ried very much, and now he.
Spider, and all his people
got fat. And Spiderson went
again (and again) to bring
yams always.
After a long while Spider
said ijplo Spiderson : „Myr hoy,
what thou hast done, suffi-
ces, I also will assist thee, that
thou also may est have rest."
But Spiderson did not con-
sent to his father, for Spider
had no good manners. But
still Spider used a trick, when
Spiderson was about to go,
that he may know whither
he went. In the night of the
day of which in the morning
Spiderson would go, Spider
went and made a hole in the
bottom of the bag Spiderson
was to take with him, and |
put ashes in. After that early
when Spider set out, his father
slept, and when he awoke,
1) dsie m. k. yi, to praise ond.
dbyGoogk
197 —
no le, etSe ewo, ni beni ehfe
ts6 le, eyifi ni eyana ake
lamlu le efie si ye gbe no
no m ni etSd ke-te Ig; ni
ejanina Ananute le ye nma-
Amasa n) ake yaa neke md
len le. Beni Ananute na et§e
le, ehie fele ys; ^ keke n\
ebile, ake; „„Ata! me feme
oba ye bie? ke osumg, ake
ote le, bo ni oya, si mi le
inibaku mise ; si noni makeo
dsi, ake ndfend nl ameakeo
le, femo! si katse sane na,'j
ni kafe ohe niilelo tutu!""
Keke n! Ananu kele ake: Nto
mifoo? Si mile bgni mafe
memo ; si ke oku ose dsin ^),
ku ni oya!"" Ni Ananute ke
etSe gbla*) mli. Ananute ba
sla, ni etse le bu te sisai
am§ len. Beni Ananu se §i^)
ni enaame pe le, efd ake:
„„N§ bului ne d^? meba
nyesee nyeyi ni nyedSuu nye-
be? Nyebaa bie, nl maSe
he went and saw, I hat the
ashes had fallen on the way
on which he was gone away
and he went and overlook
Spiderson at the outskirts
where they go to that town.
When Spiderson saw his fa-
ther, be was astonished; then
he asked him saying: „„Pa-
pa, what to do here hast
thou come? if thou like to
go; pass and go; but as for
me 1 will return; but what
1 will tell thee is, that what-
soever they will tell thee,
do! but do not speak much
and make thyself not too
wise!"" Then Spider told
him saying: „„Have 1 not
begotten thee ? But 1 already
know how to act; but if thou
say thou will return, well,
return and be gone!"" And
Spiderson and his father de-
parted from eachother. Spi-
derson came home, and his
father also went to the ghosts'
town. When Spider arrived
and had just seen them, he
broke out : „ Where do these
fools come from? Why do
you not shave your head nor
wash yourselves ? Come hi-
ther, that 1 may shave this
hair of yours, which is like
a bush (for you)!"" Then
1) hie fe yS,. to be astonished*
2) to speak much.
3) ddin = dsiO; to be supplied: „ or not, t don*t care,**
return etc.
4) gba mli, to separate, pi. gbla mi.
6) §e si, to arrive.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
198 —
nyeyitSoi n\ tamo ^0 ne ma-
Mnye!"" Keke h amebo!
ADanudsemQ^ake leetSdoame
niile lo? Ni amebile ake:
„„Meni otaoo?"" Ni ekS eko-
sem etSdame ; ni ameyafU yere
ke-ba, ni amedsie nyonmai
ete amehdle, ake eho nl e;ye,
§i etsemd *) totoi h eivo ku-
kwei le mli, ni eke yere
kpakpa le afie. Si Ananu ke
ake : „Te afe ten ni masere
yedsi kpakpai le mafien? ^)
Nyeno') bului ke koloi ko-
mei*) be!"" Ni Ananu ba-
Aq^) yedSi kpakpai le ewo
botoku mli; si ehoo ahu, ni
ebee. Ni amebadse Apanu
ake le boti^) kolo dSile; si
elo totoi le ewo botoku le
mli. Ni efe nakai; keke le
amro le ebe ni etsd yere kpa-
kpa moiky ni Ananu ye. Ana-
nu ye fthQ le ekeame> ake
they began to scold bim
whether he perhaps was the
person to teach them wis-
dom? And they asked him:
„„What doestthou want?""
And he related his troubles
to them; and they went and
digged yams and hrought it,
and they selected thirty for
him, saying that he may boil
and eat it; but he shall peel
the peel off and put it uato
the pot, and cast the good
yams away. But Spider said:
„„How is it that 1 shall cast
the good yams away? Aboye
you there are not any fools
and brutes (to be found)!""
And Spider went and cut the
good yams and put it into a
large pot, but he boiled it
a long time, but it did not
get done. And they began ,
to scold Spider, that he ra-
ther is a brute; for he shouid ^
take up the peel and put it
into the large pot. And be
did so, then immediately it
was done and had become
good yams; and Spider ate.
Spider had been there a long
time (when) he said unto
them, that he will go. And
1) pi. obj. of ts6, to peel.
2) se-f5, pi. Sere-fie. Term. aug. A to conclude the
question, § 20, 1. at the end.
3) Above you.
4) some.
6) pi. obj. of the verb fo, to cut.
6) old form = moi^ , rather.
Digitized by
Googk
199 —
e^. Ni ameyawo bedeo obd
le yere, ni amekg-bahdle,
oi amekele yin, koni ameya-
dsiele gbe> ni amekele ake:
„„Na, nvolala ne, wobat§6o;
si kala gbikogblkol'^^'ni ame-
boi lamo kele tSomg ake:
(Solo):
„„Asaman fufu 06!
Asaman koko 06!
Asaman tuntum 06!
(Chor):
Metri anya etc. etc.""
§i beni amela lolo le» Ananu
hu ebot 0 amrd le non ; si
beni amebile h, ekeeame; §1
eke, ake, emS lala ko elaa.
§i beni amekjle etsere mli')
le ni Ananu ete ehle fio pe
le, eboi lala le lame; keke
le efle ke-dse nwei elu si,
krum! kekgle eyitso efo, ena-
ne efo, ni egbo hQ; si kele
ela lolo. Ni sisa yeA le ke ')
enyemimei le ake: „„NyehSa
woyalsiea ehie, si enii ye
mobg!""*) Ni amebalsie ehle.
they filled a basked with yams,
and the^ gave it to him and
went with him to accompany
him on the way, and they
said unto him: ^^See, this
is our song; we will show
it to thee; but never sing it!""
and the^ began to sing, and
to show him saying:
(Solo) :
„„Weisser Geist, hoho!
Rother Geist, hoho!
Schwarzer Geist, hoho I
(Chor) :
ward' mein Kopf etc. etc."**
But when they were still sing-
ing, Spider had also imme-
diately begun ; but when Ihey
asked him, he did not tell
them, but said, that he is
singing a song of his town.
But when they had departed
from him and he had gone
a little fowards, he begun to
sing the song; then he burst
from above and troke down,
plump! then his head (was)
cut off, his foot was cut off,
and he also died, but still
he went on singing. And the
while ghost told is brethren
saying: „„ Let us awake him,
for he is to be pitied!"" And
they awoke hi^n. But when
he went again, he began to
1) perf. tense, used like plusq.
2) tsere mH pi. form of tse mli, to rent. See above:
gba mli.
3) k^ , to say, must sometimes be written with the sign
of length to distinguish if from the auxiliary verb : kg, to take.
4) About „mobQ,** „yfi mi^o,*' „na mebo** s. Voc.
dbyGoogk
200 —
§i beni eya ekoA le, ebd
lamo ekon , ni efele 0 nakai
Don. Si amenale lUQbo ekoA
ni amesa araetsfe ehie. Keke
le ameboUe yi, ni amefiele
ke eden eflo ke-ya sfa. Si
beni mei le nale le, ameml
se amehe naakpa ameblo:
„„Ye! na Ananu! Ye! na
Ananu!**" si beni amebi edsa-
tsu si le, ekSi ekosem etsda-
me. Ni ameSe Ananu no
amef5, ni ameke: „„Ananute
no') mon eba dsen!""')
EdsakeSi ke ote mo mS
len le, noni afeole, no
ofeo, gi ofee ohe take
niilelo ko, ni otsSo se
ofeo bulu!""*)
sing again, and the same be
fel him. But they pitied liim
again and awoke him the se-
cond lime. Then they began
to beat him and drove him
off emptyhanded to his to^wn.
But when the people saw
him, they rejoiced very much,
crying: „„ Halloo! See Spider!
Halloo! See Spider!"" But
when they asked after his
load, he told them his trou-
bles. And they cast Spider'^
away; and they said; „„Spi-
derson's behaviour rather (is
something which) is manner
of the world!"" Because
if you have gone to any
body's town, what is
done, that thou doest,
and doest not make thy-
self as a wise man to
become afterwards a
fool!
1) fe, V. impers. to happen to s. b.
2) thing, what he did.
3) ba dsen, to be fit in the world, fashionable, to behave.
4) Imperfect tense used like an Imperative mood.
2. GbOlO*) ke en§.
2. The hunter and his
wife.
„Mita lo mitaa?"
„„Womhere no!""
„Shall I tell or not!"
„„We answer!""
_ ^ , , . « J „Was not tere a man and
„Dsee nu ko ke enS ni j^j^ ^-j^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^j^ere.
ameyo* Ni atSeo ehS gbei, And his wife's name was Ba-
1) gbobi, to hunt; gbobilo, gbOlO, hunter.
dbyGoogk
— 201
ake: Badua. Ni ameyo ko
se, ni na le gbobio; ni lo
homd baba , ni anaa mle tete
afa ni aho po; §i Badua le»
ewu le ke ete gbobimo, enaa
lo kg egbeo ke-ba. §i agbene
Ie,,nQ le, enaa lo le eko egbe
don. §i beni e^^a ko le mli
le, ena» ake hinmalo efe ba-
yelOy ni enu emli 1^ le momo,
ni eke-tsotsoro si, koni ke
ewo gdgomii le, bele ebaye
g5g5nu le. Ni nQ le ke-ba
sla, ni end le kele ake:
,,„KpaO ^) miyee koloi ana 16,
ni mihi lo fulQ hu, nohewo
le mihoo, ni mitdH he/*** Ke-
ke le nH le ekee noko, ni
eyih ke-te ni eyatse nibii, ni
eflo lo le ni eho wonu le,
ni esi ete ni eyaflo amada!
ke-ba, ni ebasi fuifui^) end-
fata he, koni eye. Si beni
ete le , end le ko ato, ni ebo!
loi le yeli. Keke le loflo ko
basd §i, ni eboi eyiwomg ^)
ke neke lala ne ake:
dua. And they were in the
bush, and there came a
meat- hunger, that not even
mushrooms could be taken
out and cooked; but as for
Badua, her husband when a
hunting he used to find ve-
nison (flesh) to kill and bring.
But now he, the man, got not
longer any game to kill. But
when he went to the bush,
he saw, that the ^scratch-
face** (leopard) had rent a
„Ieafealer** (and kind of ante-
lope) and had drunk the blood
(in it) and hanged it up, that
if it may produce worms, he
may eat the worms* And
the man brought it home; and
his wife told him: „„Fye!
Never I eat any meat from the
mouth of wild beasts , and I
abhor also stinking meat,there-
fore I neither cook nor touch
it!'*** Then the man said
nothing, and went and plucked
things (for soup) and cut the
meat and cooked and he left
it and went to cut plantains
and brought them, and poun-
ded fuifui (a native favorite
food) to it , and then he ate.
But when he had gone, his
wife took the ladle and be-
gan to eat (from the pieces
of) the meat. Then a bird
sat down and begun to mock
at her with this song:
1) KpaO, inteij. Fye! $fui!
2) All this is womans-work.
3) wo m. k, yi, to cry at one (mockingly).
13**
dbyGoogk
202 —
„,,Baclua! :|:
Omd sika koe nyara!
Badu' se nkodi aboa furu
Etfase nkodi
Okyiri 6 odio . . .""
Keke ni eko te etfale, f^ le,0
ela lolo; ni Badua bakQ lo
le, ni eye; ni loflo le fliki,
ni ela neke lala ne non etsd
na le ye enmd le Si; si klen-
klen le na le naa siSi; ni
beni ena sisi le, eba sla ni
ebabile, ni ehie gbo') naa-
kpa. Ni ase yO 1q nd afo,
ni ake na le n5 ba dsen;
edsake ke na ke eM ye» ni
yO le mlhi noko le ni na le
hi! le, ehoQ ehSale keke, si
eyee eko.
„„Badua! :|:
Sie lasstGold yerloren geh'n;
Badu*sagt, sie ess' kein Stink-
fleisch,
Sei nicht recht, dass man es
ess':
Hinter ihm, da isst sie es!""
Then she took a stone and
cast it at it; all (in Tain),
it sang still; and Badua took
the meat and ate; and the
bird flew away, and sang this
same song to the man in his
plantation ; but at first he
did not understand its mean-
ing; but when he understood
it, he came home and asked
the woman, and she was very
much ashamed. And the wo-
man's was cast away and the
man's was brought into fa-
shion; for if a man and his
wife live together, and the
woman abhor something
which the man does not
abhor, she cooks it at least
for him; though she may
not eat of it.
1) f6 le, all in wain.
2) hie gbo, the face dies, to be ashamed.
T. Songs (lalai).
1. The arrival of the English.
(Solo): „liflisblofd eba!" „The English have comcl**
(Chor): „„Wom'8umo, „,*We like it,
WQm'sumQ,w9m'sumQ, wgm'- We like it, we like it, we like it;
sumo; The English have come! we
I^glisblofdeba, wom'sumo!**" like it!"" :|:
dbyGoogk
— 203
2. A Christian song after a native tune and metre.
nWonyontsQ Jesu! „Thoa, our Lord Jesus,
Bo dsielo! :|: Thou sayiouri :|:
Wonaba omasei, We come at thy side!
Bodsi ivonyontSQ! :|: Thou art our master! :|:
Bo ni oyo ^ala, Thou who life possessest,
Jesu ni yo wala: Jesu thou who has it:
Womba omasei, We come at thy side,
Bodsi WQ nyont§Q!" :|: Thou who art our Lord!" :|:
Though the^Ga people sing yery much, their songs
which are in use, are mostly Adanme or Olyi. Short Gft-
songs are composed at random during their plays, dances,
work etc. These are often very witty and satyrical, but
we are still too little acquainted with this part of the
language, to have a sure footing as to metre, tune elipses
etc. Proverbs and Fables or Tales which already exist by
hundreds and even thousands are also continually produced
^y young and old. But it is also difficult, especially with
the latter, by which many a moonlight night is occupied,
to get them correctly, and the principal style and spirit of
them, partly expressed by theatrical change of voice, songs,
MutA inunitating sounds of voices and noises, interjections
etc. are generally lost in writing them down, it is the same
with Speeches and Histories, which are principally given by
old people who can not write and the younger people who
can write are not so able in the language. — Respecting
Proverbs it is to be remarked, that though they are as it
Were , the expression of the law and manners of the coun-
try, they are often very ambiguous, and allow not only a
had, but often also an unclean use. See also the Preface.
i<|y JfrJy^fiCJr*^''^
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
Digitized by VjOOQIC
A Orammatical Sketch
of the
Akra- or 6a- Language ,
with some Specimens of it from the mouth of
the natives.
And
a Vocabulary of the same^
with an appendix on the Adaame-Dialect.
By Rev. J. Zimmermann.
Two Volumes.
Vol. II. Qfi-Tocabolary, mth an AdSnme Appendix.
Stuttgart^ 1858.
Printed for the Basel Missionary Society
by J. F. Steinkopf.
dbyGoogk
Vocabulary
of the
Akra- or Ga-Language,
with an Adanme Appendix.
By Rev. J. Zimmermann.
^tutt^art^ 1858.
Printed for the Basel Missionary Society
by J. F. Stelnkopf.
Digitized By CjOOQIC
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Contents.
Pag.
6fi*Tocabularj 1—384
Atoiite- Appendix.
a. Grammatical Sketch of the DSnme-
Dialect.
§ 1. Introduction 385
§ 2. Sounds 386
§ 3. Roots 387
§ 4. Forms and pure Formwords .... 389
§ 5. Combination and Syntax 396
§ 6. Verb and its forms in partic 398
§ 7. Pronouns, nouns and adjectives, or subj.
and object and their definitions . . . 406
§ 8. Numerals 410
§ 9. Adverbs and Conjunctions 412
§ 10. Interjections etc. 413
b. Specimen of the Ddnme-Dialect • . . 414
c. AdSlnme-Vocabulary 426
dbyGoogk
VI
Explanation of the Abbreviations.
Ad. Adh., AdSnme.
adj., adjective.
adv., adverb*
ace. accord., according.
aor., aorist tense.
art., article.
augm., augment.
aux., auxiliary.
Akwp. Dial., AJrwapim Dialect (of
the Otyi-Language).
Ay., Ayigbe (language),
b., body; s. b., some body.
C. Didl., Coast Dialect,
coll. collect., collective noun,
com., common noun,
comp., compare,
conj., conjunction,
dan. Da^., danish.
dem. demonstr., demonstrative.
Dial. D., Dialect; Kr. D., Krobo
Dialect,
dim., diminutive,
engl. Engl., english.
eur. Eur. europ., european.
6tc., et cetera.
Fab., fables,
f. 1., for instance,
f. fem., feminine gender,
fig., figuratively,
frequent, frequentative mood,
fut, future tense.
Grerm., German,
gen., generally.
gr. Gr., greek.
Hebr., Hebrew.
imperf., imperfect tense.
i. e., id est, that is.
impers., impersonal.
imperat. impert. , ipiperative
mood,
ind., indicative mood,
ind. indefinit., indefinite,
inf., infinitive mood or form,
init., initial,
int. interj., interjection
interr., interrogative,
irr. irreg., irregular,
iterat., iterative mood,
lat. Lat., latin,
m. masc, masculine gender,
m. k., moko (some body),
n., noun.
neg., negative (voice),
neutr., neuter,
n. pr., proper noun.
! neuter v.
n. k., noko (some thing),
nom., nominative, nominal,
num., numeral.
Ot., Otyi (language),
obj. object., objective,
pi., plural number,
pi. f., plural form,
perf., perfect tense,
pers. prs., person, personal.
dbyGoogk
Explanation of the Abbreviations.
vn
pos. posit, positive (voice).
poss., possessive.
pot, potential mood.
pres., present tense.
pre., personal, person.
prob., probably.
pr. n. and n. pr., proper noun.
pron., pronoun.
pr. prov., proverb.
red., reduplicatioB^ reduplicated.
rel., relative.
refl., reflexive.
8., see.
s. b., some body (moko).
s. th., some thing (noko).
sc, scilicet, nStnli^; namely.
sec, second.
sec. prs., second person.
sing., singular number.
subj., subject, subjective.'
Tab., Table.
th. s., the same.
v., verb.
V. n. and n. v., neuter verb.
V. a., a. v., active verb.
V. imprs., imp. v., impersonal verb.
voc, vocat., vocative (case).
verb., verbal.
=3, like, the same as.
(?), not sure.
dbyGoogk
Digitized by VjOOQIC
A.
(Words beginning with A and not found under A must
be sought, after separating the initial „a** or the pronoun
^ame** under the next following consonant.)
a-, first letter of the Alphabet, inilial augment of many
nouns, especially of impersonal indiyidual character; in-
definite pronominal augment = they; their (man;
i^r); or init. augment of the pot. mood and fut. tense
posit, contracted from ^ba^ to come. Comp. Gram. § 13.
S (or h§, he) adv. yes.
aa-, init. augm. of the indefinite 3. prs. pi. of the fut. tensf,
= aba-, ameba-, they will or shall-.
Abaflo, n. a fragrant kind of wood used by women to wash
themselves.
abalS, abla, n. sail. Adanme th. s.
abantoli, n. an eatable yellow fruit,
abas^ (Olyi), n. the length of both outstretched arms; a
fathom; ta abase, v. to bet.
abasata, n. betting.
abenlia, n. grave-yard; redoubt (the Govemment-grave-yard
and a small redoubt are in one and the same place in
Osu, wherefore the ope name for both),
abe (Ad. and Ot. th. s.) n. proverb; bu abe, to use a
proverb,
abebu, n. use of proverbs.
abebulQ, n. speaker of proverbs,
abei, n. butter-fly.
abedei, amedei, n. a kind of shall^.
ab^ku, n. the left (side or hand). Ad. 1h. s. Ot. benkum.
abekulQ, n. a left handed person,
abele, n. a pair of tongs, snuffers or pincers. From be,
to pinch.
abete, n. a kind of food.
ab3)rfi)], n. a kind of necklace,
da&o, pi. -fabii, n. a little child. Ad. th. s. comp. fufoo
and foo and gbekS.
abisa, n. a kind of lot; fdto cast lots. Ad. th. s.
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 1
dbyGoogk
2 abisafd -^ ablotSiri-abla.
abisafd, n. casting of lots.
abla, n. falsehood.
ablfi, n. (0\. abrowa) european woman; lady, also used
mulattoes.
ablabutu, n. a large kind of beautiful coloured straw-basket
ablade, n. a nobleman,
ablana (Ot. abrana, Ad. ablana), n. gallery,
ablanano, n. place on the gallery,
abl^ (Ad. blefo, Ot. abro), n. com, maize; ku able, I
break corn, gble-i to grind it roughly; wyie-, to grin
it (welly for bread),
ableba, n. corn-leaf.
ablebutu, n. ablabutu, a straw-basket of various colours,
ablefo, n. half- ripe com; when roasted a favorite food c
the natives; s. fo, v. and foo, adj.
ablekpamo, n. maize-harvest; fir. kpa able, v. =^ able kuomQ
ablekpa, n. the peeling of the corn-ears; s. kpa able, v.
ablekplamo, n. the same.
ablekuU, n. eel. Ot. aberekuri.
abl^kuli, n. single grain of com; s. kuli, n.
ablekuomo or ablekUmo, n. corn-breaking, com-hanrest.
ablekulQ, n. corn-breaker,
ablekuomobe, n. time of the cornharvest.
ablenmdn, and
ablenmdsi, n. corn-field,
able-obutu, n. a load of com.
abletM (Ot. aberikyi), n. goat, male or female; comp. t4)
and to kpakpo, n.; and to gwantefi, n.
abletSo, pi. -t§ei, n. corn-stick; corn-ear.
ablo, n. hardness; fe m. k. — , v. to be hard against s.b.;
= wa yi, V. and tfa m. k. §!§!, or fe m. k. Siiitfi, v.
ablofelQ, n. hard person,
ablofemo, n. hardness, cruelty.
abl6gwa (Ot. abrogwa, Ad. ablogba), n. european chair (s.
bro and bio = european).
ablogwaf^lo, and
ablogwakp^lQ, n. chair-maker.
abl6gwatse, n. chair-man.
abl6no. Ad. th. s. n. a kind of pudding of the natives,
ablonwd, Ad. th. s. n. white oil; taUow.
Ablotsiri, AbrotSiri and AblotSili, Ad. th. s.; Ot. Abrokiri,
n. pr. Europe, in general: country of the white people,
also sometimes used of Amerika, and even of Sierra Lemie.
ablotSiri-abIa, n. a european woman, lady.
dbyGoogk
abloUiri-wiemo — abfitse. 8
aUomri-wiemo, n. any european language = MofdivienH), n.
abo, D. refuge; ba abo, v. to take refuge.
abo (and avo), n. (s. bo) field, garden. Ad. th. s.
abo, n. suspension, s. ye abo, pry. 65,
abo, n. number; s. bo.
abo^, n. a kind of swelling in the body; abu^, th. s.
abobs, n. refuge.
abobalo, n. person lo whom refuge is taken.
aboboi. n. (fr. bo, to multiply), ground-beans and other
beans (comp. akwei), when boiled, a favorite break-fast.
Ol. and At. th. s.
abodiamo (Ot. and Ad. th. s.) bottle, esp. common round
green bottle; comp. atunkpg.
abokd, n. a kind of cloth brought from the East (bok&).
Abokobi, pr. n. of a village,
abold. Ad. th. s., n. bread baked of maize (Ot. abod6):
comp. komi,
aboloba, n. leaf in which bread is baked,
abolobatsoy pi. -, n. the tree from which this leaf is taken,
abolobatso-na, n. male-bread-leaf-tree,
abolobatso-yo, n. female dto.
sbolosalo, n. baker.
abolosubo, n. loaf of bread, s. akwdbo.
aborop6, n. precocious person; efe abomp^, he is preco-
cious; especially used of children.
abomp^fenio, n. precociousness.
Mho, n. barn, to preserve the com till it is used. It
stands generally in the middle of the „fimdn'' or plan-
tation, and as this is every other year removed must
often be rebuilt again.
^ono§], n. place under and round about the bam.
abons^m, pi -sami (Ad. abuSam, Ot. Qbonsam and abon-
sam), the devil; a bad person.
abonsam-dSe, or -dsen, n. hell.
aboDs^m-la, n. hell-fire.
ab6nua, n. lemon, lime; lime-colour; adj. lime-coloured.
tdbonuanu, n. lemonade.
abonuatso, pi. -t§ei; lemon-tree.
aboti^, n. goat; she goat. Ad. th. s.
%tiri, abotri, n. wrestle; fd-, to-. Ad. th. s.
•botrifo, n. wrestling.
abotrifolo, n. wrestler.
abotSe, n. planter, plantation-possessor; comp. AmdtSe and
kosenyo.
!♦
dbyGoogk
i aboyeli — ade dfcpa.
abo^eli, n. swinging in the air; suspension; fr« ye abQ» y.
abro-, 8. ablo-.
abui, n. needle (Ot. and At. diif. eomp. bue, Ad. v. to
open; bu, n. hole; gbu, v. to make a hole etc.)
abui-hinmei, n. eye of a needle.
abuld, s. abol6.
adaban, s. adeban.
adade, 'd^de, 'ade-, Ot. and At. th. s. n. iron.
Ad^de, n. pr. of a Fetish in Osu.
adadekramd, n. (Ad. and Ay.) eomp. adope and asamdnu-
kpa, chimpanse.
adadehk^a, ddenkwa, n. summerset.
Adadentam, n. pr. (OL = iron-middle) of a Gd-Yillage.
adafi, n. (perhaps from the Otyi: ade, thing and fi, to come
forth) news; only used in the phrase tfa adafi, v. to an-
nounce some news.
adafitfa, n. annunciation.
adafitf^lo, n. annunciator. ,
adaka, n. Ad. and Ayigbe and Ot. = adeka, box.
Addnme, Ddnme, n. pr. Sister or mother-language and tribe
of Gd, from Tema till Add, at the mouth of the river
Yolta and from this seacoast to the Akwapim-mountains,
with the Agotim-branch beyond the river Volta, contain-
ing the people of Tema, Kpoft (Pony), GbugbrS (Pram-
pram), NiAgo (Nuno, more properly) and Add at the
coast; and the Asadsale- or Asidsale-, Osudoku-, §ai-
(or Siai)-, Krobo- and Agotim- people in the interior,
together about 50 — 60,000 souls. About the language
(lit. Add-gb6, voice or language of the Add-people) see
Appendix.
addhme, n. Ad9-nut; tiger-nut.
Ad^nse, n. pr. (Ot. witness) of a Gfi- Village.
adawroma! (Otyi expression, s. daw, dao) your grace!
adawtso, pi. -t§ei, n. = kada, jaw-bone.
ade, n. (Otyi, = nd in G3, thing and dse, world, s. these).
Used in many Gd-phrases, f. i. bo ade, v. to begin exi-
stence, to come into the world, to live somewhere, Gft-
HisU 2.
ade, n. a kind of corall.
adebQ, n. beginning (s. dsenbo), existence.
ade, adei, n. or adv. only used in the phrase: wo ad$,
wo adei, wo dei, to sleep sweetly, espec. used of children.
adeiwo, n. sweet sleep.
ade-dkpa, n. good, precious corall.
dbyGoogk
adeMA — adobe. 6
adebdn (= adadebaA), v. iron-bar.
adeb^Ma, n. iron-clow, crow,
ad^da, n. bill-hook,
adedenkruma, n. castor-oil-shnib.
ad^ka, n. (s. ad^ka), box.
adekft! adekan! n. (lit. ^the thing in advance, sc. how is
it?") Salutation of people who come later thou others.
The answer is: „Ya, adso!" „It is quiet!" The salu-
tation answering to this in G9 is: ^HSinQ fS?" which see.
ademaAkg (s. mankS), adv. (Ot. ahimadaki) earl^ before
sunrise.
adekS, n. time, muse, s. dekS.
ad^nkO, n. a kind of oallabashes with a narrow pointed
mouth; s. fao, n.
adesS, n. a human .being, coll. mankind. It is more defi-
nite than gbomo, mo, man, person and therefore often
put in apposition to this: gbomo adesS, a human person,
gbomei adesai, men. The origin seems to be Otyi,
though the word is not used in it with this signification.
Ad. th. s.
adesS, n. (Ot. = evening), an evening or a touched (Ot.
sS, 6. ta and sa, to touch) tale, fable (in Otyi: ananse-
sem, spider-tale, because the spider plajs a principal roll
in them). TS adesS, to make or give out such a tale
(which is mostly done in the evening by moon -light,
when the people are assembled around the central fires
of their yards). See Gd-Specimen N. IV. Ad, nydsS.
adesdtSmo, n. tale-telling.
adesStalo, n. tale-teller,
adfam^n, n. (Ot. agwamaA); whoring, fornication; pi. -maAi
or -mai; whore, whoremonger; bo-, to whore,
adfam^jiibi, n. bastard.
adfam^AbQ, n. whore-dom; fornication,
adfam^nbolo, n. whore-monger, whore,
adfaman-yo or yO-adfaman, n. whore,
adi, n. dolphin; s. also atl, n.
adiatsiri, n. (Ot. Fanti dial. comp. di ekyiri, to be the next
after s. b.), store-keeper, steward, s. semo, n.
ad6a, n. (pleasure?), Ad. th. s. a kind of dance and music.
(Ot.), the smallest kind of antelopes (3n?erft(jirf(^, dwarf-
hart), only about one foot high and long.
adobe» n. a kind of palm-trees with very large, leaves or
branches.
dbyGoogk
t adod66 — adufud^.
adod6fi, n. a yellow fruit of a tree, similar to a plum, but
egg-shaped.
adod6n, pi. -dddsi, n. fly; fleshfly.
adodongbSne, n. large fleshfly.
adoku, n.
adope, n. chimpanse, see: asamanukpa.
adro, n. unripe coconut.
adSanali, n. a kind of wasps; s. asagba, n.
ad§anmalate, n. apple of the eye.
adSato (or ad§oto from the Ot. gyato), n. yaws; a kind
of pox which many natives get and with which some
purposely infect their children, because they consider
themselves afterwards safe against the infection. They
are not or seldom mortal, but very lingering and of
weakening effecl. They seem to be the resirit of ani-
malculae in the skin, as the itch, and are considered so
' as well as the latler by the natives themselves; ye — ,
inf. ad§atoyeli, to have yaws.
adsalofo, n. (Ot.) a person infected by this sickness.
adSatoyelo, n. th. s.
adSato^eli, n, yaw-sickness.
adsendSen or adsentsen (0. denkyem), n. a smaller and
more slender kind of crocodiles then the ^iba'S with
pointed heads and long tails and of a reddish colour,
living together with the others in the same waters (Comp.
also: d§eh).
ad§ensu, n. (Ot. agyensu, n.) received water from flatt
housetops.
adSi (sometimes ayi?), perh. an old fut. tense of „dSi", v.
to be; = it will or maybe; added to sentences stating
something doubtful; = perhaps, may be etc.
adsinS, n. (Ot. agyina, lit. standing), private counsel (comp.
gwabo); ya-, to go to counsel.
ad^inSfo, adsinSifonyo, pi. -foi, adSinlllQ, adsin9yalo, n.
counsellor.
adsindya, n. going to counsel, consultation.
Adu, n. pr. of men.
adu, n. monkey; a kind of monkeys.
aduatsQ, n. confirmation, in the phrase: md wiemo' no
aduatsQ, to confirm a word; inf. aduatSoma.
aduawa, n. Otyi = the Ga = tSoyibii; n. fruit of trees.
aduddn, s. adodon, n. fly.
adufud6, n. (Ot. adefude; comp. ade, n. and fu, v.) intern-
perateness exce|s; ye-, to be intemperate.
dbyGoogk
adufiid^nii — afa. 7
adofad^nii, n. pi. intemperate doiDgs or things.
adufudeyeU, n. intemperateness.
adufudeyelo, or -yelilo, n. intemperate person,
adukpei, n. (Danish); dagger.
adyenkuma, n. a kind of seafish.
afii, n. half; part; side; adj. half; adv. apart, a side; shor-
tened: 'fa (comp. fa, V. to take out),
afa, n. a small kind of bellows; s. sdhme, n. (Ot. =a
bello-ws).
afaban, n. fence; wall; enclosure.
afdsew, af^so, af^su (Ot. th. s), n. an inferior kind of
yams (s. y^re); sometimes white, but mostly of a blue
reddish colour; therefore adjectively used: violetblue or
-red; compare above „ab6ma^.
afei, afi, n. a kind of itches in the skin,
afi, 'fi, n. (Ot. afi, afe, afrihia), year; nye se-, last-; wo
se-, next year; ye afi 10, to be 10 years old; ye afl,
to keep aniversary. Ad. dseha.
afi, n. a kind of partridges,
afib^, D. an other kind of partridges,
afiy^li, n. age (of a person); aniversary, festivity,
afiyelo, -yelilo, n. guest of a feast.
afia, n. sling; to-, to make a sling.
aflangS, n. flag (from the Portuguese, Danish or English
language); si-, v. to hoist up a-;
aflang^si, n. hoisting up of a flag,
aflangasilo, n. person doing it.
^flanme, n. a kind of berries, like bilberries,
aflahmetso, pi. -t§ei, n. the shrub of them,
aflata, n. a kind of pap made of corn,
aflato, n. slinging; see: to afla, v.
aflimata, n. the sparrow; a kind of itch,
aflukpongo or afukpoiigo (Ot. afflnfikpoftgo), n. back -or
hump-horse or belly-horse; either the mule or the camel
(both not much known here); but probable the former,
afofro, n. blossom; gba-, to blossom,
afofrogba, n. blossoming; -mo, n. th. s.
afole or afore (Ot. afore), offering, sacrifice; §3-, to burn a-,
afolesd, n. offering; sacrifice,
afolesahe, n. place for sacrifices.
afoleSSno, afolesMate, n. altar,
afole^alo, n. sacnficen
afoto (Ot. af^), n. bellows; s. afa and sdAme, n,
afa» n. back, hump (Ot. efO).
dbyGoogk
8 atua — agd.
afua, n. inist, fog; large mass, f. i. trema-, a large mass
of cowries; nu afua, a large mass of water, flood.
afui, n. foam; kwS — , to foam.
afulkwe, n. foaming.
afukpongQ, s. aflukpgfigQ.
afutse, n. humpback.
afutufata, old GS: aputupata, n. bat, flittermouse.
afutuoko, n. an animal like the rabbit or hare; see kpeft-
kplen, n.
afai, n. miracle; wicked art performed by felish-priests (s.
okomfo); fe — , and ye — , to perform such a miracle.
Comp. also nkonyS.
^faiyeli, n. performance of miracles.
afaiyelo, afaiyelilo, n. performer of such miracles.
afene, conj. and adv. then; now; s. agbene.
afife (Ot. afyefye or afife from fye or fe, to look), n.
looking-glass; glass-pane; glasswindow.
ag§i, n. a kind of grasshoppers or locusts (comp. balabii
and gog6nigog6); a very small fly, animalcule; a small
particle of any thing; nothing, not a bit; adv. with ne-
gative voice, not at all ; ehadmi agS, he gave me nothing
or not at all.
agba, n. a small scaffolding to dey things on.
agbadsa, n. a kind of dance.
agbaku, n. honey-comp. ; s. wo, n.
agbSmi (= agbSbi, s. § 25, 3.) or agbomi, n. fig (of which
there are different kinds, but scarcely any eatable);
agbamilso, pi. -tsei; n. fig-tree; wild fig-tree, generally
used as shadow-trees in the slreet; therefore also called
„dsanotso", market-tree; and mambrobitso (Otyi.)
agbamu, n. eatable fruit of cactus.
agbeena, or agbiena, n. the large rainy season from about
May till July (s. gbo).
agbene or agbene (comp. the verb gbe and the pron. ne»
Ot. afeyi), adv. now; conj. then. .
agblama, n. lime; chalk.
agbo Cgbo), n. door, gate; agbo na, before the gate.
agbo, adj. strong, powerful, mighty; n. a powerful person;
to -agbo; ram.
agbomi awSroke, n. anise-shrub.
agbroke, n. a kind of vegetables.
agggenu, n. a kind of pap or thick beverage made of water,
bread bnd honey.
ago! interj. ho! hoa! -giving notice of approach.
dbyGoogk
agolo — ahubQ. D
agolo?, n. wheel.
agorgo, agolgo, dan. n. cucumber, (vulgar: pSuis).
Agolim, pr. n. of a land and tribe beyond the river Volla,
speaking Adanme.
agwasen, n. politeness; polite society; an assembly of re-
spectable people; society; ®efcllfc|iaft; ya — , to go into
society.
agwasen-gbomo, n. a polite person.
agwasen - wiemo , n. a polite vrord or language; language
of conyersation.
ahabia, n. a plant bearing a beautiful red flower and red
seeds. Sometimes arrowroot is called so from its simi-
lar leaves. The seeds, it is said, are used to weigh
gold-dust.
abarabata (a foreign word), or ahalabata, n. the harmatan,
harmatan- season, from about January till about March
or April. A dry cold wind from the North or East is
blowing at this season, so that things and even the skin
cracks.
aharabatiJ)e, n. harmatan-season.
ahi, n. (comp. hi, to abhor and ahi in Otyi), only used
in the phrase: je m. k. ahi, to mock s. b. to boast
against, to instigate envy (comp. ye he feo; gbe he guo;
li th. s.); inf.
ahlyeli, n. mocking, boasting against.
ahlyelQ, n. a person doing so.
ahim^ (Ot. fr. ahyen-ba, small vessel), n. fishingcanoe.
ahim^ka (europ. word), n. hammock.
ahim^nkatso, pi. -tsei, n. hammock-stick.
ahinkese (Otyi); n. canoe, s. anlese.
Ahodome (Ot), n. pr. of a Ga-village.
ahofi (or awofi, Ot. ahofl), debauch, debauchery, lavishness,
prodigality; bg — , v. to live debauchedly.
ahofibo, n. debauchery.
ahofibglQ, n. debauchee.
ahora, n. reproach, blame; bo — , to blame.
ahorabo, n. blaming.
ahu, n. treasure, concealed treasure; tu — , v. to find such;
taf. ahutu.
Shu, adv. (the „a" can be lengthened at pleasure) a long
time, very long; continually; very much. Comp. da,
dane; tutu, t§d, naakpa, pam, tam etc.
ahuahu (Ot.), n. fear; wo ahfiahu = wo gbeyei, to frighten.
ahubo, n. pr. 68; wonder, astonishment; Ot. bo ahu.
dbyGoogk
10 abtim — akeSi.
ahi!iin, n. storm.
ahOntO or ah5ntd, n. (Ot.) urgency; trouble; fc — , to b€
urgent, trouble-some,
aburuti^ (Ot. = spring-short), n. a short kind of springiiig
snakes, very poisonous.
ahOtu, n. discovery of a treasure; s. tu abO, r.
ahotulo, n. person finding a treasure.
ahwdnyS, n. blossom; leaf; sprout i shoot; gba — , v. to
blossom; to sprout; to shoot.
ahwdnySgbamo , n. blossoming; sprouting, shooting,
aiko! (or eiko!) pi. anyeko! Salutation to working people
or people comming in work. Answ. Yd 6e! Ya, ata!
Owura! etc. Signif. unkwon. Comp. Daholo! and mo.'
aka — , initiating form of the pot. mood, neg. voice.
akad§inam (Ot. akagyinam), n. surety; ye — , to „8tand"
(for a debt, „kaw" as) surety,
akaka, n. crust of bread.
akan, n. struggle; si — , to struggle = §i mple and pie he, y.
akane, n. a fruit of a tree.
akaAetSo, pi. -tSei, n. the tree of it.
akanma, n. a bird of prey; the carcion kite; s. akpdna, th.s.
akansT, n. struggling; vying,
akansilo, n. struggler, vier.
akasS, n. a kind of pap made of corn, s. aflata.
akase, n. a kind of indigo; s. amati.
akataiwyia (Ot. fr.) kata, v. to cower, and awyia, n. sun;
sun-cover, n. umbrella,
akatamanso (Ot. = ^people" or „ towns-cover"), n. a very
large umbrella, such as the chiefs of this country use,
when settling a great palaver in the free air or when
appearing in state,
ake, conj. (from the verb ke, to say, = people say; saying,
IDX^) that; often only used like a colon or notes of
quotation; for; because; as how; whether; than (see
also take and tamo). Ot. se, se; Ad. kg, kS (Ck)mp.
also edsake).
ake aleeno, that perhaps, with neg., lest,
ake beni, that when; sometimes: as, how.
ake boni, as, how (commonly take boni).
ake-lo; whether; whether -or.
ake noni. that what; as, how.
akesi, conj. that; for; because.
ake hewQ, and
akfiSi — — hewo; that -because . . .
dbyGoogk
akekre — Akpa. 11
aickre, n. a ring or wreath of cloth, flowen etc., crown
(a%€^avog)y comp. kakra, tako, mafitSefai, n.
aijtafo, akitawifo, n. cactusplant, s. akltti.
ddabafsa, n. s. akrahat§a; fence. -
ailati, akrati (Ot. akrati), n. cactus -plant; blofd - aklati,
euphorbia,
aklonta, n. fork of a tree; fork,
aklontia and akontia, n. pin.
aklonto, n. horn. Comp. koA; akionto seems to indicate
more the curved form of horns (as those of rams);
for which are to be compared words like: koklo, kulru-
ku; kokrolonto etc. and roots of other languages, as:
"^P (PR> horn); n3» hx^ nsifag; cornu, genu; circus;
career; circle, ^erfer; corner; horn; itugel, ilegcl etc. etc.
akluku, akuku, n. a kind of braid of hair,
ako, n. parrot (the blue one),
ako or ako, n. a swelling of the eyelid,
akoble, europ. word, n, copper.
Akoi, n. pr. of males,
akoklo, n. a small kind of shells,
akoko, n. Guinea-corn. Ad. th. s.
akgkobesS, n. (Ot.) a kind of spiced bark; Pr. t63.«
akokos, europ. word, n. cocoa-nut.
akokos-tso, pi. -tsei, n. cocoanut-tree.
akokosu, n. Ot. = wonu, n. fowl-soup; used in proverbs,
akomfode (Ot. lit. soothsayers property), n. a company of
a quarter of Osu (comp. asafo and akutso).
akono, (Ot.) desire; adj. or adv. ye akgno, to be desirable;
comp. ba tsine.
akonta (Ot. th. s.) perhaps europ. word; n. account (but
comp. nta and kg) ; bu — , v. to make an account, reckon.
alontabO, n. account; reckoning,
akontabulo, n. reckoner; cassier.
akoti^, n. short person, dwarf; (Ot.) adj. short,
Akoti^, pr. n. of a fetish in Osu.
akotoa, n. keg, powder-keg. Ot. th. s.
akQtQklo, n. a wooden fork to bear up the thatch,
akotoku, n. fist?
akotont§in, n. prepared crab.
akp5, n. a trap for beasts ; a small scaffolding before houses
to dry things on (comp. agba and Ot. ap^ th. s.) ; a bridge.
%a, adj. (shortened from ekpakpa, kpal^)a, Ot. pap.a);
good; f. i. gbomo 6kpa, a good person; common, f. u
dbyGoogk
12 akpS — akpIdnO.
abolo ikpa, coimnoii bread of the natives, not enropean
(s. akpano); lele ^kpa, a common vessel, not a steamer
etc.; real; genuine etc. adv. = naakpa or pam, very mach.
akpd or apd, n. block, on which prisoners are fastened bj
an iron cramp about the wrist; bo m. k. akpS, to fasten
s. b. on the block.
akpSbo or apdbo, n. fastening on the block,
akpdbolo or apSbolo, n. stock-master; jailor,
akpagal or akpaka!, n. (Ot. apakan) travelling basket ; a long
basket in which travellers are carried,
akpake (Ot. apakye), n. lameness (s. kpa), infirmity ; a lame
person; s. next word.
akpaketSe, pi* tsemei, n. a lame, mamed or crippled person,
akpaki (Ot. apaki), n. a larger callabash for measuring things.
akpakpa, n. the papaw-fruit.
akpakpatSo, pi. -tSei, n. the papaw-tree.
akpaku, n. honey-comb,
akpale, n. rafter (of a thatch),
akpand (Ot. pano) , probably a porfug. word, from the lat.
panis, n. european bread; biscuit,
akpdna = akSAma and opete, n. the carrion kite, ^adgeter.
akpftnma, n. -= adufud6; excess; ye — , s. to eat to excess
wjltiout paying for.
akpanmayeli, n. excess; spunging.
akpSnmayelo, n. spunger.
akpatramo, n. a large kind of spinning beans; comp. yQ,ti.
aboboi, n.
akpat§a, n. an eatable root,
akpatu^, n. foolish person, see bulu, kolo, kwaSi^.
akp^, pi. akpei (numeral), n. thousand (Ot. apim); comp.
kpe, to meet; mei akp6, 1000 men.
akpei ^nyo, two thousands, etc. etc.
akpetSe, pi. -tSemei, n. possessor or leader of thousand,
akpetekplebi, n. a curious fruit of a tree or shrub growing
in the plain or savanna only, used for fetish-business.
akpetekplebitSo, pi. -tSei, n. the tree or shrub of it.
akpiti (Ot. apiti), n. unleavened bread.
akpiUkpiti, n.
akplo (Ot. peaw), n. spear; lance; dO — , v. to spear; wo
m. k. akplo, v. lit. to Uft up the spear to one, to threa-
ten him; wo akpoi, v. th. s.
akplodOmo, n. spearing.
akplQWd, n. threatening,
akpldnd, n. s. akpand.
dbyGoogk
akplQto — Akwtounyo. 13
ak|doto, n. a large kind of apes (comp. kploto, pig?)
akpo, n. order command, degree; wo — , to give an order;
Yio akpoi, V. to threaten,
akpdno, n. s. akpand^
akpowo, n. order; ordering, commanding,
akpowolo, n. commander; lawgiver,
akpoiwo, n. threat.
akpokplonto, n. the land- tortoise; see hala.
akproke, n. a kind of vegetable.
(What is not found under akr- s. under akl.)
akrabatsa, n. a fence or grove holy to a fetish,
akrati (Ot. akarate), n. cactus,
akratu, n. a kind of beans,
akromi^, n. sling, swing; fo — , v. to sling,
akromi^fd, n. slinging,
akromiafdlo, n. sUnger.
akronti, n. a seafish.
Akron (Ot. nine, the ninth) pr. n. of the ninth son.
akrowa (Ot. th. s. from korow, town and ba, iittle, dim.
tennmation) village, plantation- village,
aku (Ot. eku) = adu, n. a kind of monkeys.
Akuete, pr. n. of the second of male twins; of a hill near
the Sai-mountain; see Akwete. .,.
akuku = akluku, n. a kind of hair4)raiding of the women.
akunt^, n. s. akontS.
akotso (comp. ku, kuku, weku and tso), pi. -tsei, n. tribe
(®tamm); quarter of a town; s. akwason, man, asafo,
weku etc.
akatsonbii, n. plur. the members of an ^akutso"".
akotson-onukpa, n. and
akutsonukpa, n. the elder of a tribe or quarter.
akotsontse> pi. -tSemei, n. th. s.
akutsonts^mei, n. pi. = akutsonbii.
akotu, n. (Ot. th. s.) orange; adj. orangecoloured.
akotut§o, pi. -tsei, n. orange-tree.
akwabo, n. loaf (of bread).
akwadu, n. Ot. th. s. banana.
akwadutso, pi. -tsei, n. banana-tree.
akwamfonyo, -fo, pi. -foi, n. canoeman, rower; sailor.
akwamfoiatSe, n. canoe-leader; captain.
AkwSmu, pr. n. of a tribe speaking the Otyi-language, their
land, situated at the river Yolta about 50 miles from its
mouth, and their dialect.
Akwtounyo, pL -mumei, pr. n. AkwSmu-man; • people.
dbyGoogk
14 akwaSoA — aid.
akwaSoii, n. assemble of the whole town, tribe or natioD,
8. mdn and ta, n.
akwet, collect, n. ground -bean; a kind of beans growing
under ground in a husk, like the groundnuts. Comp.
kw6, to grow (Otyi: atwy§). Cooked they are called
„ab(rf)oi", n.
Akiii^ele, pr. n. of the first of female twins; s. Akwoko or
Akuoko.
Akwete, pr. n. of the first of male twins, and of one of
two similar hills near the Sai-mountain. See Akuete.
AkwQkg, pr. n. of the second of female twins, s. Akwele.
al^gba, or
alakpa, n. jest, joke; ke m. k. dSe alakpa, to jest with s. b.
alakpadse, n. jesting, joking.
alakpadSelo, n. jester.
alali, n. interruption; wo alali, v. to interrupt, s. ,,dSedSe^.
alaliwo, n. interruption,
alali wolo, n. person interrupting.
alaiim^li, n. small lobster.
alant^, Mamt6, Momt6, MQnt6, (Ad. th. s.) cat; comp. ^ya,
slagbolo, dsramoa, dSanta, dSata ; etc., epithets of the eat.
alat^, n. hook; s. kpoii; the latter more used in Osu, the
foimer in Gd.
Al^ta, pr. n. of a quarter of Osu, where the people of the
king live; s. KinkSwe, AsinteblohQ.
aladsa, n. a long stick with a prick at the end, to move
canoes; mft — , v. to move canoes with such a stick; inf.
aladsamS, n. moving a canoe by a long stick.
aleeno (s. le, to know) lit. „it is not known", adv. per-
haps; especially used to make a whole sentence doubtful,
f. i. aleend ni mei le fg baa, perhaps that not all the
people will come. -(Comp. ekole, kule); ake aleenS with
follow, neg. voice, lest, lest perhaps, haply.
Alema, n. pr. of males born after a brother or sister who
died, see gbobalo, Owu, Ogbo etc.
alemle, n. name of the season between the second rainy
season (s. gbo, n.) and the harmatan (s. aharabata).
alefimle, n. a kind of thick honey.
aleiimlebi, n. the bee-like insect producing it.
alenenme, n. trying to stand (of children), fr. nme alene» v.
alo (fr. lo, to take up) and l5 (Ot. ana, ana se), conj. or;
„alo" is only used when initiating a sentence, else al-
ways „lo". Ekolfi-alo, either- or; f. i. £kol& micBeniSfi
dbyGoogk
alokpli -^ amdtiwolo. 15
maba alo matsu nubofo, either 1 come or send my
messenger. S. also dsio — , and d§io-d§io.
alokpli, n. wq alokpU, inf. alokpliwo.
alomt6^ s. alant^ etc. cat.
alodsa \ "* hypocrite? see opasafo, osatofo.
aluguntugun, and
aluguntugu, n. an eatable fruit, called soursap by the Euro-
peans at the Coast, as large as a chllds-head.
aluguntugutso, pi. -tsei, n. the soursap-tree.
alule, n. unripe com- ear (?).
alului, n. a bird.
Ama, and
Ama, n. pr. of males and females.
am^, n. pitch; lime; glue.
amate, n. asphalt („pilch-8tone").
amadSi, n. plantains.
amadStSo, pi. -tsei, n. plantain-tree,
amade, n.?
amagS, perh. of europ. origin, n. image, idol (Ot. th. s.).
amagdtmnu, n. idol-heap before towns, to take away „mu-
su", s. this,
amale, n. lie (fr. male, to lie).
amalemo, n. lying, irreg. infin. form of male; s. also malemg.
amalelo, malelo, n. liar,
amane, old. amande (Ol. amane), n. trouble, suffering;
na — , V. to get into troubles,
amanehulu, amanehuru, amanehunu (Ot. th. s. from hu
amane = Ga: na amane), n. trouble; suffering; affliction,
amanehunufo, n. (Ot. th. s.) sufferer, afflicted person,
amanya, n. lint, pledget of lint.
ainanye aba! or: ha 'manye aba! Let peace come! Salu-
tation, especially used by Fetish-priests, speakers in public
etc. Answ. manye ba! or: amanye ba! peace has come!
See „omanye" and Ga-Speeches.
amanfo and amamfo, n. (Ot. th. s.) ruins, ruined houses
or town. Etsd amamfo, v. it has become a ruin,
amantaka, n. interruption; wo — , v. to interrupt, inf.
amantakawd, n. interruption; comp. mat an, n.
amfiti, n. indigo, indigo-colour. See also akasi. Wo — ,
to colour with indigo,
amatiwo, n. colouring with indigo.
am&tiwolQ, n, dier (with indigo).
dbyGoogk
16 am&lSo — ^mmnatso.
, amStso, n. pitch-tree; tree of which bird-lime is extraded;
a kind of shadow-or umbrella-tree.
amSte, n. pitch-stone, i. e. asphalt,
amb^, n. a kind of childrens play or dance similar to a
cock-fight; ampe, amme, th. s.; tu — , v. to play it.
ambetilpQ, n. the playing of it.
ame, pron. def. 3. pers. pi. they; them; their; see § 34
(Ad. subj. and possess, a. obj. me),
amedei, n. s. abedei, n. a kind of shells,
amflao or anflao, n. a beautiful bird of the size of a dove ;
said to indicate the hours with its call, therefore here
c^led clock-bird.
ametSrobi, amitsrobi, pi. -bii, date; 2)attcl.
ametsrobiitso, n. £)attelpalme; date-palm,
amim (comp. the Ot. anim, face), n. unrighteousness,
wrong; only used in the phrase: ye m. k. amim, v. to
over-reach, to defraud, to cheat; ye hie, v. th. s.
amimyeli, n. over-reaching; cheat, fraud.
amimyelQ, amimyelilQ, n. cheater, defrauder.
amlakunyo, amlekunyo, pi. -kui, n. probl. europ. word;
sailor,
amlebo, n. a water -frog,
ampa, adv. (Ot.) well; s. odsogba, dsogba. ampa, adv. =
lelen, truly,
amralo, amrado, amlalcf (Ot. amrado), prob. a europ. word, n.
Governor (but comp. also: mra, mla; law).
Amrahia (Meeting-place, Ot.) n. pr. of a Ga- Village be-
longing to LsL.
amramo, n. cave,
amrd, adv. soon, quickly;
amrd n), conj. as soon as.
amrd pe n), just as soon as.
amrd non, adv. immediately (Ot. amonomara).
amrdnurd, reduplication of the former, expressing the same,
but with more emphasis,
dmugtii, n. a kind of berries, growing on a tree, of red
colour and shape like the rasberry, but in taste like a
cherry and with stones or seed like them, therefore here
called „cherry".
amugititso, pi. -tsei, n. the amugui-lree,
amuma (about the diminutive term, ma s. Ot. ba, young
one; G§: bi, mi), n. a kind of blackberries,
amumatso, n. amuma-tree.
d by Google
aA8*— aDim, 17
anH, pi. allfimei, n. wife; only used with the init. augin.
^a** in an address (vocat. case), if without possess, pro-
DouD. Comp. nS; see also awu, anyemi; ata, awo.
anai, n. west; comp. yiteAgbe; th. s., bokS or nddSiaSi,
east; nsongbe, south; koyigbe, kogbe, north,
anaigbe, n. west-way; west-ward,
anaiwyei, n. lit. western pepper; a kind of black pepper
used for medicine, s. wyei, n.
Anan (Ot. four, the fourth), n. pr. of the fourth son.
ananafisabi or collectively -bii, n. a kind of berries.
anaDafigabitso, n. their tree or shrub.
anani. Ad. n.
Anankannroeona, n. pr. of a Village.
anans^, anananse, n. a kind of flax prepared from a wild
kind of the pine-apple-or ananas-plant.
ananu (Ot. ananse), n. spider. This animal is the subject
of many superstitions; f. i. that it has a bad influence
upon children sleeping in the same room; it plays more-
over a principal roll in their fables in which the acting
personages are mostly animals, whence these fables are
called in Olyi spiderstories (anansesem). It is repre-
sented as speaking through the nose (as also the devil
and other demons are) and its hoppling walk etc. is cor-
rectly imitaded by voice and gestures of the relater.
ananukpS, n. spider-thread; cobweb; s. also: la§inyanyeld,n.
ananukomi, n. spider-bread; a blue berry growing at a low
shrub and resembling in taste, shape and colour the black-
berry (of brambles),
ananukomitso, n. the shrub of it.
anawyei, n. a kind of blackpepper, s. wyei and gbgwyei.
It is used for medicine; s. anaiwyai, n.
anawyeitSo, n. shrub of it.
ani, interr. part, at the head of questions (not); lat. ne;
s. § 43.
aninanse, s. ananse, n.
andele, n. a fine flat seafish.
An6, n. epithet of God (from n6, Adh. v. to be),
anflao, s. amflao.
ani, interrog. particle initiating questions, s. § 43 and comp.
aso, nto: 16, be etc.
anihao (Ot. Ih. s. face-trouble?), n. laziness; fe — , to be
lazy,
anihaolo, n. lazy person; s. hedsd, hedsdlo.
aniro, n. Otyi = face; s. anum-, amim and hie.
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 2
Digitized by VjOOQIC
18 ' anlgnW — anycnyelitSo.
anl^Al^, n. a kind of milk-thistle, Mary's thistle.
Anla, stie AnwSU, pr. n. of the tribe, language and land
of the Slave-Coast.
anlese, n. common (larger) canoe, s. ahima; ahinese and
ahlnkese, n. th. s.
anmadi, n. a kind of berries.
anmadatso, n.^ shrub of them.
anmaAma, n. a kind of fruits of red colour and as large
as a dove's egg, being eatable.
afimanmatso, n. shrub of it.
anmenme, n. a kind of sea shells.
anokwa (Otyi), n. truth, f. i. angkwa wiemg, a true word;
interj. truly! see: lei en! yen! amalee!
anokwafo, -fonyo; pi. -foi (Ot.), n. a true, faithful person;
gbomo — , a faithful man.
angkwale (Ot. anokvirare), n. truth, faithfulness; ye — , v.
to be faithful.
anokwan! = anokwa ni! it is true!
anokwaleyeli, anokwayeli, n. faithfulness.
anokwayelo, n. a faithful person.
anowatere or watere, n. the water-melon.
ans^m, n. Guinea-fowl. Ot. th. s.
ansgi, collect, n. brain, brains.
antele, s. andele, n. a sea-fish.
antrumn, n. a kind of birds.
antse, n. a play or game with small sticks.
Anum (Ot.; five, the fifthj, n. pr. of the fifth son.
anumny^m (Ot. anuonyam), n. glory; grace (comp. ani anim,
Ot. eye, face and nyam, Ot. and G§, glory, beauty) ; wo
m. k. anumnyam, to glorify, to honour s. b.; to be gra-
cious to s. b., wo m. k. hie nyam, th. s. also kp3
anumnyam. Comp. "iQn and llDJ, x^Q'^^ gracia.
anumny^mwo, n. glorification; favour, grace.
anumny^m-gbomo, n. a glorious person, a person who is
graceful or gracious.
anununs^, n. a kind of large red ants feeding on sweet
things, see also gbese.
anyans^, s. anans^; and aninanse, n. a kind of flax.
anyemi, pi. anyemimei, n. brother, sister (®ef(i&tt)ificr), only
used with the init. augm. „a" in an address without
possess, pronoun, s. „nyemi" and comp. „ana, awu" etc.
anyeny61i, n. an eatable kind of fruit or berries.
anyenyelitso, n. shrub of it.
dbyGoogk
ao — asafonyo. 19
ao! hao! interj. woe! also used to express amazement
(comp. ao, awo, mother),
ao, s. awo, n. mamma, mother fvocat. case).
Aonla, n. pr. = Anla, country, language and people of
the slave-coast,
aonme, s. awonme, il a kind of nuts,
ap^, 'pa, n. hire; Ot. th. s.; hg — , to hire; ye apa, to
do hire-work,
apabo, n. hiring^,
apabolo, n. a person who hires,
apabonii, n. pi. wages for hire,
apafonyo, apafo, pi. -foi, n. iiireling; hired person,
apapam, apaboho (Ot. from papa, popa hd, to wipe ope's
self), n. towel. See also papam and hankie,
apayeli, n. hire-work; s. ye apa; stipulation, condition,
apayelo, n. hired person, s. apafonyo.
apayelilo, n. th. s.
apasa, n. (perhaps of Otyi-origin, from pasa, v. to commit
, falsehood, be false, lie) falsehood, lie; comp. amale, n.
a similar form with the same signification,
apasafo and opasafo, n. a false person, liar, hypocrite; see
osatofo.
aputupata (= afutufata), old pronunciation, still in use, esp.
in Tesi and by old people; n. bat.
as^ (sa, to prepare), Ot. th. s., n. hall; central room of
a house, when shut; when open: kpatd. Eye asa le
no, he is in the hall,
asa, asan, asan hu, conj. and adv. again, afterwards, once
more (comp. the iterative auxiliary sa, to repeat, the
Adn. V. kpa; the Ot. verb san, and the adv. ekon).
Tsulsu le eke ake: Eyen; asa eke ake: Eben; at first
he said: It is so, then he said (again): It is not so.
Asabi, n. pr. of a Nino-Village,
asabla, n. distemper of children,
asafo, n. Otyi, company; division of an army; mass of
men; asafo yu, a large multitude of people, toi asafo,
a flock of sheep or goats,
asafobii, pi. n. men of a company,
asafotse, asafoatse» asafoiatse, n. leader of a company or
companies, headman; officer, captain,
asafoiatsenukpa, n. headleader; general, chief-captain,
asafokan, Ot., n. head of an army, van, vanguard,
asafoku, n. part of a company, division; herd, flock,
asafonyo, pi. asafobii, n. member of a company; comrad.
2*
dbyGoogk
20 asSgbS — asra.
asftgbS, D. a kind of wasps; s. adSanali, n.
asaman, n. Ot. saman, ghost; asaman, hades; s. sisa and
gbohladse.
asamanukpa (asaman, Ot. hades; ghost, spectt^r), n. chim-
panse, living on the islands of the river Volta, where
the ,,sisai'' or ghosts are said to have their towns (s.
gbohladse, hades), whence the name: headghost. Comp.
adadekramd.
aSana, n. a kind of food prepared fron^^a kind of wheat,
nma, and country-beer,
as^ne, pi. -nei (old: asande), n. bojl, sore, ulcer, abscess,
asanma, n. a large kind of blue wasps,
asanmatsu, n. their nest,
asanokwa! int. truly!
asayere, n. a dance of the women, when the men are
gone to war.
aseglemtete, n. and
asekplemtete» n. a plant with an eatable fruit,
as^kreme, n. a kind of berries.
asekremetSo, n. their shrub,
asemsro, n. Ot. curious story, strange matter, — palawer;
hint, information,
asera, asra, n. snuff,
asese, n. Ot. th. s., small hut made of branches, in war
or other exigences,
aselao, n. a kind of beads or coralls.
asipatre, n. shoe; see aspatre.
asisS, n. civet; s. kankan.
aso, initial interrogative particle, s. § 43 (comp. ani, nto):
A so mibe neke hegbe ne? Should I not have this
liberty? Expected answer: Yesl 1 have it.
aso, n. cart, playing card; f e ^ — , to play at — .
asQfelo, n. player at cards.
asofemOt n. playing at carts,
asoi, n. razor,
asoso, n. tinder; spunk.
asoso, n. (5tinb«blafc), dfa — , bie SSIafe.fprenftcn.
asoyi (?), s. asoi.
aspatre, Ot. th. s., very probably a europ. word, n. shoe,
V boot; s. tokotai.
aspatrekpelo , n. shoemaker,
aspatrekpe, n. shoemaking.
aspatrewolo, pi. -wod§i, n. shoe-leather,
asra, n. (Ot. th. s.) snuff; fu — , to snuff.
dbyGoogk
asra — ata. 21
asra, n. a kind of fever , said to be the consequence of
poisoning, also called
asratutrui, n. th. s. (Comp. alruidi, atridl.)
asrafu, n. snuffing,
asrafulo, n. snufftaker. «
asratQ (Ot. asratoa), n. snuff-box.
asrafonyo, pi. -foi, n. soldier (comp. sra, to ¥^atch; and
nsra, camp). Ot. osrani, pi. asrafo.
Asr^ma, n. pr. of a Village.
asu, n. (Ot. comp. nsu, water) a kind of religious washing
or baptism, connected with feasting, generally after a
recovery from a sickness; bg asu, n. to perform this
ceremony; Ot. th. s.
asubo, n. the performance of this ceremony,
asSman, s. „sisa'' and „gbohiadse'S n.
Asante, s. Asinte.
Asi, n. pr. of males and females,
asifo, n. (an obscene word) whore; whore -monger; see
adfaman.
asi, n. west s. anai and yite/igbe; Adh. wo^i, n.
asigbe, n. westward,
asinaw, asina5, n. a kind of beads.
a§in, europ. word, n. vinegar; 6 [fig.
A§inte, n. pr. Asanti.
Asinteblohun, A§intebrQm, -bloh, n. pr. (Asanti-Street) of
a quarter in Osu.
Asint^nyo, pi. Asint6mei, n. Asantiman, Asanti-people.
asito, n. stupidity; fe — , to be stupid.
aSitufo, n. a stupid person.
aSitufemo; n. stupid behaviour.
A§iye or ASiyie (Ot. = asiye), n. pr. of a village (^Wel-
built", „wel8ituated"; ^SBo^lflcIcgen").
AgoA (Ot. ason, seven), n. pr. of the seventh son or daughter.
Agohman, n. pr. of a village (Ashongs town), also called
Tilamin.
(Words beginning with a§u — see under af — .)
Ata, Ot. n. pr. of twins (a twin, s. nta; and comp. hadSi;
Akuete, Akwele, Akwete and Akwoko).
ata, pi. atamei, n. Papa, father; address to married men
ih general, but only used in the vocative case, initiating
a sentence and without possessive pronoun ; in all other
cases „tsfi" is used; f. i. Ata, ba bie! Father, come
hither! — Mit§e, ba bie, my father conje hither! See
also „awo"; and ,;tsat§e" in Ad&iime,
dbyGoogk
22 Alaboniaye — atlatso.
Ataboniaye, n. pr. of a village.
atade, atale (Ot. atade), n. european dress; wo — , to put
on or wear dress (see mama, bu mama); d§ie — , to
undress,
atadebii, pi. n. the little ornamental things belonging to
dress and dressing espec. of women; f. i. comb, sweet
odours, brushes etc.
atadedsiemQ, n. undressing,
atadewo, n. dressing, wearing of (europ.) dress,
atdnme, n. (s. adanme), adSnut; a kind of sweet oily nuts,
tiger-nut? of which the, here so called, „elephant's-milk"
is prepared,
atatu, n. firmament; single cioyd; atatu ewo, the firmament
is covered, cloudy; see also oblgtu and omukun, omlu-
gu, n. afua, n.
atatuwO, n. cloudiness,
ateke, adj. short = teketeke.
alen, n. (Otyi?) in the phrase bu aten, to judge, to decide,
pass sentence. But compare the G5-word: te, middle;
ten; aten, their middle, bu ateii, to decide (between
them?); ye aten, to judge; yi — , and yiyi — , th, s.;
also Ot.
aten, n. s. te, middle; aten, in their midst,
atenbu, atenbu, n. judgement, decision. Comp. kodso.
atenbuhe, n. place of judgement,
atenbulo, n. judge. '
atenbusa, -buasa, n. judgement-hail,
atgh^eli, n. judgement, decision.
aiShyelihe, n. place of judgement,
at^hyelo, -yelilo, n. judge.
atenyilQ, n. judge,
atenyimo, n. judgement.
alfele (Ot. ntwere), n, stairs of wood, ladder comp. atrakpe.
atfere, n. fist; bQ — , to make a fist; ,comp. kgkQ and bO
koko; ma — , v. to strike with the fist (Ot. bo — , v. th. s.)
ati, n. a large kind of seafish, mermaid (?), dolfin (?).
atl, n. a kind of peas growing on a shrub; chickenbeans.
atltso, n. the shrub of them,
atia, n. a kind of apples with a nut at their end, which,
if roasted, is eatable and tastes like walnut. The apples
are in form and taste very similar to some kind of euro-
pean apples; cashew -nut. There are two kinds: mei-
didsi-atia and blgfo-atia.
atiatso, n. the "tree of them; cashew-nut-tree.
dbyGoogk
atibi — atule. 23
atibi» o. a country hoe.
atidi, atiridi, Ot. th. s., n. s. atridi.
atifo, n. colour, paint; wo ^, to paint; to colour; to die.
atifowo, n, colouring, painting. ♦
atifowolo, n. painter, dier.
ato, n. ladle (here generally carved of soft wood).
ato, n. a small bird.
ato, n. a kind of mice.
atdmo, n. sweet potatoes; batatas; also used of vagabond
persons; s. sidselQ, n. perhaps on account of the weedy
nature of the batatas.
atrakpe, n. (Ot. ntraboa) step, steps, stairs (if made of
stone; comp. wStaffel** and „stiege" in southern Ger-
many); comp. alse atfele.
atridi or atruidi (comp. aliridl, Ot. lit. the eating or aching
of the head, head-ache), n. fever.
ats^nali or adsanaU, n. a kind of wasps. See asSgbS.
atsanalitsu, n. their nest.
atse» n. a kind of fang -net, used in smaller brooks for
fishing.
atsentsen, s. ads., n. unripe palmnut a kind of crocodiles.
atsikidodoi, n. (perhaps natural sound imitating the voice
of the bird named) a water bird, white and black speck-
•led, with large bills.
atiioke, n. a lamt or halting person. Comp. tso, v. to
halt; and oIsqIq, tsglQ, n. th. s.
atsud, n. scar, cicatrice.
atu, n. or adv. (Otyi?) used in the phrase: here m. k.
atu, to embrace one, to receive one joyfully (no yltso
fd m. k. kue no, v. th. s.); lo — , s. th. s.
atuheremo, n. embracement.
atolomoi n. th. s.
atua, n. revolt; tse — , to revolt, to rebel.
aluatsemg, n. rebellion, revolt, revolution.
atuatselo, n. rebel, revolter.
atui, = atl, n. a large kind of sea-fish, dolphin. (Pronun-
ciation of the Tesi-people.)
at6fo, and
atufu, n. the pillow worn by women on the back, where
they carry children on; si-atufu, to put on this pillow;
comp. si otofo, V.
atufull, n. wearing of this pillow or putting it on.
alule, n. (Fanti dial of the Otyi) blossom of country-wheat
(nma).
dbyGoogk
a atuftkpS = ayefare.
atuiikpS (Ot. atumpaft), n. square bottles, gin-bottles, used
at this coast; s. abodiamg.
au! int. s. ao, hao!
avo = abo, n. field, garden.
aw^le, n. spoon.
awisS, ayisS, n. (Ot. perh. = awuis3, left by death), orphan.
av^ie, n. a kind of sea-fish.
awo, n. (Ot. from wo, to bear), pi. awomei; mother, mam-
ma; only used vocatively and without possess, pronoun,
but in address to any married woman of middle age.
See nye; ata; ni; na etc.
awQba, ahoba (Ot.) , n. bondman, bondwoman, people ser-
ving some body for a sum of money, which their owners,
parents or they themselves owe.
awosi, awofi, s. aholi,
awolibo, s. ahofibo.
awui (Ot.), n. murder (s. wu in Otyi); ye awui, n. to
murder, hurt, wound; comp. gbe; pila.
awuisd, n. (s. awui, death, and sS, to be done in Otyi;
comp. also awisS) orphan.
awuiyeU, n. murder; wounding.
awuiyelo (Ot. awudifo), n. murderer; kolo — , a beast of
prey; lofld — , a bird of prey.
awulewule or awilewile, n. a bird (so felled from its call).
awuM (comp. wu and nS, n.??), n. jealousy; ye — , to
be jealous, envious; ke m. k. ye — , to be jealous of s.b.
awunSyeh, n. jealousy; envy.
awuMyelilo, -yelo, n. a jealous or envious person.
awyere, d. Ot. (= „mi" in Ga. S. this) chest.
awyereho (Ot. from wyere ho), n. sadness, grief; feto
grieve; s. do; wyere ho he, v. to be grieved; awyereho
ehS m. k., th. s.
aya, n. cat; s. alante etc. Aya is seldom used.
ayawa, n. (Ot. ayowa) brass.
6ye! int. (s. ye, y.) be it! let it! all right! Ia§ gut fepn!
a^e (Ot. ayen and baifo), n. hag, witch; sorcerer. It is
said that these people are able, to burn like a torch at
night-time and to do many other curious things; ye m. k.
aye, v. to bewitch s. b.
ayekpemg, n. the shining of a witch.
ayeyeli, n. bewitching.
ayefare (Ot. fr. fa ye or yire, to take away a wife), n.
^adultery of men; punishment or fine for adultery.
dbyGoogk
ayeforo — ba. US
ayeforo, ayemftiro, ayenforo (Ot. ye foro = yere — , new
wife), n. bride. See siyire, th. s, before the wedding;
ayeforo used at the wedding.
ayemforoba, n/ bride-leaf, a plant used for wreaths.
ayemforokpemg (s. kpe), n. wedding.
ayemforowu (s. wu and awu), n. bridegroom.
Ayigb^, pr. n. of the so-called Krepe-or Eipe -people, their
land in the east and west of the river Volta and their
language. They call themselves Ewe and their language
Wegbe; s. gbe and AdSftme.
Ayigbenyo, pi Ayigbemei, pr. n. Ayigbe-man; -people.
ayilo (Ot. hyirow), n. while clay used for white-washing etc.;
ye ayilo, to be justified; s. this verb.
Ayere, n. pr. of women.
ayirebii, coll. n. a kind of berries.
B.
Ba, v. imprl. s. b^, inf. bs, to come (Ot. th. s. Ad. ma,
Ay. fa), used very extensively, also of things, f. i. able
eba, corn has come, grown or ripened; niyenii ba, food
came; faleeba, the river is swollen; neke nu ne baa, this
water is spring-water; kakla le na ba, the knife is sharp»
Soitetimes it is transitively used, f. i. sikpoA eba nii,
the earth has produced food; ba m. k., to make s. b<
come, ba n. k., to make something come; to bing; but
generally the auxiliary v. ke or no is connected with it
to make it transit.; ke n. k. ba, to bring s. th. Pecu^
liar sentences connected with it are: „Mlyamaba!" „1
will go (and come again)!" or „May 1 go and come
(soon)". Answer: Ya ba! Go and come! also used as
a parting salutation „Miy^ ba!" „I am going!" „Good
by!" Answer: „Ya ba dsogba!" „ Go (and) come well!"
Ya-ba, v* to go to and fro; „eya eba eya eba," he is
going to and fro; a peculiar use of it is: „eba momo
eto, as he had ordered it to come. Still more extensive
is its use as an auxiliary verb to express various rela-
tions of direction, place, time and manner. It is as in
Otyi and Ad. the auxihary of the future, tense pos., and
in GS, besides that, of the pot. mood pos., but in both
cases the „b" is changed into wa or mostly lost. About
the other uses of it see § 28 and the tables.
ba, V. imprt. b^; inf. ba, prs. n. halo; to beg, to petition
(perhaps only a modification of the former v.); s. kpn
fai and' sise.
dbyGoogk
26 ba — bam.
ba, n. leaf; vegelable; dsie bai, to produce leaves.
ba, o. comming; advent.
ba, n. the largest kind of crocodiles, of blackish colour and
unwieldy form; comp. adsentSen and mampam, n.
bd, n. a figure on playing-cards.
b3, pi. form, inf. and iippert. sing, pos. bdmo, v. to cut,
to lance; amebdrng klante, they stroke mlh the sword.
Bdmo neke tso ne hewQ, cut some off round about this
stick. Comp. fo; to; gbu.
ba d§en, v. to behave. See dse, dSen and dsenba.
ba he si, v. reflex, to humble one's self. S. ba si and
hesiba.
ba mli, ban, v. to come to pass, to be fulfilled, to come
in (Ot. bam),
ba si, V. lit.' to come down; to incline; to be humble, to
be lowly; s. also hie ba si, th. s.; v. tr. to humble,
mibale si, 1 humbled him; but generally: ke m. k. ba
si, V. to humble one; s. siba.
ba tsine, v. to produce desire; see tsine, palate; lo ba nai-
tsine, meat comes to my taste, I have a desire after
meat. Comp. dse tsine and akong; hie ko etc.
ba yi, v. tr. to spare, to save; to care for, to be attentive
to some body or some thing. Eba eyi, he spared him.
baba, n. water; only used in childrens language; s. nu.
baba, n. a kind of leprosy or sickness of the skin; s. adsa-
to, kpiti etc.
baba, redupl. of ba, to come,
babao, adj. and adv. much, plenty, many (but without plur.
form). Babao ni mike le babao nl mife dsi no, as much
as I said, as much I did also. S. pi, pii (Ot. bebr6).
baduruntso, n. mortar for pounding „fufui'S s. this; fufui-
tso, th. s. Ot. woduru.
baduruntSomlibi, n. the pounder, s. fufuitsomlibi.
bafolo, n. (fr. fo ba, to cut leaves), leafcutter, despisably
used: poor fellow, hungry fellow,
bakpalo, n. th. s.
bage, n. (dan.) waiter,
bai, inf. mo, to enlarge, extent, =: goi, v.
bala, pi. balabii (scarcely used in the sing.) locusts, which
sometimes destroy the plants along the coast. Comp.
dg^» gdgdnigdgd. Ad. th. s.
balo, n. comer; petitioner (beggar? s. sis§lQ); irreg. im-
perative of ba, V. = nyebaa, come ye.
bami adv. and
dbyGoogk
bambambam -^ be. 27
bambambam, adv. very probable ^ natural sound imitating
strokes; f. i. eyile bambambam, he beat him bambam-
bam; then: vehemently, hastily.
bamiy n. cakes or bread of cassada.
ban, n. kind; character; see „su kg ban" and suban.
ban n. 1^. na, v. to hem s. th. in mih a ribbon; s. kante
na, V.
baikku, n. a kind of pap, made of v
basabasa, adv. and n. (Ot. the s.) I:
orderly; fe — , to be in a bustle;
base, n. dan. jailor.
batafo, n. wild hog. (Ot. th. s.).
batara, n. cutter, boat with one mas
baya, = lekete, adj. and adv. wide
bayare, bayere, n. ht. leaf-yams, an i
bayelo, n. leafeater, a kind of beauti
as a roe, with regular white linej
reddish colour.
bayisa, n. a plant („ orphans' plant'') = gbek^-bii-amada, d.
senna?
be, n. to be boiled, done, hot enough (of iron); to be ripe
(ironically used of men).
be, V. to quarrel, strife, dispute; inf. be; prs. n. belo; eke-
> mi be, he quarrelled with me; ebe ehSame ahu, he dis-
puted for them a long time.
be, n. time. About the prononunal and adverbial use of
this word see the following words and Gr. § 33, 34.
be, bei, n. quarrel, strife, dispute; Ad. pei.
be, v., inf. be, to pinch, to squeeze, to cramp, to bite (of
ants etc.); to fasten between two sticks (building exp.);
used of the face etc. of old men: ehie ebe, his face
is contracted, mida ebe, my mouth is contracted by age;
be gu-go — wie, to speak through the nose. Comp.
abele, tongs.
'be, s. abe, n. proverb.
be, irreg. neg. voice of ye, v. to be somewhere, to have etc.
defective v. to be absent, to have not (or nothing), to
be untrue; to want; interrog. part, at the end of ques-
tions = is it not, f. i. Osumgmi, be? Thou lovest me,
is it not? also used in the beginning, f. i. Be, eke?
Is he not long (grown)? About o at the end s. § 17*
A. th. s. with be, v.
be, inf. heme, prs. n. belo, v. to sweep.
be, m, k. hinmeii, to beckon to s, b. with, the eyes.
dbyGoogk
28 be — beo.
be moko wo mli, double v. to have prejudice against s. b.
be mli, neg. of ye mli, v. to be untrue, s. be and ye.
bebe, n. (redupl, of be, time) long time; adverbially used:
ke-dse blema bebe, from old times already; nye se
bebe, already some days ago etc.
bed^, bedeb^de, adj. weak; fe — , to be weak. & bodo-
b(^dQ.
Bedekpo, n. pr. (Ad. „hyen-hill") of a village.
bedeo, n. a basket made of palm-leaves.
beglo, n. coopers work, -trade.
beglofonyo, pi. -foi, n. cooper.
b6l, n. strife, s. be; Ad. pei.
bele or be le (be, lime and le def. art.), conj. then, con-
sequently, therefore; adv. consequently. Comp. no le,
keke le, le le, ene, agbene etc.
beleke, be le ke, conj. then -still; then.
bele, bele si, v. to run, to creep (of plants, as gourds etc.).
belo, n. quarrelsome person; disputant; enemy.
belo, 'n. sweeper (comp. also bio).
bem (Ot. th. s,), n. right; satisfaction; adverbially used:
bu m. k. bem, to justify s. b.; h5 bem, v. give satis-
faction; ye bem, v. to be in the righl^ to be just (s. dsa);
comp. bu alen, bu fo, ye fo etc.
bembu, n. justification, acquittance before judgement.
bembulo, n. justificator.
bemhSmo, n. satisfaction, giving of satisfaction.
bemyeli, n. justice, right; s. also ye ayilo, v.
bemyelo, n. justified person.
bemo, n. sweeping. .
bene, be ne (s. bele), conj. then (lit. this time), there-
fore; adv. consequently; this time, now, perhaps etc.
Comp. agbene. Ad. th. s.
beni, pron. and conj. (be n\) when. Ad. th. s. Generally
this wofd is followed by the pron. le at the end of the
sentence it initiates; s. § 34 and comp: moni, noni heni,
beni, koni. Sometimes it is used = boni, how and noni
what; f. i. beni yo dsi no, so it is (lit. how it is, it is)!
beni mike ne, this is what or how I said.
beni afe n\, conj. sentence, that, therefore that.
ben, V. s. be mli and ye mli.
benke (Ot. beA), v. to approach; to be or come near,
benkemQ, n. coming near, nearness; neighbourhood.
bentu^ (Ot. th. s.), n. callabash used as a clyster-pipe.
beo, n. an animal with a very hard skin, resembling a hog.
dbyGoogk
heste — bla. 29
beste, besle, dan. n. brushy
bi, n. child; ^oung one; little one; member of a commu-
nity etc., diminutive, plur. and collective termination etc.
S. Gr. § 23, 48. Sometimes, if a mere termination, it
becomes mi, s. nyemi, nulami, gogomi etc. (S. Ol. ba,
ma, wa, a and Ayigb6 vi, th. s.)
bi, V. inf. bimo, imprt. sing, bi, prs. n. bilo, to ask, to
question, to demand; to salute or have s. b. saluted;
f. i. mlbiame , I salute them, said to persons sent to s. b.
Comp. the Aku, Ayigbe and Otyi.
bi m. k. na n. k., v. to ask something from some body
(lit. to ask the mouth of s. b., as in Hebrew).
bi si, Y. to ask after or for.
bi^ne (s. bie), adv. immediately, in this moment, just now;
dsee — not just now.
bi^nebi^ne, adv. th. s. but strengthened. _
bialo, n. guest, wedding-guest; friend; d§e m. k. — , v.
to befriend s. b.
bibio (s. bi), adj. and adv., pi. bibii (Ad. boboio), small,
little; by old people pronounced: fifio. The plur. is
sometimes reduplicated: bibii-bibii, very little (things or
persons). See also fio.
bie, n. and adv. this place; here, hither; bie ke bie, here
and there.
biegbe, n. and adv. this way; here, hither.
bienye, pi. -nyemei, n. fellow- wife (used by the different
wives of one husband).
biianye, pi. -nyemei, n. lit. childrens mother; mother, a
woman who has children, female parent. Also used of
animals. See nye. Also used by husbands = nS, n.
biiatse, pi. -tsemei, n. childrens -father, a man who has
children, male parent; also used = wu, n. husband.
biglo, n. europ. word; trumpet (bugle?).
bilo, n. questioner, enquirer.
bimo, n. question, enquiry; salutation.
binu, pi. -bihl, n. son.
bisa, n. child*s-bed, bed of a child.
bisatso, == gbekesatso, n. cradle.
biti or piti, n. fainting, to — , to faint, pr. 16 (Otyi).
bitribi, n.
biyo, pi. biyei, n. daughter.
bla, v., inf. blamo, to come again into the world, be bom
once more (the natives have the doctrine of metempsy-
chosis, or transmigration of the soul); to be or behave
dbyGoogk
30 bla — bleobled.
in the world (comp. ba dJfeh> th. s.); — m. k. to attach
one's self to s. b. -tsu, to bind up the lattices on the
thatches (comp. wo tsu); to roll one's self up like a snake.
bla, n. behaviour; character of a person. S. su, dSenba
and ban, n.
blabla, adj. violent, fierce.
blaiblai, n. consumptive person.
blage, or
Wake, perh. dan. n. tub.
blakpayo, n. whore; wench. S. adfaman. (Perh. Gbla-
gbayo, n. woman from Gblagba, an evil reported Ayigbe-
Town, near Mlamfi, on the westside of the Volta).
blamg, n. being born again into the world; binding up of
lattices in house-thatching etc. s. bla, v.
blamonii, n. lattices, lattice-work; s. bla, v.
ble, V. to lie = k8L
ble, V. to lay across; to ceil; -tSu, — a room.
ble -no, V. to lay or stretch s. b. upon s. th., ble m. k.
t§o no, V. to crucify; s. noblomg.
ble §i, V. to lie down, to lie (of snakes etc.).
ble, n. pipe; kpS ble, to whistle, pipe; nu — , to smoke
a pipe; flute; any instrument of this kind.
bleble, adj. loquacious = gobigobi, adj.
blebo mlebo, n. (europ. Ot. berabo) Hver.
blegi, n. dan. ink.; -to, n. ink-stand.
blekpSlo, n. piper.
blekpSmo, n. piping.
blema, n. old time, ancient time; adv. long ago.
blemabii, pi. n., the ancients.
blemanyo, n. sing, of the former; an ancient person.
blemand, n. pi. -nil, something of ancient time.
blemasSne, n. history or matter of ancient times.
blematlemei, pi. n. ancient fathers, forefathers; patriarchs;
ancestors.
blemo, n. laying, stretching, crossing; ceiling; s. noblemg.
blemotSo, n. a Idnd of cross; stick used for ceiling.
bleo, n. palm-branches.
bleO, adj. and adv. (Ot. breO) soft, slow, mild, peaceful,
softly, slowly, mildly, peacefully. Answer to the salu-
tation to people who come from some place: „Heni
odse?" (lit. „ Where thou comest from?** sc. how is it
there?) „BleO!" ,;peaceful!"
bleobleo, bleble, adj. and adv. redupl. and strengthening
of the former.
dbyGoogk
Meofemo — Ma. 81
bleofemo, n. slow action; mild behaviour; meekness.
bliblf, 8. bribr!.
blika, n. a kind of poisonous serpents about 5 — 6 feet
long; which are said to poison men and animals not
only by their bit, but especially by emitting their venon
at them,
blinyan, n. dan. lead-pencil,
bio, V. (a kind of plural or intensive-form of bo, to cry;
but also used independently) to cry; to make a noise;
to quarrel. Inf. blomo.
bio, n. (perh. = belo, s. be, to sweep) broom (Ot. prai).
bio (Ot. bro), radical word for every thing „european".
It is said that it is = abrow Ot. or „blefo", th. s. Adn.,
corn, maize, because when the first Europeans came to
the coast, the women were just grinding corn and said:
These men are as white as corn, whence the name,
bio, Ad. n. way =: gbe; comp. blohii.
bloblo, adj. thin, lean, lank; comp. legelege and tfatfa.
bloblo, adj. sweet, agreeable; s. dokodoko and M, v.
bloblo, conj. much less,
blofo, n. any thing european; n. coll. the Europeans; the
whole european state and life at the coast,
blofo-aklati, n. an euphorbia-plant,
blofomeiabii, pi. n. mulattoes with eurbpean fathers.
Wofonme, n. europ. nut, pine-apple,
blofonyo, pi. -fomei, n. European; white man in general
(Ol. obroni).
blofosa, n. europ. bed; mattress; a string of beads,
blofosane, n. europ. matter, palaver, story; relation etc.
blofo§oto, n. europ. pepper; a kind of red pepper of the
colour and form of cherries,
blofowiemo, n. european language, any — • — .
blohu, n. street of towns and villages, generally shaded by
shadow-trees; Ot. brohu, n.
blohQhtso, pi. -t§ei^ n. street-tree; shadow-tree; generally
a wild fig-tree,
blolo, n. a quarrelsome person, s. bio and belo, n.
blolO, adj. and adv. sick, sickly; eye — , he is or looks
sickly,
blosT, th. 8.
blomo, n. cry, crying; noise; quarrel,
blonya, bronya, n. new year; ye — , to celebrate it.
blotso, n. broomstick,
bla, D. engL blue, wash-blue, adj. blue.
dbyGoogk
83 blablu *- bo ah5fi.
blublu, adj. and adv. all; blublu kwa, altogether.
bluku, n. (europ. word?) trowsers.
bo (Ad. mo, Ot. wo), pron. independent form of the pers.
pron. sec. pers. sing., thou (seldom thee); comp. o.
bo, V. to cry; inf. bo; a kind o£ subj. plural-form is bio,
V. th. s., but this latter is mostly independently used;
bo dsaidsai, v. (s. Ol. gyai) to cry: silence, to command
silence; bo m. k. , to call out for s. b.; bo wa, to cry
loud or hard,
bo, n. cry.
bo toi, V. (toi — ear) to listen, to hearken, to obey; inf.
toibo.
bo, n. cover, over-clbth; cloak.
bo, adj. J0ine (of flower), tender.
bo, adj. and adv. (the pron. is singing), tender, soft, mild
(s. bleO, dio, kpO); mildly, softly etc.
bo, n.?'used in the phrase: he bo bo, v. to mix ones self
up with a palawer; mihe mibo mibo, I mix myself in
a thing.
bo, V. inf. bo, to ball, make round, to compress, form,
create, s. N*ia in Hebr., fctaffen in Germ.; to com-
mit, to exercise; to multiply, to get large (of yams
in the ground); ke m. k. bo> to agree with s. b. (comp.
ke m. k. or n. k. ye egbo, th. s,), to make friendship
with s. b.; he bo -bo, v. to interfere, to mix one's self
into a palawer. S. ba. (Ot. to strike etc. see Riis Voc.
under bo). This is one of the most extensively used
verbs in GS and Otyi, having numerous significations or
far more numerous combinations (comp. ye, ye, ba etc.
with which it is a similar case). The most common
ones are: sane bo m. k., v. to be guilty.
lo, V. to wander, stroll about; to be lost; s. bo si and
bo ko and ladse.
bo, m. k. abo = ba abo, v. to flee to some body, to take
refuge, s. abo.
bo ade (Ot.), v. lit. to create someth., to create the world
ade often used = dse, dseii, in Ga, comp. this and bo
d§en), to originate, bring into existence; to invent; to
begin someth. or somewhere; to exist (comp. vna^xaa
and vTtccQxofica in Greek) etc.; s. adebo.
bo adfamaft, v. to whore, to commit whoremongery or
adultery; s. ku gblS and adfamanbo.
bo ahofi (Ot.), v. to live debauchedly. S. ahdfi.
dbyGoogk
bo — bo. 33
Jbo, tn^ k. ahora, v. to blame openly; bo he ahora, v. to
blame one's self.
bo akp§, V. to fasten a prisoner on a block, s. akp9.
bo apa, v.^ to hire; s. apa. Ot. th. s.
bo asu, Ot. V. to undertake a religious washing or baptism;
geneially after a recovery of a sickness etc., connected
with fetish -cermonies and feasting; s. asu.
bo dsen, v. to create the world; to originate? s. bo ade.
bo fo, inf. fobo, v. to do something detestable = to kpa.
bo gwa, V. Ot. th. 8, (lo put chairs around) to assemble
for open council; s. adsinS.
bo he, V. to double, reduplicate (s. bo, v. to multiply).
Vut see bo he ahora.
bo huhuhuwiemo, v. to murmur, s. wie hOhOhfl.
bo kakara, v. to make a ring; s. kakara.
bo klanma, v. fo surround.
bo koko, V. lit. to make a fist (koko), to warn, forewarn;
to threaten.
bQ ko, V. to lose one's self in the bush*; to be a vagabond.
bo kuku, V. to heap up.
bo m3n, v. to belong to the chiefs of a town.
bo mSntSe, v. to make one king.
bo moden, v. to be diligent, zealous.
bo musu, V. to commit a blasphemous act (s. musu), to
do mischief, to contract mischief; to blaspheme.
bo nannyo, v. to make a friend, friendship, communion.
bo nko, V. to make holes in the ground for planting yams.
bo nkub, = bo gwa, v. to assemble, to call people toge-
ther; to reason or talk in puplic assembly.
bo no, V. to surpass; to precede; to be preferred; fo add;
to remain; to be over.
bo nsra, v. (nsra = camp), to exercise (of soldiers), to be
drilled; to form a camp; to encamp; s. fe nsra, v. th. s.
bo nyomo, inf. nyomobo, v. to make debts; s. mo — , v.
th. 8.
bo ose, V. to raise a war-cry (of women, when men are
at war or make warlike exercise); to sing a war-song.
bo pa, s. bo apa, v. to hire. (Ot. bo apa and fa?).
bo su, V. to ball swish, for the building of swish-hou8e««
'bo, ebo, n. gall, bile; poison; verdigrise.
bo, n. dew; a kind of flying ants; a ball; = abo, a fruit-
field, a garden (s. bo, v.); number; manner etc.
bo, n. creation (s. bo, v.); friendship s. ke m. k. bo, v.
to make friendship with one.
ZimmermaDn, Akra-Vocab. 3
dbyGoogk
84 bg — bofcfi.
))0» n* (engl from barrow), wheelbarrow; filibct^ ^b. a.,
8. fiii, n.
bofipia, D. a UdcI of monkeys.
bobo» n. rum (satirically used).
bobo» v.» redupl. of bo; to squeeze the bush w&leh is cut,
together, that it may more completely bum; s, D^nS,
V. th. s.
bobobo, adj. and adv. ke m. k. fe bobobo, v. to be very
intimate with s. b., adv. attentively,
bobo, n. redupl. of bo, n. number; s. boni and boboni,
conj., how, as.
boboi, n. a small sea-fish.
bob(}io, adj. Ad. = bibio, small,
bobokple, adj. very much stinking,
boboko, adj. lazy, pblegmatical; sickly (with a singing pro*
nunciation); adv. lazily, sickly,
bgbo, and
bobolT (sung), adj. and adv. the same as bobokd; adv. of
intensity to the verb fg, v. to be wet; efo bobolT, v. he
is very wet (comp. ))(atf(^na§^ splashingly wet). S. also
dodo, dgdoll etc.
boboni, s. bgni.
bodo, V. to press out of form (t i. tinwares), to be out
of form,
bodo, and
bodobgdo, adj. and adv. soft, very soft; fine (of flower etc.);
tender (of sprouts and branches); weak; efe — , he is
weak, efeminated etc. softly, finely, tenderly weekly.
See bedebede, th. s.; gble bodgbodo, v. to grind very
fine,
bgf^bo , n. and pron. every number, every manner, s. $ 34
and boni.
bofo (Ot., and obgfo), n. messenger; apostle; angel; Ad.
tSglOy n.
'bghima, ob., n. green spots in the flesh, produced by a
certain ^ckness; verdigrise?
b(H, H. female-undercloth; s. tgklo; tSo — , inf. boitSe, to
bind it on.
bdU^, n. binding of the female undercloth.
boi = boboi, n. a fish,
boi, V. to begin. Inf. bolmo» s. also dSe SiSi; bo ade;
Ad. bue, V.
boimOy n, be^ginning, s. SiSidSe.
bokS, n. east, eastward, s. nftdSiaSi.
dbyGoogk
bokSgbe — bu. 35
be» ni and adv. eastward, — s.
K adj. and adv. soft; -easy; fe — , to be strong, at
^-.-^se, not tired.
bok#e, n. Ad. = gbeke, evening.
bol&y V. int bglemg, to surround f to 'Compass; to walk
around.
bolemo, n. surrennding, com^asBing.
bolibgll, adj. weak, sick, = gbedegbedg.
bom, V. to unite; s. bo. t)t. th. s.
bdn, n.-C-pl. bohi) ribband, ribbon (perh. from dan. or eogl.
band, bond).
boA = bo ni, bo dsi, it is thou.
bon, older and harder pronunciation of moi^, adv. rather.
(bdA, V. Ot. to stink, s. fu and dSe fu.)
bdnbdn, adj. and adv. stinking; -ly.
boni (s. ho, number; manner; and n), refl. pron.), prpn«
and conj. how, as much as, as, s. § 34 and beni, noni etc.
The relative sentence formed by it has generally „le" at
the end.
bgboni, th. s. but stronger, as much ever as, howsoever.
hofSbQ ni, th. s., s. bof^bg.
bonsu, bonso (Otyi lit. strikewater), n. whale.
b6nto, n. (europ. word?) european boat.
b6sao (bosaw), n. sponge of the natives made of bark and
membranes of plantain trees.
b6te, inf. b6temo, v. to enter.
botemo, n. entering.
botokli, n. a very large pot of native manufacture, some-
times containing a barrel or more of fluid.
bribrl, brfbribrl, adv. expressing a shaking movement and
therefore used, to give intension to verbs expressing such,
f. i. hoso bribrf,'to shake very much; kpokpo bribribrl-
brl, to tremble exceedingly etc. blibll, th. s.
What is not to be found under br, s. under bl or
gbl, gbr.
brubru, adj. and adv. hard, unripe; -ly, -ly; s. gbrugbru,
th. s.
bu, V. inf. ba, prs. n. bulo, to cover (Ot. to cover, to
break). Like bg a very fruitful root in both languages.
The principal significations are the following: to consider,
to reckon, to esteem, to hold, to compare; to sit or lie
down, to deepen? to watch, to observe, to judge etc.;
to alarm; to make an alarm; to be thick (of the branches
of a tree etc.), to be frequent, not scarce etc.
3*
dbyGoogk
36 bu abe — ' hm m.
bu.abe (Ot. bu be), v. to make 'or use a proverb,
press something proverbially or in a parable; s. tc
bu akdnta, Ot. tb. s. v. to make an account, to reel
bu atSh (Ot. (h. s.), v. to decicTe, to judge; s. kodso.
bu ayilo, v. to feovcr one's self with white clay;
ayilo, V. ■ .
bu bem, Ot. th. s. v. to justify, to acqiA;, ebule bei
acquitted him. ^.
bu fo, Ot. th. s., to condemn; to pronounce guilty; N
fo he pronounced him guilty.
bu kusQ, V, to be very thick or bushy j(of trees); to be
dark (of clouds etc.).
bu mama, v. to wear cloth, as the natives do (comp. wo
atade, v. and mama and tekle).
bu moko, V. to esteem s. b.
bu moko noko, v. to consider s. b. as some thing.
bu na, V. to cover the mouth, be silent (the gesture of
covering the mouth with the hand is actually used to
express utter astonishment); bu ona! keep thy peace!
bu no, V. to cover (the surface); bu n. k. no, to cover
s. th. to conceal it, bu wgdsi an^), to cover eggs, i. e.
to breed; bu m. k. no, to cover s. b., to lie with s. b.
(obscene).
bu noko, V. to cover one's self with s. th., to wear; eba
kente, he wears country-cloth.
bu §i, pi. bumo si, v. to squat down, to lie down; ke h!e
bu §i, to fall on the face (in prayer or humiliation) ; to
lie on the belly, as beasts do before attacking; as cro-
codiles when at rest, etc.
bu t^nt§eo, v. to judge unrighteously.
bo, n. tent; hut (s. asese); covering; estimation, judge-
ment; watch, eye eba no da, he is always on his watch,
bu, n. grave; hole; well; tsa — , to dig a grave, a hole,
a well; dsie — , to dig a well; cave.
bua, V. (Ot. th. s. to answer), to answer roughly, give a
hard answer; amebuabua amehe, they gave each other
hard answers.
bua, inf. buamo, v. to assist (Ot. th. s.) in G3 always con-
nected with the verb ye, which preceds it, as: eye
ebuami, he assisted me, he helped me.
bua na, inf. nabuamo, v. to gather (Ot. boa ano); ebua
amena, he gathered them; amebua amehe na, tiiey as-
sembled (together)*
d by Google
^biia — butraf^mo* 37
)msjfisi, adv. disorderly; enyle buabua, he ^alks disorderly.
buambuam, adv. th. s.
bua no, v. in the phrase: musu bua no, to lie, rest over.
baa M, y. to lie about motionless; to stagnate (of ^ater).
buada (Ot. 'abuada), n/fast, fasting; ye — , to fast; comp.
hi nmS, th. s.
buadayeli. n. fasting.
buadayelQ, -lilo, n. one ^ho fasts.
bubu, V. redupl. of bu.
bule, inf. bulemQ, y...to defile (religiously), to transgress
against, to profane; ebule vf^h, he has profaned a Msh;
to hurt; ebule efla, he has hurt his sore; in a good
sence: to make common, give up to common use, f. i.
a house; to dedicate (f. i. a chapel); used also of the
religious ceremony performed every year before venturing
out upon the high sea in August to catch the large fish,
called „tsile**, abule nso (sea), they have begun „t§ile**
— catching or -fishing; to destroy utterly (comp. wule);
to be consumed, f. i. eseSi ebule, his seed is utterly
consumed.
bulelQ, n. a person defiling himself etc.
bulemo, n. ^ defilement; profanation; transgressing (against
a fetish etc.); hurting; dedication, giving up to common
use; utter destruction.
bulo, n. watchman, watch; observer etc. etc.
bulu, n. fool, s. kolo, kwasi^ etc.
buluniitSumg , n. foolish business, foolish behaviour.
buluwiemo, n. foolish talk.
bum, adv. andinterj. plump! (imitat. sound); egbe Si bum!
he fell down, plump I — bum Si kome, with one stroke!
comp. gba, gbu, gbo etc. th. s.
bumbumbum, adv. th. s.
bumo, n. lying down, squatting; s. sibumo.
butru, n. europ. word butter.
butru, n. an old custom said to have been introduced by
the first inhabitants of Gd, who came from the sea and
whose footprints are still to he seen (comp. G3-Hist. 2.).
It is only made by men, the ^yokpemg" (s. this) of wo-
men answering to it. It is connected with many fetish-
ceremonies, dances, feasting etc. adfl ensures to him who
makes it an honourable funeral according to native -
fashion.
butrufemo, n. the performance of this custom,
dbyGoogk
38 bultt — dabi.
butu, inf. -mo, v. to overtbrow, to overset, upset; tf^-
size; to lie upside down, of vessels etc. Otll^B^s.
Comp. also futu, lutu etc.
butulo, n. overthrower^
butumo, n. overthrow; upsetting; lying upside down.
D.
D is the third letter in the Alphabet; words not
found here most be sought for und. ad-, ed-, od-.
Da, pi. dSira, dra; inf. dale, v. to grow; to be large, great;
to be old; comp. kw^, ba; agbo; k§etenkple, kple, wulu;
gfeo, gbod§o etc. Neke no ne da fe enjremimei, this
man is greater than his brethren; amedra akpa, thej
are very large; cfemi dale, he surpasses me in great-
ness; age etc. Ad. th. s.
da. Ad. V. to stand. S. damo.
da, V. inf. -mo; to vie; to bet; — to lend, s. fa, v.
da he, v. to poice; to lift with a lever, pick-ax etc.
da, dane, n. and adv. (Ol. da, day; da, always); etemify;
always; daily; eternally; s. fihu.
dada, redupi. of the former.
da, n. mouth, the inside of the mouth (comp. na and na-
bu); sometimes dan = da mli; fo daii, v. to give answer;
gbe dan, v. to scold, bring to silence ; siu dan, v. th. s.
tfa dan, v. to give anwer; neg. to be silent; ta dan, to
chew. Many other combinations are referred to under
the verbs combined with da, where also the formation
of their pers. and imp. nouns may be seen.
dd, n. pi. dai (Ot. nsS), wine; any spirit; teida, n. palm-
wine; nmadS, n. lit. food- or wheat- wine, beer; blofo-
^ da, n. europ. wine, rum, gin, brandy; blofonmddd, n.
european beer, ale etc. PI. different wines etc.
da, adv. (Ot. dft and ansa) before, ever; with neg. never;
minako neke noko dS, I have not seen such a thing be-
fore; and
ddni, pron. or conj. before. Comp. also fddS, kpa fSdS;
no dani etc. «
da si (Ot. da ase, v. lit. to lie down), v. to thank; midale
si, I thanked him. Ad. th. s. The word is also used
ironically.
dabi, adv. (Ot.) no;^dba 16? dabi; wilt thou come (or)?
no; but: Obaa 16? Dabi (sc. mlba); wilt thou not come
(or)? no (sc. I will come). See § 43. Comp. Oboho,
th. 8.
dbyGoogk
dabida — damo na. 81
%hidl, and
Amdabi, dabidabidabi etc. tb. s. strengtbened, no neyerl
daki, n. (child of the mouth) cheek.
dabodabo |fit. th. 8.)» n. dack. See also dokodoko and
kwfikwd, n.
'ikiSi^ redp. of da, ady. always,
dadii, adv. chOdr. lang. nyie dadi dadi, y. to learn to
walk,
dadankpo, ady. always?
dade.^^ adade, n. iron; weapon , arms; ble dade mil, y.
tolR»Eir arms.
Dadeboase (Ironstoneland), n. pr. of a yillage.
dadepen, b. steel-pen.
dAesen (Ot.), n. iron-pot.
dagb^y dagb£le». n. s. daAgbe, etc.
dagle, dan. n. sealing wax.
dlhe» n. lit. the place about the month, cheeks, etc.
dibetsoiy coll. n. whiskers.
dlhdlg, n. wine- or rum-trader, wine-. or rum-sdler.
dahdmd, n. wine- or rum-selh'ng.
dah61ol (Ayigbe) int. a kind of saluting acclamation: wdi!
welldone! S. ei ko! and mot
dal, y. to return, giye back; to exchange; f. i. Eda! enii
ehale ekoA, he returned his things to him; s. kpd, th. s.
dalmo, n. returning, giying badL.
dale, n. growth, maturity, age, largeness, greatness.
dale and dare, n. dan. dollar.
dale, adj. slimy; efeo mo da& ddlS, it makes one's month
slimy. Comp. drete and seblebe, th. s.
daletsakemo, n. exchange of dollars.
dalo, n. yier, belter.
dama, n. a curious war dress of the natiyes.
damo, n. wying, betting.
damo (Ad. da), y. inf. damo and damomo> to stand, esp*
used of persons and higher animals; compare mfi, sd,
ye etc.; ke m. k. damo* y. to place, set, post.
damo, n. standing.
damo he, y. to stand about.
damo hie, y. to stand before.
damo masei, y. to stand at the side.
damo mli, y. to stand in; hi if. k„ to stand in for
some body, to stand in his place, to represent s. b., to
stand good for him.
damo na, y. th. s. to be or stand surety.
dbyGoogk
40 damo — de.
damo nyomo na, y. to stand surety for a dept. (Comp.
gyina obi akawm and akagyinam; and see akadSinam).
damo no, y. to stand upon; to be sure of.
damo se, y. to stand back or behind.
damo i§i» v* lit. to stand the ground; to stand, to stand
uprightly, surely etc.; ke m. k. damo §i, y. to place, set,
post s. b. Comp. Edamo si ye tsu len, he stood or
stands (the ground being) in the room, and: Edamo t§u
leA he stood or stands in the room, s. damo; v^a damo
§i, to stand still ; damo si sin, damo si wa, to stand im-
moyable; te §i damo si, lit. to get up to stand = to
stand up. Inf. sidamo.
damomo and damo, n. standing.
damohe, n, standing-place, station, post.
dan = da mli, s. da, mouth; -gbo, y. to haye a tasteless
mouth.
dane, = da, ady. always: dane efeo neke, or: efeo neke
da (dada), always he does so, he does So always.
dane, ady. gaily, nicely; ewula dine, he gaily dresses or
adornes himself; egbla — , th. s.
danfO, n. speaking, answering, fr. fo dan, y.
dahgbg, n. scolding, fr. gbe daA, y.
dafigbe, n. yoice of the mouth; bi.m. k. ^— , to ask one's
opinion.
dangbebimo, n. asking one's opinion.
dangbeie, n. lit. death of the mouth, tastelessness, fr. dan
gbo, y.
dSni (s. da), conj. before. Ot. ansana or ansa na.
danka, n. a kind of music.
danulOy D* drinker; s. datolo^ n.
danumOy n. drinking of wine or strong drink. S. dato.
dao or daw (Ot. daw), y. to depend on one's grace or
mercy; f. i. bo midao, on thee 1 depend (s. adawroma).
dare, dara, s. dale, n. dollar.
dara or dra, pi. of da, y. to grow.
dan§iumo, n. bringing to silence; s. siu dan, y.
dantfamo» dantfamo, n. answering; tfa daA, y.
danta, n. chewing, s. ta dan, y.
dato, n. drunkeness, fr. to da, y. to be drunk.
datolo» n. drunken person; drunkard.
dawtso, pi. -tSei, n« jawbone; kada, n.
de, Ad; y. = ko in Ga, se in Otyi: to say, to tell.
de. Ad. yerb = IQ, to be satisfied; de da (s. to da), y.
to be drunk.
dbyGoogk
de (d^, dS, Oi. nsa), n. without pi. f^Mcm the pahn of the
hand, the inside of the hand, sometimes den = d^ mli
(s. da, dan); comp. nine, and ^3, in Hebrew; hand,
power, care, possession etc. as the Hebr. 1\ (See also
the Otyi root: de, lo take, to have, GS: k^). Ye m. k.
de (to be), in s. b. hand, power, possession; lobe rich;
miye miden, I am rich; n6-wo m. k. de, to give over
into 8. b. hand, power etc. dse m. k. de (to come), from
8. b. etc. Other combinations see under the verbs, de
and den is combined with, where also their pers. and
imp. nouns majr be found.
deda, s. adeda, n. billhook; hH deda.or adeda, to work in
the field or bush with the billhook; to cut bush; s. gba
ko, th. s.
Dede, n. pr. of the firstborn daughter. «
dShIemQt§o, pi. -tSei, n. walking-stick.
d^ka, s. ad^ka, n. box.
dekS, n. free time, leisure; mibe dekS, I have no time;
dekft nl be bewo, because their was no time. CJomp,^
be; yino, n. - > "
dekeke, adv. silently, on the tip of the toe, efe — , he
aits silently.
dfim = trotro, adj. %ven, plain, flatt.
den = de mli, s, de, hand; f. i. deft kpo, v. to be liberal;
den wa, v. to be illiberal.
d^n, adj. Ot. hard.
dend^n, dSnded^n, dend^nden (Ot.), adj. and adv. hflrd,
strong; hardly, strongly; ewie d^ndedSft, he spoke hard
words. S. geggge, adv.
dens6, adj. excellent, peculiar, different, s. soro and sroto.
deiiwale, n. hardness, coveteousness.
derele (sung), adj. and adv. sickly; ye — » to be sicMj^;
s. bloblo, boboli etc.
detamo, n. shaking of the hand, salutation, from: ta de, V.
dfa, pi. dfra, inf. dfd, dframo, y. n. and a. to break, to
spoil, to ruin; esp. used of earthen-wares, but also of
other things, f. i. of the eyes; ehienmeii edfra, his eye»
are spoiled; comp. tfa, v.
dfa, n. breaking, cracking, crash; ruin; spoiling; comp. tfd,n.
dfa (perh. = dfei, n.)* dung; more decent than ^f^'S n*
dfe, adv. hardly (of pain).
dfedfedfe, n. woojl-worm; wood -beetle, spoiling timi)er;
timber-sow.
dbyGoogk
42 dffii — df«ro.
d(ei (sometimes dfoi), coll. n. grass, weed; sweepings,
shapings; useless person; -wo, y. to be dirty (of^oms
elcO; wo — , y. to produce grass, etc. „Dfei po dlio,
osa ake aloo afie tumo ng! Ttiou art an outcast and
worthy even to be cast on the dunghill l"" a deprecation.
Comp. t§o, tSgi, n.
dfefOy n. green, fresh grass; pasture.
dfeiaili, n. = dfei amli; grass-place; ya — , v. to go to
privy; = ya tSo no etc.
dfeiankolo, n. animal living in a grassy place, wild animal.
dfeitSo, n. grass-stalk, reed.
dfeiwO, n. dirtiness.
dfaA, Ot. th. s., inf* df^nmo, v. (the terminational „f is
sometimes citt cS in conjugating the verb; t i. ilSo or
d§6£U), imper£ tense; ind. neg. fut. d(^n) to think, to
consider, to observe, to mind, to care etc. = susu, v.
DfSii he, v. to think about; -mli, v. to consider the con-
tents; -ng, V. to think about, to care for; -se, v. to
care after; etc.
dfdhlo, n. thinker etc.
'dg^nmQ, n. thinking, thought, consideration, care; mind;
vovg.
dfeiimosane, n. matter of consideration. *
df^ne, dfine (Ot. a thing of thought, art, consideratioi) ;
golden ornament.
dfere, s. dfofo, v.
dfetei or dsuetei, Ot. gwite, n. silver, silvermoney; see
Sika, n. trema, n.
dfetri (Ot. th. s. either = „silver-lump" or ^trading-capital'',
s. ti, n., Ot. and 6., and the preceding word, or Ot.
gua, Aia. dfa, G. guQ, dsra, n. trade), n. a stock of
money gathered for a certain purpose, f. i. trade, capital,
treasure; bg — , inf. dfetribo, v. to gather such a capital.
dfetribg, n. gathering of money, capital, sparemoney; sa-
vingness^ husbandry.
dfetribolo, n. sparing, saving, thrifty person.
dfetei-dale, n. silver-piece.
dfeteikuku, pi. -kukudSi, n. th. s.
dfeteind, pi. -nii, n. some thing made of silver.
dfeteisdlg, -Aalo, n. silver-smith.
dtine, n. s. df^ne, n.
df5ro, inf. -mg, v. to lie, to be situated (used of persons,
places, towns etc., comp. ka, v. ble,.v. mfi, v.); -he, r.
to lie about; -Me, v. --before; -mli, y. --in; -na, v.
Digitized by VjOOQI^^
dfSramo — ; do: 43
--al; -no, v. --upon, on; -se, v. --behind; -Si, v.
inf. Sidforomg, to lie on th6 ground, to lie about;
-sisi, V. --down; --under s. th.; -ten, v. --betwixt;
-yiteA, V. - - on, on the top, etc.
df^romo, n. lying, situation.
..dfra (or df&ra), inf. dfaran
ruin many things; s. dl
swelling caused by 6uiD<
dframo, n. breaking, spoili
creasing of a swelling c
le edse, si efe dframo,
out, but the swelling is
crease ^f the swelling),
dfre, V. dfro, v. s. dffire i
di, Otyi verb, to eat, use
„ye" in Ga. Di is used
other worAs; hie di ra.
1 am giddy,
di, V. to be black, to bla
blackened me; edio dhQ,
di he, inf. hedi, y. to be
di no = G& ye no (Ot. i
hi) Id over s. th. «
di se, V. to desire, lust, C(
"after).
dida, V. to stagger, waver,
didei, n. a fish, dace; pi. dideibii.
dideiba, n. a fish.
di^ntSe, ni^ntSe (Ad. nitse), fi. di^ntsemei, pron. lit. who
is the father or author; self; own; midi^ntSe myself etc.;
midientse miwe, m^ own house. ~
dim, adj. large,
dim = di mi in the phrase: mihie dim, I am giddy. See
hie di and di, v.
Dina, n. pr. of Elmina.
dinao, n. (dan.) (pif^obel) groove-plane,
din, edin, pi. didsi, adj. black. •
dift (sung), adj. and adv. silent, quiet; silently, quietly*
Femo diji, be quiet! Nyetraa si dift! Sit quietly!
dio, adj. Aid adv. th. s.
dine, v. = dida, n. to stagger, wnver.
dl — see dr — •
do, adj. and adv. lonely, alone; siido, I alone,
do, inf. dbmo, v. to be gracious; to grant.
dbyGoogk
44 do DO — domo niSoi.
' Y. to be hot; to
en; imp. verb: to
as me; hie do, y.
to puff up, to be
no. Ot. do.
I; iiynali, n. rosi
. ntsen.,,^
I domo — ^i; V. Ih. 8.
edgdole, sickness
Bful, carefully,
t.
river Volta.
sweeten.
weeten the mouth,
flattery. S. nS na
0 tickle; dgkodfU-
doko, doki^ddkg, Ot. th. s., ai^j. and adv. sweet, feeble,
sweetly, feebly. Efeo mo dan dokodoko, it makes one's
. mouth sweet; eye doko or dokodoko, it is sweet, agree-
able; na dokodoko, a sweet mouth; mi hewodSian fd
efemi dgko, lit. all the flesh(es) about me have made
me weak, ,= I feel weak.
dokodoko = dabodabo, n. duck.
dokodokgnii, pi. n. sweet things, dainties.
dokodokomo, and
dokomo, n. sweetness.
Dokutso. pr. n. of a villtge.
dom, v. to go on a jumey; edom, he is on a jurney.
dom, adj. and adv. lazy, lazily.
domo, n.- a kind of sorcerer; s. kramo etc. *^
domo» n. (from do) grsfbe;* grant.
domo > V. pi' form of do ; to be gracious.
domo, V. to settle somewhere = he §i, v.
d^niQ DtSoii inf. ntSoidgmQ, y. to sigh.
dbyGoogk
dofi -
doi^ always construed ^ith
Ebaa don, lit. be will noi
come (again). The wor(J
swering to it is: ekon,
„don'* seems to be used
express their gratitude: (
the life of thy head agar
for ever!
Ddnko, pr. name of the mostly
the plains at the upper Yolta, i
Akyem, Akwamu and Ayigbe t
tains and the Niger. Most of
(s. Odonkonyo); the land is re
cultivated; elephants, ostriches, cj
wheat, corn etc. are to be fom
Sahara and white people from 1
' tides of trade from thence are
are taken by the Asantis in wa
the direction of the coast, where they are generally con-
sidered as an inferior race, being mostly caught when
grown up already and no more able to learn the Ian*
guage fluently. In general they are a mild and indus-
trious people. It seems that the common name „Donko^
comprices the Mandingo-, Fula-, Felata-, Hausa-, Bornu-
and other countries, at least the principal towns of these
are known to the „Donkos". They speak of course very
different languages, and Donko can therefore not be used
as a name of any particular language.
doo, dow, n. a kind of fever, ague.
d5re, inf. d5remo (s, do, v. dpmo, v.), to be gracious.
ddrelg, n. gracious person.
ddremg, n. gracious act; grace.
doro, drg, n. gall, bile.
dgro, dro, v. pi. form of do, v. to b^^ hot etc.
dotenan, n. foot-ring of metal for ornament.
dra, V. pi. form of da, to be great.
dras, europ. word, n. drawers.
dredre, and
drelg, adj. and adv. slimy, slimily; ddlg and sebleb€, th. s.
dre, inf. dremo, v. s. d5re, v.
dro, n. europ. word, chest of drawers, drawers; Unter^
^ofen.
dro, inf. dromo, v. (fr. do, to bend); to fold up.
dromg, n. folding up.
dbyGoogk
ISalemo.
ivide (comp. cfexfv); inf. dSS;
p. xidfUii, xtS^Un, ted^t pn»,
itted, to join, as two boards,
B necessary; inf. dsale; to
, to boil, to bring forth; inf.
a and the kindred G&- roots:
tsa, dra, tra, sa etc., and the transitive form: d§ad§e.
The principal combinations are:
dsa gbe, T. to be right.
dSa rail, y. to divide, inf. mlidsa; s. gba mli and gbla mB,
th. 8.
dSa no, y. to fit; inf. nodSa. See tSa and tSa ng.
d§a and dfa, y. Ad. to trade; comp. d§a, n. market and
d§ra, n. price.
d§a, conj. (s. dSa, y. to be necessary, must and comp.
ShT); exept, unless; d§a ake and edsa Ske (Ot. etya se),
it is necessary that; exept that. Comp. dse> tse, conj.
th. s.
dSa, d§a no, pi. dsadsi, dsadsi ano, n. market; market-
» place; any large place of a town; judgement - place for
open palawer; place for firing gun, drill or exercise of
war etc.; dSa no ewo, the market has begun; amenha
lo yo dsa le no, they are fighting for fish (s. ha) in
the market, etc.
dsa, n. division; mlidSa; boiling.
dSadsa, v. redupl. of dsa, v. which see.
dSadSai, v. th. s.
dSadSe, inf. dSadSemo, prs. n. -lo, v. (trans, form of d§a,
to be straight, to straighten; to make straight, smooth,
f. i. -gbe, — the way; to declare, explain, confess,
preach (s. Ot. k&, also used in G&); dsadSe fah, —
openly. Generally this verb is connected with the verb:
t§d, v. to 8how;*'dSad§e n. k. t§d m. k. to explain s. th.
to s. b. (Comp. in Ot. kS-kyero.)
dSaidSai! int. (Ot. gyaigyai fr. gyai, to leave off, be quiet)
silence! be silent! bo — , v. to command silence.
dSaku, n. friendship, fathers family; home, native tribe;
8. weku etc.
dSale, n. straightness, right, righteousness, justiccr; adv.
straightly, rightly; neke t§ei ne nylee d§ale, these trees
do not grow (walk) straightly.
dSale, inf. dSalemo (fr. Ot. gware), v. to rinse.
dSalemo, n. rinsing.
dbyGoogk
dSalenS — dSe agbo. 47
og» act, just matter;
s person; a divider; a
'.rvice, religion, faith,
adj. and adv. quick;
dsangtSo, pi. -tSei, n, market-tree, shadow-tree; s. agbami-
t§o etc.
dsanta, n. c le etc. and comp. dsafa, n.
dSSira, dSSira a.
dsase, n. tl a king.
dsasefonyo, set; a person who lives under
an other; king; courtier.
dS^ta (Ot. gyata), n. lion; eat, s. dSanta, n.
dS^tQ, n. s. adSato (Ot. gyato) yaws, a sickness of the skin.
dSatsu, n. load, burden; ame dsatsui feaS)ie> their loads
surpass (are to heavy for) them.
dsatSu, pi. diatsubii, n. a kind of ants; s. tSatSu.
d§at§u flikilg, n. flying ants.
dsawu, n. a kind of yams (s. yere).
d§e. Ad. th. s., comp. gye in Otyi, and fi, v. to come
out, forth, away; to come, appear; to happen; to arise
from (comp. dse), to become (s. dsi and t§d), to grow;
to give out, emit f. i. blood prv. Gbe kdd gbe ed§e,
a doy does not bite a dog (till) it emits (blood); s. dse
\k; to take out, away, to remove (comp. d§ie; t§S, t§e,
tSle), f. i. wiemo kpakpa dSeg mlifu, a good word
takes away anger; d§e mi no, go away! be off; ed§e,
it has come out, it is loose, etc. The principal combi-
nations to be remarked are: — dse suffixed to a root
expressing an intransitive movement, makes it transitive,
s.§ 27 and^omp. dsadse, wad§e, ladse, mSdse, sedse etc.;
he d§e, v. to keep aloof; mli dSe, to come forth; miisu
d§e, V. to miscarry, etc. The combinations of this verb
must be carefully distinguished from those of the noun
^dse", world, see after that. Comp. the phrases: ke
he dSe nydmo, to keep aloof for debts sake; f. i. eke
ebe dsemi nyomd, he keeps himself aloof from me for
debts sake.
d§e afSl, V. to go aside.
dSe agbo, ?. to grow big, stout; to beeome greats mighty.
dbyGoogk
43 dSe alikpa — dSe.
d§e alikpa, v. to joke, to sport; s. also: ye he feo, v.
d§e bai, v. to produce leaves.
dSe bu, V. to open a hole or well of water.
dse dsen, v, to leave the world.
dSe dso, V. to compose a dance; to give out a dance; s.
fo dsO, V.
dse foi (= dso foi but unused, s. d§o foi, v.), v. to flee;
inf.. foidSe, which is also used for dSofoi.
d§e fu, inf. fudge, v. to slink; s. fu, bad smell; lit. to emit
a bad smell,
dse gbe ha m. k. v. to give, to concede, to grant, to give
over and above etc.
dse kpo, V. to come forth, to appear, s. kpo; dsie kpo,
f^ kpo etc.
dse 1^, V. to bleed; be bleeding.
d§e lasu, v. to emit smoke, to smoke.
d§e la wo m. k. he, v. to trouble one for s. th., f. 1. the
fulfilment of a promise,
dse masei, v. to go away from one's side,
dse mli, v. to go or come out from (comp. dsie mli); to
escape.
d§e na, v. to come from the mouth; wiemo ko dse ena,
he dropt a word (s. G3-Hist. 1.). Comp. dsie na, v.
dSe no, v. to go off, away, remove; d§e mino, go away
from me, be off!
d§e m. k. nd, v. to happen to come to some body,
dse nwane old GS: nwande (Ot. gye akyinye), v. to doubt,
to 'dispute; mikele dse nwahe, I doubted or disputed
with him. Inf. nwaned§6. Adfi. dse nd, v.
d§e oblan, v. to be a giant, s. dsi and kpa oblan, th. s.
dse osrene, v. to speak friendly, heartily; jokingly (s. dse
alakpa).
dse se, v. to overdo, to do more than enough.
dSe §i (s. d§e kpo), v. to come out to appear, to make
ones appearance (s. dsie si). Inf. sid§e. Comp. pue, v.
Ad. th. 8.
dSe sisi, v. to begin; dse sisi ekon, begin once more! Inf.
Sisidse. Comp. si§i, n.
d8e tsedSi, v. to get feathers (of birds), s. t§ere.
d§e tsine, v. to disgust, to be loathome; to tire; edSe mi-
t§ine, I am tired of it. S. „ba t§ine** and „tsine".
d§e, dsen (= dse mli, but often used promiscue with
dSe), n. Ad. th. s.; world, every thing visible;
. wible heaven, atmosphere, weather; outward appearance.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
dSe dSo — dSe. 49
bebaviour, manners, circumstances, life; common wealth,
etc. One of the most frequently employed stems of the
6d-language (comp. ade and wyiase in Otyi), the use
• and combinations of which must be carefully distinguished
from those of its above mentioned root, d§e, v.. The
principal combinations are the following: ba dsen, y. to
behave; dseAba, behaviour, character; be dsen, v. to be
not in the world; to know no manners etc. s. ye d§en,
bo dsen, v, to create the word; i)ut also like: bo ade,
to begin, exist, live, behave; dSenbo; gbe d§eii na, v.
to end the world, dSeiinagbe, n. end of the world; but
also: to make an end to one's life = gbe he; egbe edSen
na, he killed himself; to cease to exist, to die; hi d§eni, v.
to be, live, remain in the world; dSenhfle. tSere dse, v.
to take much; etc. etc., and
iKIe dSo, v. to be quiet, to be peace; s. d§Q. (Ad. s. next
word.)
dSeA flte, v. (the world is spoiled, the times are bad, trouble-
some) to be difficult, troublesome etc. (used- of one's
circumstances as well as those of a whole common wealth).
dSe na (Ad. dSe dSg , s. d§Q), v. a curious use of the word
„na**, which signifies in Adaiime just the contrary (s.
dse t§ere), to get night, twilight, dusky, evening; dse
ena, it is night; dSe nako, it is not (yet) night. Ot.
ade sfi, V.
dSe na, v. Adi^. to get daylight.
dSenamo, n. evening (s. gbeke), twilight, nightfall, night;
the whole day till night, f. i. Amene dSenamg, to day
the whole day till night.
dSeA t§e, d§e mli tSe, v. (the world is clear s. tse), to be
clear weather; dSentSemo.
dSe t§6re (comp. d§en t§e, v.), Ad. d§e na (s. above), v. lit.
the world, rents, opens, apears, becomes bright (s. tse,
tSere etc.) to become daylight, to down; dse bo! tSere-
mg, it is beginning to down; beni d§e etsere le, when
it was daylight etc. Comp. dsetSeremo and dsetsereno;
and ade kye in Otyi.
d§e, V. (Ot. fi, Ad. dse) to come out, to come forth; to
go out, forth; aux. v. expressing the direction from some
place; „edse Osu eba" or „eba*ke-d§e Osu**, he came *
from Osu ; comp. ye, ba, ya, t§5, ke-ba, ke-ya etc. and § 28.
dSe mil, V. to come from within.
diSe, inf. dSemQ, v. to scold, reproach.
dSe, V. to be long. Comp. tSe, dSeke, v.
ZimmermanD, Akra-Vocab. 4
dbyGoogk
60 dSeas^ — dSehe.
dSed^, V. inf. dsedSemo, to distnrb, distract, to siktice
(children) to iotertain, to nurse (a child); to go throngh-
. out (comp. dse), to spread, be made known (s. hehe, v.),
to echo, to trouble (with words), to .shine, to make
clear etc. — toin, v. the ears hum; s. toi fe heft, Ih. s.
dsedselg, n. disturber; nurse of children.
dSee, irreg. neg. voice of the aux. y. dsi to be s. th. (comp.
Ad, pe and pi, Ou ye and nye); to be not; = no, not
(when applied to i^ouns and not to verbs, s. § 33, 3. ;
and comp. be and the neg. voice of the verb). Some-
.. times it retains its verbal character and some at other
tinaes it looses it and becomes a mere particle of Qega-
tion (adverb it can not be called, because it can not be
used with the verb, except in its nominal or infinitive
form), f. i. Edsee gbomo or dsee gbomo dsile^ he is
> not a man ; dseemi or d§ee midSi, it is not 1 etc. Dsi»
ene keke ofe, si no le hfi, not only this thou didst, but
that also; ani kule d§ee gbena dsi. ake bo hu ona mo*
bo? shouldest not thou also have had compassion? dsee
noko, it is nothing; dsee nakai, it is not so, ani dsee
: nakai? or: Dsee nakai, 16? Is it not so? A peculiar
, . use is made of it, when an action shall be more empha-
, tically denied than by the mere neg. voice: the infinitive
absolute (comp. the Hebr.) with this negation is then
used: f. i. dsee dsQ midsu, not steaUng 1 stole, i. e.
1 did certainly not steal; dsee malemo mimaleg, not
Jyi^g 1 lie; comp. midsuu, mimalee etc. Comp. also
; kedsee^ if not; neg. of kedsi, if; both verbal conjunctions.
An other peculiar use of it is made in the narrative styl,
, aJ^. well as in speeches (s. Gi-Specimen 2—4): it is used
to express the contrary, an affirmation, in the form of
a question but withoot the interrogative voice, as in
'\ other languages, f. i. Dsee nU ko k@ ena, ni ameyo,
.was there pot a man and his wife, and they were; =
^ . there was a man and his wife; dsee no nlmike ake etc.
. Wiis it not then that I said = then I said (baitn erfl
facitc i(^) etc.
^geeAmene, adv. generally shortened into. ^ ,
d§eenma,,liL not to day; a long time ago; eba dseeomo,
iie came a long.timB ago.
dieenmo bebe (s. b§be), a long time ago already.
dsegonyo, pi. -godsi, n. people from the' mountains?
Akwapim-people, people from the interior; s. dSe-konyo.
dsehe, n. place, from whence one oame^ native .place. ;
dbyGoagk
dSeiy pi* dSemBi, dseme, adv. there, with y&rbs expressmf;
a movement (f. i. ya, ba, dse) thence.
dSeibii, pi. n. the people there.
dSeinii, pi. noun, the things there,
dseiniian (=:dsei nii amU), n. and adv. thereabout, in that
region, in those places,
dsekedsetedseke, adv. into small pieces; f. u fo — , to
cut — ; grisled, spotted,
dseke (s. d§e and ke, v. to be long), v. inf. dsekemo,
to be long, far (of distances, ways seldom of lime, see
tse, V. etc.).
dSekemo, v. length (of ways), distance; gbe ke dsekemg,
a long way; gbe le ds^ke, the way is long; edseke ts6,
it is too for.
dSekonyo, pi. dsekodsi, n. (s. dsegSnyo) mountainers, people
from Akwapim etc.
dselo, n. a remover etc. in this simple form scarcely used;
but often in combinations, f. L foidselo fr. dse foi, a
fugitive,
dselo, fr. dse, to scold, n. scolder, reproacher.
dsemei, dseme, pi. of dsei, adv. there.
dSemeiawon, contracted: dsemawgn, n. fetish of a certain
place.
d§emeibii, pi. n. = dseibii, the people there,
dsemeinii, pi. n. the things there,
dsemeiniian, n. and adv. the region thereabout,
dsemo, n. scolding, reproaching, reproach; mo hiewiemo
edsee mo dSemo, to reproove one is not to scold one, prv,
d§en (= dse, n. and dse mli, s. these), n. world; every
thing visible; outward appearance; atmosphere, outward
heaven, weather; circumstances; behaviour; life; charac-
ter ; common wealth etc.
dSen-akono, n. desire, lust of the world,
d§en, n. boa; boa constrictor.
dsenam, n. Ad. morning. S. dse iSere and Ihe next word,
dsenamo (s. dse na, v. to grow dusky), n. twilight, night;
nightfall; the whole day untill nightfalL; f. i. hmene — ,
to day the whole day. But compare also the.Adaiime
use of dse na (under dse na and dse tsere).
dseiiba, n. (s. badsen) behaviour,, manners; character (comp,
su, bla and ban, n.); comming into the world,
dsenbii, pi. n. inhabitants of the world; children, of the
. world; wordly people; s. dSennyo, n.
dSenbo, n. creation of the wofld (but s, also adebo, a.).
dbyGoogk
52 dSeAbo — dSere.
dSefibo, n. (SBeltfugel) globe.
dSefkbolo, n. Greater of the world.
dSenbosane, n. history of the creation.
dSei^df^nmo, n. worldly mind.
d§end§ole, n. s. d§en d§o; peace of the world; peace.
d§end§QlQ, n. pacificator, peacemaker.
dSendsgm, Ad. n. = dSenanig in Gd; evening; nightfall etc.
dsendsomg, n. pacification (of the world etc.); peacemaking.
dSenfeonii, pi. n. nice things of the world.
dseiifitemQ (s. dSen file), n. disturbance of peace; revolu-
tion elc.
dSengbe, n. voice, opinion of the word; public voice.
dSengbe, n. way of the world.
dSenhlle, n. live in the world; life, length of life.
dSeMpawo, n. „sevenworld", in groge SBagcn cb. Sar,
the great waggon or bear.
dSenkpdmQ, n. redemption of the world.
dsenmSidsi, pi. n. the nations of the world,
dsenniile, n. philosophy,
dsenndmg, n. pleasure of the world.
d§ennoyeli, n. government of the world,
dsennyo, pi. d§ehbii, n. inhabitant of the world; man of
the world; worldling.
dseiisamQ, n. public arrangement,
dsensane, n. a matter of importance to the common-wealth;
great palaver; history of the world; history of the life
of a person etc.
dsensaneyeli, n. arrangement of a public palaver; s. ye
. sane, v.
d§eftsedi, n. lust, desire of the world,
dsensegbe, n. way after the word, after the multitude.
dSensuomo, n. love of the world.
d§ensu6mQ, n. service of the world,
dsensusumg, n. thought of the world; worldly mind.
dse6§ihlle, n. life in the world; life of the world; worldly
life; length of the existence of the world.
dSensisidSe, n. beginning, foundation of the world; s. dse
§i§i, V.
dsento, n, order, preservation of the world.
dSeAtsemo, n. clearing up of the weather; clear weather,
dsenwalaheremo, n. salvation of the worid.
d§era, s. d§ra.
dsere, dSere, v. Plural- or Intensive -form erf dse (comp.
t8e, tSere, tSerc, iSere etc.).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
dSere Si ~ dii. 5^
dSere Si> s. dSoro Si and dfere Si, v.
dSetSeremo (d§e tSere), n. daylight; getting daylight; day-
break; day-time; ^fi-dsetSeremo, daily; dSetSfiremo ke
dSenamg, day and night, a day of 24 hours (s.^gbl);
dsetseremo ke dSenamo gbli nyomai edfe; fourty days
and forty nights; comp. gbi; fane, nyOA, lebi, gbeke etc.
dSetSereno, adv. in the morning; the next morning or day.
dSi, V. defect, to be (some body or some thing, comp. ye);
neg. voice: dSee. Other forms of the verb are not used;
but forms of the verb fe, to do, somet. to be; tSd^ to
turn, to become etc. supply the Mrant. About the cons-
truction of it see § 33, 3. Sometimes it changes irflo.
^ni" or the term, liquid-augm. „n"; (Ad. „i**) as: Mi-
dSi, mini or mii^, it is I;.gbomo dSile, he is a man;
gbomo ni, gbomoA, th. s. or it is a man. Dsee,' the
neg. voice sometimes is used ^ith the positive, some-
times Mrithout, as: Dsee midSi or dSeemi or midSee, I
am not (the person), it is not I; edsee gbomo, or: dSee
gbomo d§ile» he is not a man. Comp. in Ad. dsi, neg.
dSl; pe, neg. pi; Ot. ye, ne, th. s. A most peculiar
use of this verb is made in some conjunctions or as a
conjunction. About tiSe former comp« the conjunctions
kedsi (and ke dsee and ke), dSikule; the latter espe-
cially appears in two cases, viz. the simple use of dSi
= i^hether, f. i. eba dsi milee, lit. he came is 1 dp
not know, 1 do not know whether he came; comp.
§ 43; and the double use of it connected with the se-
cond prs. sing, of the pron., dSio-dsio = whether-
whether, or: whether-or, as: Mina noko, gbomo
dSio, kolo dsio, milee; 1 saw something, whether it
was a man or a beast, 1 do not know. Niiat§e dSio, ohiafo
dSio; na dSio, yO dsio, onukpa dSio, gbekS dSio, kSle
gbo oogbo, whether thou be rich or poor, man or wo-
man, old or young, still thou must die. Osumo ene
d§io, osumo ene d§io, ko noni fe ohle feo, whether thou
like this or that, take what pleases thee! — Sometimes
ii is added instead of o and sometimes dSi is also om-
mitted and only „o^ added to the two disjunctive sen-
tences, ebao ebano, ekekomi sane ko, he has not told
me any thing whether he will come or not. See let o.
If dsi stands for a mere copula >\ith an adjective, it
may be changed with ye» f. i. gbekg bibio d§i, it is a
little child, or gbek6 le yo bibio, the child is little, but
with a material alteration of the senc^; comp. mine ye
dbyGoogk
kronkroft, this water is clear, and nu kroAkroA Hi ne>
this is dear water; about the fut. tense „ad§i", adver-
bially used, s. „ad§i'*, adv.
dSidSa, inf. dSidSamo, v. to swagger = dida, v.
'dSid§c, 8. d§ed§e, v. to sound; to disturb with words; =
d§ed§e, v.
diSidsei, n. a kind of thread made of bark.
liSidsi, n. a kind of food of the natives, in lumps or balls.
dSie, inf. dsiemo, prs. n. dSielo, trans, v. (from dge, to
eome out), to take out or off; to bring out; to pro-
duce; to save etc. Ad. d§e, Ot. yi. Comp. here. The
- /'most common combinations are:
d§Te atade, v. to undress.
dSi^, m. k. fa, = fo m. k. fa, v. to ferry one over a river.
d§ie gbe, v. lit. to take out a way, sc. from the bush or
grass; to make, clear or cleanse the way, d§ie m. k.
gbe, to make way for s. b., to give way, to accompany
on the way (s. Table I.) ; to give leave to go (s. ha gbe),
tt) help on on the way, to send one off etc.
dSie ra. k. hie, v. to make one a present for recovering
s. th. lost. «
d§ie hie ye n. k. no, v. to wink at s. th.; to overlook s. th.
;d§ie hlena (hina), v. to shave off the hair from the fore-
' head (to exhibit the forehead).
dSie kpo (s. kpo and dse kpo), v. to bring forth, out; to
• bring to light; to reveal, to disclose. Imp. n. kpodSie-
mo; prs. n. kpodSielg.
dSie ho, v. inf. hodSiemo, and
dsie musu, v. inf. musudSiemo, to effect an abortus, see
musu dse, v.
d§ie mil, v. to take out from within ; to select, to choose.
dSie musu ye m. k. no, v. to remove the curse from s. b.,
~s. kpa musu, v.
dSie na, V. (s. dse na und. d§e, v.); to open the mouth
of s. b. or the opening of s. th.; d§ie m. k. na, v. to
speak for s. b., to interpret; to excuse; ed§ie ehe na,
he excused himself. See nadSiemQ and nadSielo.
iUe nyOmd, v. to take off a debt or make one's self paid
without the will of the debtor.
dSic §i, V. to bring forth from under s, th., to bring forth,
to bring to light (s. dsie kpo), to reveal, disclose; to
betray etc. See SidSiemo and sidSielQ.
dSfe n. k. ts5 m. k., double v. to disclose s. th. to ,s. b.;
- inf; -dSiemo kg tSdrng.
dbyGoogk
dSieto — i&Q. 6^
Mel(s n. one who brings out etc.; deliverer, saver, pre-
server; saviour (s. herelo and walaherelo).
d§ieIoDiit§umo, n. saviours work.
dsiemo, n. bringing or taking out; saving, delivering; de-
liverance; salvation (s. also: hereniQ, walaheremo, yiwa-
laheremo).
dSiemobe, n. time of salvation.
d§lmnosane, n. history of salvation.
dSStaie, conj. (comp. dsi and ko, kole, kule) if; but only
nised in supposilive sentences (comp. ke and ked§i); f. i,
Osumomi dsikule ofee neke noko, if thou would love
me, thou would not do such a thing, or: Lovedst thou
me, thou etc. But: Ke osumomi, ofee etc. If thou love
me, thou doest etc. Comp. kule, which stands some-
times for it. Ad. dsikune; Ot. anka, th. s.
dMm, V. Ot. gyim, to be mad, also used of animals^ f. i.
horses, when wild or unruly. S. ye seke, v.
dsimfo, n. (Ot. gyimfo) madman; mad person,
dsin, dsio, s. dsi.
dstra — , s. dsra, v.
dsire, s. dsSre, v.
i&ixo, s. dsdrd, adj.
dSitsa, V. to shrink, to start back.
dso, inf. dso, v. to dance. Comp. the similar roots t§d,
to turn; dsd, v. under he ds6, v. ^to be astounded,
stupified.
dso, n. dance; fo — and dSe — , to compose a dance;
fe — , to give out a dance; siki — , v. to go slowly on
in dancing; tse — , y. to begin to dance, to start a
dance; s. tsS, v.
dso, inf. dsomo, v. to be bitter; acrid; midan dso, mjr
mouth is bitter etc. ; mihe nu dso, lit. my watter is bitter,
I am dispised.
dso foi, V. (= dse foi) to run; comp. hie foi, sa foi, wo
fbi. Dso foi is more in use than d§e foi, but only .from
the latter a inf. form and a prs. n. seems to be used
for both, viz. foidse and foid§elo.
dso, inf. intrans. dsgle and dsO, inf. tr. dSomo, Ot. dyo, v.
to be cool (comp. do, v. to be hot); to get cool, to
cool, V. a. and n.; to be quiet, ^t rest; to be mild, tame;'
to quiet, to bring to rest, to tame; to bless; to be
thankful to s. b. etc. This relation of ideas seems to
be common in many west-african languages. The prin-
cipal combinations are: dan dsg, inf. dand§Qle, v. to
dbyGoogk
56 clSo bi — dSolg.
loose the last or appetite; dSen d§o> v. s. above; he
dso, V. inf. hedSole and hedSo (Ot. hd dyo), to be at
rest, at peace, to have peace; to be well or healed
again; hewidSian dso, v. to feel cold by astonishment;
hie dsQ, V. to be quiet, have a quiet face (comp, h!e
do, V. the contrary), inf. hied§ole; mli d§o, v. to be
cool, quiet, mild inside; inf. mlidSole; na d§o* v. to be
of a quiet mouth or speech; toin dso (Ot. asom dyo),
V. lit. the inside of the ear is quiet, at rest; to have
peace, rest; musun dso, v. to feel relief from belly-ache,
mimusun dsomi, my belly gets cool or quiet for me;
inf. toindsole, etc. etc. Comp. also expressions Is : man
dso, the town is quiet, it is peace in the salutation:
„Maii f6?" (How is) all the town? Answ. „Man d§o!"
e*B.
d§o bi or gbek6, v. to silence or quiet a child (s. laka
and dsose, v.). \
dso he, V. to quiet, to cool, to pacify, to tame; v. refl.
to rest, midsQ mihe fio, 1 rested a little. Inf. for
both: hedsomo*
dso n)li, V. to cool the inside, inf. mlidSomo.
d§o na, V. to soften the mouth, the edge, to sharpen. Inf.
nadsomo* Imprt. s. dSo na, f. i. dso kaUa na! sparpen
the knife!
dSo no, V. to bless (lit. on or upon, relating to the ge-
sture of the handsj.
* d§o t§ui he, v. to quiet one's heart, desire, anger, thirst etc.
dso, n. rest, peace; s. dSoIe; dsomo, n.
dso, n. ditch, nu-dso, water-ditch, bed of a brook or river;
channel; dale, vally.
dSd, V. only used in the phrace he d§d he, hedSdmo, v.
to be astounded, stupified; amazed; amehe d§d amehe,
they were astounded. It expresses the strongest amaze-
ment; comp: fe ya, hie fe ya, na kpe he, etc.
dSoa,* n. a sum of 10 Dollars (in Goldj.
dSodsoi, frequentative form of dso, to dance.
dSoflilo, n. person giving out a dance.
dSofSmo, n. giving out of a dance.
dSofO, n. composition of a dance fr. fo dSo, v.
dsofolo, n. composer of a dance.
d§oi, n. (= df^i) grass. Pronunciation of elder people.
dsolQ, n. dancer.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
dSolfi — dSrayelitiii. 67
4Sole» T> to l^y or rest the head on s. th.; dSole 8une>
— on a pilioMr; to put a pillow under the head. Inf.
dSoIemo; Ot. sum, y.
dSole» n, coolness; peace; rest; s. dso, n. th. s.
d§omo, n. bitterness.
dsQmQ,n. blessing, benediction; cooling, quieting, taming etc.
8. d§o; rest, peace.
dSoMu, n. the thighbone; the loins; s. gboA, n.
dSoro, y. to lie about; s. dforo, v.
dsoro si, y. to lie about on the ground; used of people
in masses; of animals, of yillages and towns etc. Comp.
Ui, kd si, Y. Some people pronounce this word dsere
si, some also dfere §i, dforo §i, s. b(Hh. It may be a
corroboration of d§o, v.
dsdroko, n. a morning beyerage made of corn and bananas.
ds6rd, s. dsiird and edsiird, adj.
d§osuru, n. a measure of gold-dust, about £ 1.
dSotfa, s. und. odSolfa.
dsosikimo, n. slow dancing.
dsot§€mQ, n. beginning of dancing; starting in a dance.
d§ra (also ds&ra, ds^ra, dslra), a strengthened form of
dfa, dsa (Ad. to trade); iuf. dSra and dsramo, y. to be
important, dif&cult, dear (pf price), painful, heayy etCi
also transit, used (inf. dsramo), to make important, diffi-
cult; to pain. Comp. also he dsra, na d§ra etc. to be
dear, difficult, important.
dsra, n. importance, difficulty, dearness, price; trade = guQ,
ye dsra, y. to trade; inf. dsrayeli, trading; wo dSra, to
offer for sale, inf. dsrawO; to prize, to put prizes on
wares; dse — , y. to sell well, to haye a good market;
etc. etc. Comp. also dsa, n. market. S. Ot. gua, n.
d§rad§6, n. easy or good selling.
dsramo, n. importance, difficulty, painfulness = hedsramo, n.
dsramoa (from the Otyi: agyina moa), n. cat = alamte etc.
d§rand§randsran, ady. quickly.
d§ranii (from the unused sing, dsrand), pi. n. wares =
guonii.
dsraniiatsu, n. shop.
dsraniiatohe, n. magazine; s. fiase, n.
dsrawO, n. offering for sale; decision of prices.
dsrawolo, n. person offering s. th. for sale.
d§rayeli, n. trading; trade = guoyeli.
dSrayelihe, n. place of trading.
d^rayelinii = dSranii,
d by Google
56 dStayelo *— dSmiii.
d8rayelo» dSrayelilo, n. trader; merchant, = guoyclg, goc
yelilo.
dSrayeiilQ-niitSumo, n. merchants business.
dsrayelilg-kaselo, n. shop-boy; merchants apprentice.
d§rayelUQ-sane, n. merchant's palaver, matter, caase etc.
What is not to be found under dsti or dsw set
. under df.
d§u, V. inf. d§a, to steal; to rob; to do something in i
thievish or also only in a secret way, s. d§u §i; f. i
„Adsuu ta awuu," prv. „>Var is not secretly made," but
at day time and after due declaration. A secret atfaci;
is deemed dishonest. Comp. also ha, fe fem, r. ete.
d§u, inf. d§a, V. to wash one's-self, according to the daily
fashion of the natives, all over the body, comp. yvu nsQ,
wu b, to bath; fo, to -wash (cloth; the hands, face etc.);
tsumg, V. to wipe etc. Dsu n§o, to wash with sea-
water; '— samla, — with soap; — abonua, — with
limes etc. A curious expression is: d§u hi m. k., to
wash s. b.
dsn he, v. inf. hed§a, to wash one's self (as the former).
dsu mli, V. to come in by stealth; „le tSutSu eba ts6 miMe
ed§u mli," he by stealth came in first before me.
dsQ §i, V. to act by stealth; f. i. ed§u si ba, he came bj
stealth; ed§u §i efe neke edstird, he did this good worJL
by stealth.
dsu, n. Monday. According to the etymology of the names
of the 7 days of the week there are three pairs and a
single one, Wednesday; compare: Hg, Saturday; HogbS,
Sunday; Dsu, Monday; DsWo, Tuesday; -So, Wednes-
day; -So, Thursday; Soh^, Friday; but neither can the
signification of these words be stated, though they are
all found in 63, nor the reason for such a division and
disposition; it seems however that Monday is considered
the first day of the week.
dsu, pi. dsui, n. theft; stealth; stolen article; dSO ke %
lit. theft and transgression, is an expression designating
a very wicked act.
dsfl = hedsu, n. washing.
dsuetei (Ot. gwitei), n. silver; s. also dfetei,n. and dfetrijfl.
dsulo, n. thief.
d§ulo, n. washer (scarcely used, s. dSu, v.).
d§ukQ, V. to dry meat by fire, to preserve it; inf.
dsukgmo, n. drying meat by the fire.
dSanii, pi n. stolen goods.
dbyGoogk
dSakodfolia — diiA« 59
dfakddiaku, dSukudSukadSuku, adv. lively, foil of men;
used of places, towns, villages ; fe — , to be full of men,
to be lively.
dSdsane, n. palaver of theft.
dSanyomowO, n. punishment for theft.
d§ut§u, n. washing- or bathing room,
'dsdrd, pi. dSudsi, adj. good etc. & edSttrd.
du, V. inf. dumo, tb stick (Germ, fie^en unb fierfen),
to pierce, to stab; = gbu; to plant (single seeds f. i.
by making a hole with the finger), as: du able, to plant
maize; and th. I. (but comp. teo, to transplant, to plant
trees or other plants).
d^, inf. du, V. to leak; to catch animals by traps. dQ amS, v.
to catch with bird's lime,
du gbe, V. to loose the way, to go astray; inf. gbedO*
dQ he, V. to catch one's self (in speaking).
dQ tsdne, inf. tsdnedQ, v. to set a trap; to catch by a
trap; to catch; — to be caught in a trap, Comp. ts5
tsdne, to make or set a trap.
dQ, n. leaking; entrapping, catching,
duaba, n. Ot. = t§eiayibii; fruit,
duad^ (fr. the Ot., dua, tree and de, yams), n. sto< iyams^
cassada, manioc. Ad. agbeli, n.
duakoro, n. lit. (Ot.) a onemastcr; cutter.
duasodQa (Ot = tsonotSo in Gl), n. lit. treeontrec, para-
sitical plant,
dudo, n. large pot; = botoku.
dududQdu, = yurududodu, adj. tastless, raw.
due, n. comfort? ha m. k. due, v. to comfort,
due, due! comforting interjection, spoken to people in
distress. Ad. and Ot. th. s.
duehdmo, n. comforting, condolence,
duku, n. eur. word handkertchief.
dukuduku, adv. to pieces; f. i. kQ — , to break to pieces;
but also = sukusuku, adv. very (fat f. i.) fi duk. , Jo be
very fat.
dakui, pi. n. buttocks,
dulo, n. planter, s. du.
dulo, n. trapper; bird-catcher,
dumo, n. sticking, stabbing; planting,
dun, n. pi. dudsi; darkness; dud§iafi, in the darkness; wo
duA, to get dark. Ad. dibli.
duA, n. a dark grey kind of antelopes of the size of a
goat.
dbyGoogk
60 duna — edSfirdfemonii.
duna, n. the hinderparts; hindparts of animals and things^,
podex; duna md li, y. to settle,
dui&dundun, adv. natural sound immitating the strokes of
beating, like: hambamham, ^ososo, tatata etc. yi — to
beat severely,
dunnii, pi. n. things of darkness,
dunsane, n. dark, secret matter, palaver; mystery, s. temo-
sane.
duAwO, n. getting dark; darkness, fr. wo dun, v.
E.
Words not found under vowel e must be sought for
under the next foUov^g consonant.
„E" when initiating words is either the subjective pro-
noun of verbs, he, she, it, sometimes also applied to
a plurality of things, but never of persons; or the pos-
sessive pronoun of nouns, his, her, its; or a mere
formative initial augment. Corap. § 14, 1. a.; comp.
also le; f. i. esuomo, his love; le suomo, the love to him,
ee — initiating verbs contains the pronoun e and the augm.
a of the fut. tense posit, f. i. eeba, he will comeX= e
ba ba, e-aba).
^&\ int. he! ha! it is sometimes added to proper names
of persons, when called for, f. i. Mensa e^! but to some
O! is added and e6 cannot be added, though the exact
rule cannot yet be stated.
gj == a! and he! adv. yes! — Comp. also: yo! Ot. yiw!
6bii, corrupted pi of hieo = h^bii, hlebii, pi. n. single-
cowijes.
ebQ, n. gall, bile; poison. One of the strongest poisons
the gall of the crocodile is said to be.
edfake = edsake andelfake, conj. because; for. Ad. epeake.
6dfe, Ad. ewye, num. four.
edin, 'dih, pi. edidsi, adj. black; from the verb di, to be
black; modin, black person, negroe.
edSiird, adv. pi. edsudsi, right, f. i. nine dstird, right hand;
good, dear, beloved; nanyo dsurd, ^ood friend; n. bene-
fit; good work; kindness; alms; . fe — , to do good.
^Edsiird feo edsiird"; „Good does good", prv. The
word is also pronounced edsird, edsdrd and edsrd.
edSiirdfelQ, n. benefactor.
edS&rdfemo, n. good worK; benefit.
edsfirdfemQnii, pi n. good works.
dbyGoogk
n
•^
Mo — ekole*alo. 61
Mo, pL efodfii, adj. emty, bare, void; mere; f. i. wiemo
flo, a mere word; adv. emtily, barely only, even; ekome
flo, only one. Comp. keke; akpa; yaka, adv. and flg, n.
and fo, y.
efdn, pi. efddSi, adj. bad, evil; from fd, fo do evil; n.
evil; fe — , to do evil. Comp. bone, adj. and fom, v.
in Otyi. Ad. yayam. MofdA, bad person; ndfdn, bad
thing.
efdAfelo, n. evildoer; malefactor; stronger than „eSafelQ*Sn.
efdAfemo, n. evildoing.
efdnfemonii, pi. n. = niifonfemgnii and niifodSianii, evil acts.
efu, adj. stinking; kept over night.
elSake = ed^ake, etfake, conj. because, for (Ot. efane se).
efei, efefgi, adj. ragged, rent (fr. fe, v.), adv. raggedly; n.
rag, rags. S. fe, n.
egblii, pi. egbtdSi, adj. dry; fr. gbi, to dry.
egbo, adj. Uke; ke m. k. ye — , to be like s. b.
ehe, pi ehei, adj. new; Ad. th. s. and other.
feka, n. valour, bravery, courage; daring spirit, rashness,
arrogance; eki na, by bravery; by arrogance; fe — , to
behave courageously.
ekafemg, n. bravery; brave deed.
ekSlo, n. brave, courageous person ; beroe; a daring fellow;
comp. also ka, v. and kekSlo, n.
ekah, n. a large sea-fish.
ekSsane, n. matter of bravery.
ekawo, n. encouragement, fr. wo ehS, v.
eko, 'ko, adj. broken; f. 1. kSko, broken dish.
eko, num. (Ot. th. s.) one = ekome; Ad. kake (Comp. ko);
some, pi. ekomei; the word is often used when not ex-
pressed in Engl, and German, similar to the genitive par-
ticle „du" in the French, if a part of something is meant
and not the whole; f. i. hSmi abolo ko, or: hSmi abolo
le eko, give me (some) bread; enu eko, he drank (some)
etc. If persons and things shall be distinguished, moko,
6omd)ody, noko, something is used. The e is only om-
mitted, if the word is used like the indefinite article;
8. ko. Comp. Ot. hi. Eko — eko, the one — the other;
s. ekroko.
ekole (Ot. ebia), adv. and conj. perhaps; ekole eeba, per-
haps he will come;
ekole-alo, perhaps -or (not); either- or. Comp. aleend;
dSikulfi, kule* kole etc.
dbyGoogk
68 ^kome — emoA.
ekonie, 'kome, num. Ad« th. s. one, as the former; pi. dto*
mei, some; ekome, adj. unparalleled; einjig; large,
enorm etc,
ekorarfemg, n. (fe ekome) uniting; unity.
ekoinckome, num. one ly one; adv. by degrees; efiteo enii
le ekomekome, he spends his goods by degrees. Comp.
baakd-baakd in Ot.
ekon, adv. once more, again; but only used in positive
sentences and for a single repetition ; for negat. sentences
„don" and for iterative sentences the auxil. verb „sa"
is used. Comp. dong; sa, asa, asan, sail.
ekoro, adj. and adv. single, simple; apart; alone; peculiar etc.
s. soro and sro, v. and krQA.
^kpa, num. six.
ekpaekpa, num. six by six; Ad6. th. s.
ekpakpa (01. pa and papa), kpakpa, akpa, acJlj. good; n.
good (bad ®ute); but impers. nokpakpa and prs. mo*
kpakpa; fe ekpakpa, to do good (s. edsiiro); adv. (sel-
dom used, but generally „akpa'* and naakpa) i^ell, tho-
roughly, indeed, truly. etc. The simple form „kpa" only
occurred to me till now in the word: onukpa (nU, man),
a good man, i. e. an elder, a grandee, a headman, the
first among a number (comp. opanyin and opanini in
Otyi). Ad. th. s.
ekpakpafelo, n. a person doing good, a benefactor.
ekpakpafemo, n. doing good; a good act or work; benefit.
ekpakpafemonii, pi. n. good works.
ekp^, n. baboon.
ekro (— ekoro, fr. ko), adj. single; adv. singly; wherefrom:
ekroko, kroko, num. or adj. other (anber), pi, ekrokomei,
krokoi; eko (or ekome) — ekroko, the one — , the other
(sometimes only: eko -eko, ekome -ekome). Pers. mo-
kroko, imp. nokroko. Ad. muno. Ts5 — , v. to alter,
to ascime an other form, colour etc. = tsake.
ekrokotsomo, n. alteration; = tSakemg.
Elaloe or Laloe, pr. n. of the river betwixt Kpon and Gbu-
gbra (Pony and Prampram), coming from the Akwapim-
mountains.
emligidi, adj. green, unripe, of fruits of trees; comp. en-
mdn, adj.
emo, emomo, mo, momo, adj. old, pi moi and momoi;
but generally rmed§i and memedsi.
emon, n. strong line to catch fish.
dbyGoogk
emn — euyle. $8
«iBMi, mu, adj. whole, nntcmehed; entire, full, perfect well
(Germ, ganj) ; holy (compare holy and whole, (jeilifl unb
pcil). S. also f6, fis, all. The word emu (attributively
used „rau") is not construed with the auxil. v. ye, as
: other adj., but with ye, f. i. eye emu, it (or he she)
^ is whole.
emayeli, n. wholeness; entireness; fulness; perfection;
soondness.
Remark.: Words with the initial liquid -augment
m, n, ft, sound sometimes to the ear as if an e would
precede them, because this augment can form a syl-
lable; but Uie e or yowel-element is not initial to this
liquid augment, but inherent to it, and these words
most be sought for under the letters m, n, n; or the
next loll, consonant; comp. § 13, 14.; f. i. nkO, ii^Qj
mplan etc.
ena, enan (na, nan, nga, ngan?), n. pi. enadSi, a kind of
canary-birds or -sparrows, living in suspended nests in
great flocks, generally sogether on one tree, sometimes
also in the high grass. In their company always a few
beautifully coloured birds, called „enlibli" or nlibli, are
found, dwelling in the same nests, but somewhat deco-
rated, wherefore the natives consider them as the lea-
ders or kings. S. prv. 33.
ene, pi. enemei, pron. this, s. § 34; so; conj. = agbene,
then; but seldom used so.
enefere, and
enelfere, n. dan. ginger (Snflwer).
enmomi (or nmomi), n. a frnit, called cashocle by the
Europeans at the coast, growing at a small plant about
2 or 3 feet high and used for soup (also called „ocro*^
by the English).
efimomiba, n. the herb at which the enmomi is growing*
its leaf used for cabbage,
enmomiwonu, n. cashocle-soup.
enmon, adj. pi. nmOdsi, raw, unboiled, unprepared, green ;
used of yams and the like, of wood, but also of cold,
, fresh air, as in English. Ot momono. .
enoU (from the verb noli, to be green), adj. green, dark
green coloured. Comp. abonua, n.
enumg, num. five (Ot. anum and nnum; Ad. enuo).
enumoenumo, num. five by five.
enyle? inter, pron. how much? how many? (Comp. nyie,
to walk, to go.) Ot. ahS?
dbyGoogk
•4 enyle — eye*.
enyie enyle? how much each?
enyo, num. two (Ot. enn and abieft or mmieft. Ad. tb. s.).
enyoenyo, num. two by two.
e§a, adj. bad, evil, sinful; comp. nosa, niiSa, WQ§a, naSa, n.
esa (fr. the verb sa, to rot, to spoil); n. evil, misfortune,
ruin; sin; mistake, fault; fe esa, to sin, to do wrong.
A peculiar use is made of this word in the answer to
saluting questions, as: wHeni odSe?"* „„Bleo!"'* „Sia?**
„„Ega ko be dsei!"" w(How is it) where thou comest
from?" „„It is quiet!"" „Home?" „«There is not
any evil!"" Comp. the similar words: n5sa, niiSa;
efon; tdmo etc. and wosa, nasa etc.
eSafelo, n. sinner.
esafemo, n. sinful deed or act; sin; = ndsafemo, niiSa-
femo, n.
ete, num. three (Ot. esfi, mmiesa).
ete ete, num. three by, three. Ad. th. s.
etfake, or
et§6ake = ed§ake, elSake (Ot. efise, edanse), lit. it turns
that; conj. because; for; Ad. epeake.
etfake§i, conj. because, for; efee, etfakeSi esumocr, he did
it not, because he did not like it.
etSuru, t§uru, adj. (fr. t§u, v. to be red, ripe of fruits),
pi. etsudSi, red; reddish; yellow reddish; ripe, of fruits
assuming this colour when ripe ; of men with copper or
brown red colour, as some natives and Mulattoes. The
adv« fa and some others with the same signification is
used to strengthen this, etsuru fa, very red.
ewulu, wulu, pi. ewudsi, adj. -great, large etc. comp. the
correlates: kple, kpetenkple; sase; da etc.
eyen, yen, pi. yed§i, adj. white, whitish; from the verb
„ye", to be white; ripe, from cornfields. The adj. and
adv. futa, Ot. th. s., is used to strengthen this, eyeii
futafuta, white white, very white; s. fa, boboll etc.
E.
The letter e does not initiate words, but is only
used as an inteijectional expression, here and there
added to a sentence just as is very frequently done
in Otyi; with the nasal sound „g" it is = a, hg, adv.
yes. See also „yO!"
dbyGoogk
Ft — ft fla. 6S
P.
F is pronounced by many old people hard like p^
f. i. pa, river etc.
Fa, y. inf. & and fale, to be enough, to suffice; to let
8. th'. be enough; to increase; to forgive (Ot firi fri,
which is also used in Gd), nd noko fa m. k. to forgive
someth. to somebody; ke-fa, th. s,; to lend (money only,
s. m§); to borrow (money, s. md); mifale Sika, I lent
him money; mifa §ika ye eden, 1 borrowed money from
him. ^Oke wohe-eSai afawo, tamo boni woke-faa meini
feo efon §iowo le!"" „Forgive us our sins, as we for-
give etc.
fil, n. forgiveness; lending (money) ; borrowing (money);
river; brook; pool (if sometimes fed by a brook); fk
ba, the river comes, swells; — srfi, — overflows; — fe,
bursts (the sand walls and breaks through into the sea;
— tiki, the same. The two latter words are used of
lagunes, when they get full and flow into the sea, be-
cause at other times there exists only an underground
communication).
f&, n. Guinea-worm, thread- worm; a wall of clay, mudwaU;
ye — , to have the Guinea- worm; to — , to build a mud-
wall. Comp. mfa, Guinea-worm in Otyi; fa == fale, n.
a dish. Ad. th. s. See also fakpS, n.
fa, adj. and adv. red, blood -red. As adv. it is used to
strengthen the verb t§u, to be red and the adj. etSuru,
red; t§u fd (also tSu fa) to be very red; etsuru Cs, very
red; s. et§uru; eyen; futfi; boboli etc.
f3, V. pi. ftmo and inf. fS, fSmo (Ot. fa, th. s.), to come
out, to be open; to take out (= d§ie), to dislodge;
to dispossess; to unroot, root out; to part; to open; to
call out for help in danger, f. i. eOi ewon, he called out
for his fetish; to overcome; to command; to cry at some
body etc. to menace, to stamp with the foot at s. b. etc.
The principal combinations are: fa % the Quinea-worm
breaks out; to get the Guinea- worm; also fH fa th. s.;
hfe fS, inf. hlefSmo, v. to be developed (of children);
tSui fSi, inf. tsutfii, lit. the heart comes out, up; v. to
be frightened, cast down, to grow fainthearted, to des-
pair (s. the contr. tSui nyo §i, nyo mli, to be comforted).
fS fa, V. to get the Guinea-worm; s. ye &, v. th. s. and
fa fil, V.
f& fla, V. to get a boil, ulcer, wound*
ZimmermaDD, Akra-Yooib. 5
dbyGoogk
66 d gbe — fol.
n gbe, V. to take a way, to enter upon a jurney, to tra
vel; gbefalo» travellf.r: gbeS and gbefSmo, travel.
ft he, V. to defend; fa m. k. he, to defend some bod^
heftlo, n. defender, advocate (s. dsie na and nadsielo)
faef^mo, n. defence.
f& kpo = dse kpo and dSie kpo, v. to come forth; V
bring out, forth; inf. kpofS; kpofSmo.
th mli, V. to choose, to select; mlifamo.
ft na, V. to open, as bottles, casks etc., inf. naftmo; comp
na fa, v. to be open.
ft ntia, V. to kik; inf. ntiaftmo.
ft seke, V. to h'ght the anker; to depart; inf. sekef^,
-ftmo.
ft woDU, V. to eat soup.
ft yi, V. to cry at s. b., to rate (an^ertf^ew), to threaten^
to reproach.
ft, n. = aft, half; part; moiety; root; vein, bloodvessel;
nerve? adv. partly, half; ft ke ft, half and half; s. ftfliift.
faba, n. rising of the river (which is with large rivers, f. i.
the Volta, as regular as with the Nil in Egypt).
faban, s. afaban, n. fence.
fadsiatse (s. fla), n. a person full of sores and wounds.
fadsiatsoft, n. medicin for sores, wounds etc.
fadsiemo, fafo, n. ferrying over a river.
fadso, n. river-bed; glufibett.
fafa, n. breaking out of the Guinea-worm.
fafale, n. an ulcer; a bad wound; generally of a former
Guinea worm, s. fla, n. and f^ n.
fafele, n. breaking through or bursting of rivers; s. fa fe,
fa tiki, V.
fai (Ot. kyew), n. hat, cap, any covering for the head; kpa
fai, V. to take down the hat; kpa m. k. fai (Ot. pa obi
kyew), to take down the hat for s. b., i. e. to beg him
for s. th., to beg his pardon; to petition (the gesture
used by the natives is that they take of their hats and
offer them to the person they intreat or cast it at his
feet, whether this fashion is original or introduced b^
Europeans, can not be stated with certainty; compare
the other custom of saluting Europeans by uncovering
the chest, s. kpa mama, v. to remove the cloth from Ibe
chest. Mikpale fai, I begged his pardon (but mikpa efai
would be: I took down his hat); mikpa noko he fai, I
begged for s. th., or I begged pardon for s. th. Kpa
fai! beg pardon! Mikpa ofai! I beg thy pardon! Mikpa
dbyGoogk
faikpalQ — fao. 67
ofai n\ on5-fami! 1 beg Ihee, to forgive me! — Ofai ne!
(offering the hat.) Forgive! (lit. Thy hat this!) Fai
ne ond! This hat is thine! i. e. ll belongs to thee, to
forgive etc. But sometimes it is difficult to say, whether
„fai" means hat or „ forgivenesses**, s. above; „Fai le
f§ ondn!** All forgivenesses (or „the whole hat") be-
long to thee! It may be that the origin of wearing hats
would give light about this curious relationship between
fa and fai and the curious custom. Comp. also: ba^ and
sise, v.; and pa kyew, v. in Ot. th. s.
faikpalo, n. a petitioner.
faikpamo, n. begging pardon; petition; prayer (comp. sole-
mo and sisemo); NyontSo le faikpamo, the Lord's prayer;
@cbet, Sirte.
fakpS, n. string of a Guinea-worm (about the thickness of
twin and sometimes a yard long. It breaks out at any
part of the body).
fakpo, n. river-island.
fakpoman, n. town on a river island.
fakpobii, pi. n. inhabitants of it.
fala, s. fla, n. bad wound, sore etc.
fale, n. dish; large plate.
fale, n. multitude, plenty; sufficience; superfluity; s. note-
kemo, n.
falefale = farefare, adj. clean, white; adv. cleanly.
falo, n. a creditor = frilo, n. a lender of money; a debt-
or, a borrower of money, = nydmolSe, n.
f§mo, pi. form of the verb fl
fSlmo, n. taking out; coming out; dislodgement; disposses-
sion; unrooting, weeding; developement; opening; part-
ing; calling out for help; command etc.
fSmond, pi. -nii, n. s. th. to take out with; some th. taken
out.
fana, n. river-shore.
fanabii, pi. n. people dwelling at a rivers-side.
fSn, adj. open, straightforward, clear, plain; adv. openly,
straightforward, clearly, plainly.
fanes, n. dan. foundation; tfa — , to lay the foundation.
S. §i§i, §isidse, n.
fanestfd, n. laying of the foundation; s. Si&itfd, SiSidSe, n.
fankwao, n. an herb used as cabbage.
fao, pi. fabii, n. small callabash with a long neck used for
play.
dbyGoogk
68 iaohdkodi — fe.
faobdkodi (Ot. Ut. be off and free!) n. leprosy. People
having this horrible sickness, are frequently left to them-
selves, wherefrom the name (comp. 9u9fa^« ^on au9^
fe^en); s. kpili, baba, n.
fSra, s. fla, fra.
farefare, adj. and adv. = folefale, clean; cleanly.
fasane, n. river- or water-palaver or matter.
fase, n. the other side of the river; adv. beyond the river.
fata (Ot. th. s. but with a somewhat different application,
as: sa, v. in Gd), v. to join; he fata he, to join some-
body or some thing. Comp. also: kpata and kpasa in
69, and bata and pata in Otyi.
fata he, v. to join (v. a. and n.); mifata ehe, I join him;
fata he! join something! Inf. hefatamo; prs. n. hefatalo.
fatalo , n. joiner, assistant, companion, helpmate etc. Comp.
nanyo; hefatalo; d§ielo, hefilo, n. etc.
fatamo, n. joining, assistance, help; addition, s. hefatamo^
fato, n. making or building of mud-walls, fr. to fa, v.
fatolo, n. builder of swish- walls.
fayeli, n. sickness of the Guineaworm, fr. ye fa, v.
fayelo, n. person having the Guinea-worm.
fe, V. to do, to make (Ad. pe, Ot. ye), inf. femo, prs.n.
felo. This is one of the most extensively applied words
of the language, its principal significations and combina-
tions are the following: to produce, to commit; to be-
have, to show one's self, to appear, to seem; to be
about, afe ohS, about 100; to be (s. Ad. pe and Ot. ye
th. s. and Ga ye, to be; d§i, to be; t§d, to become),
to become, to get; to be more than, to surpass (as such
it is the auxil. verb to express comparison), s. Ot. kyeA
and sen; as: mifeo, I am more, greater, stronger than
thou, I surpass, excel thee; mifeo he wale, 1 surpass
thee in power, or: mihewa feo, th. s.; to accomplish
(without object, comp. nfe^j;); ofe! thou hast acted well,
thou hast accomplished something! as imprs. verb it has
the signification to seem: f. i. efegmi ake Nyoidmo bane,
it seems to me as if it would rain; ke-fe, A5-fe, to do
s. th. with s. th., f. i. §ika aAd-feo wulamonii, §i dade
ake-feo nanii, of gold ornaments are made, but of iron
implements of art. Combinations: he fe feo, v. to be
beautiful; he fe oy6, v. to be quick; he fe vl, hewo-
dSiaA fS fe VI, to feel weak; hie fe yd and fe yd, to
be astonished etc. efe ake = kedSi, if.
fe m. k. ablo, v. to be hard against s. b. = wa m. k. yi, v.
dbyGoogk
fe eflo •— fe yam. 69
fe eflo, y. to be or become empty, come to nought.
fe efong, ekpakpa, edSttrd etc. s. these.
fe fe (f6 = fear, fright), v. to be afraid, to fear, to be
a coward; inf. fefemo; prs. d. fefelo, s. feto, n.
fe feo, y. to please; s. feo and fefeo, adj.
fe flonO, y. = fo, lo be wet; ye — , th. s.
fe gidigidi, y. to be in disorder, in a hubbub,
fe m. k. fern, y. to plunder one out.
fe gwan, y. to shine.
fe n. k. hd m. k., y. to do s. th. for s. b.
fe he n. k., y. to do s. th. with someth., to make one's
self something; efe ehe nyontSo* he made himself the
master; to use; efee he n. k., he does not use it; see
ye he niitsumo, v. th. s.
fe hed§d, y. to be lazy. S. hedSd; inf. hedSof^mo.
fe ho, y. to make a noice, to roar, to be tumultous etc.
inf. hofeme.
fe klalo, y. to be or make ready,
fe kotikontiele, V. to play the blind mouse bufiT.
fe mobo, y. to be pitiful, to be miserable, to appear so;
to mourn, to complain; s. mobo, n. and ye mQbo» y.
fe moko, y. to surpass, somebody ; to imitade s. b., see
kase, y. soa, y.
fe nddsian, y. to retribute, to repay; s. to nSdSian, v.
fe nine, y. to surpass the (ability of the) hand; to reach
the highest pitch,
fe niiseniianii, y. to use one despitefuUy; to illtread one;
8. se, se» y.
fe nU, y. to be a man, manly; to behaye like a man (comp.
the Germ, ben SWaun mac^cn).
fe numo, y. to become or be an old man.
fe sane, y. to become a (sc. bad) palayer.
fe se, fe se le, adyerbial or conjunctiye sentence, =s after-
wards; then; comp. ye Shu; no se le; efe ake = ke»
kedSi etc.
fe sroto, y. lo make a difference,
fe s6, y. to be slow, slack,
fe toi, y. to listen = bo toi.
fe yd =r hie fe yd, n. to be astonished, amazed; to wonder;
inf. yafemo. Comp. he dSd; na kpe he, y. etc. and yd,n.
fe ya, and
fe yara, fe yera, y. to mourn for a dead person according
to natiye fashion by loud lamentations etc. etc. to make
the funeral custom for a dead person by firing guns,
dbyGoogk
to te yey«je — fe.
drinking, dancing, singing and processions. These cus-
toms ruin whole families, towns and tribes. Where it
can be done without the knowledge of the european
Government, slaves are still slaughtered on the graves
of important personages that they may accompany them
into the other world. Inf. yera- or yarafemo, some
times shortened ydfemo; but see the preceding word;
pers. n. yera- or yarafelo.
fe yeygye, v. to be in trouble, in perplexity; = ye tsui
and tsui ye, v.
fe yukuyuku, v. to be broken into small pieces; to be full
of little one's, IKtle things, life, activity.
fe, n. fright, fear; s. fe fe, to be afraid; inf. feferao, n.
The word is perh. Ayigbe, s. feto (== felo? kaketo =
kaselo in GS).
fe, n. dung. S. the decent expression dfa (or dfeian), n.
fg, V. pi. flfi; inf. fe, flemo; to spit (only used of animals
which do so, f. i. some serpents; s. blik9, n.); to root,
to scrape, to cut, out or up, esp. grass for thatching
roofe; efe dfei, he is gathering thatch-grass. A peculiar
expression is: yi fe, to suppose: eyi fp, ake enye ni,
. he supposes, that it is his mQther;^ it seems to stand
for „yi fe dsi, ake; s. yi, yin, n. and fe, adj.
fe gugd, V. to blow the nose; comp. tsine, v.
f e = fia and pia, adj. all, every; put betwixt, the redupli-
cated singular fonn of a noun, it conveys the significa-
tion every, f. i. mofemo, every body; nofeno, every
thing; tso fe tSo every tree, s. § 22; fe Ifem, fe kwa,
altogether. The construction of this word does some-
times exhibit it as a noun (comp. the hebr. ^)D), f. i.
it excepts not only the article, but if it stands with a
plural in the possessive case, the augment „a'' which
ought to follow such a possess, case is generally left
out, etc. Comp. „Gbomei fe niitSumoi'' instead of gb.
fe aniiisumi}i, the works of the whole of men; a pe-
culiar use of fe or M is made in summing up a series
of assertions etc. f. i. mikpale fai, miwie Shu, miK eyi
se: f^ tfem ekplee, 1 begged him, 1 spoke long to him,
1 pressed on him, all together (sc. in vain) he did not
aggree to it. Fia and pia, th. s. Ad. tfa, tsoa, tso;
Ot. nnyina.
fe, s. fel, n. cold.
fe» pi. fele and fle, inf. femo; felemo, flemo, v. n. and
act. to burst; to break; to burst eggs, i. e. to hatch;
dbyGoogk
fe — f^nemo. 71
to bend; to kick; break through the sandbar (of lagnnes
aad rivers in the rainy season); s. fa, n. and tiki, y.
£i, adj. = fa very red, highly red; adv. used to corro-
borate the adj. tsuru, red and the verb tsu, to be red;
etsuru fe, very red; etsuo fe, it is very red. S. filfl,
futa; boboli etc.
fell, felo, felu, fleku, th. s. as the former and as fs, to
corroborate „tsu, to be red."
feda (kpa), fedS, adv. = dS, before, efe ffidfi ni ete, he
did it before he went; kpa fed^ obaa neV but now thou
comesl; not before now thou comest (nun erfi fommjl
l)u)?
fefelo, n. = felo, * coward,
fefemo (s. fe fe), n. cowardness,
fefeo (simple form feo, s. § 22 about reduplication of ad-
je^ilives, Ot. th. s.), adj. beautiful, nice,
fei, n. cold, coldness; cold fever; fei ye, v. it is cold; K
>emi, 1 feel cold, 1 have the cold fever,
fei gugo (comp. fe, v.), v. to blow the nose; s. fe gugd, v.
fei, n. beauties? be fei, to have no manners, lee fei, th. s.
but compare the Otyi fye (or fe), with neg. „nothing**.
feibe, n. cold time, winter, cold season (s. aharabata).
feihe, n. cold place,
feiyelo, n. person feeling cold,
felyeli, n. coldness; cold fever; s. fei ye, v.
f^le, V. corroboration of f^, inf. f^lemQ; to feel itcbing,
to itch; s. fle, v.
felemo, n. bursting (of many things); hatching; kicking;
8. fe, fele, fle, femo, fle, mg.
fell, s. fe and felO, adj. and adv. red, very red.
feld, th. s.
felo, n. maker, doer; s. fe, v.
fglu = fell and felo, adj. and ady.
femo, n. deed; making; act; becoming, getting etc. etjc.
s. fe, V.
femo, n. bursting (of one thing), s. fe, v.; hatching; kicking,
i^, and
femo, n. rooting up of grass; spitting (of snakes and the
like); s. fe, v.
fehfeii, adj. dirty, sickly,
fene, v. to open, unloose. Old pronunciation fende; Ad.
pene.
f^nelo, n. unloosen
t^nemo, n. opening, unbosing.
dbyGoogk
t2 ko — fiase.
feo, y. D. to flourish.
feo, adj. ss fefeo, beautifol, nice; Ot th. s.; n. beautj
ady. beaatifally; fe feo, y. to please; efeml feo, it please
me; ye he feo, y. to mock at, to deride, to joke; comp
gbe he gao, which is stronger; ye feo, y. to be beaati
ful. Comp. also fei.
feofemOy y. pleasing; pleasure; comp. ndmo; omanyefemo
feonii, pL n. beautifal things; beauties.
feoyeli, n. mockery; wit. S. hefeoyelL
fes, n. dan? a small fruit of a tree used by natiye womeo
to make yellow signs on their faces.
festSo, n. the tree bearing it.
fete, and
fetefete» adj. thin, s. legelege; weak; light; tastjless.
feto, n. coward, s. fefelo, gbeyelo and gbeye§elo ; fe feto, v. ;
to be a coward; s. fe f6, y. th. s. (According to the
form „feto is Ayigbe.)
fetofelo, n. coward.
fetofemo, n. cowardness; fefemo, th. s.
fet^u, n. priyy; but not a decend word; s. ko na, t§o no etc.
fl, y. pi. and inf. flmo (inf. fi); imprs. y. to perplex, to
bring into straits; efimi, I am in perplexity; noko efQe,
something has brought him into trouble; to be hard; ta
efi, the fight is hard (inf. fimo); to draw on, to advance;
to become thick (of milk), fat etc. to press together, to
be close together (of people). Ad. th.s.
n he, y. to bind the loins, to girt; hefi.
fl se, y. to strengthen the back; to back s. b.
fl §i, y. to be firm, stand firm; inf. sifimo.
fi! interj. The signification of this word can not be giyen;
it is used in the swearing formula, which is Uke that of
the .Hebrews without an expressed principal sentence; fl
takes the place of the latter: f. i. „Mikd kitd, ake: kedSi
eflo, ke oye amane mli, ke oba mind ni miyee mibuaao
le» kedsi ake neke klante ne foo miyitSo fl! 1 swear,
that if thou art in perplexity, if thou art in trouble, i/
thou come to me and 1 do not assist thee, if not with
this sword (in the hand of the person swearing), my
head is cut off, then — ! .
fi! mt. (for scolding) = fye, pfui!
fla = f§, pi|i, adj. all, every; n. the whole of s. th. comp.
K and § 22. Adn. tfa, tSo.
fiase (Ot. fi, house, ase, under part), n. the lower story;
the cellar, store; prison. S. tSD, tSQn.
dbyGoogk
fiji — flafla. 73
fi€, n. Ad. = fel, n. cold; fever.
idiiN)ro, n. dan. a kind of borers (Seiflbo^rer).
fidsiatse, n. lit. a possessor of wings, winged creatare of
any kind ^ePugcI, P)iD); s. fine,
fidsilefidsite, adj. and adv. unruly, unquiet; fe — or ye — ,
to be unquiet ; fitrifitri, th. s.
fifii, pi. n. (either from the verb fl, to be close or fifio
small) narrow places; fifiian, in narrow places, in the
comers, in secret; comp. fodsiaA, under flo, n.
fifio, old pronunc. of bibio, pK fifii, adj. small, little; adv.
little; s. also fio.
fila (Ot. fira), v. (seldom used) to be blind; s. fula and fila.
fiti, V. s. fli.
filQ, n. binder,
fimo, m binding; pressing together; press; closeness;
trouble, straits; congealing, curdling,
fin, finfih, adj. perh. europ. word; fine, nice, beautiful.
Ane, old pronunc. flnde, n. pi. fidsi, wing,
fintl, adv. in the highest degree; exactljr; fine finti, high
midday, about 12 o' clock; s. ketekete, th. s.
fintd, adj. narrow; s. legelege.
fio, fiofio, adj. and adv. little, small, = bibio, fifio; few;
n. a little,
ftta, fitafita, adj. and adv. while (Ot. the s.), s. futa; ye
fita (comp. ye, to be while), to be very white; eyeA
fita, very white, clean, clear,
file, inf. fitemo, v. to spend, to use up; to spoil; s. kpata «
hie, V.
file hie, V. to darken the face; to mar .
fttelQ, n. spender; spoiler,
ftlemo, n. spending; spoiling. S. hiekpatamo.
filsofitlo, adv. exactly; carefully; accurately, precisely; tho-
roughly,
fla, 8. also fra.
fla, inf. flamo, v. to salute; eflanye, he salutes you; to
welcome,
fla, fala, pi. fadsi, n. boil, ulcer, bad open wound ; different
from „asane", abscess. Comp. fafale; fad§iat§e, n. a per-
son full of „ fadsi'' or boils,
fia, n. the fruit of a tree; s. flatso.
'flada, s. aflada, n. a kind of pap.
flafla, adi. sanguinic, lively, active; unruly; ye — , to be -*;
adv. actively, rashly etc.; s. flefle and klftmSklama, th.».
dbyGoogk
74 flaka — floflo.
flaka, n. europ. word (gtadF?), coat of men and women;
frock,
'flana, s. aflana, n. flag.
flatSo, pi. -tsei, n. a tree of beautiful, hard r^d wood, but
generally crooked,
fl^, V. to ilcb, to feel a tickling sensation; s. fli, v. (cor-
rob. of fe, v.).
flefle, adj. light; lightminded; frivolous; ohie ;\e flefle, Hi.
thv face is light, i. e. thou art lightminded, frivolous.
flekQ, = fa, fe, fell etc. very red; tsu fleku, to be very red.
flemo, n. itching, fr. fie, v.
flemtso, v. (europ.?) to ram.
flehtso, n. window-frame.
flen, =^ soft, adv. far away, far behind; damo se fleft!
stand back! — aside, separately.
fli, V. inf. flimo, to feel a tickling sensation; to itch =
fie; to blow; to whistle (s. kpS ble and fli ble; kpfi or
fli tetremantre); to peep at; mli fli, v. to be joyful,
cheerful, glad; inf. mliflimo; mihewolo fe flimi, all my
skin itches; mimli flimi; 1 am glad, joyous etc.
fli z=r. fri, firi, s. fri.
flifli, adv. early in the morning = maftke, adem^iike, mankpa.
fliki, V. to fly; inf. flikimo; prs. n. flikilo.
flikilo = fidsiatse, n. a winged or flying creature of any
kind (©cflitgei); f. i. tsatsu flikilo, n. flying ant.
flikimo, n. flying; fb'ght.
'flikiti, ofl. n. flying ants.
flimo, n. itching; itch; s. gbm; blowing, whistling.
flo, ~ eflo, attributively used; adj. empty, vain, mere;
wiemo flo, an empty word; a mere word; ekomeflo,
ony one; mokomeflo, only one person; with neg. not
any thing, not any person; mokomeflo be d§ei, not any
body is there.
flo, floflo, V. to be dry (of grass).
flo, pi. form of the verb fo, to cut; to cut serveral things,
to cut into pieces; inf. flomo.
flgr na, n. pi. form of fo na to inform; to denote; to de-
nounce; eflQ mina, he denounced me; inf. naflomo; prs.
n. naflolo.
flo, pi. fodsi, n. hole; cave; comer (comp. kon), small
narrow place, narrow lane; fodsian, in holes; in small,
narrow places, lanes etc.
floflo,
dbyGoogk
flofloflo — fo hte. . 75
flofloflo (ploplOplo), corroboration of flo, empty, vain etc
adj. distant, remote; thorough; adv. remotely ; thorough-
ly; throughout = s6ft.
flofloi = afofro, aflofloi, n. blossom.
floke, inf. flokemo, v.. to come forth; bai — , leaves come
forth.
flolQ, n. one who cuts into pieces.
flgmo, n. cutting to pieces, s. fo.
fl6n6, frdnS (lat. furnax, port.), n. oven of every kind.
flonto, n. velvet.
flontofai, n. velvet-cap.
flot^, n. a kind of raw bags for corn, salt etc. Comp.
kafu, ablabutu, kotoku etc.
flou, V. (corroboration of fo, flo, to cut), to prepare meat
into a favorite dish of the natives, called flou or flouflou,
by cutting it into small pieces and stewing it with fat
or palm-oil, water, red pepper and some soup -plants,
esp. „sebe" and „enm6mi".
flgu, n. and
flouflou, n. meat-stew, native fricassee.
flu, V. corroboration of fu, to crumble (of bread), s. flufla
and fufudsl.
flufla> n. lungs.
fluflu (s. flu andfu), v. to crumble; comp. fuflu, fufudsi, n.
crumbs; fragments.
fo, obj. pi. flo, inf. fo, fomo; flgmo, v. to be cut (perh.
with the inf. fo); to weep (inf. fOmo and yafo from
the Adn. v. foya, th. s., no pi. form but with the fre-
quent, fofoi); to cut (inf. fomo, pi. flo or folo, inf. pi.
flomo); the principal combinations are: na fo, v. inf. nafo,
to cease (the mouth or end is cut, s. fo na) = fo; se
fo (the back or end is cut), v. to cease, as the former;
inf. sefo; etc.
fo ba, v., pi. flo bai, to cut leaves (a despised work); inf.
baiflomo, pers. n. baiflolo.
fo ba, s. fo m. k. \i ba.
fo m. k. da (or dan), lit. to cut s. b. mouth ; to cross s. b,
mouth, to give answer; mifoo edah po, 1 gave him not
even an answer.
fo fa, V. to cross a river; inf. fafo.
fo he, V. to weep for s. th.
fo hie, V. inf. hiefo, to endeavour, to try; mafo mihie
mafe nyonlo, I will try and do it at once.
dbyGoogk
76 fo ketia — fo in. k. yi ba.
fo ketia, v. (Ot. tya tyetia) to circumcise (111. to cut short) ;
inf. ketiafd ; circumcision is generally practised among the
6d-, but not among the Otyi- people (s. folo). It is
performed as with the Mahomedans from whom the cu-
stom may derive (Comp. Gen. 17, 25.), by a certain
person (not a priest) when the boys are about 12 — 14
years of age; the act does not seem to bear a religious
character. Of circumcision of females as is customary in
Abessinia and has been said to be in use also in these
parts, nothing seems to be known here, though GS-girls
do not like to marry uncircumcised natives, s. folo, n.
fo kpitio, V. inf. kpitiofo, and
fo kuku, V. inf. kukufo, to cut short, to shorten, f. i. a
way, a speech, a time; flo kukudSi, pi. form of the
former, to cut into pieces.
fo mli, V. n. to weep inwardly; to grudge; to pass over;
to be too much; f. i. A§antemei awonu nd, si no efo
mli tso, the soup of the ASantis is tastful, but there
is too much salt in it; fo mli, pi. flo mli, to cut asun-
der, in two; mlifo, mlifomo, mliflomo.
fo moko, V. to weep for somebody.
fo m. k. na, Aq m. k. na, inf. nafd, naflonio, v. to de-
nounce; miflo ona ma hSi onyontso, I denounce thee to
thy master. This act is considered by the natives most
hateful, even if duty requires it.
fo se» V. to make to cease, s. se fo.
fo si, V. to go about, especially in procession, as it is cu-
stom of the natives at their plays, dances, weddings,
funerals and other customs; inf. sifo; pers. n. SifolQ.
fo tako mli, lit. to cut the pad asunder, to cause a sepa-
ration between relations, friends etc. inf. takomlifo.
fo ten, flo teA, v. to cut in the midst, asunder, s. fo mli;
to insert, put between; inf. teMo, atenfo, atenflomo.
fo m. k. wiemgn, v. to address one during his speaking
with another person, to interrupt.
fo yafonu, yafonui, v. to weep tears.
fo m. k. yi ba, lit. to cut the leaf of one's head or price,
s. yi; V. to buy one entirely as a slave, not only take
him as a bond or in pawn; in the former case the per-
son becomes a member of his owner's family for life and
death, calls him father and is called child (son or
daughter), and the owner is answerable for his behavi-
our, debts etc.; in the latter case the bond -person is
only a surety and the person who has given him^ is
dbyGoogk
to = fo86 — fo nil ahc. 77
answerable for him (s. awoba); wherefore bond -people
are often worse oft, than slaves. The word or phrase
„fo yi ba" refers to a custom (of cutting a leaf asunder
over the head of a person bought; inf. yibafO; prs, n.
yibafolo.
fo = fose and fote, v. to pour out.
fo = yafo and fomo, n. weeping.
fo, ofo, n. a kind of black monkies, the skins of which
are merchandise.
fo, V. inf. fo, fomo, prs. n. folo; to be wet (Ot. fow),
to wetten; to wash f. i. cloth; face and hands or feet
(s. dSu, and dSale, wu, t§umo, v.); to beget (Ot. wo);
to bear, bring forth children, young ones (of animals),
to produce etc. fo m. k., to beget, bear s. b., but also
to midwife (folo, yo folo, n. a midwife; fomo, n. wid-
wifery). Combinations; ke m. k. fo bi, to beget a child
with s. b., a decent expression; f. i. „Okele afo bii
nyonma ke enyol" „Mayes thou beget 12 children
with her (or him)!" A common wedding salutation or
wish. „Mikele fo bii nvonma,** „1 begot 10 children
with her" (my wife). These expressions and many si-
milar plain ones (comp. musunbi) are used not only be-
cause it is a great honour, as under the Old Testament,
to have many children; but especially, because young
relations, slaves etc. are also called children and on ac-
count of polygamy.
fo ^tade he, v. to wash cloth; atadehefomo, prs. n. atade-
hefolo.
fo hi, V. to bring* ibrth or beget a child; inf. bifomo, bii-
afomo; prs. n. bifolo, biiafolo, parent; comp. folQ, bii-
anye, biiatSe; awo; yofoyo, n.
fo bobolT, V. to be very wet; s. bobolT.
fo daA, V. to wash the (inside of the) mouth.
fo dS, V. to wash the hands.
fo n. k. femo , v. to be accustomed to dq s. th.
fo he, V. inf. hefomo, to wash; fo nii ahe, to wash cloth;
niiahefomo; washing; niiahefoio, n. washer.
fo hie, V. to wash the face; witty expression, to drink too-
much; inf. hiefomo.
fo mli, V. to wash the inside, to cleanse (f. i. glasses,
pots etc. with water); fo mil! wash it; inf. mlifomo*
fo nmSfi, V. to bear sons and daughters alternately; inf.
nmafifomo.
id nii ahe, v. to wash cloth; s. fo he.
dbyGoogk
78 fo »a — to «.
fo sa, V. to weltcn the bed.
fO, n. welting.
fo, n. fat; slime, phlegm; sperm; to fo, to be fat; wo —
th. s.
fo, n. (Ot. th. s.) condemnation; guilt; adj. condemnable
condemned; guilty; bu fo, to condemn; fobu, condem
nation; comp. bu atefi and bu bem; ye fo, v. to be ir
the wrong, guilty'; foyeli.
fQ, adj. green, fresh, soft, unripe, undried; dfefo = dfei
fo, fresh gra5s; able fo, half-ripe maize, as it is roasted
or boiled and eaten; comp. eilmon; enoH, adj.
fd, V. inf. fo and fomo; to cease; to cast; to be wicked,
bad, to act wickedly; s. efon; import, sing, fomo! but
in compounds only fd, f. i. n6 fo si, cast it down. The
principal combinations are: nd (or ke) hie f^ m. k. no,
lit. to take the face and cast it on s. b., i. e. to trust
in him, to hope upon him; comp. hie kS m. k. no; ka
hie fd n. k. no, to wink at s. th., to overlook s. th.;
nd yitso fd m. k. kue, to take the head and cast it on
s. body's neck, to fall upon or around one's neck, to
hug, to embrace; s. here atQ, th. s.; se-fd, obj. pi. §ere
-fd and sere -fie (si), v. to cast down, away; mise-fd
or mi§e mifd, 1 cast it away ; misere nibii ne mifie (si),
I cast these things away.
fd abis^, y. to cast the lot; inf. abisafd; fd-ye m. k. no,
- - over one.
fd ab(}tTri, v. to wrestle; s. abotKri, abotfrifd, abotirifdlo.
fd hie, v. s. combinations under fo; ipf. hiefd, hiefdmi?;
to cast one's face on s. th. or s. b.
fd mil, v. to cast in; to give over and above; to add; inf
mlifd; comp. wo mli, v.
fd nine, v. to move the hand to and fro, to wink, to
beckon.
fd no, V. to cast upon; to give over and above = wo roli;
inf. nofd; nd hie fd m. k. no> to trust in s. b. See
combinations under fd; fd fd n. k. no, to boast with s.tb.
fd m. k. nd, v. to- cease or give up some body's manners,
Gd. Fables 1.
id o§iki, n. to cast or to throw dice; to cast the lot; =
fd abis^; — ye m. k. no, over s. b.; inf. osikiK;
prs. n. osikifdlQ.
fd se, V. to cast back.
fd si, V. to cast down; to lay down; inf. Sifd.
dbyGoogk
fd te — fomo. 79
f5 te £= Ifa te, v. to c.asl a stone; fd m. k. te, - - - at
s. b. ; inf. tefo.
fd ya, V. to cast the net; inf. jafo.
fd, n. corner; s flo, koft, n.
f5, n. cast; dirt; wickedness; adj. dirty, unclean; ofe fd,
thou art dirty, unclean. Dsu ke fo, robbery (or theft)
and wickedness, is an expression to disign a very wicked
secret act; dsu ke fo dsi no ne, this thing is very wicked;
bo fo, V. -to do s. th. detestable = to kpa.
fobite, n. pebble; marble.
fobo, n. a detestable act, fr. bg f5.
fobu, n. condemnation.
fobulo, n. condemnator.
fofida, n. a distinguished day.
fofloo, adj. uttermost.
fofoi, coll. noun, flowers, flower.
fofoitso, pi. -t§ei, n. shrub or tree bearing flowers,
fofple, adj. and adv. tender, -ly; soft, -ly; especially also
used of an effeminate education; milee mibii fofole, I
do'nt bring up my children softly.
fofolele, n. effeminate education.
fpi, n. run, race? used in the combinations: dso foi, v.
hie foi, V. sa foi, v. to run, to flee; wo foi, v. to make
to run, to drive away, to turn to flee; comp. in Otyi:
tutu mirika; in Adh. du fo, he fo, sa fo, tu fo, v. th. s.
foidse, n. running; fleeing.
foidso, n. th. s. but unused.
foihiemo, foisamo, n. th. s, but scarcely used.
foitsemo, n. running.
foiwO, n. turning to flight.
foiwomo, n. running.
foi, ofoi, n. horsefly.
fokle, n. dan. apron.
folo, n. one who cuts; weeper, weeping person, also yafolo.
folo, n. uncircumcised man; an abusive name for men of
surrounding tribes, who have not the custom of circum-
cision.
folo, n. washer; parent, genitor; s. f^; yo folo = fomoyo,
n. midwife fr. fo, to midwife; comp. also yofoyo, n.
folo, n. a wicked person; a dirty fellow =: mudsiatse, n.
fomo, n. weeping; s. fo and yafo, n.
(omQ, n. washing (of cloth, face, hands etc.); begetting;
generation; production; birth; midwifery; nature.
dbyGoogk
80 temo — Wmo.
f6mQ» n. ceasing, ending, end; casting, throwing, thrust;
wickedness,
fgmobe, n. birth-time,
fomogbena, n. birthright,
fomogbl, n. birthday,
fomohe, n. womb, matrix,
fomgnu, n. itinb^njQJfer; mother-water,
fomonii, pi n. after-birth. Prv. AIo gbomo le afie se ni
ake fomonii le ba §ia, the man is cast away and the
after-birth brought home,
fomgse, se, n. th. s.
foo, pi. fobii, adj. tender, young; comp. fufgo, fofgle etc.
fose, V. and
fote, T. to pour, to' pour out; s. fie Si; inf. fotemo, fgsemo.
fgte, n. (Ot. mfole, mfotie) white ants, termites. S. gbg-
tsui, n.
fosemo, n. and
fgtemo, n. outpouring,
fgtetse, n. queen or mother of the white ants, s. ghgtSui;
a kind of snakes falsely supposed to produce white ants,
fotoli, n. a kind of frumenty; s. aflata.
foto, n. and
fgwo, n. getting fat; gathering fat; s. to fo and wo fo, v.
foyeli, n. guiltiness; guilt; s. ye fg (Ot. fgdi).
fra, s. fla and fa, obj. pi. of fa, to lend; to borrow,
fra (ma), y. to grind (ground corn, s. mfi), the second time;
comp. fra Olyi, to mix and wyie; gble; inf. framo.
Frafra, pr. n. of a GS-village.
frftke, inf. frakemo, v. to loose meat from the bones or fish
from the fishbones; — • hlnmei se, t. to draw up the
eye-brow,
frdkemo, n. loosing the meat from the bones,
framo, n. second grinding,
fre, fere; s. fle, fele, pi. v.
fri, iiri (Ot.) = fa, v. to lend, to forgive ; to givfe (money)
in advance; to give free? to liberate? inf. frimo; prs. n.
frilo.
frl, adj. (perh. of europ. origin or from the preceding word);
free; ha frl, v. to liberate, = kp6; ha m. k. ye ehe;
ye frl, to be free, inf. friyeli = heyeli from ye he.
fri-gbomo, n. freeman,
frihamo, n. liberty, liberation,
frilo, n. lender, creditor; = falo.
frimo, n. lending; = fa.
dbyGoogk
frimo — fafoakpIetetSo. 81
firimo, = flimo, s. fli, v.
frlyeli, n. liberty; = heyeli, n.
frfyelo, n. free person.
fro, V. 8. flo, V.
frdfrd, adj. fresh, watery, soft (of land well watered); fe — ,
to be watery, well watered,
frdfirdfemo, n. state of being well watered,
frdnd, adj. cold; ye — , to be — .
fni, adj.
frufm, adj. = flu, fluflu, v. dusty, powdered,
fu, V. Ot. th. s. to grow luxuriantly.
fd, n. immoderateness, immoderation; adj. and adv. greedy;
gluttonous; greedily; gluttonously; pale, yellow, sickly;
whitish of colour = futa; luxurious; fe fa, inf. fafemo, n.
to be greedy, gluttonous; pale, yellow; sickly; luxurious;
do fu, inf. fudo, n. to be cloyed, pnfiTed up. Comp. fu, v.
and fu, y.
fa, adv. exactly, closely; used to define the verb na, to
see; kwe to look; kwe fo, to look closely; s. fufafu,
th. s., and altogether, Adji. th. s.
fg, V. inf. fQ; to scent, to smell, to stink, to snuff, to
bury, = to; to swell, to make to swell, to have or get
the dropsy, to clysterize,
fg, n. bad smell, stink; scent; - dse -, to stink; inf. fudse.
fo asra, v. to snuff, inf. asrafu, prs. n. asrafCilo.
fQ he, V. to smell at.
fQ Me = tu hie, fite h!e, v. inf. hIefQmo; to darken the
face, to frown, to look black (upon), to make a sour
face,
fu, n. burial,
'fti, efu, adj. what is kept overnight (bread, meat etc.);
sticking,
fudo, n. puffing up, being cloyed; s. do fu, v.
fQdSe, n. stinking, bad smelling; bad smell,
fufemo, n. gluttonizing, gluttony,
fuflu (s. fii, flu, fluflu), V. to crumble,
fiifiu, generally pi. fufiidsl, n. crum, crumb, crums ; fragments,
fufo, n. female breast, udder, nailk; hS — , v. to give suck,
to suckle; M fufo, v. to milk; nu — , v. to suck,
fufobii, pi. of fufoo.
lufohSlo, n. woman that gives suck, nurse, milking animal,
fufohimo, n. suckling, giving suck; milking.
fufoakpleletSo, pi. -tsei, n. a tree bearing fruits of the sia^
and form of the breasts of old women (fufoakplels).
Zimroermann, Akra-Vocab. 6
dbyGoogk
82 fcitQwlD — foUAilt.
fufonulo, n. suckling = jfiifoo.
fnfonumo, n. sucking.
fufonS, n. milking.
fufgo, pi. fufgbii (s. abifao), n. suckling; baby; generally:
gbek^ fufQO, gbekSbii fufobii; corop. also foo, adj.
fufQ = fuia (Ol. th. s.), adj. and adv. while, whitely.
fufu and fufui, n. a favorite food of the natives, a dough
of mashed yams, cassada or plantains, eaten to soup;
si — , to mortar or beat or pound or mash it in a
virooden mortar; s. badurutso, n.
fufafu, adv. thoroughly, be — , to sweep — .
fufttitso, n. the virooden mortar, in which the ftifui is poun-
ded or mashed; s. baduruntso, th. s.
fufuitsonbi, and
fufuitsomlibi, n. the pestle or beater or pounder, by which
the „fufui'* is pounded; s. baduruntSomlibi, \ik. s.
fufuba, n. a plant.
lufudsi, pi. of fuflu, crums.
fufafu = fo, adv. exactly, closely; na — , to see exactly,
thoroughly.
fufui, V. frequent form of fu, to swell, to swell every where
and very much; to have the dropsy.
fuhe, n. burial-place; Ad. pumhe, n.
fukofuko = hikghiko, natural sound, n. hiccough; — fele,
he has the hiccough.
fula, V. (Ot. fira) == fila and fila. Ad. th. s., old pronun-
ciation; to be blind; sometimes combined with hlfimei,
hinmeii fula, to be blind; v. a. to blind; fula hinmeii,
to blind the eyes; inf. fulamg (the lit. signification is:
to be overspun).
fulafo, pi. fulafoi (Ot. onifiraifo), n. a blind man ; s. Glafo, n.
fulamo = Olamo, n. blindness.
fulQ, n. glutton.
fulu, n. a kind of fever, nervous fever; comp. fel, asra,
atridi, n.
fumama, n. burial-cloth.
fumo, n. being luxurious, s. fu; swelling, dropsy, clyster.
futa, inf. futamo, v. to stir = lota; mitsine no futami (or
lotami), I have stomach-ache, inclination to vomit.
futa (Ot. fits), and
futafuta, futafutafuta, ad|j. and adv. white, very white; y«
futa, ye futafuta, to be very white; eyeft futa, very white;
comp. ye, to be white; fe, fe, fell «tc. futamo, n. stirr
ring.
dbyGoogk
ftiteftiie — fSnd flotr. 83
fatefute, a4j. mixed? hie — , adverbially used: early at
twilight = hte mfttdmfttS, dsetSereno etc.
fdiu, y. inf. futumo, to mix; comp. also butu.
futa mil, V. to mix into; inf. mlifutumo-
futuMtn, n. mixture, confusion ; adv. promiscue, confusedly,
pell-mell.
futnfutumei, pi. n. mixed people.
fntnfutunii, pi. n. mixed things.
futulo, n. mixer.
fiitumo, n. mixing; mixture.
fuwe, n. burial-house.
fuyei, pi. n. burial -viromen; viromen attending a funeral;
S has been chosen as the seventh letter of the Al-
phabet for the peculiar sound given it by the natives,
between f and §, s. § 2. Formerly we expressed it
with su; sometimes it changes with f and sometimes
with §.
fa, V. to blame; to twin, twist (cord on the lap; comp.
nygne, v.).
f§, V. inf. ffimo; to scatter, to sprinkle, to water; Nyonmo
fa, to drizzle; to comb; to conjure; the principal com-
binations are: gbe-fS, v. to scatter (v. a. and n.), ame-
gbe amefd, they scattered themselves; egbe ame efS, he
scattered them, fd m. k., v.
fa he, V. to repent of s. th., to be sorry; mifd mihe ye
neke sane hewQ, I repent this matter; efa ehe ye ehe
esai le ahewo, he repents his sins; inf. hefamo; prs. n.
hefalQ.
n no, V. to water, moisten, sprinkle, wet; nofSmQ.
f^ no nu, Y> th. s.
fa yi, V. to comb the hair; comp. gba yi; inf. yifSmo.
fa-fd n. k. no, v. to boast with s. th., s. fd, v.
fa moko yi nO) v. to boast against; to conjure against s. b.,
inf. yinofamo, yinofa.
falo, n. scatterer.
(amo,n. scattering, watering, wetting, moistening, sprink-
ling; s. fa and famo, v.
fafafa = fififi, adv. hurriedly.
fane, n. midday, noon; old pronunciation: fande; Adh.
plane; Ot. awyia, n.
fane finti, n. high noon, exact noon, hottest part of the day.
6*
dbyGoogk
84 ttneniyenii — ft.
(Sneniyenii, pi. n. dinner.
fdneniiyeli, n. th. 8., dining.
f|[newO» n. siesta; midday-sleep, a general custom among
natives and Europeans, but scarcely a recommendable one.
fao, inf. -mo, v. to maw, ma^cn; -no, v. th. s.
"""^fe, inf. fe, V. to vomit (comp. fie, v.); to be homesick,- to
long, desire etc. Comp. hfe tSe, — ts5, v.
fg, n. vomitting; homesickness, desire, longing (s. hIetSere).
fe, and
fefe, and
fefefe, adj. and adv. like; equal; entire, safe; alike; equally;
entirely, safely.
fe, inf. fe, imprs. v. to be wanting (Adn. pie, v. Ot.
ka, v.); noko efemi, I want something, ed gebtt^lt mir
ettoad; efe sika, gold or money is wanting; efe fio ni
wobase, it wants a little (while) till we reach; efe kpS-
nma, ten strings are wanting; in this signification it is
generaUy used in the pert tense; to be left, over; to
leave over; maye nii n\ fe le, 1 eat what is left; comp.
fe, efei> n. and adj.; femi eko, leave me something!
fe, n. want, rest; f. i. mamafe, rest of cloth; rag; s. se,
V. impers.
'fei, efei, feifei, adj. rent, ragged.
fe, inf. femo, v. to play; to be of a friendly, communica-
tive disposition, to be sociable; eke mofSmo feo, he is
friendly with every body; eke moko fee, he is unsociable;
to play for money; to game; to commit whoremongery,
adultery; eke yO kroko fe, he committed adultery.
febilo, n. play-mate.
felo, n. person vomitting, being homesick.
felo, n. player.
fem, adj. empty; fe m. k. — , v. to plunder one out; s. ha, v.
femfemo, n. plundering. T
feme, n. play, game; sociableness; friendliness; elee femo,
he knows no joke, he is sourminded; whoremongery,
adultery ; comp. G. and Ot. bo adfaman, — ahofi, v. and
Ot. goro, V.
femond, pi. -nii, n. play-thmg, toy.
fere, inf. fej-emg, v. to prosper; to yield much, to increase,
to be lucky; comp. sade, n.
ferelo, n. prosperous or prospering person.
feremo, n. prosperity, increasing, good luck; s. §ade, n.
fi, inf. ft, V. to grow fat, stout; to prosper.
ft, n. fattening, fatness, stoutness.
dbyGoogk
fie — tnh. 66
fie (Ot. fie or fyie. Ad. th. s.), to pour out; to cast (iron,
lead etc.) ; to cast away, to cast out, to drive out, away.
Comp. also gu, v. in Ot. and pue in AdA.
fie na §i, inf. naSifiemo, to flatter; =: doko na, v.
fie no (Ot. gu so, AdA. pue no, v.), inf. nofiemo, v. to
pour upon; to go on; gener. M fie no; eAd fie no, he
went on; — m. k. no, v. to surprise, to attack; see
gbe no, V.
fie nu, inf. nufiemo, v. to piss; decent expression forSamo> v.
fie se, int sefiemo, v. to cast back, behind.
fie §i, inf. §ifiemo, v. to pour down, out; to lie about,
s. dfere, v. to spill, to be spilled; hie , v. to be
of a downcast face; fie la §i, v. to spill blood (by mur-
der etc.).
fiemo, n. pouring, casting, driving out.
fie, n. cabbage; s. ba, n.
fifia, inf. fifiamo, v. to rub with a liquid, f. i. — abonua,
lime's juice; s. fo, v. and kpa, v.
fifiamo, n* rubbing with a liquid.
fila, V. to be blind, to blind; s. fula; Ot. fira; inf.
filamo, n. blindness, blinding.
filafo, n. blind man; s. fulafo, n.
filao, s. firao, pr. n.
fili, n. carriage, cart etc.
filibo, n. wheelbarrow.
filigbe, n. carriageroad.
flligblalo, n. carriage-man; drawer of — .
filigblamo, n. drawing of a carriage.
filinane, n. carriage-wheel, = kokrolonto, n.
fififi, = faMa, adv. hurriedly; in a hurry.
Sirao, or
Sirau, filau (Ot. th. s. Ad. th. s.), pr. noun of the river
Volta; Ayigbe: Amu.
fio> n. upper thigh. Ad. th. s.; pi. irreg. fodsi.
fio, n. elephant; nu-fio, n. water-elephant, i. e. hippop<t-
tamos. Ad. th. s.
fioblo, n.lit. elephant-broom; elephants tale, used by princes
like a fan.
fiomunum, n. trunk of an elephant.
fiowu, n. (elephants bone); ivory.
fo =r §0, V. to suck (marrow from a bone); — na, to kiss.
fue, V. = fie, v.
fue, n. = fie, n.
fula, V. = fila, V. etc. etc.
dbyGoogk
8d 6a — GSbii.
G.
Ga, n. ring.
Ga, pr. n. of Akra or Jamestown ; of the people, language
and land between the rivers Volta in the east, Sakumo
fio in the west, and the sea in the south and the
Akwapim- mountains in the north, of the Gold -coast.
Western Africa; in Ot. „Nkran'* (wandering ants), of
which the Portuguese formed „Akra'*. The people are
an industrious and powerful tribe, well grown, of a some-
what reddish - dark colour and good mental and bodily
abilities; they reckon the Anwala-, A^igbe-, Agolim-,
AkwSmu-, Akwapim- and Akyem- tribes to their army,
all having one common chief, hitherto the chief of Dutch
Akra or Ktnka (s. this). The GS-language, spoken by
about 100000 — 120000 souls, is divided into two
principal dialects, sc. GS-akpa (Ga proper), spoken by
the people betwixt the sea and Akyem and Akwapim
along the coast from Akra or Jamestown to Tema, by
about 40000 souls and the A dan me (Ada-gbe, language
of Ada) by the rest of 60—80,000. The latter consists
of several dialects and is purer and less mixed, but also
less developed, than the Ga proper. Some tribes of
both dialects have emigrated beyond the river Volta, the
Agotim-people, speaking Adanme from about NuAo, and
the Popo- people, partly still speaking Ga proper from
Ga, Kinka, Osu etc. The country forms a plain and is
watered by a few small continual brooks. It is divided
into two different parts, sc. the coast with its seatowns
and the dry grass-plain or savanna, 5—10 miles broad
along the sea and the fertile bush along the Akwapim-
mountains with its many villages and plantations. In the
N. E. of the latter part are situated the mountains Sai
(or Siai), Osudoku, Asadsale (or NoiyO Noya), Krobo
^ and Yogaga, all foremountains of the Akwapim -chain,
the first four each containing the principal towns or
town of the tribes of the same name. Seven cities on
the west -bank of the Volta, from Agrafe ih the south
to BatQ in the north, speak the Ayigbe language.
p. adv. staringly, immoveably; ekwe Awei g§, he looked
up staringly.
'ga, aga, n. a kind of grasshopper; a small animalcule; adv.
with neg. voice: nothing.
(jabii, pi. n. = Gamei; Akra-people,
dbyGoogk
gi^ogtbo — gba kd. 8t
gabogabo, adj. deep, furrowed (man's face f. i., or some
kinds of cloth) = voyo, adj.
gad§d, adj. large, broad, great; nabu gadSa, a large broad
mouth.
gaflo, n. dan. fork.
gftgd, n. a large black ant.
gdgS, adj. Adjfi. long, high, = kakadafi in GS.
gal, n. bow, arrow; t§6 gal, to shoot an arrow; sting (t§§,
to sting).
gaikpd, n. bowstring.
galmlibi, n. arrow.
gait§^lo, n. archer.
gaitSSmg, n. arrow-shooting.
gaitSo, n. bow.
gSlS, gla, n. a kind of reed or rush.
galitSo, n. spear; s. akplo.
galo, n. (europ. word) gold-border; gold-lace.
Gftn^o, pi. GfthI, masc. n. Ga-man, Akra-man.
Gfinyo, pi. Gdmei, com. n. GS-man, Akra-man, -person;
pi. Gd- or Akra-people; s. also: Gfibii, n.
GdtSemei, pi. n. = Gftmei, Gdbii, Akrapeople.
Gftyo, pi. Gfiyei, n. G5-woman.
gba, inf. gba, gbale, gbamo; pi* gbla, inf. gblamo, n. and
act. V. to divide (= dSa, Ot. pai); to saw, to rend;
to strike, to smite; to cast lots; to distinguish, to re-
late, to declare (s. d$ad§e), to talk; to prophesy, to
soothsay (but comp. kra), to indicate; to cease = fd;
to get sour, to ferment (s. also kpa); prs. n. gbalo,
gblalQ. Principal combinations: he gba, he gbla, t. to
hurt one's self; to be divided, rent about the body or
outside; mli gba, — gbla, v. to be divided inside, inf.
mligbamo, mligblamo; na gba, v. to be divided at the
end, etc.
gba afofro, v. to shoot out blossoms, to blossom; inf. afofro-
gbamo.
gba afaw^nya, v. th. s. said of maize; inf. ahw&nyagbamo.
gba dan, v. to rend the mouth.
gba enyo = gba mli enyo and gbla enyo, v. to rend in two.
gba fa, and
gba futa, V. to be white for harvest (used of maise) = y«
fa, futs, fufa etc.
gba m. k. hie m9, v. to strike s. b. in the face.
gba ko = ha adeda, v. to cut the bush for making a plan-
tation; inf. kogba, prs. n. ko^balQ^
dbyGoogk
^ gba mil — gbatSti.
gba mS, obj. pi. gbla ma!, y. to give one a stroke with
the palm of the hand; inf. magbamo and malgblamo.
gba mli, pi. gbla mli, v. to divide, to confess; - - enyo, to
divide, spUt in two; - - kpo to confess; inf. mligbamo,
mligblamo; = mlid§a.
gba na (lit. to rend one's mouth), v. to trouble, esp. with
words; to grieve; gba he na, v. to trouble one's setf;
inf. nagbamo, henagbamg.
gba, = bum, int. and adv. with one stroke, s. gbo and gbu.
gba ta, n. to put into battle-array,
gba te, V. to break stones, to quarry,
gba yi, v. to divide the hair; yigba.
gba, n. division; s. gbamo and gblamg; prophesy, telling;
s. gb^le, sanegba etc.
gba, n. Ad. = abofto, barn and akpa, s. this,
gbd! inlerj. indeed! adv. still, really, truly, however etc. =
kg, adv.
gbd and gbld or gbSld, v. inf. gbd, gbid, gbSlS; to marry
(only used of the woman, comp. kpe and wye), to take
a husband; egbdi nO or egbld na, she has taken a hus-
band; to live with a man (unlawfully), comp. wye, v.
and fe, V.
gbd, n. marriage, matrimony; s. gbla and wye, n.
gba, n. a kind of large seaftsh; gbanS&la, gbanSla, th. s.
dried (lit. stinking ngba"*).
gbadSa, xi. a leather girdle of the natives containing their
cartridges; girdle,
gbala, s. gbla.
gbald, s. gbld.
gbale, V. to turn in somewhere (from the way, journey),
to arrive, s. where; to happen; ene akagbaleo ! may this
not happen to theel'Adn. kpale, v.
gbale mli, v. to part, divide,
gbale, n. prophesy, soothsaying; s. gba, v.; relating of a
story, s. sanegba, n.
gbalg, n. prophet; soothsayer, s. kramo, okomfo; teller of
a story; imprs. crack, chink = kafi, n.
gbdmi, s. agbdmi, n. fig.
gbainu, s. agbamu, n. fruit of cactus,
gbamo, n. division, s. gblamo and gba, v.
gbanteng = gwantSn (Ot. the same), n. sheep, s. to; to-
gbant^ng, toaboti^.
gbatsu, n. a fetish-house, in which the soothsayers have
their business (soothsaying-room).
dbyGoogk
gbe — gbe Si. 89
gbe, V. inf. gb6 and gbemg, to fall, = nyo, v. a. and n.;
to kill .(inf. gbe and gbele), to murder, to slaughter;
to quench; to strike, beat, flog; Ad. th. s. to strike out;
ke-gbe, v. a. to fall, to cast down; gbe nii, v. jocose
expression: to eat, devour s. th., to drink hastily; comp.
fe, fe ase in Otyi.
gbe dan, v. to kill the mouth, i. e. to make it tasteless;
to stop the mouth, to make ashamed to speak; inf. dan-
gbe, daikgbele; comp. dan gbo, v.
gbe he guQ, v. to kill the trade, i. e. to despise, inf. he-
guQgbe, -guogbele; comp. he guo gbo, gbe hie; hie
gbo etc.
gbe he, v. to kill one's self, egbe ehe, he killed himself
= egbe ed§en na; inf. hegbe, hegbele.
gbe m. k. he guo (s. gbe guo), y. to kill one's trade, to
despise one; inf. heguogbe, heguogbele; prs. n. he^uo-
gbelo-
gbe hie, y. to meet face to face (comp. kpe); to come
into close conflict; to banquet, to be in merry company
together eating and drinking and making merry; to des-
pise = gbe guo, gbe he guo (Ht. kill" the face, comp.
hie gbo), to make ashamed; egbe mihie, he made me
ashamed; inf. hiegble, hiegbele, hingble; hiegbe.
gbe la, y. to quench the fire; comp. la gbo, y.
gbe mil, y. to fall in, to fall into; egbe bu len, he fell
into the pit; inf. mligbemo.
gbe na, y. (to kill the mouth, to finish the end) , to finish,
to accomplish; egbe eniit§umo le na, he finished his
work; to make ready; agbe na, it is ready; |nf. nagbe,
Ad. gbe nya, v.
gbe moko nddsiaA, y. to fall before one's feet for suppli-
cation, adoration or prayer;
gbe m. k. nftdSiaSi, th.s. inf. nadSiangbemo, nSdsiaSigbemo.
gbe mi, y. to eat much, to deyour; to smooth.
gbe nma, y. to thrash country -wheat (s. nma); comp.
gble, y.; to eat much, s. gbe nii, y.
gbe no, y. to fall on or upon; inf. nogbemo.
gbe m. k. uq, y. to fall upon s. b.; to attack, to surprise,
to overtake; inf. nogbemo; but compare also tua and
, nina, y.; h6, y.; ti m. k. si, y.
gbe si, y. to fall down; to cast down, also ke m. k.
or n. k. ^e si, to cast s. b. or s. th. d<mn; — to fall
short, to loose (in trading) etc. inf, gigbemo.
dbyGoogk
90 gbe ta — gbe.
gbe ta, gbe la no, v. to finish the war, to conquer, to gain
the victory; inf. tagbe, tanagbe; comp. ye no, ye k5-
nim, V.
gbe yi, v. to fill up, to make up a certain sum of money ;
cgbe daleiohft le yi, he made up the hundred dollars;
inf. yigbe.
gbe, n. killing, slaughtering; murder; see gbele and awui-
yeli; falling, fall; comp. gbemo and sigbemo.
gbe, gbei, Ad. gbl and gbe, Ol. ne* n. voice; gbe wa,
strong, loud voice; egbe esa, his voic^ is harsh; sound;
^ord ; language, = ^iemo (in Adanme gbl is always used
so), nu m. k. gbe, bo m. k. gbe toi, v. to obey s. b.
(comp. bip in Hebr.); gbeian nme kpo, v. to be hemmed
in the voice (lit. to have a knot in the voice).
gbe, n. dog, == sifulo; a kind of harmless sickness of the
skm (called red dogs by Europeans at the coast), comp.
gbe, gbei, n.
gbe, V. inf. gbemo; to sound, to crash, to crow; Adn.
kpS, V.
gbe, V. inf. gb^; to dissolve, to scatter (n. and act.), to
spread, to be in disorder (of hair, thread etc.); gbe-
fa, th. s. , amegbe amefS, they spread out, they scattered
themselves; mlgbeame mafa, I will spread them out; I
will scatter them; gbe yin, v. to dishevel the hair; inf.
yiftgbe.
gb§, n. spreading, dissolution; disorder of hair, thread etc.
gbe, V. pot, waterpot made by the natives; comp. kukwei,
kulo, botoku etc. Ad. bue, n.
gbe, n. way (Ad. bio, Ot. kwaA); used as in other lan-
guages in the most extensive manner; the principal signi-
fication and combinations are: Opportunity, custom, man-
ner; access, allowance, liberty, power (comp. h^gbe) etc.;
it is adverbially used = ward, wards, as: biegbe, hither-
ward; dSeigbe, thiterward; hlegbe» forward, on; 8egbe»
backward; n§ongbe, seaward, i. e. southward (comp. D^
in Hebr. = west), s. also ninedSdrdgbe; koyigbe, bush-
ward, i. e. northward; yiteiigbe, (headway) westward,
windward; anaigbe, th. s.; nad§ia§igbe (feetward), east-
ward, leeward; bokagbe, th. s. Combinations with verbs
are also very frequent, as: Du gbe, v. to loose the way,
to err; fa gbe, ko gbe and yi gbe, to take a way, to
enter a journey; nyle gbe, to journey, to travel; d§e
gbe and d§ie gbe, to open, make, prepare a way; to
accompany on the way; ha gbe and Ame gbe to give
dbyGoogk
gb6 — gbei. 91
way, atlowance, liberty; to allow; t§i gbe, to stop the
way, to hinder; wo gbe» to dispatch one; na gbe or na
hegbe, to have allowance; tSd gbe, to show the way;
kw6 m. k. or noko gbe, to expect s. b. or s. th. Comp.
Ihe iniinitiye or nominal impers. nouns and the prs. nouns
of these combinations in the sequel. The regular pi. is:
gbgi, but gbedSi in the phrase: to gbedSiano, to order.
gbg, gbSi, n. a kind of itches, s. gbe, n.
gb^, adv. much, very much = gbogbOgbo,
gbebimg, n. asking the way, allowance.
gbede, v. to be weak; inf. gbedemo.
gbedg, gbedegbede, adj. and adv. weak, weakly; fe^ — ,
to be weak.
gbedefelo, n. weak person.
gbedgfemo, n. weakness.
gbedelo = gbedefelQ.
gbedemo = gbed^femQ.
gbed§e, n. waymaking; = gbedsiemo, n,
gbedselg, n. waymaker.
gbedSegbe (Ot. and also used in Gd, tempon), n. head-
way, highway, highroad; s. also okpgAogbe.
gbedSiaoQtO, n. ordering, order.
gbedSianotolQ, n. orderer.
gb^dSielQ, n. way-maker, -cleanser etc. companion.
gbedsiemo, n. making, preparing, cleansing of away; ac-
companying on the way; == gbedSe, n.
gbedQ, n. loosing of the way; wandering (s. tSomlo), erring.
'gbeena, agbeena = gbiena, n. first rainy season.
gbef^, n. entering upon a journey; departure, parting, set-
ting off; s. gbeyimg.
gbefd, gbeM (s. fa, afft), n. part; proper part; due, duly;
right; accordance; comp. also gbena.
gbehamg, n. allowance; liberty.
gbehe, n. place, way, point etc. comp. he and gbe.
gbehenmon, n. dog-louse, i. e. flea, because it is here only
at the dogs; s. lopo, n.
gbei, pi. nonn; ways; the testicles; name; in this latter
signification, which is most extensively used, it is some-
times treated as a plur., f. L ye egbei ang, in his name^
sometimes also ^s a singular; hi m. k. gbei, wo m. lu
gbei, to give a name to s. b., to call x him; but: t§e
m. k. gbei, to cdll s. body by the name; bi m. k. gbei,
or bi m. k. gbei a§i, to ask some body's name, — after
8, b. name; fe — , to make a nc^e, to make s. b, o(
dbyGoogk
92 gbeihfimo — gbfikebe.
renown (comp. m^ and Wiff tUtpf in Hebr.); .n5 m. 1
gbei wo nu L, to call s. b. by 8. body's name; ji
gbei» v. to have a (great) name, to be of renonn
etc. etc.
gbeih&mo, gbeiah&no, n. namegiying = gbeiwo.
gbeiwo, n. th. 8.
gbek^, pi. gbek^bii, m. gbek§nu, pi. gbek^bihl; f. gbekSyo,
pi. gbekebiyei, n. child; young person (esp. from 3 — 15
years, but also under and above that age, comp. gbeke-
abifao, — fufoo; and oblanyo, oblayo); younger person
of any age (s. onukpa), f. i. none dsi onukpa, si moko
W dsi gbek^, this one is older and the other one is
younger; mibi gbekS, my younger or youngest child;
minyemi gbek^, my younger brother or sister (= miseo);
sometimes the word is also appUed to higher classes of
animals.
gbekS-abifao, n. a young child, babe.
gbekS-fuf(}o, n. a suckling babe.
gbekfibii, pi. n. the young folk, youth (bie Sugenb), yooog
people.
gbek^biiamadS, lit. children's plantains, Ot. mmofrabrode,
n. th. s. a plant == bayisS, n.
gbekebiianiitSumg, n. chUdrens' business; business carelessly
done.
gbekebiiand, pi. -anii, n. childish thing; thing pertaining to
a child.
gbek^biiasane, n. childrens' palawer, matter of little impor-
tance (s. onukpa).
gbek^biiasi, n. youth, childhood.
gbekdbiiatSdmo, n, teaching of children.
gbekSbiiatsu, n. children's room.
gbekSlakamg, n. silencing or quieting of a child.
gbek^le, n. nursing of a child.
gbek^elo, n. chUd's-nurse.
gbekSnd, n. some thing of a child.
gbekSsa, n. child'sbed.
gbekSsatSo, n. childs bedstead; cradle.
gbekSsu, n. childs behaviour*
gbekSwomo, n. carrying of a child.
gbekSyd, pi. -yei, n. female child; little girl.
gbeke (Ad. gbokwe), n. even, evening; adverbially used:
in the evening.
gbekfibe, n. evening time.
dbyGoogk
gbekenaSi «- gbemohe. 93
^tnB&i, n. late evening, adv. late in the erening.
I^kend, pi. -nii, n. something of the evening.
gbeiteniiyenii, pi. n. supper.
gbekeniitsumo, n. evening-business.
gbekesane, n. evening-palawer.
gbekomo, n. entering upon a journey; deparlure; setting
off; = gbefa and gbeyimo, n.
gbekpamo, n. going to meet one, fr. kpa gbe.
gbekpSmo, n. harmony, union,
gbeiwelo, n. caqpectator.
gbeiwemo, n. expectation, hope; s. me and hie kft no, v.
ebeladsemg, n. loosing the way; = gbeda.
fbele, adv. Ad. = pgn in Ot. and 6a, ever, at any time;
gble, th. s.
^>^e, gble, n. death (comp. gbo, to die and gbe, to kill),
dying, killing, expiring, extirpation, ineffectiveness etc.;
8. also gbonyo. With the signification = death the v^^ord
is as extensively and variously used and also personally
as in the Semitic and Japhetic languages (comp. owu in
Olyi). Death is said to be the first person created by
God. A few combinations are: na gbele, to see death;
sa gbele, to be worthy of death, inf. gbelesale; sa na
gbele, V. to taste death; §e gbele gbeye, to fear death;
h!e-gbele, hlegble, higble, n. lit. death of the face, i. e.
shame, s. hie gbo and gbe h!e, v. Ad. gbend and gbe-
gb6, n. *
gbgle, V. s, gble; to open.
gbdebe, n. time of death ; mokomoko lee egbelebe, nobody
knows the time of his death,
gbelefo, n. death-fat, a plant,
gbelegbeyesemo, n. fear of death,
gbelehela, n. deadly sickness, mortal sickness,
gbelekakra, n. collar-bone; ©^Ififfelbcin.
gbelesa, n. dead-bed.
gbelesde, n. deathworthine^.
^elesane, n. criminal, deathly palawer.
gbdese, n. time or state after death.
gbeleSemo, n. == gbelegbeyeSemo.
gbeleSiSi, n. reason, cause of death.
gb$le, s. gble, V. to grind,
gbelo, n. slaughterer, murderer,
gbeiiii, n. (obscene, but less than so), vagina,
gbemo, n. faU, falling,
g^temohe, n. a dangerous (^falling'' -) place.
dbyGoogk
94 gbemo — gbeyfi.
gbemo, n. sounding; sound; noice, crass etc.
gbemonS, n. a kind of preserved fish, rotten and mashed.
gbemond, n. sounding instrument.
gbemo-okadi, gberaokadi, n. letter; note.
gbena, n. end, -side of the way (s. gbetoi); part, right,
privilege; due, duty; wages, payment, punishment, =
gbefan, n.
gbenanii, pi. n. things due or right.
gbenme, n. = gbehamo, way giving, allowance.
gbenyielo, n. traveller.
gbenylemo, n. travelling, journey.
gbenyiemo-atade, n. travelling-dress.
gbenylemond, pi. -nii, n. any thing used in travelling. T»
gbenylemglso, n. travelling-stick.
gbese, n. a kind of red ants, which are very fond of sweet
things, espec. sugar; and live on trees, esp. on coflfee-
trees; Ot ahoho.
gbesi, n. the inward voice, whether bad or good, there-
fore not fit to represent the word conscience properly
(comp. kla, n. and heniile, n.).
gbese, n. backside, outside; menstruous courses of women,
because they must on such occasions leave the house
and go to a separate place, s. tsuse, th. s ; ya gbese,
to have the menstr. conrses; adv. aside, outside.
gbeseya, n. the monthly courses, catamenia.
gbesdlo, n. potter, s. so gbe.
gbesd, n» potters work.
gbeten, n. middle of the way, halfway; adv. in the way.
gbetoi, n. lit. way-ears, wayside.
gbetseli, n. corn-stick, stick of maize.
gbetsi and gbetsimo, n. stopping of the way, hinderance,
hindering.
gbetsilQ, n. person hindering.
gbetsdio, n, one who shows the way, way-leader, guide;
s. tsd gbe.
gbetsdmo, n. showing the way, way-leading, guiding.
gbewO, n. despatching, despatch, waymoney; s. sise, n.
gbewolg, n. dispatcher; person paying the travelling ex-
penses.
gbeye, gbeyei, n. fear, awe, sublimity; Ad. th. s. ye gbey€,
V. to be fearful, aweful, sublime, to impress with fear etc.;
se — , V. to fear, to be afraid, to respect; se m.k. gbeye,
to fear, respect one (Ad. ye gbeye, th. s.); wo gbeye
and wo he gbey6| v* to frighten, to make afraid; tp im-
dbyGoogk
gbeyesane — gbla na Si. % 96
press iivith awe; comp. f6, n. felo, fefemo; kpokpo, v.,
Aminmi, n. etc.
gbeyesane, n. horrible, fearful, aweful story, matter, accident.
gbeyes^lo, n. coward; = feto.
gbeyes^mo, n. fear, awe, respect.
gbeyew5, n. frightening, overawing, threatening, hegbeye-
wo, th. s.
gbeyewolQ, n. a person who makes people afraid.
gbeygyem, n. Ad. = gbeyesemo.
gbeyimg, n. = gbefa, gbekomo, n. entering upon a jour-
ney; departure, setting off.
gbeyilo, n. person departing.
gbi, V. inf. gblmg, to be dry; to dry; to be ripe, to ripen
(of corn etc., comp. tsu, ye etc.); also used of persons
in a satyrical way: egbi, he is dry, ripe, precocious;
shrewd.
gbl, n. Ad. = gbe, voice.
gbi, n. pi. gbii, day (Ad. ligbi, Ot da) of twenty four
hours; but comp. the contrasts: Oine, day; nyon, night,
also: dselseremg and dse namo, evening and morning;
day and night. 6bl is very frequently and extensively
used, f. i. gbli ele ne, lit. these three days, now, this
time some time; nmene dsi gbi cte ne, to day is the
third day, the day before yesterday, some lime ago; gbi
ko and gbi ko le, adv. once, ever, one day; gblko-
gbiko, adv. with, neg., never (comp. dabi, dabidabi in
Otyi, and ligbioko in Ad.); te gbi ni d§i = te be n\ dsi?
when was it? what day was it?
*gbiena, agbiena, n. large rainy season, early rains, about
April — June.
gbigbSle, adv. firmly.
gbimo, V. drying, ripening.
gbin, egbin (fr. gbi, v.), pi. gbidsi, adj. dry, ripe.
gbito, n. appointment of a day; fr. to gbi, v.
gbla or gbkla, v. inf. gblamg; a kind of plural form of
gba, V. (s. this), to divide; to rend to pieces; to draw,
to withdraw; to drag; to dress gaily (perh. = to diver-
sify). Combinations s. under gba; mli gbla, v. to be
rent asunder; s. gbla mli; inf. of both: mligblamo; comp.
also: kpla, v.
gbla sao, v. to draw a saw.
gbla mli, v. a. to rend asunder, into pieces ; - - enyo, - - in
two, inf. mligblamo. '
gbla na si, inf. nasigblamQ, v. to try to catch in speaking.
dbyGoogk
96 ♦ gbia n. k. fie se — gMc se.
gbla n. k. fie se, v. to drag after.
gbla m. k. toi, v. to pull one's ear, to rhastize.
gbla nil, v. to cast the lot (according to Hanson).
gblalo, n. divider etc.
'gblama, agblama, n. lime.
gblamo, n. division; rending, rent; gay dressing, flress etc.
gbla, gbSia, n. raarriage, matrimony, married state of women;
comp. gba; wye; kpe, v.; kfl gbla, v. to commit adultery.
gblakQlo, n. adulterer, adulteress.
gblakuomo, n. adultery; s. ayefare, n.
gblanii, pi. n. things given to a girl and her family in the
time of marriage; things pertaining to marriage.
gbland, n. singular of the former; any thing pertaining to
marriage.
gbiasane, pi. -sadsi, n. marriage-palaver.
gbiayO, yogbayo, n. married woman.
gble or gbfile, v, (Ot. and Ad. hue; comp. also pue in Ot.
and 6a and gbu in Ga), inf. gblemo, to open (f. i. a
door, a box, any thing shut; comp. fene, fSna); gblemQ
s!na le! open the door! to take into use (= bule); he
gble, inf. hegblemo, to be open at the outside, s. gble
he; hie gble, v. n. to get daylight to be civilized, inf.
Megblemo, s. gble Me; nili gble, v. n. (the inside is
open) to open inwardly, inf. mligblemg, s. gbiemli; na
gble, V. n. to be openmouthed, to be open at the open-
ing or door (s. na ka), inf. nagblemo, see: gble na;
no gble, V. n. to have an open surface, inf. nogblemo,
s. gble ng; se gble, v. n. to be open at the back, inf.
segblemg, s. gble se; yingble (comp. yiAka), v. n. to
be openheaded, i. e. mad, comp. ye seke, inf. yigblemo,
8. gble yifi, v.
gble he, inf. hegblemo, v. a. to open the outside, to begin
common life again after mourning etc.
gble hie, v. a. to open the face, be friendly, inf. hlegble-
mo, 8. hie gble, v.
gble man, v. to enter a town (in war).
gble mli, v. a. to open the inside, inf. mligblemo.
gble mdn, v. to force a fort, fortress.
gble na, v. n. to open the mouth, opening, door etc., inf.
nagblemo, s. na gble; gblemo na, open it!
gble no, inf. nogblemo, v. a. to open the surface, up-
' wardly; s. no gble.
gble se, inf. segblemo, v. a. to open the backside, back-
wardly; s/se gble.
dbyGoogk
gble tSui — gbo. 97
gble tsui, V. a. inf. iSuigblemo, fo open the heart.
gble }'i, V. a. inf. yigblemo, to let ut; s. M yi, v.
gble yin, v. to onadden, to make mad.
gble = gb^le, n death.
gble and gbele, gblemo, v. to grind roughly (f. u nma,
wheat; able, corn etc.), to thrash; gble n. k. mlumlu,
. V. a. to grind s. th. to dust.
-gblelo, n. opener.
gblemo, n. opening.
gblelo, n. grinder, thrasher.
gblemo, ji. grinding, thrashing.
gblemonO, n. an instrument for opening. **
gblomono, n. a grinding, thrashing machine.
gblfgbli, n. a kind of epilepsy; lunacy; ye — , v. to be*
lunatic, inf. gblTgbllyeli, prs. n. gblfgbltyelo. .
gblfgblitSofS, n. medicine against lunacy.
gbllgbllyeli, n. lunacy.
gbligbHyelo, n. lunatic person.
gblo, n. a kind of thread used to ment nets.
gblo, plur. V. fr. gbo, v. to smooth, to plane, to wash
(f. 1. - dan, - - the mouth).
gblomo, n. smoothing, planing.
gbo, inf. gbo or irreg. gbele, s. this (seldom gbomo)» pi.
ghoi, inf. gboimo, v. to die (comp. gbe, v. a. to kill);
to become ineffective, powerless, tasteless; to go out, to
end, exspire, die away, fade, to be effaced, spent etc.
to be done, fully ground, clean, fully smashed; comp.
c^ax, tUin, adv. tsofa gboko, the medicine is not yet
fully ground. The principal combinations of this very
frequently and multifariously used verb are: da or daii
gbo, V. n. inf. dangbo, dangbSle, to be tastless (of per-
sons), to have a tastless mouth, s. gbe dan, v.; he gbo,
V. n. to be without feeling at the outside, inf. hegbele,
hegbo; hie gbo, v. n. to have a dead face, i. e. to be
ashamed, inf. hiegbd and hlegbele, higble; ke owekunyo
gbo le, ogboo; si ke ehfe gbo le, ohTe egbo, if thy re-
lation died, thou doest not die, but if he was ashamed
(his face died), thou hast been ashamed (thy face has
died); comp. gbe hie; hie fie si; mli gbo, v. n. to be
inwardly dead etc., inf. mligbo, mligbele; na gbo, v. n.
to have a dead mouth or be without sharpness or taste;
f. i. kakla le na gbo, the (mouth of the) knife is not
sharp (flumpf); ngo le na gbo, the salt has lost its sa-
vour; toi gbo, V. n. to be dead-eared, disobedient =
Zimmermann, Akra-Vocab. 7
dbyGoOgk
98 gbo toi — gbodSo.
gbo toiy th. same, inf. toigbo, toigbele; comp. toi sa;
bo toi, etc. etc. Sometimes such grammatical subjects
are put behind the verb with a kind of absolute objec-
tive signification ; f. i gbo toi (= toi gbo) , v. n. to be
dead respecting the ear, gbo hie etc.
gbo toi = toi gbo, inf. toigbele and toigbo, v. to be dis-
obedient.
Ogbo, pr. n. thou diedst, s. gbobalo.
gbo, n. dying; gbO dSi n) ogbo! dying thou shall die!
(Hebr. niDp niD) gbO ke ogbo! gbo ogbo! th. s. pi.
gfeoimo nyeagboi, dying ye shall die! plur. fofm.
gbo, n. the second or small rainy season, the latter rains
from September or October to December. Comp. Aha-
abata and agbiena, n. .
gbo, adv. and int. = bum, gba, gbu, with one stroke;
egbe §i gb6, he fell down, plump! adv. however, still,
completely etc.
'gbo, agbo, n. gate; — na, place before the gate, adv.
outside; „«m raig xh)Qaig;'' at the door, gate.
'gbo, agbo, adj. mighty, powerful, great.
gbo, V. n. gbo and gbole, to be old; infirm, weak, decayed;
to be frequent; comp. bo, bu, wu he; v. a. to smooth,
to plane, pi. gblo, inf. gblomg.
gbo, pi. gboi, n. stranger, foreigner (accord, to Hanson:
„mokpon"), guest; fe m. k. gbo, v. to show hospitality
to s. b.; comp. ke m. ye egbo = ke m. k. bo, to be-
come or be one with s. b. ; s. fe ekome, bo nanyo etc.
Ad. kpa, n.
gbo yi) V'^ to plait the hair.
^gbobalo, n. lit. deathcomer, i. e. a child born after an other
who died, which is supposed to be born again (s. bla).
Many curious cermonies are made with such, their faces
are cut,' they are put into an oven, dragged in the street
till some body takes them up etc. and peculiar names
are given to them, as: Ogbo or (Ot.) Owu, thou diedst;
Abiata, Alema, Abebio (come again) ^tc.
gbobi, inf. gbobimo, v. to hunt; used of men and animals,
f. i. leopards, dogs, cats (siagbolo, s. this); comp. ml, v.
to hunt with dogs.
gbobilo, gbOlo» n. hunter.
gbobimo, n. hunting, s. mile.
gbodso (s. gbo), V. to become weak,- to be weakened; ehe
gbod§o» he is weak; to be sick of the palsy; to be laid
dbyGoogk
gbodsolo — gbomodSulo. 99
op with the gout; inf. gbodsgmo. See gbede, kumo,
VI etc.
gbod§olo, n. a person sick with the palsy; a weak person.
gbodSomo, n. weakness = gbedemo; palsy = kuomo.
gbodsomotsofa, n. medicine against palsy.
gbod§ui, n. a kind of antelopes; s. odabo and odabote, th. s.
gbgfelo, n. hospitable person.
gbofemo, n. hospitality; fr. fe gbo, v.
gbogbOgbo, adv. very much.
gbogbo, n. wall; 9Banb, SWauer.
gbogbotffi, n. wall-building, i. e. masonwork; ele —, he is
a mason.
gbogbotfalQ, n. mason. S. fatolo, n.
Gbogbolulu, pr. p. of a village on the road from Osu to
Krobo.
gbohl, pi. of gbonyo; the dead.
gbohladse, -dSen, n. the world of the dead, supposed to
be situated on the islands of and beyond the river Volta ;
hades; Ot. asaman.
gboh!afu, n. burial.
gbohiafuhe, n. burial place.
gbohiagbe, n. the way of the dead, the milky way.
gbohian = gboh! amli, in or among the dead.
gbohiano, pi. -nii, n. s. th. appertaining to dead persons.
gboiatohe, n. lodge for strangers, inn, hotel.
gboiatolo, n. a person lodging strangers; inn-keeper, host.
gboimo, n. dying (l)a« ©terben »on 93ic(cn); infinitive n.
of the pi. verb: gboi, s. gbo, v.
gbole, n. old age, weakness; s. gbo, v.
gbolo = gbobilo, n. hunter.
gbolQ, n. an old, weak person.
gbomo, he, v. to warm one's self, inf. hegbomo-
gbomo, pi. gbomei; n. man (perhaps mortal person, s.
gbo, to die and mo, pi. mei, person); person, there-
fore also used of God, angels, but this should perhaps
be discountenanced and only „mo" used. Sometimes it
is applied to superior kinds of animals. Comp, also:
adesa, mo, etc. Ot. onipa; Ad. nomlo, no, n. Ay. ame, n.
gbomoban, n. human kind, mankind, human nature.
gbomodsen, n. human existence, being, character etc., s.
dse, dsen, n.
gbomodsQ, n. men-stealing.
ebomodsulo, n. men-stealer, s. odsotfalo, n.
7*
dbyGoogk
100 gbomogbC — gbot^ui.
gbomogbjg, n. murder, manslaughter; s. gbe, v. and awui-
yeli, n.
gbomogbelo, n. murderer.
gbomobi, n. child of man; SWenf(^cnfinb, SWenfd^enfo^n.
gbomohen5, n. kind of men.
gbomoholo, n. slave-dealer.
gbomosii,n. shape, form, character of men, s. su; ban, dsen, n.
gbomotso, pi. -t§ei, n. body (of man); comp. kanetso, sa-
tso etc.; Ad. ndmlotso, Ot. onipadua, n.
gbomot§dmo, n. incarnation, becoming man.
gbopo, V. to decrease (f. i. water), comp. gbg, v.
gbon, n. joint of the body, hip.
gbonyo, pi. gbohl, n. dead person; corps; dead body of
any kind; carcass; the word is used appositively like an
adjective to indicate any thing dead, rotten, useless etc.
f. i. kakla gbonyo, a knife which is not sharp ; fili gbo-
nyo, a carriage which does not go etc. s. gbo, v.
gbonyobi, n. posthumous (pers9n).
gbonyobu, n. grave.
gbonyofu, n. burial.
gbonyofiihe, n. burial-place.
gbonyowomo, n. carrying of a corps.
gbonyowu, n. bone of a dead person.
gbonyoyitso, n. head of a dead person.
gbosi, n. leaving after death.
gboSinii, pi. n. things left by a person deceased, inheri-
tance; ye — , to inherit these things.
gbosiniiasane, n. palaver about inheritance.
gbosiniiyeli, n. inheriting, inheritance.
gbosiniiyelo, n. heir, s. wofase.
gbuto, n. reception, lodging of strangers.
gbotohe, s. gboiatohe.
gbot§ui, n. a kind of antelopes; anthill of the white ants
or termites, about 5 — 8 feet high and exceedingly hard;
their form is piramidical. They contain inside a mass
of cells like a honey-comb, in the middle of which the
dwelling of their queen (foteiatse"); is found, consisting
of a hard piece of clay as large and twice as thick as
a man's hand, perforated for ingress and egress of the
labourers who feed her and carry her eggs away; she
herself, being of the size of a small finger and in shape
like a catterpillar, is immured in it (s. fote and fotetse).
All these heaps are considered as holy and for this reason
sometimes fenced in by an „aklabat§a^' or holy fence.
dbyGoogk
gbowyei — gobigobi. 101
gbowyei, or
gbowyiei, n. a kind of pepper, strangers pepper; s. wyiei.
gboyeli, n. perhaps originally hospitabilily, s. gbo; unity,
friendship; harmony; fr. ye egbo, v.
gboyO, pi. -yei, n. female slranger.
gbu, pi. gbulo, inf. gba, gbulomo, v. to perforate, to slab,
to dig through = du; comp. Ad. bue, pue, bli; gbu, v.
and bu, n. boi, v. in GSl.
gbu and gbulomo, n. perforating, stabbing,
gbu, adv. and int. = bum, gba, gbo, mih one stroke,
plump! —
gbOno, gbulomond, n. instrument for perforating, boring,
stitching etc.
geds6 = gadsa, adj. large, broad,
gegege = dended^n, adj. and adv. hard, hardly; fe — , v.
to be — .
gegegefemOy n. hardness,
gegenu, agegSnu, n. a kind of pap or thick beverage made
of bread, water and honey,
gengengen, adv.
ge-, -ge, s. dse-, -dse.
gi-, -gi, s. dsi-, -dsi.
gidi, gidigidi, adj. and adv. unruly, wild, disorderiy, distur-
bed = basabasa and bisibasa, giddy; ye — , v. and
fe — , V. to be unruly etc.
gidigidifelo» n. .an unruly person,
gidlgidifemo 9 n. unruly, unquiet slate; disorder, disturbance;
giddiness.
gidigidiyelOt n. = gidigidifelo.
gidigidiyeli, n. = gidigidifemQ.
gigintso, pi. -Isei, n. a stick to stir up food in cooking.
gigonigig6 = gugdnigug6, n. a kind of grasshoppers,
gli = gala, n. a kind of reed.
gU, V. to be hot; to be angry, in a rage, inf. glimo; s.
gri, th. s. and mli fii, mli wo la, v. etc.
gligli, adj. very hot.
glili, grili, n. ©rille, cricket,
glilo, n. enraged person,
glimo ) n. anger, rage; s. mlifu, mlila, n.
gS, V. to become stale by hard cooking,
glofi, adj. great, high; s. grofi.
glo, adj. rough, unkind (perh. eur. word); s. gro, th. s,
'go, s. ago I int.
gobigobi, adj. loquacious, = blgbl^.
dbyGoogk
102 godSO — guo.
godSo, adj. and adv. high long; slender, -ly.
godsogodSo, adj. and adv. th. s.
godsogl6go, adj. and adv. th. s.
goe, V. to extent, enlarge; get larger.
gdgo, 8. gOgd.
gOgomi, pi. -mii, n. worm, caterpillar; wo —, v. to be
or get wormy; to grow or produce worms. Comp. §iwo
and adudon, n.
ggi, V. to belch.
goimo, n. belching.
golegu, n. Ad. thumb = gonti.
gdh, n. pi. gddSi, mount, mountain; hill; hill; Ad. y5, n.;
8. also kpon, n.
gdnti, n. thumb.
gosigosi, adj. and adv. odd, strange, perplexed; oddly,
strangely; fe m. k. gosigosi, to produce a strange fee-
ling; efeomi gosigosi, 1 feel very strange; he fe — , to
be in perplexity; yin fe — , v. th. s.
gosigosifemo, n. strange, odd feeling.
gro, n. dan. rough word; ehUmi gro wiemoi, he gave me
rough words.
groft, = gloft, adj. high, great; comp. also kwo, kwon,
kwonkwon and kronkron or kononkonon, in Otyi.
gu, V. inf. ga, to forbid, to speak against, to gainsay.
gu, Ad. v., to turn.
gua or goa, n. (Ot. th. s.) the guiava-fruit,
guatso, pi. -tsei, n. the guiava-tree.
Gua, pr. n. of Cape Coast.
Guanyo, pi. Guamei, man from C. Coast; Cape-Coast-people.
gufa or gulfa, n. (dan. gul farve) yellow colour; a root to
be had in the market for yellow-colouring or dying.
giigo, n. nose; fe — , v. to blow the — .
gugofe, n. blowing of the nose.
gugonigugd, n. a kind of large grass-hoppers ; s. agd, bala, n.
gugwe, n. Ad. = tsitSi, chest, breast.
gum, n. a large snake-eating bird of the size of a stork.
gumo, V. inf. guomo, to peel.
guna, n. = duna.
guo, n. (Ot. gwa, th. s. and „seat, s. gwa and ablogwa)
trade = dsra; ye =, v., == ye dsra, to trade; whole
behaviour, conversation, character, combined with he in
the phrases: gbe m. k. he guo, s. to despise one, to
mock at one; he guQ gbo, v. to be despised. Comp.
dfa; V. in Adn.
dbyGoogk
guogbd — ha he. 103
guQgbO, n. s. beguogbo, n. despised state; s. he guQ gbo, y,
guogbe, n. th. s., s. heguogbe and gbe he guo, v.
guogb^le, n. th. s.
guonao, n. peeling, s. gumo; comp. kumo, sumo, sumi?, v.
gnonii, pi, n. wares = dSranii.
guoyeli = dsrayeli, n. trading, trade.
guoyelo, guoyelilo, n. trader; marchant, = dsrayelo, n.
gwa, n. (Ot, th. s.) seat, stool; sitting together for consul-
tation, especially in open council on the marketplace;
bo — , V. to place seats around, to sit together, to con-
sult; inf. gwabo (Ot. th.s.). Comp. adsina (Ot. agyinS), n.
gwabo, n. silting; open consultation, council; open assem-
bly of the people; s. agwasen, akwason, n.
gwabolo, n. member of a consultation or sitting of a council.
gwifinyo, gwaiimei, n. = dsekSnyo, Akwapim-man, -people,
people from the interior; according to some persons the
signification would be; uncircumcised people (s. folo), ac-
cording to the Akwapim-people it is the name for the
Kyerepon- people. If written kwannyo, which the pro-
nunciation allows, it would signify: way-man, way-people
(Ot. kwan = way).
gwanteii, pi. -tehi, n. (Ot. gw.an = to, sheep or goat;
gwanten, sheep; ten = long); sheep; generally to-
gwanten; s. to, n. and to — aboti^.
gwantenbi, to — gwantehbi, n. lamb.
gwantehhetsoi, n. \sool.
gwantenyo, pi. -yei, n. ewe; comp. to — agbo, n.
gya> gyc — etc. s. und. dsa-, dse-, or dfa-, dfe-, etc.
H.
Ha, V. inf. ha; to be covered, to cover (comp. kata
and hata in Ot.); to draw s. th. over s. th., to cover
s. th. for the purpose of snatching it away, to snatch,
to raff; to huddle; ameha lo ye dsa le no, they snatched
up the fish in the market; to rob, to plunder; ha m. k.
to plunder s. b. Combinations: he ha, v. n. to be cov-
ered outside; inf. heha, s. ha he; hie h5, v. n. to have
the face covered; hieha, s. ha hie; nwei le hie eha,
the heaven is covered; no ha, v. n. to have a covered
surface; inf. noha, s. ha no, etc.
ha dfai. Ad. = ho, v. to sell.
ha he, inf. heha, v. a. to cover round about; to cover
one's self; eha ehe mama, he covered himself with his
cloth (8. mama).
dbyGoogk
104 ha toe — hi
ha hie, v. a. to cover the face, surface; inf. hiehs.
ha momo, v. inf. momoha, to stutter, to falter; prs. \
momohaio.
ha no, V. inf. noha, to cover up, to cover the surface.
ha, n. covering, plundering; s. ha, v.
*ha, oh6, num. Ot. th. s., pi. ohai, hundred; ohai en;^<
two hundred; ohai ete ke ekome, 301 ; ohai edfe, 400 etc
ohaha, hundred by hundred. Comp. huha, indef. nuni
and lafa, Ad. num.
ha, n. torch.
hal int. oh!
hS, V. to give, inf. hSmo (Ot. mS, A^yigbe na), this is one
of the words, in the form and use of which the relatioc
of most of the languages of Africa south of the Sahara
may be observed; s. ke, n5 etc.), to give one's self, to
show one's self; to let, to allow, etc. etc. This word
is most frequently, extensively and multifariously used
and gives the greatest difficulty to Non-Africans. It not
only serves as an auxiliary verb like „to let" (laffcn)
but also as a „verbal preposition** (Comp. Riis Outline
and the word „ma** in his Vocab., and § 28, § 31 and
Tab. II. 1. b. bb. etc.) used to express the relation of
the Dative-case of other languages or of prepositions like
„to**, „for", „instead of", „of" etc. or as the laiigi^e
does not like to combine an impers. and a pers. object
with one transitive verb, it is used to supply one object
with a formal verb (comp. in Engl, the preposition „to"
supplying the same want of a dative (case); f. i. mihe
sika mihSi m. k., I received money for s. b. nd n. k.
ha m. k., to take s. th. for s. b. or to give s. th. to
s. b. If it is always kept in view, that the language
has no prepositions but instead of them auxiliary verbs
(as: ke, n5, ts6, dse, ye, ba, ya etc.), the difficulty will
be easily overcome. A peculiar use of „ha" is to be
noticed, because not included in the three categories
above alluded to. It is similar to the Engl, and Gerro.:
to give or show one's self (Pd? geben, ficft jeigcn) but
more frequently employed, f. i. boni eyo hSa, as he is;
boni efe ehd dsi nd, how he did, as he did (is this),
or: so he did (n)ie er tfl — uub fic^ flibt; n?ie er f^flt
{|i tad — , ot)cr: fo tl^at er, fo mad;le efd). As in these
cases the verb „ha" takes the place of the reflective „he"
self, so it is used also in a few words for „he" outside,
body, t h dSu and dsu he, to wash one's self, dsu m. t
dbyGoogk
ha bem — halamo. 105
he, to wash s. b. or dSu ha in. k., th. s., d§u being
treated as an intrans. v. Comp. iro and 27V in Hebrew.
ha bem, inf. bemhamo, v. to give satisfaction's, bem.
ha due, inf. duehamo, v. to give consolation, to comfort;
s. due. Ad. th. s.
ha fo, inf. fohamg, v. to give condemnation, to condemn,
8. fo and bu fo, v.
ha gbe, V. inf. gbehamo, to give way; to allow, s. hi
hegbe, V.
ha hegbe, V. inf. hegbehamo, th. s.; to give power; to
empower, to authorize, s. hegbe (Ot. h6 kwan).
ha se, V. inf. sehamg, to put back, cast back; s. Isi ha
se, double v.
ha tsui, inf. tsuihamo, v. to give heart, = ha due, to com-
fort, to hearten, to encourage.
habahaba, adj. and adv. thin, light, meager; fe — , v. to
be or become thin etc.; thinly. Comp. helehele, adj.
th. s.
'habia, ahabia, n. a plant, the black round seed of which
is used for gold- weighing, s. mei, n.v
hadsi, plur. or dual noun, twins; the sing, ban seems not
to be used (comp. ata and nta in Otyi, and nta in Ga;
s. also Akwete and Akuete; Akweliand Akwokg); pr. n.
of two hills near the Saimountain : „The Twins."
h^hala si, inf. sih^halamo, v. to delay, to tarry, to linger;
s. lila §i, and comp. la, v.
hai, s. hayi, n.
hal! interj. to drive birds away; haihal! th. s.
halhai (s. the former), adv. in: hie m. k. haihal, to treat
s. body contemteously.
hala, inf. halamo, v. to choose, to elect, to select; to di-
vide, to judge {xQiveiVj comp. bu and kodso); to catch
in words, Mt. 22, 15., according to Hanson, to entangle;
comp. la, hahala (perh. only a kind of reduplication of
ha-la), lila etc. The h in this and the following word
approaches the german ch or strong guttural h. Ad.
hara, v.
hala mli, v. inf. mlihahamo, -to select etc.
hala, n. turtle, seaturtle. Comp. akpokpl6nto, n.
halanono, n. turtle-shell.
halawolo, pi. -wodsi, n. turtle egg.
halabata, harabata, ah., n. harmatan season.
halalo, n. elector, selector.
halamo, n. choosing, electing, selecting, ct]ioice etc, s. hala, r.
dbyGoogk
106 halamobi — hai.
halamobi, n. elected person, chosen person.
halitonpei, n. dan. a kind of chisel.
halo, n. coverer; plunderer, s. ha, v.
hdfo, n. giver, s. hd.
hamle, n. dan. hammer.
hamletSo, n. handle of a hammer.
hdmo, n. giving etc. s. h9, v. gift; s. k6, v. and n.
hftmo, n. = hie, the place or time before s. th. or s. b,
(Ot. kan), comp. esp. the salutation „hamo fe"? addres-
sed to people who went or came before one, lit. (How
is) „all before"? Answ. „h9imo ye dsogba" or „eye
dsogba" or ^hSmo dso!" it is well, it is quiet (Comp.
sei heni, sia etc.), adv. before; tso h§mo, to turn
before, go, come before etc. s. se; nyie hSmo, to walk
before, etc. Etso mihamo efe, he turned before me did
it, i. e. he did it before me.
h§mQbii, pi. n. people who went before, s. sebii, pi. n.
hSmo, n. (obscene), penis, s. nutso.
ban, adv. (Ot. th. s.) brightly, shiningly; s. kane, kan,
kankankan and hen.
handspa, n. dan. spade.
hankie, n, dan. towel, s. papam, n.
hand, n. pi. hanii, omev, covering.
hao, inf. haomo (Ot. ha and haw), v. to trouble; to be in
trouble; to disturb; to be disturbed; to care; to sorrow;
to be frightened; some times the verb is connected with
one or the other of the gram: subjects or objects be,
hie, mli, no, tsui etc. Comp. gba na.
hao he, v. inf. hehaomo, v. to be in trouble; to trouble
one's self.
hao mli, v. to stir up.
haolQ, n. troublesome person, disturber = nagbalo, n.
haomQ, n. troubling, disturbing; trouble disturbance, care,
fright.
haomgsane, n. troublesome news.
liase, n. ton, pipe (perh. europ. word).
hatso, n. torchtree, a large tree full of thorns; its wood
is used for torches (ha). •
hai, hayi (OU th. s.), n. forest; high grown bush, which
has not been cultivated for a long time; perh. from ha,
t6 cover; s. lakpa. The arable land is here not an open
field, but a forest, though sometimes thickly inhabited.
The farmer ciits a piece of it down every year,- bums
tiie wood and plants his com or yams without digging
dbyGoogk
he — he - yc. lOT
up the stumps or turning up the ground betMreen, the
former; the power of production is so great, that the
land, manured as it is by the ashes, gields about four
or five good harvests, of corn it produces two in one
year. As soon as the produce gets too small, which
is the case in two — four years, there being no great
change in the kinds they grow the land is left to be-
come bush again and new bush is cut. It is natural
that a farmer wants a large piece of land to get his
liveUhood, in consequence of such an unreasonable far-
ming. Every kind of such fallowbush has its peculiar
name according to its age or bight; s. lakpa, n. lakpa-
tSa, n.; ko, n.
he, V. inf. hemo (Ot. gye), to take, to receive to buy;
to accept; to contain, to sustain. Comp. also the verbs:
here, hie, hd, kg, ko, wo etc. The verb is especially
used of taking with the hand from the hands of s. b.
(s. hie, to have or bear in the hand), f. i. he n. k. ye
m. k. den, to take, receive, accept, buy s. th. from (the
hand of) s. b.; but he m. k. noko, to take some thing
from s. b. by power, to punish him, amehele sika, they
took money from him (against his will, {te na^men ii)m
®clb ab); therefore: to extort, to fltBct; combined with
hd, to sell, it has the signification, to cost, as: Aho wo
ahe kpanma, they sell a fowl they buy (for) 10 strings,
i. e. A fowl is sold (or baught), or costs 10 strings.
As aux. V. = to begin; f. i. §ia ne mlhe afite, this
house begins or is about to spoil; sometimes with
infin., f. i. ehe hfimo, it wants tilting; s. tao, v.
he hekpa, v. to take usury, interest; which is not less
than 50 — 100 per cent among the natives and even far
more according to circumstances.
he ebo, v. to receive poison, to be poisoned.
he m. k. no, v. to receive one?
he m. k. to, v. th. s.
he §i, V. iof. sihemo, to settle in a place.
he - ye, double verb, inf. hemo ke yeli, irreg. heyeli, lit.
to take (and) eat (or use, own etc., s. ye), to believe;
mlhe noko mlye, 1 heUeve s. th., mahele maye, 1 will
believe him; ehe end eye, lit. he beheved his palaver,
i. e. him, or in him; imperat. hemo oye or he oye! be-
lieve; pi. nyehea nyeyeal believe (ye)! Comp. gye-di,
in Otyi; gba - gbo in Aku or Yoruba. Pers. n. beyeli-
lo, n. (irregular) beUever. Comp. he ye, v. to be tick
d by Google
108 he.
(with he as gram, subj.) and ye he, v. inf. heyeli (with
he as gram, obj.) to be free,
he, n. without pi. (Ot. hii or hd) outside, exterior;
body, member (s. bend), self; place; state, station;
s. also hewo; adverbially used: outside, about, at, on,
ofT etc. This very frequently and multifariously employed
word is one of the nouns, employed as formwords or
postpositions s. § 23—29, § 34. 35., like: da, daft, de,
den, hie mli, na, no, se, si etc. See esp. § 29. It
defines the relation of locality as the outside, the ex-
terior, the body (contrary „mli") and as such the pre-
positions: At, about, of, on etc. German: 9ln, um, »on,
auf, wegcn, bet, be — , an — , ju— in verbs, as also the
adverbs: about, at, on etc. can be compared but must
not be confounded with it. Connected with this it ex-
presses the reflexive relation s. § 34 (self). It takes
either the place of the (grammatical) subject or object
of the verb it is combined with, as the combinations will
show, though the space will allow only a part of them
to be mentioned, the others will then easily be under-
stood or found under their respective verbs; the most
common are: ba he, v. inf. heba, to come at (jufommen);
ba he (or hewo,fs. this), v. inf. hebamo; to cut s. th.
round about (be^auen); be he, to quarrel about, inf. he-
bemo; hi he, v. a. to ask about bo he, v. to reduplicate
()?ert)op!))eIn), inf. hebo; bo he abora, s. ahora, v. to cast
blame on one's self; bu he, v. to watch about, to respect
one's self; hebu; da he, v. to vie for, hedamo dg he, v.
to be hot for or about a thing to love; dso he, v. to
rest; hedSo, hedsole and hedsomo, s. dso; dsu he, v.
to wash (abwafcben), hed§Q; fl he, v. to defend; hefa-
mo; fata he, v. a. to join; fo he, v. to cut one's self;
hefo; fo he, v. to weep about or for (bcweinen, ct*
weinen), inf. hefomo; fo he, v. to wet, to wash (be^
ne^en), hefomo; fd he, v. to leave ofT (ablaffen), hefd-
mo; fu he, v. to smell at, hefii; fa he, to repent; gbe
he, V. to kill one'sself, hegbe, hegb^le; gbu he, v. to
perforate, hegbo; ha he, v. to cover (be beef en), to cover
one's self; heha; ha he, v. to give for, to give one's
self; hehamo; hd he, v. to sell one's self, hehdmo; ho
he, to pass over (j>orbei^, Doruberge^en); hu he, v.
to till, dig about (be^acfen); ka he, v. to lie at, to move,
to hve; to continue (an^aUen^ aniiegeu) hekamo; la he, v.
\o hang at (anf^augen); le he, v. to know about; Iq he,
dbyGoogk
he bo — he fo. 10ft
to live by,' to subsist (fl^ ernfi()te!t); li he, to mock, to
sneer at (befp6tte!n); ma he, to build about; nd he, to
fight about; nu he, lo hear about, to feel; sa he, to
prepare one's self; §a he, to whitewash; se he gbeye, v.
to fear for one'sself, to fear; se he, to reach, to arrive;
to shave; si he, to knock at; ta he, to touch, to sit
about, te he, lo conceal one's self; till he, to scratch
. at or about; to he, v. to compare; to answer, corap.
here no, v.; t§i he, to move one's self; ts6 he, v. to
turn one's self; tsu he, to cleanse, sanctify; wa he, to
pain; wo he no, to lift one's self up, to be proud; wo
he no, V. to begin again; wo he, to watch about (bc^
iracbcn); wu he, to make war about, to be frequent,
common; ya he, v. to go near, at (binjuj^eben), ye he,
to eat, enjoy one's self, i. e. to be free, inf. heyeli; ye
he, to be about; ye n. k. he niilsumg, v. to want; yo
he, V. to acknowledge one's self; etc. etc. By these
examples the many other combinations of „he^* with verbs
(as their gramm. obj.) will easily be found out and also
the nominal combinations be formed; to mention them
all would lead too far. As gram. subj. compare it in
the following verbs:
he bo, V. n. to be double, inf. hebo.
he bo bo, V. to interfere; to meddle with (unnecessarily).
he do, V. n. to be hot (outside or round about), to be
heated; to be dear lo, f. i. ehe mldomi, he is dear to
me; inf. hedo.
he dso, V. n. to be cool, quiet, peaceable, tame, s. dso,
inf. hedsO, hedsole; he dso m. k. also used = hewo-
dsian dso, v.; mihe dsgm', I am at ease, happy.
he ds6, V. n. , and .
he ds6 he, v. n. to get cold, einc Oaiifebaut bcfommcn;
to be amazed, astounded (stronger than hie fe ya, fe yS,
na kpe etc.), inf. hedsomo.
he dsra, v. n. to be difficult; painful; important; hedsramQ.
he fe m. k. nii, and
he fe m. k. uii, v. to be touched, lo feel compassion; to
be in trouble; == he hfa m. k. v.
he fe oy^, v. n. to be or act quickly; to be in a hurry,
s. oy^, fe — , oy^femo.
he fi, V. to be in straits.
he fl^, V. to feel a tikling sensation.
he fo, V. n. to be wet, inf. hefgrno; comp. (q he, v.
dbyGoogk
110 he fil — he ye.
he to, V. n. to be swollen or to swell, to slink; int h<
tomo, hefO.
he gbla, v. to be rent,
he guQ gbo, V. n. to be despised, s. gbe he guo; mibi
guo egbo kwra; 1 am entirely despised; inf. heguogbele
he hia m. k., v. inf. hehtamo, to be troubled, tired,
he ka, V. n. to be urfcovered, exposed; to be alive, to move;
to be free or at liberty to move; to have leizure, s. n£
dekS; comp. kS, hie k9 etc., inf. hek^mo.
he k6mQ m. k., v. n. lit. the body biles (s. Germ. 6ci§en),
to itch; mihe kdmomi, my skin itches me.,
he kpo, pi. — kplo, V. to crack, to loose the skin, bark etc.
he kpete he, v. to adhere to, inf. hekpetemo.
he kpokpo, v. n. to shake to tremble (of fear etc.), inf.
hekpokpomo.
he lLumo (s. ku), v. n. to feel broken all over, inf. he-
kuomo; comp. hewodsian kumo, v.
he lo gbe!, v. to get the itch; s. lo, v. and gbef, n.
he sa, V. n. to be bodily fit or ripe, inf. hesale; s. sa.
he ta, V. n. lit. the body is done, to be well again, healed;
to be clean from a sickness of the skin; s. t5. Comp.
Ot. h6 sa.
he tse, V. n. to be clean (bodily and spiritually), to be
holy, inf. hetsemo; comp. tsu he, v. and hetsumo, n.;
Ad. he tso, v. th. s.
he tse m. k. v. a. to loathe, to hate, to detest s. b.; inf.
het§emo; s. ts^, v.
he wa, V. n. to be strong, sound, well; to be tough; ebe
wa tamo ba, he is as tough as a crocodile; to be hard;
ehe wa tamo te, he is as hard as a stone; inf. hewale;
comp. wa, hie wa, na wa, tsui wa, yi wa etc.
he wa he, v. n. to feel pain; mihe wa mihe, I feel pain
in or over my body, s. wa he and comp. hewod§iaA va
he; yitso wa he, v. etc.
he wo fo, V. to be fat.
he wo la, v. n. to be hot, feverish; to be greedy;
frafra, he is very greedy,
he wo mudsi, v. to be dirty,
he ye, inf. heye, -yeli, v. n. (lit. the body eats, laboore),
to be sick; mihe mlye, I am sick; ehe aye, he will gel
sick; inf. heyeli, but scarcely used; s. hela; ye he and
heye, v.
he ye, v., s. ye, v. to be somewhere etc.
dbyGoogk
he ye nii — hedSolo- 111
he ye nii, neg. he be nii, v. to be fortunate; - - kolol^,
in raising cattle; mihe ye k^nii, I am fortunate in
getting presents etc.
he yi, v. to be full (all about),
'he, ehg, adj. new; Ad. th. s.
he and hg s. after he — . Words being combined with
the n«un he and not to be found under the following
must be sought for without he.
he-ahorabo, n. self-blaming; s. bo he ahora, v.
he-atade, n. dress, just on the body,
heba, n. coming at or about some thing; s. ba he, v.
heb9, and
hebfimg, n. cutting off around s. tb., s. bS he, v.
hebe, II. quarrel about s. th.; tao — , v. to seek strife;
fe — , V. to contend.
hebelQ, n. quarrelsome person (about s. th.) s. be he, v.
hebg, n. pinching, pressing round about; binding up of a
stick-wall or fence; pi. heblemo-
hebimo, n. asking, questioning about s. th. (Stad^ftage) ; s.
hi he, Y.
heblemo, n. stretching or binding about, s. ble, v.
heblamo, n. th. s.
heblomo, n. cry or quarrel about s. th.
hebo, n. cover, sheath; case; f. i. sune-hebo, pillow case,
hebo, n. reduplication, addition, joining of one thing to
an other, multiplication; s. bo he, v.
hebolftmo, n. surrounding; fr. bole he, v.
hebu, n. watching about s. th. (S3en)a(|iung); estimation etc.
s. bu he, v.; self-esteem,
hebulo, n. watch, sentinel,
hedamo, n. betting for; vying for, emulation.
hedalQ, n. emulator,
hedamomo, hedamg, n. standing about,
hedo, n. outward heat; zeal for s. th.; love; s. sumo,
V. and n.
hedolo, n. lover, s. suolo, n.
hedgmo, pi. -mei, n. beloved person,
hedgadsemo, n. straightening about s. th.; — of one's self.
hedsO, n. dancing about.
hedSo, n. rest; = hedSole; peace.
hedSole, th. s.; s. he dsb, v.
hedsolo, n. resting person, peaceful person, peacemaker;
s. he dsQ and dsQ he, v.
dbyGoogk
Ill hedSomo — hefom^.
hedSotno, n. resting, rest-giving, taming, appeacing, peac
making; fr. dso he, v.
hedsd, n. laziness; fe — , v. to be lazy,
hedsafelo, n. lazy person = hedlolo.
hedsoferao, n. laziness,
hedsolo, n. = hedSofelo; lazy person,
hedsomo, n. astounding, amazement; s. he ds6 he an
romp, yafemo, nakpe, n.
hedsra, n. price; wo — , v. to price s. th.
hedsramo, n. difficulty, pain, imporlance; s. he dsra, v,
Adn. hedfam.
hedSraraowo, n. paining, troubling,
hedsrawo, n. pricing, offering for sale,
hedsrawolo, n. a person offering s. th. for sale.
hedsQ, n. washing (all over the body), bathing at home
s. dsu he, V. and comp. wu, v., fo, v. and dsale, v.
hedsQbe, n. washing- or bathing-time,
hedsulo, n. person washing another,
hedumo, n. planting, sowing about; stabbing, piercing one's
self, s. dn, v.
heftlo, n. defender, adTOcate.
hefSmo, n. defence, s. (Sl he, v.
hef^mowiemo, n. defending speech.
hefalalQ, n. joiner, partner, companion; helper, assistant,
hefatamo, n. joining; partnership; companionship; help,
assistance, s. fata he and comp. kpete he, ke m. k. bo;
ye-bua m. k. v. -
hefeo, n. outward beauty,
hefeoyelo, n. mocker.
hefeoyeli, n. mocking, s. ye he feo; comp. heguogb^.
hefeoyelilo, n. = hefeoyelo.
hef^he, hefiahe, hepiahe, adv. every-where, comp. fe, fifi;
Ad. hetfabe, hetsohe, n.
hefi, n. self-binding, girding,
henmo, n. strengthening; fi he, v.
hefitemo, n. self-spoiling,
hefo, and
hefomo, n. cutting of one's self; weeping for — ; s. foaad |
fo he, V. j
hefolo, niiahefolo, n. washer-man, -woman,
hefomo, n. washing (of face, hands, cloth, s. dsu), s. fo
he, V.
hefomoQd, pi. -nil, any thing used for washing,
'hefomo, ehefomo, n. new birth.
dbyGoogk
hefdmo — hehlemo. 113
hefomo, n. leaving off; s. fo he, v.
hefusemo, n. spilling, pouring about.
hefu, n. smelling at; s. fu he, v.; smell.
hefumo, n. swelling all over fr. he fu, v.
hefiimo, n. repentance, s. fa he, v.
hegbd, hegbale ; hegblamo etc. comp. gba, v. and gbla, v.
hegblamo, n. division about s. b.; breaking off; fr. gbla he, v.
hegbe, n. suicide, s. gbe he, v.
hegbe, n. place, s. also gbehe.
hegbe, n. way to s. th., access; allowance; liberty; privir
lege, right (SoKmacS^t, i^ovaia); duty.
hegbehdlOy n. person giving allowance,
hegbehamo, n. way -giving; allowance; S3et?oIIma4)tiguiig;
fr. ha hegbe, v.
hegbelo, n. person killing himself ; ©elbflmJrber; fir. gbe he, v.
hegbeyewO, n. frightening, threatening; s. wo he gbeyS, v,
hegbeyewolo, n. threatening person,
hegbfmo, n. drying (o«lside).
hegbomo, pi. -mei, n. person about one, neighi)our, s. na-
nyo; nanyo-gbomo, n.
hegbomo, n. warming of one's self,
hegbole and hegbodsomo, n. bodily weakness, infirmity (of
age etc.); palsy; s. gbo and gbod§o, v.
hegbo, n* planing; s. gbo, v.
hegba, n. perforation.
heguogbe, n. mocking, s. gbe he gug, v.; self-despite.
heguQgb^le, n. th. s., and despisedness; despite, fr. he guo
gbo, V.
heguQgbelo, n. mocker,
heguggbo, n. despisedness, fr. he guQ gbo, v.
heha, n. covering, s, ha he and he ha, y.
hehamama, n. cloth for covering,
hehand, pi. -nii, n. covering, cloth; shield = tS^ii, n.
hehawolo, n. leather-cover,
hehamo, n. giving of one's self; s. ha he, v.
hehalamo, n. choosing, selecting; s. hala, v.
hehe, v. to spread (of a rumour), inf. hehemo; comp.
here, v. both from he, v., and dSedSe, v.
hehemo, n. spreading of a rumour; buying of one*s self,
s. he, V.
hehfamo, n. uneasiness, trouble, fir. he hia, v.
hehlemo, n. liberty, s. hie he and comp. ye he, he kl, y.
etc.; independence.
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab* 8
dbyGoogk
lU hehile — heli.
hehlle, D. outward goodness, s. hi y. to ))e good; self-
abhorrence, 8. hi, V. to abhor,
heho, n. passing, s. ho he, v.; out-doing =:= naho, n.
hehdlO) n. person selling himself,
hehomo, n. selling of one's self, s. hd he, v.
hehosomo, n. shaking, s. hoso, v.
hehulo, n. tiller, v.
hehumo, n. tilling about s. th.; s. hu he, v.
heka, n. self-trial; self-examination, fr. ka he, v.
hckamo, n. movement, liberty, life; s. he kS( and comp'.
hiekSmo; continuing, continuance, s. k9 he, v.
heke, n. giving away of one'sself, s. kg he, v.
hekele, n. bodily length, stature,
hekemg, n. sighing about s. th.
hekemo, n. saying about s. th.
heko (s. he, place and ko, one, a, an), adv. somewhere,
some place,
hekoheko, adv. somewhere with, negative voice, nowhere,
hekd, s. hlek6, hlko, n.
hekomo, n. itching of the skin.
hekpg, n. circumition, going round; dragging off; s. kpa, v.
hekpa, n. interest, use-money (3in^); s. kpa, n.
hekpS, n. string about s. th.
hekpamo, n. self-anointing, s. kpa he, v.; paying interest,
fr. kpa he, v.; turning one's self,
hekpetelo, n. adherer,
hekpetemo, n. adherence, attachment; joining, s. kpete he
and he kpete he, v.
hekpokpomo, n. shaking (by fear, cold), trembling (Ot.
hopopo).
hekpokemo, n, plucking off; hurt, damage; s. kpoke; he
kpoke, V.
hekpomo, n. self-redemption; s. kp6, v.
hekpomo, n. breaking off of the bark of a tree the skin etc.
spoiling; kpo (he), v.
hekpromo or hekplomo, n. th. s.
hekuomo, n. = hegbodsomo, bodily infirmity, brokenness;
palsy; pride; s. he ktimo, v.
hekukudsi, pi. n. pieces from s. th.
hela, n. (bodily fire), sickness; Ad. hio, n.; hela ye, v. to
be sick; hela nyemi, = mihe miye, I am sick,
hela nye m. k., — d6A m. k., v. to be suffering by sickness,
hel^, n. relative, Slut^toettranbtet; blood in the body; s.
helo, n. 7
dbyGoogk
helatSalo — hcnL 115
helaifSalo, n. physician.
helatSamg, n. hetling of a sickness, s. tSa, v.
helatse» pi. -mei, n. sick person.
heladseniQ, n. loss of one*s self; s. ladSe he, v.
helakalo, n. self-deceiver.
helakamo, n. self-slilling; self-deceit; s. laka, v.
hela, n. helalame, and
helamo, n. singing, dreaming, hanging about s. th.
helatamo, n. seaming, s. lata, v.
hel6, n. knowledge about s.th., s. lehe, v. ; self-knowledge.
hele, V. s. here, v.
hele, n. subsistenze, living; s. le.
helimo, n. self-mocking, s. li, v.
helo, n. flesh (about the body) only used of men, sel-
dom of animals (Ot. honam); body; s. gbomotSo; pri-
vate parts as in Hebrew; ke helo fe yakayakanii, v. to
commit self-polution. Comp. also hewolo, hewodsian;
and lo and wolo, n.
helo-sedi, n. lust of the flesh.
helo-taomo, n. th. s.
helo, n. buyer, taker.
helogorao, n., or
helokgmQ, n. wandering about; s. logo, loko, loko he, —
si, V.
helQkomQgbe, n. circuitous road; Umiveg.
helomomo, helomo, n. self-cursing; s. lomo, v.
helonemo, n. dislocation; s. lone, v.
hem§, n. building about, plastering; s. mS, v.
hemo, pi. -mei, n. sweet-heart; concubine.
kemo, n. buying, taking, s. he, v.
hemo ke yeli, n. faith, fr. he-ye, v. to believe; s. heyeli, n.
hemonii, pi. n. prize, cost; s. dsra, n. na, n. yinii, n.
heft, adj. and adv. = haft, bright, clear; -ly, -ly.
hena, n. s. hiena, hina, forehead.
henamo, n. getting of one's self (s. na, mf. namo, Ot. and
Ad. nya, v.), richness; pride.
bene, Ad. = heni, pron. and conj. where.
heni, adverb, pron. and conj. where (= he n\) s. § 34
and Table IV. and V.; heni midse le, nyelee, ni heni
miyaa le hu nyelee, you know neither where 1 came
from nor where I go to. Generally „le" concludes the
sentences formed by heni, comp. § 49, 50 and the
words: beni, when; boni, how; noni, what; moni, who
etc. A peculiar use of heni is to be mentioned: if
8*
dbyGoogk
116 henii — here SiSi.
some body comes from a journey, he is saluted: „Heni
odse?" or: Heni od§en? Lit. (How k it) „ where thou
comest from?" Answ. „Bled!" etc. etc. S. ble6.
henii, pi. n. of heno, n. members; deserts, custom etc.
henfitsumg, n. need, want, use; miye heniitsumo, I want it.
hen6, pi. henii, n. kind, species; form, shape; deserts (93er*
l)ienfl), habit, custom; case, lot, luck etc. limb, member,
pi. furniture.
hQpQ or he no, n. s. he, n. and no, n. upon or on one's
self.
henoho, n. = heho, jpassing; passover, s. ho he ng, v.
to pass over.
hendmo, n. fight, struggle about s. th.
henowO and henow6mo, n. lifting up; exaltation, glory,
honour; pride; from wo he no; comp. also wO* hewo,
yidsiemo, anumnyam, n. Ad. henowom, n.
henowd-atade, n. proud attire.
henowolo, n. one who lifts up; one who lifts himself up,
who is lifted up, exalted (accord, to Hanson for ^^neya^'
Mt. 20, 25.
henomo, n. sweetness, agreeableness ; s. n6, v.
hentl and henumo, n. feeling, fr. nu he, v.
henu, n. water about or at s. th.
henunS, pi. -nii, n. nerve? s. % n.
henyelo, n. hater, enemy; = hetSelo, n, hikolg n.; belo, n.
henyi, and
henyemo, n. hatred; s. nye, hetSemo, hike, bei, n.
henyiemo, n. walking about; Uml^erge^en, — laufen.
here, v. a., inf. heremg, to exept (Ot ^ye), corrobora-
tion of he, comp. dse, d§ere, tse, tsere etc. to take up
or out (= dsie), to save; to receive; to be kindled, to
catch fire; to strike root, anroadtfen; to help, to take
s. body's load or work for a while.
here m. k. atu, v. a. to embrace s. b. (s. atQ), to receive
s. b. with joy; inf. atoheremo; s. Ot. gye atu.
here m. k. hieme, v. a. to receive s. b. joyful, s. hieme;
hiemeheremo.
here m. k. hie, v. to esteem s. body's face.
here no, Ot. gye so, v. a. to take up the word, to an-
swer, if called by name; to take the word; to begin to
speak (Hebr. roy); comp. to he, v. inf. noheremo; Ad.
he no, V.
here SiSi, v. to strike root in the ground.
dbyGoogk
here wala — hetgS. 117
here wala (Ot. gye ftkwa) and here yi wala, v. a. to sav^
or spare one's life; to save, to preserve, to keep safe,
s. na wala, yi na wala; inf. walaheremg, yiwalaheremo;
prs. n. — herelg.
herelo, n. receiver, saver, saviour,
heremo, n. accepting, receiving; acceptation, reception;
salvation, s. d§iemo and the preceding word,
heremonile, n. saving wisdom.
hereniQsane, n. history of salvation,
hereft, adj. warm, hotffe — , v. to bB warm, hot.
hesale, n. bodily fitness, maturity, s. he sa, v.; comp.
hie sa, v.
hesalo, n. preparer.
hesamQ, n. preparation fr. sa he, v.
hesuomo, n. self-love; s. sumo he, v.
hesuolQ, n. self-lover,
hesusumo, n. meditation; 9la^benfen.
heSamQ, n. white-washing.
heSatamo, n. dragging about,
hese, n. arrival; shaving one's self,
hegiba, n. humiliating; humiliation; s. ba he §i, v.
hesibalQ, n. humble person,
hesimo, n. knocking at (^n^ogen); (obscene: self-pollution,
onany, s. fe helo yakayakanii) ; fr. §i he, v.
he§i§imj), n. self-deception fr. SiSi he, v.
beta, and
hetale, n. recovering, s. he tS.
beta, pi. hetramo, n. touching,
hetemo, n. concealing; s. te he; concealing one's self,
hetemo, n. stumbling; s. te he, v.
hetitimo, n. scratching, s. tit! he, v.
heto, n. answer; comparision, s. to he.
hetramo, n. touching; sitting about fr. ta he, pi. tra he.
hetselQ, n. pure, holy person.
het§emo, n. movement, activity, purity; holiness; s. kroA-
kroii and hetsumo; fr. he tse, v.
hetSSmg, n. loathing; s. he ts^, v. a.; hatred.
hetsSIO, n. enemy; hater.
hetSakemQ, n. self-change; change; conversion; change of
dress.
het§imo, n. movement; fr. tsi he, v.
hetsi, n. closing up; s. t§i, v.
heifio, n. iliumination; 9eUu(i^tung; fr. USo he^ v.
dbyGoogk
118 helSoi — hewolo.
hetSoiy pi. or collect, d. hairs about the body of men and
aoimaU; s. tdoi, ^i^qU dahet§oi etc.
heti^oial§e, n. hairy person; hairy creature.
'helSoialade, n. hairy dress.
het^dmo, n. turning of one's self; self- show; ostentation,
pride; conversion; s. t§d he, t. doctrine about s. th.
het^ulo, n. purifier; sanctifier.
hetSumo, n. purificatiou; sanctification, fr. tsu he; coaip.
het^emo; wiping, fr. tsumo he, v.; business about s. th.;
fr. tsu he, v.
hewa, and
hew ale, n. strength, power; soundness, health; hardness;
violence; fr. he wa, v. n.; pain, fr. wa he, v. a.; wo
m. k. hewale, v. a. to strengthen s. b. =: wadSemo; inf.
hewalewo; ye hewale, v. n. to have power, be strong.
hewalenand ko, s. th. done by power.
hewale-niitsumo, n. powerful deed.
hewalesane, n. matter of power.
hewalewo, n. strengthening; corroboration; encouraging;
s. tSuihSmo, n. th. s.
hewalewolo, n. corroborator.
hewalo, n. strong, powerful person (©ewaltiger, @tarfer);
violent person.
hewad§emo, n. = hewalewO, n. self-strengthening.
hewielo, n. slanderer; speaker about s. th.
hewiemQ, n. speaking about s. th.; slandering, fr. wie he, v.
hewo, n. self-exaltation, pride; honour etc. s. wo he; wo
he no, V. henowomo, v.
hewodsian, n. s. hewolo, n.
hewomo, n. th. s., s. henowomo, n.
hewolg, n. proud, highminded person.
hewo, hewomo, n. watching; s. wq he, v.
hewolg, n. watchman, s. wo he, v. and comp. won, wo-
lonM>, n.
hewo, old noun =: self, sake etc., but now only used as
a postposition = he: about, around, for — sake, through,
by etc. oba mihewo thou earnest for my sake; some-
times connected with whole sentences taken as one no-
tion or word, as: Edsake ebaa mind hewo le mite end,
because he did not come to me, therefore 1 went, to him.
Comp. also nohewo, mehewo, etc. Ot. uti; Ad. he, n.
hewou = hewo ni, hewo d§i.
hewolo, pi. hewodsi (sometimes =: hewulo, hewudsi), b.
the flesh (s. helo) or skin (8« wpio) about tha bod;;
dbyGoogk
hewii — heAfmQnd. 11&
flesh, skin, body etc. often used promiseue ^ith he,
helo and in the same combination (s. Ot. hdnam); he-
wodsian = hewod^i amli, the body; hewod§ian d§o, v.
to be discouraged, struck with horror, to get cold by a
horrible appearance; — dSo m. k., v. to ease, to give
ease, etc.; hewodsian fS, lit. the livhole of the inside of
the skin, the \vhole body; mihewodSiah fg ekDmo, my
body is quite broken, sick, tired; ehewodsian f^ wa ehe, .
all his body pains him; hewodSiau fg fe doko, v. n. to
be weak (s. doko); hewodSiaii fe wa he, v. = he wa
he, V. to have pain all over the body.
hewQ, n. warring, fighting about s. th.
heyeli, n. liberty, fr. ye he, v. to be free; comp. hehiemo,
th. s.; comp. also odehe, n. fa, adj.
heyeli and heye, n. (seldom used) sickness = hela, fr. he
ye, V. to be sick; Ad. hlo, n. •
heyeli, n. (irregular formation = hemo ke yeli from the
double verb he — ye, to believe), belief, faith; Ad. hem
ke yem, n.
heyelitsomo, n. doctrine of faith.
hcyd, pi. -yci, n. a girl or womaa- chosen by s. b. for a
wife, intended wife, person who fits s. b. for a wife;
c^mp. hemo, n. Siyeri, n. M, n.
heyomo, n. perceiving, perception, animadvertion ; fr. yo
he, V.
heyom. Ad. n. th. s.
he, pi. hele, v. to catch? to catch fish with a net from
the shore; comp. ya wuo, f6 ya, sa lo, v. etc. inf. h^,
helemo; to knock against s. th., see he Si; ke n. k. he
heko, to knock with s. th. against some place. Ad. th. s.
he he, V. to knock one's self against s. th.
he si, V. n. and a«, inf. §ih^, to fall down with vehemence;
to throw down with vehemence (ntebcrflflrgen, v. n. and
a.); comp. lu U, tfa si, gbe si, nyo U etc. OyiAe §il
horrible curse.
h€ — , s. hie — and hi — . Ad. th. s. f.i. hSna = hiena,
forehead, etc.
h§, V. to attack,
he, D* loins; fi he, to gird the loins; inf. hefi, heflmo;
s. mliten, n.
he = y^» adv. hotty (of pepper etc.) eSftmi h^.
hef!, hefimo, n. girding (of the loins); comp. mla he, fi
ndit^ V. Ad. mlemftm, th. s.
bfifingadi n. girdle; hefind, %K $^
dbyGoogk
120 hshe — hi.
hfihe, inf. -mo, v. a. to adorn, = wula, f. i. a child; to
outfit, f. i. a canoe, vessel.
hehe, V. inf. hehemo, to bloom, prosper (used of men);
gbeke ne heheo, this child is bloommg; fe hehghe, th. s.
hehehe, adj. and adv. blooming, bloomingly, s. hehe, v.
hele, V. to catch, s. he; to shrink, to start back, corrobo-
ration of be; comp. he, v. here, v.; kpokpo; sere, v.
inf. helemg.
hele he, v. = he he, v.
hele si, inf. sihelemo, v. to shrink; to start etc. (jufam^
menfabrcn).
hele m. k., v. a. to knock against s. b., to knock down,
to gore; to be knocked etc. pi. of he, v.
helehele and herehere, adj. and adv. thin, light, little tic.
fe — , V. to be thin etc. thinly, lightly etc. = haba-
haba, adj.
hele, n. and
helemg, n. catching (fish, s. he); knocking; goring; collision.
helemo, n. shrinking, starting, fr. hele, v. .
helo, n. fisherman; s. wolenyo; fr. he, v.
hefi, adj. and adv. very clear, bright; used both of light
and sound, and corroborating verbs expressing such, as:
tso hen, to shine brightly; gbe hen, to sound clearly;
toiian fe hei, the ears ring (Die O^ren lauten); Grerm.
l^elle. Comp. he, the root of this word, also han,
kan, kane (in Otyi and G§[).
hena, s. hiena, n. forehead.
here, here si etc.; s. hele.
hete, s. hiete, n. clearness; covetousness; civiKzation; civi-
lity.
h^tso, s. hietso; face, forehead; etc.
herefi, adj. and adv. = heft.
henwale, n. strength of loins; the loins are considered as
the ^at ef strength.
hi, V. inf. hile (Ad. to sit); to remain, to keep; to dwell
(Comp. ta and te, v. in Ot. and ta, v. in G5); to be, to
behave; to abstain from, f. i. hi nmSi, to abstain from
food, \o fast (Ot. di buada, and GSl ye buada); to abhor,
detest, esp. religiously (comp. kyi in Otyi); to consider
8. th. religiously unclean; won ne hio wo, this fetish ab-
hors fowl; to hate; connected with the first signification :
to be good (Ot. ye, comp. kpakpa, adj.), to be fit, to
suffice, to be right, to better (fluten, bejfecn), ehi ke mba,
it is getting better (of a sicluiess); etc. EM hami ak^
dbyGoogk
M m.lL. deik — 'hiabd. 121
miyaa, it is good for me to go; mli hi, to be inwardly
good, to be kiod, mild etc. inf. mlihile. This verb is
Tery frequently and multifariously used, especially also
in combinations, f. i. hie hi he no, v. to be circumspect,
to take care (lit. the face remains on the self); mihie
bio mihe no, I take care for myself, comp. kwe ni abi,
th. s., = sole he; hi m. k., inf. himo, to backbite s. b.
= hie m. k.; hi with the inf. of an other verb is =:
to continue (anl^alten), hi bimo he, to continue to ask
(but hi bimo ; to be good to ask) ; etc. Comp. also
hie, V. Ad. hi, v. and hg, v.
hi m. k. den, v. to remain in one's power.
hi he no (s. hie hi he no), v. a. to take care for; inf.
henohlle.
hi m. k. hie, v. to remain before; to abhor onefs face).
hi ke wula si, double v., to be good and come to the
ground, i. e. to be perfect; inf. bile ke siwulamo.
hi iaaSi, inf. nmdhlle, v. to fast; s. ye buada, th. s.
hi no 9 inf. nohile, v. to remain, abide upon s. th.
hi si, V. n. to remain, to dwell, to live (si being the gram.
Obj., which can be let away, if «n other obj. of loca-
lity takes its place, or both must have a verb, f. i. hi
t^un, to remain in the room; hi si ye tsun, th. s. comp.
ta §i yo tsun, to sit down [being] in the room, and ta
tSun, to sit in the room); inf. sihile.
hi sisi, V. to remain on the ground; to remain down.
hi, irreg. pi. of nO, n. man, male. Comp. the Adn. pi.
form hi, in Ga i. Besides hi also himei is used.
'hi, ahi, n. boasting against, mocking detestation; only oc-
curring in the phrase: ye moko ahi (= hi m. k., v. to
detest one, to hold one in abhorrence?);- inf. ahiyeli.
Comp. ye he feo, gbe he guo, etc. also: to mock at
one, to boast against one.
hia (Ot. hyia), v. n. inf. hiamo, to be poor, needy; to be
in need of; v. imp. with the logical subj. as an Obj.,
to want; to distress; ehlami, ake — I want that — , it
is necessary for me that; comp. fi; sika ehiami, I want
money » 1 am in distress for money, comp. fe, ^.; he
hia m. k., V. to be in perplexity; to want pasttime;
Sangemcile l)ahtn; = hie tse, v.
*hia, ohla (Ot. th. s.), n. poverty, need, distress, want;
,»obia mid§ra,'* prv. „poverty is hard!*' ohia hia m. k., v.
to be in poverty; ohia ehiami, I am in poverty.
'Uabe, n. time of need.
dbyGoogk
122 'MadSeA — hie m. k. nydmo.
'bUdS«A, n. state of poverty; s. dSe, n.
'hiafo, ofalafo (Ot. obXani, pi ahlafo), n. ber 9trme; poor
man. „OhIafo be nanyo," prv. „the poor has no friend!**
hiahia, adj. and adv. clean; cleanly: tight, neat; neatly.
hi^ol interj. be it so! Amen! especially religiously used in
responding to the prayers of fetish-priests; perh. from
hi, V. to be good; to remain.
httw, irreg. ph hlebii, h6bii, n. single cowry; s. trema;
kpS, tSakpo etc. The word is very probable originally
the diminutive h!eo, little face, pi. hlebii, h^bii corrupted
„^bii**. It is sometimes mockingly put in apposition to
proper names, as „Tete hiaw**, to indicate covetousness
in small matters, trifles, as one cowry.
'hlayeli, n. suffering by poverty; fr. ye oh!a, v.
hie, V. a., inf. Memo, to carry, to hold in the hand,
to handle, to use, comp. md; to hold fast, to have (Ot.
kura); to continue = hi, kS he, hie mli; to bear, to
endure etc. to give into one's hand for carrying; comp.
also he, v. The word can not be used for carrying on
the head, s. t^re, or on the shoulders, s. tfa kdA; or
of heavy burdens, • wo, or of cloth, s. wo or bu; but
especially of light things which one can hold in the
hand. Comp. especially the following uses of the word:
Amebic blgmQ, they cried continuaUy; hela hie m. k.,
sickness has taken hold of s. b.; hela hiemi ahCi, I was
a long time sick; s. he ye; hie moko, v. to carry one
(sc. in one's mouth), to slander him = wie he (comp.
^audlragen''). Ad. h«, v. th. s.
hie m. k. den, v. to give into one's hand.
hie bebobo, — dododo, v. to treat carefully, kindly.
hie foi, V. to run (s.foi, dSo foi, §a foi; wo foi), inf. fbi-
hlemo. Ad. hg fo, v.
hie he, v, to hold one's self, i. e. to be free; inf. hehle-
mft( = ye he, v.
hie ho, V. lit. to carry an embryo; to be with child; to
be with young one's; comp. ho; Ad hQ, na musu; Inf.
hohlemQ.
hie lalfr or lamo, v. to use to sing; to continue to sing.
hie mli, v. inf. ndihlemo, to hold fast; s. md mli; to use
repeatedly.
hie m. k. soisoi, v. to iUtread s. b«
hie musu, v. « hie ho, to be with child; inf. mmu-
hlemo-
Ue m. k. nyOmo, v. to be indebted to s. b.
dbyGoogk
hie — Me bu. 123
hie, n. face; eyes, sight; surface; front (the contj^ary of
se, s. Uiis); as he, mli, se, yi, one of the words most
frequently and multifariously employed, especially as the
grammatical subject and object of verbs. Used as adverb
and postposition it expresses the relations of „hefore,^
forward; on; upon^*; etc. Respecting the relation of
time, ntSutsu, UenkleA, da'S respecting that of place
„hamQ, no, na he'* are to be compared (s. Ot. ani, Riis
^ni; Ad. h€, n.). The principal combinations are the
following: 1) verbs with hie as their object: ba h!e, v.
to come forward ; ba moko hie, v. to come before one('8
face); bu hie, v. to cover the face; fite hie, v. to dis-
guise; fo hie, V. to wash the face (s. d§u, v.); inf. hle-
fomo, ironically used; to drink too much; fu hie, v. =
t& hie, to darken one's face, to frown; gbe hie, v. to
make ashamed; inf. hlegbe, hiegb^e (s. hie gbo); to
meet at a convivial party; to fight hand to hand, inf.
hlegbemQ, comp. gbe; gble hie, to open the face, to be
open, to be friendly; ha hie, = bu hie, to cover the
face; k5 hie, v. to reproach = gbe hie, v.; kpMft hie,
V. a. to destroy, inf. hlekpdtSmo (comp. hie kpdtS and
fite); ke hie fo m. k. no, ke hie nme m. k. no, - - kft
m. k. no etc. s. under fd, nme, k§ etc.; ke hie nme
moko or noko (Ot. de ani kari obi), v. to weigh some
body or some thing with the face, to estimate; kpe hle,^
to meet tlje face; ku hie fo n. k. no, v. to wink at
s. th.; mla hie, v. inf. hlemlamo, to press one's face
together, to sustain (f. i. pain etc.) ; nd hie fo m. k. no
= ke hie fd m. k. no (s. k§ and Ao), v. to trust in s. b*
(lit. to take the face and east it upon s. b.); hie ka
m. k. no, V. th. s. ; no hie nme m. k. no, th. s.; sa
hle» V. to rub one's face; to hie, v. to suppose; to di-
rect one's face (upon s. th.); tSe-^ile, v. to smile; tsle
m. k. hie, v. to awake one (comp. hie t§e); ts6 hie, v.
to turn one's face; to tijm before == tSd hamo; tQ hie,
= fu hie, V. to frown; wad§e hie, v. to harden one's
face, to be or become cruel, hard (s. hie wa); wiem.t..
hie, V. to reprove s. b. ; wo hie no, to lift up tte iftce,
the eyes; ya hie, v. to go on, forward; etc. etc.
hie ba no, V. to remember (again); s. kai and hie k$ no;
mihle eba no, I remember it.
hie ba §i, v. to be Bieek, humbleminded (s. ba he si); iatL
hlesiba; eUe ba si, he is mild.
Me bu, V. a. to get nigl^t, dart =» dSe aa, v.
dbyGoogk
124 Me bu 6i — Me M he no.
hie bu Si, pi. hie bumo Si; or ke hie bu &i, ii6 hie btl
si, V. to fall down on the face; inf* hfesibumo.
hie di, y. inf. hiedimo, to be giddy; mihie midimi, I am
giddy; but mihle di, I am black,
hie do, Me do la; inf. hiedo, v. to have a hot face; to
be zealous, anxious, prone upon s. th.; to be out of
temper; to be passionate; to be wild (s. dSo, Me d§o>
he dso).
Me dSo, y. to be bitter-faced, coyetous; inf. MedSomo.
hie f5, y. inf. Mefa, to get an expressiye face, to be deve-
loped (of children).
Me fe mobomobo, nyanemo, nyftgemo, nyfth-kemo, etc.
s. these adjectives and nouns • and the combination of
fe, v.
Me fe ya, v. inf. Meyafemo, to wonder, be astonished =
fe ya; na kpe he; he dso he, v. amoMe fe ya, or: ame-
. Me feamo ya, they are or were astonished; Ad. h6 pe
ya, v. th. 8.
Me fe m. k. tototo, y. to be sad; eMe fele tototo, =
ewyere eho ehe, he is sad.
Me fo kli, v. to be giddy = Me di, v.
hie fo, V* to have a wet face (be drunk?); s. fo Me, v.
Me fd m. k. no, s. ke Me fd m. k. no under fd no, v.
and Me, n.
Me fie si, v. n. to be ashamed, to hang one's face down;
inf. Mekifiemo.
Me gble = d§e tSere, v. inf. -mo, to get daylight; comp.
gble Me, v.
Me gbo (Ut. the face died), v. to be ashamed, inf. Megbo
(seldom used) Megble or hiegb^le; comp. gbe Me, v.;
ohie agbo bianel thou wilt just now be ashamed; eMe
gboo noko, be is of nothing ashamed, he is shameless;
oMe agbo! be ashamed; comp. ani wu in Otyi, th. s.;
Ad. hB gbo, v.
hie M, V. to get better == h! ha m. k.
hie hi n. k., y. to abhor s. th.
hie hi n. k., v. to keep something in view, to care tor it,
to like it.
hie hi no, v. to keep in view, to keep in rememberance ;
comp. hie yo no, — ka no, kai: Ad. he h6, v. to be
alive.
Me hi he no, v. to keep one's self in view, to take care;
nyehie ahia nyehe no, take care for yourselves! = comp.
sole he, kwfi he^ kwe nl ahi, v. etc.
dbyGoogk
Me ho he — Me §«. 125
hie ho he, v. to miss, to overlook; uterfei^cn, utetge^en.
Me kS, V. inf. MekSmo, to be alive; to be active, lively;
minaa noko n\ Me kS, I see nothing that is alive; Me
kS m. k., to be mad, eMe kalg, he is mad; s. yinkSf, v.
Ad. hS ka, V.
Me k9 he, v. to be alive or cognitions about s. th.
Me ka no, v. to remember; s. Me M no, — ye no; to
trust in, s. Me fd no; miMe ka Nyonmo no; 1 trust in
God; I hope upon God; Ad. M ka no, hg ne no, v.
hie ka si, V. n, to be moderate; to be wise, prudent, s.
le nii, na etc., inf. Mesikamo; miMe ka si and miMe
ka miSi, I am moderate; comp. Me sa, v. to keep well
house.
Me kd (Ot. ani here), v. to desire, to lust; inf. hiek5;
comp. di so, ba tsine, v.
Me kd si, v. = Me bu si, v. to fall down to the ground;
pi. Me k5mo si, v. to He on the face; s. nabu ko §i,
V. th. s.
Me kpa no, lit. the face turns from (s. kpa); v. to forget;
comp. Me ka no, the contrary; oMe akakpa edsurofemo
no, do not forget a benefit! Mihle kpako no! I have
not forgotten it!
Me kpata, V. n. inf. Mekpatamo; to be spoiled, to perish;
s. kpata Me, V.
Me lo, V. to frown == Menmei lo, and lo Me wo mli, v.
Me lu si, V. to fall with the face to the ground.
Me me, v. n. to be content; to be glad, to feel at home;
to be happy (comp. Me t§e); mihle mo bio, here I am
content, at home; miMe mole, 1 am content with him;
I am faithful to him, also: Me mo m. k. he, to be con^
tent with, or to be faithful to, s. b.; inf. Memo; comp.
me, v. ^
Me ne. Ad. v. to be alive (lit. the face exists); h6 n6, th. s.
Me sa, V. n. to be fit, ripe (of persons); to be steady;
grave, solid; inf. Mesalo, s. sa; to be hard; to be pre-
cocious (ironically used); Ad. he sa, v.
Me 80 m. k., v. a. (Ot. ani so), to honour, esteem, respect
s. b.; inf. Meso; eMe so5mi, he respects me. „Ke oke
wo kpla able le eMe esooo," prv. If thou thrash com
with a fowl, it does not respect thee.
Me sa, V. inf. Mesa, to be selfish; covetous; to have a
sunburnt £ace. Comp. also Mesa, n.; fe MeSa, v. fr.
Me and eSa, adj. bad.
dbyGoogk
*2« h!e t6 — Me«5.
hie tS, V. n. (s. tew in Otyi) to be coyetdus; to be cun-
ning, wise, civilized; to be clear, as water; inf. h!et^.
hie l§e,» V. n. to be clear, lo have a clear pure surfaee (of
water); inf. hlel§emo.
hie tse, V. inf. hletSere, hietsele, to be homesick; --m. k.
or n. k., - - - after s. b. or s. th.; to be dissatisfied with
one's condition (s, hie me, the contr.).
hie tsS, V. n. n. to awake (comp. tsie hie); inf. hIetsS.
hie t§ele, v. and
hie t§ere, v. n. to awake, to come to one's self (ju P^
fclbcr fommen); mihie tSere mi, I came to myself; int
hletSeremQ.
hie l§6, V. = hie tse, to-be homesick; inf. hlelsomo*
hie wa, V. n., lit. to be hard-faced; to be hard; to be strict;
to be covetous; inf. hiewfi, hiewale.
hie ye la, v. to be enraged, fierce; = ye flafla; to be very
much Intent upon s. th,, comp. hie do, v.
hie ye no, v. to keep in view = hie hi no; neg. irreg.
hie be no; Ad. hS nS no.
The following combinations with nhfe" and many
others are sometimes negligently pronounced, so that
only „hl" or „he" is heard. For correctness' sake
they are all fully written. In Adanme „he** takes
nearly entirely the place of „hle".
hiebii, hebii, pi. n. single cowries; s. hlaw, hleo, n.
hlebal^, hiebumo, n. evening time = dsenamo ; s. hie bu, v.
hiebumo, n. covering of the face; fr. bu hie, v.
h!ed!le» -mo, n. giddiness, fr. hie di, v.
h!edo> n. heat (of the face); passion; zeal; wildness; fir.
Me do, V.
hledolo, n. zealous; fierce; wild person; also used of
animals.
hIedSolo, n. bitterfac^d person; envious, covetous person;
fr. hie dSo, v.
hIedSomo, n. covetousness; envy.
hIed§olo> n. peace = hedsole, fr. hie dSo, v. tameness;
hled§0> n. th. s.
hieflmo, n. expressiveness of the face, fr. hie % v.; de-
velopement of children,
hiefitelo, n. disguised person,
hiefitemo, n. disguise; fr. fite hie, v.
hIeflSmo, n. itching of fiace.
hiefomo, n. washing of the foce; drunkenness; fr. fo hie, v.
hiefo, n. endeavour; trying;; fr. fo Me, v.
dbyGoogk
klefiooK^ — hlekp€. 12T
hleflomo, hiefo, n. cutting of fbe face (wHh divers marks).
hIefolQ, n. a person Avith a cut face (not used, but ble*
nmlaltSe, n. instead of it).
hlefumo, n. frown, fr. fu hie, v.
hiefQlo, n. frowning person.
hlefO, n. stink-face (scolding word: „Kwe ehlefii!" look at
his ugly face!)
hlegbemo, n. hand to hand fight; conviviality, fr. hlegbe, v.
hiegbe, n. spite, s. gbe h!e, v. and hlegb^le, n.; reproof,
reproach.
hiegbelo, «, (despicer) reprover, reproacher.
hiegbfite (htgble, h^gble), n. death of the face, shame; dis-
grace; bashfiriness; fr. hie gbo, v.; spite, fr. gbe hte, v.;
na — , to see shame, to be disgraced; wo m. k. — , to
make one ashamed, to put shame upon s. b. A peculiar
plural-form is hlegbedsi in
hiegbedsianii, pi. n. shameful acts or doings. '
hiegbedsianiiifemo, n. shameful act.
hiegb^lewO, n. disgracing.
hiegble, n. = hlegb^le, n.
hiegblemo, n. friendliness; fr. gble hie, v. daylight, fr. hie
gble, V. = dSetseremo.
hiegbo =ss hiegbgle, n.
hlehanS, pi. -nii, n. covering of face, veil. ,
hleheremo, n. exeptation of face, countenance, fr. here
hie, V. therefore, countinancing, acknowledgement.
blekSlo, n. a living, active person; Nyonmo hiekldo, the
living God. Ad. tti. s. The word can be used in con-
trast to „gbonyo** of any thing „living".
hiekamo, n. living; life, fr. hie kS, comp. wala; remem-
brance; s. nohlekamo, blenokamo, n. hope; confidence,
fr. hie ka no, v.
hlekasemo, n. immitation of one's face, fr. kase hie, v.
hleko, n. lust, desire; envy.
hlekdlo, n. lusting, desirous, envious person.
hlekpamo, n. forgetfulness, fr. hie kpa no> v. s. nohle-
kpamo, hlenokpamo; but: percolation, clarification; fr.
kpa hie, v. to lake oft the surface.
hlekpatalo, n. destroyer, spoiler; fr. kp^tahle; comp. fite-
lo, n.; reproacher.
hlekpStdmo, n. perdition; destruction, fr. hie kpStS, v. n.
and kpata hie, v. a.; comp. filemo, n ; reproach.
hiekpe, n. meeting face to face; glance at one's face, fr.
kpe hie, v.
dbyGoogk
128 htelomo -*- hleAmei bo tSe.
h!eh)mo» n. frowning; staring.
Melo, n. holder, carrier, fr. h!e, v.
hleme, n. contentment; pleasure, joy, fr. hie me; comp.
mise.
hlemeheremo, n. j'oyful reception, fr. here m. k, hteme, v.
hiemlamo, n. forbearance; endurance; endeavour, trial =;
hlefo, n.; fr. mTa hie, v.
hiemtalo, n. person enduring hardships or sufferings.
hiemo,»n. carrying, bearing, holding; slandering; fr. hie, v.
Adn. hSm.
hiena, hina, hSna, n. lit. brim or end of the face, i. e.
forehead, comp. hietso; Ad. hSnya, n.; kwe m. k. hte-
na, V. to respect person, 7tQO(t(07toXif]7tT€iv.
hienakwemo, n. respect of person.
h!enmlalt§e, pi. -tsemei, n. cutface; person from tribes who
cut their faces.
hlenmei» hinmei, pi. -ii, n. lit. face-nut; eye; well of
water; eye of a needle; = py in Hebr. HiAmei (Ot.
ani, ani wa) is also used as gramm. subj. or. obj. like
hie, na, no etc. but not very frequently; f. i. be hinmeii,
V. to hint with the eyes; ebemi hinmeii, he gave me "a
hint with his eyes; dfa hienmei, obj. pi. dfra hienmeii,
lit. to break the eyes (s. dfa), to spoil the eyes; fila
hIeAmeii = fila, v. a. to blind; s. fila; kodd hienmei, V. a.
to look asquint; to leer at s. th.; to be envious; mla
hienmeii, to shut the eyes; Ifa hleAmeii, lit. to strike
the eyes, i. e. to shut and open them once, inf. hle-
Ameiitfa, s. this; to twinkle; wo hienmei no, obj. pi.
(irreg.) hole hienmeii ano, to lift up the eyes etc. Ad.
h6nme, n.
hienmei dfa, pi. hienmeii dfra, v. n. to loose the eyes, s.
dfa h., V.
hienmei, kSdo, v. n. to have a crooked eye, to look asquint
(ft^iclen) ; to leer upon s. th. ; to be envious, comp. Mt.
20, 15.; inf. hleAmeikdddmo ; s. k5dd hienmei and comp.
Me k6, V.
hieilmei lo = hie lo, v. to frown.
hienmei mla, v.n. to have the eyes shut, s. mia hienmei, v.
hienmei no ha, v. n. to have a covered eye, i. e. to have
weak eyes, to see not well.
hienmei no siu, v. a. th. s.
hienmei no t§e, v. a. to have clear, pure, sharp eyes.
dbyGoogk
MeAmei — Mesale. 129
htefunei no yele, v. lit. to get a stone on the eye , to have
a cataract,
hlenmein sa , = hie sa , v. n. to be fit.
hienmein §a m. k. v. n. to be hard, covetous, unfriendly,
suspicious; ehlemein shale fe noko, he is exeedingly
unfriendly; inf. h!enmein§a =hies§; comp. also hiewa, v.
hienmeinwa = hie wa, v. n. to be hard- eyed i. e. to be
hard, cruel, covetous,
hienmeibelo , n. hinter with the ff^e.
hienmeibe, n, hint with the eyes; fr. be hlenmei, v.
hieiimeidfa, hlenmeiidframo, n. spoiling the eyes; fr. dfa h.,
V. or h. dfa, v.
hlenmeidfalo, n. person spoiling the eyes,
hienmeiiano , n. surface of the eyes; hienmeiino, th. s.
hienmeiiase , n. eye-brow; hienmeiise, -setsoi, th. s.
hienmeiiase-kbtoku , n. eye-lid; -sewolo, -setolo, th. s.
hlenmeikoddlo , n. squinter; leerer; envious person; fr.
kddo h. , V. or h. kodS, v.
hienmeikdddmo , n. looking asquient; leering; envy,
hieiimeiko, n. spoilt eye; s. ko, adj.
hienmeikotse , n. person m\h a spoilt eye; 6in5ugtgcr;
hlenmeikometse , th. s.
hienmeingte, n. cataract.
hiehmeinoha, n. darkness of the eye; fir. htenmei no ha, v.
hienmeinotsemo, n. clearness of the eye ; fr. hien. no tse, v.
hienmeinsa, n. == hlesa, unfriendliness; hardness; suspicion,
hienmeinsglo, n. unfriendly, suspicious person,
hienmeisa, n. evil eye; s, esa, adj.
hlenmeitfa,. n. stroke or twinkling of the eyes, moment
(^uc^enbiid); afe nakai hlenmeitfa, it was done so in the
twinkling of an eye.
hienohile, n. remembrance; care for s. th. or s. b. fr. hie
hi no, V.
hlenoho, n. overlooking; missing; Ueberfeficn, Ueberge^cn;
fr. hie ho (he) no, v.
hlenokSmo, n. remembrance; trust; confidence; hope fr.
hie ka no, v.
hienokpalo, n. forgetful person.
hienokpamo, n. forgetting; forgetfulness ; fr. hie kpa no, v.
hienokwemo , = hienakwemo , n. reception of person ;
7tQO(f(onokr]\pia; s. hietso, n.
hienowomg, n. elevation of face,
hiesale, n. fitness; maturity; steadiness (of persons); pre-
cociousness; fr. hie sa, v.
Ziramermann, Akra-Vocab, 9
Digitized by VjOOQIC
180 hiesamo — hlcwiemo.
hlesamo, n. preparation of face, surface, ft. sa Ue, v.
hlesQ, n. respecting, honouring; respect, honour, estima-
tion, fir. hie 80, y.
hIesolo» n. respectful person,
hlesuban, n. likeness of face,
hiesd, n. covetousness; -h&\Q, n. covetous person, fr. hie
sa, V.
h!e§a, h!§a, h!e§adsen, n. selfishness, suspicion, hardness,
fr. hie sa: fe hlesa, T. to be selfish etc.
hleSafemo, n. selfishness; -f6lQ, n. etc.
hlesalO) n. a selfish, suspicious, hard person.
hie§ikimQ, n. moderation; frugality; thriftiness; fr. hie k& si, t.
hiesifiemo, n. shame fr. hie fie si, v.
hiesibumo, n. falling on one's face,
hiesimd, hiesimamo, n. fixing of face,
hiete, hite, hetS, n. covetousness; cunning, knowledge;
civilisation etc. clearness = hietsemg; fr. hie tg, t.
hIetitimO) n. scratching of one's face,
hleto^, n. direction of the face to a certain object, fr. to
hie, V.
hielsele, n. = hIetSere, n.
hietsemo, n. clearness, cleanness (of face or surface), fr.
hie tse, v.; friendliness, cheerfulness, fr. tse hic, y.
hietsemo, n. friendliness, smiling, smile, s. tse hie, v.
hietsere, hltsre, hfilare, n, homesickness; fr. hie tse, v.
want of pastime; dsie — , v. to pass the time, hietSere-
dsiemo, n. time passing; ^ntotttttib.
hIetsS, n. awaking, fr. hie tse, v.
hietseremo, n. coming to one's self, fr. hie tsere, v.
hietsemo, n. awakening, ft*, tsle hie, t.
hletsimo, n. movement of face,
hietsdmo, n. turning of the face; turning before = hftmo-
tsomo, fr. tso hie, v.
hietso, hitso, hetso, jil. -tsei, n. = hiena, forehead;
kwe -no, v. to respect persons, s. hIena, n,
hletsumo, n. wiping the face, fr. tSumo hie, v.
hietumo, n. frowning, frown, fr. tu hie, v,
hiewadsemo, n. hardening of one's face fr. wadSe h!e.
hlewale, n. hardness (efface); boldness; cruelty; cove-
tousness^ fr. hie wa, v.
hiewalo, n. hard, covetous person,
hiewielo, n. reprover; exhorler.
hiewiemo, n. reproof; admonitibn , exhortation ; fr. wie
m. k. hie, v.
dbyGoogk
hiewome — ho he. 131
hlewome, n. carrying of the fore part.
hieya, n. going on; advance, progress, fr. ya Me, v.;
= noya, n.
Meyalo, n. person progressing.
hieyafemo, n. = yafemo, astonishment; wondering fr. h!e
fe yS; comp. nakpe; hedSomo; Ad. heyapem , heya-
pepei, n.
hieyomo, n. recognition of one's face, fr. yo m. k. h!e, v.
hie, Ad. V. = kwe, v. to behold.
hie. Ad. adv. = hie, here.
hie, n. Adii. fence = afaban.
hihl, redupl. of hi, v. to detest thoroughly; ehihile kokoko,
he detested him exceedingly much.
hiko, V. to hickough.
hikohiko, n. hickough = fukofuko.
htkS, n. s. hlekS, lust, envy.
hlkSlo = hlekolo, n. envious person.
hlle, n. goodness; remaining, dwelling; abhorrence, abo-
mination, esp. in a religious sense; fr. hi, v.
hllehe, s. sihilehe, n. dwelling.
hllenS, pi. hllenii, good thing, good work (unclean thing ?)
s. niihinii.
hima, v. to drive (fr. the wind): koyo le hima lelele ahu,
the wind drove the vessel a long time.
*hima, ahima (Ot. ahyeraa, diminutive of hyen, vessel), n.
the smallest kind of canoes, fisher-canoe, comp. anlese,
ahlnese -^ ahyenkese); duakro, lele, n.
'himanka, ahimanka, n. europ. word; hammock.
hlna, s. hlena.
bin., bin. s. under hie.
'hinkese, ah. (Ot. ahyenkese), n. a large canoe.
hlnmei, s. hleftmei.
hirihiri, n. and adv. confusion; confusedly = gidigidi, sa-
kasaka, th. s.
blSa, s. hlesa.
hitg, s. bletg.
hitso, s. hletso.
ho, V. to pass; to pass over; to proceed, to go on well;
to flow, to overflow; to cook; compare to the latter:
be, tfa (dsa); si, sd. Inf. homo and ho. Sometimes
ho is used like an auxil. verb = ya , ba etc. f. i. hota
§i, to (come and) sit down, ho-kS §i, to (go and) lie
down etc Ad. ho, v. to go, to come.
ho he, V. to pass ; to outdo = ho na.
9*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
132 ho he no — Hogba.
ho he no; v., inf. heho and heuohO; hehomo and heno-
homo to pass oyer; to overtake.
ho-kS si, V. to lie down, s. ho, v.
ho la, V. inf. laho (perh. to overflow with fire) to be very
active, lively; to be wild; to be playful; to be wanton;
frolicksome; naughty etc. (esp. used of children).
ho na = ho he, v. inf. naho, to pass over; to surpass,
to out -do; -run etc.
ho nii, inf. niihomo, v. to cook.
ho-ta si, V. to sit down, s. ho, v.
ho-ya, V. to pass and go, i. e. to pass away, to vanish.
ho, n. uproar, noise; fe-, v. to make a noise, uproar.
ho, V. pi. holo, to shove in, to put in, to insert (einftjic*
ben); to be inserted, to lie betwixt two things, to lie
in a cavity ; perh. formerly : to be with child, s. ho, holo,
horo. Inf. hO, holomo.
ho mli, V. inf. mliho, th. s.
ho, n. fetus; embryo; an unborn child; „wonamei ke bii
ke hoi," „our wives, children and unborn ones", a com-
mon expression of men in speaking of their families, as
their dearest good, as in Germ. „SBeib unb ilinb,"
„^aiiS unb ^ecrb ic,'\ a kind of very small monkeys
with large heads; — No ho, v. inf. hon5, v. to con-
ceive; hie ho, inf. hohiemo, v. to be with child, comp.
na musu , hie musu etc. wo m. k. ho , v. to impregnate ;
inf. howo.
ho, n. insertion, etc.
Ho, pr. n. Saturday; comp. Hogba; according to native
counting Saturday is the 6. day of the week.
hd, V. to sell; „ahd eno ahe kpanma," „this is sold (and
bought) for ten strings" (of cowries), inf. hSmg; This
verb seems formerly to have had also the signification:
to hunger, .comp. hoo, homo, hdlo, n.
h5 nklon, v. to snuffle, to snore.
ho, adj. cold, cool, nu hd, cold water, s. h6n.
hoble, n. dan. plane.
hoble-adade, n. plane -iron, ^obeteifcn.
Ahodome, pr. n. of a Gli- village.
hofelo, n. noisy person.
hofemo, n. noisemaking; noise; uproar; s. bu, v.
Hogba, pr. n. Sunday; s. Ho, pr. n. Sunday is kept as a
day of rest by many heathen and considered the 7. or
last day.
dbyGoogk
hogba-atade — homo. 133
hogba-atade, n. sunday-dress; -dSamo, -solemo, u. Sunday-
service.
hohlemo, n. pregnancy; fr. hie ho, v.
hdhot, V. frequentative of h6, to sell.
hohe, V. (accord, to Hanson) to keep.
hdlaim, n. Ad6. cowries == trema in Ga.
hole, V. sometimes pronounced holo, obj. pi. of wo, v. to
lift up; to lift or take many things up, to take (things)
away etc. f. i. mlwo mihie no; 1 lift up my face; mi-
hole mihlenmeii ano , I lift up my eyes. Comp. also ko
and k$lo. Inf. holemQ.
hole he no, v. inf. henoholemo» to overgrow (according
to Hanson, Mat. 13,7.). Comp. wo, v.
hole no, pi. v. of wo no, to lift up (many things); inf.
noholemo.
holehole, adj. and adv. loose; loosely, lotterig; holi-
holi, th. s.
holo, V. s. hole, v.
holo, n. cook (gener. nii holo or kuke, kuku, europ. word).
holo (s. horo) , n. a person who is with child ; an animal
that is with young one's. The word is not used alone,
but like an adjective as an apposition, f. i. yd holo, a
woman with child; fr. ho, v. and n.
holo, pi. V. of ho, V.
hdlo, pi. hdloi, n. seller; seldom used alone, but frequently
in compounds, as: tawahdlo, seller of tobacco etc.
— , pi. hdloi and hddsi, n. a hungry person; hdlo dsilo
ako klan, he is as hungry as a hyena. Comp. hdmo,
hoo, n. perh. fr. a verb h6, or h6o, v. to hunger; s.
Adn. Voc. hdo, n.
hdlo, hdno, hdn, n. shadow, susum^ (comp. woii, nydii etc.).
Comp. h6, adj.
holomo, n. insertion, fr. holo, pi. v. of ho, v. '
hdmo, pi. hdmoi, n. selling, sale; — pi. hddsi, hunger
(Ot. okom Ad. hdo); scarcity of any tWng, f. i. nuhdmo,
— of water; lo-hdmo, — of meat etc.; hdmo yemi,
hunger eats me, i. e. I am hungry (comp. kumai, fe!
etc.); hdmo gbele, hunger has killed him; sometimes
the pi. is used: hddSi yeomi naakpa, 1 am very hungry;
wo hdmo yi , to cry the hunger out, to cry after it (as
it is custom to do after thieves found out, women and
children running after and making a noise at them), a
custom of the hdmowo-festival, s. hdmowo. *
homo, V. to be accustomed; to prosper; s. ho, v.
dbyGoogk
134 homo — ha.
homo, n. cooking, fr. ho, v.
homo, n. inserting, fr. ho., v.
hdmowOy n. lit. the outcrying or mocking of hunger; a
common feast or festival of the native^ of Western Africa
« after the harvest of com and yams, a kind of harvest-
home, generally called yams -custom, celebrated with
gun-firing, singing, music, dancing, eating and drinking
etc. and in the interior also with sacrifices of men. Along
the coast it is celebrated at the end of August or be-
ginning of Sept. It is at the same time the new year
of the natives. Comp. wo, v. and wo yi, v.
h6n = h6lo, hdno, n. shadow.
honO, -nldmo, n. conception; fr. A6 ho, v.
h6o, AdA. n. = hdmo, hunger; hdo, nemi ye = hdmo
miyemi, I am hungry; comp. suo, v. and suomo^ n.
honiitSumo, n. saturday-business.
'hora, ahora, n. blame; s. ahora and ahorabo.
horo, s. hole and holo, v.
horo, 8. holo.
hoso and woso (Ot. wosow, hosow) v. n. and a., inf. ho-
somo, to shake, to quake, to move to and fro; Sikpon
hosoo, the earth shakes; yahoso nmlelo or hosomo
nmlelOy ring the bell! comp. kpokpo and dida, Sa, Ui
he, V. etc.
hosolo» n. ringer (of a bell).
hosomo, n. shaking, quaking; ringing; sikpon hosomo,
earth-quake.
howO, n. impregnation; fr. wo hQ, v.; 9. ho» n.
howolo, i^ impregnator.
hre, V. 8. here, v.
hre, V. s. hole, V. here> v.
hren, adj. s. hereft.
hrihri, a^j. s. hirihiri, adj.
hu, V. to blow (the fire with a fan), to fan, to blow clean,
but conq). fli; to storm (s. ahum); inf. hQmo. OL th. s.
hQ, V. to hum; to roar as a lion; inf. humo. Comp. ahCiahQ,
adv. and n.
his, inf. hQmo, v. to till the ground; to hoe; to cultivate
the land; hQ adeda, to work with the billhook, i. e. to
cut the bush for burning and cultivating; hQ koi, to work
with the hoe, to hoe; hQ n. k. he, to cleanse or weed
about s. th., hQ able he, to weed maise or oom; hQ
mil, V. to weed in s. pla(%»
dbyGoogk
ha — hiiramo. 135
hd, n. adj. and adv. blowing (of the wind); stornringly;
exceedingly much.
hd, Q. watch; clock.
hu> conj. also, too, even, likewise,' comp. tete. It is pos-
poned to the word to which it belongs; miba ni min^^e-
mi le hu ba, I came and also my brother came; miba
ni minyemi ba hu, I came and my brother also eame;
dSee-keke; §i-hQ, not -only; but -also.
'hu, Shti, n. or adv. s. ahQ, n.
*huahii,. ahuahu, n. fear, horror.
huhd, adj. innumerable; akpei huh§, many many thousand;
comp. oh^, num.
hahflhu, huhiihuhu, adv. murmuringly; wie — , v. to mur-
mur, to grumble.
hQhuhuwiemo, n. murmuring.
hahai, Adn. adv. loudly, aloud.
hulo, n. fanner; s. hu, t.
hulo, n. 93auet; farmer, tiller of the ground; s. okwafonyo
and kosenyo, th. s.
bulonii. pi. n. farmers-implements.
hulotsu, n. farm-house.
hulu, V. s. hum, v.
hulu, hunO, huru, n. suri; — ete si, --is risen; — ny6
§i, - - went down; — damo, - - standeth in his height;
— tso, - - shines, etc. wyere hOlu, v. to sit in the sun.
huludamg, n. the highest stand of the sun in the meridian.
hulusinyd, n. setting of the sun.
halusitg, n. rising of the sun.
hulutsO, n. sun-shine.
.huluwyeremg, n. warming, sitting in the sun.
humi, n. a quiet, unpretending person; an humble person;
prov. 18.
humidsen, n. humble behaviour.
biimQ, n. humming; roaring.
hdmo, n. tilling the ground, farming, cultivation.
hDmono, pi. *nii, n. farming-impl^nent = hulgnli, n.
hund, n. Adn. husband = wu in GS; kunn, Ot.
htinQ, s. hulQ, n. sun.
hiiru. hru, v. (Ot. th. s.) inf. hiSrumo, to jump, to spring;
bayeio* hunio gbagbagba, or guaguagua, the leaf-
eater (an antelope) jumps hophophop; to leap, to leap
over, = teke, v. ; also hum — t^ke, double v. th. s.
hurulQ, n. jumper.
htirumQy hr&mQ, n. jumping, springing, lea[»ng.
dbyGoogk
136 hurududu — Ka.
hurududO, adv. with one crash; gbe §i huniduda, to fell
down with one crash.
busQ, n. limit, boundary, border; comp. nmaiimasa, klotia,
kpokpa, nagbe etc. Mikel^ dse husul, I border with him ;
dsie husul, v. to make out the limits or borders,
husudse, n. bordering,
husudsiemg, n. making out of boundaries.
hwSin, y. to be out of joint disjoined (of members of the
body); to disjoin, to dislodge; inf. hwanmo.
hwUhmo, n. disjoiuing, dislocation of a joint of the body.
'hw9n, ohwdn, n. a small animal of the bush.
hwanya, v. to shake; -nine, the hand.
*hw6ny3, ahw^nyS, n. the maize -blossom; gba — , lit. to
divide or part into blossoms, to blossom (of maize and
other corn).
hwdnydgbamQ, n. blossoming of com etc.
hw = w (Ayigbe-sound) see in some Adanme-words from
Ayigbe, in the Ad. Voc; in GS generally changed into
„w", f. i. hwo. A., G. wo, to morrow; though the few
words under hw — might be also written so. The same
sound appears also in Otyi.
I.
Properly written no GS-word initiate3 with „i** (a,
e, 0 being the only initiating vowels); but besides
proper nouns beginning with I, the syUable „yi" (head)
is sometim^es negligently pronounced, so that only i is
heard. Whatever is not found under „i" , must be
therefore sought for under y, „e** or „n, n and m".
Scripture names beginning with J are left unaltered,
such as Jehowa, Jesu, Johane, Jakob, Jakobo, Israel etc.
In the Krobo-Dialect of Adanme, „i** is the possessive
and subjective pronominal augment = mi, my and mi,
I, from „imi** indep. pronoun, G. mi; and besides that
used to express the verb „dsi" = ni, n in GS.
Israelnyo, pi. Israelmei or Israelbii, pr. n. Israelite.
i- = yi = head. /
iten = yiten,^ n. crown of the head.
ilso, = yitSo, n. head.
it§Qi, = yitsQi, n. hair of the head. etc. etc,
K
Ka, V. inf. ka, to stick to (Ot. to be wanting); to be
fixed, fastened (with nails); to pain by sticking to, to
dbyGoogk
ka — ka. 137
braise; to stay, to slain (of spots not to be washed out);
to do s. th. conjunctly, inf. kamq, amef^ ameka nitSumQ
kome ametsu, they all conjunctly did one work; to stand
in for another, mika n. k. mihSle, I stand in for him
respecting s. th. ; ke m. k. ka, v. to take part with s. b.
in s. th. (f. i. in buying, selling etc.), s. Prov. 92; to
venture, to try, to tempt; maka makwe, I will try
and see; to nail, to fasten n5 hie ka noko, to fix the
face upon s. th., subj. pi. kMa, kla; inf. kamo klamQ;
to lay things into the sun to dry; inf. kamo; to scoop;
to be accustomed, to be inured, to be bound to; to be
frequent, not scarce etc. etc. Comp. „ka" in Adn., and
„ko".
ka, conjunctive verb used together with kg, ke ka, as for,
respecting; ke kami, as for me — .
About ka as auxiliary verb s. § 27. Comp. ^ko** in Adn.
ka he, v. to cleave to, to stain.
ka hie, v. to fix the face on s. th.
ka mli, v. to be fixed in something, to stain.
ka na, n. to fasten at s. th.
ka nii, v. to put things into the sun.
ka no, V. to be fixed upon s. th., to cleave td, to be
customary, d§numQ ka eno, he is given to drinMng, he
is an accustomed drunkard.
ka nd, v. to be fixed at; to fix at.
ka n. k. ohyew (Ot. ohyew = hot), v. to warm s. th.;
©drracn, aufwatmcn.
ka sa, V. to sun a bed.
ka se, V. to stick behind.
ka segbe, v. th. s.
ka si, pi. kla si, v. to stick to the ground.
ks, n. sticking to; staining; ambush, waylaying; proof, trial,
venture, temptation; custom, habit; frequency; s. ka, v.;
wo ka, to waylay, to lie in ambush, inf. kawo.
ka, n. crab; „ka fQO loflo'S prv. A crab does not beged
a bird.
ka, V. pi. and inf. kamo, to lie; to lay; |to lie open, to
be open, naked, to open; to speak (Ot. th. s. in Ga sel-
dom used, s. ka-ke), to speak openly, to admonish, re-
prove, reproach (inf. ka and kamo) etc. he ka, v. inf.
hekamo, to be unbound, at liberty to move, to be alive,
to be free; to be exposed, naked; hie ka, inf. hlekamg,
V. to be alive (Ot. „ani da"); hie ka no, inf. hienokl-
mo, V. to remember; to trust in, to hope; hie k& si^
dbyGoogk
138 U he ~ kfi.
inf. hIeSikSmo, v. to be quiet, moderate, thrifty; inli
kSi, Y. to hare an open inside; na ki, v. inL nakSmg,
to be open (- mouthed, lit.)» f. i. slna le na kd, the door
is open; ena kfi, it is open; no kd, y. to have an open
surface; se ka, y. to haYe an open back; to be open
behind; yilson kS, fm kS, inf. yitSonktog, yiilikdmQ, y.
to be openheaded, i. e. to be mad; eyitson kSlQ, he is
mad; s. seke; etc. etc. A peculiar expression is: heni
ekS le ehli, where he lies it is not good, i. e. he is
nearly dead, he died, which is seldom said immediately
after the death of a person, but this or a similar ex-
pression, as: „en5-f6 §i", „eny§S hcla le" elc.
ki he, Y. inf. hekSmo; to lie at s. th., to continue, to per-
scYere; to last; to discoYer one's self, s. he kd, y.; au-
xiliary Yerb to express this relation, as „8till, noc^", f. i.
ekS he etSuQ nii, he works still, Ut. he continues wor-
king, he continues he works, comp. ya no; lolo; kd etc.;
ke n. k. kS, to lay s. th., comp. ta, damo, te si etc.
k9 hie, Y. to lie before, inf. hlekdmo; to censure, re-
proYC etc.
ka-ke, Y. lit. to speak and say, i. e. to Speak to; mikS sane
le mikele, I told him the matter; comp. dSadse — tsd
and kft — kyere in Otyi.
kSi kits, Y. inf. kitakamg, to swear; kd Nyonmo kits, to
swear by God; kd kits fo m. k. no, y. to swear against
s. b. Comp. ki^.
kg mil, Y. inf. mlikSmg, to lie in s. th.
kS na, Y. to Ue at the mouth, end, limit, shore of s. th.
kS no, Y. inf. nokSmo, to lie upon; to continue ::= kS he;
to relie upon, to rest with, to depend upon, to be upon
one's responsibility, to be one's duty; n^ke sane ne kSi
mino, this matter lies upon me, is my duty; a peculiar
expression is: sane ne „kd te ko no*', this matter lies
upon a stone, i* e. there is something else behind; about
hie kS no, to trust, s. hie and kd, y. (aboYc).
kd no to (?), Y. to be full (used of com-ears).
kS se, Y. to lie behind; inf. sekdmo.
kd si, pi. kdmo si, int sikdmo, y. to lie down, to lie on
the ground, to rest, to be sick; to be in a certain con-
dition; ke m. k. kd si, y. to lie with s. b. = ke m. k.
wo; comp. dS5ro si, dfdre i&i, ble §i; md si. 'Boni sane
le kd §i ne, as the palaver stands; ekd si hdwo, it is
ready for us.
Uy Y. Adii. to say; conj. = ake> that.
dbyGoogk
U ~ kaimonft. 139
kS, n. reproof; admonition; fr.kfl, y. to reprove; s.klmo,n.
U, n. a kind of plates or dishes of the natives; s. kfi, v.
to be open.
'ka, eka, n. boldness, bravery.
kfi, n. gumi arabicum; s. kaUo, n.
ka, adv. through; gba k3, to rend through, s. ka, to be
open.
kabS, n. time of afBiction or trial.
kabu, n. a kind of beetles, s. koke and tdni, th. s.
kabu, n. crab-hole.
kad^, n. jaw, jaw-bone ; the latter is someUmes taken from
enemies slain, as a trophy and tied to the large war-
drum.
kadi, V. inf. kadimg, to sign, to fill up wanting plants in
planting.
'kadi, okadi, n. sign.
kadilo, n. signer.
kadimo, n. signing.
kadra, n. AdA. bill-hook = adeda in Ga.
kadSe, v. 4o lie on the back; inf. and impert. sing, kadie-
mo. - About the end-syllable — d§e, s. § 27.
kadSemo, n. lying on the back; comp. ka Si, bu Si, sd Si,
kpasa Si, v.
kafe, n. dan. coffee.
kafedumo, n. coffee-growing, -planting.
kafekpulu, n. coffee-pot or jug.
kafenumo, n. coffee-drinking.
kafenulo, n. coffee-drinker.
kafetasa, n. dan. coffee-cup.
kafetfiomo, n. trans-planting of coffee (-trees).
kafeteolo, n. coffee-planter.
kafewO, n. cofee-growth, -produce.
kafQte, n. silk-cotton, used for pillows etc.
kafu, n. a kind of baskets made of leaves, f.L palm-leaves;
comp. flotQ, kpanya, ablabutu etc.
kafute, n. a kind of sandstone.
Kai, pr. n. of females.
kai (or kae), v. inf. kaimo, Ot. th. s. to remember; to re-
mind; comp. ka, v. and ka, v.
kailQ, n. reminder.
kaimo, n. remembrance; reminding; admonitioo.
kaimofemo, n. lit. making remembrance, accord, to Hanson :
feast, festival.
kaimond, pi. -nii, n. token of remembrance.
dbyGoogk
140 kaimokadi — kama.
kaimQkadi, b. sign or token of remembrance.
kaka, q. crust of bread; break of the bread (^Uu6)); hard
baked bread; small round bread-loaves,
kakadsfi, adj. long, high (Ot. tenteA, Ad6. g9ga).
kakao, n. aching pain iaany part of the body, esp. tooth-
ache.
kakasS, n. baking of small bread or cakes,
kake, num. and adj. Adn. one; only, alone = kome; keke
in G3.
kakla, n. s. kakra, n. ring,
kakla, n. knife; comp. kito, n.
kaklanabd, n. sharpness of a knife,
kakladsote, n. whetting-stone for knives; s. nadSot^, th. s.
and dSOy dso na, v. to whet, to sharpen.
kakladQmQ, n. stabbing; s. du, v.
kaklana, n. lit. mouth of the knife (comp. ^^ in Hebrew),
edge of the knife.
kaklanadsQte = kakladsote.
kaklahebo, n. sheath for a knife.
kaklatSo, pi. -tSei, n. handle of a knife,
kaklahetsulo, n. knife-cleanser; kaklahe§alo, th. s.
kaklahetsumo, n. knife -cleansing; s. tsumg; kaklahesamo,
th. s.
kaklaka, or kakraka, n. a kind of beetles, called „cockroa-
ches'' at the coast,
kdko, n. pot-shard, s. ko, adj.; comp. gbeko, kpuluko etc.
th. s.
kakra, n. = kakla, n.
kakra, n. ring pad, polster of a ringform, to stand round
pots upon; according to Hanson crown ((frsyavog), comp.
akekre and tako, n.
kakrada, n. oyster,
kakradanono, n. oyster-shell.
k&la, kla, pi. v. of ka, v. to fix, to nail; inf. kalamQ, klamo.
kalamo, n. fixing, nailing,
kalo, u. chalk; lime,
kalo, n. meat of crabs; s. ka, n.
kalo, n. tryer, tempter; adventurer, s. ekSlo, 'kalo. Comp.
ka, V.
kSlo» n. a person lying down (only used in compounds);
a reprover, admonisher, comp. ka, v.
'kalo, ekaio, n. a bold, brave person, an adventurer, see
eka^ n.
kama, n. back-fin of Mkts.
dbyGoogk
kamM — MSdlo. lit
kamfrg, kamflS, n. a kind of sea-fish.
kamfrdtoto, n/kamfrS- scales, small silver-coin.
kamisa, kamsa, n. europ. Mvord: shirt.
kamkam, adj. actiye, lively (fr. ka); ye — , v. to be lively,
active.
kSmg, n. lying; opening, s. k9.
kamg, n. s. ka, v. and ka, n.
kdmokSimo, redupl. pi. form of kS, v.
kampe, n. europ. >vord: sofa,
kan^, kan^n, n. accord, to Hans, corner = kdn.
kane (old pronun. kande), v. Adn. th. s. Ot. {Akwap. Dial.)
kan; inf. and imprt. sing, kanemo, to count; to read;
ke m. k. — , to dispute with s. b.
kane, n. Ad. th.s. Ot. kanea, light, candle; comp. la; lus, n.
kanelo» n. counter, reader,
kanemo, n. counting, reading,
kanetso, n. candle-stick, s. lus-tso.
Kanesi, pr. n. of a place.
KdnkS, pr. n., s. Ktnkd, th. s.
kankan, adj. and adv. bright, brightly (s. kane, haji etc.).
kankan, n. civet-cat.
taSSI^'' „"' ! *«^«t, used as spices for the body.
kanke, n. a tin vessel; s. tsins, tsens, n.
kante, n. europ. word, captain of a vessel.
kante, v. inf. kantemg, to hem.
kante na, v. to hem in (cloth) = ban na; inf. nakantemo.
kao, n. dan. cake.
kaosu, n. dan. stocking, sock.
kaosuld, n. knitting, s. lo, v.
kaosulolo, n. knitter.
kase, V. inf. kasemo, to learn; — m, k. to imitate s. b.
Ad. th. s.
kase, n. politeness; fe — , to be polite, inf. kasefemo*
kaselo» n. learner, scholar; discible; apprendice; Ad. th.s.;
imitator,
kasemo, n. learning; imitation,
kasefemg, n. politeness, genUleness; s. agwasen, n.
kasegbomo,n. polite person ; gentleman; s. agwasengbomo, n.
kasemohe, n. place of learning.
kasemotSu, n. room or house of learning,
kasemowe, n. house of learning; school,
kdsdlo, n. former of native dishes or plates (s. ki, n. and
§51q, n. sd, V.) potter; s. gbesdlo, n.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
142 kIsQ — -kt
kds5, n. potters work.
kSisdlotSu, n. potters shop.
kd§dsu, n. potters clay.
kata, V. to lift up, to carry f. i. a, child; to embrace.
katamo, n. lifting up; embracing.
Katamanso, pr. n. of the battle-field of 1826, in which the
Ashanti's were beaten by the tribes under the Danish
and English protection, about 10 miles from Tema inland,
near the village Sasabi, at the foot of the Akwapim-
mountains.
kate, verbal preposition, contracted from ke ate, s. ke and
ya, v.; to, unto; till, untill; s. § 28.
katekate, adj. sour, acid; nySny^nyS, th. s.
katSo, pi. -tSei, n. a shrub bearing small yellow flowers
of a strong smell, and cods; belonging to the mimosa-
plants and producing gumi arabicum; s. k§, n.
kausu, s. kaosu, n.
kawe, n. europ. word, a large cloak with a cowl.
kawe , n. a kind of salt or salt-petre brought from the in-
terior and used as medicine for horses*
kawd, n. ambush, ambuscade, waylaying, s. ka, n. ka, v.
and wo ka, v. ; Ad. th. s. •
kawolg, n. way-layer; person lying in ambush; Ad. th. s.
kg, inf. kemo, v. to cry aloud; to make a rush, to rush;
amekg ke-ba eno, they rushed upon him. S. also ke, y.
kS m. k. yi, v. inf. yik^mg; to cry at s. b., to scream
at s. b.
ke , inf. kg, v. to present, to give as a present; to grant;
to forgive, comp. fa, v. firi, v. ha, v. The verb ke, ha-
ving an impersonal and a personal object, is generally
construed with the auxil. v. ke or no ; nd n. k. kg m. k.
Ke n. k. ke m. k., to present s. th. to s. b., eke sika
kemi or e^d Sika ekemi, he presented gold unto me;
eno-keame, he forgave (it to) them.
kg, n. present, grant, forgiveness, s. kgno, ndkgnd.
ke, n. a heap, a bundle, a load; nso-ke, nsroke, lit. sea-
heap, wave, breaker; laike, a bundle of fuel, wood;
dfeike, a bundle of grass etc.
ke, V. inf. kemo, impert. sing, kemo, to say; to tell; to
command; Ot. se, Adn. de; seldom: kg; comp. k§, wie,
dsadse-tsd, gba etc. A peculiar form and use of this
very frequently employed verb is the verbal-conjunction
„6ki" (Adn. ki, kS, Ot. se), which answers exactly ta
the flebr. noN^ end generally to „that" (iag, its), but
dbyGoogk
ke — ki. 143
stands frequently only in the place of a colon or notes
of quotation, as: Ekemi ake: „Mlba'S he told me (saying):
„I am coming"; ekemi ake eba, he told me that he is
coming. If k§ has no object behind it and the words
said immediately following, ake may be left out, as:
Eke: „Mafe!** and eke ake: rMafe!" he said: „I will
do it!" etc.
ke, inf. kele, v. n. to be long, eke naakpa, it is very long;
s. also dseke, v.
kfe, auxiliary vert), s. § 28; without inflection, Ot. ne, de
(and fa). Ad. ne and k|; originally to take, to hold =
nd, with which it changes and which must be used, if
an inflection of the auxiliary is necessary (as in Ot. fa).
It expresses generally the relation of connection, instru-
mentality etc. as the prepositions „with, by, through"
or the conjunction „and" as far as the latter connects
subjects or objects, but not verbs (for these see „ni",
Ot. „na"), or the ablative case of the latin and the da-
tive case of the greek language. In these cases it may
be said to supply the grammatical want of a verb to
one or more of the two or more subjects or objects,
connected with one (notional) verb, f. i. Mike minyemi
le tsuo niitsumo kome, I and (or with) my brother have
one business; eke tso yile, he flogged him with a stick,
etSreo gbomei ke dSatsui, he carries people and loads;
mikele te, I and he went, 1 went with him; eke Sika
hSmi, he took gold gave me, he gave gold unto me;
eke-h5mi, he gave (it) to me; mike-ba, I came with
(it), i. e. I brought (it), eke-te, he went with (it), i. e.
he took it away; very often the relation expressed by
„ke** is entirely neglected in other languages (even in
the related Otyi) whilst it is indispensable in GfL; f. i.
ewo edsatSu ke-te, Ot. osoa n'adesoa ko, he took his
load away (lit. Ga: he lifted up his load went with,
Ot. he lifted up his load went). This is especially the
case with such forms as: ke-ya (aor. ke-te, s. ya and
te), ke-ba, ke-yasi, ke-baSi, ke-t§6, ke-dSe etc. expres-
sing the relations of: to, unto, till, untill, through, from;
f. i. Enyieo ke-yaSi Osu, he walks and goes (therewith,
thereby) to Osu, he goes to Osu on foot; edso foi ke-
ba hie, he fled and came hither, he fled hither; minu
ke-d§e Osu t6n, I heard it directly (and it came) from
Osu etc. etc. Besides the abovementioned conjunctions
and prepositions expressed by k$, those prepositions
dbyGoogk
144 ke — ke-ka.
'which are used in the greek, latin and german languages
as fore-syllables of verbs are to be compared, esp. (fw-,
con-, and mit*, bct^*, be*, ^t* etc. A peculiar use of ke
is to be noticed in expressions, like: nu ke kpulu, jug
with water, nu ke glase, glass of water etc.
ke, ke dsi, kedsi (Adh. kg, kedsi and jtse), verbal con-
junction generally followed at the end of the sentence
hy „le", lit. say, say (it) Is . . . ., if (rocnn, gcfc^t, gc^
fagt, fattd etc.), negat. ke dsee kfdsee (s. dsi, v.); ke
osumomi le, bomi toi, if thou love me, obey me; kedsi
osumomi le etc. th. s. kedsee nakai le, bele keragt! If
it is not so, then say (it)! ke, kedsi, is generally con-
strued with the aorist tense, seldom with an other, never,
as far as 1 know with the imperf. Comp. also dsikule,
dsi, kule and Ot. „se" and „a" at the end of the con-
ditional sentense. Of verbs combined with the auxiliary
„ke" infinitive forms are formed also combined with ke,
f. i. ekemi.ba, mine and his coming; ekemi wiemo, his
speaking with me.
ke-asi, = ke-yasi.
ke-ba (s. kg, aux. v.), v. to come with, to bring; verbal
prep, (to, unto, till, untill, if the direction is from a
remote place or time to nearer ones, s. ke-ya.)
ke-ba — ke-ya, v. to come and go; verbal adv. to and fro.
ke-dfa, v. to break with.
ke-dse, s. kg, aux. v. to come out with, to bring out;
verb. prep, (from, of).
ke-dsee, s. ke, verb. conj.
ke-dsi, s. th. s.
ke-fe, s. kg, aux. v. to do with —, to make with — , to
make by — , to make from — etc.
ke-fo and
ke-f6 si, V. to cast down, away; s. also se-f6 and fo f5
si, V.
ke-fie no, v. to go on; to put upon.
ke - ha, V. to cover with.
ke - ha, V. to give (s. th. to s. b.).
ke - he, v. to buy with.
ke - hi si, V. to dwell, remain, live with.
ke-ho, V. to pass with, to pass; to cook with.
ke-ho, V. to insert (s. th. betwixt s. th.)
ke-ho, V. to sell with-.
ke -hu, V. to till the ground with-.
ke-ka, V. to try, venture with-; s. ka, v.
d by Google
ke-ka — ke-gfi. 146
ke - kK, V. and
ke - kS si , V. to lie with - , to lay (down).
ke - ke , v. to present (s. th. to s. b.).
ke-ke, V. to say s. th. to-.
ke - ko , V. to take up with.
ke - kdj.v. to bite with.
ke kpah, 8. ke-pan, v.
ke - kpe, V. to meet with.
ke - ku, V. to break with.
ke n. k. kuma, v. to spare; tu use s. th. sparingly.
ke-la, V. to hang, fasten with; to sing with.
ke -le, V. to know by. ^
ke - le, V. to feed with, to noqrish by.
ke-le he, v. to live by; milee noni eke-leo ehe, T don't
know what he lives by. '
ke - li, V. to mock with. >
ke-lo, V. to take up with; to take up together; to knit
or weave by or with.
ke - lu, V. to strike with.
ke - lu si, V. to fall with, - - by.
ke -ma, s. to set; to build with; to lend; (any thing, ex-
cept money, s. fa).
ke - m6 , V. to take hold by or with.
ke -na, v. to see with or by; to get by.
ke-no, V. to struggle, fight with.
ke - nu, V. to hear with or by; to feel with; to drink with.
ke - nya, v. to rejoice with.
ke-pan, ke kpan, v. to conjure; to make a conjuration;
to make a covenant with.
ke pe, V. = ke - fe, v. •
ke-pila, v. to wound with.
ke - po , V. = ke - fo, V. to cut with.
ke - sa , V. to prepare with.
ke - s6 , V. to forge with or by.
ke - so or sQ , v. to poison by or with.
ke - sra, V. to watch or visit with.
ke - su, v. to contract with.*
ke - sumo, V. to love with.
ke-sa, V. to rub, polish, whitewash with.
ke-sa, V. to burn with.
ke - se, V. to reach with, to make, s. th. reach; = ke-yasi,
combined form: ke-yase (to, unto, till, until!).
ke - se , sometimes = ke-dsi , verbal conjunction , = if.
Zimmerniann, Akra-Yocab. 10
dbyGoOgk
146 ke-Si — ke-wie.
ke-§i, V. knock with; combined form: ke - yaSi (Ot. de
kosi) = ke-ya (to, unlo, till, untill); lit. until it arrive
or knocks; comp. ke-§e, v.; masuniole ke-yasi raigbe
lebg, 1 will love him until death,
ke - la, pi. tra, v. to touch with; to sit with, to set.
ke - ta he, v. to touch with.
ke - ta mli, v. to stir with; to sit in with; to set in, in!o<
ke - ta na, v. to touch with at s. th.; to set at; to dispute
with; to cover the end, brim with..
ke-ta no, v. to sit on with; to set on; okele ata ablogwa
no, set him on a chair,
ke - ta se, v. to set behind; to touch behind with,
ke-ta si, V. to sit down with; to set down; eke gbeke
le ta si, she set the child down,
ke-le, V. to conceal s. th.
ke-te, V. aor. tense of ke-ya, s. this; to be gone with,
ke-tfa, V. to strike with; to build with,
ke - ti and
ke - titi, V. to scratch with,
ke - to, V. to put away, to order, s. to, v.
k^-to, pi. iro, V. to be satisfied with,
ke - tra, v. pi. of ke - ta, s. ta, v.
ke - tsa, V. to dig with,
ke -tsa no, v. to be connected with, to be joined to, to
continue, s. t§a no, v.; neke fii ne ke fulaotsano, this
river is connected with the Volta.
ke-tse, V. to pluck with,
ke - tse, V. to sting with; wobii ke gai t§^o rao, bees sting
(one) with a sting. •
ke-tse, V. to delay with; to call with, s. t§e, v.; ekemi
tse fio, he delayed or stayed a little with me.
ke-tsi, V. to move with; s. tsi, v.
ke - tsi he, v. th. s.
ke - tsi na, v. to stop up with, to hinder with; ake tSo
tsi gbe le na, the way is stopped by a tree,
kg - tsi se, V. to push (behind) with.
k^ -tsi Xh, V. to mention with,
ke - tu , V. to jump with,
ke - wa yi, v. to be cruel with,
ke - wadie, v. to strengthen with or by; mike-awadse mihe,
I will strengthen myself by (it).
ke - wamo, v. to creep with,
ke - wic, V. to speak with.
dbyGoogk
kfi-wiri -" U. 147
ke-wiri, V. to lift with, tSone ake-woo tso kple ko, si
dSee nidsi fod§e; with a machine a large tree is eleva-
ted and not with mere hands.
ke - wo , V. to sleep with ; to lie with.
ke - wo, V. to war with, to fight with; ekele awu, he will
make war with him.
ke - wye , V. to marry with ; eke mamai ekpa wyele , he
married her with 6 dresses (as a dowry).
ke - wyi, v. to avoid by.
ke - wyie (wie, wye) v. to grind with.
ke - ya, v.. to go with, to accompany; aor. ke-te, fut. ke-
ate, prf. ke-ete; s. ya, v. AuxiL verb ke-ya, prs. ke-
miya, - - nya, imperf. ke-yaa; perf. ke-Me; aor, ke-te,
fut. ke-ate, V. lit. to go with, used as' verbal prepos. =»
to, unto, till, untill; into etc. if the motion goes from
a nearer to a farther place or time (s. ke-ba) s. §. 28.
Etereo dsatsui ke-yaa Akwapim, he carries loads to
Akwapim; edso foi ke-te Krobo, he fled to Krobo etc.
Of time ke-si, generally in the compound form ke-ya§i
is more in use.
ke-yasi, v. s. ke-si, v.
ke-ye, v. to eat with; to deal with; to agree with; to be
one with; s. ye, v. ,
ke-ye na, v. to negotiate, bargain with.
ke-ye, neg. yee, yen, yeko, v. to draw (water etc.) with;
eke blage yeo nu, she draws water with a bucket.
ke-ye, neg. ke-be, v. to be some where with, to stop
with; to join with; Ekemi ye, he is with me; ekemi be,
he is not with me, s. ye, v. Ad. ke-ne and M- ne, v.
ke-yi, V. to flog with; ake tso yile ahu, he was mucK.
beaten with a stick.
ke-yo, imperf. tense of ke-ye, to be somewhere with.
ke - yo , V. to perceive with or by.
ke, V. inf. kemo, to press (by keeping back the breath,
as a woman in travail, or as in liftmg up s. th. heavy
or in crying out) ; to rush upon s. th. with violence ;
ame-ke ke-ba eno , they rushed upon him ; to lift s. th.
heavy, s. k^, v.
k^ he §i, V. to travail; s. komo, th. s. and k^mo, v.
k§ he si bo, v. to cry with great power.
kg or kg, Adn. conj. that = ake in Gs. S. also tse in AdA.,
Ot. se.
k§, at the end and kSle at the beginning of^a sentence,
conj. yet; still; though; even; (boc^, bennoc^, wennglei^,
10*
dbyGoogk
148 kg — k^nefdmo.
obgIet(]^; ixcax). Eba k^, yet he came, or: K^le eba th. s.
Eba mra, §i kSle ekpe se, he quickly came, but still he
came too late; nakai noA kS, even so, just so; Ad. th.
s.; bele kg (blekg) then still-.
kg, Adii. pron. = no in GS^ that, those; but following the
word to which it belongs; f. i. ndmlo kg, 6. no gbomo,
that person.
kgkalO} n. a bold man; a brave man; an adventurer = ekSilo,
comp. this, ekS and ka.
kgkg, v., redupl. of ke, v. to grant,
keke, V. redupl. of ke, to say; to say repeatedly or fre-
quently,
kgkg, adv. only, solely, but; conj. generally followed by
„le" or ,,ni", then, comp. bele, no le. Comp. kake,
AdA. one. Comp. also flo, pe, td, do, th. s.
kekike, adv. repeatedly (f. i. sounding, speaking etc.) esp.
to corroborate, ke, gbe etc.
kekete, adv. very drily; used to corroborate verbs with the
same notion, as: gbi, v. to be dry, gbi keketg, to be
very dry, very stiff, hard etc.
'kekrg, akekrg, n. wreath, crown {(frefpavog); any thing
bound round the head, s. fai, n.
kglo, n. one who makes presents; presenter, granter.
kglo, n. a person rushing upon s. th. (lifting up s. th.,
crying etc.) s. kg, v.
kele, n. length, fr. ke, to be long,
kgle, conj. yet, still, = kg, s. this,
k^lo, n. sayer, teller fr. ki, v. to say. »
kglo, n. s. kg, V. (and kg, v.) person lifting s. th. heavy;
, cryer.
k^mo, n. saying, telling, fr. kg. v. to say; tale,
kemo, V. inf. kgmo, to press by peeping back the breath,
to sigh. S. kg, V. Comp. also kdmo, v.; s. also domo
nt§oi, V.
k§mo, n. sighing; sigh; comp. also: ntsQidomo, n.
kgmo, n. lifting up of s. th. heavy, fr. kg, v.
kenam, n. dry fish (esp. herring, s. man) fryed with palm-
oil and pepper (comp. Ot. nammeat and kye, to fry),
kenamfadlo, n. dealer in fryed fish,
kgne, adj. barren (only used of persons, men and women,
about animals s. sS, v.); yO kgne, a barren woman;
kgne dgile, he (or she) is childless; fe-, to be childless,
kgne, Ad. conj. = kgle, still, though,
kgnefemo, n. barrenness (of persons) s. kgne, fe-.
dbyGoogk
kenken — ki^. 149
kenken, adj. and adv. bright; brightly; the latter esp. to
corroborate verbs of, related notions^ as, t§e-, to be very
pare; comp. kane, kankan, adj., ban, hen etc.
kend, pi. kenii, n. present; grant; dash.
k^nte, n. Ot. th. s., cotton-cloth made by the natives, con-
sisting of narrow cotton stripes of different colours,
sewed together. Most of it is manufactured in Ayigbe
or Krepe.
kentehdlQ, n. dealer in native cotton' cloth.
kentehdmo, n. dealing in it.
kenteld, n. weaving of it.
kentelolo, n. cotton-weaver.
ken ten, n. wicker-basket.
k^redsi, adj. and
kSredsik^redsik^redsi , adj. large, very large = kpleikplei.
kfise, adj. (Otyi) large, great =kple in Gfi.
kesui, n. dan. cheese.
kesuifemo, n. cheese-making.
kesuifelQ, n. cheese-maker.
kesuihdlo, n. cheese-monger.
kesuihomo , cheese-mongery.
kete, n. a set of play-instruments; a kind of musik made
by them; a kind of dance.
kete, s. ke-te and ke-ya.
ketea (and ketia, Ot. tyetia), orig. adj. and adv. short, only
used with the verb „fo" in: „fo ketea," v. to cut short,
i. e. to circumcise.
keteafo, n. circumcision. It is practised by the GS- and
Adanme- tribe and a peculiarity of theirs. It is not di-
rectly connected with their religion, nor executed by
persons holding religious office, though it is always
in the keep of a certain family. The boys (and only
they, but not girls also, as some authors affirm) are
circumcised about the 13. year of age (comp. Gen. 17,
25.) which time points to a Mahomedan origin. Comp.
folQ.
keteafolQ, n. the person whose business it is to circum-
cise boys. The business comes from father to son.
keteapopoe, n. Ad. th. s.
k^tek^te, adj. and adv. exact; exactly; fSne ketekete = fine
fintl, high noon; exactly in the middle of the day. Comp.
also fltSofltso.
keya, s. ke-ya, v.
ki& (kyS, s. ka) and
dbyGoogk
150 U^ luta — kitekite.
ki^ kita, v. (ace. to HaDSon), to swear; s. kS and na, v.
kike, adv. Adn. thus, so == neke in GL
KlnkH (sometimes also heard KdnkS and GingS, Ot. th. s.
Comp. GSi and nkrd) pr. n. of the town of Dutch Akra,
the king of which is the head -king of the petty kings
of Ga (Akra), Osu (€hristiansborg) , §ai, Krobo, Akwa-
pim, Akyem, and some others.
kinks, n. fine dress. Comp. kankan.
kinka , adj. and adv. full of people, populous.
KinkSnyo, pi. Kinkamei, pr. n. a Kink3-man, KtnkSpeople;
Kinkdbii, pi. n. th. s.
KlnkSwe^ pr. n. of a quarter of Osu.
Kinkawebii, pr. n. of the people of it.
kinta, n. s. kita, n. oath; command.
kiri, n. only used with „fo" in fo kiri, v. to be giddy;
and hie fo kiri, v. th. s. ^
(kiri, V. = gli, gri, kri, v. to be in a rage; to be road;
also used of animals).
kirifo, n. giddiness.
(kirilo, n. enraged, maddened person or animal).
(kirimo, n. rage).
kitd, sometimes kinta, n. (Ot. ntam) oath (perh. fr. ky@
nta, to cut in Olyi, comp. the hebr. {niD nns) sworn
agreement betwixt two persons (comp. p5n, kpSn); the
matter agreed or sworn to, therefore: commandment;
command; (comp. mra, mla) ka kita, to swear; =na, v. ;
ka m. k. or n. k. kita , to swear by s. b. or s. th. ; ka
kita fd m. k. no, to swear and cast it upon s. b., i. e.
to bind s. b. by an oath; td kita, to break an oath; to
transgress a commandment or agrisement sworn to etc.
to kita no, th. s.
kitakalo, n. swearing person.
kitakamO) n. swearing.
kitanotdmo, n. and
kitatdmo» n. breaking of an oath, agreement, commandment;
transgression.
kitatdlo, -not6lo,-n. transgressor.
kite, defective verb, v. to go on, only used in the impera-
tive and potential mood; sometimes it is combined with
the Otyi verb nante, to walk (= Ga nyie), as: kite nante,
go on (and) walk; if not „nante" is a corruption from:
ni w(5te, ni wate == that we might go. The word may
derive from ke-te (comp. ke-lle no).
kitekite, v. redupl. of the former.
dbyGoogk
kilea — kla. 151
kilea = ketea, s. this and the following words. Ad, th. s.
kilo, n. pocket-knife.
Words which are not found under kl must be sought
for under kr, the former being more the pronunciation
of the younger, the lattet that of the elder people,
kla, a plural form of ka, v. to' be fixed; to fix, to nail;
to bruise.
kla, inf. klamg, v. (Ot. kra) to divine, especially used of
the fortune telling or divining of the Alahonadans,. s,
klamo; the word seems to be connected' with kla, n,
s. this, perhaps the same as iaifian^sax^ai. Comp. gba
and ka, v.
kla si, pi. of ka si, s, this.
'kla, okla, n. ('kra, okra, Ot. th, s.), ghost, spirit, soul
(comp. sisa; mumo end susum^, Ot. sunsum); genius;
• demon (comp. wohj; the slave chosen by his master to
be his continual companion and - according to the notion
of some tribes of western Africa — to be sacrificed over
his grave that he may accompany him in the world to
come. The word is one of the greatest difficulty to be
defined. According to the notion of the natives the „kla"
of a person exists before his birth and may be Ihe soul
or spirit of a relation or pther person already dead (s,
bla, v.); as soon as a woman is with child, she goes
to a fetishpriesl (see wonlse and okomfo) and asks the
„kla" of her child which is called by the priest, sundry
questions, which are answered by the priest who pre-
tends to hear the „kla" etc. In life the „kla" is con-
sidered partly as the soul or spirit of a person (s. su-
sum^), partly as a being apart of and without him, who
protects him, gives him good or bad advices, s. kla, v.
etc. (s. gbesi); receives thanks and thankofferings as a
fetish (s. won and comp. iaifjuav). Every person is
moreover supposed to have two „kla", a male and a
female, the former being of a bad, the latter of a good
disposition (s. kla and kia, n.). After death the „kla"
becomes „sisa", s. this. In the language of Christianity
the word „kla" has formerly been used :=zdai(jmVy after-
wards is was left unemployed,
'kla, okla, n. (Ot. 'kra, krawa), feniinine gender of kra, n.
s. this.
klS, V. to shove a business which is not agreeable, upon
another (ein ©ef^dft auf jemanb anberS f^icbcn); ameii-
kia, they shove their business upon eachothen
dbyGoogk
152 Uaba — klo.
klaba, n. s. kla.
klabi, n. child of a spirit; a child which is bom the same
day of the week in which its parent is born, is called
his or her „klabi"; s. kla, n.
klakate, n. span (measure); klo, th. s.
klakun , klakunO (Ot. krakum), n. dan. kalkun , turkey.
klakunbi, n. young turkey.
krakuAwglg, pi. -wodSi, n. turkey egg.
klala, n. white linen (comp. kpekpe); bleached calico.
klala-atade, n. white linen or cotton dress.
klalg, s. klamo, n.
klalo, adj. and adv. ready; fe-, to make ready, to be ready;
comp. gbe na, v. ; sa , v.
klalofemo, n. making or being ready; preparation; readi-
ness.
klSmaklSma, adj. and adv. greedy, fierce; greedily, fiercely.
klamg, pi. orklamoi, n. lit. a person who has a „k]a^* or
is possessed by a „kla" (= klalo from kla, v.); or perh.
= klamo, inf. or imprs. n. „oracle"; a person by whom
the „kla^ is called or asked (s. klatsemo); a diviner,
soothsayer etc. Comp. okomfo and gbalo. Especially
mahmnedan fortune-tellers are called thus.
klamo, n. nailing, fixing; s. ka, v.
klame, n. fortune-telling; divining; soothsaying, comp. gbale;
fr. kla, V.
klamgnii, pi. n. things pertaining to soothsaying or a sooth-
sayer.
kldn, pi. klddsi, n. hyena; especially the larger kind; Ad.
gbede, n.
klan, adj. broad?
klanma, n. circle; adv. aroud, bo-, v. to surround.
klanmabo, n. surrounding.
klante (Ot. krante) n. perh. a portugie word; sword; cut-
lass.
klata, n. ; slice (of yams etc.).
klatafO) n. cutting in slices.
'klati, aklati, n. cactus.
'klati-afaban, n. cactus-fence.
'klatihme, n. cactus-thorn.
'klatitso, n. cactus plant.
'klemna, n. a kind of vegetables.
klewi (probable an Ayigbeword), n. a certain bird.
klili, krili=glili, n. cricket; ©ritte.
UO9 n. span.
dbyGoogk
Uq — ko 8fi. 153
Uo, kolo, pi. form of ko, v. to take (many little things); to
gather; aufjefen.
UqUq, n. bolt.
kloklo, adj. loquacious; s. gobigobi, bleble, th. s.
kloklo, adj. lukewarm; fe-, v. to be lukewarm; s. kulo-
kulo, adj.
kloklgfemg, n. lukewarmth; loquaciousness.
kloko, s. kroko, ekroko; adj. other.
klomo, n. taking, gathering, fr. klo, v.
klomobi = kromobi, n. firstborn.
'klonta, s. aklonta, n. fork.
'klonto, s. aklonto, n. horn.
klop^, n. dan. button.
klop^flQ, n. buttonhole.
Klote, pr. n. of a lagune and small rivulet N. E. of Osu;
its spirit or fetish (woii).
kloti^, n. boundary, limit; comp. husu, funanmaSa etc.
klu, s. kulu, n.
kluku, n. the hinder part of the head, occiput.
ko, inf. komo, v. to pick; to hew stones.
ko, n. bush, wood, forest; country if contrasted with the
town, interior; north, s. kongbe. The G3- country is
divided into the plain or savanna covered with grass
(s. nS, n.) along the sea and the forest along the moun-
tains and in the interior, called „kd''. This 'latter is
neither, as has been supposed, the primitive forest nor
a forest like those found in Europe, but rather, as far
as arable land is concerned , the fallow field (s. gba ko),
of which one portion after the other is cultivated for a
few years and then let to itself for 10 — 30 years again.
It is pretty well inhabited and therefore „kO^^ and „ko
se, kose» kuse^, used = country, the towns being at the
sea- or river -side or on the mountains (s. Sai, Krobo^
Osudoku, Akwapim etc.). Comp. also „akrowa^' and
„man", n.
kd se (kose, kuse) n. lit. behind the bush ($intermalb)>
cultivated land and villages in the bush (see the precee-
ding word), country in contrast to town: „ete ko se,*'
he went into- country (for recreation of health, agricul-
ture, pleasure etc.); plantation; „etsuo nii ye ko le se,"
he works in the plantation, comp. nmdn, abo» trom, n.;
nS, n. Bq ko, v. to stroll about (in the bush); gba ko^
T. to cut bush; U ko, v. to bum hnsix etc.
dbyGoogk
154 b) — kd na.
ko» aaxil. verb of the negative voice of the imprt. and
pot. mood and of the posit, subjunctive mood in Adn.
= ka in Ga, comp. §. 27. 28; kope, do it not, do not
do it = kafe in Gd.
ko (comp. eko in Ga and Ot., and ekome in Ga), perhaps
originally a radical verb in Ga and Otyi, now indef. pro-
noun or article, pi. komei a, an (ein eine); as such it
is less used as the indef. article in Engl, and German,
the nouns being often left without any article and only
if the definiteness or indefiniteness must be expressed
connected with the definite article „le'' and the indefinite
„ko'*; compare: Nu le eba, the man (mentioned) has
come; nO eba, (a) man has come (not a woman); tou
ko eba, a (certain) man has come, some man has come ;
gbomo ko neke eba, a certain (or some) man (whose
name I have forgotten) has come; — some; any; one;
once ; in the latter signification (if not in a verbal) it is
used to express the perfect tense of the negat. voice,
indicat. mood of verbs (s. § 27, 2.) , eb^ko , he has not
yet come (or not once come); comp. ba ko, come once
(fomm' einmaU), come now, come then! Wether the
negative Adii. particle „ko" (Ga ka) has any relation to
this, is doubtful. Comp. hi in Otyi.
ko, n. (=kon), pi. kodsi, horn, esp. some jery long horns
of large antelopes, as the otrSm, etc. S. aklonto, the s.
'ko, ako, n. parrot, esp. the blue kind with red tails.
ko, pi. k{)lQ, or klo, inf. kgmo, kolomo, imperat. sing, ko,
V. to take (up) with the fingers, the bill, the mouth;
pi. to pick up (auf(efcii) ; to eat (of birds) ; generally
used for taking up smaller things, comp. n6 and wo, v.
but also used very extensively like an auxiliary verb as
kg, Ao, wo, f. i. yako ke-ba, lit. go take and come, i. e.
bring (it) I
ko gbe, V. to take a road, .to enter a journey (cinen SBeg
einfc^Iagen).
ko mli, pi. kolo mli, inf. mlikomo, -kolomg^ v. to pick
out, select.
ko noko he noko, v. to have s. th. to do with s. th.
ko, V. negligent pronunciation of kwo, v. to climb up.
k6, pi. kdmo, inf. kSmo, v. to stick (f. in the teeth, bill,
mouth); to bite; to gripe; mimusuA kdmi, my belly
gripes me, I have belly ache; to be in travails, = k6,
k^mo, k5mo, v.
kd na, V. to stick in the mouth, bill etc.
dbyGoogk
16 myanyoft SiSi -• koi. 155
kftmyanyofi SiSi, v. to bile the teeth together,
id si, V. lit. to bite the groand; figuratively: to lie dead
on the field of battle; comp. „xxC^ ®rad beifien'^ in
German.
16 y n. a kind of food made of maize -flour and eaten in
whomQWQ.*' Comp. kpokpoi.
'k^le, akoble, n. eur. word: copper.
'kQbleno, pi. -nii, n. s. th. of copper,
kobo, n. strolling or loitering about (in the bush):. wander*
ing, s. tsomlo; running of in the bush; vagabondry; fr.
bo ko, V.
kobodsen, n. vagabonds life,
kobi^fo, n. (Ot. form = kobolg) stroller; vagabond,
kddo, V. to be crooked y inf. kdddmo; -toi, inf. toikdddmg,
V. to bow the ear falsely.
k5dd, k5ddii, pi. kddddsi, adj. crooked, also tropically
used; perverted; hinmei kddon, squinting eye.
Ikodotse, pi. -tsemei, n. a person of a crooked, perver-
ted caracter; an unrighteous person),
kdddmo, n. crookedness,
(kodokodsomg, n. perverted judgement),
kodso, V. inf. kodsomo» to judge; to dispute; ke m. k. — ,
to dispute with s. b., comp. bu ateh and dSe iiwane, v.
kodso, pi. kodsoi, n. a kind of trees,
kodsolo, n. judge; disputer.
kodsolQse!, n. judgement-seat,
kodsomo, n. judgement; justice; dispute; palaver.
kodSomobe, n. judgement-season,
kodgomghe, n. place of judgement,
kodsomosei = kodSolosel.
kof6n, n. comet of an elephant tooth used by kings for
music and signals in war, kpS-, fli-, v. to blow the horn,
'kofi, akofi, n. garden-bed, layer (s. kobe, in Adn.).
kofiba, n. lit. bed-leaf, a kind of nightshade.
kofQ, n. a kind of berries,
kogba, n. cutting down of the bush for cultivation, fr. gba
ko, V.
kogbalg, n. a person cutting bush.
.kogbe, koyigbe, n. interior, north, north-ward (lit. bush-
way, s. nso).
koh^Q, n. a large beautiful bird with a crown on his head,
living near rivers. Ot. th. s.
koi, prh. = kue> n. neck of a building, covered door-
nva;; s. kpata, n.; second story of a house.
dbyGoogk
156 koi — ^^kokole,
koi, n. hoe; hQ — , to hoe, to work with the hoe.
kol, n. bite (of a serpent f. i.).
koihQmo, n. working with the hoe.
koihaio, n. labourer with the boe.
koikoi, kwoikwoi, kuikui, n. heaps, ruins; comp. kpoikpoi
koikoi, adv. little by little, used of water etc. when spil
ling; eCeg Si koikoi, it spills little by little; in drops
kokoi, adv. th. s.
koi§i, n. the place under a covered door-way, under tin
door, s. kpataSi; lateSi etc. Si = Sikpon.
koitso, n. handle of a hoe.
koklo, kokro, v. to roll; to wallow, to wetter; gen«rallj
used of round or roundish things. The word seems to
be a natural sound, being also found in other languages:
comp. nDiD, h:hyy xvxXogy cu^cus, jiuflel, fuflein; Stt%tl
feflcln; Sitfcl etc.
koklo, kokro, n. old palm-wine, i. e. such as drawn from
trees felled a long time, which is unhealthy,
koklo, kokrO, adj. large and round; round,
koklogb^nting, n. lit. roll-sheep; a kind of beetles rolling
round pieces of dung before them, s. tdni, th. s.
koklobii, a kind, of diminutive plural of koklo, but used as
a noun, globules, little round grains. Comp. § 25.
koklolo, n. roller; -mo, n. rolling,
koklolonto, kokrolonto, n. wheel; ironically, a humpback,
koklolontoten, n. axle.
koklodSo, kokrodso, n. the fruit of a tree, about as large
as a coconut; the ashes of it is used for soap, togeUier
with palmoil etc.
koklodSotSo, pi. -tSei, n. the tree bearing it.
koko, n. a plant with roots like yams, and eaten like it
'koko, akoko, n. Guinea -com; the stalks of it resemble
maize, but where maize bears the blossoms, this com
has also the fruit, which resembles lin-seed.
koko, n. palm of the hand (s. do), but generally when
shut or filled, therefore fist; handful; bo koko, v. in^
kokobo, lit. to make or ball, a fist, therefore, to warn;
do-koko, fist,
kokobo, n. warning, admonition,
kokobolo, n. admonisher.
kokoi, adv. in drops; = koikoi, adv.
kokodene, n. frog.
kokokol warning interjection: stop! don't! mind!
kokolfi, n. a seaflsh, shad-fish?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
kokons* — kologbe. 157
kokons^, n. hypocrisy; lying; s. amale, apasa.
kokonsajfo, n. and
kokgnsalg, n. a liypocrite; comp. opasafo, osatofo, n.
kokont6, n. cassada dryed in the sun and afterwards made
into flour etc.
kokot^, n. a very tasteful sea-fish.
'kokos, akokos, n. europ. word, cocoanut.
'kokosnu, n. cocoa-milk.
*kokostso, pi. -t§ei, n. cocoatree.
kokpo = ko-okpo, n. wild dove; bush-dove.
kole, V. to pick with the finger-nails, with claws etc. to
* dig with the same ; to pick out. Int kglemo. Comp. ko
and kolo and kd, v.
kole, conj. if; adv. perhaps; s. kule.
Kole, pr. n. of a small rivulet with a lagune east of Akra
qr Jamestown.
kole, conj. then; seldom used; s. keke le; and comp.
kule, conj.
kolemo, n. picking, digging with s. th. sharp as claws etc.
koli, inf. kolimo, v. = kole, v.
koli, n. a kind of precious beads or coloured stones, worn
as ornament by the natives of this -coast and paid by
the same weight of gold. It is said, that they are dig-
ged out of the ground all along the Slave -coast and
found in ordered strings, as the bones of a decayed
snake or as if formerly bound together, the string being
decayed. Some suppose that they are of animal origin
(such is the idea of the natives themselves), some that
they were manufactured in Egypt, some thousand years
ago and brought here by the first settlers, and some that
they were formerly manufactured in Venice and the art
lost. Comp. also adiakpa, adeakpa, n.
kolimo, n. picking.
koliko, n. gall; bile; s. ebo, n. th. s.
kSli, n. Adfi. = kSii, shoulder.
kdliSi, n. Adn. elbow (lit. under shoulder).
kdlind, n. Adn. shoulder (upper shoulder).
k61o, n. lit. bushmeat, bushflesh (comp. lo, lofld, i^Sqj^Io,
faAlo, helo, wolo, hewulo); beast of the field, any
quadruped, cattle, animal in general; brute; foolish per-
son, fool; body, piece (f. i. loads, barrels etc.). ISome-
times the word is separated as: ko len lo, meat of the
(mentioned) bush; comp. ko, ko se, n.
kologbe, and
dbyGoogk
158 koloiagbe — k<«.
koloiagbe, n. slaugbtering of beasts.
koloiat^u, kolotSu, n. stable; yard for cattle.
kolokwelo, koloiakwelo, n. herdsman.
kolobi, n. little animal, — creature.
kolobu, n. bole of a beast.
koloniitSumo, n. foolish business, foolishness.
kolonilyenii, n. food, fodder of beasts.
koloniiyeniiand, n. manger.
kolond, pi. -nii, n. s. th. pertaining to animals.
kolo, pi. form of kg, y. to take; to hem in; inC. kolQiiK
kolo, n. taker, gatherer.
kolo na, koro na, inf. nakolomg, to hem in, s. bao, i
mu, V.
kolo> n. a kind of palms,
koloyibii, pi. n. the fruit of it.
kdlo, n. a biter; a biting person or animal,
kolomo, n. taking (of many things, s. ko, t.), pickiDg up;
gathering,
'kome, ekome, num. one, alone; mikome, I alone,
kdm, and
kdmi, n. boiled maize-bread; used where bakmg is prohibi-
ted by the fetish,
kdmi, n. dan. (Jtummel) cumin; caraway; gen. osuk6mi.
'komfo, okomfo, n. (Ot. th. s. fr. the Otyi-verb kom, v. to
be possessed of a fetish) diyiner; soothsayer; s. gbalo
and klamo.
komo, n. picking of stones,
kgrno, n. taking; comp. also kolomo, fr. ko, obj. pL kolo,
to take; picking, eating of birds,
kdmo, V. to bite (pi. form), to gripe; to have gripe, to
be in travail; comp. kd, k^, k^mg and kg, v.
kfimg, n. biting, griping; sticking, fr. kd, y.
kdmgbg, n. time of travailing. ,
'kgmg, nkgmg, n. (Ot. the s.) sadness, grief; ye — (Ot
di — ), V. to be sad, grieved; to relate a sad story; to
complain; to commune with each other in confidence, to
discourse. Ad. th. s.
'kgmgyeli, nkgmgyeli, n. sadness, grief; sad story; storf;
discourse. .
'kgmgyelilg, 'kgmgyelg, nkom., n. a sad person; momn^-
'kgmgyeli-atade, n. mourning-dress,
'kgmgyelisane, kgmgsane, n. sad story, sad palaver,
kon, pi. kodsi, n. comer, extreme, end, horn (comp. ko, n.
th. s. and aklonto).
dbyGoogk
Wn — koschilehc. 159
kdfi, pi. kddSi, n. Adn. kdli, sbonlder; tta kdii, v. to carry
on the shoulder, to shoulder; comp. tere, wo, Me, v.;
nme m. k. koa no, v. to oblige one; to give one allow-
ance.
kdn, n. dan. king (comp. maAtse); especially the king in
Europe who has power over the natives; native kings
are seldom or never called thus; except in Ergbg, s.
Ad. Vocab.
koA-atade, n. royal garment.
kona, n. lit. outskirts of the bush (s. ko and na); privy;
ya — , V. to go to — ; comp. nyS, wa; tsono, tsui ase,
nsona, niiase etc.
kon^, Adn. conj. = koni in GS, that; bamit.
konfai, n. crown, s. mantsefai and akekre, n.
koni, conj. (fr. ko and ni, s. both), that, so that; bamif,
bag, bamit bag; followed by the pot. mood; comp. ni,
th. s., and ake. By some people the word is very fre-
quently used and must then often be given by „and"
(s. ni) and „and so", „then"; comp. also keke ni; noni,
bgni, dani etc.
konim, n. (Ot.) victory; ye — , to gain the — .
kSnimyeli, n. victory.
konimyelilo , -yelo, n. victor.
kdnno, n. upper shoulder.
konse, n. place behind the shoulder-shoulderblade.
konte, n. cornerstone.
kontromfi (Ot. th. s.), n. a large kind of monkeys (^unb$«
affe?).
kdntfa, n. carrying on the shoulder.
kop^, n. europ. word, cup.
kose, kuse, n. = ko se, lit. place behind the bush, bush
with the plantation in it; plantation, country,
koseade, n! = kosedsen.
koseadebo, n. plantation-life; s. adebo, n.
kosebii, s. kosenyo.
kosedSe, and
kosedSen, n. state of the country,
kosefemo, n. country-play,
kosegbe, n. way to the country; plantation-way; byway;
path,
kosehlle, n. kosesihile, n. living dwelling in the country;
couritry-life; country-dwelling,
kosehllehe, n. country-dwelling-place;' country-seat.
dbyGoogk
160 kosenyo — kotonio.
kosenyo, masc. n.; pi. kosehl, roan from the plantation;
com. n. pi. kosemei and kosebii, planter; rustic; farmer;
peasant; boor, clown, rough person; country-man.
kosesane, n. country -palaver.
kosetSe, pi. -tSemei, n. country-man; owner of a planta-
tion = AmdfttSe.
kosetsu, n. country-room*; — house.
kosgwe, n. country-house; — seat.
koseyo, pi. -yei; fem. n. country-womaii, woman from the
plantation etc.
kdsdilkdsd, pi. -sol, Ot. th. s. n. chain.
kOsS, n. bush-burning.
kosikosi, adj. and adv. (fe m. k. yi — , v. to make one's
head to go round); doubtful; at a loss.
kota, V. inf. kotamo, to fold, to fold up (of cloth etc.).
kotai, and
kotaikotai, adj. folded, wringled, contracted; s. ktiatal, th. s.
kotalo, n. folder.
kotamg, n. folding.
Kotei, pr. n; of males.
koto, V. inf. kotomo, to incline, bow (s. kua Si and kula
si) ; — m. k. to bow before s. b. ; koto toi, v. to incline
the ear for false judgement; redupl. kctokoto, v. to be
over-civil, servile.
koto si, V. inf. sikotomo, to bow down.
koto, n. bow, arch; kotomo, n. th. s.
koto, koti, n. engl. coat.
koto, kotonko, kototo, adj. and adv. bowed by age; old,
very old; agedly.
kotokotomo, n. servility.
kotoko, n. the large kind of porcupines.
kolQkogal, n. the quills (lit. „arrow8") of the porcupine.
kptokoto, n. bubble, bubbling, adv. -ly; tfa — , v. to boil
bubblingly, to bubble.
kotoku, n. pocked, bag etc. stomach; comp. flotQ. Ot. th. s.
wo kotoku mli, v. to pocket.
kotokuiiduku, n. pocket-hand-kerchief.
kotokuflmo, n. closing of a bag.
kotokufenemo, n. opening of a bag.
kotokukpS, n. lit. string of the stomach or of a bag; meat-
pipe.
kotokuna, n. opening, brim of a bag.
kotomo, n. bowing, inclining; bow (i&urflinfl); arch; =8a-.
tSoyiteil, a3ctt(>immel; tester.
dbyGoogk
kotoiiko — kpa fai. 161
kotonko, s. koto, th. s.
kotose, n. back; [Rudfen.
kotosewui, n. back-bone(s).
kototo, s. koto.
kotolQ, n. bower, person bowing; servile person.
kotsa, n. sponge of the natives made of fibres of trees and
used for washing, wiping, cleansing their teeth etc.
Comp. bosao and nsohkotSa.
kotSe, pi. -tsemei, n. lit. bushfather, lord of the bush, one
of the epithets of the leopard, comp. olowo, mlantfi,
hienmalo etc.
kotsebi, n. young leopard.
kotsebu, n. leopards lair.
kotso, pi. -tsei, n. a kind of trees; s. kodso, n.
kotsu, n. bush-house.
kowe, Ad. s. Ad. Voc. bush-village.
kowe, n. a plant of a strong sweet scent used for tea, put
into soup etc.
kowetso, n. th. s.
kowie, n. a plant or shrub, very propable a kind of pepper =
kowyiei, n. bush-pepper.
koyo, n. air, wind; here koyo, v. to take the air; koyo
tfa, V. to blow (of the wind); — nme, v. to cease blow-
ing. Comp. ahum.
koyoheremo, n. air- taking; airing.
koyghumQ, n. blowing of the wind.
kQyohme, n. ceasing of the wind.
koyotfa, n. blowing.
kp generally initiates words, seldom p alone; sometimes
both are used.
kpa, V. inf. kpa, kpamo, kpale, pi. form: kpla; to be
moved, to move about (jie^ew; um^erjte^en), to be
drawn, dragged; to draw; to break; to break off, to
cease, finish; to snap; to snatch; to take off; to anoint,
— mu, to anoint with oil; to be bald, inf. kpale; to be
void of, to miss, want; etc. Compare gba, kpS and pa,
pai in Otyi. The principal combinations are the follow-
ing: hie kpa no, v. to have the face drawn off, to forget,
s. kpa hie no, inf. hlenokpamo; yi kpa, yiten kpa, v. to
be baldheaded, hairless, inf. yitenkpale; Nyonmo kpa, v.
God ceases (sc. raining), s. Nyonmo ne, si etc. Ad.
kpa and kpaka, v.
kpa fai, v. inf. faikpamo, to draV or take off the hat (Ot.
pa kyaw); f. i. kpa ofai, take thy hat off; to show sub-
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 11
dbyGoogk
162 kpa gbe — kpa,
mittance by this, to beg pardon, to beg s. th. by it, to
beg, to pray; mikpale fai, I took my hat off for him,
I submitted to him, I begged his pardon, begged s. th.,
prayed to him (but mikpa efai, I took his hat off, comp.
in Otyi the difference betwixt: mepano kyaw and mepa
nekyaw). The gesticulation used in submitting or beg-
ging is not only to take one's hat off before the person
begged, but sometimes to offer it to him or cast it be-
fore his feet; though on the other hand the sensible
origin is not at all a hinderance to the tropical use of
the word; comp. in this respect the hebrew in the most
part of its roots.
kpa gbe, v. inf. gbekpamo, to go to meet s. b. = kpe, v.
kpa he, v. inf. hekpa, hekpamo, to give interest of money;
s. hekpa, interest.
kpa he, v. inf. hekpamo, to anoint, s. fo andfilia; — mu,
— with oil; to go away, turn away.
kpa hie ye noko no, v. to withdraw the face from s. th.,
to forget, to overlook, to wink at, comp. hie kpa no, v.
kpa mli, inf. gnlikpamo, v. to select, to make a difference;
to be dainty, delicate; comp. ko mli, hala mli, v.
kpa musu, v. inf. musukpamo, to take away the curse or
calamity, f. i. sickness, witchcraft etc., it is generally
done by a sacrifice (sometimes human), offered to the
fetish. The sacrifices of this kind are often found in
the roads.
kpa na, v. inf. nakpamo, to break the mouth, i. e. fast,
breakfast; to test == ka.
kpa nibiian, kpa niian, = kpa nii amli, inf. niiankpamo, to
be dainty; s. kpa mli, v.
kpa no, V. to draw off, f. i. s. b. from a chair; kpa m. k.
ye mantsesei le no, to dethrone s. b.
kpa se, V. to withdrow one's-self from behind s. b., to
deny him; to forsake; to betray s. b. comp. kpa si, kwa,
tso, tso segbe etc., inf. sekpamo.
kpa si, V. inf. sikpamo, to suppose (draw a conclusion);
to draw down, to break down; to discover, to betray;
to walk about (l)ur(!^jie^cnb); mikpaa sai, I donH think.
kpa n. k. tere m. k. yi, v. to cast s.th. opon s. b. (guilt etc.)
kpa, n. a want; a blemish; to kpa, v. inf. kpato, to do
s. th. shame- ful ; deformity of body etc. (s. akpake) ; kpa
ye he, v. to have a bleAish; kpa be he, v. to be blame-
less.
dbyGoogk
kpS — 'kpaki. 163
kpS, V. inf. kpSmo, to stretch; to blow a musical instru-
ment with the mouth, comp. "^D in Hebr. ! kpS ble, to
play a pipe; — tetremante, — a trumpet etc. to gaggle
(of fowls). Ad. = to cry.
kpa ble, inf. blekpSmo, v. to pipe; s. fli, v.
kpa mli, V. inf. mlikpSmo, to stretch, f. i. the body, the
arm; see also sia; „ekpa enine mli", he stretched (out)
his arm.
kp3, n. something stretched, cord, string, line, twine,
thread; tropically: ironical poetry or song; esp. string
of cowries, = 40 cowries (Ot. ban), which in former
times were put on a string. In the latter signification
the word has fol* its frequent use's sake undergone some
irregularity in the plural form as f. i. the engl. „ penny,
pence"; f. i. kp5 (instead of kpS kome), one string
(z= ^3 of a penny); kpSenyo, 2 Str., kpSete, 3 Str.,
kpSedfe, 4 Str., kpSenumo, 5 Str., kpaekpa, 6 Str.,
kpgiikpawo (= kpSi kpawo), 7 Str., kpgnkpanyo, 8 Str.,
kpenehu, 9 Sir., kpSnma (= kp3i nyonma), '10 Str.,
kpdnma k^ ekome, 1 1 Str., kpSnmai enyo, 20 Str., meo
= 25 Str. or half a head; tsakpo = 7^ Str. or 20
cowries, omel6 = Vi Str. or 30 cowries. Tse he kpS, v.
to take oflf the string, i. e. to excuse, = fa he; dsie
na etc.; ye kpa mli, v. to be in a string, i. e. to be
bound. „M!tsu nii, koni mana kp§ lo kpSenyo," I am
working, to get one or two pence (i. e. a few pence)
by it.
kpa, kpan or pSn, pSm (Ot. pam), v. inf. Ipahmo, very
probably related to the former, to bind each other, to
make a covenant; to plot, to conspire (this bad sense
is more usual); < — m. k. yi no, v. yinokpSnmo, to plot
against s. b.
kpakpa, redupl noun. adveri)ially used: in strings, a string
each, 8. § 22, 2. g.
kpa wo m. k. toiian, v. lit. to blow s. b.'s ears full (comp.
eincm bie Otjrert t)oH madden, in ben O^ren licgcn), to
tell into s. b. ears (also in a good sense), to tire one
by speaking; to inculcate.
kpa feda ni — , kpako nl — , kpako feda ni t— , conj. lit.
ceasing before now, not before now, now (at last).
'kpagai, kpakal, s. akp.
kpai, n. a full load (of corn etc.).
'kpake, n. s. akpake.
'kpaki, n. s. akpaki.
11*
dbyGoogk
164 'kpakcit — kpdmo.
'kpakal, n. s. akpakal.
'kp^pa, akpakpa, d. the pap aw -fruit
'kpakpatso, pi. -tsei, n. the papaw-tree.
'kpakpa» ekpakpa, adj. (Ot. pa, papa) good; real; commoil
natural, native, homemade; adv. well, very, much, verj
much = naakpa; Ad. = lelen, truly, verily!
Ipakpafelo, n. a person doing good, s. edsiirdfelo, n.
'kpakpafemo, u. doing good; good behaviour; good workj
comp. edsurdfemo, n.
kpdkpS, adv. quickly, =:= kplokplo, oyaya; paopao; pampam.
kpdkpd (obscen), n. wind from the stomack.
kpakpata, adj. and adv. good; strong; hard, stiff; wa — , v.
to be very hard, gb! — , v. to be very dry; etc.
kpakpatafemo , n. strength; hardness etc.
kp^kpo, n. he-goat, gen. to-kp^po (Ot. papo), n. pr. of
men.
kpdkpo, n. (Ot. baka) small lake; pit; lake, lagune.
KpakpoinehO , pr. n. of a village lit. „ninelake'' („9teun^
wetter")-
kpMa, V. s. kpla, pi. fonn of kpa; to drag; Ad. kpaka, v.
kpale, V. inf. kpalemo, to turn, to turn back, to return;
to call s. b. back; to turn in, to call in from the way.
Comp. kpa, v. Adn. th. s. Comp. also gbale, v.
kpale, n. baldness fr. kpa, v.
kpale, and
kpalekpale, adj. and adv. bald; baldly; ye — , v. to be
bald; kpa — , v. to be baldly bald, i.e. very bald; comp.
kpats.
kpalemo, n. returning, turning in; recalling, calling in fr.
kpale, V.
kpalo, n. a person moving or walking about etc. fr. kpa, v.
(seldom used alone, but in compounds).
kpMo, n. player of a musical instrument, which is blown,
f. i. blekpSlo, piper; tetrgmantrekpSlo, trumpeter; kofen-
kpSlo, blower on horn; comp. also fli, v. and kpllo,
Ad. n. cryer.
kpa, and
kpamo, n. moving, walking about; dragging, drawing,
breaking off, ceasing, anointing, halting, taking in etc.
fr. kpa, V.
kpamo, n. stretching; blowing of a musical instrument; fr.
kpa, V.
kpamg, kpanmo, panmo, n. covenant; plot, conspiration,
fr. kpS, kpan, v.
dbyGoogk
kpana — kpawo. 165
kpana, kpanaku (kpandaku accord, to Hanson), adj. strong,
valiant, great, big; gbomo — , a valiant, strong man; a
distinguished man; germ, ^fonbcrlic^".
kpSinehu, kp9inma etc. s. kpS, n.
kp^nyd, n. basket, comp. ablabutu, kafu, RoiQ, akpagal, n. etc.
kpSn^o (perh. = kpft-enyo), num. eight. kpenkpSinyo, eight
. strings cowries; Adn. kpanS.
kpao! int. fyel ^)fui!
kpasa, V. to lean; inf. kpasamo.
kpasa he, inf. hekpasamo, to lean about. '
kpasa no, v. inf. nokpasamo, to lean upon, to trust upon,
kpasa si, v. inf. sikpasamo, to lean down (on the elbow).
Comp. bata in Otyi and the related roots kpa, kpata, fata
in Ga and pata, fata in Otyi, pasa in both,
kpasalg, n. leaner,
kpasamo, n. leaning.
kpStS, V. inf. kpatamo, to destroy; to smooth, to plain;
to appease, to reconciliate. Comp. kpa, Ot. pata; and
fata in both languages. Hie kpMSi, v. to perish (lit. to
have an erased face); inf. hiekp3it§mo, s. also:
kpata hie, v. inf. hlekpatamo, to destroy; == fite, v. Ad.
th. s.
kpata (Ot. pata) = kpale, adj. bald, grassless, plain, empty,
void; fe — , to be bald etc.; comp. yikpatat§e, n.
kpata, n. thatched roof, open shed, kitchen (s. latesi), open
hall (s. koisi); roof,
kpatafemo = kpalg, n. baldness, emptiness,
kpatalo, n. appeacer, peacemaker, reconciler; fr. kpata, v.
kpatamQ, n. appeacing; peacemaking; reconciliation,
kpatamonii, pi. n. things given to appeace.
kpatasi, n. roof -ground, under -roof; open place thatched
over, s. kpata, n.
kpatatse, yikpatatse, n. baldpated person (®{a^fo!t)f).
kpate, n. smallpox.
kpate sa m. k. , v. to be killed by the smallpox,
kpate fie m. k. he or no, v. to get the smallpox.
kpalO, n. a shameful deed, fr. to kpa, comp. fobg, th. s.
kpatu, V. to kill violently or suddenly; to dispatch,
kpatu, and
kpatukpatu, adv. suddenly, unexpectedly; in a hurry; =
truka.
kpatumo, n. murder; violent or sudden death; despatch,
kpawo, num. seven. ^Bgni madsi kpawo kpawo toi kpawo
h kg uqI'^ „Tbis is what the seven times seven tribes
dbyGoogk
166 kpe — kpe.
said!'' A phrase used by speakers at great assemblies
of the people for political purposes. See GS-Speeches.
kpe, Y. inf. kpe and kpemo, to meet, if the subject is
a plural, amekpe, they met; na kpe, na kpe §i, th. s.
ke m. k. kpe, to meet s. b. , ke m. k. yakpe, or ya m. k.
kpemo, to go to meet; kpe m. k., to make s. b. to meet,
to meet, to call, to invite, to call together, to assist =
here; to meet one's teeth, to gnash with the teeth, s.
kpe si; to knaw, gnaw f. i. bones, corn-ears, any thing
*hard = ye, to eat, esp. nuts et6., na kpe and na kpe
si, inf. nakpe and naSikpg, v. to meet (with the mouth,
i. e. for consultation etc.), to come together, to be of
one opinion. Connected with other verbs „kpe" is some-
limes used to express „round about, altogether", f. i.
,,kwe mei ke kpe," to look at people round about; nyle
ke kpe, v. to go round; bole ke kpe, v. to surround.
kpe mli, v. to meet in s. place.
kpe na, v. to meet the mouth, the point; to sustain, to
continue, to bear; to gain the victory (auS^altcn, t)cr*
barren, bc^anen) = hie mli, mla h!e, v.; to reach, be
long enough (of cord etc.); to find, to meet with, =
yere na, v.
kpe se, inf. sekpe, v. to remain behind, to come too late.
kpe si, na kpe si, v. sikpe, nasikpg, to meet, become one,
to be united.
kpe yO, V. inf. yokpemo, lit. to meet a woman. The ori-
ginal signification seems to be: to marry (used of the
husband, comp. wye and gbli, gbld) in a lawful and proper
way with many ceremonies; then to make a certain cu-
stom or ceremony, often by already married women (an-
swering the „butrunwO" of males), in which the woman
adorns herself very costly, and with her companions goes
round the town singing, dancing and visiting her good
friends. See „butruiiwo", n., kromotSQAwd, n. th. s.
kpe, adv. entirely; si — , v. inf. kpesi, to remain up all
night, to watch (comp. wo, sra and bu, v.).
kp6, n. meeting. S. kpemo; fr. kpe, v.
kp€! int. expressing horror or the approach of danger!
kpe (related to the former), v. inf. kpe, kpemo, pi. kple,
inf. kplemo; to keep closely together, to cleave to, see
kpete and na kpe he, to join, to sew; to grin, tor fix
with the eyes, to bewitch; to be bright (of metals, stars,
the moon etc.) as far as no warmth is connected with
it, comp. tSo« v., f. i. hold tsoQ, si nyoiitSere kpeo, the
dbyGoogk
kpe amane ha m. ki — kpete. 167
mn shines, but the moon is bright; to flash, to lighten;
to chisel, carve; na kpe he, v. inf. nakpe, henakpe, to
be astonished, confounded, to "wonder; comp. fe y^, hie
fe ya, V. which is weaker and he ds5 he, v., he kpleke
he, Y. which are stronger; fe nakpe, v. the same.
kpe amane ha m. k., y. to bring into perplexity, trouble,
palaver.
kpe bi, T. to carry a child on one's back.
kpe mli, V. inf. mlikpe, mlikpemo, to decide, to be resol-
ved; to chisel, to carve.
kpe na, V. to sew together.
kpe nyomo hS m. k., v. to bring into debts. ^
kpe nil, inf. niikpe, v. to sew.
kpe, n. sewing, joining, grining etc.
kpeete, n. AdrL = abonua, limone, lime.
kpe sebii, v. m, to carry backchildren (s. kpe bi, v.), to
produce ears, said of maize.
kpekpe, n. grey or unbleached linen or colton; sack-cloth.
kpekpe-atade, n. dress of it.
kpekpe, n. covetousness, avarice; fe — , v. to be covetous.
kpekpefemo, n. covetousness.
kpekpelo, H. covetous person; miser, niggard.
kpele, s. kple, pi. of kpe, v.
kpelo, n. a person meeting an other; inviter; gnawer; hel-
per, assistant (for mercies sake in earring etc.) ; „kpelQ
ed§ee afu," prv. a helper is no humback.
kpelo, n. joiner; okpld- kpelo, a person making tables;
sewer, tailor, niikpelo, th. s., aspatre-kpelo , shoe-maker.
kpemo, n. meeting, gnashing, joining, helping, assistance,
gnawing; y5-kpemo, wedding; a certain ceremony, see
kpe yo, V.
kpemo, n. bewitching, brightness, shine, flash, lightening,
s. also kplemg and kpe, n.
kpeno, pi. -nii, v. joining-, sewing -implement.
kpene, adj. and adv. short, small; shortly; mama — , small
cloth.
kpenkpen, adj. brittle, adv. very quickly, comp. oy^ oy^,
mramra; abruptly.
kpenkple, n. rabbit; hare.
kpesu, n. a basket used to keep fowl.
kpete, adj. and adv. open, openly.
kpete, adj. dry,* barren, unfruitful; s. olenle andftmeAmetei
th. s.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
168 kpete — kpla.
kpete, v. inl kpetemo, to cleave; to be glutinoas, to stick
to; „he kpete" or „he kpete he" or „ke he kpete he",
v., inf. hekpetemo, to cleave to; amekpete Nyonmo he,
or amehe kpete N., or amehe kp. N. he, or ameke
amehe kp. N. he, they cleaved to God; kpete he, th. s.
kpete he, v. inf. hekpetemo, to cleave to, s. he kpete etc.
kpete mli, V. to stick in s. th.
kpete no, inf. nokpetemo, v. to stick upon s. th.; ke —
— , V. to fix upon.
kpete si, V. to stick or cleave to, to the ground;
to bear, to sustain, =^ kpe na; to continue.
kpete §isi, V. to cleave to the ground.
kpetetpete, adj. and adv. glutinous; soft, weak; softly;
fe — , V. to be — .
kpetekplebii, pi. n. a fruit in shape similar to the cashocle
(s. enmomi); used as charm or fetish.
kpetekplebiitso, pi. -tsei, n. the tree or shrub bearing it;
the bark of it is used as operating medicine; the wood
is exceedingly hard or rather tough.
kpetenkple, corroboration of kple; pi. -kplei, adj. great,
large, tall, big; comp. koklo; wulu, a^j. and da, v.;
fe — , to become — ; dsi — , to be — ; kpetenkpleA,
it is large. .
kpl, kpitl, kpitikpiti, adj. and adv. thick; muddy (of dark-
ness, water, mist, clouds etc.); thickly.
kpintii^, adj. safe, sound, healthy, strong;. -ly.
kpintinkplin, th. s.
kpiti, V. inf. kpitimo, to pinch, to scratch = ti, titi; to
grub, - - up; to pick up; to take up or out (used of
sand, flour, rice etc. comp. kg, kolQ, kole, v. tSotSe, v.
kpiti, n. Ot. piti, leprosy; ye — , to be leprous. Comp.
faohdkodi.
kpitimo, n. pinching, scratching; grubbing, picking.
kpitikpete, adv. conAisedly; amekamo si — , they lay about
confusedly.
kpitio, adj. and adv. short, shortly; comp. akoti^; n. a short
time, 8. fio, adj.
kpitiokpitio, adv. frequently; shortly; often.
kpitiyeli, n. leprosy.
kpitiyelo, -yelilo, n. leper.
kpla (or kpra), pi. form of the verb kpa, to be dragged,
drawn; to strip (f. i. maize); to brush; to drag, to draw;
to drive, f. i. cattle; to lead; inf. kplamo. Comp. Ad.
kpaka, v. th. s.
Digitized by VjOOQIC '
kpla-ifinie se — kpleke. 169
kpla-nme se, double v. and kpla-De se, double v. to fake
some body off; ekplaame efie ese, he went off with them.
kpla, kpra, n. the armadillo; Otyi: pra. The name is very
probable derived from the broken skin of this inter-
esting creature.
kpla, ady. round about; — tfem, all around; a long time;
since.
kplaba, n. a kind of gum; which the natives use for mend-
ing pots.
kplabatso, pi. -tsei, n. the tree producing it.
kplakpayo, pi. -yei, n. whore = adfaman; s. gblagbayd, n.
kplakpla, adj. and adv. rash, careless; rashly, carelessly;
comp. kplekple, flefle; flafla.
kplakplafemQ, n. carelessness.
kplalQ, n. dragger, driver etc.; fr. kpla, v.
kplamo, n. dragging, driving, stripping; brushing.
kpM, adj. and adv. much, many; well; long, a long lime.
kpland, adj. plain, even; void, desolate = kplene.
kple (pi. of kpe, v.), v. to fill, fulfill; nine kple he, v. to
be able; to have sufBcient hands, strength, time etc.
kple, pi. of kpe, v. to shine.
kple, kplei, kpleikplei, adj. large; great; high, tall; big; s.
kpetenkple, adj. th. s.
kpl6, V. inf. kplemo (comp. Ot. pe, pSne), to like, to agree
to, to allow; to let; ekplee kpatamo, he would not be
. appeased; Ad. th. s.
kplids5, adv. full, hanging full = wodsowodsO, adv.
kplebii, pi. n. scourge, whip (perhaps one with several tails
and therefore plural); yi m. k. kplebii, v. to scourge, to
whip one; kpa, n. th. s.
kplebiiyi, n. scourging.
kplebiiyilg, n. scourger.
kpleke, inf. kplekemo, v. to sink, to descend; to come to
shore (of fishermen); he kpleke he, v. inf. hekplekemo,
to be astounded, astonished = na kpe he, he ds5 he,
stronger than fe y5; kpleke m. k. or n. k., v. to let or
make s. b. descend, to let down (s. the end); to give
instruction to fetish-pupils; — won, v. to let the fetish
descend for the purpose of asking him about unknown
things. The fetish-priests called „okomfoi, gbaloi, kra-
moi" use to wear an iron chain round their neck by
which they pretend to let the fetish descend = -wontse,
to make one a fetish -priest; from this derives: kpleke
m. k., V. to let (the fetish descend upon) s. b.^ h e. to
dbyGoogk
170 kpleke ^i ~ kploW.
make him a man possessed by the fetish („okomfo, gba-
lo, kramo, wontse"); comp. woA m6 m. k. and md
won, V. tse won, etc. About the form comp. § 2T the
endsyUables „dse" and „ke", and the, v. kple, v. Ad.
kple, y.
kpleke si, inf. sikplekemo, v. to descend, to climb down,
to come or go down,
kplekemo, n. descending.
kplekple, adj. and adv. froward, unruly, unquiet; preco-
cious, = kplakpla, flefle, krukru abomp^; fe — , v. to
be froward.
kplekplefemo, n. frowardness.
kplete, adj. and adv. slimy, tough; -ly.
kplem, n. a kind of the fruit, called sweet-sap; s. Mwyei, n.
kplemtso, pi. -tsei, n. the tree of it.
kplemo, n. filling, fulfilling; sufficing; finishing; s. kple, v.
kpl^mo, n. liking, agreeing; agreement, allowance,
kplikpli, adv. convulsively; §6 — , v. to have convulsions,
kplim, V. inf. kplimmo, to be thick (with fat), to be hard,
impenetrable; to be inured, accustomed; senseless,
kplo, n. pi. kpodsi, clift; comp. kpon, kpon,
kplg, kpro, pi. form of kpg, v. to break off, to pluck off,
to crumble off, — down (f. i. bark, rough skin, dried ^
mud etc.), v. n. and a., inf. kplgmo.
lipid, okpl6, pi. okploi, n. table, kpe —, v. to make a
table, s. kpe; nme — , v. to spread the table, to give
a repast,
kploko and kplot6 (Ot. preko, prok5 from the portugie
^porco"), n. pig, only used of the tame one, s. batafo;
a very unclean person,
kplokofo, n. pigs-fat.
kplokolo, n. pork.
kplokoniitsumvQ, n. uncleanness.
kplokotse, m. n^ -nye, f. n. possessor of a pig.
kplokotsu, n. pig-stile,
kplokplo, adv. quickly, oySya, mramra; frequently, often,
= kpitiokpitio.
kploku, n. field- or bush-mouse, comp. kwakwe. It is of
the size of a european rat, the african rat being much
larger,
kplokubu, n. hole of a mouse.
kplgmo, n. breaking off; stripping; crumbling off; k, kplg, v.
kploto, 6. kploko, n.
dbyGoogk
kpo — kpokpo. 171
kpo, v. (perh. to move; to remove; to be soft; to soften)
to refuce an offer.
kpo, kpo no, n. yard, outside; adv. outside, out (Hebr.
(yn jHJiin); d§e — , v. to go, or come out; inf. kpod§e;
dSie kpo, inf. kpod§iemo, v. to take out, bring forth,
bring to light, reveal ; fa kpo , v. Inf. kpolS , = d§e kpo
d§ie kpo (comp. adi in Otyi).
kpo wolo, V. to tan (leather), s. wolokpolo, n.
kpo, int. plumb! natural sound of a fall;^ gbe si kpo, to
fall down, plumb 1 comp. bum etc.
'kpo, okpo, n. club; = tSokpoti, n.
kpo, adj. and adv. quiet, simple, mild, comp. did, bled;
fe — , V. to be quiet, mild; — mildly, simply, quietly;
int. kpo! kpO! (sympathizingly used) be quiet! bfllbji!
. comp. kpo, V.
'kpo, okpo, n. dove.
kpo, pi. kplQ, inf. kpomo, kplomo, v. n. and a. to crumble
off; to break off (esp. of a rough skin, bark, dry sur-
face); to strip; to pluck off; to scale etc. s. also kpoke,
T. a. Kpo kpono si, v. to clear the throat.
Ipo, akpo, n. decree, law, s. kita, mla.
kpo, n. heap, hill, lump, knot, island; n§o-kpo, island in
the sea; fa -kpo, n. river -island. Besides the reg. pi.
kpoi also kpobii seems to be used; comp. kpoA, n.
kp5, inf. kp6mo, v. to redeem; to buy free; to liberate.
kpobii, duninutive, pi. of kpo, lumps = kpoi.
kpobiikpobii, adj. and adv. consisting of small lumps, lumpy
in small lumps.
kpod§6, n. forthcoming; appearance.
kpodSielo, n. revealer.
kpodsiemo, n. revelation; apocalypsis.
kpofdi, n. appearance.
kpoikpoi, adj. and adv. th. s. but without diminutive mo^
dification; rough, uneven; hilly.
kpoke, V. active form of kpo (§27), to crumble off.
kpokemo, n. crumbling.
kpoko, n. the concavity of the elbow; kpokoi ano, on the
arms.
kpokpai, pi. n. bonndaries = klotia, husu.
kpokpo, V. inf. kpokpomo, to shake, to tremble; to shake
8. th., to shake off; = hoso, woso; he — , v. inf. hekpo-
kpomo, T. to shake, tremble, be frightened; of men, by
fear, cold etc. mibe kpokpoO) I tremble; comp. also
liminmi, t.
dbyGoogk
172 kpokpo — kpoto.
kpokpo, adv. quietly, plainly, unreservedly; "wie — , v. to
speak — .
kpokpoi, pi. n. a kind of food made of maize -flour and
palm-oil, and eaten to soup,
kpokploku, kpokproku, n. new corn,
kpokukpoku, n. a large waterbird living at the river Volta
in size as a goose,
kpolo, n. softener; refuser of an offer, fr. kpo, v.
kpolo, n. a person stripping s. th.
kpolo, n. redeemer; liberater.
kpomg, n. crumbling off, breaking off; stripping; s. kplg-
mo, th. s.
kpomg, n. redeeming; redemption; liberation.*
kpomonii, pi. n. means of redemption,
kpomgsane, n. history of redemption.
Kpon, pr. n. („island") a town, 40 — 50 miles up the river
Volta near mount Yogaga; comp. pon in Otyi in Nyan-
kopon; Akropon etc. and Kpon, n.
kpon, n. hook; angle.
Kpon, pr. n. of Pony betwixt Tema and Prampram (lit. hill,
Ot. „pon").
Kponkpo, pr. n. of a village,
'kpono, okp. n. (Ot. okponko), horse; Ad. so, n.
kpono, n. the uppermost part of the throad or windpipe;
kpono be, v. to have the throat narrowed (s. be) i. e.
to be so sad as to wish to weep without being able to
do it, comp. („al^ ob i^m bie Jte^Ie jugcfcj^nutt »drc");
inf. kpghobe.
kpgngbg, n. great sadness,
kpgngsi, n. place of or about the head of the wind pipe;
kpg — , V. to clear the throat.
kpQiigsikpg, n. ^cblfopf, head of the wind-pipe,
kpgo, V. to get rich; to be benefitted,
kposa, V. inf. kposamg to rub with the haqds as in washing
cloth; to wash cloth etc., by rubbing, comp. fg; to full;
comp. also bosao, n.
kposalg, n. washer, rubber, fuller,
kposamg, n. washing, rubbing, fulling,
kpoti, n. club, knot, tsokpoti^ n. knotty stick; s. okpo, 'kpo,n.
and ti, v.
kpotia, n. ring, finger-ring,
kpgtg, inf. kpgtgmg, n. and a. to be thick, muddy, doughy,
over ripe, mellow; to rot, putrify; to knead; satyrically:
to be very rich.
dbyGoogk
kpotomo — kri. 173
kpotomo, n. kneading; rotting etc.
kpoto, adv. thickly; as mud, as dough; gbe — , v. to kill
in heaps,
kpotoi and kpotokpoto, adj. thick, muddy, doughy, over-
ripe, rotten; fe — v. to be
kpQtofemo, n. rottenness etc.
kpotonkpoto, n. a kind of food made of yams boiled into
a dough,
kpotsile, n. a seafish.
kprgke (fr. kpo, v.), inf. -mo, v. to strip off.
kprokemo, n. stripping off.
kpronkpron, adj. and adv. dirty; -tily.
kpulu, pi. kpudsi, n. mug; jug; cup.
kpunkpd, n. barrel; com. hase.
KpukprS (or Gbugbra), n. pr. of the town Prampram of the
maps.
KpukprSnyo, pi. -mei, -bii, -tsemei, n. Prampram -man;
-people.
Words not found under
kr see under kl.
kra, V. and n. s. kla.
'krSn, nkr§n, n. (Ot. th. s.) wandering ants,
kra, krakra, adj. hot.
krSdikplen, krSinodikpl^n , n. the smaller kind of hyenas
(comp. klan, kran, n.).
kradoa, n. padlock,
kraka, n. cartridge; comp. gbadsa, n. The cartridges of the
natives are made of wood,
krakate, n. span.
krake, inf. -mo, v. to have a crack,
krakte, n. dan. funnel; trakte, n. th. s.
krakuna, = klakun, n. turkey.
krSmSkrSmS, adj. fierce, greedy,
krana, n. silence; adj. and adv. silent; silently; this word
has the peculiarity, that it can be used without verb, f. i.
mitsele ahu, si (f^ fe) krSna; 1 called him a long time,
but (all is) — silence; comp. yi fe, n.
krata, klata, n. slice,
krawa, n. s. kra, n.
kre, kere, n. = kele, n.
krede, adj. and adv. sure; clear; exact; true, genuine =
kroii; -surely, clearly, well ,• exactly.
krSkre , Ad. = klenklen, krenkren, first,
kri, n. giddiness.
d by Google
174 kri — krafcrn.
kri, =kli, adj. giddy; fo — , v. to be gWdy. ^
krifo, n. giddiness.
krikri, krikrikri, n. adj. and adv. silence; silent; silentl^r d
krftnd, comp. this,
krd, V. to murmur.
krO, adj. large. Seldom used; comp. kokrO, kokld, adj.
kro, =kolo, klo, pi. of ko, r.
*kro, 'koro, ekoro, adj. and adv. (fr. ko) single; simj^e
singly, otherwise, by itself; s. kroh; kroAkron; adj-
Krobo, pr. n. of a mountain, tribe, country and (Adanme]
dialect N. East of Gd betuvixt the Akwapim- mountain^
and the river Volla.
kroboo, n. a bark of a tree used as spices, to rub the
body with,
'kroko, ekroko, pi. 'krokomei, adj. other; s. ko, kro, koro etc.
kromobi, n. first-bom (generally, if a boy, called Tete, if
a girl Dede). Ad. krombi.
kromobifgmo, n. ©rflflebutt; first birth,
kromobigbena, n. right, duty of the firstborn,
kromotsun, n. a custom, men have to make before marriage;
yfQ — , to make this custom (s. butru); a principal part
of it is to be put in a room (tsu, kromotSu) for a night.
kron = kwon (Ot. th. s. seldom used adj. high; fr. ko, kwo,
V. to be high or deap. S. also grdn, adv.
kroh, pi. kroi adj. and adv. single, simple, pure, genuine,
clear; holy (fr. ko, v.? and indef. art); singly, simply,
purely etc. Comp. ekro, ekoro etc.
kronkron , corroboration of the former, adj. and adv. simple,
pure, clear (of water), unmixed; holy; s. he tse and
tsu he.
kronkronmo, pi. -mei and mokronkron, pL meikroiikroT,
kronkronbi, pi. -bii, n. holy person,
kronkronfelo , n. sanctificator, == hetSulo.
krohkronfemo , n. sanctification ; holiness ; s. hetSumo ,
hetsemo, n.'
Ironkronnfi, pi. -nii, n. a holy thing,
kronkronsane, n. holy history,
'kropon, okr., n. eagle? a larg bird of pray, feading on
living animals,
krosalo and krosado, n. Ayigbe word, perh. from the port.,
dollar, s. dale, n.
Krote pr. n. (s. Klote) of a lagune N. E. of Osu.
krukru, adj. and adv. unruly, unquiet, x=3: kpl^kpTle ; onquietly
fe — , to be unruly.
dbyGoogk
knd^rufemo — kukla. 175
kniknifemo, n. UDquietness.
krosalo, n. port, word?, spices.
ku, v., inf. kamo, v. to cut into very small pieces; to poll
the hair.
ku, V. to break; to knuckle; to turn. The pi. form is
kumo, redupl. kumokumg; inf. kumo or kOomo (comp.
Adn. kuo, suo, and sumo and suomo in Gk), Mli ku,
V. inf. ralikuorao, to be inwardly, entirely broken; nine
ku, inf. nineku, v. = ya gbe se, ya tsu se; s» tsu se, n.
ku able, inf. ablekuomo, v. to earn com.
ku n. k. bQ he, v. to double s. th.
ku hie fo n. k. no, v. to wink at some th.; to over-
look s. th.
ku mli, V. to break in (two); inf. mlikuomo.
ku na, V. inf. naku and nakuomo, lit. to break the mouth,
edge, end; to oppose, to act against.
ku nane, v. to break a leg.
ku nine, v. s. nine ku, under kd, v.
ku no, V. noku and nokuomo, to break over; to transgress;
to be over, to be much, to be superfluous == teke no, v.
ku se, V. inf. seku sekuomo, to turn back, to return, to
come again; to be converted; perverted; comp. tso he,
v., th. s.
kn si, V. inf. sikuomo, to break down; tsui le fe kumo-
kumo si , all the houses are (every where) broken down.
ku yi, V. yiku (s. yi), to cut the hair (of the head).
kQ, n. (Ot. th.s.) company = akutso, heap, flock; part (piece,
s. kuku, tsoku and tsokuku); comp. also kuikui and ob-
serve the phrase: bua na kui kui, v. to gather in heaps;
adj. short; weku, akutso, dsaku n. etc.
kua, n. monkey, ape (in general, s. ofo, ho, etc.).
kua, V. inf. kuamo, v. to bend, to contract, to wrinkle,
to be wrinkled =: kota ; to bow = kula.
kua si, V. inf. sikuamo, v. to bend the knees, to kneel
down.
kuatai, adj. = kotai, which see.
kudo, n. helm, rudder.
kudotse, pi. kudotsemei, n. steersman.
kue, n. neck (comp. sen, kpono). •"
kuenii, n. necklace or neck-ornamenls.
kuikui, n. heaps, ruins, broken pieces ; ac|j. heapy, ruinous,
every where broken; adv. heapily; in heaps; comp. koi-
koi, kpoikpoi etc.
kukla, kukra, adj. large = kokro; large and round; round.
dbyGoogk
176 kdkd — kOmaiyelilo.
kdkd, pi. kQmokQino, redupL of kfi, v. to break.
kaku, kakudsi, n. piece, part, broken particle, stump; f*
thorn = abaaa; fo — , v. to cat short, to shorten; ad
and adv. short; shortly = kukuO.
kakudabi, n. maize of last year, comp. kpokplokn, n.
knkufd, n. half-fathom, i. e. yard.
kukufo, n. short-cutting, shortening.
kukaku, adv. boldly; quickstepped ; manly; ebote mli —
he stepped boldly in.
kukuli, n. ball; lump; su-kukuli, lump of clay; lo-kokid
piece of meat.
kukuo (pi. kukudSi kukui, knknbii?) adj. and ady. sort
shortly.
kukuo, Adn. V. = ko, to take.
kukwe> kukwei, n. small pot for boiling things etc.; eomp
gbe, kulo, fa, fale etc.
kula, V. to bend, to bow; inf. kulamo; s. kCia.
kula §i, V. inf. sikulamQ, to kneel down, to bow the knees
= ktia si, V.
'kulafo, ok., n. widower, widow.
kulamo, n. bending, bowing, fr. kula, v.
kul^, auxil. V. can, will, shall.
kule (fr. ko le, comp. koni, noni, boni etc.) coivj. to express
the subjunction of the sentence it initiates, f. i. kule mil-
sumo, 1 would love it; = dSikule at the end of sen-
tences = if, with the same mood; adv. perhaps; soever
kali, n. a small particle of any thing; a grain, f. i. able-
kuli, a grain of maize; a drop, nu-kuli, a drop of water;
a mote; Adn. gu, n.
kulikuli, adv. in drops.
kulo, n. a kind of pots used for washing; washing-basiii.
kulQ and kulQkulo (s. kloklo, adj.) luke-warm.
kCilQ , n. breaker ; reaper of maize.
kulu, n.
kuma, Adn. n. thirst; s. kCimai.
kCima, v. inf. kumamo to use with fragality; generally: t6
kOma or ke-kuma. But perhaps it is Otyi adj. = little.
kQmai, n. thirst, kumai ye, v. inf. kumaiyeli, to be thirstj;
kumai yemi, I am thirsty. Comp. homo, fel; and Otyi
osukum; and kuma, v.; Ad. kuma ye, v.
kumaiyeli, n. thirsting, thirst.
kOmaiyelilQ, -yelg, n. a thirsty person.
dbyGoogk
kQmayeroforo — kutumpofelQ. 177
kima^emforo, n. (Ot.) lit. bridemurder, a plant, the fruits
of which like that of the bur cleave to the cloth. It is
said,, that during a \?eddiDg ceremony some had come
into contact with the skin of the bride and she being
ashamed to remove them, was hurt by them during the
danc^ and killed, whence the name,
komelo, Adn. n. castor-tree = adedenkruma.
kumi, kum, komi, n. boiled bread.
Kumi, pr. n. of males. ,
kaml, D. rum (foreign word and satirically used, s. bg-
bo, n.).
Kiraikum, pr. n. of a village, also called Otyiriahantan. The
name „Kumkum" is said to derive from the hollow
sound of the ground there.
kumo , pi. verb-form of ku, to break ; to break several times,
to fold up = kota; to break all over; to have the palsy;
to feel as if the whole body would be broken ; inf. kOmo
and kuomo, redupl. kumgkumo.
kumo, kdomo, kumgmo, n. breaking, brokenness; palsy;
folding up; reaping (maize) harvest.
kfimQbe, kuomobe, n. harvest-time.
kumotsofS, n. medicine 'against palsy.
kuntu, n. wool; woolen stuff, blanket. Ot. th. s.
kura, s. kwra.
kose, kuselo, kusenyo etc. see ko, kose, n.
kuse! int. = beg your pardon! (Ot. th. s.) s. taflatse.
kusO, int. halloo! hoho!
kosQ, kusukusu, adj. and adv. thick (of foliage, darkness,
hair etc.) dark; -ly; -ly.
kosum, n. eur. word; costum.
katruku, n. circle; adj. and adv. round, -about. Ot. koton-
kron.
kotsa, kotsa, n. bundle, grape; a kind of country-sponge
made of a bark. Comp. saw, sao; bosao, n.
kutu, n. circle,
kotu, adv. in heaps,
koto, n. heap; flock, herd,
kutu, n. a small kind of pots, s. kulo a small fence in
which yams is preserved,
kutumpo, kdtompo, n. Ot. th. s. false-hood, hypocrisy;
comp. osato; apasa; unrighteousness; ye — , fe — , v. to
be false = pasa.
kutumpofemo, n. hypocrisy.
katumpofelQ and
Zimmermann, Akra-VocaK 12
dbyGoogk
178 kuturopofo — kwe.
kutumpofo, n. false, unrighteous person; hypocrite; = osa-
tofo, opasafo, n.
kuluinpoyeli, = -femo, n. falsehood, hypocrisy; unrighte-
ousness.
kuyO, adj. wide, long, large = ya, of dress etc.
kwa, inf. kwS, kwamo, v. to abdicate; to deny; to gainsay;
to desert; to do purposely, kwa ekwa, purposely he has
done it; to loose the colour,
kwa, n. abdication; denial; desertion; wilful act; SSillfitr;
loosing colour,
kwa, adv. entiraly; together, truly, indeed; comp. kwa, v.
which seems to imply the orig. meaning of „to be firm";
s. also anokwa (ano=: na, mouth, in Otyi); = tf^m, f. i.
fe kwa, all togeler; even, also, foflar=tel^ po. Ot.
== without cause, GSl: yaka, yakatfa).
Kwabenya, pr. n. of two villages,
'kwadu, akwl, n. bananas,
'kwafonyo, okw., pi. -foi, n. = kosenyo, hiilo, farmer,
plantationman, boor. Ot. th. s.
kwdkwS, n. natur. sound, duck, = dabodabo, n.
kwakwalabite (Ot. kwakwadabi), n. raven.
kwSkwS antrebo, n. childrens play"; hide - and - seek; =
okeyo, n. th. s.
kw^kwe, n. house-mouse, comp. kploku, obiSi, n.
kwakwebu, n. and
kwakweflo, pi. -fod§i, n. mousehole.
kwakwrakwa, n. a kind of yams,
kwaman and
kwamamfo, n. the whole company of slaves belonging to
one master (sometimes hke „familia** in latin); comp.
Ot. ako^, slave,
kwasafo, n. (=koa-asafo. Ot. 'koa, slave), th. s.
kwannne (Ot.), n. way -toll; SBeggcIb (fr. kwan and ade,
pi. nne).
Kwantanan (Ot. lit. „four-way" place, where two ways cross
eachother) pr. n. of a village,
kwao, V. to besmear; to plaster.
Kwao (Ot.), pr. n. of one bom on Thursday,
kwaomo, n. besmearing, plastering.
kwasiS, (Ot.) adj. and n. foolish; fool, s. bulu, kolo, n.
kwatrekwa, Ot. th. s., n. raggamufDn; (,/8ump"), ragged
or nearly naked person,
kwe, imprt. s. kwe and kwemo, inf. kwemo, v. to look,
at, to view (comp. na); to care for,^ to watch over;
dbyGoogk
kwe bi — kwo §i. 179
coinp. bu, sra, wo, v.; to provide for. Ot. fye (fe);
AdA. ye, hie, v.
kwe bi, V. to care for a child.
kwe gbe, V. inf. gbekwemo, to look on the way, to ex-
pect, comp. me, V.
kwe he or hewo, v. to look about.
kwe hie, V. inf. hlekwemo, to look in or at the face; to
receive one's face.
kwe h!na, v. th. s.
kwe m. k. fe n. k., v. to do s. th. for s. body's sake; kwe
m. k. hewo fe n. k., th. s.
kwe mil, V. inf. mlikwemo, to look into, to search.
kwe no, V. inf. nokwemo, to oversee, to watch, care for etc.
to be attentive.
kwe m. k. nd no, v. to look upon 6. body's example (s.
nd), inf. ndnokwemo.
kwe se, v. inf. sekwemo, to look back.
kwe §i, V. to look down.
kwe si§i, V. to look under s. th.
kwe m. k. yi, v. inf. yikwemo, to care for s. b.
kwe! behold! lo! int.
kwg, inf. kw^, v. to grow, to spring up (of seed, plants,
comp. da, wo, v.).
kwS, n. growth.
kw6 afuT, V. to foam, inf. afu!-kw6.
'kwe!, akwel, n. ground-beans; see also aboboi, n.
kwei, = koi, n. door-way.
kwelo, n. looker; overseer; herdsman; provider.
kwemo, n. looking; caring, care; watching; oversight, in-
spection; providence.
kwo, ko, adj. broken, cracked, comp. kQ, v. ku and kuku, adj.
kwo (negligent pronunciation ko), v. inf. kwole and kwo,
to be high, deep (comp. „altns** in lat.); to come or
go up, ascend, spring (of wells), to climb, up ; kwo tso,
to climb a tree, kwo ke-ya goA ko no, to ascend a
mountain. •
kwO, n. climbing, ascension.
kwole, n. bight; depth.
kwolo, n. climber.
kwon and kwonkwoA (comp. kron, Ot. the s. and konon-
konon), adj. and adv. high, deep; highly, deeply.
kwono = kpono, s. this.
kwQ si, n. to descend.
kwo si = kOa Si; to kneel down,
12*
dbyGoogk
180 kwrft — ladSdHd.
kwra = korfi, kura (Ot. th. s.), corroboration of kwa, adv.
truly, fully; really; indeed; together, entirely, at all;
ebaa kwrS, he is not at all coming,
ky 8. under ts.
Kyerepon, pr. n. of a language spoken by a suppressed
tribe in the interior.
L.
La, pr. n. („fire") of a town 2 miles east -ward of Osu;
generally called by Europeans Labudai, Labude; by the
Akwapim-people Dade (comp. Late); the seat of one of
the greatest fetishes, called LakpS.
la, v. n. and a,, inf. la, lala, lamo, to knit together; to
hook, to fasten (a window etc.), to catch, f. i. by words,
to join (as the links of a chain); to dream (inf. lamo),
to sing, inf. lamo and lala; la m. k., v. to sing s. b.,
in praise or scorn,
la, n. hooking, joining,
la, AdA. V. = ladse in Ga, perh. to hang some-where (s.
the preceeding word), to err, to be lost; to lose; to
forget,
la, n. fire, light (comp. kane); pi. lai, fuel. Comp. ogy^
in Ot. Do la, v. inf. lado, to be very hot; comp. also
ho la, h!e ye la etc.
1^, n. pronounced with a higher voice than the former,
blood; Ot. mogya, Ad. muo; He 1^ si, v. to spiU blood;
the pi. lal is used for much blood as in Hebr.
la nd sa m. k., v. to sing a mock-song (s. kpS) about s. b.
lado, n. heat; fr. do la, v.
lad§e, V. sometimes separated la dse, comp. la, Adn. verb
and § 27, to be lost; to disappear; to lose (Ot. yera).
Perf. tense, neg. voice, ind. mood: ladseko and lako dSe,
inf. ladSemo; comp. also: wpsusumai elad§e6wQ, our
souls are never lost (for us).
ladSe gbe, v. to lose the way; Ad. la bio, v.
ladse h!e, v. inf. hieladsemo, to disappear out of one's
sight; eladse mihle, he disappeared before me.
ladselo, n. loser,
ladsemo, n. losmg; erring; disappearing; perdition; s. hle-
kpatamo, fitemo, n.
ladSenS, pi. -nii, n. any thing to take fire-coals with.
Iads5, n. spittle; ts6 — , v. inf. lads6ts6mo, to spit; —
— fie m. k. no , — at s. b. ^
ladSdnd, pi. -nii, n. spitbox; ladSdtsSmond, th. s.
dbyGoogk
ladgCHtS^mo — lalofcu. 181
ladSotfigmo, n. spitting.
lafQsemQ, o. issue of blood.
lasifiemQ, n. spilling of blood.
laho, n. wantonness, naughtiness; issue of blood; fir. hola, v.
laholo, n. wanton, naughty, wild person.
lai, pi. n. or collect, n. fuel; firewood; le lai, v. to gather
fuel, firewood, inf. lailemg. Comp. tSo, n.
lailelg, n. person gathering firewood,
lailomg, n. gathering of firewood,
laitso, n. firebrand; piece-firewood,
laka, y. inf. lakamo, to persuade, to silence, to still; to
beguile, to deceive. Comp. dgko na and sisi, v. Ot.
dada, y.
laka gbeke, y. inf. gbek^lakamo, to SitiU a child, to silence
a child,
laka he, y. inf. helakamg, to deceiye one's self,
laka hie, y. hlelakamg, to deceiye, beguile s. b.
laka na, y. th. s.
laka t§ui, y. to still or silence the heart,
lakalo, n. persuader; silencer; deceiyer.
lakamQ, n. persuasion; silencing; deception,
lakpa, n. excuse; to lakpa, inf. lakpatd, to make excuses;
to deny; comp. dsie na, fa he; na ha m. k. y., abla, n.
lakpatd, n. excusing (if untrue); denial,
lakpatolo, n. a person excusing himself,
lakpatse, n. tb. s.
lakpa, n. low bush not yel sufficiently grown to b6 cut for
cultiyation, comp. ko, kayi, n.; gba, y. hQ — , y. to cul-
tivate such bush, in want of better.
lakpahumQ, n. cultiyation of unripe, young bush.
Lakpd, pr. n. of the great fetish in La. He resides in a
drum, which is secretly renewed from time to time by
the fetish-priests,
lakpatsa, n. a kind of young bush, = lakpa, n.
lala, pi. y. of la, y. to be entangled,
lala, n. singing; song; hymn,
lalatse, pi. -tsemei, n. singer; precentor; composer,
lalilei, n. fire-tongue, i. e. flame,
lalo, n. hawk.
Lalo, n. pr. of „gbobaloi" (n. which see).
lalQ, n. a person hooking or joining; dreamer; singer; fr.
la, y.
laloku, n. Adn. an animal living in the river Yolta and said
to come to shore and eat grass. It is said to be of
dbyGoogk
182 Lamei — latSaiSS.
the size of a pig, the skin of it resembles tbM lyf d
pig also.
Lamei, pi. people of La, — towns; sing. Lanyo.
lami, n. finger-nail; nail of the toes.
lamiflgmo, n. cutting of the fingernails.
lamlu, n. lit. fire-dust, i. e. ashes; ash-colour; death-colottr
(of black people).
lamo, n. hooking; joining; dreaming; singing; dream.
lamo, n. steam; s. lasu.
lamo and lemo, inf. th. s. v. to lick; s. §o, v.
lanmo, n. navel.
lanmonblu, lamogblu, -gbugblu, n. rupture of the narel,
very common among the natives, because newborn chil-
dren are negligently treated in this respect.
lanQ, n. place over the fire.
lao, n. dan. sheet.
lasa = lalS6, n. a fruit.
lasrSmi, n. spark.
lasu, n. (comp. sit) smoke; steam; lit. fire-dust.
lasdlele, pi. -ledsi, n. steamer; s. 1^1^, n.
lasfiogble, n. \^hirl-wind.
lasdj n. fire-burning.
laSeremo, n. kindling of a fire.
lasa, n. th. s.
lata, V. latamo, to stitch; to base.
latalo, n. stitcher, baser.
latamo, n. stitching; basing.
latamokpg, n. basing-thread.
late, n. fire-stone, i. e. hearth.
Late, pr. n. of a town 25 miles north of Prampram in the
Akwapim- mountains; the inhabitants speak Kyerepon;
Ot. Date.
latesi, n. hearth-ground; kitchen, comp. koiSi, kpataSi, Tesi
(and Ot. -ase in Bibiase, Odmnase etc.).
latete, n. hearth-stone.
latga, p. (= la tfa?, tfa, to boil) heat; sweat, perspiration;
latsa tsa, v. to be hot; to cause sweat, perspiration, in!
latsatsa, -tsale; latSa tSale, he is hot, heated, he per-
spires. Adn. th. s. Comp. hdmo, ktimai, fel etc.
lat§^, n. stir-apple; an eatable fruit.
latsabe, n. time of heat; hot season (comp. otsokrikri);
summer.
latsagbel, n. heat-pimples.
latgMSd, -t§ale» n. heat; perspiration.
dbyGoogk
latSatSo — le. 183
Wiatso, pi. -tsei, n. stir-appletree.
lalso, pi. -Isei, n. fire-stick; fire-brand; s. laitSo, n. th. s.
lalso, n. sharpness, wickedness; bravery, fr. tSo la, v.
iatsolo, D. sharp, wicked; brare fellow.
lau, s. lao, D. sheet..
Lawe, Adn. pr. n. of males.
lawo, n, heal; fr. wo la, v. to be hot; comp. also mlila;
mli 1^0 la, V. heating; burning, kindling,
lawolo, n. incendiary.
le, inf, le, aor. neg. irreg. Ife with neg. voice, and regul.
lee, V. to know, to wit; sometimes = to be able, to
understand, f. i. mile femo, I am able, understand, know
to do it; milee yeli, I don't understand to eat, i. e. I
can not eat il ; le nii, v. to know things, to be learned,
understanding, prudent, wise; inf. nile or niile; comp.
also na, na na, na sisi, yo; nye, v. M, n.; Ot. nim; hQ.
Adn. th. s.
le, le, n. knowledge, wisdom; understanding, comp. niile.
le be, V. to know the time; to be aware.
\e dsei, v. to know there; to have been — .
le he, inf. hele, v. to know one's self,
le he ko, v. to know a place,
le he nii, inf. heniile, v. to know about one's self; to be
conscious,
le se, V. to know one's back; to be circumspect,
le, inf. le, lemo, v. n. and a. to feed; to nurse; to nour-
ish; to raise; to bring up, inf. le; to widen, to be wide,
broad, inf. lele and lemg.
le he, V. hel^, to support one's self,
le lai, inf. Memo, v. (to feed the fire?) to gather fire-
wood,
le mli, inf. mlilemg, v. to widen (inside),
le m. k. si, V. to stretch s. b. out; to hurt, wound, injure
s. b. inf. silemo; to forsake, to leave one alone.
le, n. feeding; nursing; nourishing; raising, bringing up.
le, pi. lehi, Adn. n. vessel, ship, boat = lele, pi. ledsi,
in Gd.
le, pron. comp. § 21, 34; independent pers. subst. pron
he, she (it); comp. e; Adn. le, Ot. ond; demonstrat.
adj. pr. or defin. article, the (l)cr, bie, ba^); Ad. o, also
used to define sentences; in this case = Adn. ng, Ot.
nd; personal objective pronoun, combined with the verb,
him, her (it), Ad. le, Ol. n6; f. i. Gbomo le ni nyle
bie le$ le eyile; the person who walked here about,
Digitized by VjOOQiC
184 le — leleya.
(even) he flogged her, ber SWenf(^ bet ba ^erumjing,
ber f^Iuj fie.
h, pron. Adn. he, she; him, her; s. the former,
lebi (formerly legbu), n. morning; adv. in the morning
(morflend); — mra, — mankS, — maftkp^, — adem^nkS,
early in the morning; comp. also d§e tSere, v. dsetSere-
mo, n.
lebibo, n. morning dew.
lebila, n. morning light,
lebilala, n. morning hymn,
lebiniit^umg , n. moming-work.
lebiniyenii, pi. n. break-fast, comp. nakpamo, n. and kpa
na, V.
lebind, pi. -nil, n. s. th. pertaining to morning,
lebisolemo, n. morning-prayer; morning-service.
lebisSne, n. morning palaver,
ledientse (Adn. lenitsg), pron. he himself, himself; she
herself, herself,
legehao, n. dan. (Sdgenrid^ter; an instrument to rectify saws,
legelege, adj. slender, thin; fe — , v.
legelegefemo, n. slendemess.
Ighe, n. feeding place; pasture,
lei, n. tail,
lekete, leketerele (s. le and tetre), adj. and adv. wide,
broad; -ly. ♦
lekolo, n. fat cattle, fatling.
lele, pi. ledsi^ n. vessel, ship, boat (comp. ahima, ahen-
*kese, duakro, aiilese etc.). Adn. le, Ot. hyen. Lele
md m. k., v. to be affected by sea-sickness; s. n§Q, n.
lele, pron. corroboration of le, even he, or she, the same;
conj. = no le, keke le, then,
lelebii, lelenbii, pi. n, ships-crew,
leledfs, n. ship- wreck (s. dfa).
lelekpelQ, n. ship-wright (s. kpe, v.).
iisrihrzuf: I »»* •' "- '»-«»■» -
quite irregular in Ga, but frequent in Otyi, comp. dua-
kro, one-mast (@inmafler).
leletse, pi. -tsemei, n. ship-master, captain.
leleA, adv. certainly, truly, verily; int. verily, truly! comp.
asanokwa, angkwa; krede etc.
leleo, adj. and adv. narrow; narrowly. •
leletSo, lelentSo, pi. -tsei, n. ships-mast; a kind of cloth.
leleya, n. going in or of a ship.
dbyGoogk
lelo — Id. 186
lelo, n. knoiiviDg, wise, prudent person.
lelo, n. feeder; nurse.
lema, n. ax.
lemo = Iamo» inf. th. s., v. to lick.
lemo, n. breadth; wideness, width.
l6mo» n. licking.
lete, y. to be frugal, moderate, to spare; inf.
letemo, n. sparing; frugality; moderation.
lete he, inf. heletemo, v. = lete, v.
11, inf. UmQ, T. to scoff, to mock; stronger than ye he
feo or gbe he guQ.
lia, inf. liamo, v. perh. europ. word, to line.
liamo, n. lining.
liamotso, pi. -t§ei, n. ruler.
lila §i, Y. inf. sililamo, to be in doubt; to be hanging about,
to loiter; to delay, defer, tarry. Comp. dida, v.
lilei, n. tongue; n§Q-lilei, n. sea-tongue, a kind of seafish
(3un(je); la-Ulei, flame; — nta, double tongue, literally
and tropically.
LigblS, pr. n. of the great fetish in Prampram.
linli, adj. and adv. crooked, -ly; nane liAli, a crooked leg.
lilQ, n. scoffer.
lio = legelege, adj. thin, slender.
limo, n. scoffing, mocking.
lo, v. inf. Id and loroo, to take up, to take away; gener-
ally used of a mass of things taken up together, comp.
ko, kolo; wo, hole; nd; dsie, v. etc. wherefore: to
scoop up (auff(t^dpfen), f. i. sand, swish, stones etc., inf.
lomo; to weave; to knit; to twist; to make nets, baskets,
bags etc., inf. lo. Peculiar expressions are: nu lo m. k..;
wo lo m. k. etc. water takes s. b. away; sleep overcomes
s. b. Alo gbomo 1^ afie, ni ake fomgnii ba sia» the man
(child) is cast away and the afterbirth brought home, prv.
lo ato, inf. atulomo, to take with the arms, to embrace,
comp. ato, here atO; lo hie, — hienmeii, v. to frown;
lo hie wo mli, to frown at, to stare at; comp. kpe, v.
lo n. k. ha, V. to take away in a storm, at once.
lo la, inf. IMoniQ, v. to take up blood; to bring blood and
its revenge upon one's self; elo man Id, he has the re-
venge of the tribe upon him, s. man, n.; blood spilt must
be Taken up, because it defiles the ground; this is done
by the revenge or punishment for il.
Id, pi. loi, n. flesh; meat; living creatures; helo, hewolo,
flesh of man; kolo, bush-flesh, wild beast, beast; loflO,
dbyGoogk
186 'lo ~ lokomo.
bird; lo, nSonlo, t&hlo^ fish, sea-fish, riverfish; wolo,
lo nkQ or nktiA, lean meat; wo lo or lol, t. to briii^
forth fishes (of water); losra, losla, losal^, n. lit. roiftei
meat or fish, a kind of preserved fish etc.; gbe lo, v
to kill (to catch) fish, hd — , y. to sell — ; §a lo» ▼-.
to angle, etc.
'lo, alo, conj. and interrogatory particle, or, in close con-
nection of the sentence the na*" is cut ofiT. Also if it
is the interrogatory particle, it may be translated yfitfi
or, the following contradictory sentence to be left out,
f. i. Oba lo? Are you coming or (sc. not)? Comp.
be; nto, ani, aso, Ot. ana; lat. ne, num; greek jtfi} (tm
©cin>abif$cn „ha"?). A very frequently used word at
the end of enumerating sentences is „lo nd**, „or a thing"
= „or the like**, „or so", „etc."
lo, n. weaving, knitting, twisting etc., s. lo, v.
lo = Ion, n. a kind of thread, twine or cord made from
the „ adobe "-palm-tree.
loda, n. catching of fish or game by traps.
lofa, n. fish-river; fish-pool.
lofine, pi. -fidsi, n. fin; s. fine.
Jo flikilo, n. flying fish.
loflo, pi. lofddsi, n. bird, comp. lo, kolo etc.
lofldbi, n. young bird.
loflobu, -flo, n. hole of a bird.
lofldda, n. bird-catching.
loflddulo, n. bird-catcher; s. dO.
lofloflikimo, n. flight of birds.
lofl5nabu, n. birdsmouth, bill.
loflotsu, n. birds-nest.
loflowao, pi. -wabii, n. birdsfinger, claw, talon.
lofldwiemo, n. birds-talk.
loflowolQ, pi. -wodsi, n. birds-egg.
logbe, n. catching of fish fr. gbe lo, v.
lohetolo, lotoio, n. scales of fishes.
loholo, n. fish-monger.
lahomo, n. fish-mongery.
loke, inf. lokemo, v. to sprain; to disjoint, dislocate; mi-
nane eloke, my foot is sprained; = lone, v. th. s.
lokemo, n. spraining; dislocation; disjoint.
loko (or logo), V. inf. lokomo, io go round, - - round
about, astray.
lokomo, n. going round, astray.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
lokoliki — luino. 187
Igkoiiki or logoligi* aclj. serpeDtlike, flef^tdngeU; fe — , v.
fdl)Idnge(n.
loko si, iDf. SilgkomQ, v. th. s.
loko][i, n. horn of a beast.
lokotio, loto, pi. -bii, a^j. very small; fe — , v. to be - *.
lokprokeroo, n. scaling of fishes,
lolo, adv. still; yet; now; ehle'ka lolo, he is still alive;
comp. kd he, v.
IoIq, n. weaver, knitter etc., fr. lo, v.
lomo, n. taking up.
Lomo, pr. n. of males,
lomo, inf. lomo, loroomo, v. to curse; to scold hard; to
blaspheme; s. bg musu, v.
lomo, lomgmo, n. cursing, scolding, Uasphaning; s. mu-
subo, n.
lomglo? n. cursing person,
lomdmo, n* catching of fish, venison.
Ion, n. a kind of thread, twine or cord made of the „ adobe ^-
palm-tree. S. lo. It is generally used for basing only.
lonSala, loSla, loSra, n. preserved fish, lit. rotten fish,
lota, inf. lotamQ, v. to stir up = futa, v. tsine no — , v.
to have stomack-ache, to be inclined to vomit.
Igpo, n. flea = gb^henmon, s. this,
losamg, n. angling fr. §a lo, v.
loto = lokotio, pi. -bii, adj. very small,
lototo, n. fish-scales. \
'lowQ, olowQ, n. leopard = kotSe, hleiimalo etc.
lowu, n. fish-bone,
loyeli, n. meat-eating, flesh-eating,
loyelo, n. meat-, flesh-eater,
lu, V. inf. la and lump, pi. lumo, to strike, to smite, to
fall; to cast; lu m. k. te, to pelt s. b. with a stone;
lumo - - tei, stones; to be dull, stupified foolish.
Comp. tfa, V. fo, v.
lu §i, V. inf. Silumo , to fall down, comp. tfa si, gbe si, v.
lu, n. striking, smiting; falling; pelting; dullness,
la, n. skylight; hole or opening in the top of a house or
thatch; chimney.
IuIq, n. striker, pelter.
lulalu, adj. and adv. (imitation of the sound of flowing
water) soft, quiet; -ly, -ly; of the flowing of a river;
fe — , V. to be quiet; to flow quietly,
lulalufemg, n. quietness.
umQy n. casting, striking, pelting; fr. lu, v.
dbyGoogk
188 lumo — ma.
lumo, pi. lumei, n. prince; goyernor; commandant; see
amrado; mahtsebi; ablade; ye lumo, v. inf. lumoyeli, to
govern.
lumobi, n. prince. •
lumohewale, n. power of government.
lumoyeli, n. government; rule.
lumoyelibe, n. time of government.
lumoyelihe, n. place of government; seat of government.
lumoyino, n. period or reign of a governor.
lumoyinobii, pi. n. contemporaries of a governor.
lus, n. dan. candle; comp. kane, n.
lustso, pi. -tsei, n. candle-stick.
lutu, inf. lutumo, v. to mix (with earth, mud etc.; s. futu);
to dig the ground (and mix it for cultivation); comp.
lota, futa, V. futu, v.
lutumQ, n. mixing; digging
Words not to be found under M. s. under nm.
Ms, V. inf. ma, and mSmo, pi. mSmo, to lie, of hard and
large things, to stand, used of boxes, presses etc.; comp.
damo, V. to lay, to set, to put, to stand, v. a., generally
„ke-mS*'; to build rr= tfa; — to borrow; to lend (not
used of money, but of other things, s. fa, v.); to knock
with the bones of the fist. Gomp. Ot. m3, to give; and
Ga: damo, v.
mS aladsa, v. to row with long sticks, where ground is to
be found.
m§ he, V. inf. hema, to plaster (a house etc.).
ma hie, inf. hiemS, v. to set before ; to stand or lie before.
ma mli, V. inf. mJima, to stand, lie, rest in; to set into;
to plaster inside.
ma na, v. inf. nama, to stand at etc.
ma no, V. inf. noma, to stand on.
ma sg, V. inf. sgma, to stand back, behind.
ma n. k. no aduatso, v. to affirm s. th.
ma §i, V. inf. simamo, sima, to stand, lie, rest on the
ground; to set down, to stand down.
ma tsu, inf. tSuma, v. to build = tfa tsu, v.
ma yi si, v. yisima, to let the head sink down.
ma — before verbs = mi a, mi ba, 1 will or shall, comp.
Table VII.
dbyGoogk
mS — mfimfi. 189
mS, n. lending; botrowing; setting; standing; building; box
on the ear, stroke; gba m. k. hie m5, to strike s. b.
into his face; etc. fr. mS, v.
mS, n. maize-flour, generally ^et, because ground with
water; dough; to m3, to put the loaves into the oven;
flour.
ma, Adn. v. = ba, to come; Ot. ba, Ayigbe fa.
md, mdn, pi. m3d§i, n. building?, town, people of it, tribe,
nation; country. In this word as in da, dan; de, den;
te, ten, the terminaUonal augment n = mli is sometimes
separable, sometimes inseparable, as mdn le and mi len,
inside of the town, the town and its contents; as the
ideas of both may also be considered separable or in-
separable (comp. go to town, go into town, rule the
town [together with its contents] rule in the town, Ga:
ye man le no and ye mSi len nd). Ot. omdn; Ad. m§,
mdm, th. s.
maba = mawa, n. maid-ser?ant (3){agb).
mgdse, inf. m3dsemo, v. to send (some thing, not persons, s.
tsu, v.). Comp. m§ and § 27 about the compounds of
„dse".
madselo, n. sender; speditor.
mddsemo , n. sending, spedition, s. mddSe and comp. tSu, v.
mSdsi, pi. of man, n. towns, tribes.
madsimadsi fl^, all the different towns or tribes.
madsiasane, n. national palaver.
magbamo, n. striking, boxing, s. gba md, v. maigblamo,
th. s.
magbalo, n. boxer.
magbelemo and mawyiemo, n. grinding of flour; s. mS, n.
mahutso, pi. -tSei, n. mahogany-wood; — tree.
mahutso-okpld, n. mahogany table.
m&hao! salutation (Ot. = „mannii*' in G. how is the town
here?) answer: man d§o! the town is quiet.
maf, n. (s. ma) boxes; gbla mai, v. to box.
male, inf. malemg, v. to lie, comp. pasa; pecul. sentence:
omalee, omaleko! lit. thou didst not lie, thou hast not
lied! = it is true, thou art right!
'male, amale, n. lie.
'malelQ, amalelo, n. liar = opasafo.
'malemo, amalemo, n. lying; lie.
malo, n. setter; builder fr. ma, v.
mam, Adn. n. = man, town etc.
mSma, redup. v. of ma, v.
dbyGoogk
190 mama — mSft.
mama, n. cloth of any kind; cloth or dress upper gar-
ment of the natives, consisting of a large square piece
tastefully cast by men over one shoulder or fixed round
the waist and flowing down to the feet, by women it
is fixed above the breasts (generally when married) or
under them (generally when unmarried) and only reach-
ing to the knees. The latter wear a kind of shawl over
it. See lekle, under-cloth of men and boi, n. th. s. of
women. With poor people the „mama'' is also the
„ cover" in the night; during hard work it is put aside;
sometimes it is used as vessel to carry s. th. in. Comp.
the Hebr. lustoms. Dsie mama, v. to put the cloth off;
with men „to remove it from the chest as a sign of
respect; bu (or ha or wo) mama, v. to dress with it,
to wear native-dress (comp. wo atade); to cover one's
self with cloth; lo mama, v. to weave cloth; kpe ma-
ma, V. to sew cloth etc. lo mama mli, v. to wear a
„mama** which is to large; to embroider.
mamabtl, -bumQ, n. wearing of native-dress; covering.
mamadsiemo, n. undressing; uncovering; a sign of respect.
mamafe, n. rest of cloth; rag.
mamaha, = mamabQmo.
mamahefomo, n. washing of cloth; s. niiahefomo, n.
mamahdlo, n. cloth-dealer.
mamahSmo, n. cloth-dealing; s. hd, v.
mamakpe, n. sewing of cloth.
mamakpelo, n. native tailor, — seamstress; s. niikpelQ.
mamakwamo, n. losing colour of cloth.
mamaiolQ, n. weaver. ,
mamalo, n. weaving.
mamalomo, mamanlomo, th. s.
mamanlo, n. embroidering, fr. lo mama mli.
mamawd = mamaba, -ha; but seldon» used; comp. wo
atade, v.
mami, n. engl. = ma*am, madam.
mSmo, pi. form of m3; n. setting; standing; building; s.
mS, V. and n.
mSmpSm, mSinkpSm, m9iikp9fi, Ot. mSmpSm; n. land cro-
codile; it is of a smaller size, than those living in water
(ba, dseadsen), and eaten by the natives.
mSmu, n. roasted maize-flour, a favorite food for travellers,
warriors etc. made into pap; s. tremasugbo etc.
mSn, pi. madsi (Ot. omSn, Adn. mam) , n. lit inside of a
town = ma mli, s. mS, town, towns-people as a body;
dbyGoogk
mSA — mannye. 191
tribe; people, nation; kingdom; country (in a political
sense); comp. akrowa; manku, asafo, ta, akutso, dsaku,
lYcku; sikpon; akwaSdn etc.
indn, pi. ingdsi, n. a kind of herring, the seafish roost
frequently caught along this coast and in gre^t masses
sold into the interior.
mSn-akutso, pi. -tsei, n. town-quarter iivith its inhabitants;
divided into „wekumei** or families.
m8n-asafo, n. town-company; a military division answering
to „akut§o", which is a civil-division,
mdnbii, pi. of mannyo (seldom used), lit. children of a town
(comp. the Hebr.) towns-people; citizens. «
manbo = mSntO, n. founding or foundation of a town;
fr. bo mati.
manbolo = mantolo, n. founder of a town (after whom it
is often called, f. i. ASdnman, Yaoman, Adseiman, Adu-
maft etc.).
mSnbu, n. towns-watch, protection of a tovra or people;
fr. bu man, v. ^
mSndfa, n. breaking, destruction ^f a town, or the people;
fr. dfa man, v.
mShdSo, maftdSole, n. puplic safety, security, peace, s.
dso, hedso, hedsole etc.; fr. man dso, v.
manfo, n. walking in the town in procession; fr. fo man, v.
'm§hf5, 'mamfd, am., n. ruins (of a town) ; s. koikoi, kuikui.
mano, n. the mango-fruit,
manotso, pi. -tsei, n. mangotree.
maftg6, maAo, n. Ot. th.s. foot-stool; bench; s. sei, ablogwa.
maAke = ademankS, and
'mankS, am., n. (Ot.) civil war, s. mansd.
mankp^, n. and adv. early in the morning; (at) daybreak;
— mra, very early; lebi-mankp^, s. lebi, n. h!e f^lefute,
— matamata, n.
mankpa, n. walking about in the town; s. kpa, v.
mankpagbg, n. loitering dog; loiterer.
mankpam, s. mampam.
mankpe, mankpemo, n. assembling or assembly of the town
or people; s. kpe, v.
mankralo, mailklalo, n. town -genius, s. kla; the first in
rank after the king.
manku, n. part of a town, tribe.
mannii, pi. n. things belonging to a town.
mannye, pi. -nyemei, n. lit. towns-, people's- or country-
mother; queen, if ruling (s. mants^M) first woman in
dbyGoogk
W2 mannyo — mfifttSeM.
a town, who has to lead (he women in any ptAlIc binl«i
ness or in war. She has female officers under her. This
institution is of great services. Ye — , ?. to be queen |
etc, inf. maAnyeyeli. Corop. mantse, n.
mannyo, pi. maAbii n. the sing, is seldom used; citizen,
inhabitant of a town mSnyo, th. s.
mS6noyeli, n. government of a town; s. mSntseyeli, n.
manse, n. back of the town, behind the town ; region far
away; adr. afar, far away, afar ofif, -son, very far; ete
manse, he is gone to a far country, on a journey;
manse — , foreign; manse-wiemo, foreign language etc.
mjnsenyo, pi. -mei, -bii, n. foreigner; stranger; s. gbo, n.
mdhsend, pi. -nii, n. strange, foreign thing.
manso, mans6, n. public difficulty; rivalry; guilt; rebel-
lion, revolution; civil -war. Comp. s5, atfia. Ke m. k.
ts6 mansd, v. to live with s. b. in rivalry.
mansdtsd, n. enmity (of public kind), rivality; comp. nye,
hedsd, hiekd etc.
mSinsdtSdlo, n. rival, eneqiy; fr. \&6 mansd.
mSAsu and
mdnsubad, n. character of a town, nation, etc.
mSinta, n. army of a town or people; war of a town or
people, 8. ta, n. j
mantabilgi, n. garrison, soldiers, warriors of a town.
manto, n. founding of a town, fr. to man; comp. bg maft;
manbo.
mantolg, n. founder of a town = manbolo*
mantse, pi. mantSemei or mSdsiatsemel, n. lit. towns-father;
country-father {„ganbcdt)atcr'0 ; king; first person of »
town; caboseer; major, (ilomg; Sutgcnncijler; S^ult^
fieife); ye mantse, v. to be king etc. to rule,. reign; inf.
mantSeyeli; wo m. k. mantse, inf. mantse wo, to exalt, s.b.
to be king, to make s. b. king; kpa mantse (sc. ye sel
le no) inf. mantSe kpamo, to dethrone a king, s. kpa.
Comp. mannye, n. , and kon, n. mSitSe in Adn.
mSiitsebi, com. n. -binu, pi. bihi m. n. -biyo, pi. biyci,
f. n. kings- child; prince; princess.
mSntsebO, n. creation of a king; = mSntsewo, n.
m9nt§efai, n. kings-hat, crown, diadem. Comp. akekr6, n.,
kdhfai, n.
mahtsekpamo, n. dethroning of a king; fr. kpa nOint^e, v.
m9ntsema4, n. Kings-town; residence.
mgntseM, pi. mantsenamei, mantsemeianHmei, wife of a
king; queen, comp. maAnye.
dbyGoOgI
e -
mMtSeseYnotamo — matanwO. 193
mfiAtSesefnotamQ, n. enthroning of a king, fr. mSMse ta
sel no, V.
m^tsesel, n. seat of the king, sometimes richly decorated,
throne; mfintSe ta (sc. se!) no, the king is enthroned.
mlMSeseiterelQ, n. throne- or stool-bearer to the king.
mSntsesemo, pi. semei, n. the first person in rank after
the king; s. maAkralo, semo, n., saccessor of a king.
mSfttseseo, pi. -sebii, n. the next following or puisne
brother of a king; the crown-prince, successor.
mSntseta, n. royal army.
mSntSetse, n. father of the king.
mfthtsetSo, n. royal staf; scepter,
maiitsewe, n. king'shouse; court; residence.
n^SMseweku, n. royal family.
mSntSewebii, n. rbyal household.
mfiAtgewiemo, n. a royal word.
mSntseyeli, n. reign; kingdom; government,
mantseyelihe, n. kingdom; residence of the government.
mShtseyino, n. time of government of a king; Dawid,
mantse le yino, under the king David (gr. im c. gen.).
manyamdnyS, adj. and adv. rough, with a rent surface, dis-
orderly ; kagumo akutu le mSnySmSnya, take wo tSgtseo
fufuihle, don't peel the orange roughly, as (if) a fowl
picks the face of a pudding.
mdnySimSnySifemo, n. roughness.
Manya („I have found" or „I shall find"), pr. n. of one
of the Krobo-towns (that one belonging to Odonkg Azu,
s. Yilg, pr. n.).
M5sa, Mansa (Ot.) pr. n. of the third daughter,
masei, n. and adv. side; near; ba mimasei, come at my
side; ba mind, come to me. Ad. mase, n.
maseigbei, n. access to a person; s. nogbe, n.
masa, n. rotten dough, i. e. leaven; comp. sa, sala, losla
etc. wo.
masa, inf. maSawO, v. to leaven; but comp. ffi, v. to be
leavened.
masaw(^, n. leavening.
ma§i, n. land of a people, people, nation,
mata, matamata, adj. and adv. mixed, slimy, soft; slimily;
fe — , V.
matafemo, n. softness etc.
matan, n. interruption; wo — , v. to interrupt; = alali,
anantaka, etc.
matanwd, n. interruption.
Zimmermann, Akra-Vocab. 13
dbyGoogk
194 nM6 — memedM.
mdto, n. putting bread into the oyen; to mi, y. to put the
doughy bread into the oven.
mstolo, n. person doing thi^ (in Germ. „<S^\t%tx").
mStse, Ad. n. = mahtse.
mawa, n. maid-servanl, SR(igb. The word is either Otyi-
baba, maba, mawa, female person; or dan.
mg, inf. mg, to wait; - - for; to expect, to hope; to re-
main, to be quiet; comp. kwe gbe; hie me, inf. hleme»
y. to be at home, to be contant, s. h!e tSe, th. con-
trary.
mi, n. waiting.
m§, mM, inter, pron. what? Sometimes it is put at the
end of inter, sentences, as: Sane ni adSadSe at§d le dsi
me? lit. the palaver which was related is what? = what
is thfe palaver? —
meba,.meba, = meni ba, adv. pron. lit. what came? =
why? JMeba okeemi? Why didst thou not tell me? =
menihewQ ni . . .?
mSbeyino? what time, when?
me, Adn. pron. objectively used, them, = ame in Gft;
n. people = mei in G3.
mei , n. niatter coming out from the eyes esp. when sick.
mei, n. small red beans growing at a shrub and used for
gold weighing.
meitso, n. the shrub of them.
mei, me, pi. of mo which see, n. person; = people; Gerra.
man, see a.
meiabo nl, as many as ... .
meididsiand, pi. -nii, n. something appertaining to black
people; comp. blQfdnd, n.
MeididSiasikpon, pr. n. lit. black people's land (s. mo-
din), Africa.
meididsiasane, n. palaver, matter of black people ; comp.
blofdsane, n.
mele, inf. melemo, v. dan. to inform, report, esp. one's
self as sick etc. („mell)cn").
melelo, n. informer, reported; person reported as sick.
melemo, n. report, information; report, that s. body is sick.
m^le, adj. bad, nasty.
ml6le, omel6, n. thirty cowries.
mglo^ n. waiting person.
melo and adj. stupid, lazy; dull.
memed§i, irreg. pi. of momo, adj. old; hi medsi or h!
memedSi, old men.
dbyGoogk
rn^mo — mi. 195
m^mko, n. waiting.
mene =mone, dem* pron. this (person); pi. menemei.
m§ne? = what (is) this? := meni dSi ene?
meni = me, the former more used in the beginning, the
latter more at the end of sentences and in combinations,
int. pron. what? f. i. Meni eke? What he said? Eke
me? th. s. Mg gbomo ba? what man came? But „ni
(ni)" being originally also a verb = dsi, to be (comp.
n\, rel. pron. and conj.) meni gbomo ba? can also be
said. Sometimes „meni^ is also put at the end of a
sentence.
menimeni? whatever? used as adv. above all, best, f. i.
Ke ele na menimeni le, elee tamo blgfdmei, if he under-
stood art best, he does not understand like the Europeans.
S. fe n. k. V.
MensS and M^sd, pr. n. of the third son (Ot.); s. MansS,
pr. n.
mensre, n. dan. physician; doctor; comp. tsalo; tsofatSe^ n.
mensretsu, n. docters' room; apothecarys' shop,
niereke, n. large river-fishes with flat heads, a great article
of trade in the Yoltaregions.
mf6nini, mfoniri (Ot. th. s.) n. picture; s. amagd, subain,
bend etc.
mfuna, n. a kind of young bush; s. lakpa, n.
mi , V. inf. mile, hunting with dogs (comp. gbobi) ; ya mile,
v. th. s. (go ahunting).
ml, V. inf. mimo, to submerge, to sink; to be swallowed;
to swallow ; to make swallow ; to dip into ; to enter into
8. business; to venture, to dare,
mi, n. round little stones or nuts to play with; s. fobite;
a similar stone,
mi, m' Adn. n. inside = mli in Ga, mu in Otyi, me in
Ayigbe.
mi, n. breast- or chest -bone; chest; heart (comp. tsitsi
and tsui) ; ml se , inf. mlse , v. (the breast-bone reaches,
is .large enough) to be content, happy; to rejoice, simi-
lar to hie me, v.; sedse m. k. ml, v. transit, of the
former (comp. $ 27 about dse) to make one's breast, or
chest satisfied, to comfort, rejoice s. b., inf. mlSedsemo;
ke nine fo ml na, to lay the hand upon the breast (in
acknowledgement of guilt, accusation etc. or in giving
a promise; Mc ^anb a«f« ^erj legen.
mi, m-, n-, n-; -mi, -m', -n, -n, pers. pron. I; mine;
me; comp. § 34.
13*
dbyGoogk
196 mim — mlsesane.
mim-, ml-, m-, n-, A-, present augment §i3f.
mla, V. inf. mlamo, to squeeze, to press; to gird one*s
self; -he, v. to gird the loins, inf. hemlamQ; -sen, y.
to throttle, to strangle; s. seA, y, and n.
mla hTe, inf. hlemiamo, to press the face, to sustain, to
bear (pain, labour etc.).
mlalo, n. a person pressing etc. fr. ro!a, v.
mlamo, n. pressing, squeezing, girding; throttUng. Comp.
senmo.
mia6, pi. mtadSi, n. mole, molewarp.
mlamgnd, pi. -nii, n. girdle,
mido = mikome, mikeke, I alone; only I; comp. to, eko-
meto, th. s.
mldsi, pi. of mils, n. drum,
mldsiayilo, n. drummer,
mldsiayl, n. drumming, fr. yi m!le» v.
mikeke, mikome, I alone, I only.
mile, n. sporting, hunting with hounds ; comp. gbobimo, n.
mllelo, n. venison; — gbobilo, n.
mileloniiyenii , pi. n. prepared venison,
milo, n. sportsman, comp. gbobilQ, gbglo, n. th. s.
m!l^, pi. midsi, n. small kind of drums; yi-, v. dram;
s. otente, ob6nu etc.
mlleyl, n. drumming,
mileyilo, n. drummer,
mlletse, n. th. s.
mim -, s. mi-; present augment,
mllo, n. swallower; dipper,
mimo, n. submersion, sinking; swallowing; dipping;
baptism.
Mimpemihoasem, pr. n. of a village (Ot. = I don't like
palaver! comp. Odomiabra = If thou love me, come!
pr. n. of a village not far from the former),
min = mini= midsi, it is I.
min- = mim-, ml-, present aug.
mina, n. chest; comp. tsitsi, fufo, n.
mise, n. contentment; happiness; rejoicing, joy; pleasure,
comf6rt. S. ml, n. Comp. hieme, n.
misebe, n. joyful lime,
misedselo, n. comforter, rejoicer, fr. sedse m. k. mi, s.
ml, n.
mTsedsemg, n. comforting, rejoicing; comfort; s. kpatamQ,D.
miseSsemosane, n. comforting circumstance,
misfisane, n. joyful news.
dbyGoogk
mitgo — _ mli. 197
mitSo, pi. -iSei, n. a tree bearing the Dut, called „mi", n.
mla, mra, Ot. th. s., n. law; wo mla, v. inf. mlawo, to
give a law; t5 mla, v. inf. mlat5, mlatdmo. to transgress
the law; comp. kita, akpg. S. mS, v. to set.
mla, mra, mramra, adv. quick, quickly; soon (perh.fr. the
Ot. bra, come!)
mlantfi, n. leopard, comp. olowQ, kotSe, hleilmalo, n.
mlatdmo, n. transgression of the law.
mlatdlo, n. transgresser of the law.
mlatsdlo, n. law-teacher; lawyer; vo/uxog.
mlatsdmo , n. teaching of the law.
mlatsdmgwolo, n. and
mlawolo, pi. -wodSi, n. book of law.
mlawo, n. law-giving.
mlawolo, n. law-giver.
mlawomo = mlawo, n.
mle, mele, n. mushrooms,
p-mle, mule, n. depth? s. mu mle, -mule, s.
mlebo (Ot. berabo) n. liver (perh. europ. word).
mlefo, n. a mild person, comp. bleO.
. mlelo = mHelo , n. venison.
mli (shortened m', h, n) n. inside; adv. and subs^ntive
postposition in inside, inwardly; etc. Ot. mu, m (n, n),
Adn. mi. m (n, n). Mli is one of the noiQis used as
relational- or formwords to express the relation of place,
comp. he (the contrary of mli), hewo; Me, se; no, si,'
sisi; A6, masei; yi, t§ui, te, ten etc. Comp. §§ 24—26,
§ 29, §§ 44—47. The most common combinations with
mli, by which all may be sufficiently understood are the
following: ba mli, inf. mliba, v. to come in; to be ful-
filled; contracted baft; be mli, ben, neg. v. (s. ye mli)
to be not in, to be not true, to be false; ben, it is not
so! b§ mli, v. to. sweep in some place, --into; be mli,
V. to take hold in (with pincers), to pinch in; to nar-
* row into etc. Comp. be, v.; and be v.; ble mli, v. to
lie in a place, s. ble; bote mli, v. to enter; dfa mli,
inf. mhdfd, v. to break the inside. . . ^do mli, v. to bend;
dsa mli, inf. mlidsd, v. to divide; dse mli, v. to come
forth from; dse mli, v. th. s., dsie mli, v. to take out;
fa mli, V. to take out; fo mli, v. pi. flo mli, to cut in
two; fo mli, v. to wash inwardly; gba mli, pi. gbla mli,
inf. mligba, -gbamo, -gblamo, todivule == dSa mli; gbe
mli, inf. mllgbemo, v. to fall in; to fall into (einfaUen,
^ineinfaden; gba mli, v. to bore through, to make hole
dbyGoogk
198 mil be — mii le.
into, to perforate; hi mli, y. inf. mlihile, to dwell in;
ho mli, to lie in a cavity, to lie betwixt; to shove in,
-into; ka mli, V. to stain; k9 mli, to lie in; ko mli, v.
to pick out, pi. klo, k$lo mli; kSmli. v. to break into;
kpa mli, v. to select, to be dainty; kp9 mli, v. to stretch
one's self; kpemli, v. to decide; kp6 mli, v. to redeem
from; lemli, v. to know the inside, i. e. about; le mli,
V. to widen (the inside); lo mli, v. to take out from;
lu mli, V. to strike into,^ to fall into; md mli, v. to stand
in, to put in etc. mi mli, v. to sink into; to dip into;
md mli, to take hold in, at, of; na mli, v. to see into,
to have insight; nS mli, v. to press in, to squeeze out,
to shut up; n6 mli, v. to take from; sa mli, v. to pre-
' pare inwardly; §a mli, y. to wipe, white-wash the in-
side; ta mli, pi. tra mli, v. to sit in; to touch the inside,
to stir, --up; to move; t§a mli, v. to dig; t§6 mli, v.
to turn in'; wo mli, v. to cast in, to give over and
above; wo mli la, v. to make one angry, comp. mli wo
la; wu mli, v. to cast one's self into (the water) to bath;
ya mli, v. to enter =■- bote; ye mli, negat. be mli, v.
to be in, to be true; shortened yen, yeA! = truly! yl
mH, yin, v. to strike in; to hit; to enter upon (a jour-
ney); eyifi ete, he went oiF, he departed; Amene miyin,
to day I started ; yo mli , v. to perceive etc.
mli be, V. n. to be inwardly narrow, contracted; s. be, v.
mli dsa, v. to be divided, inf. mli, d§a, comp. dsa mli, v.
mli dso, V. n. to be sparing, illiberal (inwardly bitter, s. d§o);
. inf. mli-dsomg.
mli d§Q, inf. mlidsole, v. to be kind.
mli fe m. k. tei, = mli ta, v. to be touched, moved;
comp. also yi mli.
mli Hi, inf. mliflimo, v. n. (to feel inward tickling?) s.fl], v.;
to be glad, happy; mimli flimi, I am glad; comp. mi
s^, hie me, nyS, v.
mli fe fla, v. to have an inward complaint.
mli fu, V. n. inf. mlifu -mg, to swell inwardly, i.e. to get
angry, to be angry; comp. mli wo la, gli, v.
mli fa m: k. , v. a. to be angry with s. b.
mli gba, pi. mH gbla, inf. mligbamo, mligblamo, v. to part
in two, to be divided, comp. gba mli, v.
mli gbo, V. to be without inward feeling.
mli hi, inf. mlihile, v. to be inwardly good, to be kind.
mli kpg, v. s. kpo, v.
mli le, V. to be inwardly wide], roomy.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
n4i nu he — roligblalQ. 1 99
tnti nu he, v. to feel inwardly,
mli pila, y. to be inwardly wounded,
mli ta, V. n. inf. mlitd, to be inwardly touched or mo-
ved; comp. yi mli, mli fe m. k. tei, v.
mli t§e, V. n. inf. mlitSemo, to be inwardly pure, clear;
Ol. mu tew, V.
mli tSere, v. n. corrobor. of the former, s. t§e, tSere, to
be inwardly rent; to be rent in two, to be divorced,
mli tsd ye n. k. hewQ, v. to yearn about s. th. := musun
ts6, v.; inf. mlitsd.
mli wa, V. n. inf. mli wale » to be inwardly hard; to be
difficult,
mli wo la, v. n. to be inwardly hot (s. wo la), to be angry;
emli wo m. k. la, he is angry about s. b. ; inf. mlilawO;
comp. wo ro. k. mli la; mU fQ; gli v.
mliba, n. fulfillment; fr. ba mli, v.
mlibe, n. narrowing; fr. be mli, v.
mlibemo, n.; sweeping in s. place; fr. be mli and mli
be, V.
mlibotemo, n. entering; entrance, ingress etc.
mlidsa, n. division; part = mligbamo ; fr. dsa mli and mli
dsa, V. I
mlidSalo, n. divider,
mlidse, n. coming or going forth,
mlidsiemo, n. production fr. dsie mli, v.; exception.
mlidsielQ, n. producer.
mlidSomo, n. sparing; illiberality ; fr. mli d§o, v.
mlidsolQ, n. illiberal person.
mlidsQlg, n. a merciful person,
mlidsgle, n. yearning.
mlid§Q, n. th. s.
mlifdmo = mlidsiemo , n.
mlifi, mllHrno, n. binding into s. th.
mliflilo, n. happy, glad person,
mliflimg, n. happiness, gladness, fr. mli fli, v.
mliflomo, mlifo, n. cutting into pieces; fr. fo mli, pi. flo
mli, V.
mlifomo, n. grudging, grudge, fr. fo mli, v.
mlifomo, n. inward washing; fr. fo mli, v.
mlifu, n. anger.
mlifQlQ, n. angry person,
mligbamo, uriigblamo, n. division; part =: mlidSa; fr. gba
mli and mli gba; s. gba, v.
mligbalQ, mligblalo, n. divider; s. gba, v.
d by Google
200 mligbe — mliteA.
mligbe, n. ^ay into s. place, ingress; inside; comp. he^
and segbe, n.
mligbemo, n. falling in or into.
mligbomo, pi. -mei, n. inward man; soul? (ace. to Hanson),
mligba, n. perforation,
mliha, n. inward covering,
mliheremg, n. taking in.
mlihile, n. dwelling or remaining in some place fr. hi mli;
kindness fr. mli hi, y.
mlihilehe, = Sihilehe, n. dwelling. ^
mlihilo, n. inhabitant; kind person; comp. tse, n. maitoyo, n.
tSutse, n.
mliho, n. lying betwixt; shoving in, fr. ho mli, v. *
mlihCimo, n. cultivating in a place,
mlika, n. staining; stain, fr. ka mli, v.
mlikamo, n. sticking, paving, fr. ka mli, v.
mlikgmo, n. lying in a place,
mliklgmg, rnhkolomo, n. picking out.
mlikpalQ, n. a dainty person; searcher*
mlikpamo, n. th. s.; daintiness, fr. kpa mli, v.; .distinction. ,
inlikpamoniiyenii, pi. n. dainty food, dainties.
mliK|>2imQ, n. stretching (one's self;; resting,
mlikpelo, n. a decisive person,
mlikpe, mi. decision,
mlikpemo ,' n. chiselling,
mlikpe, n. meeting in s. place,
mlila, n. inward fire, heat, passion; anger; wo m. k. — ,
V. to grieve s. b.
mlilatSg, pi. -tsemei, n. a passionate person.
mlilawO, n. grieving; making angry,
mlimdmo, n. taking hold of s. th. ; comprehension; faith,
trust; fr. md mli, v.
mlifiSi, n. pressing out, squeezing,
mlinalo, n. a person who has insight,
mlina, n. insight, fr. na mli, v.
mlinamo, n. treading, stepping in.
mlinSmo, n. shutting in.
mlinii, pi. n. inward things; bowels,
mlisi, n. bosom,
mlita, mlitamo, pi. form mlitramo, n. sitting in a place;
touching ; feeling ; fr. ta mU and mli ta, s. ta, pi. tra, v.
mlitasane, n. a touching story,
mlitemg, n. concealing in s. place,
mliteil, n. waist.
dbyGoogk
mliteAbdA — mo. 201
mlitejIibA]^, n. girdle = hefimgnd, mlamond, n.
inliteififimQ, n. girding.
inlitSd, n. digging (in a place).
mlitsamo, n. inward healing; s. tsa, v.
inlitSemQ, n. inward purity.
mlitSemo, n. calling in.
mlitseremg , n. (inward) separation » disunion; divorce fr.
mli tSere and tSere mli, comp. tSe, tSere, y.
nilitsd = musuntSd, n. yearning, mercy.
mliisdmo, n. showing; inward change.
mlltSumo, n. wiping out.
mliwale, n. inward hardness; difficulty.
mliwo, n. casting in (over and above) ; giving into the
bargain; the thing given into the bargain; the worst, the
outcast, etc. also used of men. Comp. „S)reingabe'' in
6erm»
mliya = mlibotemo, n. entering; ingress.
mliyi, mliyimg, n. (ba« Stnfi^Iagen, t). yimli, cinfd^lagen);
striking into; entering a journey, a way; touching,
moving.
mliyomo, n. inward perception.
mlo-, s.j&mlo-.
mlu, n. dust.
mlumlu, adj. dusty; adv. into dust, f. i. gble n. k. mlu-
mlu, V. to grind s. th. into dust; inf.
mlumlugblemo , n. grinding into dust.
'mo, emo, pi. medSi (and moi) adj. old; f. i. nQ mo, pi.
hi medsi, an old man; yd mo, pi. yei med§i, an old
woman.
'momo, corrob. of the former, adj. pi. momoi and memedSi,
old; adv. already (f(|^on, Wngfl); comp. Ot. dada, dedaw,
Ih. s. fr. da, V.
mo! Ot. salutation = aiko! in Gd.
mo (mo, m9, md), pi. mei, n. man (2Kenf(d), person; some
body; pi. people (man); comp. §§ 25, 26, 34; and ame>
me, a. In combinations mo, pi. mei, distinguishes per-
sons from things, s. § 48; f. i. mofon, a bad person, nd-
foA, a bad thing ; comp. nd , pi. nii, n. Connected with
verbs, as their subj. or object it expresses these undefined,
though personal, as „a'S if the subject: f. i. mo ke
ake . . . , some body said that . . . mei le ke, people
say, or ake (man fagt), it is said; ke afe ene le, ayio
mo, if this is done, people flog one (mm mm ^ad tf^ut^
dbyGoogk
302 mo — m^bonii.
fo n)irb man gef^Iagen); agbe mei komei, some people
were killed; comp. also moko.
mo, Adn. pron. independ. = bo, thou.
mo ko, pi. mei komei, s. moko.
mo din or
modlil, pi. meididSi, ii. black person, negro; comp. also
mot§uru and blofonyo, n.
mg, adv. and conj.; then; comp. mO, mon, adv.; ba mo I
come then!
m6, pi. mOmg, inf. mdmo, v. to hold; to catch; to take
hold of.
m5 he, v. to take hold at.
m5 mil, inf. mlimdmg, v. to take hold of; to hold fast;
to trust, believe.
mo si, -sisi, v. to lake hold of the ground.
m6, mdn, pi. m5dSi, n. fort; any stone-house with a flat
top. Comp. TG^ and TIKD in Hebrew.
mo, mon (Ol. mom), adv. rather; conj. though; jwar (in-
deed, it is true); ekee mon; si kSig mile; though he
did not say it, 1 know it still; cr fagte cd groat nidi^t,
nber \6) wcig c5 io^.
moan, muan, adv. or interrog. particle, very probably con-
nected with the former, really, indeed; ofe nek€ noko
moan?! thou could.est really do such a thing?! Ani ohle
be hiegble moaA?! Is thy face really without shame?!
Art thou really so shameless?!
mobo, n. (Ot. th. 5.) misery; feeling of misery, mercy (mi-
sericordia); pity; compassion; ye mobo, v. gen. nii ye
mobo, to be pitied, pitiful, miserable; minii ye mgbo po!
I am very miserable; eye mobo, it is a pity! na mobo,
V. inf. mobonale, to have mercy, pity ; to have compassion ;
(sometimes also kwe mobo, th. s.); nami mobg! have
mercy upon me; enale mobo, he pitied him; comp. lon^
iXeeiv; and musun tsd, mli tsd, v.
mobgmobo, adj. and adv. pitiful, sad; fe — , v. to be — ,
to be — .
. mghomobofemg, n. sadness; pity.
mgbgna and
mgbgnale, n. mercy, pity, compassion; comp. domg; anum-
nyam; musuntsd etc. Ot. mgbgrehQnQ and ahQmgbg, n.
mgbgnalg, n. a merciful person.
ingbgnanii, pi. n. things according to mercy; done for
mercies sake;
mgbgnii, pi. n. misery.
dbyGoogk
UkQAeh — mra. 203
modeA, n. (Ot. th. s.) diligence; bo — » V. inf. modeAbo,
ta be diligent. Comp. Medg, y.
modeAbo, n. diligence, energy; zeal.
modeAbolo, n. diligent person.
modeAbodiSeA, n. diligent manners.
modin (s. mo din) pi. meididSi, n. black man; negro.
modiAsane, n. history, state, matter of a native.
mof^mo, mofiamo, mopiamo, pi. meifS, pron. every or any
(body); see § 22, 2f., and comp. f6, fia, pifi; noffno.
moi, n. a kind of seafish; s. boi, n.
moko, mo ko (s. mo, n. and ko, pron.), pi. meikomei, n.
but used as pron. some body (jiemanb); a body; a per-
son. With neg. voice: no body (niemanb); f. i. moko
be, lit. some body is not here, no body is here; but
comp. d§ee moko, not a person; if not the verb, but
the noun shall be negationed. Comp. noko, n. and n6ko,
n. in Adn.
mokomoko (pi. meikomei, not reduplicated), th. s. as the
former, but stronger and therefore generally used with
the neg. voice = no body at all ; comp. nokonoko, heko-
heko, gblkogbiko etc. and § 22, 2 f.
mokp5A, n. (accord, to Hanson); a stranger; s. gbo, n.
mdlo» n. catcher.
mom, mon = mo, adv. rather. Ot. th. s.
momo, adj. corrobor. of mo, old; pi. memedSi and momoi
(ace. to Hans.); adv. already.
mdmo, pi. V. of md to catch, to hold fast.
mdmg, n. catching, holding.
momo, n. impediment in speaking; stottering; ha momo, v. inf.
momoha, to stotter, stammer.
momohd, n. stottering, stammering.
momohalQ, n. a stottlerer (said to be generally a passionate
person).
momosa, adv. already before; a long time ago; s. sa and
momo; comp. momo, adv. and sa, n. and adv.
mone, mene, pi. menemei, pron. this (person); eomp. ene»
none; mo, ne; Ad. ndne.
moni, mo ni; pi. meini, mei ni, rel. pron. he or she,
vrho; who (ber, ber;'ber, mcld^et; Me, bie, Me, meld^e);
comp. noni and nl, rel. pron.
mpldn, n. pi. mplal (Ot. mprgn) beam.
mr — , s. under ml.
mra, mramra, adv. quickly; soon (comp. Otyi: bra, eome!)
mra (Ot. th. s.), mla, n. law.
dbyGoogk
.204 mft — muhdmo.
mA, pi. .mdinO) inf. mQmo', v. to sip.
mQ and mOa, v. to be tidy ; he md, he mfia, y. th. s., to
be clean, orderly; to be fat.
mu, y. to breathe, inf. mumo; to shut the mouth and keep
s. th. in one's mouth; to hem (cloth), inf. mQ, comp.
ban (na) v. koro (na) v. toi.
mu mule, y. inf. mulemumg, to diye; to conceal, be silent;
to disappear,
mu mle, v. th. s.
mu na, y. inf. nama, y. to be silent, s. bu na; to hem
in; to make to speak = dsie na wiemQ, y.
mu si, inf. sirau, y. = mu mle, y.
mQ toi, y. inf. toimu, to be deaf,
'mu, emu (Ot. th. s.), adj. whole, entire (ganj).
mQ, n. hemming,
mu, n. oil; blQfdmu, europ. oil; mu tsuru, n. red oil, i.e.
palmoil; pi. mui, difiTerent oil.
mQa = bua, y. inf. muamo, to shut (the mouth),
mua na, inf. namuamg, imprt. sing, muamo, = bu na (Ot.
bu ano, comp. bu in 69i and bua na), to shut the mouth,
be silent; to keep s. th. in the mouth, to mumble = mu,
y. to fold up (f. i. an umbreUa).
muamQ, mQmo, n. shutting the mouth; mumbling; keeping
s. th. in the mouth,
muan = moan, s. this,
mube, n. time of oil, oil-season,
mude, adj. tasteless, saltless.
mudsi, pi. n. dirt (diff. oil, s. mu. n.).
mufolQ, n. anointer; anointed (with oil),
mufo, n. anointing (with oil) fr. fo mu, y.).
mugd, inf. -mo, y. to deyour.
'mugui, amugi^i, n. a kind of berries,
mugu, y. to shake, to moye, to creep, inf. mugurag.
mugn he, y. to shake one's, self; inf. heraugumo.
mugu si, y. inf. simugumg, to creep on the ground,
mugulo, n. a person who shakes himself; creeper,
mugumo, n. shaking, moying, creeping,
mugumugu, adj. fat, round; fe — , y. to be — , — .
mugnmugufemo , n. fatness,
mubemg, n. oil-buying,
muhelo, n. oil-buyer,
muhg, n. curtain,
muhomo, n. oil-boiling.
muhdmQ, n. oil-selling; fr. hd mu, y.; and scarcity of oil.
dbyGoogk
mui — niHSU^fo. 205
ami, adv. at once; eladSe mui, be at once disappeared.
wakSiy n. measuring or trying of oil (s. ka, v.).
mule, n. depth; mu — , v. to dive.
aalemalo , n. diver.
nralemaniQ, n. diving,
mulo, n. a person breathing etc. fr. mu, v.
moma, ^roum^, n. a kind of berries,
mu, mum (a frequent root in afr. languages for the same
idea) dumbness; to — , v. to be dumb; to be or be-
come speechless; xjetflummeii.
mumo , n. breathing ; shutting the mouth, keeping s. th. in
the mouth ; s. mu ; breath ; spirit, s. nil , nvevficc; comp.
kla, kra; susuma; sisa, etc. Ad. mum; Ot. homhome, n.
mdmo, n. sipping,
mumto , n. dumbness.
mumu , V. redupl. of mu, v. which see.
mumu, n. a river fish,
mumui^ n. and adj. dumb (comp. mu, v. and momo, mo-
mohd! mu toi, v« toimulo, toimU n.}.
muna, v. to frown. Ot. v.
monsle, n. dan. uniform; scarled red colour,
mund, n. oil-vessel,
musu, n. belly; used frequently as gram, subject or object
= mli.
musu file, V. inf. musufitemo, to miscarry; to have a dis-
ordered stomach; fite musu, inf. th. s. to destroy the
fruit in its mothers womb,
mnsu tsd, v. to have diarrhoea; ts5 musu, v. to operate
(of medicine),
musun t§5 m. k. v. to yearn = mli ts6 m. k. v. ; inf. mu-
f(untsd. Comp. Dm and (fnlDeyxvi^e^fd^ai.
mnsu, n. (Ot. th. s.) mischief; misfortune, disaster, cala-
mity, adversity; curse; musu eba m. k. uq, a calamity
has befallen s. b. ; kpa musu, v. inf. musukpamo, to take
away the curse elc. by a sacrifice to the fetish (gene-
rally in the roads before towns); bo — , v. inf. niusubo»
to do something abominable, cursed; to blaspheme; to
do mischief; omusu abua ong! thy curse may gather
over thee! (A common curse),
mosobo, n. mischievous act; curse; blaspheming; blasphemy.
Quisubolo, n. mischievous person; ungodly person; blas-
phemer,
nmsofo , n. Ot. a mischievous person,
nmsu^fo = Ot. musuyefo, n. th. s.
dbyGoogk
306 musufitemo — na n. k. he tSui,
inu5ufitemo» n. miscarrying; disorder of the stomach,
musugbl, n. unfortunate day.
musukotoku, musuAkotoku, n. ht. belly-bag, i. e. stomach,
musulileiy musunlilei, n. lil. belly-tongue; i. e. milt, spleen,
musun gbl, y. and
musun wa, y. to be able to sustain hunger, = ny6 hdmo, y.
musukpalo, n. a person taking away the curse by a sacri-
fice; fr. kpa musu, y.
musukpamo, n. the act of taking away the curse,
musutsd, -mo, n. diarrhoea, open bowels.
musuAtSd, -mo, n. yearning, mercy („ bowels of mercy,
mute, n. oil-stone; wet.
mute = mude> adj. tastless, saltless.
mut§uru, n. red oil, i. e. palm-oil.
mutsurute) n. oil-stone; wet = mute y n.
mutsuruterelo , n. palmoil-carrier.
mutsuniteremo, n. palmoil-carrying.
mutukutSo, n. a tree growing along the lagunes (the man-
groye-tree?)
N.
Words having the augment n or ii prefixed must
be sought for under the next following consonant, if
not found here.
Na, y. inf. na and namo, y. to see; to find, to haye; to
tread, to stand (comp. da, damo); to swear; — n. k.,
to swear by s. tb. Adn. th. s. It may be that diffe-
rent yerbs are united in -this; na, to see. Ad. 1h. s.,
Ot. hQ; na, to get. Ad. na and Ot. nya; and na, to
stand up., to tread. Ad. da (comp. GS: damo, Ot. gyina.
Na (Ad. th. s. and Ot. nya) is used as an auxiliary yerb,
to express the relation of time which is indicated by tiie
ady. already; yet in Engl, (fc^ion; nod[)); with neg. yoice
=3 not yet; positiyely it is seldom used; f. i. min4
mik^, 1 already said it (I got to say it); minaa make,
I did not yet say; minan make, I will not yet say it;
miniiko make» I haye not yet said it. Besides this na
is used to express a wish (a kind of optatiye mood)
i. i. min^ mik^l could I say it, I wish I could say it!
The most common combinations with the yerb na
(comp. also na, n.) are:
na n. k. or m. k. he tSui, y. inf. hetSuinamo , to be content
with s. th. or s. b.
dbyGoogk
na he tsuidSttrd — na, n. 20T
na he tsuidSttrd, v. inf. hetSuidMrdnamo , to be pleased
with, to be glad of; comp. na tSui, -tsuidsiird.
na mil, y. inf. mlina, to see the inside; to have insight.
na na, v. inf. nana, lit. to see the mouth, the beginning,
the end (comp. na, n.) to understand; comp. na sisi, v.
na n. k. le, double v. to see (and) know, to understand.
na nane, v. to swear by one's leg (a rery common oath:
„mana minane!^').
na nii, v. inf. niinS, niinamo, to see things, to see; to have
sight; to get things, i. e. to get rich; s. ye nii, v. and
niiatse, n.
na nd, y. inf. ndna, to see something, to feel pain; to
suffer. Mina noko! g6! J^ina noko, e6l Woe me! Woe
me! Expression of seyere pain or grieye or moumhig.
na no, y. inf. ngnamo, to tread upon.
na noko, y. = na nd, y,
na nya. Ad. y. = na na, y.
na Nyonmo, y. to swear by God.
na sane, t. to get a palayer.
na se, y. to gain, to profit; inf. senamo.
na segbe, y. to haye recourse to, to recoyer.
na si, V. inf. sinamo, to tread the ground, to stand up, —
upon. Comp. damQ si and te si, y.; and nana, y. nana
si, y.
na si§i, y. inf. sisina, -namg, to see the ground, the bot-
tom, the reason; to understand; to discern.
na tse, y. to sweat by one*s father; a yery common oath.
na tsui, y. to get or take a heart; to take courage; inf.
-namo; impert. na tsui, take courage!
na tsuidsurd, y. inf. -namo; to take a good heart (see
edsuro), to be of good cheer, comfort; to be happy,
joyful; comp. mli fli, ml §e, hie me, nyS, y.
na yi, yin, yitso, y. to get a head, to get reason etc.
comp. yi, yiii, n.
im, na — , see after na and before ne.
na, n. mouth (Ot, ano); the outward, mouth (comp. da),
opening; brim; edge (hebr. ^Q); worth, price; boundary;
beginning or end of something, the utmost part; shore,
nsona, sea-shore; fa-na, borders of a riyer. As da, he.
Me, mli, no, nd, se etc. this noun is used as a post-
position and adv. expressing the relation of place and
by tropic use also that of time and manner (s. § 29)
as: at, to, near, accordingly, according to; at the point
of; along etc. German: an, weben, auf;
dbyGoogk
208 na.
entfang etc. In Ot. sometimes ano, sometimes hd, h5
are. the corresp. words; Ad. nya. As the gramm. object
it appears especially in the following combinations: bS
na, inf. nabSmQ, lo cut the end round about (befd^neiben) ;
be na, — nabu (s. this), to contract the mouth = na
be, v.; bi m. k. na gb6, = ^Q bxtfi^, inf. nagbebimo, v.
to ask the mouth (opinion) of s. b.; befragen; bu na, v.
inf. nabumQ, to cover the mouth (with the natives a
sign of silent astonishment), to be silent; bu ona! keep
thy peace; bua na, v. (Ot. bo ano, comp. bu ano; and
in G9, mu, mQa), to gather, to assemble; dSmo na, v.
inf. nadSmo, nadamgrnQ, to stand at, near, on the brim,
shore etc. to stand firmly, j. damo mli, damg n9d§iafi;
doko na, v. inf. nadokomo, to sweeten the mouth of s. b. ;
to persuade with sweet words, to flatter; dSa na, inf.
nadsamg, to fit; comp. d§a, t§a, v.; dSe na, v. to come
from the mouth, s. G3-Hist. (P(^ t)etne^men Taffen); dSe
na, V. th. s. dSi6 na, v. nad§iemo, to excuse, to inter-
pret; d§o na, V. inf. nadsO, to sharpen; fa na, ^. inf. na-
fSimQ, to take off the mouth, the cork, uncork; to open
(bottles and such vessels, comp. gble na); fe na, v. na-
femo, pi. fle na, inf. naflemo, to burst open, to open
a fester, to burst open, v. n. fi na, v. naflmo, to bind
the opening, to bind up (a bag etc.); fo na, inf. nafo,
pi. flo na, inf. naflgmo, y. to cut one's mouth, to report,
accuse s. b.; to cut the end or brim; gba na, v. inf. na-
gbamo, to trouble, pi. gbla na, v. inf. nagblamg, lit. to
rend the mouth, to discourse; gbe na, v. inf. nagb€, lit.
to kill the mouth, the end, to end, to finish; gble na, v.
inf. nagblemQ, to open (doors, boxes etc., comp. f9 na,
gbu na); gbu na, v. inf. nagbQ, to bore an opening, to
open; h! na, v. nahlle, to abhor one's mouth, to keep
malice, so as not to salute or speak to s. b. ; ekemi hi
na, he does not speak with me; ho na => ho he, v.
inf. naho, to pass over, to overrun; ka na, v. inf. na-
kamo, to insist; kd na, v. inf. nakSmo, to lie at, near;
kd na, v. nakd and nakdmo, to stick in the mouth or
bill; kpa na, v. nakpamo, to break the fast, to breakfast;
kpe na, V. nakpe, to sew up; kQ na, v. nakd, nakOmo,
to gainsay; to speak or be against; lata na, v. inf. nala-
tamo, to base the end (in sewing); le na, v. nale, to
know (one's mouth, words) ; to know the number,
price; m& na, v. namSmo, to stand at, near; to set at;
to build at, near, at the shore etc.; md na, mtia na, v.
dbyGoogk
na — na ba §i. 209
to be silent, shut the iqouth; to keep s. th. in the mouth;
s. bua na, and bu na; na na, v. inf. nana, to see the
end, to understand; n9 na, y. inf. nanSmo, to shut the
opening, door etc. to shut; nyle na, v. to walk along,
at, according to; nd na, v. nandmo, to be sweet, agree-
able (to the mouth), s. doko — ; nu m. k. na gbe, v.
inf. nagbgnumg, to hear from one's mouth; ah\)bxen,
an^5ren; pS, po na, s. f§, fo na; sa na, v. inf. nasd,
to taste; misa gbele na, I tasted death; misa mina (lit,
1 tasted my mouth, with respect to s. th.). 1 tasted (it),
comp. sa, v.; sqo na, v. inf. nasQomo, to seal up; se
na, V. nas$, to reach the mouth, to be sufficient, to
satisfy; §i na, y. inf. nasimo, to knock against one's
mouth, to act against one's word, s. kfi na and §i, v.;
SQ na, Y. inf. na^omg (to lick one's mouth), to kiss; ta
na, pi. tra na. inf. natamo, natramo, y. to touch the
mouth; to dispute; to trouble with words; to tempt =
tSd na ; to coyer the end, brim etc. to sit at, near, along ;
to na, pi. tro na, y. inf. natO, natromo, to tire one's
mouth; to make tired of speaking; te be tired of speak-
ing; t5 na, y. inf. natdmo, to transgress one's word;
comp. na td and td, y.; t§a na, y. inf. natSamo; to ad-
join, to be in contact, to continue; s. t§a, y. ; tse na, y.
inf. natsemo, to trouble, to teaze with words; to unseal;
tse, y.; t§i na, y. inf. natSimo, to close the mouth,
opening etc., to confine, imprison etc.; tSd na, y. inf.
natSdmo, to turn one's mouth, word; inf. natSd, to tempt
to bad words (or actions) s. ka, y. ta na etc. , wie na, y.
inf. nawiemQ, to speak one's mouth; to salute, to inter-
pret, comp. nadSiemo; yere m. k. na or yire m. k. na
(s. yi na), v. inf. nayeremo, to come unawares to some
body's speaking about one; to oyerhear unawares; ye
na, y. inf. nayeli, to bargain; to negotiate; yi na, y.
inf. naylmo, to intercept one's speaking; yo na gb6, y.
inf. nagbeyomO) to know s. b. by his yoice, to know
one's yoice, word, manner of speaking, etc. As gram^
mat. subject it appears especially in the following com-
binations :
na ba, y. inf. naba, to be sharp (of kniyes etc., comp. na
— edge),
-na ba si, y. inf. naSiba (Ot. ano bre ase) to let the mouth
down (comp. ,Mn SKunb ^Sngen laffcn"), to decrease
<in zeal, power, passion etc.), to be softened, to give in.
Comp. ba Si, y.
Zimmermann, Akra-Vocab. 14
dbyGoogk
210 na be — na td.
na be, v. inf. nabele, -mg, to h^ave a narrow, contracted
mouth, as old persons; to have a mouth like a" pair of
tongs, 80 ^s to pinch with, as ants, crabs, pincers etc.
na du, V. to leak at the opening, at the cork etc.
na d§a, v. inf. nadsale , to be straight, right in speach ; to
have a straight end or brim; s% dsa, v.
na dso, v. inf. nadsomo, to have a bitter mouth, to have
a bad mouth („ein f(^arfe« obcr bfife^ Tlawl ^aben").
na d§o, V. to be quiet in speaking,
na fa, v. inf. nafa, nafamg, to be open; s. fSna; of bottles
and similar vessels,
na fe, pi. fie, v. inf. nafemo, naflemo, to burst open,
na gbo, V. inf. nagbele, = dangbo, to have a dead mouth ;
to have no taste (after sickness etc.).
na homo no, v. inf. nanghomQ or ngnahomo, to know by
heart, to say by heart,
na kS, V. inf. nakSmo, to be or lie open; of doors, rooms,
houses etc.
na ke enyoo si, v. to have scarcely finished speaking; a
very peculiar expression, lit. „the mouth says it is fallen
down"; „beni ena ke enyoo si", when he had finished
speaking,
na ko si, v. to bite the ground, i. e. to fall on one's mouth;
pi. na komo si, s. ko, v.
na kpa', v. inf. nakpamo, to say s. th. hesitatingly because
it is amiss or wrong, to miss with the mouth; s. kpa, v.
na kpe, v. nakpe, to be gathered; to be of one opinion;
more frequently:
na kpe si, v. inf. nasikpe, th. s. f. i. beni amena ekpe si,
when they were assembled; when they had become of
one opinion; s. kpe, v.
na kpe he, v. to be astonished; s. nakpe, n.
na ko, V. inf. nakQ, nakuomo; to have a broken mouth,
edge etc., to be forward in speaking,
na nd, v. to have a sweet, flattering mouth; s. na doko;
to be dainty; inf. nandmo.
na se, v. inf. nase, to be sufficient (in price); comp. se
na, V.
na si, V. inf. nasi and -mo, to be worth; ona si oba, thou
art worth a hundred; comp. na, =: price and si, v.
na td, V. inf. natOmo, to transgress with the mouth, with
words; to make a mistake in speaking; comp. td na, v.
and to, V.
dbyGoogk
na t§a — nadSian. 211
Ba tsa, V. inf. natsamo, to fit, to adjoin, to be perpetual,
coinp. tsa na; tsa, v.
na tse, v. inf. natsemo, to have a pure, clear mouth; to
speak fluently and purely; ena t§eko, he can not yet
fluently speak.
na tsi, y. inf. natsT and natsimo, to be stopped or closed
ap; s. tsi na, v.
na wa, v. inf. nawale, to haye a hard mouth, to be hard;
comp. wa, y.
n3, n. grandmother, pi. namei. Ad. th. s.
naakpa, ady. well, very, very much,
naba, n. sharpness fr. na ba, v.
nabs, and
nabSmo , n. cutting the mouth, opening, brim, end ; s. bS, v.
nabe , n. narrowness of mouth, as that of old men ; forma-
^ tion of mouth like that of a pair of tongs or pincers,^
as ants have.
nablemo, n. th. s. of the pi. form ble, v.
nSbi, pi. -bii, n. grandmother-child, i.e. grand-child; comp.
Di, n.; ni, n. nye and nyemi, n.
nabimg, n. asking of the price, fr. hi na, v.
nabinu, pi. -bihl, n. grandson,
nabiyo, pi -biyei, n. grand-daughter,
nabu, n. lit. hole or opening of the mouth (s. bu); mouth,
often used = na, hole, opening, lip; pi. nabui, lips.
nabualQ, n. gatherer, fr. bua na, v.
nabuamo,n. gathering, assembling; assemble. S. kpemQ, n.
nabuamohe, n. gathering-place.
nabumQ, n. covering of the mouth, opening etc. silence,
fr. bu na, v.
nadamg, nadamomg, n. standing at, along, for etc.; fr.
damo na, v.
nadokolQ, n. flatterer; persuader; fr. dokg na and na doko, v.
nadokomQ, n. flattering, persuading,
nadokomowiemo, n.. flattering word, — speech,
nadSd, nadSale, n. straightness of mouth, speech, opening,
brim, end etc.; fr. na dsa and dSa na, v.
nSd^, pi. of nane (Ot. th. s. and nan), foot.
nSdsian = nddsiamli, n. foot-print, foot-step, stead, post-
position = instead of, for etc. ba — , v. to come instead
of 8. b.; damo — , v. to stand for s. b., - - surety; to
represent s. b., inf. nSdsiandamo; d§e ngdsian, v. inf.
nftdSiaudSe, to go out of one's way („a\x^ ben gugen
ge|)ett"); dSie nadSian, v. to remove out of one's way,
14«
dbyGoogk
212 nadSiana — nafSmo.
inf. n9dsiand§iemo ; f^ nadsiafi, v. th. s.; he nSdsian, v.
to take recoinpence, inf. nadsiafiheino; kS — , v. to lie
in one's place, inf. nSd§iank5rao; ke nSdgian, v. inf.
nSd§ianke,, to grant instead, to make a present instead;
mS nSdsian, y. inf. nSdsianmSimo, to stand in the place
of s. th. (s. damo); na nSdsian, v. to get s. th. in ex-
change; no nSdsian, y. to take s. th. instead of s. th., in
exchange; ta, pi. tra nSdsian, y. to sit in one's place,
inf. nadsiantamo, -trarao; to — , y. inf. nSdsiafitO, to
repay, to restitute, to retaliate, to recompence; ye nai-
dsian, y. to take s. b. place or office, inf. nSdsianyeli;
ye — , y. to be in s. b. place, instead of etc. neg. be — ;
yi — , y. nSdsianyimo, to remain on the same spot, to
go in a circle (also used in argument) etc.
nSd§iana, n. the place at the feet of s. b. foot-prints, —
steps, postpos. at the feet, to the feet, f. i. gbe — , y.
to fall down at s. b. feet etc.
nSdsiasi, n. place under one's feet, standing place, situa-
tion etc. east =r bokS; the four points of the wind are
named from the situation of a person lying on his back
with the head to the west and feet to the east (perh.
from burial?); comp. yiten, yitengbe or anaigbe, nine-
dsiirogbe or nsongbe and nine abekugbe or kongbe or
koyigbe; and nSdsiasi, -gbe.
nadgiasigbe, n. east-way, ady. east-ward.
nadsiandSmo, n. surety, standing surety; representation;
fr. damo nSdsian, y.
nSdsiandamolo, n. surety; representant; representatiye.
nadsiandsg, n. going out of one's way; fr. dse nad§., y.
nSdsiand§iemo , n. remoyal out of the way, fr. dsie nSds., y,
nSdsiantO, n. repaying; repayment; restitution; retaliation;
fr. to nSds., y.
nSdsiantolo, n. restituter, retaliater.
nddsiahyeli, n. taking office for or after an other; succes-
sion; fr. ye nSds., y.
nadsianyelilo, -yelo, n. successor.
nadsolo, n. person with an eyil tongue; fr. na dso, y.
nadsomo, n. bad mouth, eyil tongue; strict, true saying.
nadso, n. sharpening of tools, — of the mouth (for scol-
ding etc.).
nadsole, n. quietness of mouth, speech; kind words; fr.
na dso, y.
nafaio, n. opener, bottler; fr. fS na, y.
naf^mo , n. opening of bottles etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
nafemg — namo. 21^
nafeniQ, nafleinQ, d. bursting open; fr. Iq na and na fe, v.
nafi and naflmo, n. binding up, closing of bays etc.; fr.
ft na, V.
nafitemg, n. corruption of mouth, speech.
nafolo, naflolo, n. reporter, accuser, talebearer; fr. fo na,
flo na, V.
nafo, naflomo, n. reporting, accusing; talebearing; report;
accusation; summons,
nagbalo, n. troubler; troublesome person, from gba na, v.
nagbamo, n. troubling; trouble,
nagbamosane, n. troublesome palaver,
nagbg, n. ending, finishing; end; aim; fr. gbe na, v.
nagbegbl, n. last day.
nagbelo, n. finisher.
nagblamo, n. discurse; fr. gbla na, v. but s. nasigblamg, n.
nagbele, nagbo, n. tastlessness, fr. na gbo, v.
nagbelo, n. opener, a person opening doors, boxes etc.
nagblemo, n. opening,
nagba, n. piercing (open),
nahile, D. malice-keeping; fr. hi na, v.
nahllo, n. malice-keeper.
nahomg, n. knowing or saying fluently (by heart),
nakai, pron. such; adv. thus; so; comp. neke; nakai non,
even so;. Ad. dsa.
nakamo, n. being open; opening; fr. na k3, v.
nakpamg, n. break-fast; fr. kpa na, v. speaking amiss, fr.
na kpa, v.
nakpe,n. meeting; unity of opinion = nasikpg; fr.nakpe,v,
nakpehe, n. meeting-place,
nakpe, n. astonishment, fr. na kpe he; amena kpe amehe,
or efeame nakpe, they were astonished. Comp. fe yS;
he dso etc.
nakpe, nakplemo, n. sewing up the ends, comp. kata na,
ban na, v.; fr. kpe na, v.
nakulo, n. gainsayer; forward person,
naku and nakumo, n. gainsaying; ©position, fr. ku na, v.;
forwardness fr. na ku, v.
nakutso, pi. -tsei, and nakutsona, n. knee,
nale, n. dan. fool; fe — , to make a foot of.
nalo, n. only used in combinations, — seer; — finder,
namo, n. finding, getting,
namo, pi. name!, inter, pron. who? ameyi enyo le aten
namo? who among the two? Ad. nene.
dbyGoogk
214 D^mti — nanyo.
namfi, namuamo , n. shutting of the mouth ; keeping of s. th.
in the. mouth, fr. mu or mua na, v.
nam, n. a knowing person, well-informed person (fr.namK?).
nana, n. understanding; fr. na na, y.
nanalo, n. an understanding person; cin tjerjicinbigcr SWenf^.
nana, v. reduplicalion of na, v. io tread, to stand upon etc.
nana si, = na si, v.
nSnakansowa, n. (Ot.) great-grandchild; great-grand-parent;
comp. na (Ol. nana) grand-mother.
naMmo, n. shutting (of doors, boxes etc.), fr. nS na, v.
nane (old pronunc. nande perh. = na-ade, comp. na, v.
to tread and ade, Ot. =: thing, s. also nine, kane, fine,
n. etc. Ot. nan, nane), pi. nadsi, n. foot; wheel. Comp.
nadsi, nadSian, nadsiana, nadsiasi etc.; fa\iane, y. and
wo nane no, y. to walk quickly; nyle nane no, y. to
go on foot etc.
naneheno, nanehintsong , n. shinbohe.
nanehefomo, n. foot-bath.
nanemahe, n. foot-print; footing.
nanenonyielo, n. pedestrian; fr. nyie nane no, y.
nanenonylemo, n. walking on foot.
nanesi, n. sole of the foot. .
„ „ place under foot, comp. nadsiasi, n.
nanesimango, n. foot-stool.
nanesimo, n. kicking; kick.
nanesiwao, nanewao, pi. -wabii, n. toe.
nanetSitsi, n. (comp. tsitsi) heel.
nanetso, pi. -tsei, n. lit. foot-stick (s. tso), i! e. shin-bone.
nanii, pi. n. dainties.
nankutso, *pl. -tsei, knee = nakutso.
nand, n.. etemily; ke-ate — , until eternity. Comp, da,
Nanyonmo, n.
nandlo = niia mlikpalo, n. dainty person.
nanonio, n. agreeableness fr. nd na, y.; daintiness, fr. na
no, V.
nanetu, and
nantu, n. calf of the leg.
'nanu = ananu, n. spider.
'nanukpa, n. spider-web.
nanyo, pi. nanemei (= nanenyo nannyo, -mei, comp. damfo,
pi. nnamfo in Otyi) n. friend; neighbour (Sla^jiet), fd-
low, comrad; ke m. k. bo nanyo, y. inf. nanyobOy to
make friendship with s. b. In compositions it is used
dbyGoogk
nanyobo — natSolo. 21 S
like the engl. fellow — , lat. com -=-; germ. Sflit — ;
see f. i. nanyogbomo, n.
nanyobo, n. friendship; communion.
nanyodsulQ, n. fellow-thief.
nanyofelo, n. fellow-agent.
nanyogbomo, pi. -mei, n. fellow-man; person of the same
rank.
nanyogbo, n. fellow-guest; — stranger.
nanyoniitSulo , n. fellow-labourer.
Nanyonmo, pr. n. of God, either = eternal God (comp.
da, nan6 = eternity, Ot. da, pi nna, day; da, alway)
or God of the ancestors, comp. nS, nanakansowa (Ot.
n5, = mother; nfina = grandmother etc.).
nanyofelo, n, playmate = febilo, n.
nanyotsQlo, pi. -tsudsi, n. fellow-servant; pi. nanemeitSddSi.
nasa, n. tasting, taste; fr. sa na, v.
naso = asan (Ot. nanso), conj. also; moreover, again.
nasQomo, n. sealing, seal; fr. sqo na, v.
nasa, n. bad, wicked month; s. e§a, adj.
nase, n. -sufficiency, satiety; fr. se na, v.
nasigblamQ, n. discource with the purpose of catching one
in speech; fir. gbla na si, v.
nasimo,. n. worth; fr. na si, v.; act against s. b. words,
fr. si na, V. .
naSomo, n. kissing, kiss.
natamQ, natramo, n. dispute; quarrel; fr. ta na, pi. tra
na, v.; sitting at or along; covering of the end, brim etc.
natdlQ, n. transgressor; person who makes mistakes, fr. t5
na and na td, v.
natomo, n. transgression of s. b. words, fr. td na, v.; mis-
take in speaking.
natsakemo, n. recanting.
nalsalo, n. filter.
natsamQ,n. fitting, adjoining, contact, continuation (comp.
notsamQ); fr. t§a na and na tsa, v.
natselo, n. teazer fr. tse na; person speaking correctly fr.
na tse, v.
natsemo,- n. teazing, troubling; fr. tse na, v.; clear speak-
ing, correct speech; fr. na tse, v.
natsT, n. movement; s. tsi, v.
natsl and natslmo, n. stopping up of the mouth, opening,
passage etc. fr. t§i na, v.
nat§!lo, n. person hindering or stopping one's way.
natsdlQ, n. tempter fr. tso na, v.
dbyGoogk
216 / mm — Aa.
nat§5, n. tempting^, temptation.
natsdmo, n. recanting.
natsdwiemQ, n. tempting, provoking word.
nawale, n. hardness, harshness (of words), fr. na wa, v.
nawalo, n. hard, harsh person.
nawalod§en, if. hard, harsh behayiour, character.
nawielo, n. interpreter; = nadsielo, advocate.
nawiemo, n. interpretation, speaking for some body, salu*
tation.
nayeli, n. bargaining, negotiation.
nayelo, nayelilo, n. bargainer, negotiator; fr. ye na, v.
nayelisane, n. negotiatiog palaver.
nayeremo, n, overhearing unawares, fr. yere na, v.
nayl, nayimo, n. interception of speech, fr. yi na, v.
naypmo, n. knowing by the voice.
na, nS, v. inf. n$ and pi. namo, inf. th. s., to press,
to squeeze (= mia), (to press the hand?) to salute, to
visit (comp. fla and sra, v.), to shut, to be shut, to
give order, to sing out. •
na, inf. na, v. to learn (f. i. a trade).
na hie, v. to shut the door before s. b.
na mli, v. inf. mlinamg, mlinS, to shut the opening, in-
side ;4o press in; to squeeze out.
na m. k., v. to salute, visit s. b.
na na, v. inf. naiiamo, to shut (the opening, door etc.
s. na, n.).
na no, v. inf. nonamo, to press upon, to squeeze the sur-
face, to shut the cover (s. no, n.).
na se, v. inf. senamo, to shut behind.
na si, V. inf. sinamo, to press down.
na m. k. yi, inf. yinS, to give a peremptory order to s. b.,
to cry (and stamp) at s. b. („an^ertfc^cn"); inf- yinSmo,
to shut one up oir in.
na m. k. yi se, v. inf. yisenamg, to shut after s. b. head,
i. e. to shut s. b, in, to close after a man; Gen. 7, J 6.
M, n. pressing, squeezing.
na, or M, pi. namei; when without any possessive pro-
noun or case before it (i. e. in the vocative case or ad-
dress (ana, anamei (comp. ate, awo, ao, anyemi, awu),
n. wife (in her exclusive relation to her husband, comp.
biianye, bienye and yo); espoused bride (comp. also
siyere and ayemforo). It is custom to betroth young
girls, even sucklings (and children in the mothers womb
dbyGoogk
- na — Afind. 217
on condition that they are girls) to some male, adult or
young; from that time he has to give presents to her
and her parents and she is hound to him and called na,
wife, or siyere (si, promise, and yere, Ot., wife);, during
the bridal ceremonies, when dressed and adorned as bride,
ayemforo (s. this) and after marriage again na, ana.
Comp. wye y5, kpe yO, v. Adn. yO, th. s., for wwife"
and „woman"; comp. „9Belb".
na, na, generally na no, nang, n. grassy plain, field (where
there is no hush, s. ko, n.) savanna; esp. the level be-
tween the sea and the mountains as far as there is no
bush (fr. na, to press?); wilderness,
na no or nUno, in or on the field; comp. dsa ng, asa no,
ko se etc. Eye na le no, he is in the field.
M, n. (Adn. gS; Ot. nyansS, comp. na, v. na, v. Ot. nya,
to get, and na, to visit) counsel, advice; art; wisdom;
prudence; trade; craft; cunning; trick etc. le Aa, v. to
know wisdom, art, to have prudence; to know a trade;
wo na, V. inf. nawo, to give counsel, advice; na mli,
adverbially used: prudently, cunningly; secretly,
nabi, n. step-child (lit. wife's child) of a man; comp. wubi,n.
naisd, n. wounds betwixt the toes from perspiration,
nal, collective n. coals; nal ke la, fire-ct)als; s. the next
word.
AI19, V. to dry, to shrink; inf. h3ilg.
nalal, nlai, adj. dry; tocrfo^ft.
Jiale, n. wisdom, knowledge, prudence (s.leiia, v.); trade,
mastership,
talo, nalo, n. visiter; a person shutting or pressing, s. na,v,
nalo, Mnlo, n. beast of the field, s. kolo, n.
nalo, n. artificer; prudent, wise man; counseller; trades*-
man; master of a trade; fr. na, v.
nalgfemo, -yeli, n. mastership,
namo, n. shutting; pressing, squeezing; saluting, visiting;
visit; fr. na, v.
nana, n. rain-water gathered from thatched houses, comp.
adsensu, n.
nan — or nano — , prefixed to a noun, indicates wild, s.
nanokpQiiQ etc.
^Mnl, adj. and adv. cold; -ly.
nankolo, n. beast of the field.
tand, pi. nanii, n. implements or instruments of an artist*
artificer, tradesman; machine; comp. tsdne, n.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
218 nan^kpoAo — ftelel.
JianokpoAO) n. wild horse; a kind of antelopes, in size and
shape like a horse,
ftano (s. Aa, n. Aano), n. field; na le no, the field; adv.
in or on the field; comp. dSano, n. etc.
Aanonii, pi. n. things of the field; wild growing things;
comp. ko-, kon- and ftanokpgfto, AangtSina etc.
/iangtsina, nailtSina, n. a kind of buffalo, s. wuo, wO, n.
Aasi, n. arm-hole.
MwiewQ, n. word of advice.
AawO, n. counselling, advice, fr. wo na, v. Ot. tu fo, v.
nawolo, n. advicer.
nawyiei, n. a kind of sweet fruit of a tree; sweet -sap;
comp. aluguntugun, n.
nawyieitso, pi. -tsei, n. tree hearing it.
ftawye, n. living (of a man)- with a wife; married state;
matrimony; comp. yOwye and gbla, n.
'ni, eng, demon, pron. Ad. th. s., this; Ot. yi. Comp.
mone> none.
n6? int. pron. what? = mg, me?; where whence, whereto?
= negbe?
ne, V. to rain; always constructed with NyoAmo (which
see) for its subject; Nyonmo neo, God rains; = it rains.
Comp. fS, ba^ Nyonmo ba; tue etc. Nyonmone, n. rain;
Nyonmonemo, th. s.
fig, aux. V. in Adn. = ye, to be and hd, ke in GS, de
in Ot., to take. S. Apendix.
nggbe, int. pron. lit. what way, where, — to whither;
whence, s. n6; nlgbe, th. s.
nghu, num. nine; ameyi nghu, they are nine in number,
nel, n. a kind of reeds,
net and nS, Ad. = nghu.
nfike, pi. nekemei, demonst. pron. generally followed by
ne, this, such; neke gbomo ne, this man or such a
man; but. if construed adjectively = certain, f. i. gbomo
~ ko neke, a certain person (whose name 1 have forgot-
ten); noko neke, a certain thing. Comp. also nakai and
§ 34. Ad. kik^, th. s.
neleno, n. (the) opposite (thing or place), nsgngbe neleno
d§i koiigbe, the opposite (or contrary) of south is north,
neleno, adv. opposite; ye — , inf. nelendyeli, v. to be — .
helenond, n. opposite thing or place or direction,
nfilenoyeli, n. oppositeness.
nenyanke, n. saw-fish, s. nyanyanke.
nelel, = lolfil, n. shells.
dbyGoogk
nf — niiaAwamo* 21 d
nf. — s. und. mf.
'ngaA, pi. 'ngadSi, s. enan engaA, n. a kind of birds.
nga = M, n. AdA. ga; art.
ng- s. under A.
ngo, n. = no, sail.
ni, V. (Ot. Ih. s. or ne) = d§i, to be something; it is in-
flexible and sometimes shortened into „A"; f. i. midsi,
mini, min, it is I ; gbomo ni or gbomoA, U is a person.
Comp. ni, pron. and conj. and ni, conj. Ad. „i'' as ter-
minational augment; th. s. f. i. anokwaifi, Ad. anokwai,
it is true!
ni, rel. pron. which, who; that; (Ot. a) comp. moni,
noni; when; comp. beni, where; comp. heni, how;
comp. boni; conj. that, as for the purpose that, construed
with potent, mood. Comp. ni^ v. and conj. and ake, conj.
ni, conj. and, Adn. th. s. Ot. na; only used to combine
sentences or verbs, but not nouns (comp. ke). Comp.
ni, V.
ni or nl, n. pi. nimei, grandfather; Ot. nana; comp. nS,
nye, n. etc.
ni, nii, nibii, pi. n. of nd (which see). The word in its
^ sing, and pi. form is very frequently used in combina-
tions (as mo, mei of persons), to replace an object
wanting etc. see the sequel.
nibi or nibi, pi. -bii, n. grand-child, grandfather-child, s.
nabi, n.
nibii, diminutive pi form of no, thing; n. little things, things.
nidsi, pi. of nine.
niiahefolo, n. washer; fr. fo nii ahe, v.
niiahefQmQ, n. washing of cloth etc.
niian = nii amli, n. inside of things; region; adverbially
used: in the things; about; dSemei niiaA, there about.
niiankpalo, n. dainty person.
niiankpamo, n. daintiness, fr. kpa nii amli, v.
niianye, pi. -mei, n. rich woman; s. niiatse, n.
niiato, n. s. niito.
niiasedi, n. desire (after things) fr. di nii ase, v.
niiatse or niatse, pi. -tsemei, n. lit. father or possessor of
things, rich man; used in apposition = adj. rich; na
niiatSe, a rich man; yd niiatse, rich woman, but also
„niianye", n. th. s.
niiahewumo, fr. wu nii ahe, v. and
niianwamg (fr. wu niian, v.), n. superfluity.
dbyGoogk
220 niibfi — nilelo.
niiba, n. production (of fruits of the field); fr. ba nii, v.;
begging; comp. sisemo, n.
niiboni, pi. n. things created, creatures; creation; s. bo.
niidonii or nidonii, pi. grievous things; grief; = nii nl
do$ mo.
niifem^nii or nif. , pi. n. (fr. ndfemond) deeds; doing; be-
haviour etc. Ad. niipemnii, n. th. ».
niifodsianii (comp. ndfdn), pi. n. bad deeds, ats ; bad doing,
acting; bad behaviour.
niihlnii, pi. n. detestable things; things religiously unclean
to s. b., s. h!, V.
niikeuii (fr. nokend) pi. presents; dashes; s. ke, v.
niikpamo, n. harvest, taking of things from sun or rain;
^ the contr. of kamo, n., fr. kpa nii, v.
niikpalo, n. reaper.
niikpe, nikpe, n. sewing, tailors work or trade, fr. kpe
nii, v.; mil€ niikp^, 1 know to sew; 1 am a tailor.
niikpend, pi. -nii, sewing implement.
niikpelQ, nikp., n. tailor; seamstress.
niile, nile, n. knowledge (of things) wisdom fr. le nii, v.
niilelQ, nil., n. knowing, wise person.
niina, nind, n. sight fr. na nii, v. to see.
iiiiseniianii, pi. n. ill-use, abuse; fe m. k. niiseniianii, v. to
use one ill, to ill treat one; comp. se, v. to ill-treat.
niiseniianiifelo, n. mischievous person; illtreater.
niiseniianiifemo, n. ill-use, ill-usage, ill-treatment.
niito , niiato, nito, n. putting in order; keeping things to-
gether.
niitolo, n. a person who put things in order, or who keeps
things together.
niitsulg, nitsulo, n. workman, labourer, fr. tsu nii, v.
nijtsumo, nitsumo, n. work, labour; business; calling; duty;
ye he niitsumo, v. to be in want of; to use, to employ
8. th.
niitsumobe, n. time of or for labour; season of labour.
niitsumofimQ , n. pressure of business.
niitsumobe, n. work-place; work-shop.
niitsumokpamo, n. rest, stoppage of labour; geierabenb;
fr. kpa niitsumo, v.
niitsumogbi, n. day of labour; working day.
nikutso, pi. -t§ei, n. ell-bow = ninekutso, n.
nIkutSoyisi, -sisi, n. ell-bow (the outer or under-part of it).
nile, s. niile, n.
pilelO) s. niilelOy u.
dbyGoogk
nina — nkabolo. 321
nina, y. inf. ninamo, to overtake.
nina, s. niina, n.
ninalo, n. overtaker.
ninamo, n. overtaking. *
nine, inf. -rao, v* to press down (f. i. a swelling); s. n8, v.
bobg, V.
ninemo, n. pressing, sqeezing.
nine, old pronunc. ninde, pi. nidsi, n. arm, hand, outside
or back of the han^T^comp. de (and Hebr. T — nine,
and rp = de); branch; trunk (of the elephant) forefeet
and snoulder of beasts, etc. The word is very probably
combined of ni = di (Ot. = to eat) and nde, ade (Ot.
thing); fe — , v. to surpass the hand;\o be too much etc.
nine abeku, ninebeku, n. left hand; north = kongbe; see -
n9d§iasi, n.
nine dsiird, ninedSiiro, n. right hand; adv. to or at the
righ hand; south.
TiinedsiirSgbe, n. right handway, i.e. toward the right hand;
south, southward = nsogbe.
ninefg, -le, n. surpassing of the hand; state of being too
much of s. th.
ninese, n. back of the hand.
ninewao, pi. -wabii, n. finger, s. wao, n., comp. nanewao, n.
nitsulo, nitsumo etc. s. niitsulo, niitSumQ.
nk^nali, nk6nale, nk^nare (Ot. th. s.), n. rust; do — , v.
to get rusty,
nk^nalido, n. rusting, getting rusty,
nkani, Ot. th. s., n. a kind of yams.
'Akatie, ri. Ot. th. s. groundnuts,
nkatiebo, n. bearing of groundnuts, s. bo, v.
nkatiedumo, n. groundnut-planting,
nkatiemu, n. groundnuts-oil.
nkatiehQmo, n. groundnut-growing,
hkatiewonu, n. grgundnuts soup.
nkatiedQlo, -hulo, n. groundnuts grower,
nklon, nkrdn, n. (sound imitating snoring), snore,
nkldnhd, n. snormg, fr. h5 — , v.
nko, n. small heaps of ground put to the yams plant;
bo — , V. to heap yams,
nkoben, n. (Ot.?) or okoben, n. cloth dyed with red clay
for mourning, redness (from clay, etc.) dirtiness; wo — ,v.
to be dirty, red.
nkobo, n. yams-heaping,
nkobolo, n. yams-heaper.
dbyGoogk
222 tkomo — nmft.
nkomo, 'kQino, Ot. th. s., n. complaint, lamentation; stA-
ness, grief; ^e nkomo and ^e *komo, v. to lament, be
sad, complain. Ad. komo, n.
nkomoyeli, n. complaining, lamentation, sadness, grief.
ftkomoyelilo, -yelo, n. complainer; sad person.
nkomoyclisane , n. sad story; sad palaver.
nkSnya, nkunya (Ot. fr. kom, v. to be possessed by a spirit
and nya, v. to get), n. a miracle done by spiritual power;
generally used of the natural and unnatural miracles of
fetish-priests, ye — , v. to perform such. Comp. afai;
okomfo.
Akdnyayeli, n. peiformance of miracles; juggling etc.
Ak5nyayelo, -yelilo, n. performer of miracles; juggler, con-
jurer; kind of fetishpriests, s. okomfo, afalyelo, -felo, n.
nkpai,n. (Ot.mpai) curse; libation; a certain fetish-ceremony;
yi nkpai, v. to perform a libation; to take away the curse.
nkpaiyi, n. taking away the curse; performance of a libation.
hkpaiyilo, n. person performing this ceremony.
Akrdn, n. wandering ants (Ot. th. s. and Akra- or GS-town,
people and language). These ants march some times in
great number and invest but at the same time cleanse
houses, stables, devouring every kind of vermin.
nku, n. shea-butter, treebutter used by the natives to anoint
themselves after washing. It is imported from the upper
Volta.
Aku, nkuii, nkum, n. lean me^pt; adj. lean, meagre; lo nku,
lean meat.
nkulo, n. assembly; bo — , v. to assemble; comp. gwa, n.
bo gwa, v.; to reason, decide.
nkulobo, n. assembling, assembly; reasoning; decision.
nkwaii (Ot.), n. soup; = wonu, n.; palmsoup, shortened
from the Ot. mekwan, n.
Alai, adj. dry, Hxto^U, s. n§la, v.
nlai, n. a kind of knives to scrape the mudwalls smoothly.
nlenle, adj. thin (of pap etc.).
nma, v. inf. 6ma, pi. nmla, inf. nmlamo., to scratch, f. i.
one's face; to make characters into or on s. th. ; to sign
(s. kadi), lo draw; to write; — wolo, v. - - a letter,
- - on paper.
Ama he, v. Inf. henmamo, lit. to sign, to blame one's self
= bo he ahora, v.
Ama, o. scratching; drawing; writing.
dbyGoogk
nma — nmg. 223
nmd, n. Ad. th. s. a kind of wheat, very small and black,
of which bread is made; food of every kind; eyee iimS,
he does not eat.
nm9-abol6, n. bread of this.
nilia, n. fragrance; perfume; sweet scent; dse — , v. to be
odorifeous, fragrant; t§o fS ke nma, n. perfumery;
spices.
iimS, n. fish-eggs.
nmadS, n. lit. food- wine, beer; blofo-nmfid3, european beer;
ho hmgdS, v. to brew (beer).
nmSdaholo, n. brewer.
nmSddhomo, n. brewing.
nm§dse, n. fragrancy; sweet scent.
nmadulo, n. grower of wheat.
nmSidumo, n. growing of wheat; s. du, v.
nmahulo, n. = nmSdulg; s. hu, v.
nmghumQ, n. = nmSidumo.
nmaf!, adv. alternately; fo — , v. to bear alternately (so.
boys and girls).
nmafifolo, n. person bringing forth boys and girls alter-
nately.
nmafifomo, n. bringing forth alternately.
nmaft-nmawolo -, words used in dividing things equally ; as :
mine — , thine — , mine — , thine — . Esp. in childrens
language.
nman, nma, n. a kind of large antelopes.
nmaAma , n. a large antelope in the neighbour-hood of the
river Volta, said to have one horn on the forehead and
being very shy and swift, of the size of a horse; per-
haps the unicorn of the bible (not the rhinoceros!).
nmSitSQ, n. or
nmStso, pi. -tsei, n. ear of wheat (see nmS) used by the
fetish-priest for fumigating,
nmawu, n. side (of body).
Amawuan = nmawu amli, chest; n. insides of the sides;
ady. at the side,
nmawutso, pi. -tSei, n. rib.
nme, n. palmnut (with the flesh of it, s. nme).
nme, n. nut, kernel (f. i. of the palmnut).
i)m6 or: Amei, n. thorn,
nmg, inf. nme, ftm|mo (pi. iimglg or nmlg), y. to lie; to
lay; to put (comp. ba; mS, to, ta, kSi etc); to shut; to
lay eggs; to miss, to let, to open; to be open; to per-
dbyGoogk
224 Amg he — iimelehosomo.
mit; to lay out, to spread; to submit to be calm, quiet
etc. (Comp. ba, bre in Ot.)
ftmi he, v. inf. heAme, henmgmo to lay open; to give
8. b. free; to liberate; to let, to let go, to loose.
nmg mli, v. mliAm$, to put in, into; tse t§ui nme nili,
to comfort one's self; to shut, to lock.
iimg na, v. inf. naiime, to be shut; to shut, lock.
nm§ m. k. nasa , v. to give s. b. a bad answer.
nm? no, v. inf. noAme, to lay or put upon; to add.
nmg (and nmO) okplo, v. inf. okpldAme, to spread the
table; to make a feast.
nmg se, v. inf. senmi, to put back; to shut behind.
nmg si, V. inf. §inm§, to lay down; to lie down; to
submit.
iimg Isui si, v. inf. tsuisiAme, to lay the heart down; to
have patience ; - - ha m. k. , with s. b. ; to be pa-
tient; comp. to tsui (si), ha tsui ny6 mli; th. s.; and
tsui fa, mli fQ, mli wo la etc. the contrary ; Ot. to bo
ase, V.
nmg yi, inf. yinmgmo, v. to shut in; s. na yi, v. th. s.
nme yi §i, v. to let the head down; inf. yiSiiime; = ntae
tsui §i, V.
Ame, n. laying; lying etc.; shutting, locking; fr. nme, v.
limg, adv. open; openly; wide open; gble nmg, v. to open
wide.
Iomega, n. a finger-ring, made from the kernel of a palm-
nut; dso — , V. to make one by rubbing on a stone.
nmele» pi. form, though seldom heard of the verb lame*
nmele, nmle, pi. nmedsi n. bell; clock (comp. gbe, to
sound; nmele tfa, v. (the bell strickes), to strike the
bell, inf. of both: nmle-tfa, Amle enyie atfa? nmedSi
enyle atfa? what o'clock may it be? The answer is
somewhat curious, as the sing, or plur. is used some-
what strangely; f. i. nmle kome (one o'clock); nmedSi
enyo (two o'clock); Amedsi ete, -edfe, -enumo, -ekpa;
but nmle kpawo (sev^n o'clock); ftmle kpanyo, -nebu,
-nyonma*, -nyonma ke ekome, — nyonma ke enyo;
but it is also sufficient to say: atfa ekome, enyo etc. (lit*
it struck one, two etc.); or nmele ese, the clock rea-
ches; c§e enyo, it is two o'clock; etc. hoso or woso
nmele, v. inf. nmele hosomo, to ring the. bell. Comp. ha.
nmelehosolQ, n. bell-ringer.
nmelehosomQ, n. bell-ringbg.
dbyGoogk
ftmelelsfl — nmdldkpawolo. 225
nmeletf^, n. striking of the bell, the hours; hour; clock;
timekeeping,
nmeletfalo, n. time-keeper, person striking the hours on
a bell,
nmelewosolo, -wosomo, s.
nmelehosolo, -hosomo, n.
nmelo> n. layer; person laying or putting s. th. fr. nme, v.
nm^mo, omelemo, n. missing; letting; allowing; opening
etc. fr. lime, v.
nmemu, nut-oil; esp. the oil made from the kernel of
palmnuts (not palmoil, s. mutSuru).
nmenmlebii, pi. n. brushwood, copse.
AmenQ, -numo, n. gathering of palmnuts, fr. nu nme, v.
nmenulQ, n. gatherer of palmnuts, fr. nu nme, v*
fimetSo, nmeitSOy pi. -tsei, n. nuttree; any tree bearing
nuts,
nmetenmete, adj. and adv. full of small spots, spotted,
grisled; comp. dsekedseke, damd^m, nwSlShwata etc.
nmiamo, n. mud; s. Amoto, n.
nmlnml, n. fear; terror, horror; — m6 m. k., v. to be
taken hold of by fear, dread etc. to shake; comp. se,
se gbeye; he kpokpo, etc.
nminmimomo, n. fearing; dreading etc.; s. the former,
iimlitsa, n. gravel, consisting of small iron-stones.
nmd, nmO (perhaps from the former v. nme, imperf.
form nmeo, comp. hie tSe and h!e t§d) v. to spread;
— okpld, — the table. Comp. also k^, and ko, v.,
tse, V. Adn. = tso , v. etc.
hmO, pi. nmOnmO and hmolo, nmlo, inf. nmO, nmQlO>
nmlo (nmlomo), v. to laugh; — m. k., to laugh at s. b.,
to deride, sometimes also
nmO he, v. to laugh about.
nmO si, v. to laugh at.
nm0, pi. nmO]$, inf. nmO, AmOlOmo, to tie, to bind; comp.
nm|, V.
nmo, n. laughing, laughter.
fim^iO, fimlo, th. s.; wo m. k. na nmOlO, to make one to
laugh; y^ — ^, v. to be laughable.
Am$lQ, n. laugher, derider.
AmOlOkpa, n. lit. laugh-string, laughter; wo AmolokpS, to
raise laughter; hS m. k. r= wo m. k. na nmOiO, v. to
make one laugh.
nmOlOkpSwO, nmlSwO, n. causing to laugh; joke.
nmSldkpawolg , nmlgwolo. n. joker; jester.
ZimmermaBn) Akra-Yocab. 15
dbyGoogk
226 iimdn — nd.
nm5fi, or nm5, pi. nmddSi, n. planted field, plantation (comp.
abo/ko, M, n. etc.) able-nmon, corn-field; duade-nmdn,
cassada-field etc.
nmon, pi. nmodsi, n. louse.
nmonmonmo , adj. and adv. swollen; fe — , v. to be swollen.
nmonmonmofemo, n. swelling.
nmojimlo, n. or
nmonmolo, pi. nmonmodSi, n. board; gba — , v. to saw
boards; gbo — , v. to plane.
Amonmologbamo and
iimonmologblaino , n. boardsawing. .
nmoAmologblalo , n. boardsawer.
nmonmologbglo, n. carpenter; s. srenke, n. and gbo, v.
nnoonmologbo , n. planing.
nniQto, n. (comp. kpotg) mire.
nmoto, adj. and
nmotonmoto, adj. and adv. miry; mirily.
nmui, or mdi, adv. and interj. hush! at once! Ebote tSun
iimui, he went into the room -hush-, gone-. Comp.
krSnl; bum etc.
no, dem. pron. that; pi. nomei, th/)se; Ad. kg, IqIq.
no hewo, nohewo, conj. therefore; wherefore; Ad. dsahe.
no le, conj. then = keke le, be le.
no mli, adv. then.
no nOn, dem. pron. even that; pi. nomei nOn, even those;
no gbomo le non, even that same person.
no nOn kg, th. s., still that same.
no, V. inf. nOrao, to wrestle, struggle, quarrel; to fight.
n5 he, v. to struggle for or about.
nd (nO), pi. nii (Ot. ade) n. thing, comp. §§ 24 — 26,
29; goods, riches; property; palaver, matter, state; in-
strument; vessel; implement; etc. one of the most frc-
s quently used words as well as the next following, from
which it scarcely can be distinguished. Nd, pi. nii serves
to take the place of impersonal subjects or objects,
if not expressed and still grammatically required, as mo,
mei do, if they are personal. Jt is therefore often used
like a pronoun or formword, as he, mo, mei; etc. Comp.
esp. the follow, cases: Mind, my thing (mine), ond (thine),
end (his, hers, its) wond, nyend, amend, and ; pi. (seldom
used) minii, onii etc. Namo nd? Whose (Uiing, pos-
session)? Mone nd, this one's (possession); yi or, tfa
m. k. nd or nii, to flog or strike s. b. with some
thing or things; nand, na nd ko (noko), to see 6.
dbyGoogk
no. 227
th. i. e. to suffer pain; no n 5, salt-veMel; ndnd, pL na-
nii, instruments of art; n5fdn, something bad, a bad thing,
n5fia, a sinful thing (comp. mofdn etc.) ndhewo, nd hewo,
wherefore, the thing for which etc. etc. Comp. also:
sane, n.
no (nO), n. (pi. noi — ?) Ol. so, surface, cover, upper side,
top etc. what is over, more th«i enough; the contrary
of si and Si§i; used, like thii', ipd hie, he, mli, se etc.
as postposition to express the relation of place and tropi-
cally also of time, manner etc. and as adverb. Comp.
up, upon, on; over; above etc. in Engl, and auf, obcn,
ju, an, fort) tDcitcr, fiber, etc. in Germ. It is seldom
used as grammat. subject but very frequently as gram,
object, f. i. ba no, v. inf. nobd, to come upon etc. be
no, neg. voice of ye no, v. which see; be no, v. inf.
nob^mo, to sweep upon, over etc. ble no, v. inf. no-
blemo, to stretch or cross upon, over, on^ to ceil or
cover a room; to crucify; bu no, v. inf. nobumo, to
cover; to defend, to watch over; damo no, v. nodamo,
to stand upon, of men (see m3 no); do no = tsere no,
V. inf. nodomo, to strain; d§e no, v. inf. nodSe, v. to
come ofT, to take off; dse no, v. to come from above,
dsie no, v. inf. nodsiemo, to take off the surface, to
take off from s. th. , dso no , v. to bless or say a bless-
ing over s. th., to consecrate; f^ no, v. inf. nolSmQ,
to take off the surface, cover etc. fl no, v. inf. nofl, no-
fimo, to-. bind up; fd no, v. to cast upon; gble no, v.
inf. nogblemo, to open the surface, cover; ha no, v.
noha, to cover up; hf no, v. to give over and above;
here no, inf. noheremo, lit. to take up; to answer,
comp. to he, v.; hi no, v. inf. nohlle, to remain, dwell
upon; ho no, v. inf. noho, to pass over; ha no, v. to
blow off; ka no, v. inf. nokamo, to be fixed upon, to
cleave to; kft no, v. inf. ookSmo, to lie upon, to rest
upon; hie ka no, v. to trust upon; kpa no, v. inf. no-
kpamo, to draw or dri^ off (from a chair); to dethrone
(a king); to pluck off; ku no, v. inf. noku, nokOmo,
to break from above (lo n5, conip. alo, lo, lit. „or more"
= and so on; and th. like etc.); ma no, v. noma, no-
mSmo; to stand upon; to build upon; to set upon; nana
no, and na no, v. inf. nonanamo, nonamo, v. to tread
upon, to tread down; nyS no, v. to spueeze down;
nmo no, v. to lay upon; sa no, v. to fit upon; si no;
V. to knock upon; to add; to repeat; ta no, pi tra no,
dbyGoogk
228 ' no fa — nofi.
V. to touch the surface; to sit upon; to ride, i«f. no-
tamo, ngtramo; te no, s. ya no; teke no, v. to leap
over; to be over, superfluous; inf. notekemo; ti no, v.
to stumble upon (as spiders would do, s, GS- Fables)
to no, V. to order upon, to set upon; to repeat; inf.
notO; to no, inf. notomo, v. to smooth: to iron; to no,
V. inf. not5mo, to transgress; tsa no, y. inf. notsamo,
to continue; tse no» v. to pluck from; to reduce; ts!
no, v< to close up; tso no, t. to shine upon; tso no,
V. te turn upon, over, up; tSumo no, v. to wipe; wo
no, V. inf. nowomo, to lift up, to exalt; wo he no, v.
inf. henow6mo, to lift one's self up, be proud; to exalt
s. b.; wyie no, v. to grind upon; ya no (aor., perf. and
fut. te no), V. inf. noya, to go on, to proceed; ye no,
V. inf. noyeli, to rule, to have the power over — ; to
inherit (s. ye) ; ye no (neg. voice be no) v. to be upon,
on, up, over etc. (aux. v.); yi no, v. to come down
upon, to strike upon; to come upon; yo no = yeo no,
imperf. tense of ye no; «tc. etc.
no fS, inf. nofS nofamo, v. to Be open; comp. fa no, v.
no gble, V. inf. nogblemo, to be open, comp. gble no, v.
no ha, V. inf. noha, to be covered; comp. ha no, v.
no ka, V. inf. nokSmo, to be open (of boxes, covers etc.)
comp. kft; f5, gble; nme, v.
Ad and
ho- see after no-, n5- and no.
noba, n. coming upon, on, over; fr. ba no, w
noblemo, n. stretching upon; crossing; ceiling; crucifixion;
fr. ble no, V.
nobumo, n. covering; lying upon; watching; defence: fr.
bu no, V.
nodamo, n. standing upon; fr. damo no, v.
nodamohe, n. footing.
nodomo, n. straining; fr. do qo, v.
nodse, n. coming off; taking off; reducing (of price), re-
duction, fr. dse no, v.; going off, away.
nodselo, n. reducer; s. notselo, n.
DOdsiemo, n. taking off;.fr. dsie no, v.
nodsolo, blesser; consecrater.
nodsomo, n. blessing; consecration; fr. d§o no, v.
nofdmo, n. opening; discovering, fr. fd no and no f^, n.
ndfgno, pi. nii fe; ndfiand, pron. every; any (thing); comp.
fe and mofemo.
nofi and
dbyGoogk
DQflmQ — nomildtiudSd. 229
mjtyao, n. binding up.
nofo, n. casting upon, increasing,' adding.
ndfoA, pi. niifddSi (comp. also: niifddsianii) n. bad thing,
evil; sin; impers. noun formed by efdn, evil and n5;
comp. mofdn, n. and § 25 and 26.
ndfdnfelQ, = efdnfelo^ n. evil-doer; culprit; comp. esafelo>
ndsafelo, notdlQ, mofdn etc. aoi Ot. adeboneyefo, n.
nOfdnfemo, n. bad act or deed; m
nogbe, n. way up to s. th. „2lufn)eg."
nogblemo, n. opening,
ngha, n. covering up.
nohand, pi. -mi n. cover; shield, s. tSSn, n.; shawl and
the like,
noherelo, n. person answering or replying or taking up
speaking.
nQheremo, n. answering, replying, taking of the word;
answer; response; comp. heto, n.
nQheremQlala, n. responsc-hynm or song.
nohewQ, conj, therefore; generally followed by le or nl,
nohewQ hu n\ — therelM'e also — .
ndhewQ, pron. and conj. why, whatfore, wherefore,
nghile, n. remaining, dwelling upon.
«Qhd, n. passing over; surpassing,
noka and
nokamo, n. cleaving to; custom; pr^tice; habit; use; fr.
ka no, V.
UQkSmo, i^ lying upon s. th. fr. kd no, v.; opening, fr. no
ka, V.
ndkend and
noke, n. gift, present; s. niik^nii, pL of it.
nokpalo, n. usurpator; person straining or clarifying s. th.
nokpamo, n. drawing or dragging ofT; dethroning, fr. kpa
no, v.; straining, clarification.
nokOmo, noki^omo, n. breakmg off.
n5lo, n. fighter, wrestler,
nom, n. (Ot. th. s.) spoil, booty, esp. of vmr; A6 — , v. to
spoil, plunder; to make prisoners.
ngmS, nomdimo, n. standing, lying, building upon s. th.
nomn5, n. spoiling, plundering; making prisoners,
nomnd gbomo, pi. -mei, n. prisoner of war.
nomndlo, n. plunderer; person making prisoners,
nomndnii, pi. n. plunder, spoil, booty; prisoners of war.
nomnOniidsa, n. dividing of the spoil.
dbyGoogk
230 toOA — noyalo.
non, pron. (Ot. ara) same; even; lenoft, the same, even
he or she; nakai nOil, even so; comp. no, pron. Ad. i6,
which see also in GS.
nona -mo, nQnana -mo, n. treading upon, down, !r. na
no and nana ng, v.
n5na, n. pain, torture; torturing, suffering, fr. na nO, v.
n5nalo, n. suffering penon.
ndnasane, n. painful sivry, palaver,
nonyemo, n. squeezing down; fr. nyfi no, v.
none, demonstr. pron. this (thing); pi. nil ne or niine.
noni (=no nl, comp. nioni, boni, koni, dSni etc.), rel.
pron. what; which; that, only used of things; comp.
moni.
nonmg, n. laying upon; fr. nme no, v.; being shut.
nosuomgnS, n. will, wish, s. suomo and nd, n.
ndsa, n. = esa, sin; evil.
nOsafelo, n. sinner.
n5§afemo, n. sin; sinful, evil act = esafemo.
ngi^imo, n. knocking upon;^ding; addition; repetition fr.
si no, V.
notalo, n. rider, sitter,
notamo, nolramo, n. sitting upon, riding, fr. ta no, pi. tra
no, V.
notekemo, n. overflowing; superfluity; fr. teke no, v.
notimo, n. stumbling* upon fr. ti no, v.
noto, n. putting on, „2luflegcn"; repetition, fr. to no, v.
notomo, n. smoothing or ironing cloth;, fr. to ilo, t.
notomo-okpl5, n. smoothing-lable.
notonoto, adv. repeatedly.
not6lo, n. transgressor,
notdmo, n. transgression.
notomonS, pi. -nii, v. transgressive act.
notsamo, n. continuing; continuation; fr. tsa no, v.
notsemo, n. reducing; reduction; fr. t§e no, v.
n^Umo, n. closing up; fr. tsl no, v. concealing; keeping
in secret,
notsdmo^ n. tulKting upon fr. t§5 no, v.
notsumo, n. wiping off, fr. tgumo no^ v.
nowO and
nowomo, n. uplifting, elevating; elevation, exaftalion fr.
wo no, V. and no wo, v.
nowolo, n. elevator.
noyfi, n. going on, proceeding fr. ya no, r.
noyalo, n. progresser.
dbyGoogk
noyeli — 65bfi. 231
noyeli, n. ruling, governing; government; overcoming; in-
heriting etc. ^. ye no, v.
noyelilo, noyelo, n. ruler, ^ governor; heir.
noyelibe, n. time of government.
noyelihe, n. place of government.
noyimQ, n. coming ^r striking upon.
AO, n. salt.
iio-odi, Q. large basket resting on wooden sticks and
thatched, in which salt is preserved.
no-yiteremo, n. salt- load: a basket of salt, as they come
into the interior.
nd (or nO) inf. n5 and n6mo , v. to take (ne^men), (Ot, ffi),
used like kg, as auxiliary verb, f. i. n6-ha, to (take sc.
something) and give (to some body); nd-fe, to take and
do, i. e. to do with ; see kg and its combinations ; to be
agreeable (angenejim fcpn), inf. nSmp.
nd m. k. na, v. to be agreeable to some body; inf. na-
n^mo.
n6 (nO), (noun, but not frequently usfed as such) side,
neighbourhood; contact; (Umgcbung); dwelling; comp. he,
hewQ and masei; postposition, used like he, h!e, mli,
na, no etc. , to express the relation of locality, as the
prepositions : near, to, by, at etc. It is scarcely, if ever
used as gram, subj., but very frequently as gram, object
of locality; f. i. ba m. k. nd, to come to s. b.; inf. ndbd;
be m. k. Ad, to be absent from, or not in possession of,
Bome body; s. ye Ad; dse m. k. nd, v. inf. nddse, to
go away from s. b., to leave s. b. ; dse m. k. nd, v. to
come from s. b. (s. dSe, used as auxil. v.); gbale m. k.
nd, V. to turn in to s. b.; ho m. k. nd, to pass by to
s. b. or s. b. house; kS no, v. to lie by, near or with;
mS nd, V. to stand or lie at or near (used of things);
to build at or near s. b. house) ; se Ad , v. to reach or
arrive at . . . ; si Ad, v. to knock at or against; ta Ad,
V. to sit with; te Ad, s. ya Ad; to Ad, v. to kecfpki.at
or in; to lodge with; t§d Ad, v. to turn by, in etc. tsu
m. k. Ad, to sleep with s. b.; ya m. k. Ad, v. perf. ao|r,
and ful. tense te m. k. Ad, to go to s. b. ; ye m. k. Ad,
neg. be m. k. Ad, v. to be or live with or near s. b.,
to be in possession of s. b.; imp. tense: yg m. k. Ad.
Ad - fe ; Ad - h§ and other double verbs with Ad as auxiliary
V. see explained in § 28 and comp. kg, v. and its com-
binations and Ad, v.
Adba, n. advent; arrival at or lifear s. b.
dbyGoogk
232 Addse — nSonft.
nddSe, n. removal froip s. b.
ndgbe, n. access Outritt); approach.
'noli, enoli, adj. green.
ndlo, n. taker.
ndmo, n. sweetness, agreeableness , fr. ft6, v.
nsSni, n. (Ot. th. s.) balance, pair of scales.
nsorok^, n. bush fit for cultiyation (s. ko, n.).
nsra, n. (Ot. th. s.) camp; bo — , y. inf. nsrabo, to encamp;
to exercise, to be drilled; bo m. k. nsra or ke m. k. bo
nsra, v. a. to exercise, to drill (soldiers); to nsra, v.
inf. nsralO, to encamp. Comp. sra, v. ; and asrafoyon, n.
nsrabo, n. exercise; drilling; encamping.
nsrabolo, n. driller; ^ncamper.
nsrato, n. encamping; encampment.
nsratolo , n. encamper.
nsro, nsroh, n. faithfulness; feigned faithfiiloess; Sugeti^
bicn ji ; hypocrisy ; ti nsrdn, v. , inf. nsrdnti (Ot. ?) to act
faithfully toward the master against the fellow -servants
or labourers; to report fellow -servants, to feign faith-
fulness; to play the hypocrite etc.
nsrdnti, n. faithful acting towards the master, reporting;
dissembling^ hypocrisy.
nsrdntilo, n. faitMul servant; reporter, 9tugenbiener; hypo-
crite.
n§Oi n« sea; sea water (comp. Ot. nsu = water; Ga nu,
sweet water); wu nso, v. inf. nsowumo, to bath in the
sea; nso md m. k., inf. nsomdmo, v. to be afTected by
sea-sickness; nso mdmi, I am sea-sick (see lole m5 m. k.,
the same); nso fii, v., inf. usQfh, to be low-water-tide,
to ebb; n§o yi, v.; inf. nsoyimo, to be high-water tide ;
nyle n§on, and nyle nso hie, v. inf. nSoAnylemo, n§o-
h^ienyiemo, to make a seavoyage; etc. Comp. wu, wu-
so; Ad. wo; Ayigbe: Wo; Ot. pp, n.
nsobe,'n. season of the sea.
nsfibii, nsonbii, n. sea-men, sea-people.
nsodsen, n. sea-life.
nsof^9 B- ebb-tide, v. nso ^^ v.
nsQgbe and nsongbe» n. south, south- ward.
n§Qh!e, n. surface of the sea.
nsoke, nsrokg, n. wave (s. ke).
nsokpakpo, n. sea-lake; bay; cove.
n§o-kpo, n. sea-island.
^§Qn = n§o mli.
nsona, n. sea-shore.
dbyGoogk
nSgnamaA — nto. 233
nSonamaA, n. sea-town.
nSomdmo, n. sea-sickoess.
Aso^m^, n. calmness of the sea.
n§onkot§a, n. sponge.
nSgnine, n. sea-arm; bay; cove.
n§Qnlala, n. sea-song.
n^O^lele, n. sea- vessel.
n§onlo, n. sea^fisb.
nSonO) n. surface of the sea == nSohle.
nsonnylelo, n. passenger in a vessel.
n§Qnnyiemo, n. sea-voyage.
nsonnyo, pi. nsQnmei, n. seaman.
nSonya, going to sea.
n§oilisane, nSonnd, n. matter or thing pertaining to the sea.
nSose, n. transmarine place or country; comp. kose; maAse
etc. Noni bako dd le eye nsQse, prov. >Vhat has never
come before is beyond the sea.
nsQsisi, n. ground of the sea.
n§osikpoA, n. sealand.
n§ota» n§onta, n. sea-war; -tawu, n. th. s.
nsQta, n. marine.
nsQtabilo, n. mariner.
nsQte, n. stone from the sea; rock in the sea.
n§owale, n. power of the sea.
nSowo, n. = nsoyimo; @teiflen fcer ©ee; = nsonmfi, n.
calmness of the sea.
nsowumo, n. sea-bath, fr. wu nso, v.
nsoyimo, n. flood-tide,
nsroke, s. nsoke; n. wave,
nta (Ot. ata, pi. nta, twin) n. pair; any thing double; tQ-
nta, double-gun; gbe-nta, double way, cross-way etc.
ntanta, adv. by pairs.
ntSn, n. a kind of nets for carrying things in; comp. ya, n.
ntiS, n. kick; fS — , v. inf. ntia-fS, to kick, to try to kick
in lifting the heel; si — ,-inf. ntia§imo, to kick.
nti^fSi, n. kicking; trying to kick,
ntiaf^lo, n. kicker.
ntiasUg, n. th. s.
ntiasimQ, n. kicking,
nto, interrog. particle, not; lat. ne, greek (xrj; nto mike?
Did I not say it? = I certainly said it. Comp. aso,
ani; be, lo etc.
nto, n. a kind of high and very rough grass; wild sugar-
cane?
dbyGoogk
2U nto — - lid.
nto, n. (Ot. the same) toll, tax, custom, duly; comp. onia;
he nto, V. to take duty; yi nto (or Ho) v. to reeeiye or
pay duty; comp. t§u onia, y.
ntohelo, n. tax-gatherer; toUkee^er.
ntohemo, n. taxing.
ntohemohe, n. custom-place, custom-lrause.
ntoyilg, n. tax-gatherer; tax-payer.
ntoyi, n. tax-gathering; tax-paying.
ntifei, n. gun-stick, rammer.
ntfgn, n. a kind of itch; do — , v., inf. ntft§hdo, to gel
the itch.
ntfendo, n. itching.
ntf^hdolo, n. a person having this itch.
ntfemiatSe, Atf^At§e, n. th. s.
ntsift, ntSim, n. a kind of food prepared of boiled blood
and pepper.
ntsuma (Ot.) n. a kind of red clay, used for dying (rooms
etc. but also cloth, s. nkobeA, n.).
nu, y. inf. no and numo^ to perceiye; to hear, to
understand; 4o feel; to smell; to drink; nu iime, v.
to gather palmnuts; nu tawa, y. to smoke tobacco; nu
ble, y. to smoke a pipe; nu he, y. to hear about; to
feel; nu mli, v. to hear the contents, to hear of s.
th. etc.
nu niiaA, y. to be inquisiiiye.
nu, n. water, esp. sweet water or drink-water, comp.
Dso ; any fluid as such, if only its fluidity shall be signi-
fied, f. i. hIenmeiA-nu, eyewater, i. e. tears; wo-nu,
fowl- water, i. e. grayy; soup; he-nu, fluid of any thing;
mli-nu, fluid in any thing, sap; nn Am^, water fit for
drink, cooking; nu hd, cold water; nu la, hot water;
nu kulokulo, lukewarm water; ye nu, y. to draw water;
nu nu, y. to drink water; fo nu, y. to weep water, i. e.
tears, s. yafonu; fie nu, y. decent expr. to make water;
s. s3mo; etc. PI. nui, sometimes used for different kinds
of water, different particles of water, drops, tears etc.,
comp. dai, lai etc.
nQ, pi. hi and hlmei, comp. § 48; n. man, male (s. also
nyo) ; the word is used to indicate the sex of men, ani-
mals and plants ; comp. yO, female and mo, gbomo; wu,
M; t§e, nye, etc.; binu, son; gbekSnu , male (Md;
okpo^ono, male horse, stallion; abolobatSonU, male bread-
leaf-tree etc. nu mo or numo, pi. hi med§i, htoedSi;
n. old man; used as title of honour to high persons,
dbyGoogk
iiii*a(ua — iMiSi8l 235
as kings etc. (Cotnp. „Sire" in French and Engl); fe.
no, Y. to make a man, to behave as a man, to be a man
{,Mn SSatin ntadt^lp'O. Ad. nymnu, n. Ot. obarima, n.
nu-afua, n. flood of water,
nuba, n. water-plant,
nublage, n. water-tit).
nuba, n. water-hole, tank, well; comp. hiefimei, n.
nubudse, n. well-digging, fr. dSe nubu, v. to dig a well.
nubudselQ, n. well-diggir.
nndsQ, n. water-ditch; valley containing a brook ; aqueduct,
nofemo, n. manhood, fr. fe nO, v.; bravery = ek9, n.
Buforoo, n. weeping tears; hienmeinufomo, n. th. s.
nuHemo, n. pouring out of- water, making water; fr. fie
nu, V.
nugbe, n. water-pot.
nuhase, n. water-cask.
nQhe, n. penis (decent expression, s. yOhe).
nuhle, n. surface of water; D*>D^JD.
nuhd, nu hd, n. cold water,
nuhdmo, n. scarcity of water (lit. water-hunger),
nuke, n. water-wave,
nukpulu, n. water-jug; pitcher.
nukpunkpS, water-barrel,
nukuli, n. water-drop,
nula or nu la (and nu ke la) n. hot wiier.
nulo, n. drinker; hearer etc. fr. nu, v.
numo or nu mo and iiu momo, n. pi. M medsi, old man.
numo, n. drinking; hearing; feeling, perceiving etc. s. nu, v.
nutk = nu mli.
nuna, n. waters edge; shore.
nuAlo, n. water-animal,
nunma, n. food- water (?); drink-water.
nuuQ, n. surface of water == nuhle, n.
nunu, redupl. v. of nu, v.
nunulo, n. waterdrinker.
nunumo, n. waterdrinking.
nuse, n. behind or beyond the water, comp. nSose, manse»
fase, kose etc.
nasu and
ttQsuban, n. male-, manly character; s. hianiifemo, nu-
femo, n.
nufdmQ, n. sprinkling of water; watering; fr. f% nu, V.
nu§i§i, n. ground, bottom of water; muddy water at the
bottom.
dbyGoogk
S86 naSiSikpoto -»- nwei.
nusisikpoto, n. muddy water at the bottom.
*^nute, n. water-stone; drip-stoiie.
nutQ» n. water-bottle (generally a <^iIabash-flaiD ; water-
bladder; s. samoto»
nutsamo, n. digging for water ;j5. nubudsg, n.
nutse, n. possessor of water (a well 4 1.).
nQtso, pi. -tsei, n. male-rod (more decent than hSmo).
nuwd, nunwo, n. putting in water.
nuye, n. water-drwing , water-feting.
nuyelo, n. water-drawer; water-carrier.
nulami (= nwei-la-bi = high-light-child , comp. nsoroma in
Otyi) n. star. Comp. also holami in Acto. ; and hu-
lami, n.
nulamiiaheniile, n. astronony.
nulamiiaheniilelo , n. astronomer.
nulan, pi. nulai, adj. shining, bright (perhaps connected
with nulami; = starry).
nwS, V. to disregard; to contemn, insult = nyafi, v. comp.
also kwa.
'nwan, onwan, n. fool; = bulu.
nwane, n. doubt; difference of opinion; uncertainty; dse-,
y. inf. nwanedse, to dispute; to doubt; k^ m. k. ds6-,
V. to dispute with s. b. (Comp. gye akyine in Ot. and
lise nd in Adn^
nwanedse, n. doM)t; dispute; difference of opinion; Ot.
akyingye.
ikWanedselQ, n. doubter; disputer; sceptic.
nwSnwa, n. wonder; astonishment (Ot.), surprise; ye — ,v.
to be surprisiiig, astonishing; comp. fe yd, hie fe ya;
na kpe he; he dso, v. etc.
nwatanwSta, adj. and adv. speckled; nwetSnwgtg, adj.
th. s.
nwei,n. heaven (comp. Nyonmo; Ot. osoro Ad, hiom,
hyom); height; adv. on high; up; above; upstairs
etc.; contrary sisi; sikpon; heaven and- earth; ba — , v.
to come to heaven; be — :, v. s. ye nwei; dse iiwei,
V. to come from above; max. v. used = from above;
se tfwei, v. to reach to heaven; to reach heaven; si — ,
V. to knock at heaven, to reach to heaven; comp. esp.
the expression : keyasi nwei, = to heaven; ta nwei, v.
to sit above, in heaven; to touch heaven; te
nwei, s. ya iiwei; tsu — , v. to send up; wo nwei, v.
to sleep upstrairs; ya nwei, v. pert aor. and fut. tense:
te Aweiy to go up; to go to heaven; comp. esp. the
dbyGoogk
iiwei-asafo — nyftflmo. 23T
expr. ke-ya Awei, ke le nwei, ke-ale ftwei, = (go) to
heaven; ye nwei, neg. betwei; aux. v. to be up, above,-
in heavm; imperf, yo nwei; etc. Comp. also no, yiten,
hie, n.
nwei-asafo, n. host of heiiren. •
nweiba, n coming 4o heaven; coming up.
nweibi, n. child of heaven.
nwcibo, n. creation of heaven.
nweibolo, n. creator of heaven.
nweibumo = hlebumo, n. cloudy weather fr. nwei bu, v.
nweidsen, n. heavenly world^; heavenly life; s. dSeA, v.
nweigbe, n. way to heaven.
nweigbg, n. voice of heaveni
nweiha = nweibumo.
nweihie," n. face of heaven.
nweila, n. heavenly light.
nweilabi, s. nnlami, n.
fiweimaAtseyeli, n. kingdom of heaven.
nweimo, pi. — mei; n. heavenly per An.
nweiniiyeli, n. heavenly inheritance.
nweino , pi. — nii, n. heavenly thing.
nweisihilehe, n. heavenly dwelling-place.
nweita = nwei-asafo, n. heavenly host.
nweilsemo, = dSentSemg, n. clear weather fr. nwei t§e,
V. = dsen tse, v. *"
hweiya, n. going to heaven; ascension.
nweiyeli, n. heavenly inheritance.
iiweiyin, n. heavenly mind.
nwilinwitg = nwatSmvatS, adj. speckM.
Words not found under ny- may be sought for under
ni- and nyi-.
ny^, V. inf. ny^mo, pronounced with elevation of voice,
to exult, to rejoice (over s. b. or s. th.), to triumph;
nya! rejoice!"
nya, inf. nys, v. obscene word: cacare. See wa, wa nane,
ya kona, tsong, ts6 he, ya dfeian, -nii ase etc. Comp.
nyia, v.
nya, nyanya, adv. (Ot. th. s.) slowly. *
nyafi or nyafe, inf. nyafimo, v. to disregard, despise, con-
temn; to use spitefully; comp. nwa; na yi, fa yi; Ifc
gbe heguo, s. etc.
nyafilo, n. spiteful,, disregarding person.
nyafimo, n. disregard; spite, despite.
dbyGoogk
138 nyilo — ny9teyd6tSalo.
nyJlo, n. exultcr; triumpher fr. ny§, v.
ny^mg, n. exultation; rejoicing; triumph fr. ny^, v.
nyikmo, v. inf. th. s. to iiek; to batht, to fomeal; to bathe
a wound, boil or sore, generally '*vith hot water; -fla,
to bathe a sofc ^c. ; to casUifi bad look on s. b. == kpe
m. k.; nyemo, th. s. *
nyamo, n. bathing, fomentation; evil eye.
nyanS, inf. nySnSmo, v. (= nyane, which see) ; to disfigure;
— hie, to disfigure the face; to make an ugly face; to
express disgusl; — na, v. to disfigure the mouth etc.
nySnanyana, adv. swarmingly^ of the movement of wornas,
vermin etc.; nyie — , v. to swarm or walk swarmingly;
roughly = sakasaka, bisibsia ete.
nyariamo, n. disfiguring; ei^ression of disgust.
n^ane, inf.nyaiiemo (sometimes ny age, -mo nyanke, nyanke-
mo), V. to be disgusting, ugly; to disgust, abhor; to ex-
press disgust; to make ugly; he nyane m. k., v. to be
disgusting, to disgust or abhor one's self; mihe nyaiiemi,
I disgust myself; •yane he, inf. henyanemo, th. s.; nyahe
hie, V. to disgust one's face.
nyaftelo, n. a person disgusting or abhorring s. th.
nyanemo, n. disgust, abhorrence; dirtiness; fe or ye nyane-
mo, V, to be dirty, disgusting.
nyankese, n. a plant with rough leaves used for cleansing
things.
Nyankoa (Ot. = God's slave, God's servant fr. Nyome and
akoa), n. pr. of persons.
nyankunton, n. a kind of trees (rainbow-tree, fr. nyankon-
tm, Ot. rain-kiw); nyonmosat§o, th. s.
nyanylnya, adj. and adv. sour; acid; fe — , ye — , v. to
be sour.
nyafemo, and
nyanyafemo, n. slowlhiess.
nyanyanyafemo» n. sourness; acidity.
nyanyata, n. a plant used as medicine and charm. '
nyanydn, pi. nyanyddsi, n. tooth; kpe nyanySdsi aSisi, v.
fo gnash the teeth; sa nylnyCMlSi ano, v. to cleanse the
teeth; comp. tebi, tela, n.
nyan3iiidsianQsam(), n. tootbcleansing ; s. ta, n.
nyanyodSianosamokotSa, n. sponge or bark for cleansing the
teeth; s. takotsa, n.
nyanyodsiasisikpemo, n. gnashing of teeth.
nyan^dnkakao, n. tooth-adie.
pyanydntSalo, n. dentist..
Digitized by VjOOQIC
nyonyoafS — nyebi. 235 "
n^onyonte, nyKnyonfSiDQ, nyanyddSifamo, n. taking out of
a tooth.
nye, n. and adv. yesterday.
nje sg or nyese, n. day before yesterday.
nyey pi. nyemei (Ot. na), n. mother; generally used of
eirery married woman in speaking to her; romp. tSe, ni,
na, bi etc. also biianye, bienye; awo, n-. Wdnye, hftwo
nu w^nu! aKuttcrd5)cn'! ®ibun5 ctmagSBaffcr jumSrinfen!
nye, pron. you, ye; your; the same if standing indepen-
dently or In the subjective, objective or possessive rela-
tion; comp. § 21 and 34. Ad. th. s., Ot. mu.
nyedientsemei, yourselves. ^
nyefe, all of you.
nyehe, yourselves (relative),
nyehu, you also,
nyeno (s. no, n.), yours,
nyenon, even you.
Byekeke, only you.
nye, inf. nySmo, v. to be able; to csan; to hold, to con-
tain. The construction of this verb is somewhat diffi-
cult, as it cannot, like „le'' be construed with the infini-
tive of the verb expressing the action, one is able to do,
but this verb must either stand in the same tense as
„nye" or in another tense; the object of this action
may stand betwixt both or follow them, comp. the fol-
lowing instances: Minyg mife or manyg mafe, I am able
to do or make; manye nakai mafe, or mlny^ mife nakai
or manye ake mafe nakai, manye ak@ mifcQ nakai, I am
able to do thus; minyen nii ,ne matsu, I cannot do this
work ; minyge ene maye, I cannot eat this (comp. milee
ene yeli, th. s.).
nyg, s. nyie, v. to walk,
nyg, nye, inf. nye, v. to hate; sometimes nye he, th. s.
(comp. henyelo = nyelo, n. enemy),
nyi, n. hatred; enmity,
nyebebe, adv.' already yesterday; s. beb6, adv.
nyebi, pi. -bii, n. motherchild (comp. tsebi and bi), full
brother or sister (®efc()mijier). To be bom of one mo-
ther is considered a more intimate affinity, than of one
father; wherefore nyebi and tsebi, mother's child and
father's child, are sometimes put into contrast. Comp.
„nyerai"j and the very similar relations and views in
.the old Testament and among nations, where polygamy
exists, in general.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
240 nyebii — nyeAQyentfibolo*
njrebii, pi. n. people of yesterday; domp. ian^nthii, n,
nyede, n. hand, power of the mother.
nyedsQiDQ, n. mothers blessing.
nyegbe, n. mothers voice; s. gb6, n.; mother-murder, s,
gbe, V.
nyehedo, n. mothers love.
nyelala, n. mothers song.
nyel^, n. mothers blood.
ny§lo, n. able, powerful person, £r. nyS, v.; comp. he-
walo, n.
nyglo, n. hater; enemy.
nye^mo, n. mothers curse.
nyemfin, n. mother-town; mothers town, home.
nyemei, pi. of nye, mother.
nyemeiamodenbo. n. motherly zeal, diligence, care.
nyemi (from nyebi, which see), pi. nyemimei, n. Ad. th. s.
^nd mami; Ot. nua; brother or sister, ®ef($n)iftet.
Whilst nyebi excludes any other relation, nyemi includes
relationship in general and is used for relations of the
same age very extensively (comp. tSe, nye, bi etc.); as
in Hebrew. Nyemi as nanyo is frequently used to indi-
cate general brotherhood or fellowship.
nyemibi, n. Sruber^finb, ©d^wefierfinb; -Weffe, fftii^U; ne-
phew, niece.
nyemihedo, n. brotherly love; (pihxieXfpux, ©tubetlieb^.
nyemihesane, n. brothers palaver, concern.
nyemimeiabo, n. brotherhood.
nyemimeiabi, n. ®ef(ftn)tftetftn^ nephew or niece.
nyeminQ, pi. nyemimeihl, n. brother.
nyeminukpa, n. elder brother or sister.
nyemiyO, pi. nyemimeiyei, n. sister.
nyemiyomo, n. brotherly acknowledgement.
nySmo, inf. ny^mo, v. to grope; s. nyiemo, v. and its
compounds.
nyemo, n. ability, power, possibility; comp. hewale; he-
gbe, n.
nySiho* V. = nySmo, v. to bath, foment.
nyene, inf. -mo, v. to twist (f. i. a rope).
nyeiinyentfi, n. bad, profligate life; bo — , v. to lead a
profligate life; adj. profligate.
nyennyentfibi or bi nyennyentli, n. prodigal son.
nyennyefttfibo, n. profligacy; debauchery; comp. ahofibS.n.
§itfiamo, n.
nyeftnyeMfibolO) n. profligate person; debaucher.
dbyGoogk
nyera and nyeram — ny5 mlf. 241
nyera and nyeram, v. inf. nyeramo, to dazzle; to be bright,
nyeram, nyeramnyer^m, adj. and adv. dazzling, bright;
brightly,
nyeramo, n. dazzling; brightness,
nyia, v. inf. nyia, obscene (corroboration of nya, v.); to
have diarrhoea; comp. musun t§d, v.
nyle, inf. nytemo, v. to walk (= nante); — gbe, inf.
gbenylemQ, v. to travel; — nSo hie, inf. n§oh!enyiemo, v.
to travel by sea; nyle he§iba mli, v. to walk in humility;
nyle ke-ya, v. to walk to s. place; nyie ke-ba, v. th. s.
etc. etc.; ny!e nane ng, inf. nanenonyiemQ, v. to goon
foot,
nyle dSale na, v. to walk straight, righteously; inf. dSale-
nany!emo«
nyle he, — hewo, v. to walk about; inf. henytemo.
nyle hamo, v. to walk before, in advance; inf. hfimonylemo.
nyle hie, v. to walk before; inf. hlenyieino.
nyle mli, v. to walk in s. th.
nyle na, v. to walk along, according to etc.
nyie no, v. lo walk upon, over etc.
nyle so, v. to walk after, to follow; to persecute; inf. se-
nylemo*
nyle seso, v. to go or walk backward; inf. sesenylemo.
nyle si, v. to walk on the ground (= nyle §ikpoin); to
walk on the belly; — on hands and feet; to grovel,
nyle m. k. sisi, v. inf. §i§inylemo» to speak (ill) of s. b.
behind his back; to think or act bad against s. b.; to
seek one's harm, fall ; ye m. k. Sisi, v. th. s.
nylelo, n. walker; traveller,
nylemo, v. to grope, to feel with the hands; s. nygmo, v.
th. s.
nylemo he, v.' to grope, to feel about,
nylemo mli, v. to grope, to feel inside,
nylemo si, v. to lie with hands and knees on the ground,
to feel the ground, inf. Sinylemo.
nyiemo SiSi, v. to grope or feel the ground ; the bottom etc.
nylemo, n. walking; travelling,
nylemokotoku, n. travelling bag.
nylemot§o, pi. -tsei, n. walking-stick; = dehlemotSo, n.
nyd, inf. ny6, nyOmo, v. to sink, to fall; to fall in battle,
to be slain; comp. gbe, gbe si, v.; kdmo Si, v.
ny5 hie, v. to fall on the face,
nyd hle^e, v. to fall forward,
nyd mli, v. to fall into, in.
ZimmermaBn, Akra-Yocab. 16
dbyGoogk
242 nyd no — nydn.
nyd no, v. to M upon.
ny6 se or sggbe, v. to fall back.
nyfi si, V. to sink or fall down; to go down, to set (also
used of the sun).
nyo §isi, y. to fall under s. th.
nyO, nyoii (pi. nyonyon?), n. night; adv. at nighttime; the
contrary of ISne, n.
nyodsiaholo (not used), n. slave-dealer, s. nydn.
nySdsiatso, n. debtor; a person full of debts; s. nyomo
and nyowiotse; possessor of slaves, s. nyon, n.
nyd, n. falling, sinking, going down, setting; fall.
nyomo, n. th. s. but seldom used ; s. sifiemo (fall of many).
nyomo, pi. nyddsi, n. (lit. falling, fall, s. nyo, v.) debt;
duty; wages; dse nyomo, v. to deduct a debt; to take
a pledge; h!e — , v. inf. nySmohiemo, 4o owe, to be in
debt ; mlhielo nyomo darei oh^, I .owe him hundred dol-
lars; bo — , inf. nyfimobo, v. and m6 nyomo, v. inf.
nyomomomo, to get indebted, into debts; ye — , inf.
nySmoyeli, th. s.; wo nyomo, inf. nyomowo, to pay a
debt; to pay the wages; to pay; to repay; to punish;
ko he dse n). k. nyomo, v. to keep aloof from s. b., etc.
nyomobimo, n. asking in debts.
nyomodse, n. taking of a pledge (by force); s. awoba, n.
nydmondstemo, n. deduction .of a debt.
nyomohiemo, n. owing; indebtedness.
nyomohlelo, = nySmotse, n. debtor.
nyomomd, and
nydmomomo, n. getting into debts.
nyomotse, pi. -tsemei, n. debtor; s. nyodsiatse.
nyomowo, n. paying; payment; wages; repayment; punish-
ment.
nyomowobe, n. time of paying.
nyomowodsiemo, n. deduction from payment.
nyomowolo, n. payer.
nyOn = nyo, n. night; = nyo mli, in the night, at night-
time.
nyori, pi. nyodSi (fr» the verb nyd; comp. also nyomo; the
word seems to stand instead of nyolo, debtor, comp.
won, n.), n. slave. It is however seldom used, slaves
being either called tsudsi, servants, or bii, children; Ot.
. akoa, n.
ny6n, pi. nySdsi, n. moon; f. i. nyon edse, v. the moon
shines; comp. nyontsere, month; nyon dse, the month
begins; — gbo, the month dies, is finished.
dbyGoogk
nydntISS — nyonmofiimo. 243
nydndSe, n. moanshine; s. nyon d§e; beginning of a month.
nyondSenii, pk monthly wages, — allowance; comp. nydfi-
niiyenii, pi. n. Ad. hulamidsenii, th. s.
nydngbele, n. end of a month, s. nySn gbo, v.
nyobkpemo, n. = nyonlserekpemo , n. moon-light, SWoiibr
f^ein.
nyoiim^, pi. nyonmaf, num. ten; nyonma ke ekome, eleven;
— ke enyo, twelve; — ke ete, thirteen etc. nyonmai
enyo, twenty; — ete, thirty etc. s. § 35.
nyonlo, aiv. at once; mafo mibie mafe — , I will try and
do it at once.
Nyonmo (without plural-form), pr. n. God (Ot. Nyame
and Nyankdpon; Adn. and Ayigbe: Mawu). As God is
considered the spirit or soul of heaven, or heaven the
face (s. Nyonmo hie) or outward appearance of God,
NyoAmo is also used for heaven, f.i.. Nyonmo ke §i-
kpoii, heaven and earth, the latter also being considered
a personal being or deity; comp. iiwei, n.; and as rain-
ing, lightening, thundering are considered direct (acts
of God and therefore not expressed by impersonal
verbs), Nyonmo seems to be used for „raio'*, though
his personality is never lost sight of, comp. N. ne, God*
rains, it rains; N. tue, God begins to rain; N. fa, v.
G. drizzles; N. ba, G. (or rain) comes; N. §i, G. knocks,
i. e. it is thundering etc. „Ani Nyonmo aba? Milee,
led§i onukpa, efeo bofSbo ni esumog, lit. Will God
(rain?) come? I don't know; he is the highest, he does
whatever he likes." Instead of Nyonmo sometimes Na-
nyohmo, sometimes Mawu and sometimes Nyonmo Mawu
is used; here and there also Tse NyoAmo, father God
and Ata Nyonmo, th. s., and even simple wotse, .wofe
WQt§e, our father, the father of us all (9IHDatcr) etc.
Many animals, plants and other things have names which
are combinations of the name of God, in Gd as well as
in the related languages (comp. in Germ, ^^etrgott^*
tjogclcin", ,,®otte^tfif)cl^en", etc.).
Nyonmo-abolo, n. the LordU supper; = nyontsoniiyenii.
Nyonmo-bd, n. coming of rain.
Nyonmo-bi, n. son, child of God.
nyonmobiet^ (th. s. as the foil.), n. carrion kite (^la^geier);
s. op^te, n. akinma, n. akpSna, n. th. s.
nyonmobitete, n. th. s.
nyonmgbitete, n. (lit. „God*s first bom child") swallow.
nyonmofdmo, n. drizzling; s. N. fa, v.
16*
dbyGoogk
244 nyohmaUe — nyoi&tSerekpemo.
nyonmoMe, n.lil. God's face; visible heaven, s. iiwei hie, v.
Nyonmo-kita, n. oath by God.
nyonmonemo, n. raining; rain.
nyofimonkrakro, n. scorpion.
Nyonmo-kpamo, n. ceasing of rain, fr. N. kpa, v. to cease
raining.
Nyonmo-kpemo, n. lightening.
nyonmoman,n. city, people or land of God; kingdom of God.
nyoiimonte, n. (lit. God's stone) hail.
Nyoftmo-namg, n. swearing by God; s. na, v.
nyonmonu, n. rain-water (s. Nyoiimo); s. nana, n.
nyonmosatso , pi. *tsei, n. (Kt. God's bedstead) a tree of
peculiar form, s. nyankunton, n.
nyonmoSimo, n. thundering, fr. N. §i, v.
Nyonmo-srawa, n. lightening, Sli^.
nyonmotsinS (lit. Gods cow), n. giant beetle,
nyonmotuemo, n. beginning of rain, s. N. tue, v.
Nyo6mo-s!a, n. house of God, s. s!a, n.
Nyofimo-tSu, n. house of God, temple, f.uxog, chapel; s,
tsu, n.
* Nyonmo we, n. house of God, temple, including yards etc.,
tsQOV.
Nyoiimo-wiemo , n. word of God.
Nyonmo-yeli, n. being of God; rule of God.
nyOnnii, and
nyOnnii, pi. n. night-things, i. e. bribe, l)ecause given at
night-time; things pertaining to night.
nyOnniitsumo, n. night-work,
nydnniiyenii, pi. n. monthly food, i. e. provision for slaves,
bond-people and servants etc. ; s. nyoAdSenii, pi. n.
nyonn^, pi. -nii, n. s. th. pertaining to moon, month, or
to slaves,
nydnna, pi. nyddsi h!, n. male slave.
nySnnye, n. -nyemei, mother of a slave; mistress (of a
slave), s, nydntse, nySdsiatSe, liyontSg, n.
nyOnnylemo, n. nigbt-travelliag.
nyonnyielo, n. person travelling at nighttime; nightwalker.
nydntsere, n. moon, comp. nyon and dsetseremo and t§e,
tsere, v.; nydntsere d§e, v. = nyoA dse, to be moon-
light; — ye emu, v. to be fullmoon.
nyontseredSe, n. moonlight.
nyontSerekpemo, n. th. s., moonshine; s. nydnkpemo, n.
and kpe, v.
dbyGoogk
nyoht§6 — nyOmu. * 245
nyoAt§e, p. father, possessor of a slave, master; s. nyS-
dSiatSjg, n. and
nyontSo, nunt§o, nyoAt§o, nontSo (perh. = nySntSe, slave-
father, slave-possessor, comp. nyddSiatse), n. master, lord
(sometimes also like mistress, lady); comp. the Otyi
words: owura, awura, also used in GS; ye nyontso, inf.
nyontsoyeli, to ie master, to master; to lord over; to
rule 0,^errf(^en")» — fio, little master, young master.
Ad. th. 8. and mav?et§e» awetse» wetse, n.
Nyontso-ba, n. the coming of the Lord.
nyontsobi, n. masters child; youngmaster, -mistress.
nyontsQgbl, n. the Lords day.
nyontsomah, n. Lords-town, — people.
nyontsomon, n. masters house, — palace.
nyontsoniiyenii, pl.n. the Lords supper; == Nyonmo abolo,n.
nyontsond, pi. -nii, n. thing, possession, property of the
master.
nyontsQniitsumo» n. masters business, — work.
nyontSoM, n. masters wife, mistress; s. awura, n.
nyontSosane, n. masters palaver.
nyontsQse, n. (behind) the back of the master.
nyontsQsuomo, n. masters service.
nyontSotsu, n. masters room.
nyontSowe, n. master's house.
nyout§oweku, n. master's family.
nyont§QwiemQ, n. masters word.
nyontsQwO, n. giving of the mastership; comp. wo nyontso, v.
nyontsoyeli, n. ruling, mastership; government; lording
(.."^mfdjoft").
nyontsoyelibe, n. time of government etc.
nyontsoyelihe, n. govemmentsplace; — seat; s. lumoyeli,
mantseyeli etc.
nyontsoyelisane, n. palaver about mastership, government,
power oyer s. th. or s. b.
nydntSu, n. slave's room or house.
nydnwekUi n. slaves-family,
nyonyeli, n. slavery,
nyonyelibe, n. time of slavery,
nyonyelihe, n. place of slavery,
nyfinyo, pi. nyShyei, nySdsiyei, n. female slave,
nyu— , 8. nyo— .
nyumu. Ad. n. = nQ, man.
nyu, n. Adn. water = nu in Gfi.
nyumu, Ad, n. = nubu, well.
d by Google
^46 * 6 — oblaA.
O.
The initial letter „o** is In Otyi and partly also in
Gft used as initial augment to indicate personality, as
„a** impersonal individuality and „n n m** collectivity;
if a possess, pronominal augment precedes the nouns,
„o" is generally ommitted, as also in some other cases,
wherefore words not to be found under „o**, may be
sought for under the next following consonant. See
§ 13. 14.
0! interj. oh! o! ah! alas! Added fo some names, as
Kwatei O! = he! comp. e^T
0-, pronominal possessive and subjective initial augment
of the second per^. sing., thou; thine; comp. bo and
Ol. wo, wu, Adii. and Ayigbe o; Ad. mo.
-o, pronominal objective (terminational) augment of the sec.
prs. sing., thee; Ad. th« s. and mo.
*Q- := WQ, pron. we; our.
-0 = -wo, pron. us; Ad. th. s.
-0, Ad. definit. article = le in Gfi.
-o, is added = dsi, dsio for the conj. whether; 0 — 6,
wheter-or; Ot. the s. f. i. eeba() eba^o, milee, whether
he will come or not, I don't know.
-0, deminutive termination, f. i. pempeo, pi. -pebii, etc.
obentS, n. a kind of musical instrument con^sting of a
stringed bow which is stricken in playing,
obisi, n. rat (of a very large size)."
obisibu, -flo, n. rats-hole.
obisilo, n. rats-flesh (eaten by some people here),
obla, 'bla, n. youth, youthfulness, youthful strength, beauty,
wantonness, etc. (s. oblahian, obiayeian, obianyo, oblayo
and the verbs bla in GSl and bra in Otyi); obla m. k.
mli, V. to be full of pleasure and joy of youth; to be
wanton,
oblafo, n. (Ot.) executioner; assistant of fetish-priests, who
has to kill the animals for sacrifices etc.
oblai, n. rheumatism, rheumatil swelling.
oblahlaA^ n. youth, age of youth, s. oblayeiaA; gbek§bii-
asi etc.
oblai§3, n. dislocation or distortion of a limb,
oblahlanii, pi. n. youthful things, behaviour etc.
oblahlaniifemo, n. youthful behaviour, -doing, -act.
oblaA, pL obla!, n. strong, stout or large person; giant;
d§e — and gba — , v. -to be strong etc.
dbyGoogk
oblafids^ — odase. 247
oblaftgbamo I "• '^'^"S^'*' stoutness.
oblanyo, pi. oblah!, n. youth, lad, young man.
oblanyodsen, n. character of a young man.
oblanyofemo, n. youlhfulness, behaviour of a young man.
oblanSimo, n. behaviour of youth; s. obla and obla §i m. k.
mli, V.
oblayo, pi. oblayei, n. virgin, maid, grown up girl; young
^oman.
oblayodseil, n. character of a maid, girl; s. d§e and dsen, v.
oblayeian, n. virginhood, maidenhood, youlhful age of wo-
men, comp. oblahlan, n.
oblayeianS, pi. -nii, n. some thing pertaining lo girls.
oblayeianiifemo , n. maidenlike behaviour.
ohleku, n. a bird with a voice like a cuckoo.
oblemp5n, n. a kind of officer of stale ; a rich, noble per-
son, s. ablade, n.
oblotu, n. cloudy heaven, cloudy weather; -^ wo, v. it is
cloudy; heaven is covered.
oblotuwO, n. cloudiness.
obd, ob5bd, obdb5bd, the reduplication used as plur. form,
adj. and adv. full; comp. yi, v. to, mam§m3, emu, adj.
and adv.; n. fuldess; wo — , v. to fill; inf.
obdwo, n. filling, fulness = yimo, n.
obofo, 'bofo, n. (Ot.) messenger; angel; apostle; Ad. Isolo,
n. th. s. Comp. also somafo, n. in Otyi.
obohlma, n. a kind of sickness, producing green spots in
the flesh; verdigris.
ob6nu, n. the large war drum and the instruments belong-
ing to it; s. mile, dsO, kete, obent^, ble, sankfi etc.
obonuyi, n. drumming with the war drum.
obubuafo, n. broken, crippled person (Ot. th. s. fr. bubu, v.
to break).
obudan, adj. foolish; s. bulu, kwasi^, kolo etc.
obutu, n. load ; f . i. able — , a load of corn.
oda (s. Ot. da, V. to lie), n. a large reddish lizard dwel-
ling on and in the walls of seatowns; s. tsunye and
odinmolQ, n.
odakreo, n. a kind of lizards.
Odale, prop, noun of females.
odanta (Ayigbe-word), n. under-dress of women, = boi, n. ;
also used of that of men = tekle, n.
odase (Ot. adanse), n. witness, testimony; ye — , v. to
witness; inf. odaseyeli.
dbyGoogk
ii8 odasekddoii — ofoitlo.
odase kddon, n. false (crooked) witness; = odasefdfiy n.
odas^fo, -fonyo, pi. -foi, n. witness.
odasefobimo, n. questioning of a witness.
odaseyeli, n. witness, witnessing; testimony.
odaseyelikita, n. witness-oath.
odaseyelilo, odaseyelo == odasefo, but seldom used, n.
witness,
odehe (Ot. dehye), n. free, noble person; comp. heyelilo
and ye he, v.
odehebi, n. a child of a free or nobleman, free by birth.
odiiimolO) n. a kind of lizards living in human habitations,
but considered poisonous; comp. odd, t§unye, inankpari,
mampam etc.
odol, n. a kind of sea-fish, dolphin (?); §. at!, n.
oddno, n. smallest kind of drums; yi — , v. to drum,
oddnli, n. cotton; wick; also = wiki, n.
od6ntikpd, n. cotton-thread,
oddntilo, n. cotton-weaving,
oddntilolo, n. cotton-weaver,
oddntimama, n. cotton-cloth; s. kente, n.
odontitsSlo, n. cotton-spinner.
oddntitS^mo, n. cotton-spinning.
od6ntit§o, pi. -tSei, n. cotton-tree; -shrub, -plant,
odse! (for men) odse ko! (for women) morning salutation;
answ. Ya edsa! etc.
od§ogbd, odsegba; odsogbdn, 'dsogba, adv. well, good.
od§o, n. men-stealing; kidnapping. Ot. th. s.; tfa — , v.
to kidnap,
odsotfa, n. kidnapping.
odSotfalo, n. kidnapper,
ofe, n. and adj. (fr. fe, to be more); high, powerful, mighty,
almighty (person); s. agb6; hewalo etc. Nyonmo of^,
God dmighty.
ofe, n. a fruit similar to coffee.
ofetSo, pi. -t§ei,,n. tree bearing it.
oflo, n. a season of the year after the harmatan and before
the first rainy season, s. otSokrikri.
oflote, ofrote (Ot. th. s.), n. a large antelope of the sixe
of a hart.
of6, n. black monkey (Ot. th. s.).
of6, n. forage; spoil, plunder; ye — , v. inf. ofdyeli, to
forage; to plunder (provisions); comp. h6 noip, ha, v.
ofoi, n. horsefly; Sremfc.
ofoiblo, n. ^tiegeniDe^el; a small broom to drive away flies.
dbyGoogk
ofdyeli ^-^ okpl5hetamo. 249'
ot6je^r n. foraging.
ofdyelilo, -yelo, n. foragen
ofie! Salutation in the evening; answ. Yfi edSa! or Ya
ena! etc.
Ogb6, pr. n. of children bom after a brother or sister de-
ceased (lit. „thou diedst^); s« gbobalo, Own etc.
ogbolele, n. shark; ^aififd&.
Ogidigidi, n. epithet of God: Confuser, thunderer (used
during thunder-storms); s. gidigidi, adj.
oh^, pi. oh^i, 'ha, 'hai, num. (n.) hundred; ohai en^o, two
hundred; ohai ete, ohai edfe etc. Comp. § 35 and huha,
num. Ad. and Ay. lafa.
oh^h^ (==: oh^ oh^), num. by hundreds.
ohe, n. kind of gum; copal.
ohehelo, n. copal-buyer.
ohehemo, n. copal-buying.
ohedsrayeli, n. copal-trade.
oheterelo, n. copal-carrier.
ohet§o, pi. -tsei, n. tree producing it.
ohia, 'h!a, Ot. th. s., n. poverty; fr. hia, v.; ohia ehtale,
he is pressed by poverty.
ohiafo, Ot. th. s., n. poor man, poor person; used as ap-
position = adj. poor. ^Ohiafo be nanyo,** the poor has
no friend, prv.
oho, ohoho, adv. no (comp. „hSi§'' th. s. in the suabian
dialect of German).
ohyeo (Ot.), n. hot bread.
okadi, 'kadi (fr. kadi, v. to sign), n. sign; mark.
okadiiimd, n. making signs, marking.
okeyo, n. „hide and seek^ play of children.
ok6§, okeSi, n. roll-tobacco, as imported by the Portuguese.
Ok^s, Ok^si, n. Portugal; -ablotsiri, n. th.s.; -nyo, pi. bii,
Portuguese.
okgle, n. a large bird of the eagle kind.
okplem (Ot. 'premo), n. cannon; tfa — , v. to fire a cannon.
okplemte, n. cannonball.
okplemtunte, n. th. s.
okplemtfd, n. firing of cannon.
okplemtfalo, n. gunner.
okpld, n. (Ot. oprdn) table; feast; nme or iimo — , v. to
spread the table, to make a feast; sa okpl5, v. to pre-
pare the table; ta — he, v. to sit at table.
okpldhetamo, -traipQ, n. sitting at table.
d by Google
250 okplSnin^ — on^fii.
okpldiliin^, -nmo, n. table-spreading; making of a feast;
hospitality.
okpldsamo, n. preparation of the table.
okpo, n. club; s. kpoti, n. th. s. in tsokpoti, n.
okp6, n. dove; pigeon; s. konkpo, kose-okpo, wiriokpo etc.
okposansd, n. a kind of seafish.
okpotsu, n. dove's cot.
okropon, oklopoA, pi. okropoi, 'krop., n. (Ot. th. s.) a kind
of eagles.
okukuba, n. a bush-animal.
okul^, n. widow-hood, comp. abla; Ot. okuna ; fe — , v.
to be widowed.
okulafemo, n. widowhood.
okulafo, n. widower; widow.
okulafonu, n. widower.
okulafosane, n. palaver of a widow.
okulafoyo and yo okulafo, n. widow.
olewunQ, n. sand-bank.
olenlenmo, n. dry, waste, barren place.
olowo, n. leopard; comp. kot§e, hienmalg, mlantH etc.
th. s.
oman^e (Ot,?), n. peace, happiness, joy, grace, loving-
kindness, kindness etc.; public acts of this kind; festi-
vals, weddings, etc. The word is especially used by
religious people and religious things. Comp. hedsQle in
Ga and ma, v. and ye, v. in Otyi* Omanye aba or Tfa
omanye aba! (s. tfa, v.) Let peace come! Answer:
Omanye ba! peace come! Salutation used esp. by fetish-
priests and priestesses, public speckers etc.
omd, n. rice.
omdkao, n. rice-cakes.
omdwonu, n. rice-soup.
omdhQmQ and
omSdQmo, n. cultivation of rice.
omdnmd, n. rice plantation.
omunkuii or
omlukun, omluga, n. cloudiness = oblotu; d§en esi omun-
kun, it is cloudy.
onla, or onyla, n. tribute, toll, tax; comp. nto; tsu onia, v.
to exact, gather, or pay tribute, inf. onlatsumo.
ohlatsu, n. custom-house.
onlatgulo, n. tax-gatherer; — payer.
onlatsumg, n. tax-gathering; tax-paying.
onufu, D. serpent, snake; s. gikpS, and sin5, th. s.
dbyGoogk
onufabQ — osai. 251
ORitfabo, onofu-ebg, n. poison of a snake.
onufukd, n. bite of a snake.
onukpa, 'nukpa (perh. = nO kpakpa, good man, comp. Ot.
opanyin, opanyini) n. old man, elder; alderman; grandee
of a town, land or nation; principal; ruler; magistrate;
first of a company etc. adj. old, elder, eldest; minyemi
nukpa, my elder or eldest brother; ye onukpa, v. to be
old, elder, eldest; ye m. k. onukpa, v. to be elder than
s. b. ; fe onukpa, v. to be old etc. Comp. gbekS, oblanyo
etc. and nu mo, yo mo; da, y. and dale n.
onukpadsen, n. life, charakter, behaviour of old people,
s. dse, n.
onukpafemo, n. old age = dale; gbole.
onukpagbe, n. voice, word of an old man, superior.
onukpaniitsumo , n. work, labour of a grown up person;
s. gbek^biianiitsumo, n.
onukpaiasane and
onukpasane, n. matter, palaver of old men, of the gran-
dees, of grown up person; ye — , v. to act or do like
old people. Comp. gbek^biiasane , n.
onukpasaneyeli , n. acting or speaking tike old people.
onukpayeti, n. state or business of grown up or old people,
grandees, principals, magistrates etc. or of being elder
than s. b. ; age.
opAsa and ap^sa (fr. pasa, v. to lie), n. (Ot.) hypocrisy;
lie; falsehood; ye or bo opasa, y. to act as a hypo-
crite; to lie; to be false. Comp. amale; osato; kdtdm-
po; n. kddon, adj. etc.
opasabo and opasayeli, n. falsehood; hypocrisy.
opasabolo and
opasayelQ and
opasafo (Ot.) n. hypocrite, liar, false person.
opehenadi (Ot. „thoa iikest to be king'0> d. moroingstar =3
toto, n.
opehenadianii , pi. n. ambition; fe — , v. to be ambitions.
opehenadianiifelo , n. ambitious person.
opehenadianiifemo, n. ambitiousness.
opense, n. a kind of smij}l white porcupines; comp. sade-
boa and kotoko> n.
op^te, n. papaw-fruit, if spoilt on the tree; s. akpakpa, n.;
carrion kite , s. akanma , n. th. s.
osai (fr. sa, y.), n. castrate; eimiich; used of men and
animals.
dbyGoogk
252 o6ato — oSimalo.
osato, n. hypocrisy (Ol. prodigality; waste); ye or fe — ,
v/ to be a hypocrite. S. opasa, th. s.
ps^tofo, n. hypocrite,
osatofemo and
osatoyeli, n. hypocrisy.
osQ, n. a kind of wild cats, in form resembling a fox;
-akpa, n. the common one; - din, n. the black one.
osobu, -Aq, n. hole of it.
osofo 'sofo (Ot. perh. = sorefo, one who prays) n. priest;
ye — , V. to be priest; comp. wontse, wolomo, okom-
fo, n. etc.
t)SQfo-atade , n. priestly robe; s. osofotade, th. s.
osQfoiasane, n. matter or palaver of priests.
osQfoniitsumo , n. priests business,
osofond, pi. -nil, n. priests parts, -property.
osQfoiatade, n. priestly garment.
osQfosemo, pi. -mei, n. assistant priest.
osQfowO, n. making s. b. priest; priestly honour,
osofoyeli, n. priesthood; priests ofQce.
osofoyo, n. priestess; s. woyO, n.
osre, n. comb; -femo, -gbo, n. comb-making.
osrefelQ, n. comb-maker,
osregbglo, n. th. s.
osre, osrSn, n. a kind of sea-fish.
o§S, n. a kind of wood,
osdtso, pi. -tSei, n. a tree used for building.
oSdiimonmonmolo, n. board from this tree.
osSimplan, n. beam, rafter of it.
os^, n. a war-cry or song of women; bo — , v. to raise
this cry.
o§ebO, n. war-crying.
oSebolo, n. war-crier.
oSeku, n. backbiting; bo m. k. he oSeku, y. to backbite s. b.
oSekubO, n. backbiting,
osekubolo, n. back-biter,
osl, n. short foot or leg; ml oSi, inf. oSimft, to walk on
the toes because of a short leg.
oSlfo, n. lame person; person with a short leg; comp.
akpake; otSolo etc. *
oSiki, n. dice; fd — , v. to play dice.
oSikifd, n. dice-play; lot-casting.
oSikifdlo, n. diceplayer.
oSiko, n. a kind of bark used to rub the skin with,
oSlmslQ, 8. oSlfo.
d by Google
oSlma — otSi. 253
osiidS, n. haltidg because of a short leg; fr. mS oSi, v.
oSrS, n. mishap, misfortune; -ny!e m. k. se, v. to be un-
fortunate; -ba m. k. ng, y. something bad happened to
s, b. etc.
otcnte, n. kind of drum, esp. the european, s. mile, obonu
etc.; yi — , v. to drum,
olenleyilo, n. drummer.
oten*eyT, n. drumming.
otfa §i ogbo! horrible curse: fall down and die! -n. =
pestilence (?), s. oyiahe§i, th. s.
oti, n. aim; target, mark; tfa — , v. inf. otitfa, to shoot
at a target, mark (Ot. = head ; it is said that the fore-
. head of a culprit called Oti, was once made a mark of
and from him the name derives).
otitfa, n. shooting at a target, mark-shooting.
otitfalo, n. target-shooter, mark-shooter.
otQ, n. a kind of food of boiled yams mixed with palm-oil
and eaten with eggs.
otofo, n. a peculiar custom of the 63- and Adanme-tribe,
but kept more strickly by the latter, according to which
no unmarried girl ought to wear cloth, a narrow strip
excepted; as soon as the first signs of puperly appear,
they are to be kept at home in the town, exempt from
hard labour, well fed and profusely covered with orna-
ments. In Krobo they wear a peculiar straw -hat, in
§ai a kind of black turban made of strings. Having
performed many ceremonies, they are then exhibited in
the town by dancing and playing as marriageable; §i — ,
V. inf. otofosi, to perform this custom; comp. atufu, n.;
si atufu or otufu, v.
otofoSi, m. performance of the otofo-custom.
otofoyo, pi. -yei, n. girl under this ceremony.
otro, n. a plant.
otrumu, Hrumu, n. and adj. ungrateful person; ungrateful.
otsSmd (Ol. okyame), n. speaker ;. reporter; interpreter;
he is one of the most important servants of king and
nation ,^ as his business is to report the different opi-
nions and proposals of the different parties in public
palavers. He is accompanied in this by witnesses. Ye — ,
V. to be speaker ; to act as speaker. See Ga-Speeches
among the Specimen of the GS-language.
otsfimSyeli, n. speaker's business.
otSame - odasefo , n. witness accompaning the speaker.
otSi, n. week; nmene dsi — , to day it is a week.
dbyGoogk
2M otgo! — pabolo.
otSo ! lit. burn thou! int. used by people in bushburning.
otsokrikri (lit. „lhou shinest hot"); n. a short but very hot
^season of the year in April or May just before. the first
rainy season sets in and in ^hich the bush which is
cut, is burnt,
otsolo, n. lame person; fr. tso, y. to halt,
owele, n. revenge; to — , v. to revenge,
oweleto, n. revenging,
oweletolo, n. revenger,
owura (Ot.), 'wura, n. master, lord; sir; = nyontso. Comp.
awura, mistress. By young people „owula".
Own, n. (Ot. = „thou diedst", s. Ogbo in Ga) pr. name
of a child bom after one deceased; s. gbobalo, Ogbo etc.
owurayeli = nyontSoyeli, n. ruling („^errf(j^aft").
owyia, n. a small bush-animal,
oy^, n. haste ; adv. sometimes redupl. oy^ya, quickly, hastily ;
comp. mra , fe oya, inf. oyafemo , to be quick ; ye ogai,
V. th. s.
oyai, pi. of the former, th. s.
oyafelo, n. a person in hurry, a quick person,
oyafemo, n. hurry; quickness,
oyaiyeli, n. hurry.
oyaiyelo, oyayelilo, n. a person in a hurry,
oy^ya, oyay^ya, = oy6.
Oyarefa, Oyadefa, Oyadufa, pr. n. of a village of the La-
people»
Oy^ and
Oy6, pr. n. of females.
P.
Words not to be found under p are to be sought
for under kp or f, comp. § 7, or the vowels a, e and
0. Pa, pe, pe, po, po, pu is the pronunciation of
fa, fe, fe, fo, fo, fu, by old people, people of Tesi
and the DSnme-Dialect.
f§L, pronunciation of old people for fa, n. river; lake;
pool of sweet water,
pa = fa, V. to be much.
p9 = fg, y. to take out.
*pa, apa, n. hire; bo apa, to hire; ye — , v. to work for
hire,
'pabo, n. hiring.
pabolQy n. a person wbo hires.
dbyGoogk
'pafonyo -^ pitisawa. 246
'pafonyo, apaf.. pL 'pafoi, n. person hired; hireling.
pam, £\dv. and
pampamparo, adv. much, very much; = tam, po, tutu,
t§d, naakpa, adv.
pampas6, yiten-pampaso, n. crown of the head (S^eitel).
pampt, n. a small stick driven perpendicularly into the
ground; esp. the small low fences before towns to exclude
evil spirits; obstacle, stumbling-block; offence; Ot. th. s.
pampam and
paopao, adv. quickly = mramra.
papa, n. fan.
papabQ, papam, n. towel; Ot.
papo (Ot.) = kpakpo, n. he-goat,
pa^a, V. to lie; to be a hypocrite, comp. opasa, apasa.
pasarao, n. lying = amale, malerao.
patu (Ot. th. s.) , n. owl.
pe, old pronunc. and Adn. = fe, v. to make,
pe, n. corn (on the foot), ^u^nerauge; to — , v. to form
a corn,
pe, pepepe, pepepepe, adv. Ot. th. s. just, exactly; but,
only; perfectly,
pese, adv. th. s.
pei sane mli, v. to investigate,
pei, n. dan. chisel? (Stemmeifen , ®te(i^beutel).
pen, pen, n. engl. pen.
penkakra, penfokakla, penkini, n. pen-knife,
pen, adv. (Ot. n. time, s. §i and toi in G9) once; minale
peA, I have seen him once; never, if construed with
the neg. voice; minakole pen, I, have never seen him
(lit. - not seen him once) ; Ad. gble.
pesu, n. Ot. th. s. a basket or cage in which fowl are kept.
It is generally suspended in the yard,
pete, adv. openly,
peteple, adv. openly = fail,
pe (pii), Ot. th. s. adj. and adv. much, many; comp. ba-
bao, adj.
pia, =:fia, fS, adj. and adv. all; every,
pla, inf. piamo, v. to stop,
pia lele he, v. to stop a canoe by the paddles,
pin, inf. pinmo, th. s.
piti, n. swoon; to piti (comp. tQ) v. to faint; s. biti, th. s.
pitito, n. fainting.
pitipiti, adj. and adv. close; closely,
pitisawa, n. europ. word, pistol.
dbyGoogk
256 plamplamplam — Sa.
plamplamplaro, adv. brightly, In flames; flamingly.
pie, V. inf. plemo, to agonise, lo be in agony; to straggle;
— n. k. he, to straggle for s. th.
plemo, n. agony; straggle,
plene, v. inf. . plen^mo , to die in multitudes; ta le plenc,
the araoy is slain; to die by violence, by accident,
plenemo, n. slaughter; violent death,
ploploplo = flofloflo, adv. very far jway = Soft,
pompi, pompo, europ. word, n. pump,
pue,^ inf. puemo, v. Ot. th. s., to come forth, to appear =
d§e kpo; to rise, of sun, moon and stars. Comp. gble,
AdA. and Ot. hue, to open.
B.
No G5-, Adanme- or Otyi-word initiates with this
consonant and even foreign words undergo a change,
the r being either changed into 1 or d or pronounced
with aspiration as in Greek (^).
Raspe, n. dan. rasp.
raspe, n. raspberry.
raspe dfi, n. raspberry-vinegar.
S.
The letter „s** is seldom retained in Gft before „i",
but generally becomes „§**, with which it frequently
changes, sometimes also with ^^^9 comp. ta, v.^ and
„ sa Y • , eic.
Sa, V. inf. sale and samo; to be fit; to fit; to be worthy,
ripe; to be right, due, equitable, just, inf. sale (Ot.
fata) (comp. d§a); to fit, prepare, order, repair etc., inf.
samo; to taste; to touch (Ot. s. th., comp. ta); to try,
prove, estimate (s. ka); to castrate (Ot. th. s.); aux. verb,
to express the iterat. mood: to repeat, do again;, con-
straed with the definite form of the verb, as the auxil.
V. na; f. i. esa eba, he came again; again he eame;
wherefrom: asafi, asa, conj. again, more-over; asan hCi
elee, more-over he knew it also not; comp. kpa, in
Adn. He sa, v. inf. hesale, v. to be outwarcUy fit; hie
sa, V. to be fit (of face, appearance) to be ripe (used
of persons); inf. hfesale; comp. sa hie, v.; toi sa, v.
inf. toisale , to be of fit ears, i. e. to be hard, to be fit,
obedient, but generally used ironically: to be of hard
ears (s. wa) , disobedient.
dbyGoogk
sa — sakasika. 257
sa m. k. ade, v. to clyster, = fa, v.
sa da , V. to be tastful to the mouth,
sa he, inf. hesamo, y. (Ot. sa M) to touch (the outside);
to order or prepare about; to prepare one's self,
sa hewo, v. th. s.
sa hie, inf. hiesale and hiesamo; v. to be fit in one's face,
to please one; esa mihle, I am pleased with it, it pleases
me; I am content nilh^it; inf. hiesale; to prepare the
face surface of s. th., inf. hiesamQ.
sa na, v. inf. nasa, to taste; misa mina, I tasted (it); but:
misa dS le na, I tasted the wine; and misa mina dg,
th. s. to touch the end etc.; inf. -mo, v. to mend the
end, brim, edge etc.
sS, n. loop; iron work of doors and windows (Sifen^SSanb).
sa, n. mat; bed.
'sa, asa, n. hall or largest or middle room of a house,
sa, n. former time (s. sa, aux. verb); adv. formerly, once;
milee sa or sa le milee, formerly or once 1 did not
know it; s. moniosa, n.
sa dfa, V. ?
sa, n. strong scent, smell; dse — , v. inf. sSds6, to emit
a strong smell ; comp. f u , n. and dse fu ; nma n^ and
dse nma v. '
saba, n. kidney.
Saban, pr. n. of males,
saba, n. antidote,
sabld or
sablan, n. surname, nickname; sign of a person; 9{amend'
j^ug; seal,
sablok, n. dan. night-gown (<5d)Iafr0(f).
sadeboa, n. a kind of small white porcupines; comp. opense,
kotoko. (Ot. th. s. = luck-animal).
sSdse, n. strong smelling; strong scent; comp. sS and d§e
sa, V.
sadsi, pi. of sane, n. which see.
sadsiyeli, n. settling of palavers,
'safo, asafo, n. company,
safro, n. a kind of sea-fish.
'sagba, asSgba, n. a wasp dwelling in the walls of houses,
'sai, osai, n. castrated; person or animal; s. sa. Ot. th. s.
sal or sei, n. country-seat, chair or stool carved of one
piece of wood; comp. gwa, ablogwa, mano, n.
sakas^ka, adv. disorderly; Ot. th. s. Comp. bisibasa. Fe — ,
V. to be in disorder, to do disorderly.
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 17
Digitized by VjOOQIC
258 sakasakafemo — sanefltemo.
sakasakafeniQ, n. disorder; disorderly behaviour.
sakasakafelo, n. disorderly person.
sale, n. fitness, worthiness; worth; fr. sa, v. n.
salo, n. fitter, preparer fr. sa, v.
saman, Ot. = sisa in GS, n. spirit; ghost.
'saman-nukpa, as., n. chimpanse.
sanianseo, n. testament of a deceased person; s. sisamla, n.
samf^ (Ot. th. s. or safe, safi) , n. Ytgy,
samfle, pi. samfedsi, n. (Fanli-word= house-hole); window.
samfle-aHfe, n. window-glass.
samflese, n. shutter; place behind the window.
8§ml9, n. soap; country-soap.
samo, n. fitting; preparation; order.
safi, adv. well, nicely; beautifully; perh. fr. sa, v.
san (or sanno), n. monument over a grave; grave-stone;
grave walled in.
san, n. thatched stone-house; comp. tsu, mo; samfle, n. etc.
sane, old. pronunc. sande (comp. sa, v. in Otyi and Ga,
and se, v. and asem, n. in Ot.) pi. s§dsi; (Ad. th. s. pi.
sanehl), n. thing; matter; palaver; word; cause; con-
cern (©acifec); misane dsi no, that is my palawer, con-
cern; edsee misane, It is not my palaver, I have nothing
to do with it; sane eba, there is palaver; sane be, there
is no palaver; sane le ben, the matter is false; sane
le fite, the cause is lost; sane fon, bad thing; palaver;
sane le egbo, the palaver died, is concluded; sane gbo-
nyo, a rotten palaver; sane kpakpa, sane akpa, good word,
gospel, ©Daugeltum; sane sroto, strange matter; sane le
eladse, the cause is lost; etc. etc. hi sane (mli), to ask
some thing to investigate, = pei sane mli, tao sane mli ;
bo sane toi, v. tc listen to a cause, palaver; gbe s&ne
na, V. to finish a palaver; le sane, v. to know a pala-
ver; na -na, v. to understand a* matter; na -sisi, v.
th. s. ; totd sane, v. to confuse a matter; ye sane, v.
inf. saneyeli (Ot. di asem), to settle a palaver, to judge;
to order a cause; sane ye, there is palaver; - - m. k.
ke m. k. ten , there is s. th. betwixt two persons ; sane
le yen, the matter is true etc. etc.
saneakpa, sanekpakpa, n. good word; gospel.
sanebimo, investigation; fr. bi sane-, v.
sanemlibimo, sanemlipeimo , th. s.
sanedsQ, -d§ole, n. settling or rest of a palaver.
sanedSomo, n. settling, adjusting of a palaver.
sanefitemo, n. loss of a cause.
dbyGoogk
sanegbfi — satgo. 259
sanegbd, n. conversation; taletelling fr. gba sane, v. to tell
a tale.
sanegbele, n. conclusion of a cause, s. sanenagbe, th. s.,
and saned§omo, n.; sanedSo, -le, n.
sanenoheremo , n. taking up of a palaver.
sanekpakpa, -akpa, n. gospel.
sanekpakpadsadsemo ke tsomo, n. preaching of the gospel.
sanekodsomo, n. adjusting or judging of a palaver; s. ko-
dso, V.
saneladsemo, n. loss of a cause.
sanemlipeimo, -mlitaomo, n. investigation.
sanenagbe, n. end of a palaver; fr. gbe sane na, v.
sanenumo, n. hearing of a cause.
sanesroto, n. strange matter.
sanesisi, n. cause of a palaver.
sane§isind, n. insight into a palaver; fr. na sane SiSi, v.
sane§isitsdmQ, n. explanation of a palaver.
sanetotdmQ, n. confusion of palaver.
sanetdtolo » n. person who confuses a palaver (by speak*
ing etc.).
saneyeli (Ot. asemdi), n. palaver-settling; judging; judge-
ment; council; etc.
saneyelo, -yelilo, n. paltfver-settler; judge; counsellor etc.
a person liking palavers.
sanku , n. (Ot. and Ayigbe th. s.) musical stringed instru-
ment; organ; forte-piano; Ifa — , v. to play it.
sankutfa, n. organ-playing etc.
sankutfalo, n. organplayer etc.
sanobo, n. bed-cover.
s&nyd, n. tin, zink; pewter.
sanyano, n. pewter-vessel.
sap, saomo, inf. saomo, v. to cleanse about trees.
sarawa, srawa, n. lightening; rocket; tfe — , v. to fire rockets.
sarawatfa, n. firing of rockets.
sasabonsam, Ot. th. s. , n. lit. devil of the earth, a bad spi-
rit supposed to live in the forest and to be in con-
nection with sorcerers (s. aye); comp. also abonsam.
Comp. in German: ©rtgeip, SBalbtcufd, SicUlh ac.
sase, n. and adj. largeness; age; large, old; too old (comp.
sa, v.).
Sasabi, pr. n. of a village belonging to Tema.
sasamo, n. bed-making.
satgo, -tsei, n. bed-stead; s. sa, n. and tso, n.
17 ♦
Digitized,by VjOOQ IC
260 satSono — se.
satsono, n. cover of a bed-stead; Setttimmel; s. kotomo, n.
satsu, n. bedroom; see set§u, n. which is more used.
saus, n. dan. sauce.
s6, V. inf. s§, to be scarce; to be impoverished; he sS,
inf. hesS, to be scarce.
sei, V. inf. seimo to use despitefully ; comp. niiseniianii;
eseimi, he used me despitefully. Comp. Ot. sei , v.
se, sgn, n. throat; fo — , v. to cut the throat; wo sg kp§,
V. to hang; s. sgn, v.
se, n. back (s. kotose), hinderpart, hindpart; what follows
after; consequence; end; last etc.; adv. behind, after;
used as postposition : (the contrary of hie, hamo, which
compare; see also he, hewo, mli, na, no, si, tsui, yi etc.
and §29,44 — 47); as the preposition: after, behind,
(na$, Winter); as gram, subj.: se fo, inf. sefo, v. to be
cut off behind, to cease, = fo; but esp. as gram, obj.,
as: ba se, v. inf. seba, to come after, behind, late; be
se, s. ye se; damo se, v. to stand behind; di se, inf.
sedi (comp. the Otyi) to long after, to desire, to lust;
to care for, fe se, aux. v. lit. to do after, be after; but
generally used '■= afterwards , f. i. fe se le eba , after-
wards he came (s. kpe se); h3 se, v. lit. to give hack,
used as aux. v. „ke-ha se" == „back" backward, if the
preceding verb is not already* Indicating a direction, f. i.
tsi ke-ha se, to cast down backwards, to cast behind;
ka se, V. to be fixed behind; kS se, v. inf. sek§mo, to
lie behind; to remain behind, to be behind (compare
kpe se, ye se, th. s.); kpa m. k. se, v. to withdraw
from s. b., to deny s. b. (comp. kwa m. k.) ; kpe se, inf.
sekpg to remain behind, to come too late ; kii se, v. inf.
sekQ, sekumo or sekuomg (s. kd, v.), to turn the back;
to return; to be converted (s. t§6 he); — m. k. se, to
turn s. b. back, to send s. b. back; la se, v. to fasten
the back, to hook behind; la samfle se, fasten the back,
to hook behind; la samtle se, fasten the back of the
window, i. e. the shutter; ma se, v. to stand behind;
to set behind; na^ se, v. to gain the end, i. e. to profit,
inf. senamo; na se, v. to shut behind; si se, v. to knock
behind to leave behind; ta se, pi. tra se, v. inf. setamo,
selramo, to touch behind; to sit behind, used of the
relatives of kings etc. who sit behind him (in judgement
etc.) to strengthen him or give importance to him, comp.
setrafoi, pi. n.; s. also asetrafq, n.; te se, s. ya se; to
se, V. to put behind; tSe se, tse yi se, v. to callback;
d by Google
sieba — sekefa. i6i
tSt se, tsi yi se, v. to push behind, after (f. i. at a
carriage); ts6 se, y. to turn behind, back; tsd m. k.
segbe, to show the way after s. b., i. e. to betray him;
Isu se, V. to send behind; - - back; --after, t§u-d§e
m. k. se , V. to send after ; ya se , aor. perf. and fiit.
tense te se, to go back, behind, after; ye se, neg. be
se, V. to be behind; ye se, v. inf. seyeli, to deceive
(8. §i§i, V. th. s); yo se, v. to perceive the back, end etc.
i. e. to understand, to acknowledge; etc.
sebd, n. coming behind, back, after,
sebe, n. afterlime. *
sebe, n. a kind of fruit (love apples?) used for soup; bio
fdsebe, europ. „sebe", bon d'amour.
sebii, pi. of seo; pi. n. younger brethren or sisters; mise-
bii ete dsile, he is the third (brother) after me; the
ears of maize at the stalk,
seda, n. dan. silk,
sedaduku, n. silk-handkerchief,
sedakpd, n. silk-thread.
sedamQ, n. standing back, behind; assisting, assistance, fr.
damg se, v.
sedi, n. longing after; care, desire, lust; fr. di se, v. to
long, lust, desire,
sedilo, n. desirous person; caring person,
sefo, n. ceasing = fdmo, fr. se fo, v.
sgfo, n. throat-cutting, fr. fo sg, v.
sefomo, n. after-birth,
sefomgnii, n. th. s.
sggi, adj. and adv. sleepy, drowsy; drowsily,
segisao, n. dan. fret-saw.
segbe, n. after-way; way after s. b., t§6 segbe, v. to be*
tray,
segbetsolo, n. betrayer,
segbetsomo, n. betraying.
segblamo, n. drawing back, fr. gbla se, v. to draw back,
sei, n. native-stool made of one piece of wood; throne,
seiterelo, n. stool-bearer,
seka, n. staying behind.
sekSmo, n. lying or staying behind,
seke, n. anchor; f5 — , inf. sekefS, to light the anchor,
depart (s. fa, v.); f^ — , inf. sekef5, to cast the anchor,
to come to anchor (s. dame, v.).
sekefa, n. lighting of the anchor,
sekefo, n. easting of the anchor.
di^yGoogk
282 seke — seUu.
seke, n. madpess; ye — , y. inf. sekeyeli, to be mad; ye
D. k. or m. k. he seke, v. to be mad about s. th. or
s. b., i. e. to be entirely taken with; to be in lore with;
comp. ylA t§0, yi6 kd, v. etc.
sekeyeli, n. madness,
sekeyelilg, sekeyelo, n. mad person,
seki, n. women-shirt,
s^kpfty a wind-pipe, throat; s. sg, n.
sikpd, n. hanging rope.
sekp6, n. latecoming.
sekpelg, n. latecomer. •
sekdlOy n. person returning,
seka, sekuomg, n. returning; return; conversion; fr. ku
se, V.
sele, s. sere, v. to melt; to swim,
sele, n. braces.
semdmg, n. standing or lying behind, iir. ma se, t.
st?mo, pi. semei, n. steward; next in office; comp. also
seo, n.
seimg, n. despiteful use; =s niiseniianiifemg , n.
senalg, n. gainer.
senamg, n. gain, profit, fr. na sg^ y.
s^h, y. (Ot. Ih. 8.) to hang; to strangle (=mlas6, y.);
to ceil a room.
sSn, n. wind-pipe, throat; s. sg, n. and sSkpS, n.
senfle, semfle, = samfle, n.
seMmg, n. shutting behind.
s§nd6, n. (Fanti-word) house-top.
s§re, y. inf. seremg, to melt; to swim,
serelg, n. swimmer,
seremg, swimning; melting.
sSsgo, inf. seseomg, y. to reproye; to silence (Ot.?).
sesgoig, n. reprover,
seseomo, n. reprof.
sgtamg, sgtramg, n. sitting behind; assistance, fr. ta sfi»
pi. tra sg, y.
setrafoi (= Ot. asetrafoi, down-sitters) or
sgtrafoi, n. lit. behind sitters ; relations and brethren of «
king sitting behind him in judgement etc.
sgto, n. putting away, back; retaining, keeping, fr. to se»T.
sgtSgmg, n. calling back.
set^img, n. pushing (after s. th. f. i. a carriage) fr. tSi sq, t.
setSdmg, n. backtuming, returning.
sgtSUi n. back-room, bedroom.
dbyGoogk
sejft — 80. 263
seya, n. going behind, — back.
8ey61i, n. deception; from ye se, v.
sey^lilo, n. deceiver.
Siai, pr. n. of the Sai-mountain , its people and land, as
pronounced by themselves; G. Sai, Ot. Siade.*
Siako , pr. n. of a brook coming from the Akwapim-moun*
tains near Tutu and going into the Laloi-river, near the
Sai-mountain.
sikasika, n. a kind of seafish.
'sisS, s. asisS, n.
sisa, n. spirit of departed men; ghost; comp. susum^;
ira; mumo and Ot. saman; sunsum, sunsuma, kra, n.
The word seems also to be employed for ^skeleton'';
before birth and during life, „kra" or „kla", n. , is used
instead of it.
sisaman, sisaiamSin, n. town of departed spirits (supposed
to be on the islands of or beyond the river Volla.
s\sS, V. inf. sisemQ, to beg.
sise, n. europ. word, subsistence, way-money.
«iselo, n. beggar; mendicant,
sisemo, n. begging,
siyire, n. bride (Ot;yi).
skaniy n. dan. shame,
skao, n. dan. press, chest,
skru, n. dan. screw,
skrusi, n. dan. screw-driver.
s\ — see under sr.
smo, V. s. sumo,
so, pr. n. Thursday (s. soh4).
s5, pi. sOmo, inf. somg, v. to perch; to sit as birds do;
to sit on one's hams; - hie, v. to sit before, - he, - -
about; -mli, --in; - na, --at; -no, --upon; sd Si,
to sit down; - §isi, - - under; -yiten, - - upon, on etc.
sd atfere, pi. somo s6mg-, inf. atferesdmo, v. to box;
8. atfere, n. fist. ,
sd WQd§i ang, v. to hedge out eggs.
s5, inf. sd, v. to work on the anvil.
s5, n. black-smith's work.
SQ, V. inf. sgmo, = sa, to be right, fit.
sg (Ot. to take hold of = md in Ga), v. only used in the
combinations: hie sg m. k., v. to respect s. b., mihle
sglg, I respect him (Ot. ani sg, comp. sa, v. in Ga); d§d
sg, V. to dance hotly; d§o Ig csg, the dance is brisk,
hot 9 frequented.
dbyGoogk
264 s6 — solokaselo.
sO, n. vagina (obscene; comp. gbemi). Son rofien SWenf(^cn
aid ®cl)impfirort flcbraucbt. S. yohe, n.
so, n. guilt; blame; suspicion; to ra. k. s5, or: ke so fo
m. k. no, V. to accuse s. b. innocently. Comp. manso, n.
rivalry.
SQbiisobii (s. sqo, pi. sobii, n.) adv. in little particles or
quantities.
soh6, pr. n. Friday (comp. so, pr. n.).
soa no (Ot. soa so), v. to immitale, s. kase, v.
sodsa, inf. sodsemo, v. to let s. b. sit or perch down (s.
so, somo, v.).
soisoi, adv. violently (?), hie m. k. soisoi, v. to treat s. b.
violently; to illtreat s. b.; s. pi, v., sopa, v. fe niise-
niianii, v. se, v.
soisoihielo, n. illtreating person,
soisoihiemo, n. ill treatment; s. pimo.
sgkoterele, adv. continually; over and over; again and again;
comp. notongto; ahu; etc. tediously, etc.
sole (Ot. sore, v. to arise; 1o pray), v. inf. solemo; to
pray; to preach; to officiate as priest or clergyman; to
baptize, confirm, copulate, keep the burial service over
s. b. etc. comp. kpafai; dsadse-tso; dsa; gba, tso; bap-
tisi; wadse etc.; to care for; sole he, v. inf. hesolemo,
and sole he no, inf. henosolemo, to take care for one's
self; comp. hie hi he no, v. and le henosolemo, v.;
th. s.
solelo, n. praying, preaching etc. person; person attending
divine service; comp. dsalo, n.
sglemg, n. prayer; service of God; religious officiating;
baptism, confirmation, copulation, burial service; religion
in general, s.- dsamo, n.
solemobe, n. prayer-time etc.
solemohe, n. place of prayer etc.
solemogbi, n. day of prayer or divine service,
soleniohekpe, or
solemokpe, n. prayer-meeting,
solemolala, n. hymn; religious song,
solemolamo, n. religious singing,
solemotsu, n. prayer -room; house of prayer; chapel;
church etc.
solemOwe, n, chapel, church (together with the yard etc.
8. tsu, sia, we, n.).
solo, n. black-smith; smith,
solokaselg, n. black-smith's-apprentice.
dbyGoogk
solona — sopamQ. 265
sSlona, n. blacksmith's-trade,
solgnalo, n. master black-smilh.
solgnanii, pi. n. blacksmilh-implements.
solote, n. anvil; s. sonmete.
solo-hamlo, n. blacksmith's-hammer.
somo, n. fitness, fr. so, v.
somo, 0. perching; sil'ing on the hams,
somohe, n. perching-plaee.
somo, V. s. sumo, v. and sumo, v. .
somo, n. a kind of crabs; a worthless fellow,
son, adj. and adv. mere; pure; full of; merely throughout,
entirely; comp. kron, kronkron. Gbomei soft, nothing
but men; full of men; nu son, nothing but water, mere
water,
son, n. a kind of river-fish.
son, n. straw; a kind of straw from the leaves of a palm-
tree (sohtso) used for cords, hats etc.
sone, n. a kind of squirrel, of grey colour,
sohfaf, n. straw-hat.
sOnfailolo, n. straw-hat- maker,
sonme, n. black-smith's bellows, comp. afa, n.
sonmena, n. forge-chimney; (Sffe^
sonmesi, n. black-smith's shop; comp latesi; kpatasi, n. etc.
As in Furope, the smith's shop is a kind of super-
stitious sanctuary, where thieves can be delected; wounds
cured, etc.
sonmete, n. = solote, anvil,
sontso, pi. -tsei, n. a kind of palmtrees, the leaves of which
(„soh") are made into hats, cords etc.
sonu, n. a fruit of a palmtree of the size of a fist and
eatable,
sonutso, pi. -tsei, n. the palm-tree bearing it.
soo, inf. soomo, v. to be tough (of sticks); to catch up
(f. i. a ball); to grasp; to snatch; to seal (s. sgo na);
soo bo, V. to catch up or receive eagerly; f. i misoole
bo, 1 eagerly received him; soo na, v. inf. nasoomg, to
seal up.
soolo, n. catcher etc.
soomo, n. catching, grasping etc.
soo, pi. sobii, n. little particle of any thing,
sobiisobii, adv. in little particles.
sopa, inf. «opamo, v. to disgrace; to reproach hardly etc.
sopalo, n. reproacher.
sopamo, n. disgrace; reproach.
dbyGoqgk
266 soro — sfi.
soro, 8. sro, v. to be different; to esteem; Ot. sono, t.
S0800, V. = seseo, inf. sosoomo, to reprove, reproach;
perh. redupl. of'soo, v.
sra, V. inf. 'sr^mo (Ot. th. s., comp. sa, of which it may
be a corroboration) ; to watch (= bu); to spy; to visit
(= M).
sra,.sram, v. to overflood (of rivers); to be very ftdl;
comp. srake (?).
sram no, v. to be very full (of rivers),
'srafonyoy asraf., pi. 'srafoi, n. soldier,
'sra, nsra, n. camp,
'sra, asra, n. snuff; a kind of fever,
sralo, n. watch-man; spy; visitor,
sramg, n. watching; spying; visiting,
sre = sere, v. inf. sremo, to melt; to swim,
srebo, n. fire-stone, flint (of guns); ehie tamo srebo, his
face is like a flint; s. hie wa, v. The word is very
probable Fanti; comp. also tfrebo, tserebo, n. th. s.
srgmsrgm, adj. and adv. sweet; slimy; sweetly; =bloblo, adj.
sro or soro, impers. v. (Ot. sond) to be different; to be
peculiar, strange; esromi, esrole, different J, different
he, i. e. I and he are different; common verb: to esteem,
to prize misroo ene, I don't esteem this; nsroo, mba-
sroo, adverbially used = much more, much less,
sroto, adj. different; peculiar, strange; s. sro; n. difference.
Gbomei srotoi, different men; gbomo srgto dsile or esrole,
he is a peculiar person,
sroto, n. lock,
sroto-solo, n. lock-smith,
su, inf. sQ; to shrink, to moulder, to get small, thin,
lean; to spoil, to rot (of cloth etc.), to be ragged; to
kindle (Ot. so), su kane! kindle a light 1 to swallow;
nu le esumi, the water had swallowed me up (s. ml, v.);
to hush one with the exclamation: sua!
so, n. shrinking; mouldering, rotting; kindling; swallowing.
, sulo, n. person doing so.
su, n. (Ot. th. s.) shape, form; behaviour, manner (SBefen?);
s. suban; su ke bla, manners and descent (?), su be ban,
manners and likeness,, of a person; comp. dseh, dseA-
ba etc.
sO, V. inf. su, to poison ; to kill by witch-craft or fetish,
su, n. killing by poison etc.
Digitized by VjOO^IC
su — ^ sumuidadetso. 267'
su, n. swish, clay, f. i. such as fit for potters, building etc.,
ground, su akpa, good ground; comp. sikpon; mlu;
nmiamo etc.
sua! int. hush! be quiet! (German: bfi!); s. su, v.
suban, n. (Ot. th. s.) form ==i. su; image; likeness,
subantse, n.? = asrafonyo?
'subo, s. asubo, n.
subo, n. balling of swish to make swish- or mud-walls.
subolo, n. labourer balling swish,
sufo, n. wetting of swish.
sukle and sukle, n. eur. word; sugar.
sukleno, n. sugar-vessel.
suklete^ n. rock-sugar.
sukle-^ibii, n. lit. sugar-fruits, i. e. raisons.
sukpo, n. lump of clay.
sukpotQ, n. mud, wet clay.
sukpQtomo, n. wetting and mixing of swish; =. sQfo, n.
sukukuli, n. clod.
sukusuku, adj. wrinkled; s. susui, th. s.
sulan, adj. and adv. hairy; hairily; tsgi sulan, full of hair;
he ye tsoi — , v. to be very hairy.
sull, adj. and adv. dark, cloudy; -ly, -ly; trube, unfreiml)*'
Itd^; fe — , V. to be dark etc.
suIq, n. a person kindling a fire, light; lighter; husher;
fr. su, V.
sulomlomQ, n. taking up of swish; s. lo, v.
sulo, n. poisoner, fr. su, v. ©iftmifc^cr; 3^"^^^^^-
siimS, n. swish-building; s. fato, n.
sumdig, n. builder of swish.
sumanfo, sumamfo, n. a seafish; Ot., = wonts§, n. fetish-
priest,
sumo (smo), inf. sudmo or sumomo, Adn. suo, v. tp
love; to wish, will, agree; to like (Ot. pe); misumo,
I like it, I agree; sumg m. k. or belter sumo m. k. sane,
V. to love s. b., to like s. b. (Ot. pe obi asem).. Comp.
do he, V. and kple, v. tao, v. etc.
sum^ (smg), inf. suomo. Ot. som: v. to serve; esumg^
mi, he served me; Ad. sum, v.
sumglg, n. lover. | scarcely used; see suolg,
sumgmg, n. love, will, wish; ( and suomg.
sumglg, n. servant; s. suglg.
sumgmg, n. service; s. suomg.
sumul, n. lead; s. tunte, n.
sumuidadetso, pi. -tsei, n. leadbar.
dbyGoogk
268 sune — sflwo.
sune^ n. pillow (fr. sum, 01. v. lo lie on a pillow; sumi,
Ot. n. pillow).
sunehebo, n. pillow-case.
suo, Adn. v., inf. sugin, to love, like.
suolo, n. (seldom used) lover; comp. sumQlQ and hedglo, n.
siiolo, n. (seldom used) servant; comp. iSulo, n.
suomo, n. love; liking; wish, will; comp. suo, sumo and
sumomo.
suomo, n. serving; service.
suomona, n. loves sake; adv. for loves sake, willingly ; frei*
milUg.
suomonanii, pi. n. things according to one's wish or will.
suomoniitsumo, n. laUuur of love.
su5moniilsumo, n. labolir or work of a service.
suomosane, n. matter of love, liking, will, wish.
susu, inf. susumo, v. (Ot. th.s.) to shadow something off
(abfcfcatten), to measure; to think; comp. su, n. and
v.; susu-ke, v. to think and say; misusu mikele, I told
him (as I thought or had it in remembrance); susu he, v.
to think about; susu mli, v. to measure the contents;
susu, na, v. to measure the brim or limit, etc. Comp.
kpa si; bu, bu akonta; dfen, v. etc.
susu, redupl. of su, v. to shrink very much, repeatedly etc.
susui, adj.^ wrinkled = sukususuku; shrunk; old, moulder-
ing (of cloth); comp. feifei.
susulo, n. measurer; thinker.
susumd (Ot. sunsum and sunsumma), n. shade (of a thing,
body, comp. hoh, n.); character or impression of s. th.;
reflection of s. th. (f. i. of the light); soul. Comp. kra,
okra; mumo; sisa; Ot. sunsum, sun$um^, n. th. s.
susumaheremo, n. salvation of soul; fr. here susuma, v.
susumo, n. measuring, measurement; measure; thinking,
thought.
susumobe, n. time for consideration.
susumono, n. measuring-vessel; f. i. susumo-akpaki, measu-
ring callabash; pi. -nii, abstract thing; ®el)anfenbing,
abstractum.
susumotso, pi. -tsei, n. measure-stick.
SQta, pr. n. of a village about 25 miles N. E. from Osu,
at the foot of the Akwapim-mountains. (S, Blgfonyoman,
Dodowa.)
suwale, n. firmness of character.
suwadsemo, n. confirmation of character.
suwO, n. manuring of plants with swish or ground.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
§a — SadenS. 269
Words not to be found under s seek under f or s,
with both which the letter § frequently changes: in
Adanme it is frequently, in Otyi generally s; cpmp. fS
fo and §a, so; si and si, etc.
§a, V. inf. sa, pi sra, sla, sSla, inf. sramo, slamo, sSlamo,
to ferment; to rot, to get sour etc. = kpoto (see
sala, adj.); to stink = dse fu, inf. sa; to shake, to
swing; to winnow, to fan (s. sala, n.); inf. sa; §a mh*,
inf. nolisa, to fan or winnow out.
sk, inf. samo, v. to draw; to pull, -lo, v. to catch fish,
to angle; to snatch; to rub, wash, white- wash; - hie, v.
- - the face, surface; - he, v. the outside, round about;
- mli, V. - the inside, - - out; - no, v. - - the surface etc.
sa nyanyodsiano, v. to cleanse the teeth; s. tfapia, n.
Comp. also sata, soo, s5, gbla, kpla, v.
sa si, V. inf. sisamo, to run upon, to knock upon (a rock
f. i., used of vessels etc.), lo wreck; to go somewhere
and return soon; f. i. eyasa si ebia, he went there and
came back; s. also se, se si, v.
sa, n. fermentation; rotting; stinking; swinging, winnowing,
fanning; shaking; s. samo.
sa, esa, adj. rotten, bad, evil, sinful.
'sa, esa, n. mischief (something rotten), sin; comp.' niisa,
ndsa and efon, n. Adn. yayam.
(sa, n. relationship created by marriage, S^lt^iegcr'^'-uitt)
(5(tn)afterf(^aft, s. sana.)
sa, inf. s§, pi. sia siamo, v. to burn; to roast; to toast;
to be barren (only used of animals, not of men, comp,
kene).
sa, inf. samo, v. (obscene) to belch; to blow wind.
sa, n. burning, roasting; conflagration; barrenness of ani-
mals; s §iamo, th. s. fr. the pi. form sia.
sh, pi. §ra, inf. sramo, V. to belch out.
sabi, n. (®d)n)ie9erfc^)aftS»^inb, s. sa, n.) brother or sister
in law (Sc^roagcr, (Sc^magertn) ; comp. sanu, sayo.
sabii, pi. of sao, n. clusters.
sade (Ot. sade),' n. good luck; success.
§adeboa, sadeboa, n. (Ot. = animal of good luck) a kind
of porcupines.
sadegbomo, pi. -mei, n. lucky person.
Sademo, pi. - mei, n. th. s.
Sadeno, pi. -nii, n. lucky thing.
dbyGoogk
270 gadSo — Se.
SadSp, n. a large curious tree, bearing fruits of the size
of an ostrich's egg, prh. monley-bread-tree; s. SalSo, n.
*safemo, = eSafemo, n. sinful act.
Saks, V. inf. gakamg, to embrace unchastely; to lift with
both arms.
sSkSmo, n. unchaste embrace; comp. lo atQ, v.
s5la, sla, §ra, v. inf. sSlamo SSramo etc. pi. form of sa, v.
to rot; to be rotten.
sSla, §]a, sSra, sra, sran, adj. rotten, stinking; f. i. lo sMa,
stink-fish, a favorite meat.
sala, pi. sadsi, n. chaff, = tiilu; fr. sa, y. to winnow.
§alo, n. winnower; puller; rubber, washer, while- washer,
fr. sa and sa, v.; angler.
salo, n. turner; sialg, th. s., comp. s§, pi sia, v. to bum;
incendiary; SWorbbrcnncr; s. serelo, n.
sSlo, n. (obscene); s. sS, inf. samo, v.
samo, n. drawing, pulling, snatching; rubbing; white-
washing; angling; s. he, v.
s5mo, n. (obscene) belching, blowing wind.
samo, inf. th. s. v. (obscene) to piss; to be slippy, slip-
pery; s. (le nu; and comp. fS; to be wet, slippy, s. §ane.
samo, n. pissing; piss-water; slipperiness. Comp. sOmo, n.
samono, -nii, n. piss-pot; chamber-pot.
samoto, n. urinary bladder; used as a scolding word for
bed-pissing children.
sane, V. inf. sSnemo, to slide out; to slip; to be slippery;
s.' sSmo, V.
§§nemo, n. sliding, shpping.
Santse (Ot. Sankye), pr. n. of two villages, one at the foot
of the Akwapim mountains in the Nuno-Plantations, and
one between Akradi and Akwamu on the western bank
of the river Volla.
sanQ, pi. sahT, sahfmei, n. father in law, son in law; also
used of less close relationship; s. sa, n. sabi and §ayd.
sao, pi. sabii, n. a cluster or grape (of bananas, plan-
tains efc).
sStS, inf. sSt§mo, v. to drag by force along the ground,
to pull; comp. sa, gbla, kpla, v.
sdtdmo, n. dragging along.
sayO, pi. sayei, n. mother in law; daughter in law; s. sanO.
se, V. inf. se. Ad. hie, ye, to arrive; to reach; to
be sufficient (comp. fe, v.; fa, v.); to make arrive, to
order s. th. from afar; comp. also sedse; ml se, v. inf.
mise, lit. the chest or breast-bone suffices, i. e. to be
dbyGoogk
ge he — geraonS. 271
comforted, content, joyful; comp. sedse m. k. ml; to
shave; -yi, v. to shave one's head, as the natives some-
times do; to shave the head after a time of mourning
for a dead person; always connected with fetish-
ceremonies; — 'hiena = dsie hiena, to shave the fore-
head.
§e he, V. to arrive about, at etc.; to shave about.
se mil, V. to arrive in, to reach or be sufficient to fill a
vessel.
se na, V. to suffice, to satisfy (of food).
§e no, V. to reach the surface.
se si, V. to reach down; to reach entirely; to arrive at.
s^-fo, pi. irreg. sere-Qe si, double verb, to cast away.
se si - ta, and
se - tS, double verb; to arrive, to be near, to be at hand;
ese si eta, he is at hand; e§e etS, th. s. Ad. su - ta,
th. s,
se, n. arrival; sufficiency; ordering (SejielluiiCj); shaving;
fr. se, V.
se, V. inf. semo, to be afraid of (fcfieucn), to shy; to fear;
to respect.
se gbeye, v. inf. gbeyes^mo, to be afraid of, in fear of;
to fear; comp. gbeye; misele gbeye, 1 fear him; mise
gbeye, I am afraid; mise mihe gbeye, J am afraid of or
for myself.
sedse, v. inf. sedsemo, to make to, reach, to let suffice;
comp. § 27. 28; only used in the phrase.
sedse m. k. ml, v. inf. misedsemo, lit. to let one's chest
or breast-bone suffice, i. e. to comfort s. b., comp. ml
and ml se, v., and kyekye wyere in Otyi, th. s.
sedselo, n. s. mlsedselo.
sedsemo, n. s. misedsemo.
s^fo, s. se - fo, double verb.
sele, V. = sere, inf. selemo, to kindle; - la, - - a fire.
s^le, V. = s^re, pi. of s^, v.
s^le — fie si, double pi. verb, to cast (things) down.
selo, n. a person arriving, ordering etc.; barber; fr. se, v.
selo, n. a person afraid, fearing, dreading, respecting, fr.
se, V.
sfemo ke sifo (pi. form seremo ke sifiemo, s. s^re); n.
casting down, away, fr. s^ - fo si, double v.
semo,*n. shyness (Scl?eu); fear, dread; respect; s. gbeye-
semo.
SemQno, pi. -nii, n. horiible, aweful thing.
dbyGoogk
272 semosane — §i.
Semosane, n. aweful palaver.
§ena = sTna, n. door; from slana.
§6ra si; =: sira si, §ra §i, v. to take a walk.
Sere, inf. sereino, v. to kindle; - la, to kindle a fire (comp.
§e, V. and su, v.).
S^re - fie si, pi. form of s^ - fo si, double v., to cast down,
' - away (many things); comp. fo, fd si, fie si, v. Inf.
s^remo ke sifiemo.
serelo, n. kindler (of a fire); incendiary.
seremo, n. kindling (of a fire); fr. sere, v.; comp. here-
mo, n.
sferemo ke sifiemo, n. casting down ol* away of many things;
from the pi. form of s^ - fo si, double v.
sete, inf. setemo, to rend by force; s. gba, tsere, v.
setemo, n. rending; rent.
si, v., pi. simo, inf. si and simo (Ot^ si and tia), to
knock; to push, kick; to stamp; to pulverize, to
pound; to push against; to pounce; to touch, aux. v.
to express the relation of direction ^rz: till, untill (bt§
ju), s. ke-yasi, aux. v., ke-basi, aux. v.; to be or act
against (in this case used as auxiliary verb to express
the relation of direction = against); to be worth (lit.
to knock), esp. na si, v. to be worth, to be more worth
than —, f. i. „ona sio mei akpei nyonma", thou art
more worth, than ten thousand (s. Bible Hist. N. 40);
to hoist; si aflana, v. inf. aflanasi, to hoist a flag; etc.
si he, obscene, to commit self-pollution; si mli, v. to
strike into; obla esi einli, he is full of youth (s. obla),
he is full of youthful joy, pleasure, strength or also mis-
chief; Comp. esp. phrases like: Ekwo ke-yasi nwei, it
reaches heaven; ke-basi rimene, until to day* fe esa
si m. L, to sin against (Ot. tia).
si -fie si, double verb, v. to commit the sin ofOnan, Gen.
38, 9. (s. 1 Mos, 38, 9. in the GS-translation). Ad. si, v.
si mli, inf. mlisimo, v. to give over and above.
si no, V. inf. nosimo, to add, to repeat.
si si, V. pi. simQ si, inf. sisimo; to stamp.
si, V. simo, 'to leave; esimi, he left me; site, leave
him.
st fo, V. inf. fosi, to get fat (of animals, s. fi, v.).
si otofo, V. inf. otofosi, t^o perform the otofo- custom, s.
otofo, n. - .
si atufo, V. inf. atufosT, to bind up the atufo, which see.
si, pi. §ii, or
dbyGoogk
Si — Si. 273
SI, pi. Sn, n. time {„mcL\"); to express the repetition of
acts» but not that of numbers (s. toi) ; eba sll enyo, he
came two times, i. e. twice; §11 ete soft oke ne, now
already three times thou saidst this! Comp. Si ng, v.
to add, to repeat; promise; wo — , v. inf. siwO, to
promise; si ni ewo, the promise he gave; ewo Si, ake
^ba, he promised that he would come.
si, n. = sisi, Sikpon; ground; land; place; region;
earth (comp. Ot. ase and asase); lower part; bottom
etc. etc. but the word is seldom used as a pure noun,
Dor has it a plural, but serves as an adverb and a post-
position of locality (like he, hewo, h!e, mli, na, ng, se
etc.) to express the same relation as: down, sometimes
on, up, upon, if by these the ground is meant (comp.
noy the contrary of it); to the ground; and the prefixes :
de -, sub - etc. in Lat. and Engl.; Germ. nicl)er, fitxab,
ab ; auf etc. Sometimes the original signification is scar-
cely any more to be seen as it is also the case with
the corresponding prepositions in other languages. As
grammat. object it is esp. used in the following cases:
ba Si, V. inf. Siba, to come down, low, to fall, decrease
etc. ba m. k. Si, v. to bring s. b. down, to humble s. b.
(s. ba he Si, v. to humble one'sself, inf. heSiba); hi Si,
V. inf. SibimQ, to ask the ground, reason, to ask after;
bi m. k. si, V. s. b.; to ask after s. b. (for mar-
riage f. i.); ble Si, v. to lie on the ground (as snakes);
bg Si, inf. Sibo, to loiter about, s. kpa Si; bu Si, pi.
bumg Si, inf. Sibumg, to couch; to lie on the ground;
f. i. ke hie - -, V. - - with the face ; to lie forward
with the chest; da Si (Ol. da ase, lit. to lie down in
thanking one), v. to thank, edami Si, he thanked me;
dale Si, thank him! inf. Sida; damo Si, v. inf. SidamQ,
to stand (down, upon, on the ground), dSe Si, v. inf.
SidSe, to come out, forth; = dSe kpo; to be mischiev-
ous, forward; but see tSe Si, v. — dSie Si, v. inf. Si-
dSiemo, to bring forth; to reveal; = d§ie kpo; dsu Si, v.
inf. SidSig, to do s. th. by stealth; edSu si ke-mba, he
stiials or creeps in, he comes in by stealth; f^ Si, v.
inf. Sifd, SifSmQ, to take out; = dsie Si; fl Si, v. inf.
Sifimo, to stand fast; fo Si, v. inf. Sifo (s. fo, to cut),
to go round about, lit. to ciit the ground, place; esp.
used of public processions; fo Si, v. Sifd, to cast down,
pi. fie Si; s. Se-f6, Se-f6 Si; tn Si, v. inf. Sifu, to
scent, to trace by scent; to lie hid in the ground; s.
ZimmermaDn, Akra-Yocab. 18
d by Google
Hi M — m.
fQ, v.; U Si, V. Siftmo^ to scatter or be scattered on
the ground; fie si, v. inf. Sifiemo, to pour out, to cast
down (many things, s. fd si); gbe si, inf. gigbemo, v.
to fall to the ground, down, to fall (comp. nyO §i, v.)
he si, V. inf, sihemo, to settle; he §i, v. inf. Sihe, pi.
here §i; inf. siheremo, to strike or be stricken down;
here si, inf. siheremo, v. to start up suddenly (anfi»
fabrcn, jufammenfal)ten); hi si, v. inf. Sihlle, to re-
main, to dwell; 6hl §i, let it! hg si, v. inf. §iho, to stick
under; to put under; s. ho,; v.; ka si, v. to be fixed
down; ka si, pi. kSrao §i, y. to lie down; kSmo gi, v.
sikSmo, to bite the ground, to fall in battle G^itf « ®ta^
beifeen"/ expression of war); kpa si, v. to wander about;
kpasa si, v. to lean down; ku §i, pi. kQmo si, inf. si-
kumo, V. to break down; lu si, v. silumo, to strike
down, to fall down; mS si, v. to stand; to set down
(of things; s. damo si); mo §i, v. to take hold under;
na si, V. and nana si, v. to tread (the ground); nme
si, V. to lay down; nyd §i, v. to fall or sink down; s6
si, V. to sit on the ground (as birds), pi. s3mo §i; §a
si, V. to run upon; to run aground (yessels); §e Si, v.
to reach down, to arrive at; s. se si - ta, double v. th. s.;
si si, pi. Simo §', v. to knock down ; to stamp ; So Si, v.
to hang loosely in the ground; §d si, v. to rend down;
ta §i, pi. tra si, inf. sitamo, Sitramo, to sit down; te si,
inf. site, v. to arise, get up; te si, v. to stumble; ti
si, V. to stumble upon; to Si, v. to set or put down;
to tSui si; to lay the heart down, to have patience; s,
nme yi si; tfa si, v. to strike down; to fall down; tfia
si, V. sitfiamo, to be an outcast; to be cast down, away,
given up; tSa si, v. to dig the ground; tse si, v. to be
unruly; tu si, v. to jump down (wo si, v. to promise,
s. si, sT, n.); wamo si, v. to creep, on the ground; yi
si, V. to descend ; to let decend ; to light, alight. Comp.
„si" in Adn.
sia, n. sand (Ot. nwyia).
siakuli, n. sand-grain.
siate, n. sand-stone.
siano, n. sea-shore.
sia, v. inf. slamo, sometimes Sle, SleniQ, to stretch out (the
hand etc.). Comp. ^e, v.
sis, a kind of pi. form of sS, v. to bum.
SIS, n. (Ot. fi, and fie) house, home; mlya S!a, I go home;
eye Sia, he is at home; town in its contrast to the
dbyGoogk
glabfi — Slayo. 275
plantation-village (s. man) ; fiatlierlancl in contrast to foreign
country; comp. we and tsu, n. adr. home, at home,
siabfi, n. comming borne.
s!ab6, Slablomo, n. quarrel in a bouse.
§!abii, pi. n. (pi. of §ianyo) people at home; country-men.
§!abtl, n. protection of a bouse.
§lad§ole, n. house-peace.
§!ad§omQ, n. house-blessing.
§!agbe, n. house-dog.
§!agbena, n. right of the house; «&au6re(tit.
slakolo, n. cattle; ^audt^ter.
§iakp$, n. house-meeting.
Slaman, pL -mSdgi, n. home-town; native-town.
§!amo; stretching out (the hand f. i.); burning, conflagra-
tion, fr. §Ia, V.
Siana, n. house-mouth, i. e. door, not used: s. §gna and
81iia, n.
Slamo = §!anyo ; pi. §!amei , n. country-man ; person at or
from one's home; people at home.
StaniitSumo, n. house-work; work at home; house-hold,
gland, pi. sfanii, n. any thing of home, home-made thing;
home-custom,
glanoyeli; n. house-governement ; house-keeping,
glanye, pi. -nyemei, n. housemother; housewife; hostess;
mistress of the house; comp. biianye, n.
SlanyedSen, n. character, life of housemother; etc.
Slanyo, pi. Siamei, §!abii; person, people at home; pi. -hi,
man, men at home,
slasamo, n. preparation of a house.
Slasane, n. house- or home-palaver.
§la§^, n. arrival at home,
slasikpofk, n. house-land.
Slata, n. home-war; hdhie-army; comp. amSnkS, n.
slatse, pi. -tsemei, housefather, housemaster; host; pi. =
slabii, people at home; comp. biiatse, n.
Slatsu,. n. house at home, in town (s. kosetsu).
SlatgulQ, n. house-servanU
sfawebii, pi. n. domestics at home, in town; homeslaves,
house slaves (not in the plantation or field).
Siawiemo, n. mother's tongue; language of home; home
• palaver.
Slays, n. going home; home-journey,
stayo, pi. -yei, n. women at home; town-women; comp.
Sianyo, pi -h!; house-woman, ^^au^meib; housewife.
18*
dbyGoogk
276 SfayoniitSumo — Sihe.
StayoDiitSumo, n. housewifery. ,
Siayoniifemonii , pi. n. doings of a housewife.
Slayosane, n. housewife-palaver.
§ibd, n. coming down; decreasing, decrease; fall; hunii-
liation.
§ibalQ, n. a person come low.
Sibilo, n. a person asking afer s. b.
SibfmQ, n. asking after s. b. or s. th. 9?a^frac|e.
siblemQ, n. lying on the ground (as snakes do),
sibo, n. loitering about,
sibolo, n. loiterer, louncher.
sibumo, n. couching; lying on the ground, on the face.
sifia, n. (Ot. aseda) thank.
sidalQ, n. thank er.
§idamo, n. standing, station.
SidamQbe, n. standing-place, sta'ion; footing.
§id§^, n. comming out, ^ appearance = kpodSS; mischiev-
ousness, frowardness; mischief.
Sid§elp, n. mischievous froward or forward person.
gidSlelo, n. revealer = kpodgielo, n.
SidsiemQ, n. bringing out, forth; revelation = kpodsiemo, n. ;
betraying.
sid§u, n. stealth.
gidSulQ, n. person acting by stealth.
sif^mQ, n. taking out.
Siflmo, n. standing fast; firmness.
Sifimohe, n. firm footing,
sifo, n. perambulation; procession.
SifolQ, n. perambulaler; member of a procession,
sifd, giffl, n. s. sifulo, n.
§ifd, n. casting down.
§ifu, n. scent; tracing,
sifulo, §ifddsi, n. lit. scenter, limer; epith. of the dog
(s. gbe).
SifSlQ, n. scatterer.
sifdmg, n. scattering about.
Siflemo, n. outpouring.
Sigbemg, n. falHng, fail.
Sigbemohe, n. place of a fall; falling place.
Sihelo, n. settler.
Sihemo, n. settling; settlement.
Sihemohe, n. settlement; place of.
sihemgheto, n. beginning of a settlement.
§ihie, Siheremg, n. downstriking.
dbyGoogk
Siheremo — Sikdino. 277
Sifaeremo, ii. upstarting.
siherelQ, n. person starting up.
Sihile, n. remaining, dwelling.
sihllehe, n. dwelling-place.
siiabQ, as aften as.
sika, T. inf. sikamo, to load a gun; s. Si, y. and ka, v.
gika, n. (Ot. sika) gold; money; silver-money (s. trema and
dfelei); ye — , v. to use money; wo — , v. to owe
money,
sika-amagg, n, golden image,
sikafele, n. dan. whip,
sikahelo, n. and
gikafelQ, sikanmelo, n. gold-taker; gold-weigher,
sikafitemo, n. money-spending,
sikanme, n. gold-weighing,
sikalo, n. loader of a gun.
sikamQ, n. loading of a gun.
§ik9mQ, n. lying down,
sikamghe, n. lying-place, couch; ia^tx, Sagerpla^.
K;: I "• «»»-^"'-
sikand, pL -nii, n. any thing made of gold.
Sikasane, n. money-matter.
sikasuomo, n. love of money.
SikatsakelQ, n. money-changer; banker.
SikatsakemQ, n. money-changing; banking.
Sikatsakemohe, n. bank; (exchange).
sikatsalo, n. gold-digger.
sikatsa, n. gold-digging.
Sikatse, pi. -tsemei, n. possessor of gold; rich man; s.
> niiatse, n.
sikawO, n. owing of money; wearing of gold, golden orna-
ments.
Sikayeli, n. use of money; money-spending; s. sikafitemQ.
sikayelilo, -yelo, n- spender of money.
siki , inf. sikimo , v. to suffocate ; to give s. b. medicine
into his nose (a common use here).
Siki dSo, y. inf. dsoSikimo, to dance; s. tSS dSo, y.
sikimo, n. suffocation; putting medicine into s. b. nose.
SikiSan (fr. Ot. sikrisam, lit. sugar-flour), n. european flour;
flour-bread; s. akpand, n.
SikiSanabolp, n. flour-bread.
SikQsiko, n. hickup = hikohiko, fukofuko.
Sikdrng, n. ground-biting; falling in war {„®xa^Uiitn%
dbyGoogk
278 SikpA — sinasralo*
Sikpd, n. lit. ground -cord; snake; 8. Sind and onufu, n.
th. s.
SikplalQ, n. (ground -brushing), broom; s. Mq, belo, Si-
nyielo, n,
Sikpon (lit. low-lump, comp. si and kpo, kpon, Ot. asase^
Adn. suban) n. pi. §ikpdd§i; earth; land; ground; floor;
the earth is considered a person and adored, as heaven
too (s. Nyonmo); ba — , v. = ba §i, ba Sisi, to come
down ; gbe — , to fall to the ground = gbe §i ; hO — ,
Y. to till the ground; s. hu kO; mS — , to stand or set
on the ground; sa — , to prepare the ground; ta --, to
sit on the ground; t§a — , v. to dig the ground; wo — ,
to sleep on the ground ; ye — , to be on or in the earth
or ground.
Sikponbd, n. coming on earth.
§ikponbii, pi. n. inhabitants of the ^arth.
Sikponbo (= dSenbo, n.), n. globe of the earth.
sikpohhie, -no, n. surface of the earth.
Sikponhido, n. tiller of the ground.
Sikpohhumo, n. tilling of the ground.
Mkponnobii, pi. n. inhabitants of the land or earth = Si-
kpoilbii, n.
sJkponnd, n. something earthly; pi.
sikponnii, earthly things.
Sikponniitsumo , n. earthly business.
sikponnyo, pi. -bii, n. earthly person.
sikponnylemo, n. walking on the ground, i. e. on foot.
sikponsamo, n. preparation of the ground.
sikponsane, n. earthly matter.
§rkpont§a, n. digging of the ground.
sikpontse, n. land-possessor.
sikpontSu, n. floor-room.
sikumo, n. breaking down.
silo, n. knocker, etc. fr. §i, v.
silumo, n. falling down; striking down; = Sitfiamo, Sitfa, n.
Simg, y. pi. of §i, to knock; n. knocking; pounding etc.
etc. fr. si, v.
simo or §Imo, n. leaving.
simSmg, n. standing or setting on the ground.
Sinmlitso, pi. -t§ei, n. hinge.
Sift, adv. firmly.
sin, n. a kind of bast; a kind of bread.
glna (= §Iana, §6na) n. door; comp. agbo, n.
Sinasralo, n. door-keeper.
dbyGoogk
SKnaSi — siSicU^o- 279
s!na§i, n. place under the door; - before the door.
Sinamo, sinaQaino, n. standing up (/^^uftreten'O*
sinatso, pi. -t§ei, n. door-post.
slnasi§i, n. sill, threshold.
Sinylelo, n. (ground-walker); broom = Sikplalo, Wo, n.
siny5, n. falling, fall.
Stra, si, v. inf. Si§Iramg, to take a walk (also with the
eyes only).
sisomo, n. perching on the ground.
§i§amQ, n. running aground.
sise, n. arrival.
si§i, redupl. of §i, v. (Ot. sisi) inl siSimo (also §isiu, §i-
siumo) to deceive.
si§i, n. redupUcation of §i, n. Ot. ase; earth, ground;
foundation, s. fanes; under part; depth bottom; dregs;
under story ; (s. nwei, the contrary of it) : reason, mean-
ing, signification; beginning; etc. etc. adv. down; aground;
trough; used as postposition like the prepos. under, be-
neath; c^mp. §i, n. Ba — » v. to come down; ba n. k.
sisi, to come under s. th.; be — , s. ye §isi; hi — , v.
to ask the reason, signification; bo sisi toi, v. to listen
to the reason; bu-si§i, to lie under; d§e sisi, v. inf. §i-
Sidse, V. to begin; d§e §i§i, v. (to come) from beneath;
ka sisi, V. to lie under s. th.; ku — , v. to break down
the ground; to double the seam of cloth; le sisi, inf.
Simile, to know the reason, signification; mh sisi, v. to
lay, the foundation; na sisi, v. to see the reason, mean-
ing; to understand, inf. §isina, = nana; nu — , to hear
or understand the meaning; se §isi, v. to reach to the
ground; ta n. k. Sisi, to sit under s. th., te sisi, s. ya
Msi; tfa m. k. §i§i, v. to be hard against s. b. , so as
not to help him; to sisi, v. inf. §i§itO, to lay the foun-
dation, to found; t§a sisi, v. to dig the ground; tsd
§i§i , V. inf. §i§it§dmo, to show or teach the meaning of
8. th., to interpret, comp. dsie na, v.; to explain, lo
analize; ya siSi (te — ) v. to go down, - - under s. th.;
ye sisi, neg. be — , v. to be down; to be under s. th. ;
yo — , V. to perceive the meaning etc. Comp. sisi in
Adn.
gi§iba, n. coming down.
§i§ibimQ, n. asking of a reason.
Sisibumo, n. lying under s. th.
iii^dSe, iL beginning; origin; foundation; fr. dSe sisi, v.
§i§idselQ, n. beginner; originator; founder.
dbyGoogk
280 Si8igbe — Siyire.
giSigbe, n. way down- ward; descent; decliyily.
SiSile, n. knowledge, understanding, intelligence; = SiSina^B.
SiSilo, n. deceiver, fr. si§i, v.
Sisimd, n. foundation; comp. §isid§e and SiSitO, n.
SiSimalg, n. founder.
Sisimo, n. stamping, fr. §i §i, y.
SiiSimo, n. deception, fr. §i§i, v.
SiSina, n. knowledge, understanding, intelligence.
siSinamo, n. th. s.
§i§ina , n. instruction (received about s. th.).
si^Tralo, n. person taking a walk.
sisiramo, n. taking a walk; ya — , = SYra Si, to take a
walk.
SiSitfa, n. hardness.
Sisito, n. founding,
sisitga, n. digging of the ground.
SiSitsdlo, n. interpreter; informator; explainer; commenter.
si§itsdmo, n. interpretation, information; commentary.
Si§it§6mowolo , pi. -wod§i, n. commentary,
sisiya, n. going down; descent.
§i§iyomo, n. perception.
Si§iu, V. inf. SiSiumo, = SiSi (Ot. sisi, sisiw) to deceive.
Sisiulo, n. deceiver.
Sisiumg, n. deception; frauds
sitamo, Sitramo, n. Sitting down; session.
Sitamohe and
Sitramohe, n. Sitting-place.
Site, n. getting up; arising; resurrection, fr. te Si, v.
Slti, n. leech, bloodsucker.
Sitemg, n. stumbling.
Sitemond, pi. -nii, n. stumbling block.
SitO, n.' setting, settling down, putting down of a load;
fr. to Si, V.
Sitf^, n. stricking or falling down.
Sitfialo, n. an outcast.
Sitfiamo, n. outcasting; abjectedness.
SitSa, n. digging the ground.
SitSe, n. s. sidse, mischief etc.
SiwO, n. promising, promise.
Siwolo, n. promiaer.
Siwulemo, n. tumbling down.
Siyimo, n. descend; alighting.
Siyire (Ot. siyere), n. promised wife, bride, betrothed;
comp. ayemforo, n.
dbyGoogk
8iu — srfike. 281
iin, T. int Siumo, to sink; — no, to deny.
Siolo, n. denier.
Siumo, n. denying; sinking.
sla, y. s. sa and §ala and sra; to rot.
§la, adj. rotten, stinking; == sala, sra.
§ia §i, y. s. §¥ra §i, to take a walk.
§0, adj. and adv. quieUy, lonely; fe — , to be lonely..
§0, y. inf. so, to smooth; to file; to grate; niiSond, gra-
ter; to rub; to plane; to lick; s. to nii ano; lamo, y.
§0, n. smoothing; filing; planing.
So, pr. n. Wednesday.
so na, inf. nasO and naSomo, to smooth the mouth, i.e.
to kiss; to suck at s. th.; f. i. to suck the marrow from
a bone.
§d, y. sdmo, to tear away, to snatch away; to rescue; Sd
ye m. k. den, to snatch s. th. from s. b.
sd, inf. §8, y. to form; to get stiff (f. i. by cramp) ; -kpli-
kpli, y. to haye convulsions.
§d gbe, n. inf. gbe§d> to make pots.
Sfi, n. forming, form; stiffness; potters-trade; s. gbeSS*
Sdhe, n. pottery.
§oi, n. a kind of sea-fish.
sqIq, n. smoother; planer; fr. So, v.
SdlO) n. rescuer; person snatching s. th. away; potter;
s. gbeSdlo, n.
sdmo, n. tearing, snatching away; rescuing; fr. §d» v.
SOmOy n. piss-water == §Smo, n. (obscene, s. nufiemo, n.).
S5ft, adv. far away.
§dsd§d , §dsd§6§d, adj. and adv. pointed, sharp ; na sds8§d,
sharp point; yiten sdsdsd, dharptop; pointedly; sharply.
Soto, n. red pepper; Cayenne pepper; wo — , v. to pep-
per; to season with pepper.
sotoba, n. pepper-leaf; -plant.
^OtotSo, pi. -tsei, n. pepper-plant.
SQtowd , n. seasoning with pepper.
sotoyeli, n. pepper-eating.
Sotoyelo, n. pepper-eater.
gra = sMa, sfira, pi. v. fr. sa, y. to rot.
Sra = §Ma, slira, adj. rotten.
§ra §i = s£ra §i, gira Si, v. inf. sisramo, to take a walk.
Srdke, inf. sr&kemo, v. (fr. §3, gSmo, §dne, comp. §27
and § 12) to glide off, to slip out (by smoothness); to
miscarry; to unstring dissolve (of beads); to come to
shore (of fishermen).
dbyGoogk
282 SrSfcelo — U no.
Srftkelo, n. pereoa or aninal miscairyiDg.
Srftkemo, n. gliding, slipping out, off; miscarrying, abor-
tion; dissolution (of beads); landing (of fishermen).
8re == Sire, pi. v. of §i, y. to cast away.
Sremo = s^remo, n. casting away.
Sroke, y. inf. Srokemo, to be half-ripe; to emit blood (from
nose, mouth etc.); migOgd Sroke, I bled from the nose.
Srokemo, n. state of being haKripe (of fruits); bleeding,
emission of blood (from nose, mouth etc.).
Before „u** the letter „«" becomes generally „f**,
^u** being swallowed up by it, or changed into ni"
or a sound resembling the german nU^.
Sua, y., s. fa, y.
Sue, y., s. fe, y.
Sue, y., s. fe, v. etc.
T.
Ta, y. pL tlira or tra, inf. tft, tamo, tramo, imperat. sing,
tal (Ot. tra, sa and te Adn. h!, which compare ako in
Gft); to touch; to be touched, moyed; to sit; to plaster
(set); to reach; to chew; ke n. k. ta, ta touch with s. th.;
ke m. k. ta, to sit with s. b., i. e. to set, to haye sea-
ted; ke m. k. ta na« to dispute with s. b.; mli ta, t.
inf. mlita, to be inwardly touched, moyed; tSui ta, t.
to be heartily toudhied, moyed.
ta dan, y. to moye the mouth, i. e. to chew.
ta de, ta den, n. to shake hands.
ta he, pL tra he, y. inf. beta, hetamo, hetramo; to toocb,
(outwardly), htxi^un, anrfl^ten; to sit about; ^eittm^
ta hewo, y. th. s.
ta hie, y. to sit before.
ta mli, pi. tra mli, y. inf. mlita, mlitamo, mlitramo, to
touch the inside,, to moye
to sit in s. th.; to set in (2 1
i. e. to mend. Eta tSu 1
the room; - (tli mli, y. to
ta na, pi. tra na, y. inf. nat
the mouth, end, brim etc.
to dispute with s. b. ; to s
ta no, pi. tra no, y. inf. no
the surface; to surpass; to
ng, to sit on horseback, t
dbyGoogk
ta se — iafi«Ue. 283
ta se, pi. tra set v* in'* seUmo setramo, to sit behind;
to sit behind a higher person (king etc.) to assist, him ;
comp. setrafoi, n.
ta §i, pi. tra §1, y. inf. Sitamg, Satramo, to sit down, to
sit» to be seated; ke m. k. ta si, to sit mth s. b., to
set s. b. down ; eta M ye tSu le nodi, he sat (down being)
in the room; con^p. eta tsu le mli, he sat in the room.
ta §i§i, pi. tra siSi, v. §i§ita, Sisitamo, Si^tramo, to touch
or reach the ground; to stir up the bottom; to sit under
6. th.; ametra t§o §i§i, they sat under a tree; ame(ra §i
ye t§o i^§i, they sat down under a tree; ta kpataSi and
ta kpata si£i, to sit under a roof.
ta, n. touch; war, wu — , to war, to make war, int tawu,
warring, fighting in war; army; comp. asafo; Ol. sa, a.
ta or ta, n. touch? only used in the peculiar phraser tSI
ta, Y. to mention, inf. tfttSl; etSI mita, he mentioned
me; s. tSl t9, v.
ta, pL tra (Ot. s2), y. inf. tS; to be done, au# fepn; to
haye an end; generally used in the perf. tense, eta, it
is done; sometimes used as auxiliary yerb to express
the nearness or completeness of an action; mife eta,
1 haye quite done it, i haye almost done it; finished
(comp. the negro -en^h of Sierra Leone: „I done do""
= I haye done doing, I am ready); e§e eia, e§e M
eta, it is quite sufficient, it is quite near, it has
quite arriyed, it is almost at hand; etc. Adn. th. s.
ta lo or
td lo, y. to be thin, meager; inf. lota.
ta, taba, tawa, n. europ. word, tobacco.
tabe, n. time of war.
tabii tabilQi, pi. n. warriors ; members of the army.
tabilo, pi. -tabilQi, n. warrior soldier.
Tab5n, pr. n. (tabOn, litterally: „well"; a word of the
Portuguese black emigrants from the Bra^s, now liying m
Akra or Ga, perh. Portuguese, by which they are now
called) ; the quarter of the Portuguese black emigrants or
theoplaceln wbiche they liye; their language, their re-
ligion, gen. mahomedan; now also applied to other black
emigrants from the Westindies, Sierra Leone elc.
TaboAnyo, pr. n., pi. Tabdnfoi, Tab&AtSemei , such a per*
son; {d. Tabdiah!, such a man.
Tabdnyo, pi. -yei, pr. n. such a woman.
taflatSe! (Ot. tafrakyel) int. excusing exclamation = saiya
yenia ! SRit Slefpect }u ititlt)en ! if an obscene word or
dbyGoogk
iBi taflatfifito — tanjrft.
expression is used; comp. kusel — to taflatSe, v. Uk
offer an apology in such cases,
taflatseto, n. offering of an apology,
tafitemo, n. loss of a battle.
taflob6nto (= plet^) n. europ. word, plate,
tagbamo^ n. arrangement of battle, s. gba ta, y.
tahe, n. battle-field,
tawuhe, n. th. s.
take (contracted from tamo ake, tanke, to be like as) =
ake^ conj. as, just as; like as; take bgni, take beni;
th. s. (cpmp. bo, be, boni, beni) as, according to;' mife
take boni okemi le, I did as thou toldest me.
Taki, pr. n. of males (very probably (Ot. = takyi).
tako, n. pad, polster to carry something on the head; bo-,
to roll a pad.
takobo, n. rolling of a pad (froni a cloth),
taku, n. a weight of gold about 6 pence worth.
takotSa, n. sponge for cleansing the teeth, made of bark
or fibres of a plant; s. kotsa, n. and ta» v. to chew,
talo, n. joint of the body,
talo, n, sitter; toucher; fr. ta, v.
tarn, adv. = pam; much; ever since > since; f. i. tam no
niinako le, 1 have not seen him ever since.-
tSmi, n. a kind of sweet berries similar to ripe coffee.
tamitSo, n. shrub bearing them,
tamo, D- sitting; mending, patching; fr. ta, v.
tamo 9 V. to be similar, to like, to be like; sometimes used
as a formverb with defective forms = like, like as» as;
f. i. tamo boni oke le, as thou saidst; comp. take, conj.
tamomo, t&mo, n. liking; likeness,
tan, inf. -mo, v. to swear, = na; f. i. mitSn mitse, ake
mafe, I swear by my father, that 1 will dot it (s. Ot.
ntam, n.).
tan» adj. and adv. (Ot.) and
tantaii or tantan, Si6y and adv. ugly; deformed; disgusting;
dirty; unpleasant, bad, ill; deformedly; ye tan, to be ugly;
fe m. k. tan, v. to <Usgust; efeomi tan, it 'liisgu^ me.
tanagbg, n. victory fr. gbe ta na, v.
tankpe, n. rope» rigging of vessels,
tantanfemo, n. disgust; disgusting,
tano, pi. -nii, n. something belonging to war or the army.
, tantrS, n. a kind of seafish.
tananyd, and
tanydy n. falling in war.
Digitized by LhOOQIC
tao — tc. 285
tao, neg. aor. taao and taoo, inf. taomo, y. to seek; to
>vant; to yfish; to desire; s. Ot. td, taw, y. and fefe
and pe, y. Adn. hara, y.
tao mil, inf. mlitaomo, y. to inyestigate, to search.
tao, n. dan. slate; Safcf.
tao se, inf. setaomo, y. to seek after; tao segbe> y- th. s.
taolo, n. seeker, wisher.
taomo, n. seekiqg; want; desire; wish.
tara, pi. yerb = tra, fr. ta, y. to sit, to touch.
tasa, n. (europ. word); pe>yter-basin.
tasamo, n. preparation of war.
tasane, n. war palayer; casus belli.
tatale, n. a kind of maize-cakes baked in palm-oil.
tatata, ady. to and fro; aflana le tfa tatata, the flag floats
to and fro.
tatSe, n. lit. army -father; field-marshal; gelb^aulptmann;
comp. asafoiat§enukpa, n.
tstsi, n. mentioning, mention, fr. tSt tS, y.
tatSUo, n. mentioner.
tatSo, pi. -tsei, n. a tree with a bitter bark which is used
as medicine.
tatQ, n. war-gun.
tawa, n. europ. word, tobacco; nu-, to smoke = nu We, y.
tawable, pi. — bedsi, n. tobacco-pipe.
tawanulo, n. smoker := blenulo, n,
tawanumo, n. smoking, -= blenumg, n.
tawiemo, n. war-sfeech; — palayer; rumour of war; and
tahewiemo, n.
tawu, n. warring war; fr. wu ta, y. to war, S. ta, n.
tawulg (gen. tabilo), n. warrior.
ta^a, n. going to war.
tayo, pi. tayei, n. war -woman; woman attached to the
army.
te, defectiye yerb, to go away, to go; in the present and
imperfect tense of the posit, yoice and in all the tenses
of the negat. yoice „ya^ is used instead; of which also
the infinit. form is taken. Comp. the next, word and
bote, kite, y. etc. Combined with „ke*S ^te"* also is
used as aux. y. = ya; ke-te, ke-ete, ke-ate (kate) =
to, unto.
te, inf. temo, y- (to go away) to conceal one's self; to
hide; to conceal; ke-te, to conceal ; Ad. la, y.; te m. k.,
to — s. b., to be concealed to some body.
dbyGoogk
286 tehe — te 8i.
te he, inf. faelemo* v. to conceal one's self; amete amehe,
they concealed themselves.
te hewo, V. th. s.
te hie, inf. htetemo , v. to conceal before s. b. ; to be con-
cealed, to be hidden before; ete mihte, it is hidden be-
fore my eyes; to conceal one's self = te he..
te mli, defect, v. s. te, def. y. to enter.
te mli, y. inf. mlitemo, to hide or be hidden in some place.
te na, def. v. to go at; s. te, def. y.; to get up from or
before s. th. ; s. te si, v.
te no, def. v. to go on or upon; s. te, def. v.
te se, def. y. to go behind; s. te, def. y.
te se, ke-te se, v. inf. setemo; to conceal behind.
te Si, inf. Site, v. to get up; to arise; to stand up.
te siSi, y. def. to go down, under s. th.
te sisi, inf. sisitemo, y. to conceal under s. thing.
te, n. dan. tea.
te, ten, n. middle, midst; ady. betwixt; postposition: amidst
among, amongst, in etc. As man, ny5n, mdn, dan, etc.
this word is generally used with the terminational aug-.
ment „ft** = mli, therefore lit. = middle -inside; but
when used with the article „le" the augm. „n'* joins
this; f. i. ameteA, in their middle, amidst of them; amete
len, in the middle of them. As the other postpositions:
he, hie, mli, na, no, sq, §i, etc. ten can be connected
with many yerbs, as : ba teA (or te leA) to come betwixt,
amidst, into or in the middle; be im, to be not in the
middle; bu aten, to jugde (Ot. th. s.) is yery probably
a pluralform of bu ten; «= consider between two parties;
damo ten, to stand betwixt; dsa ten, to divide betwixt
etc. Compare also the combination inliten, yiten, nyon-
ten etc.
te-ten, interrog. pron. how? te oyo ten, how art thou?
te oke ten, how didst thou say? te fe teh? te afe
ten? how? te afe ten n) akekomi ene da? how is it
that this never has been told me? '
te, v. inf. tg temo, to stumble; to knock against; mite
V minanewao (te), 1 knocked my toe against (a stone);
(comp. Ot. tia); to falter; na te si, inf. naSite, to falter
in speaking; also used of a razor, when cutting the skin.
Sometimes the (dur. form tere is used.
te si, pi. tere si, inf. sit^, sitemo Siteremo, with „na** as
gram. subj. to falter; mtna tere Si, I faltered.
dbyGoogk
t€ — teh). 287
te» n. 8toQe; rock; compact mass, f. i. Iunte> gunstone,
ball; burden; cataract (of the eye); tfa na. k. te, to cast
a stone at s. b.; gba te» to break stones from a quarry,
to quarry; sane kfi te ko no, there is something else
behind the matter, prv.
ti, n. stumbling, faltering; s. temo, teremo* n.
t6 (Ot. tew), V. to get or be clear; of water; of men,
when come to understanding; hie t6, = hie tse, v. to
have a clear face, surface etc. to have a clear under-
standing.
te-awale, n. tea-spoon.
teba, u. tea-leaves.
tgda or tefda (s. tel), n. palm-wine.
tebi, n. new tooth (childrens language). ,
tebu, n. stone-hole, quarry.
tedSi, n. ass; donkey.
tedsibi, n. foal of an ass.
ted§inu, pi. -hi, n. male-ass.
tedfiiyO, pi. -yei, n. female-ass.
tegbalo, n. stone-breaker, quarry-man.
tegbamo, tegblamo, n. stone-breaking, quarrying, fr. gba
te, V.
ti, tgn, and
tei (and teftSo, pi. -tsei), n. palm-tree producing the com-
mon palmoil and palmwine; eomp. akokostSo; ametSro-
bitso, wietSo, sontSo etc. and nmetso, n.
tlheniitSumo, telniitsumo, n. palmtree work.
tekamo, n. stone pavement; fr. ka te, v. to pave.
teke, V. inf. tekemo, to jump, to leap; to be over and
above; to overflow etc.; comp. tO, kO no, v.
teke no, v. inf. notekemo (to jump ovex; to leap over),
to be over, superflous; comp. kd no and tO, v.
tekelo, n. one who jumps over.
tekemo, n. leaping, jumping over; superfluity; s. noteke-
mo, n.
teketre, n. dan. tea-kettle.
tekope, n. tea-cup.
tekpulu, pi. -kpudsi, n. tea-jug.
tae, v., s. tere, v.
tele, pl.*v. of te, s. tere, pi. v.
t^o, n. gum; flesh round the teeth.
telo-asane, n. boil at the gum.
telo, n. concealer.
telo, n. person stumbling (Caterer); s. naSitolo, n.
dbyGoogk
386 Tema — t£rema.
Tema, pr. n. of a sea-town betwixt NuAwa and GbugbrS^
in the AdfiAme-country (prh. from te , n. stone and mi,
n. building, stonebuilding, stonetown; comp. the neigh-
bonr-town nTeSi**. There are good building stones near
both of them).
temo, n. concealing, hiding.
temobe, n. hidden time.
temohe, n. hidden place; hiding place.
temoSihlle, n. hidden life.
temonfi, n. hidden art.
temosane, n. hidden matter; mystery; comp. duAsane, n.
temowiemo, n. hidden, mysterious word.
ten, n. middle; s. te, n.
ten, inter, pron. s. te-teft.
tend, pi. -nii, n. some thing of stone.
teno, n. surface of a stone; adv. on a stone, = firmly.
leo, =■- t6, Ot. tew (= tse), v. to be clear.
teo, inf. teomo; Ot. tew, to plant, transplant (plants al-
ready planted; s. dO, v.); to watch or lay in wait for;
to float; eteo nu le hie, it floats on the water.
teolQ, n. planter, transplanter of trees; 93aumjii(^ter; comp.
- dQlo and hCilQ, n., and kosenyo and okwafonyo, n.
teomo, n. planting, transplanting of trees and plants.
teomoba, n. plant for transplanting.
teomobS, n. time or season for transplanting.
teomobu, n. hole for transplanting.
teomghe, n. place „ „
teomgnfi, n. art of „
teomotSo, pi. -tsei, n. tree for transplanting.
tSre, inf. t^remo, = ttre, tre, v. to carry on the head;
to lift on s. body's head for carrying (,,eincm auftelfcn");
to eleyate itself; to swell, eheko tere, he got a swelling
from a fall; fl^ aufbebcn, aufbdumen; to trouble or
plague one (with words); comp. wo, hie, tfa kon, tSo-
t§oro, V. etc.
tere, pi v. of te, inf. teremo, to stumble frequently; to
falter; s. na te si, v.
t^relo, n. carrier (on the head); hammockman.
terelo> n. stumbler, falterer, s. naSiterelo, n^; fr. tere, pi.
of te, V.
tSrema (tirema, trema), n. cowries; Ot. th. s.; - ke iSka,
cowries and silver -money; - yi, one head of-; - kpa,
one string of-; kane -, v. to count -; fite or ye -, v.
to use or spend - ; etc. Comp. hleo, kpfi, tSakpo, n.
dbyGoogk
tSremafitclo — tctremantreflilo. 389
*
tiremafitelQ, - yelg, n, user or .spender of cowries,
tfoemafitemo, -yeli, n. use or spending of cowries; see
file, V. and ye, v.
tigremakanelQ, n. cowries-counter,
teremakanemo, n. cowries-counting.
tSrema-akonta, n. cowries-account.
tSrema-adeka, n. cowries box.
t^remakotoku, -flolg, n. cowries-bag.
tereiuasane, n. cowries-palaver.
tSrematse, n. possessor of cowries; rich man; s. niiatge,
sikatse, tt.
IgremQ, n. carrying on the head; putting on s. b.'s head
for carrying,
teremo, n. stumbling, faltering; s. te and tere, v.
tSretgre (and tretre), adj. and adv. quick; -ly; wie—- , v.
to speak quickly.
tesa, n. lit. stone-bed; rock,
tesagon, n. stony, rocky hill or mount,
tesahe, n. rocky place.
Tesi, pr. n. („understone, stoneland"); of a seatown 5 miiw
east of Osu.
Tesinyo, pi. -h!, n. man from Tesi.
Tesinyo, pi. -bii, -mei, n. Tesiman, -people.
TeSiyO, pi. -yei, n. Tesiwoman.
Tele, pr.n. of firstborn sons (Comp. Dede of firstborn girls;
Tete, masc. and Koko, fem. of sec. children; Mesa add
Mansa, of the 3., Anah and Tsolso, 4.; Anum and Ma-
num, 5.; Nsia and Sasa, 6.; Ason, m. and f., 7.; Bolfe,
ro. and t, 8.; Akron, m. and f., 9.; Badu, m. and f, 10.;
taken with the exception of Tete, Dede, Tete, Koko
and Tsotso, from the Otyi numerals). In Tesi are also
other names used, perh. from the DSnme.
Tete, pr. n. of second sons,
teteo, V. inf. -mo, to float, to overflow (fr. teo); Me -, v.
to be sad; comp. totOto, adj.
tetete, adj. brackish (of water),
tetete (s. Ot. tete, n.) = bebe, adj. and adv. old; from the
beginning,
tetfa, pi. teilfiamo, n. peting; stoning,
telrj^, adj. and adv. wide, broad; -ly;'eomp. le, v. ga-
dSa, adj. wuya, adj, etc.
tetremantre, n. telremante, n. trumpet; waterplant like a
trumpet; fli -, v. and kpa -, v. to blow the — .
tfitremantreflilo, -kpUo, n. trumpeter,
Zimmerman D, Akra-Vocab. 19
Digitized by VjOOQIC
290 tetreraantreflimQ — tt.
tetremantreffimo, -kpflmo, n. blowing of the trumpet.
tetSo, pi. -t§ei, n. stone-tree, stone- wood; a hard wood
of white colour. ^
tfa, subj. and obj. pL tfia, inf. tfa, tfiamo, y. to be stricken;
to fall; to strike y to hit; to cast; to fire; to knock; to
knock to and fro; to boil; to be cast away. Tfa n5,
pi. tfia nil, Y. to strike with s. th. ; - odSo, v. inf. odSo-
tfa, to kidnap, to catch men for sale ; - oti, inf. otitf^, r.
to shoot at the mark; - si, inf. Sitfa, pi. Silfidmo; to
strike down, to fall down = lu Si; to be abased, cast
away, an outcast* (t)etn>orfen fepn); - sisi, inf. §i§itfa, to
be hard against s. b. = fe m. k. ablo; tfa te, t. inf.
tetfa, to cast a stone; etfami te, he cast a stone at me;
tfia tei, inf. teitfiamo, to pelt with stones; to stone;
tfa tSo, inf. tsotfd, v. to strike with a stick; etfami tso;
tfa tu, inf. tOtf^, v. to fire a gun ; - okplem, - a cannon
etc. ; h!e tfa he no , inf. henohletf^, = hie kpa he no, v.
to forget one's self; comp. also: otfasini6gbo ! (fall down
and die!) a curse and n. = pestilence.
tfe, n. stroke, fall, cast; boiling; pi. tfiamo, n.
tfa! tfia! int. fye! shame! ipfui! etc. S. also: t§a! tSia!
tSakal
tfa, tfam, adj. tough; gS^.
tfalQ, n. striker, knocker etc.
tfakoto, n. a kind of hose or breeches.
tfapia, n. chewing stick to cleanse the teeth with.
tfSm, adv. == kwa, entirely, together; f6 -, all together.
tfere m. k., inf. tferemo (Ot. tfere or tyere, to lean); to
perform a certain ceremony for a person violently or
suddenly killed in leaning or setting him on a chair and
rubbing him over with white clay.
tfere, atfere, n. ladder; s. atf. - tfrebo, n. flint.
tfere and tfetf^r^, adj. small and sharp (used of the human
frame).
tf^tfe, V. inf. -mo, to be joined together by cords etc.
tfgtf^mQ, n. joining, binding together.
tfia (or tgia), inf. tfiamo, v. to walk, manly, proudly.
tfiamo » n. striking, falling (of many things) etc.; s. tfa,
pi. tfia, V.
tfiamo, n. proud, manly walk; s. tSiamo, n.
ti, inf. tile, ti and timo, v. to be thick, strong, palpable,
to cloy; to touch; to scratch; to prick; to eat with the
fingers; to pick; to sting (but s. t§^, v.), to pierce, to
walk or stumble like spiders (in Fables); m. k. Sika ti, n.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
tl hie — 'tilfa. 291
8. b. 's gold is thick, i. e. he is rich; cotnp. kpoto. Re-
dupl. V. titi; comp. also kpiti, v. Ot. th. s.
tl hie, y. to scratch or prick one's face; to cast s. th. into
some body's teeth; inf. hteti.
tl musu, V. to prick one's belly; used as the former; inf.
musutl.
ti DO, inf. notimo, v. to stamble upon s. b. to come upon
s. b. unexpectedly,
ti nsrd, y. to be faithful to the master; to feign faithful-
ness; to dissemble, to play the hypocrite; inf. nsrdtimo,
nsrdnti, n.
ti si, y. to stumble, to sit down as children do when they
try to stand; s. he §i, y.
tf, n. scratching etc.
'ti, oti, n. head (Ot.), point, mark; tfa -, y. to shoot after
the mark; inf.
'titfa, otitf^, n. mark-shooting,
ti, n. lump of any thing, as fat etc.; s. Ot. ti = head;
a kind of medicin of the head of a snake and some
leayes pulyerised.
t!a, y. inf. -mo, to scratch together (money); to gather,
spare, to hoard ; to join, accompany s. b.
tiafi (Fanti word), n. privy; tsono, kona, n. etc.
tlalo, n. gatherer, hoarder of money; sparing person ; com-
panion, joiner,
tlamo, n. scratching together, gathering, sparing; joining,
accompanying,
tiki, y. inf. -mo, to burst, to open; to break through (f. i.
a lagune or river through the sandbar); comp. fe; gbu,
ba, y.
tikilo, n. person bursting or opening s. th.
tikimo, n. bursting, opening, breaking through etc. a. %
.felemo, n.
tile, n. thickness, fr. ti, y.
timo, n. stumbling; thickness; strength fr. ti, y.; comp.
tl, n. and tile* n., also titi, v., titimo, n.
tip6, tipgn, n. contemporary; 9lUcr^geno jfe ; ke m. k. fc-,
to be as old as s. b.; s. ye m. k. onukpa, gbekg etc.
tipgnfemo, n. Sllter^genoffcnftS^aft; contemporariness.
tire, v. s. tSre, v.
tireraa, n. s. t£rema and trema, n.
tirom, n. garden, s. trom.
'titfa, otitis, n. shooting after the mark, fr. tfa oti, y.
19»
Digitized by VjOOQIC
992 Hitfalo — to nane. .
'titfolQ, .ot., D. marks-roan.
titi, n. a small nice bird.
till (reduplication and corroboration of ti), v. inf. titimo*
to scratch; to pick with the fingers; to tickle; he tltl, v.
inf. hetltlmo, v. to be tired of laziness = he hia; mihe*
ntitimi, I am tired, lit) fu^Ie lanjc ffleile. Ot. th. s.;
comp. also kpiti, v. and wo dokodiki, v.
tttllo, n. scratcher, tickler.
titlmo, n. scratching; tickling; comp. wamo, n.
titrl, adj. thick, strong, excellent (fr, ti, v.).
titri, adv. especially.
tl' — see under tr.
to, V. inf. to (Ot. th. s.), to lay; to keep; to lay down,
to cut down, inf. tomo, to cut; to put down a load,
to lodge — m. k. no, to lodge with s. b.; to take
down s. b. load, s. to Si; etc.; ke hie to n. k. ng, to
animadvert; to advert, to think. The word is very ex-
tensively used, but can generally be explained by the
significations mentioned; only one use is difficult, sc.
as an aux. v. to express the relation of foresight, as
sometimes the adv. „before", „already*% „against'' in
Engl, f. i. mike mit6, 1 said it before; mitla sika mito
homo, I gathered money against hunger; misa mihe
mito wo, 1 prepared myself for to morrow etc. Comp.
also the aux. v. na and the adv. momo.
to aS, V. inf. afSto, to put aside, away; auf^cben.
to afld, V. to make a sling or loop; nmO afl3, th. s.
to fa, inf. fato, v. to build a swish-wall; mudwall, claywall.
to he, V. inf. heto, hetomo; to lay or put about; to cut
short; to answer (comp. here no); to compare, ke n. k.
to n. k. he, to compare s. th. with s, th.
to hie, V. inf. hleto, to direct the facje; - - n. k. no, - -
- - upon 8. th.; s. kg hfe to no, v.
to kpa, V. inf. kpato, to commit a detestable thing, to
blame one's self; comp. kpa, n. bo f5, v., bo he
. ahora, v. •
to ma, inf. mStO, v. to put bread (dough) into the oven
(fiiif(f}ie§en).
to mhii, inf. mantd» to found a town; to build a town.
to mli, inf. mlito, v. to put into, to lay into^(cinlegen).
to na, inf/ nato, to lay or put at, aniegen.
to nadSiaft, inf. nadSianto, v. to reeompence, to retribute.
to nane, inf. naneto, v. to walk or march in measured
steps f. i. in carrying a hammock.
dbyGoogk
to no -^ to. i93
io nO, inf. noto, to lay or put upon, on; auf(egeti, btauf>
Ifflen; to repeat; to smooth or iron cloth; to nil ano, v.
th. s.
to m. k. nd, t. to lodge with s. h.
to se, inf. setd, y. to put back, aside; to delay; to put
behind; ^intedeflen, nad^Ieflcn; t)crf(^icben; to provide for.
to Si, inf. sito, to lay or put down, esp. the load; to rest
in the way; to lodge; to give into s. b. charge; comp.
hd m. k. n. k. §itO, to give s. th. into s. b. charge; to
m. k. si, to take s. b. load down (ab^elfen); ablegcn,
nicbcrlegen, bintcrlegen, abflfflen, etc.; to tsui §i, to yi
§i = nme t§ui Si, to have patience; Ot. to bo ase, v.
to §i§i, inf. §isitO, v. to lay or put under s. th.; to lay the
foundation.
to t§ui si, inf. tsuiSito, v. and
to yi si, inf. yisito, v. to have patience.
to , n. small cattle (Hebr. ]N!^) ; sheep or goat; f. i. to
gwanten, sheep; to aboti^, goat; to agbo, ram; to kpa*
kpo, he-goat; le toi, v. to keep or raise small cattle.
'to, nto, n. toll, tax.
'to, nto, n. a kind of grass.
'to, interrog. particle, s. nto and te-ten.
to, n. setting, ordering, putting away; fr. to, v.
to, V. pi. toro, tro, inf. to. trOmo, to be full; to be sa-
tisfied; -lima, -with food; but impersonally used: to
be tired; f. i. mito, I am satisfied; ametro, they are -;
etomi, lam tired, etroame, they are tired; but gbenyie-
n>Q le etomi, the journey has tired me.
to biti, V. = to piti,^v. to faint.
to dd, inf. dsto, v. to be full of strong drink, to be drun-
ken ; ametrotro dS, they were altogether or every-where
drunken.
to mu, to mum, inf. muto» v. k^erflummen ; to grow dumb,
speechless.
to owele, inf. oweleto, v. to revenge; to n. k. or m. k.
he owele, to revenge s. b. or some thing.
to piti, V. inf. pitito, Ot. th. s., to fall into a swoon; to
fainte
to s5, to m. k. s6f inf. sdto, to accuse s. b. innocently =
ke sd fd m. k. no; comp. sd, n.
to, a. fulness; satiety; weariness; ady« fully; yi to = yi
obdy obObdy obdbObd, to be quite full.
dbyGoogk
294 to — toi.
to, n. bottle, esp. calabash -bottle, bat also any simitar
vessel; eomp. atunkpg, abgdiamo, nd, n. To ke mu,
a bottle with oil; to ke da, - - with wine, etc.
td, inf. tdmo (Ot. th. s.), to mistake, to make a mistake,
to transgress; to disturb; to entangle, confuse; to be
perplexed, to be in danger, perplexity; s. tdt5, v.; na
td,* inf. natomo, to be perplexed, confused in speech;
to transgress with the mouth; yiwala td, to be in danger
of life.
td kits, v. to transgress an oath or command; inf. kita-
tdmo.
td mli, V. to disturb or confuse the inside.
td mra, or -mla, v. to transgress the law; inf. mratdmo.
td na, y. to transgress against the mouth, word of s. b.;
to disturb one's words J s. tdtd na, v..
td nO, inf. notdmo, v. to transgress; = td; to sin or do
wrong against; etd mino, he did wrong against me.
toagbd, to agbdj, n. ram; s. to, n.
togbante6, togbanten = togwanteft, sheep; s. to, n.
tobi, n. young snoiall cattle, lamb or kid, s. to, n.
tofe, n. dung of small cattle.
tofd, n. bubble.
togbe, n. slaughter of small cattle.
tdgbi, n. appointed day, s. to, v.
tohe, n. place where the loads are put down; restingplace ;
place where s. th. is kept; treasury; lodging; inn; see
gboiatohe, n.
tohetSe, n. inn-keeper, host; s. gboiatolo, n.
tohet§oi, n. lit. sheep- or goats-hair (sheep have scarcely
any wool in this country); wool; s. kunt6.
tohetsoind, pi. -nii = kuntOnd, some thing woolen.
tohetsu, n. keeping -, treasury-room.
toi, n. ear; ba -, v. inf. toiba, to give or bow the ear;
be toi, to have no ear, i. e. to disobey; bo -, inf. toi-
bo, V. to obey, to listen; bomi toi, listen to me, obey
me; comp. nu, v.; eboole toi, he was disobedient to
him; fd -, inf. toifd and toifamo, to take out the ear
to listen; fe -, to make an ear, to listen; gba toi, to
give a box, pi. gbla toii, v., toigba, -toiigblamo, lit.- to
draw the ear, - m. k. -, to take s. b. by the ear, i. e.
to correct, to punish him; gbe toi, scarcely used, v. to
kill the ear, make listless, disobedient; gbo toi (s. toi
gbo, v.), V. inf. toigbd, toigbomo, toigbele, to be dead
in the ear^ to disobey; to be disobedient; hi toi, inf.
dbyGoogk
toi ba — toigbft. 29ft
toihfimOy to give ear, to hearken; to listen; ma ioU int
toimO, V. to be deaf; sa toi, see toi sa, v.; t§i toi, y.
pi. tlimo toii, t§i ioiii, v. inf. toitsimo, toiAtSimo, to
stop the ear; to fill one's ear ¥^ith prattle; vra toi, inf.
toiwale, = toi wa, v. to be of a hard ear; ivadse toi, v.
to harden the ear, inf. toiwadSemo; wo toin, to put
into the ear, to suggest, to wisper to; to insinuate; yi
toi, to fill the ear (with prattle etc.); bie ODten ))o(I
madden, kp9 yio m. k. toi, th. s. lit. to trumpet into
s. b. ears, used like the former etc. Comp. also Ot.
aso and asom.
toi ba, y. s. ba toi, to listen.
toi d§Q,*toin d§o» inf. toindsole, y. to have or beat rest
with the ear, to hear no disturbance or palaver, to have
peace =s he dSo; Ot. asom dyo, th. s.
toin fe bed, the ear rings.
toiii gbe, v. th. s.
toi gbo, inf. toigbo and toigbele (= gbo toi), v. to have
a dead ear, to be listless, disobedient; to disobey.
toi mli, toimli, toin, n. inside of the ear.
toi mu, s. mu toi, v. to be deaf; inf. toima.
toi sa, V. inf. toisale, toinsale, to be of a fit, ripe ear
(comp. sa, he sa, hie sa etc.), to know, to obey; but
generally used ironically from the contrary, to be dis-
obedient = toi wa, n.
toi wa, inf. toiwale, toiAwale, v. to have a hard ear, to
be disobedient = toi gbo, toi sa.
toiasafoku, toiakutu, n. flock of small cattle.
toiakwelo> toialelo, n. shepherd, raiser or keeper of small
cattle = tokwelo, and
toiatse, pL -tsemei, th. s.
toiatSu, n. sheep- or goat-stable or yard.
toiba, n. obedience; listening; fr, ba toi; = toibO, n*
toibalo, n. (scarcely used) obedient or listening person =
toibolo.
toibo, n. listening, hearkening; obedience.
toibolo, n. obedient person.
toibosane, n. matter of obedience.
toidsole, s. toindsQle.
toidsQ, n. sheep- or goat-stealing.
toifUmo, n. listeni^.
toifemg, n. th. s.
toigba, n. box, stroke on the ear; fr. gba toi, v.
dbyGoogk
396 toigbhmo — toI6
toigblaiao, n. correction, chasticement; pnnishinent; fr. gba
toi, v.; pi. gbla toi, y.
toigbalo, -gblalo, n. chasticer.
toigbe, D. making disobedient fr. gbe toi, v.
toigbele, n. lit. death of the ear, disobedience, = toiwale,
fr. gbo toi, T. and toi gbo, y.
toigbo, n. and toigbomQ, n. th. s.
toigbolo, n« disobedient person,
toihdmo, n. listening, obedience, fr. hd toi, r.
toihemoy n. buying of small cattle,
toihomo, n. selling „ „ „
toiholo, n. seller ^ w »
toima, n. deafness.
toimulO) n. deaf person.
toin, pi. toiiafi, = toi mli, toil amli, n. inside of the ear.
toinnd, pi. toiiafinii, n. ornament of the ear, earring.
toindsQle, n. peace, rest, Ot. asomdj^oe; = hedSgle, n.
toindgglo, n. peaceful person; = hedsolg.
toinfla, n. boil in the ear.
toingbamg, toiiangblamo, n. stroke on the ear, box; fr. gba
toifi, V. toin.
toinsale, toisale, n. fitness, but generally hardness of ear; "
disobedience; fir. toi sa, v.
toinsalo, n. (ironically) disobedient person,
toiiva, toiwale, toiniivale, n. hardness of ear; listlessness;
disobedience,
toiwalo, n. a listless, disobedient person,
toiwo, toinwO, n. wispering, suggestion into the ear; but
see kpSi wo m. k. toifi; y. to admonish; to inculcate,
toiwolo, n. wisperer, suggester.
toinyimo, n. striking on the ear or in the face; fr. yi
toin, V.
toiyimo, n. filling of the ear (with prattle); fr. toiyi, y.
toke, inf. tokemo, y. engl. from to talk; to prattle.
tokelOt n. talker, babbler,
tokemo, n. talk, prattle,
tokot^, n.; pi. tokotai, 'sandals.
tokotakpelo» n. sandal-maker,
tokotakp^, n. sandal-making,
tokpakpo (Ot. papo), n. he-goat; s. to, n.
tokwelo» n* shepherd; s. toi«lelo» toiatSo, n.
tolelo> toialelo, n. raiser of small cattle,
tolo, n. keeper etc. fr. to, v.
Jol6, n. moroing-star; pr. n, of women.
d by Google
tolo — trakte. 297
tolo, n. a person folF of s. th., only used in compouncb.*
tdlo, n. transgresser etc., fr. 16, v.
't6ino, at6mo, n. batata, sweet potato.
tomo, = to, n. cutting; felling of trees.
tdino, n. transgression, fault; mistake; disturbance, perple*
xity; danger; fr. t6, v. ,
tdmofa, n. forgiveness of transgression.
t5mQn5, pi. -nii, n. act of transgression, punishment or
fine for transgression.
toni, n. lady-bird (?).
tdni, n. a kind of dung-beetles, s. koklogbanting, th. ».
tonldn, pi. -tol, n. mosquitoes.
tdram, n. s. trom.
toro, V. pi. form of to, v.
toto, n. husk; bark; trash; sc^le; shell etc.; he*toto, the
natural covering of trees, plants, seed; also of fish etc..
totokplomo, n. taking or breaking ofT of the husk, bark,
scale, etc.; s. kpo, v.
toto, to, adv. quietly.
tgtotOto, s. to, adj. and adv. quite full, very full; fuUy;
quite full; full to overflowing, s. J^eteo, v.
tQtOtQ, adj. and adv. sad; sadly (of face espec); hie fe or
hie ye -, v. to^have a sad face; comp. teteo, v.; full
to overflowing, as the former word.
tdtd, inf. totdmo (redupl. of td, v.), v. to entangle (thread);
to be entangled; to disturb; to be disturbed; to perplex;
to be in perplexity, danger etc. ; na tdtd, v. inf. natdtd-
mo, to have a distuited mouth; to be disturbed or en-
tangled in speaking; ohS mina et5td, thou hast disturbed
my speech; s. also te, pi. tere, na te, v., th. s.
tdtd he, V. inf. hetdtdmg, to disturb about.
„ hie, V. inf. hletdtdmo, to confuse the face,
n mli, V. inf. mlitdtdmo , to confuse the inside^
n na, V. inf. natdtdmo, to confuse the mouth, word.
„ sisi, V. inf. sisitdtdmo, to confuse the meaning.
„ yin, V. inf. yintdtdmo, to confuse the mind,
tdtdlo, n. disturber.
tdtdmo, n. entangling; disturbance; perplexity; danger,
ton, or
tow-fie no. double v. to cover one's self (with cloth),
tra, pL form of ta, v. to touch; to sit; int tramo; 8.
tra, V. in Ot.
trakte, n. dan. funel.
dbyGoogk
208 tnlQi^tXa.
tndoi* trafoi, n. people ntting.
traino» n. sitting of many; toach.
trasianam (Ot.)> also talianam, n. carriage. Comp. tra
ase, T. to sit and naft, n. foot, nam, y. to walk in Ot;i.
tratSo, pi. -tSei, n. a kind of trees wilb beaotifal red wood;
the timber of it.
tre, = t6re or ttre, v. to carry on the head; to put on
s. body's bead,
tre = tere, pi. form of te, v. to stamble.
trema, s. tSrema, Ot. th. s. n. cowries,
tremasugbi^, o. a kind of sweet pap made of msAxe (perb.
an Ayigbe-word).
trill, adv. talkatively; wie -, to speak too much, to mske
many words, Mt. 6, 7.
trillwiemo, n. = tokemo, talk, prattle,
tro, pi V. of to, to be full, satisfied, to tire,
tro, n. satiely, fulness; tiredness (of many),
troi, n. (europ. word) jacket,
trgke, inf. trokemo, y. (= kproke) to loose, to lei s. th.
fall; f. i. a piece of clothing. Comp. yeroke, Sroke,
Srake, frake etc. § 27. 28.
tfokemQ, n. loosing,
trom, = t6rom, Urom, n. Oi. Ui. s. gar^ien, park, if walled
in, comp. abo, n. timoA, n.
tromnii, pi. n. things in or belonging to a garden,
trdmd, adj. and adv. straight; straightly; smooth, -ly.
trgmo, n. satiely (fr. tro, pi. of to, comp. to, n.).
tromniitSumo, tromt§umo, n. gardening, garden-work,
tromniit^lo, tromtsulo, n. gardener,
tromkwelo, n. th. s.
tromsalQ, n. th. s.
trotro, adj. and adv. smooth; smoothly; comp. dem, defi,
adv. th. s. fe -, v. to be smooth,
trotrofemo, n. smoothness,
truka, adv. at once; ))I5^Itt^.
trutu, n. a kind of land-crocodile, s. mampam, n.
trtimu, n. ungratefulness; adj. ungrateful; fe -> v. to be
ungrateful,
trumufelo, n. ungrateful person,
trumufemo, n. ungratefulness.
t§a, inf. tsa, v. to dig (in the ground); to excavate; i
peculiar expr. is latsa t§a, inf. lalSatiMl, to feel heat; to
get into perspiration; latsa tsami, 1 felt hot, i perspired;
comp. latsa, n.
d by Google
tSa he ~ UaloM. 299
tSa he, inf. het^a, y. to dig ahoi^.
t§a §i, inf. sit§a, y. to dig up.
tSa si§i, inf. siSitSa, y. to dig the ground, down, under
s. th.
tSa, n. digging; excayation.
ihh (with eleyation of yoice), inf. tsamo, pi. tSra, inf. tSramo,
a. and n. y. to fit, join (comp. dsa, y.); to close up
holes etc. f . i in a wall, pot; to inent, s. sa; to plaster
(generally in the pi. form); comp. nsi; to hall, to make
balls or lumps (of flour etc.) = bo, y.
\&h he, pi. tsra he, inf. hetSfimo, hetSramo, to fit, join;
to ment; to plaster about.
i^k hewo, V. th. s.
t§a hie, y. hletsamo^ to join, to ment, to heal the foce
or front.
t§^ mli, y. inf. mlitSamo, to join, ment, plaster, heal the
inside, inwardly,
ts^ na, inf. natlamo, y. to join the end or edge (f. i. of
two boards) ; to fit at ; etc. to continue.
t§^ nine, -nidsi, inf. ninetsamo, y. to fold the hands. .
Mk no, inf. notsamo, to join or fit upon or on; to con-
tinue y. a. and n.
Uk se, y. to join behind etc.
\^k si§i, y. to join the bottom, ground; to ment the bottom
of a pot f. i.
tSI, ts§&, adj. and ady. tough; dry; toughly, drily; f. i.
wui ts3, dry bones; s. also tfa, Ifan!, th. s.
t§afut§afu, adj. and ady. soft; softly.
t§aflo, t§afrQ and tSafrobi, n. a small kind of sharks, which
are eaten (s. ogbolele, n.).
tsake, inf. tSakemg, Ot. sakra, y. to change; -tsni, --the
heart
tSakelo, n. changer.
tSakemo, n. change; exchange; alteration,
tsakpo, n. half a string of cowries, or Ys part of a penny;
20 cowries (Ot. tepo); comp. kpd, n.
tsakpo tSakpo, half a string each,
tiakoto, n. a kind of short trowsers; s. tfakoto, a.
tsaka, inter, expressing contempt = tfa, tfi^! tush!
tsakatsaka, adj. and ady. disorderly =;= sakasaka.
tSalo, a. digger (in the ground)', fr. t§a, y.
\hk\Qy n. joiner, fitter, mender; physician, healer; fr. tfift, y.;
comp* tSralo and tgofat^, mensre, n.
tSalQM, n. healing-art; medical art.
dbyGoogk
800 tSaloAinO -- tiSe he.
tSalQj&find, pi. -nil, n. chirurgical instruments.
i^kmQ, n. joining, fitting; join; fitness; healing, medical art.
t25nl, adj. = t§a,> tf§, tfani, tough; adv. toughly,
tSdni, n. trap for fishes in rivers.
tSatSa, n. straw-matress.
tSatsafelo, -filo, n* matress-maker.
t§at§afemo, n. matress-making.
t§at§ahdlQ, n. matress-seller.
tsatsu, pi. tSatsubii, n. a kind of black ants, biting very
painfully; comp. gdgd, gbese, fote etc.
tSe, v.; inf. tsemg seldom t§e), pi. tsSre» inf. tSeremo and
t§remo and tSerem^? to come off, to get loose (comp.
d§e, v.); to loose, take off; to pluck; to rend (v. a.),
generally pi. form, f. i. atade le, etSere, the dress is
rent; to rend open (of clouds), to open, to clear up
(of the firmament, comp. tew in Ot.); to be or get clear,
pure; holy; (comp. tSu, v.); to deduct, to fine in money
(deducted from wages etc.; etSemi yi, he fined me for
a head cowries. The word is most frequently used with
grammatical subjects or objects connected with it, the
former compounds are especially the following: daA t§e,
inf. dantSemo, to feel an agreeable taste after having
eaten s. th. tasteful; midan etSemi; den t§e, inf. dentse-
mo, to have clean hands (also tropically used); d§en tse
. and d§e tSere, inf. dsetSeremo, to become daylight (s. di^.,
d§en); to be clear or become clear (weather), inf. of
the latter dSeAtsemo; he tse (Ot. hd tew), inf. hetSe
and hetSemo, to be dean (about); to be pure, holy;
hie t§e, inf. hietSemo, to have a clean, clear, pure sur-
face or face (comp. also t€, v. and hie tg, v.); to go
off with the face, to long for home, pastime; to be
homesick, inf. hietSere , hietsele» comp. h!e t§d (ani dal^
in Ot.) V. th. s. and hie me (ani kye in Ot.) v. th. contr.;
mli t§e, inf. mlitsemo, to be inwardly ^lean, pure; na
t§e, inf. natSemo, to have a clear, pure mouth, to speak
clearly, correctly; no tse, int notSemQ, to have a clean
surface; §iSi t§e, inf. si§it§emo, to come forth or out
with the root etc. The active verb answering to tSe,
to be clean, is tsu, v. to 61eanse; comp. also t§otSe, tile
and t§g. — The objective cbmbinations of tSe are espe-
cially the following.
tSe he, pi. tSere be, inf. hetSemg, hetSeremo> ▼• to pluck
round about.
dbyGoogk
Ue he kp9 — tS«. 301
tSe he IpS, y. to excuse one's self; lit. to loose the cord
from one's self. •
tse mil, V. to pluck out; to take from, - - off.
tSe na, y. inf. oatSemo, to unseal; to gainsay; to speak
too much; etSe sane le na, he spoiled the palawer by
much speaking.
tse no, y. to pluck from aboye; to deduct; inf. notSemg.
tSe §i, inf. §itse and §it§emo, to be unruly, mischieyous
etc. (Comp. d§e si, th. s., which seems better); to shine
brightly (of the moon).
t§e» pi- tsere, inf. t§e and tSele, y. to stick into, to
hook, to fasten by pins or hooks; to stab, etsemi kakla,
he stabbed me m\h a knife; to lead eachother by the
arms; — tekle, to bind the underdress of males around;
see tekle , n. ; — boi , the s. of female underdress , s.
boi n.; to hang, loiter about, to delay, to be a long
time ago; etse ihu ye dsei, he was a yery long time
there; sometimes used as aux. y. to express the ady.
relation „a long time's f. i. eba etse, he came it is long,
i. e. he came a long time ago ; comp. also dseke, tseKe,
tfelf^, dse, y. etc.
tse he , tse hewo , y. to be long about s. th. , to stick or
fix about. >
t3e mli, y. to continue in s. th., to stick or fix into.
tSe §i, y. inf. silse, to stick down, fix down with a pin;
to put a spade or digging instrument deep into the
ground etc., s. tseke si, y. th. s., also technical expres-
sion: to be fixed (of the roof of a house).
tse 9 »• sticking; nooking; fastening; stabbing; length of
time; fr. tse, y.
tsfe, inf. ts^mQ, y. to call; to giye a name; yatse ot§e
ke-ba, go call thy father to come! te alseo oten? how
art thou called? Atsemi ake Anan, they call me Anan,
i. e. 1 am called Anan; atSeoye! you are called! Comp.
also dse, y. to scpld.
t§fe m. k. t§ui nme emli, y. to call one's heart and lay it
into him, i. e. to comfort him.
tS6, inf. tsSmo, pi. form ts^rg, to shoot (f. i. branches,
arrows, s. gal, n. ; comp. tse, y. and tse, y.); to begin
to burn, kindle; to sting (of bees, needles etc.); to
deeeiye in bargains etc. to stitch, to mend a hole by
filling it up by stiches; to sting (used ironically of wine,
f. i. dd tS^ mina, the wine stinged or tickled my mouth,
to drink too much, comp. ,/anfled^en'' in Germ.); to shoot
dbyGoogk
302 tSe dSo — tSehe.
or fly like an arrow, to rush; to spin, to twist, lo twine;
always in the pi. form: tsSri abui, to thread a needle;
he t§^, y. inf. hets^mo, and hetSS (lit. the body rashes
upon s. b. stings s. b.; germ. ,,auf einen lo^fa^reti") to
hate; mihe tSSle, I hate him, = minyele; hie tsS, inf.
hletsS, to awake (con^p. t§!e hie , y. to awaken); comp.
also ti and titi, y.
ts§ d§o, inf. dSotS^mo, y. to begin a dance; comp. Siki
dso, y. .
tS6 he, y. to stitch about, etc.
t§g ladSd, lad§5t§^mo, y. to spit.
tS6 mi, inf. mit§Smo, v. to play with the „mi" -nut; comp.
tsS nme, y.; and mi, n.
tsS mil, inf. mlits^mo, y. to fill up by stitching.
tsS na, y. anfle^en, to make desire to eat or drink; dS
tsg miqa; comp. t§S, y.
tsS Ame. inf. nmetSSmo, y. to play with the kernel of
the palmnut by giying it a jerk with the fingers; s. ts^
mi, y., a yery common game played by young men under
the shadow-trees of the streets.
tsS, n. chin; beard about it; = ls6n, which see.
tse, tsgn, ady. hardly; used of bellyache; mimusu koomi
tsg, my belly pains or gripes me hardly — ; s, also: dfi,
adv. th. s.
tg^e, pi. tsemei, n. father; elder person, especially rela-
tion; possessor; author; etc. citizen of a town or place,
f. i. Akropontsemei, citizens or peopte of AkropoA ; etc.
comp. §§ 21 , 23 — 25. Besides these the pi. form is
sometimes used = mei, only to indicate a personal
plural; f. i. tabdnn^o, pi. tabdntSemei (mahomedan) emi-
grants from the Brasils, Westindies etc. Ck)mp. also
ata, n.; nye, n., hi n. and agya, th. s. in Ot.; 2^( and
hy2 in Hebrew. Ad. the same.
tse (Hanson tsa,^ comp. also dsa, y.) yerbal conj., still;
though; notwith- standing; ekele f§, tse ewa hdle, he
told him all, though it was hard for him. Ad. th. s.
and „if."
tsebele (t§e be le), yerbal conj. th. s. as the former; still,
though notwithstanding; tod^, bennod^; l^^o^; obgfeid^;
g(eict;n>o^( etc. Hanson: tsabele.
tseb^, n. time of delay; staying time;
tfiehe, n. place of delay; staying place.
dbyGoogk
Mkhi — tSele. 30S
t^bi, n. father-child; child of one father but of another
mother, step-brother or sister, ®tiefgef(^»ifiet, respecting
the mother; comp. nyebi and nyemi, n.
ts^binu, pi. -bihl, n. step-brother of one father and a dif-
ferent mother.
tSebiyO, n. step-sister of one father and a different mother,
tSebfl, n. respect to the father.
t§ede, tseden, n. fathers hand, power.
tSedseft, n. father*s life, character, s. dse, n.
t§ed§Qmo, n. fathers blessing,
tsegbe, n. father-murder.
t§egbelo, ij. fathermurderer.
tsemlihile, n. fathers kindness.
tJehedo, n. fathers love.
tSei, irreg. plur. form of tso, n. tree.
tseiabai, n. leaves oif trees; fiaub.
tseiayibii, pi. n. fruit of trees; Obft; comp. yibii, nibii>
sebii, pi. n.
ts^ke, inf. tsekemo, v. (corroboration of tse, v. to stick);
to slick, to stick to; to stab; comp., verbs ending with
ke, ke, § 27.
tSeke mli, v. to stick into, stab into.
tseke si, inf. sitsekemo, to stick down (f. i. with a spade
or djging instrument into the ground); to stab down;
= tse §i, V.
tsekelo» n. a person sticking, stabbing.
tSekemo, n. sticking, stabbing.
tSekemo, n. fathers saying, word or command.
tSeka, n. family or tribe of the father; comp. dSaku, n,
tSekubii, pi. n. people belonging to it.
tSekunyo, pi. tSekumei, n. person belonging to the family
of the father; comp. d§akunyo, pi. -mei, -bii, n.
tsekwg, pi. -kwemei, n. oncle; comp. nyekwg, n. An
oncle is especially after the death of the father consi-
dered as a father.
tsfikwgbi, n. oncle's child, nephew or niece; ®cf($mifietfinb
Don Of)ditC^ ©eitc; comp. nyemimeiabi, n. the s., if
spoken of by a third person.
tsekwgbinu, pi. -bihl, n. nephew frond oncle's side; comp«
nyekwgbi, -binu, -biyO, n.
tsekwgbiyo, pi. -biyei, n. niece from oncle's side.
tSele, tSere, n. only used in the^ compound hietSele, n.
homesickness, s. tse, v.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
S04 tSele — tS^Aeni^heU. ,
tSele, tSele, tS^k, pi. forms of t£e, tie and t^, v., »ee
under tSere etc.
tSele, n, length, /r. tSe, v.
tSelo, n. plucker etc. from iSe, v.
Iselo, n. sticker, stabber; hooker; delayer etc. from tSe, v.
tSelo, n. caller, from tS^, ?.
tselo, n. shooter, stitcher, stinger; deceiver; spinner; rusher
etc. fr. tsg, V.
tselomo, n. fathers curse.
tSemSin, pi. -mSidsi, n. fathers town, nation, land; 93atet>
. fiabt, Saterlanb.
tSemQ, n. coming off; loosing; plucking; deaging; clean-
ness; purity; holiness; deduction, fining, punishment for
money; etc. from t§e, v.; comp. t§eremo the s. of the
pi. form tsere, v.
tS^mo, n. calling; call; namegiving; fr. tS^, v.
tS^mo, n. shooting (but comp. tQtfa); kindling; Stinging;
stitching ; flying like arrows ; rushing ; spinning, twisting,
twining, etc. fr. tS6, v.
tS^OtSdne, n. 'spinning masbine.
tsSmotSo, pi. -t§ei, n. spindle.
ts6n, t§eft, n. chin; beard about it; dSe — , inf. tSS^dSe,
to get a beard about the chin; comp. dahetSoi, nabu-
hetSoi, n. and kada, n.
tsefta, pi. -nSmei, n. fathers wife.
tSSndSeio, n. person getting or haying a beard about the
chin.
tsSndsemo, having or getting a beard about the chin.
tsen9, pi. -nSmei, n. great-grandmother from fathers side.
ts§h (Ot. kyen) n. shield,
tsene, pi. tSenei, n. common drinking-callabash, also used as
measure.
tsMe (tsenke), inf. tsSnemo, v. to infect; to be infected;
to kindle, to be kindled; anftctfcti, anftetfenb fepn, an*
gefledt tDcrben; la ets^ne, the fire has kindled s. th.;
etsehe ye m. k. mli, he was infected by s. b. : to spread
(of a rumour; f. i. sane tsSne, the matter was known) ;
to stain, to blot, to spot, to pollute; comp. nyane, benke;
also: t§g, here, v. etc.
tS6ile -md m. k., v. to inf. s. b.
tsSnelo, n. infecting person.
tS^nemo, n. infection, infecting; kindling; spreading.
tSSnemohela, n. infecting sickness.
dbyGoogk
tSenesd — tSeSla. 305
t^enesj, n. a larger kind of flatt callabashes; comp. tSene;
akpaki; to; bentu^; fao; adenkuA; etc.
tsend, pi. -nii, n. fathers property.
Ctsere — Ot. kyere, Ga: tsd, v. to show).
ts^re, inf. t^eremg (perh. an old pi. form of t§e, v., s. tSere)
T. to strain; = do no, v.
ts^re DO, inf. notseremo, v. to strain.
tsere, pi. form of tse, but frequently independly used; inf.
tseremo, y. to loose; to get loose; to pluck; to rend,
get ragsed, atade le et§6re, the dress is rent; to get
clear, open etc. Here is esp. to be observed the com-
bination d§e t§ere, inf. dset§eremo (irreg. instead of d§e
tSere) to get davlight. Comp. tSe, v. The redupl. plur.
fonn is tSeretSerei or tsretsrei , v. to get ragged ; comp.
tseretserei and tserei.
tsere (=tsere), inf. tseremo, v. only used, in the phrase:
dSe tsere, to get daylight; s. t§e and tsere, v.
tSere, inf. tseremo, pi. form of tse, v. to hook or be
hooked to gether, etc. s. t§e, v. and tf^tfS, v.
tSere, fowl -feather, etc. dSe — , v. to produce or get
feathers.
tSSrg, inf. ts^rgmo (pi. form of ts5, v. which see) v. to
shoot, to sting, to rush etc. — abui, inf. abuitSS^imo,
to thread a needle. Nyonmo tsSrg, y. God drizzles, to
drizzle; comp. N. tue, fa, fie, ne. Si y.
tsere, n. cola-nut.
tseredsg, n. getting feathers.
tserebo, n. flint (on guns); or: tfrebo, n.
tSerei, tsrei and
tSeretSerei, adj. and adv. ragged; raggedly; from tSe, tSer^, y.
Comp. fefei, adj. th. s.
tSeremo, n. renting etc. fr. tse, tSere, y.
tSeremo, n. straining.
tSeremo, n. hooking together.
tS^rgmo. n. stinging; drissiing etc. fr. tsS, tSere, n.
tSeretserekwan, at§eret§. (Ot. akyerekyerekwan, n. lit. show-
way; forefinger; waymark.
tSesa, n. father's bed
tSesane, n. father's palayer.
tSesegbe, n. father's way; s. gbe, n,
tSese , n. a large carved wooden vessel to bathe little chil-
dren in and the like.
tSeMa, n. fathers house or home.
ZimmermanD, Akra-Vocab. 20
dbyGoogk
306 tSesu — tSI bleAmeli.
i8e»u, -sabaA, n. father's character, likeness etc.
t^esuomo, n. father's love, yfiW etc.
t£e§ikpoDg,.n. fathers land; fatherland.
tSetSdmo, n. father's teaching.
t§et$o, n. father's room, house.
tSewe, n. .father's house, family.
ti^e^iemo, n. father's word.
tSewO, n. honour of the father.
t§T, inf. tslmo, v. to he heavy; et§i tsd, it is too heavy;
roli tSl, V. to be of heavy contents; hlnmeii ISl, v. to
have heavy eyes, to be sleepy.
tSi, inf. t§imo, pi. tsire, imprt. t§i, redupl. t§it§i, pi. t§ire-
t§ire, V. to move; to push; to remove; etc.
tsi he, inf. hetSimo, v. to move one's self; jtcfc bewegen;
mitM mihe, I move, icb betDefle mi(^; to move about; to
live, s. he kft, hie kfi, hi Si, v.
tSie hie, v. to push in the face; to move ahead, on, on-
ward.
t§i hlegbe, n. to move forward, on, onward.
t£i mli, inf. mlitSimo, v. to stir in the ashes; t§i kane m%
make the light up!
t8i na, v. to push one's mouth, to give one a push at
his chin.
tSi nine, v. to move the hand,* to be quick.
t§i no, V. to move on.
t§i se, pi. t§ire se, v. to push behind, after, f. i. a car-
riage; nyetsirea se, push (youj! inf. setSimg.
t§i Si, -§i§i, V. to move down,
tsi yi se, pi. tsire yi se, inf. yisetsimo, yisetSiremo, to
push one back or forward; to accelerate; to urge on etc.
tsi, n. movement, move; push; removal etc. fr. tSi, v.;
s. tsimo, n.
tsi, inf. tSl and inf. pi. tslmo, pi. snbj. and obj. tSlmo,
imperat. sing, tsi, v. to close, to fill up; to stop; to
be stopped up.
tSi da, -dan, v. to stop one's mouth.
tSl gbe, inf. gbetSl, gbetslmg, v. to dose or stop a way;
to close up; to disallow; s. gbe, n. way; and hS gbe;
dSie gbe, v.
tsi he, inf. hetSl hetSImo, T. to close or stop up roaod
about.
tsi hie, inf. hietSl, hietSlmQ, v. to blindfold; to bind up
one's eyes or face.
t§l hlenmeii, v. th. s.
dbyGoogk
t§I mli — t§le hie. 307
tSt fell, inf. mlitst, mlit§Tmo, v.; to close up; lo close
inside; to stop inwardly up.
tM na, inf. nat§I nat§!mo, t. to stop the mouth, egress,
ingress, opening; to hinder = t§l gb^; to disallow; lo
keep back, retain; to imprison; atSl amena or atSimg
amena, they were retained, imprisoned.
IS! no, inf. not§l notSlmo, v. to close up, to cover up; to
shut the surface.
t§l §e, inf. sets! setslmo, v. to close behind; to conceal
one's back ; esp. used when the doing or way of a per-
son shall be concealed by an other; f. i. tsi mise, t§lmo
mise, conceal my absence, keep me or my doing etc.
in secret („t>erfd)rrei9en, t>er^cim(id>eu").
tS! §i§i, inf. sisil§! §i§il§imo , v. to conceal something down.
tsi-tS, inf. taisl, V. (a peculiar combination), to mention,
etsl mitd, he mentioned me; etsi tdekemi,y. he mentioned
it to me.
tSi, n. a native sword of their own manufacture, especially
sword of honour for kings, generals etc. generally of
the form of a bill-hook , richly ornamented with gold etc.
Comp. klante, dukpei, kakla etc. perh. from t§i, to push.
ts!, n. closing up, stopping, hindering; s. tslmo, n. th. s.
fr. t§l, V. pi. tglmo.
tSi^ (Ot. kyi^), inf. tsiamo, v. to be crooked, bent etc.
Comp. kodd, v., do, v.; logo, v. etc.
tSi^lo, n. crooked person.
tSiamo, n. crookedness.
tSIa , inf. tsiamo , v. to walk straightly, affectedly, in mea-
sured steps; s. tOa, v. th. s.
t§lalo, n. person walking affectedly.
tsiamo, n. affected walk, march.
tsiA = tsaka! interj. of mockery: tush! pah! poh!
tSi^, n. a tittle, especially used in Address or before na-
mes = sir, perh. = tse, ata (Ot. agya) father (engl.
Sire); milee, tsi^! I don't know, Sir! TSie Anum, Mr.
Anum.
tSie! interj. eh! oh! comp. ao! hao!
tsie, inf. tslemo, a kind of active form of the neuter verb
tS§ (comp dse and dsie; tse and tsu; gbo and gbe, etc.
and the Hebr. Kal and Hiphil); to awaken, to arouse;
generally
tSle hie, inf. hietsiemo, v. the same; etSlemi and etSle
mihle, he awakened me; comp. hie tS^, v.; mihle tS5,
1 awoke.
20*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
308 tStelo — tSincse.
tSlelQ, 0. awakener, arouser.
tslemo, n. a>vakeiiing, arousing; raising.
t§ikit§ak9, = t§^katsSka, basabasa, bisibasd, adv. disorderly ;
t§ukut§aka, th. s.
t§ikit§iki, adj. and adv. = bitibiti, pitipiti, close; closely.
tSile, V. pi. of tSi, 8. tsire.
tSile, n. a large kind of sea-fish, cought in August and
September in great numbers on the sandbank not far
from the gold-coast; Ot. sire.
tSilo, n. mover, pusher, remover, fr. tsi, v.
tgilo, n. stopper, stayer, retainer, fr. tsl, v.
tSimbO, = tsinmo, adj. and adv. heavy; -ly.
tgimo. n. heaviness; gravity, fr. Isl, v. Comp. esp. ex-
pressions as: d§at§u ke tslmQ, heavy load; noko ke tSimg,
s. th. heavy.
t§imo and tsl, n. movement,
tsl and
tSlmQ, n. stopping, staying; retaining, concealing; hinder-
ancQ etc. fr. tsl, v. pi. t§lmo.
tSImgnd, pi. -nii, n. some thing hindering, hinderance,
obstacle.
tSine, n. innermost part of the nose; taste; guttur (CSaumen) ,
ba — , V. to be tasteful; dse — , v. to be disgusting;
edse mit§ine tsd, it is too much disgusting to me; eba
mitsine, I have a desire after it, it is tastful to me;
t§ine no lota, --futa, v. to have cardialgy, heartburning;
bad aWajjcnbrennen, ^etibrcnnen ^abeii.
tsine, inf. tsinemo, v. to sneeze; to cleanse the nose (see
also fg gugo, v.).
tSineba, n. desire; tastefuIne8S5 fr. ba tSine, v.; comp. di
8^, V. etc.
tSinebano , pi. - nii, n. something desirable, tasteful.
tSined§e, n. abhorrence; disgust; fr. d§e t§ine, v. comp.
nyane, v.
tsinedsend, pi. -nii, n. something disgusting.
tSinemo, n. sneezing.
tSinena, adv. according to taste.
tSinenofutahiQ and
tsinenolotamg , n. heartburning; cardialgy; SDtagenbtenneit,
aKagcuiDcb, 4^ted)rcij; fr. tSine no futa m. k. v., and tSine
no lota m. k. v.
tSinesane, n. matter of taste.
tSinese, n. place beneath the gutter.
dbyGoogk
tSiAmO — t^o. 309
tSiAmo (comp. tsl, v, to be heavy; 6m5, v. to weigh), adj.
and adv. heavy, clumsy; heavily, clumsily (sometimes
= tsimbd); gbekS le hk efe t§inmO, the child (she bears)
makes her heavy or to move clumsily; fe — , v. to be
heavy, clumsy.
tsinmdfemo, n. heaviness, clumsiness.
tsmt§^, n. bunch (f. i. of keys); comp. Saw, sao.
tsfra, V. s. t§a, v. pi. tSra; v.
tsTre, inf. tSiremo, pi. form of tsi, to move, to*^push; it
depends on the pi. numb, of subj. and obj., but is not
very exactly observed; tsire he, t§ire hie, t§ire mli, -na,
ng, ^se etc. pi. forms of tsi he, t§i hie etc. a peculiar
expression is: hie tsire m. k., inf. hiet§iremo, v. to re-
collect one's self; mihie tsiremi, 1 recollected myself, I
reassured myself; but it may be that it comes from t§e,
V. = hIelsSremo, n.
tSire, n. = tsile, a sea-fish; 01. sire.
tsirelOj n. pusher, mover (of many things or persons).
t§iremQ, n. moving, movement; pushing (of many things
or persons).
tSita, double v., s. t§t-ta, doub. v.
tsitso, n. handle of a sword , s. tsi , n.
t§o, V. inf. tso, to bum, to flame, to blaze; to shine
(of fire, light-if burning, the sun; but not of the moon,
stars, gold etc., comp. kpe, v.); when the people burn
their cut bush, they cry: Olso! olso! comp. also: ol§o-
krikri, n. Tso hie, v. to shine into the face; - he,
-hewQ, V. to shine about; -mli, v. to shine in, --into
etc.
t§0, n. flaming, blazing; flame, blaze, shine; lightening,
enlightening; illumination.
tSo la, inf lat§0, v. to be very sharp; bad, wicked; to
be very bold.
t§o no, inf. nQtSO, v. to shine upon; to illuminate, to
enlighten.
tSo, inf. t§0, V. to deny; to assure the contrary
(perhaps one word with the former, comp. the german
„](bc\nc\\", greek: <faiveiv Bnd ^aivsCx^ai); t§0 ot§o. lo?
doest thou really deny it; et§o, ake eba, he deni d that
he came (^though he came); etSo ake ebaa, he denied
that he d.A not come (though it was true).
tSO, n. denying; denial.
tSol t§ow! inter, of displeasure, if seeing or hearing some
thing wrong; oh! shone!
dbyGoogk
310 tSo — tS«.
tSo, pi. tSei (Oi. dua), n. tree, plant, stjck, staff; wedd;
stock; scaffold (©etufle; ©erippe); stem, stalk; pole,
bar; handle ; etc. etc. Comp. all the names of 4rees9
as: DSanotso, flat§o, t^tso etc. and gbomo-tSo, body;
yi-t§o, head; sa4§o, bedstead; dfeitso, grass-stalk, able-
t§o; corn-ear; koi-tso, handle of a hoe; adeda-t§o, -of
a billhook; odum-t§o, odum-wood; tet§o, stone -wood
etc. t§o-adeka, wooden box; dadeadeka, iron box etc.;
yi m. k. t§o, tfa m. k. tso, to strike s. b. with a stick;
about ya t§o no, see tsono, n. to tso fd si, v. to (cut
and) fell a tree ; kwo — , v. to assend or climb a tree
etc. etc. Comp. also lai, n. Ad. t§o, pi. tsihi, n. th.s.
tso no, tsono, n. lit upon the tree; the common closet
of towns made of sticks; ya — , v. to go to the closet;
comp. ko na, tiafi etc.
tsO, adv. very (wet), full, of water = boboll; mihe fo tsO,
1 am wet all about (comp. „p[at^6)nai" in Germ.).
{SQ, inf. tso and tsole» v. to halt; to limb; to be lame;
comp. a* soke, tsulso; akpake; etc.
tso, n. halting, limbing; lameness; tsole, th. s.
tsO, adv. very (fat); ewo fo t§0» it is exceedingly fat.
tso, inf- 1§0, V. to dip; to dive; to put into liquid; comp.
ml, mu, v.; to taste fluit by taking a little out (comp.
dsie, v.). Perhaps one word with tso, to halt.
tso mli, inf. mlitsO, v. to dip into; to immerse.
tso si and
tso si§i, V. to dip down, to the bottom.
tso, Q* dipping, diving, baptizing.
tsd, inf. t§o nnd t§5mo (and tsole), pi. tsdmo, redupl.
tsotsd, t§dtsdmo, v. (Ot. dan; kyer^); to twist, = tsd-
mo, v.; turn; turn through, pass through; to change
(comp. tsake), to become; Ot. dan); to show; to leach;
to explain; d^adse n. k. tsd moko, to show or explain
s. th. to s. b. (Ot. ky6re) ; to turn or change with bad
intention, to entrap, ensnare (s. tsdne, n.); to try, to
tempt; s. tsd na; hie tsd, inf. hletsdmo (Ot. ani gyina),
V. to have the face turned (away?), to want pastime,
to be homesick = hie t§e, v.; he tsd, v. to change bo-
dily; yiA t§d, V. to have the thoughts turned (s. yi, yin),
to turn the opinion; - to be somewhat mad; yitso tSd,
th. s. ; about musun tsd , musun tsd m. k. , mli t§d etc.
s. musu, mli, n. etc. (]omp. the verbs tso, tso, dso,
d§0, d§d and roots with the consonants ds and tS, which
dbyGoogk
t§d dan — tSoflL 311
seem to have altogether some coimnon signification and
to be related.
tSd dan, v. to turn one's mouth.
ts5 den, y. to turn one's hand.
t§d he, inf. het§dnio» v. to turn; to turn one's self; = kQ
se; to change one's self (fic(? befe(>rcn); to be con-
verted; — to ease one's self, = wa nane, v.
tSd m. k. mil, inf. mlitSd, mlit§dmo, V. to hold one fast
(comp. to t>vist); stronger than mo mli, v.; to show the
inside of s. b.
t§d mli, inf. mli'&dmo, v. to turn or pass through; mitgd
md le mli, 1 passed through the town;^ edse Abrotdire
kg-t§d Gua ke-ba bie, he came hither from Europe
through Cape Coast; to operate.
tsd musu, inf. musunt§dmg, y. to operate the belly,
bowels.
t§d na, inf. natsS,.y. to tempt « try (one's mouth); to catch
one in speaking; mitsd ena, 1 tempted, provoked him;
to change one's speaking, to be double-tongued, deceit-
ful; e\M6 ena, he is double-tongued; etc. to show the
price of s. th.; to price.
tso m. k. nine no, inf. ninenotsdmo, v. to turn over one's
hand, to use s. b., mit§o mit§e nine ng mife ene, 1 did
this through my father (comp. nam obi so in Otyi).
tsd no, inf. notsdmQ^ v. to turn, walk, stumble over; to
• overleap; to go round (of old kejs or locks, spoiled);
to turn over one's self (Ot. fd so) , if something done
or spoken returns to the person, so that he is caught
by it; etsd mino, 1 am brought to silence by it; comp.
la, v.; to get master over, to prevail = ye no, ta no, v.
t§d se, inf. set^dmo, v. to turn back, v. a. and n.
t§d §i, inf. sitsOmo, to turn down.
t§d §i§i, inf. §isit§dmo, v. to show the meaning; to inter-
pret; to explain; to state the reason; s. ^iSi, n. and
comp. d§ie na, wie na, v.
tSd, adv. too; much, too much = tatu, naakpa etc. efa
ti^o, it is too much; etc.
t§5 (and natsd), n. temptation; trap, snare (comp. tSdne).
t§oba, n. leaf of a tree.
t§obi , n. lit. wooden child ; doll ; generally made of wood
and dressed according to native fashion.
tSoboti^obo, adj. and adv. hanging about; disorderly.
tSofa, n. lit. root of a tree, plant etc. (comp. engl. -wort,
germ, -nourj); medicine; poison; any strong drug; pow-
dbyGoogk
m tSofAa — tSdle.
der of any kind, but especially gun -powder, s. tQtSofS,
tutSufd, n. ; spices, incense etc. tSof^ ke nma, lit. medi-
cine with sweet odour, sweet spices, incense; nu — , y.
to take medicine, poison etc. hd — , y. to give medicine;,
wo ra. k. na — , y. to poison s. b. ; wyie — , y. to grind
medicine; tSa — , y. to dig medicine (roots); etc. ISofS
t§d m. k., -tSd m. k. mli, medicine operates s. b. etc.
Sometimes the word is shortened into tSufd.
ti§o£dba, n. medical leaf or plant.
t^ofafu, n. snuffing of medicine.
tSof^hamo, n. prescription or giving of medicine.
Uofdhemo, n. taking or buying of medicine.
tSofihdlQ, n. seller of medicine.
tSofdhdmo, n. sale of medicine.
tSofal6, n. knowledge of medicine.
t^of^nd, pi, -nii, n. some thing medical.
tSofdnumo, n. taking of medicine.
tSof^nulQ, n. taker of medicine.
tiofasane, n. medical palaver.
t§ofat§&, n. digging of medicine.
t§ofat§e, pi. -tSemei, n. possessor of medicine; docter,
physician; comp. tsalg and mensre, n.; apothekary.
tSofatSenyomo, n. doctor's fee.
t§ofdt§o, n. medical tree, - wood.
Uofliwyiemo , n. grinding of medicine.
tSofSiwO, n. poisoning; s. sQ, v.
tSofdwolo, n. poisoner, s. sQIq, n.
tSofO, n. cutting of wood; treecutting; s. tSotomg, n.
tSofolg, n. treecutter, woodcutter; woodman.
t^ogbamo, n. splitting of wood (^oljtpalten) ; chapping of
wood; wood-sawing.
tSogbalo, n. wood-cleaver; -chapper; sawer.
t§ogbIn, pi. -gb!d§i, n. dry wood; s. egblA, adj.
tSohetoto, n. bark of a tree.
t§okpoti, cudgel; club.
TSokUy pr. n. of males.
t§6ku, n. stock of a tree remaining in the ground after
felling; a block of a tree; a rough kind of seats made
of a block.
tSokuku, th s. seldom used; s. ku, kuku, adj. and n.
tSole, inf. tSolemo, v. to put or rest the head on someth.,
f. i. a pillow ; to lake s. th. for a pillow ; Ot. sum , v.
t§ole» n. halting; lameness fi*. i^Q, v.
tSOlCi n. temptation, s* tSd, y.
dbyGoogk
tSQlemo, n. resting the head on s. th., i»llowing*
t§olif n. buttock; comp. dukui, th. s.
tSolo, n. (europ. word?) tail-coat.
tsolo, n. shiner, enlightener, illuminator; denier, fr. tSo, y.
tsolo, n. dipper, immercer; lame person (s. at^gke).
t^olo, n. shower; teacher; tempter, provoker; a person
turning etc. fr. t§d, y.
tSomd, n. setting or erection of a tree, post, wooden mark;
planting of a tree, s. tSoteomo, n.
t^omdlo, n. planter of a tree.
t§dmQ, n. turning; twisting; showing; show; teaching;
doctrine; tempting, temptation etc. fr. t§d, v.
tSdmg, inf. tsdmo, v. to twist, to turn repeatedly; pi. form
of t§6, y. ; tSdmol§dmO, redupl. of it.
tSonane, pi. -nSidgi, n. foot of a tree,
tsdne , n. a trap, snare (fr. tso, to entrap ; and 'de, 'ne =
nd, thing; comp. nane, nande; nine, ninde, kane etc.);
machine of any kind and for any purpose ; press, engine,
artful instrument fr. t§5, v. to turn; etc. t§6 — , inf.
tsdnet^o, to set a trap; to prepare or use a machinery
for any purpose; du — , inf. tsdnedD, to fall into a trap,
snare etc. to be caught.'
tSdnemlinii, pi. n. parts of a machine.
tlonedO, n. falling into a trap fr. du tSdne, y. ^
tgdnetso, n. entrapping, ensnaring; setting of a trap; setting
up or preparation of a machine; fr. tsd t§dne, y.
tUdnetSdlg, n. traper; tempter; machinist, engineer.
tSonine, pi. -nidsi, n. branch of a tree, plant etc.; s.
nine, n.
tsonmon, pi. -inmddSi, n. green wood; s. enmdA, adj.
tsono, n. (s.tso ng and t§o, n.) necessary, priyy; s. also
kona, n.
tSongyibii = tSeiayibii, pL n. fruit of trees.
tSono, pi. -nii, n. wooden yessel, wooden thing, s. nd> n.
t§oiit§oht§o]^, ady. rashly; efft — , to open — ; esp. used
of the manner of walking.
tSoro, y. inf. tSoromg; to hang; — Si, y. inf. SitSoromg,
to hang down; s. tsot§5ro, y.
tSorotSorO, adv. = t§ots6rot§ol§6r(5, ady. and watery, thin
= tsretsre.
tSosatso, pi. -tsei, n. wooden bedstead.
tSosg, n. hind- or backpart of a tree; behind a tree.
Ugse, inf. t§gsemg« y. to raise or bring up a child; comp.^
le, v.; to educate.
dbyGoogk
814 UoielO — tiretXre.
tSoselo, n. raiser of a cfaiM; nurse; edocirtor; pedng^gve.
UoseniQ, n. raising of (Mdren; nursing; education; peda-
gogic.
tSo§i§i, n. place under a tree.
ti§o§i§if&, n. root of a tree.
tSoteolOf n. planter of trees, plants etc.
tSoteomo, n. planting of trees, etc. fr. teo tSo^ v.
t§otffi, B. stroke with a stick.
tSotfalQ, n. (stickmaster, @tO(fme(f}cr?) an officer under the
danish government.
tSotomo, n. felling of a tree = tSofO, n.
t^otolQ, n. woodcutter; woodman.
t^QtSe, inf. tsoti^emo, to tweak; to {^neh; to pick, to make
a surface disorderly by picking; kafe i^uta mdnySindnyd
take boni wo tSotSeg fufui hie, don't make the orange
^ disorderly (by peeliog) as a fowl uses to pick the face
of a pudding! comp. koli, kole, ko; tSe (to pluck, of
which tggtSe seems to be a redupl. = tietse).
tSotselo, n. picker; tweaker.
tSotSemo, n. picking; tweaking.
T^otSO, pr. n. of females; s. Tete, pr. n.
tSotso, redupl. of tsQ, to halt, s. t§ut§o> v.
tsdro, inf. t§drpmo, mi
t§ot§dro, inf. tsot§5romo, v. to hang = sen; — U, inf.
Mt§ots5romo, to hang down.
tSotsdromo, n. hanging = senmo.
tSotsdrotSotsdrO, acL hanging full; gef^atigt )ooU (of trees
bearing), f. i. wo — , t. to bear fruit' in dusters, in
abundance; s. wodsowod§0 and kplitsO, adv. th. s.
tsQtsQtso, pi. -tsei, n. a tree the bitter root of it is used
for medicine.
t§ot§5t§o, adj. and adv. tough; -ly; slimy; slimily.
t§Qt§ot§o, adv. fatly, full of fat = tsO, adv.
ihou\ tsow! = t§0! int. of displeasure; oh! shame!
t§owo, n. bearing of a tree.
tsoyibii, pi. n. = Iseiayibii, tSonoyibii, fruit of trees,
tSoyiten, n. top of a tree.
tSra, pi. V. of t§a, v. s. tsSra, to mend np holes; to jom etc.
s. tSa, V.
tSre, v.; s. tSfire.
tSre, V. 8. tsSre and tSgre.
tgrfii, ai^
tSreisrei, adj. rent, ragged; s. tg«rei and tSSretSSrei, a^j.
UretSre, adj. thin, watery, = trolo, tsrotSeo, Alente.
dbyGoogk
tSrelm -^ tgfi. Sl$
•
tSrebo = tSSr^bOy n. flint of a g\m.
tSrotsro = tsretSre, adj.
t§ro, tsotsro, and
tsro Si, and tsotgro §i, v. s. tsdro imd tSotS^ro, v. to
hang etc.
'tSru, etSru, adv. red; s. tsuru.
tsu, inf. tsa» tSale, v. to redden, to ripen (of fruits be-
coming red or yellow -red, but also applied^ to other
fruits ; comp. gbl (of corn) ; sa, v. etc, ; to be red, red-
dish, of a reddish brown or yeHow colour^ also used of
reddish-coloured natives, mulattoes (s. motsuru, n. and
etsuru, 'tsuru, adv.) ; comp. abonua, afaseo, n. and ye> v.,
di, V, Aoli, V.
tsQ, n. reddening, ripening, riping; ripeness, redness; adv.
very red = fa.
tsu, inf. tsQmo, v. to <;leanse (causative of the neuter v,
tse, to be clean), to sanctify, to purify, of gold, silver,
also men, if religiously purified; comp. dsu, v. to wash;
t§umQ, V. to wipe etc.
tsu, inf. t§Qmo, v. to send (a person, comp. mdidse, v.),
to work, to labour (but always wanting an object, see
tsu nii, v.); the word is especially used in the more
extensive sense of the business, trade, occupation etc.
of a person, f. i. meni otsuQ? or: meni dsi oniitsumg?
MihOg sikpon; miye srehki etc. What is thy business?
I till the ground; 1 am a carpenter etc. Comp. fe, v.
and *]N^ in Hebr., and the prov.: „Noni otsuQ le, no
non gbeQO,'' what thou labourest even that kills thee,
i. e. by thy business or trade thou wilt die. In the
signification: „to send'' it has the simple object follow-
ing; f. i. mitstile Gd, 1 sent him (to) Akra etc. Adn.
tso, V.
tSCi he nii, inf. heniitsumo, v.* to work about or for s, th.,
to labour for; to make use of = ye he niilsum;), v.
tsu mli nii, v. to work in s. th.
t§Q nii, inf. niitSumQ, nitsumo, v. lit. to work things, to
labour things; the object being added in want of an
other (comp. tfa m. k. nd or tfia m. k. nii, v. and nd,
pi. nii, n); tsu noko, inf. noko tsumQ, v. th. s. with
the object in the sing, number.
tStia, t§uere, tsuetsu^ etc. formerly written instead of tfa,
tfere, tfetfe etc. which see.
tsu, n. room, house, if containing only one room, f. i.
sfilemQtSu, chapel (comp. sla, n. and we, n.); place in-
dbyGoogk
316 tSobe — t8ul.
closed by'walls or fences to keep cattle etc.; stable;
sty, keonel etc., comp. okpo^QtSu, horse-stable; tSinaia-
t§u cow -stable; toiatsu, sheep- or goat -stable or yard;
wQt§0| fowl -house etc.; room closed up in particular,
prison, jail, goal; comp. asa, pia, fiase; md or mon,
saA etc.; tSun = t§u mil, inside of the room, inside
(s. agbo na, kpo no); ba t§uA, v. to come into the room,
to come inside; kQ t§u, y. to* break a house down; fnk
t§u, inf. tsumS, t§um2imQ, y. and tfa tsu, inf. tSutfd, v.
to build (a house); sa t§u or t§un, to outfit a house,
room; to t§uA, y. to lodge in a room; wo t§u, inf. tso-
wO, Y. to thatch; wo t§un; inf. t§uAwO, y. to put in
prison; wo t§un, y. to sleep inside, in a room; yatsun,
to go inside etc.
tSabe, n. time of ripening of fruits; s. t§u, y.
tSublamg, n. binding up the lattice-work of a room or thatch
(building expression).
tSufH, n. = t§ofd, which see with its compounds.
tsuhenii, pi. n.. building material; furniture of a room; tSuA-
nii, n. th. s.
tSui (= rooms?), n. heart in the widest sence of the
word; tSdin," pi. tSuiiadi, n. inside of the heart; the word
t§ui and tsuin or tSuiian is used Mke he, hie, musu, yi,
yil§o, as grammat. subj. or obj. of Ycrbs express moYe-
ments of soul and spirit, as well as some bodily com-
plaints; the most common expressions of this kind are
the following: tsui fd, y. inf. tsuifd, lit. the heart comes
forth' or out (s. fd, y. and t§ui nyd si, y.)^ to be cast
down, hopeless, afraid, frightened; to dispair (Germ.
,M^ ^^K entfaflt ibm", flopft etc ); tsui he dso m. k..
inf. t§uihed§ole, to have inward peace, to be at peace
(comp. he dsOf y. toin dso, y. hie d§o» y.); tsui hao
ro. k., inf. tSuihaomo, y. to be passionate; t§ui nyo §1,
inf. t§uisiny5, y. (lit. the heart sinks down, gets quiet);
to be of good cheer, comfort; to be comforted, quiet;
etc. t§ui sa, inf. t§uisale , to haYC a fit heart, to be bold,
braYc; hearty (,/bc^erjt"); tsui sQ, inf. tsuisu, y. to be
out of breath; to gap for breath; t§ui §§, y. inf. t§ui§d,
to feel heartburning; to yearn, stronger than „ musu A
t§d, Y.*"; t§ui §i, inf. tsuiSimo, y. to have heartbeating;
tSui tfa, Y. inf. tsuitfa, th. s. and to be afraid, frighte-
ned etc. As gram. obj. t§ui is esp. used in the foil,
phrases: to t§ui si, inf. tsuisitO,'Y., and fime t§ui Si,
inf, tSuiSi^m^, y. to have patience, to be patient, f. i.
dbyGoogk
tSuido — tSuitSakelo. 317
Ame otSui Si ohfitni! have patience with me! — na tSni,
inf. tSuinamo, v. to be courageous; to lake courage; na
t§ui! take courage, take a heart! fa§' ein {)et}; ha tSui,
inf. tSuihdmo, v. to give a heart, to encourage etc.; tSake
tSui, inf. tSuitSakemo, v. to change the heart, to repent
(fiUTavoHv) etc. comp. bo in Ot. and yU dfeAmo etc. in
G5; etc. etc.
tSuidg, tSuiAdQ, n. grief of heart.
tSuifS, n. frightening; hopelessness; fear; despair, fr. tSui
fa, V.
tSuifalg, n. frightened, hopeless, despairing person.
tguifa^ane, n. a frightful, fearful, desperate matter, news etc.
tSuihalo, n. encourager, fr. ha t§ui, v.
tSuihamg, n. encouraging.
tSuihaolo, n. passionate person.
tsuihaomo, n. heart-trouble; passion; fr. tSui hao, v.
tsuihef'§ole, n. peace of heart; comp. hedM6» hIedSole,
toittdSoIe; fr. ISui he dSo, v.
t§uin, = t§ui mil, inside of heart; pi. tSuiiaA.
tSuina, adv. heartily.
tSuinamg, n. courage (^CT}6aftigfeil), fr. na tSui, y.
t§uinalo, n. courageous person.
t§uint§akelo, = t§uit§akelo, n. repenting person.
t§uint§akemo, = t§uit§akemQ, n. repentance.
tSuisale, n. boldness, bravoury; = tSuinamo, n. (^etjl^af^
ti(^feit, Sebftj^tbeit) fr. tsui sa, v.
tSuisalo, n. bold person.
t^uisQ, n. want of breath; gaping for breath; suffocation,
fn tsui su, V.
t§ui§a, n. heartburning, utmost yearning; comp. musuft-
t§d, n.
tSuiSimo, n. beating of the heart; pulsation, fr. t§ui si, v.
tSuisinme, n. fr. nme t§ui si, v., and
tSuiSitO, n. fr. to t§ui §1, v. patience; longsuffering; for-
bearance.
tSuiSnmelOy n. and
tSuiSifolQ, n. longsuffering, patient, forbearing person.
t$ui§iny5, n. quietness, comfort; cheerfulness (contrary of
tSuifa, n.), fr. nme tSui §i, v.
tSuiSinydlo, n. quiet, comforted, cheerful person.
tSuitfa, n. heartbeating = tsuiSimo, fear, apprehension, fr..
t§ui tfa, V.
tSuilSakelo, n. repenting person, fir. tSake tSui» y.
dbyGoogk
S18 tSuitSakemo — tSQiosaDe.
tSaitSakemOy n. change of. the heart, repentance; futsrccvoux;
= dfeAmotSakemQ, d§^nt§akemo, n.
tSuiwale, n. hardness of heart, fr. t§ui wa, y.
tSuiwalQ, n. person of a hard heart.
tSniwadSelo, n. person hardening his heart, fr. ivadSe tSul, v.
tSuiwadSemo, n. hardening of the heart.
t§uiwO, n. rest, recreation.
tsuiwolo, n. person resting or recreating himself.
tSmyeli, n. trouble, grief; hearteating; fr. tsui ye, v. and
,ye tsui, v.
tSuiyelo, tsuiyelilo, n. a person .grieved or grieying.
I§ukat§uka = tsikat§ika, t§akat§aka, sakasaka, etc. ady. dis-
orderly, in a hubbub.
tSuko, inf. tsukomo, y. to roast or dry on life -coals, to
smoke, as it is done ^ith meat, fish etc. for preserva-
tion; comp. §i, §9; be, ho; ka; wo lasu mli, v.
tSukomo, n. roasting on life-coals.
tSukamo, tsukuomo, n. house-breaking; breaking down of
a house.
tSukutSuku, adj. and ady. „in a buzzle*'; busy; busily; full
of people, lively etc.; fe — , v. to be in a buzzle,
buzzling.
tSukutsukufemg , n. buzzle.
tSulo, n. not used; comp. tsuru; fr. tsu, v.
t§Qlo, n. cleanser,, purifier; sanctifier; fr. t§Q, v.
t§&lo, pi. tsOloi, n. sender (comp. t§u,y.); worker, labourer,
but only used in compounds, s. niitgulg,' n. Comp. tSglo,
Ad. V.
tSDlg, tsuld, tsuld, pi. tsudsi, n. servant in the most
extensive sence; slave (a more common and less ofifensive
expression as nydn; comp. abofra, akoa and nya, n. in
Otyi); subject; comp. Ijy mi iovkog. See also: wenU,
weyo; webii; bi; suolo; awoba; etc. Ad. tsolQ and tsd-
lo, n.
tsCilobi, n. child of a servant.
tSulobe, n. time of a servant,
tsulodsen, n. servants-life, — character.
tS&logbena, n. duty, part of a servant.
tSulohegbe, n. allowance, right pf a servant.
tSulond, pi. -nil, n. servants part etc.
tSuloniitlumo, n. servants business.
HSOIquQ, pi. tsudsih!, n. male-servant.
tSulosane, n, servants cause, matter, palaver.
dbyGoogk
tStllotSn — tSntSiinS. 319
tsdlotso, ii« room of a servant
tsulowe, n. house and home of a servant.
tSuloyo, pi. tSudM^ei, n. female-servant.
tsulu, pi. tsudsi, adv. s. tsuni, adj.
tsumS, tsumdmo, n. house-building; fr. mS tsu^ v.
tsumalo, n. housebuilder, = tSutfalo, n.
tsQmo, n. cleansing; purification; sanctification, fr. t§(l, v.
wiping, rubbing, drying, fr. tsQmo, v.
tsumo, inf. t.sumo, v. to wipe, to cleanse by rubbing; to
dry by rubbing. Comp. sa; kpla he, v. etc.
tSumo he, -hie, -mli, -no, -se etc. to wipe outside, the
face, inside etc.
tSumo, n. sending; business, labour, work, fr. tsO, v.
tsun, n. = tsu mli, inside of the room; adv. inside,
tsunba, tsunbotemo , tsunya, n. entering of a room; coming
or going inside.
tSuftmg, n. plastering of a room, fr. md tSu mli, v,
tiSano, n. cover of a room, s. tsuyiten, n.
tSunwO, n. putting in prison; imprisoning,
tsuiisalo. tsusalo, n. outfitter of a room,
tsunsamo, tsusamo, n. outfitting of a room,
tsunye, n (lit. housemother); a small lizard living in rooms,
'tsuru, etsuru, pi. tsudsi, adj. red, ripe; brown-red; yellow-
red etc.; fr. tsu, v. motsuru, a red person.
t8use, n. place behind the house or room; = adv. aside;
menstruation = gbese; ya -, v. to have the — .
tsuseyd, n. menstruation = gbeseyS.
tsusamo, tguhsamo, n. white-washing of a room,
tsutfa, n. housebuilding = tsumS, n.
tsutfalo, n. builder; comp. gbogbotfalo, n.
tsntso, inf. tsutsomo, v. to halt because of disability to
tread or stand down; shortened reduplication of t§o, v.
tSutsglo, n. halting, lame person; comp. tsglQ, at§ol^e,
akpake, osifo, obubuafo, n. etc.
tsutsomo, n. halting.
t£ut§u, n. (but out of use) = sisi, beginning; adv. first,
at first, in the beginning; = klenkleA, adv.
tStttsu klenklen, adv. th. s. as t§utSu, only stronger, quite
in the beginning,
tsutsubii, pi. n. the first people; comp. sebii, n. etc.
tSutsumo, pi. -mei, n. the first person,
tsuntsumo, n. wiping of a room.
tSulsun(^, pi. -nii, n. the first thing.
dbyGoogk
320 tSutSusane — tuamonS.
tSutSusane, pi. -sadSi, n^ first matter, first cause, first pa-
laTcr.
tSuwO, n. thatching of a house, fr. wo tSu, y.
tSuwolo, n. thatcher.
tSuyitcA, n. housetop, flat or otherwise.
tSuyO, t^unyO, pi. -yei, n. girl or woman in the same room;
|)au^mdSd}cn, <^au$n>eib; girl or woman making a room,
3tmmcrmab^fn, B'wimerfrau,
iSw — see under tf — .
to, pi. tCimO} inf. tO, tOmo, v. to jump; to jump up; to
spring up; to let s. th. jump; etc. (Comp. tu mirik^
and tutu mirikd, y. to run, in Ot. and teke, v. in G&,)
tft mil, V. to jump in.
tu no, V. to jump upon or over = teke no.
tu si, v. to jump down,
td, n. (Ot. tuo) gun, musket; sika — , inf. tusikamo, to
load a gun; tfa — , inf. tutfa, \. to discharge a gun;
tfa m. k. —, to shoot s. b.; tu fe, inf. tufele, y. to burst
(of a gun); — kwa, y. to miss fire etc.
tu m. k. , Y. to cup s. b.
to, n. cupping,
tu and tumo, n. jumping,
torn! interj. gone! dead! beni efg pe, tilm! when she had
scarcely born (she was) dead! comp. a similar use of
krSnd, bum etc., yi fe, n.
tft, n. brasil-wood; colour of it.
tfitso, pi. -Isei, n. brasil-tree.
tfi, term, tutiita, tilntu, adj. and adv. dark; darkly; in the
Yery middle, ten tOntu, th. s.
tu, Ad. Y. to speak.
tu and tin (Ot. th. s.), inf. tU, tumg andtiumg, v. to fol-
low; to run after; to persecute; to hunt, after; to let
blood; to take blood by leeches or a lancet; to bleed;
s. b§, Y.
tu se, Y. th. s.
tu-wo ml k. den, y. to give something over to s.b.; inf. td.
to, n. giving over,
tua, inf. tuamo, y. to attack, to aggress; to come over one
unexpectedly and by force; to clysler with pepper and
the like; s. also fu, y. th. s.
t^alQ, B. aggressor; person clystering.
tuamo, n. attack; aggression; UebcrfaH; clystering.
tuamond, n. clysterpipe; s. bentu^, th. s.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
tiie — tdnte. ' 321
t6e, inf. ti&emo, v. to draw off; wine, etc. to rain; see
Nyonmo lue, v.
tufemo, and
tQfelemo, n. bursting of a gun; - - guns,
tufelo, tOsolo, n. gunmak^r; gunsmith,
tufle, n. (obscene word, perb. Fanti) anus; comp. duna^ n.
tufu, V. to rot.
*lufo (and 'tofo), and
'tftfo, n. s. atufu, n. the pad which women wear on their
back; si — , v. to bind up this pad.
'tufusi, n. binding up of the bark-pad of women,
tugblon, n. hbder part of a gun.
tui! interj. used in driving away small cattle; tui! tui! th. s.
tukwamo, n. missing of a gun.
tukutuku, adj. and adv. fat, round (of limbs); enane y^
tukutuku tamo wolo mli mfonini nane, his foot is as
round as that of a picture in a book,
tulu adj. and adv. little,
tulo, n. persecuter; follower; bleeder, lancer,
tulo, n. jumper.
Tumo, pr. n. of a fetish between Osu and GH,
tOmo, n. persecution; following; hunting after,
tu, and
tumo, n. jumping; springing up.
tumu, and
tumo, n. dunghill, such as generally is found near towns
and villages, where every kind of rubbish, dung, etc.
is cast; liimo no,' adverbially used: on or upon the
dunghill,
tumononii, pi. n. things on the dunghill or fit to be cast
there, outcast (also used of J)er5ons).
turn, tun, adj. and adv. see tO, dark; black.
tQna, n. muzzle of a gun; tropically used: strength, abi*
lity; mile etuna, 1 know his strength,
tun, n. the pulp of a tree used by the fefishpriesl for
powder to besmear their idols with,
tur.i, n. smiall barrel; keg; s. akotowa, th. s.
'tCinkpS, atunkpg, n. square bottle; comp. to, abodiamg.
tunkun, n. new palm-wine, which comes first, after the
tree? are felled, and operates on the bowels; comp. ko-
kro, n.
tonte = to mli te, n. gunstone, i.e. ball, lead in the guns.
The natives generally cut the lead-bars into small pieces
for this purpose.
Zimmerniann, Akra-Yocab. 21
dbyGoogk
322 tuntra — Wa.
luntrl, trantra, tuntrdtuntrS, adj; and adv. speckled; spot-
ted ;.comp. damdam; Aiivdtdni/vdtd etc.
lunlu, tuhtu, adj. and adv. very dark, black; in the very
middle; s. 10, adj. and adv.; and comp. dun; to^, adv.
tOtanta, adj. very dark, black.
tu8e» n. hinder-part of a gun.
tfigbloA, th. s.
tfisikamo, n. loading of a gun.
tiitfa, n. discharge of a gun or guns; salutation with gun-
fire; shooting.
tutfalo, n. discharger of a gun.
tfitsofll, tutsufd, n. gun-powder; s. tsofd, n.
tutO, redupl. v. fr. tu, v.
tuta, n. chaff; comp. toto, Sabii, n.
tQtu, adv. too much; edgmi totu, it grieves me too much;
very much; crmp. pi, t§d, naakpa, pam, tam, po etc.
tCitutfi, adj. and adv. very dark, black; darkly; s. iH, adj.
tdnyo, n. a kind of euphorbia.
The vowel u does not initiate any GS-word; where it
seems so, a scarcely audible „w^ is the initiating con-
sonant, comp. esp. W0-, wo, wu- elc.
V.
The consonant ^v**, pronounced as in English, does
not appear in proper G§- words, but in some words
from the Ayigbe or Ewe-Language spoken beyond the
river Volta and in Dahomey.
Veveve, adj. and adv. hard; hardly,
vi, adj. and adv. weak, weakly; s. gbedg, boboll etc.
vo, adj. and adv. very deep; deeply; comp. also vo or wo
in Ot.
vfi, a natural sound, adv., to immitate the wind etc.
W.
The semiconsonant w has several peculiarities, which
are to be observed and are referred to in the sequel.
It resembles in general more the German w, than the
English; but before o, q, u is nearly heard as a fall
„u** serving as a consonant, or sometimes scarcely au-
dible; it also changes sometimes with h and in a few
cases with b and m.
Wa, inf. wa, wale and wamo, v. to be hard, heavy,
strong, difficult; to harden, strengthen, comp. wadse, v.
dbyGoogk
Wa — wa m. k. yi. 323
to stand still, s. wa damo si, v.; to accompany; to as-
sist; to case one's self, inf. wamo, and wa nane, inf.
nanei^amo, th. s. more decent expression than nyS, v.,
but compare ya kona, tso no, niiase, dfeiaA; tsd he etc.
to creep, = wamo; etc. The word Is frequently com-
bined iivith gran)mat. subj. and obj., to diversify its use:
The most common are the foUoiiving: den wa, inf. den-
wale, V. to be hardhanded, i. e. illiberal, covetous (comp.
kpekpe, Me wa, nine §i wa, v. th. s. anf den kpQ, v.
th. contrary); he wa, inf hewale, hewa, v. to be strong,
well, sound, healthy; with obj. to be well, ehe ewale,
he is well (again); s. he, n., but: he wa he (inf. he-
wale, but scarcely used), v. to have pain all over the
body, lit. the body is hard to the body; comp. he, n.;
wa he, v.; hie wa, inf. hfewale, hlewfi, v. to be hard-
faced, hard, sparing, covetous; to be strict, etc., comp.
yi wa; hie wa he, v. to have pain in the face; hienmeii
wa he, V. to have pain in the eyes; itso wa, s. yit§o
wa and yi wa; mli wa, inf. mliwale, v. to be Inwardly
hard; na wa, inf. nawale, v. to be hardmouthed; to
speak hard, bold, tenacious; to be hard or tough in
general; to use hard words etc.; no wa, inf. nowale, v.
to have a hard surface; nadsian wa, inf. nSidiiafiwale, v.
to have strong legs; to stand fast; nine si wa, inf. nine-
§iwale, V. to be of a hard hand, = de6 wa, v. se wa,
inf. sewale, v. to have a hard, strong back; to be hard
in consequence; s. se; sisi wa, sisiwale, v. to be hard
at the bottom, hard to be explained, difficult to under-
stand, s. sisi; tsui wa, inf.tsuiwale, v. to be hardhearted;
yi wa, yitso wa, inf. yiwale, yitsowale, v. to be hard-
headed; to be hard, cruel, stubborn etc., s. wa yi; and
to b^ stupid, unahje to learn (comp. „cin better ^opf"
in both sences in German). Comp.: Ehe wa tamo ba,
he is as hard or tough- as a crocodile; ohfa wa, poverty
is hard etc. etc.
wa he, inf. hewa, v. to pain (the body, s. he, n.), ewa
mihe, it pains mi; mihe wa mihe, my body pains me;
mimusufk wa mihe, my belly pains me; miyitso wa mi
he, 1 have head-ache etc.
wa — damo si, double v. to stand still.
wa nane, inf. nanewamg, v. to ease one's self; decent ex-
pression = wa, instead of ny§, v.
wa m. k. yi, inf. yiwale (comp. yi wa, v. and toi gbo ani
gbo toi, v.), v. to be hard, cruel to s. b., to illtread
21*
dbyGoogk
324 wa — wala.
8. b., owale yU thou illtreadedst him; comp. fe niisenii-
anii, v., sS, v.
YiiSiy n. hardness, strength; pain; adj. hard, strong; gbe yfSi,
a strong or loud voice; s. wale, n. th. s.
wfi, n. snail,
wa, aux. T. = ba; seldom used; mikeo waba, I mil eome
with thee,
wa -, sometiiftes = woba -, woQ -, we will or shall -.
. iiva = - ba, - ma, - a, Ot. deminutive answering the GS :
hi, mi; f. i. awur^wa or awura, little master, i.e. mistress,
wabii, pi. of wao, n., which see.
Wdd§e, inf. wad§emo (causative form of wa, comp. §edse,
sddse etc.), v. to harden, strengthen; to confirm; N^^ehaa
wowad§ea wohe krede, let us fully confirm ourselves!
Comp. wo hewale, v. th. s.
wadse he, inf. bewadSemo, v. to strengthen one's self,
wadse hie, inf. hiewadsemg, v. to* harden the face, to
harden one's behaviour; comp. hie wa, v.
wadse mil, inf. mliwadsemg, v. to confirm inwardly; comp.
mli wa, V.
wadse na, inf. nawadsemo, v. to harden one's mouth,
speech, words etc., comp. na wa, v.
wadse nane, v. to strengthen the foot,
wadse nine, v. to strengthen the hand,
wadse t§ui, inf. tsuiwadsemo, v. to harden the heart; comp.
tsui wa, V.
wadse yi or yitso, inf. yi- or yitSowadsemQ, v. to harden
the head; comp. yi wa, v.
wadselo,n. hardener; strengthener; confirmer; fr. wadse, v,
wadsemQ,n. hardening; strengthening; confirmation; comp.
hewalewO, n. th* s.
wadsi, pi. of wan, n. which see with its compounds,
waduru, wadurutso, pi. -t§ei, n. the wooden mortar for
beating or mashing „fufui'* and other food; mortar; «.
baduru; Ot. Wgdru.
wadurutsomlibi, n. the pestle or pounder of it; s. woma.
wala (also woala, wola), n. life (comp. wa, u. and la, n.
Hanson: wara, corroboration of wa, n. strength), some-
times yiwala, life of the bead; comp. hlekSmo, hekamo,v.;
na -, and yi na -, v. inf walanamo; yiwalanamo, to be
^ kept alive, to ^e save, saved; 1o be preserved (comp.
aQuog^ &w^iCx>aii^; here wala, here yiwala, inf.'wala-
heremg, yiwalaheremo, v. to save alive, to save (cwfav.
d by Google
I^alabc — wamobii 325
salvum facere); etc. comp. also: yiwala, ii. yiwala td, v.
etc. and Akwa, gye Akwa elc. in Ou
iivalabe, n. time of life.
^alabu, n. "well of life.
walaffi, n. rivei? of life.
iivalagbe» n. way of life.
iwalagbY, n. day of life.
-walahdlQ, n. lifegiver.
walahdmo, n. lifegiving.
walaherelo, yiwalaherelo, n. saviour (Reliant, (fwrrjg);
saver, preserver; comp.herelo, dsielo; kpolo; hefSlo,n. elc.
walaherelogbei, n. saviours name.
walahereloniitSumo, n. saviours work.
walaherelosane, n. savio.urs history. ;
walaheremo, yiwalaheremg, n. salvation (^ci(, @e^
it^feit, aanrjQia); saving; preservation; comp. heremo»
dSiemo; kpdmo; heflimo, n. «tc.
walahererngbe, n. time of salvation.
walaheremgbi, n. child of salvation.
walaheremgwiemo, n. word of salvation.
walanalo, n. person saved; scarcely used.
walanamQ, n. preservation; fr. na wala, v.
waland, pi. -nii, n. seme thing of life.
walasane, n. matter of life.
wala§i§i, n. ground, foundation of life.
wafetSo, pi. -tSei, n. tree of life.
walal§e) n. father, possesser of life.
walawiemo> n. word of life.
walayi, n. head, fountain of life.
wale, D. strength (comp. hewale); hardness; durability
(comp. yiwale) ; power etc. ; help, assistance, strengthening,
empowering (comp. hewalewd, b. and wadsemo); pain,
hardship (comp. hewa, w§, n.); fr. wa, v.
walo, n. meat of eatable snails.
walOs n. strong, hard, powerful person; assistant, helper
(comp. wadSelQ, hewalewolo, hefatalQ, bualg etc.); cree-
per etc. fr. wa, v.
wamo, n. creeping; scratching; easing, one's self, comp.
nanewamo, n., from wamo, y.; help, fr. wa m. k. v.
wamo, inf. wamo, v. to creep; also used of children not
yet able to walk; Ot. wyia, v.; to scratch.
wamgha, n. creeping plant.
wamgbi, n. creeping child.
dbyGoogk
326 wamoflC — wehegbe.
iivamond, pi. -nii, n. creeping creature (comp. German:
wamond, pi. wamonii, n. chamberpot for children.
wamQtsu, n. privy.
iivah, pL wadsi, n. grey hair (of old people); dSe vvadsi,
— wan, inf. wad§id§e, wandse, v. to get grey hair.
wafkdSe, wad§id§6, n. getting grey hair.
wa^dselo, wad§iadselo, wantse, pi. -tSemei; wadsiatse,
pi. -atSemei, n. person having grey hair („®raufopf"J.
Generally an honouring tittle.
wanoho, n. shell of a snail.
wanwan, kukeruku wanwan, nat. sound, imautation of the
voice of doves.
wao, pi. wabii, n. finger; toe; claw; nine-wao, n, finger;
nanewao, n. toe; lofld-wao, n. claw of a bird; etc. Ad;
nwg, n.
waolo, n. (fingerman) epithet of the leopard; comj). hle-
. nmalo, n.
waoselami, n. nail of finger or toe.
wara, n. s. wala.
ware, n. s. wale.
waskefa, n. europ. word; basin; wash-basin.
watere and anowatere (Ot. th. s.), n. water-melon.
wawonu, n. soup made of eatable snails.
wdyeli, n. eating of snails.
wayelo» n. snail-eater.
we, n. house (in the widest sence of the word, Ot. fi);
house and yard, dwelling, home etc. (^an^ unb ^of)
as one whole, with all it contains: comp. §la and tsu,
n ; tropical: people belonging to a house, comp. weku,
webii. The word does not accept any postposition ex-
pressing a locality, as: hie, he, mli, na, no, se, si, Si§i»
yiten etc., f. i. miya miwe, I go to my house (home;
comp. sla); eye ewe, he is in his house; edse owe, it
comes from thy house. Comp. the same rule in the
nouns: hie, he, bo, §Ia, Awei etc. being as „we" at the
same time adverbially used.
webii, pi. n. people of a house; domestics (lat. familia);
subjects; people; NyoiimQ webii, pi. n. God's people;
mantse webii, the kings people; etc. slaves.
wed§en, n. life, charakter of a house.
wedSomo, n. hduse-blessing.
wegbena, n. house-duty; houseright.
wehegbe, n. house-liberty, -right.
Digitized by LjOOQIC
wei — wie-tSd m. k. 32?
wei, n. extorture; ye wei, v.. to extort.
weiyeli, n. extortion.
nveiyelo, n. extortioner.
weku, pL wekui and wekumei, n. family; relationship; comp.
kQ, n.; asafoka, d§aka, manka, n. etc.
wekufuhe, n. family-sepulchre.
wekunii, pl.n. things belonging to a family ; family-possession,
wekunye, pi. -nyemei, n. family-mother,
wekunyo, pi. wekumei, n. person belonging to a family;
relation; pi. -hi, n. men of a family,
wekubii, pi. n. = wekumei ; family-members,
wekusane, pi. -sSdSi, n. family-palawer.
wekutse, pi. -tsemei, n. family-father, -head.
wekuyO, pi. -yei, n. woman belonging to a family.
wenQ, pi. wehl, n. (seldom ased) male-servant; male-slave;
comp. Isulona, n.; webii, n.; weyo, n.
were, s. w^ere.
wereho, s. wyereho.
wes, n. dan. waist -coat.
wese, adj. and adv. fro ward; precocious; -ly; -ly.
weyd, pi. weyei, n. female -servant; female -slave; comp*
t§ulQyd,.n. and wena, n.
wl, s. VI, adj. and adv. weak; weakly.
Words not to be found here see under wy — .
wie (or wyie), inf. wiemo, v. to speak; ke m. k. — , v.
to speak with or to s. b.; comp. ke, v.; dse na, v.
wie he, inf. hewiemo^ v. to speak about, of; to slander,
wie hewQ, v. to speak about.
wie hie, inf. hiewiemo, v. to speak to one's face; to ad-
monish; reproove; reproach; comp. wie-t§d, v.; ka, v.;
f2i, v.; dse, v.
wie huhfihu, inf. hOhfihQwiemo, v. to murmer.
wie mli, inf. mliwiemg, v. to speak into s. th. (breinreben);
to interrupt by speaking; comp. t§e sane na, v.
wie na, inf. nawiemo, v. to speak mouth to mouth; to
speiik to; to salute (comp. ein|))re€i;eii, Dorfpred^en in
German),
wie se, inf. sewiemo, v.; to speak behind one's back; to
backbite, to slander; comp. wie he, v.; nyie m. k. si^i,
v.; to speak after; - - afterwards,
wie-tsd m. k., inf. wiemo ke t§6mo, double v., to admo-
nish, teach, exhort s. b.; wiemo ke tSdmo ed§ee mo
dSemg, prv. admonishing is not scolding one; comp. also
dSadSe-tSd,, double v. (and ka-kyere, v. in Olyi).
dbyGoogk
S28 wie tioi na — wo alali.
me tSui^a, v. inf. tSuinawiemo; to speak to the heart, i. e.
friendly; nb-^y ^21, 1 Mos 34, 3.
wielg, n. speaker; talker; babbler.
wiemo, n. speaking; speech; word; language; fr. wie, r.;
comp. also: sane, gb€, kemo, n.
wiemo ke t§dnio, n. admonition; fr. wie-tSd, double t.
wiemgiaheniile, n. linguistic, philology.
wiemQiaheniilelQ, n. linguist.
winkle, n. dan. rigbtangular ruler; SBinfel.
wiri, inf. wirimo, v. to row a vessel; comp. pia lele he, y.
wirilo, n. rower.
wirimo, n. rowing.
wirimotso, pi. -Isei, n. generally corrupted into wuIgtSo;
row; s. also tabl6, th. s.
wo, inf. wO, womo, irreg. pi. form: hole, inf. holemo, v.
to lift, to take up (esp. of heavy things* comp. ko,
kolo, nd, v.), to carry (f. i. a child; a man; comp. hie,
tSre, tfa kon; kpe, v. etc.); to put; comp. to, nme; to
call; comp. wo gbei» v. to wear; to bear; to gather, to
bring for h (erjeii^t^n^ s. wo, v. in Otyi and Ga fo, v.);
. to generate, produce etc.; to exalt, to esteem = bu,
dsie yi, hie sq, v. etc., to hononr, respect; to take
something upon one's self; in the latter signification it
is used as an auxil. v. combined with other verbs in the
infinitive, = to be able, to can, to may; to begin, be
about etc., f. i. mi wo bd, I am about to come; ewoo
femg, he is not going to do; wiJwo wghe samg, let us
prepare ourselves! ewo sifimo» he begins to be firm; etc.
The principal uses in combinations of this exceeding fre-
quent verb are the following; ata*u wo, inf. atatuwd, v.
to be cloudy, foggy weather; s. atatu, oblotu, etc.; dfei
wo, inf. dfeiwO, v. to accumulate sweepings, dust, dirt;
he wo n.k., v. to gather or accumulate s. th. outwardly;
ehe wo fg, he is outwardly fat; hie wo n. k., v. to take
up or gather s. th. on the surface; mli wo n. k., v. to
gather or produce s. th. inwardly; mli wo la, inf. ncilila-
wO, V. to get into a passion („to gather inward fire""),
to get angry; mli wo m. k. la, v. to get angry with
s. b.; similarly is na wo, no wo, se wo, §isi wo, t§ui
wo, yi wo n. k. etc. to be explained; but: musu wo
m. k., V. to be pressed down, overpowered by the belly;
to be too stout.
wo alali, inf. alaliwO, ▼. to interrupt a person speaking -=:
dsed§e, tdtd, v.
Digitized by VjOOQfe
wo anteo — wo gbomo. 329
wo anteo (antew, Ot. non-appearance), v. to lay in andHish;
s. wo ka, V,,
wo atade, inf. atadewO, v. to wear (european) drjess ; comp.
bu mama, v.
wo alifo, inf. atlfowo, v. to put colour; to die; to colour,
wo bai, y. to produce leaves,
wo bi, wo gbekg, y. to carry a child on the arms (or on
the back comp. kpe, y ).
wo bo, V. to be full of dew.
wo dan, v. to put into one's mouth. ,
wo den, v. to take in hand; to get into a fray, scuffle;
close fight („banbflcmcin werben")-
wo dfei, V. to grow grass, to produce grass; to accumu-
late dirt, sweepings etc.; see dfei, n. inf. dfeiwd, comp.
dfei wo, V.
wo dsd no, inf. dsOnowomg, v. to take up or begin a
dance,
wo dun, inf. dunwd, v. to be endarkened, covered with
darkness; to get dark; tsu len wo dun, the room is dark;
comp. t§e, V. the contrary,
wo fo,* inf. fowo, V. to accumulate or produce fat; to get
fat; to be fat
wo foi, inf. foiwo, foiwomo, v. to run; to flee = h!e foi,
dso foi, sa foi etc.; to make to run; to put to flight;
awoame foi, they were put to flight; driven off.
wo fu, V. to grow luxuriously. t
wo ga, inf. gawO, v. to wear a ring,
wo gbale no, v. to take up prophesying, to begin to pro-
phesy,
wo gbld or gbMd no, v. to enter marriage, to go to be
married, only used of a woman (comp. wye, kpe, v.
etc.).
wo gbe no, inf. gbengwo, v. to lift up the voice, to cry.
wo gbe, inf. gbewo, v. to put on the way, to dispatch
(s« dsie gbe, v.) to give one money, ^subsistence" for
the way; s. ha sise, (h. s.
wo gbei, inf. gbeiwo, v. to give a name (sometimes gbei
is let away, f. i. ewole Anan, he called him Anan, s.
wo, v.); to call,
wo gbei no or ano, inf.. gbeinpwO, -mo or gbeianowOmo, v.
to men! ion or take up one's name; s. gbei, n.
wo gbekg, V. to take up a child; to carry a child on the
arms,
wo gbomo, V. to take up or carry a person; s. ^^re, v«
dbyGoogk
wo gOgdmii — wo kusa.
wo gdgOmii, inf. gdgOmiiwO, y. to produce worms, to get
wormy,
wo he, int hewO, v. to lift one's self np; to be proud,
wo he no, inf. henowomo, v. to exalt, to honour, to lift
up; to exalt one's self; miwo mihe ng, I exalt myself;
comp. wo hie nyam; bu, hie so, v. etc. and fa, v.
wo he n. k. , v. to put something about, around, at s. th.
wo hewale, inf. hewalewo, v. to strengthen,
wo hie mudsi, inf. hIemudSiwO, v. lit. to put dirt into
ones face; to disgrace one, to make one ashamed,
wo hie no, v. to lift up the face,
wo hie nyam, inf. hIenyimwO, v. to glorify; to be gracious,
to s. b. (DerJ^errlid&en; begnaWgen; bul^reic^ fepu jjegen
@(nen) / so as only a higher one can do toward a lower
one; comp. wo he no, v. and domo, dro, na mobo, v.
wo hienmei no , pi hole hienmeii ano , inf. hlehmeiiano-
holemo» V. to lift up the eye; — the eyes,
wo m. k. hiegble, y. to make one ashamed; comp. hie-
gble, n. wo hie mudsi, y., gbe m. k. hie, y. etc.
wo ho, inf. howo, y. to impregnate (f^iDangetii)/ comp.
ho, n., nd ho and hie ho, y.
wo hdmo, y. to be able to sell; to produce hunger; comp.
homo, n.
wo homo, y. to be able to cook, to begin to cook,
wo boA, y. to put a shade; to be shadowy,
wo hojfi, y. to put on a „hoA*'-string; s. ho6, y.
wo it§o, 8. wo yi, yit§o.
wo ka, inf. kawO, y. to ambuscade; s. ka, n.; to lie in
ambush, einen ^inter^ait legen; to tempt, to ensnare;
comp. ka, y. tsd, y.
wo kalo , y. to put lime on s. th.
wo kane, y. to take up a light,
wo kpulu» y. to take up a cup, jug etc.
wo kemo no, y- to take up. a saying ; s. wo wiemo no, y.
wo klamo no, y. to begin to soothsay,
wo or bu klala, y. to wear white shirting,
wo kp§, inf. kpdwO, y. to put bonds on one, to bind one,
= fl, y.; to bind a fetish-string on s. b., = wo hoA, y.
wo kpo, y. to produce or form a lumb^ s. kpo, n.
wo ka, y. to produce or form a heap,
wo kut§a, y. to prepare a sponge for use (by putting it
in water etc.).
wo kusQ, y. to be thick, bushy.
dbyGoogk
wo la — wo no. 331
wo la, inf. lawO v. to take ap or gather fire; to* put fire
to; comp. mli wo la, v.
vip ikf V, to produce, gather or accumulate blood,
wo lasu, inf. lasuwO, v. to praduce or emit smoke, to
smoke,
wo lala or lamo, v. to get or take up a song, to give out
a song, to begin to sing,
wo lai, V. to get up firewood, fuel; to add fuel to a fire,
wo lo, V. to gather, accumulate flesh; to produce or ge-
nerate fish (of water),
wo lomo, V. to take up a curse; to begin cursing,
wo lumo, V. to exalt one to be governor, to make one
governor,
wo man, V. to give a name to a town,
wo md6t§e, inf. mSntsewO, v. to make king; to make a
king; ewole amemantse, he made him king over them.
Wo mli, inf. mliwo, v. to put in, into, to add; to fill up;
to give over and above (^breingebcn")-
wo mlila =^ mli wo la, v. to get angrv.
wo mlu, V. to produce or accumulate dust,
wo roodu, inf. moduwo, v. to get a tumor in the grain,
wo mdn, v. to imprison one in the fort,
wo mu, V. to produce oil,
wo mutsuru, v. to produce palmoil; to measure palmoil;
to fill it into casks or pipes for shipment; to load it;
s. ka mut§uru, v.
wo musu obd, n. to fill the belly,
wo musu, V. to take up mischief,
wo na, inf. nawo, v. to put s. th. to one's mouth; into
one's mouth; to administer; inspire; suggest; prompt to
say etc.; to bespeak,
wo na tsofd, v. to administer medicine; to give poison, to
poison, s. tsofS, n.
wo nane no, v. to lift up the foot, to hasten one's jurney ;
pi. hole n9d§i ano, v.
wo nii, v. to produce things, to accumulate things; comp.
ba nii, and wo ytbii, v.
wo nine no, v. to lift up the hand for swearing, striking
etc; pi. hole nidSi ano, v.
wo no, inf. nowO, nowomo, v. to take' up, to begin (f. i.
to sing, speak); to lift up; to elevate; to exalt; to ho-
nour, with the logical object betwixt, the verb and the
grammatical object, as: wo nine, nane, hie etc. ng; pi.
bole nii auQ, if elevating in literal, wo nii ang, if exalt*
dbyGoogk
332 wo Ao — wo yi.
ing in tropic setice; wo wiemo no ekoift, to take u^ an
(old) palaver again; wo m. k. nd, v. to mention one's
secret; etc, etc.
yao no, v. to produce, accumulate salt; to salt. *
wo n§Qn, y. to put into' the sea or seawater instead of
fulling or washing; to drown in the sea.
wo nu, inf. nuwO, v. to gather water; to draw matter (of
boils etc.); to put water to s. th., to water; to moisten,
soak etc.
wo nyomo, inf. nyomgwO, v. to pay a debt; to pay; to
reward; to punish.
wo obd, obSbd, obdbSbd, v. to fill up.
wo onufu, y. to take up, i. e. io destroy snakes; ojpci^
aiQtiv, Mark. 16, 18.
wo sa, y. to take up one's bed.
wo sane no, y. to take up an (old) palaver.
wo se, y. to put back.
wo segbe, y. to put backward.
wo si, inf. siwd, y. to lift up, to hold up, out; to pro-
mise;, ewo si, ake eeba, he promised to come; esi ni
ewo le, the promise he held out; to gather in a malti-
tude, to stand about; mei le ewo si ye bie, people are
standing (have accumulated) here about (and are staring);
to put down.
wo sLsi, y. to take up or lift up the ground, bottom; rear
son etc., s. sisi, n.; to put down, under.
wo §QtQ, inf. SotowO, y. to pepper; to season with pepper.
wo iQ, pi. hole tei, y. to take up a stone, stones; only
such of large dimensions or weight; comp. ko, kolo, y.
wo teii, y. to put into thcf midst.
wo m. k. tse» y. to make one father, guardian, possessor,
fWler; wo n. k. no t§e, v. to put s. b. over s. th.
wo tsu^ inf. tsuwd, y. to thatch a room or house; s. ble, y.
wo tsui, inf. tsuiwO, v. to refresh, recreate one's self;
miwo milsui, 1 refresh myself.
wo tsun, y. to put into a room, i. e. into prison; inf.
tSu&wd.
wo tu, y. to take up a gun.
wo wiemg no, y. to begin to speak.
wo wo, y. to produce honey (of hollow trees),
wo wod§i, y, to produce eggs.
wo wui, y. to produce seed.
wo yi, yitSo no, y. to lift up the bead.
dbyGoogk
wo ji kglomo — w(J. 333
wo ji kolQmQ or kgromo, v. to disturb one by speaking,
talk etc.
wo yibii, inf. yibiiwO, v. to bear fruit (used of trees, plants)
s. yibii, n.
wo yih == wo yi mli, inf. yinwO, v. to' put s. th. into
s. body's head, to induce, suggest; s. wo na, v. to
yifi, etc.
wo yitso, V. wo yi, v.
wo yiten, v. to put on a top; to put on the head,
wo yg, y. to produce or bear beans and other legumes
or pulse,
wo, n. taking or lifting up; exaltation, elevation, honour,
glory; growth, produce, accumulation; putting, adding,
addition; etc. fr. wo, v.
wo (wuo, uwo? wo?) n. honey.
wO, n. fishing; ya wd, v« inf. wdya, to go afehing, s.
wuO , n.
wt^, s. wuo, n. wild cow; buffalo; living near the Volta.
wo, V. inf. wo, to sleep; kg m. k. wo» v. to sleep with
s. b. ; roiy^wo ! 1 go to sleep ! Yawo dsogba ! Go sleep
well! Evening salutation = Good night! Sleep well! —
A wo? awo? Answ. Miwo dSogba! — ^at man flef^fafcn?
Have people slept! (reduplicated): Answ. 1 have slept
well! (Momingsalutation); fewo, lit. have fallen asleep,
i. e. sleeps (generally the perfect tense used instead of
the present),
wo del and wo adel, a*J^, v. to slumber; inf. delwo, ade!-
wO; wo ade! Admonition to children to sleep.
WQ hlese (h*gse) v. to sleep behind the face, to nod; to
slumber,
wo wodel, wodol, v. = wo dei, v. to slumber; inf. wo-
deiwO.
WQ mli, V. to sleep in some place,
wb no I V. to sleep upon,
wo se, V. to sleep behind,
wo sisi, V. to sleep under s. th., to sleep down, down
stairs,
wo wo§a (comp. sa, esa, n.) v. to sleep badly; lit. to sleep
a corrupt sleep; comp. nd§a, n.
wO, n. sleeping; sleep; wO to m. k., sleep overpowers s.b.;
wo mli, in sleep, asleep, adverb, used; sleepingly.
wo (wuO), n. fishing; ya-, v. to go afishing.
wo (wuo), n. Adnme, sea; from which the preceeding word
d by Google
334 wo — *woba.
w very proj)ably an old use: ya w5, to go to sea; comp.
n§o (Ot. nsu), wuSq.
wo , n. (perh. connected or the same with the preceeding
word) the next day; adv. to morrow (comp. dSelSeremo
and dSetSerend); wo n^ d§i wo le maba, a peculiar ex-
pression: to morrow which is to morrow I will come;
certainly to morrow I will come!
wo se, wose, n. and adv. the day after to morrow 0,ubet'
motgen", adv.); wo lo wose, to morrow or the day
after; in future, afterwards; by and by, by the by.
wo lebi, to morrow morning.
wo fane, to morrow (after)noon.
wo gbeke, to morrow evening.
wo nyoft, to morrow night.
wo m. k., inf. wO and womo, v. to hoot s. b., to cry at
or after s. b., 3^iii<^iib au^fcbreien ; f. i. a thief found in
the act of stealing and cried out by young and old;
amt^wole. Comp. wo yi, v.
wo, n. hooling; outcrying.
wo m. k. yi , inf. yiwo, yiwomo , v. th. s., lit. to cry against
some body's head; comp. dSie m. k. yi, v. the contr.
wo hdmo and wo hdmo yi, inf. hdmowo, hdmoyiwomo, v.
to cry hunger out; i. e. to uelebrate the harvest festi-
vity in Sept., which is generally tailed yam's custom by
Europeans; see hdmo wo, n.
wo (wuO?), inf. womo (wuomo); v. to watch at night time
about cattle, fruits and other property; to watch for
game; (perh. also related to the preceeding word).
wO batafoi, v. to watch wild hogs.
wO bayeloi, v. to watch „leafeating" antelopes.
wO he, inf. hewomo, v. to watch about s. th.
wo, see, WUO, a, fowl;' cock, hen.
wo (with a scarcely audible w, wherefore often only heard
'o) pron. (indepentend wo, subjective wo-, possessive
wo — , objective — wo and — o)» we; our; us; comp.
§21,34; wodi^ntSe, we ourselves, our own; ourselves;
wohe, ourselves (reflexive obj.), wohu, we also, also
our, us also; wonon, even we, our, us; etc. etc.; woo -
before a verb indicates at the same time the future tense
(= woba-, woa-, which latter is also heard).
wO-agbaku, n. honey-comb.
woata, s. wala, n. life.
woba, n. fowl-plant, a plant.
'woba, awoba, ahoba, n. bondman, -woman (Ot. word).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
illk
wobe — wolo. 335
wob6» n. time for sleep, sleeping time; womob^, n. time
for watching; watch-time,
wobi, pi. -wobii, n. honey child, i. e. bee.
wobi, n. fowl-child, i. e. chicken.
wgbQ, n. sleeping tent, -hut.
wodS, n.; wine made of honey,
wgdel) wgdol, n. dumber.
wodelwO» n. slumbering,
wodeiwolo, n. slumberer.
wodsa, n. carving of a fowl.
w0ds6, n. coming from fishing, fr. dSe w5, v.
wod§i, pi. of wolo, n., skins, papers etc.
wodSiand, pi. -anii, n. some thing pertaining to papers,
books, etc.
WQdsi, pi. of won, n. fetishes; dsemeiawodSi, the fetishes
from there (s. dsemei), of a place.
w6d§owods0, adv. = tsotsdrotsotsorO , full; -ly.
wofe, n. fowl-dung; a kind of berries,
wofoi, V. s. wo foi, V.
wofoi = wo-ofoi, n. a very large kind of flies, horsefly;
comp. ofoi.
wogbe, wogbemo, n. cpck-crowing; a time between 3 — 4
o'clock in the morning,
wohdlo, n. fowl-seller; -dealer,
wohomo, n. fowl-selling,
woko, inf. wokomo, v. to shake, to push to and fro
(^wadfefn''); to loose; to rack; to wag.
wokolo, n. person shaking s. th.
wokomo, n. shaking, loosing, wagging etc. fr. woko, v.
wokomo and wokolomo, n., picking, i. e. eating of fowl;
comp. ko, pi. kolOy T.
woko, adv. and
wokowoko, adj. and adv. loose, shaking, tottering, rocking,
wagging („wo(felig"); loosely etc. fe — , v. to be loose,
shaking etc.
wokowokofemoy n. looseness,
wola, s. wala, n. life,
wolamo = lamo, n. dream,
wdc = hole, pi. of wo, v. to lift up.
wolenyo, irreg. pi. wolei, n. fisherman; seaman (comp. wO,
n. fishing; Adn. sea.
wolo, pi. wodsi (sometimes heard wulo, wuolo, pi. wudSi;
but comp.* also wulu, pi. wOdsi adj.) n. skin, hide (comp.
helo, hewolo) ; leather; parchment; cart; map; paper;
dbyGoogk
836 woh) — woma,
letter; book; note; any little piece of paper etc.; fe
wolo, inf. wolofemo, v. to play at carts; kane — , inf.
wolokanemo, woloAkanemo, v. to read; s. kane, v.; kpb-,
inf. wolokpomo, v. to tan (leather); nma wolo, inf. wo- '
lonfima and wolonnma, v. to write (sc. on paper); etc.;
aspatre-wolo, n. shoe-leather; tSina-wolo, n. cow-hide,
cow-leather; Aroa-wolo, writing-paper, n.; nyonniiyenii-
wolo, n. wages -book; akonta-wolo, h. account - boock,
ledger; Nyofimo wolo, n. Gods book,, holy scripture;
(s. also bible, biblia, nmale kroi^kron, Nyonmg-wiemo,
etc.); etc.
wolu, wolo, pi. wodSi, n. egg.
wolo, n. lifter; taker; elevater, exalter etc. seldom used
alone, but frequently in combinations; as hewolo, no-
wolo, etc, fr. wo, v.
wolo, n. sleeper; fr, wo, v. to sleep.
wqIo (s. yiwolo), n. outcrier, hooter; fr. wo, wq yi, v.
wolo (wuolo?), n. watcher; watcher; night-watch; night-
sentinel; comp, won, n. and wuolgmo, wolomo, n.
•wolo, wolo, inf. wolomo, v. to caugh.
wolomo, n. coughing; cough; — yemi, gba raina, cough
anoys, troubles me.
wolofelo, n. cart-player,
wolofemo, n. cart-playing.
wolohlelo, n. letter-carrier.
wolondse, n. taking away from the book; bad term for
confirmation, comp. wad§emo, n.
wolonkanelo, wolokanelo, n. reader.
wolohkanemo, n. reading.
wolonkwe, n. shool; s. kasemohe, n.
wolokpolo, n. tanner.
wolokpomo, n. tanning.
wolomo, pi. wolomei, n. lit. (person of the fetish) a kind
of fetish-priesls who have to sleep with the fetish (s. won,
n. and wO, v.); comp. woAtse, n. and see wulomo,n.
wolonnma, wolonma, n. writing (comp. Am§, nmale, n.).
wolonnmale, n. th. s.
wolonnmalo, wolonmalo, n. writer; scribe; secretary.
wolonnma - okplO, -ninalo-okpl5, n. desk; writing-desk.
wolosalo, = wolokpolo, n. tanner, dresser of leather.
wolotsolo, wolofilsolg, n. book-teacher, teacher.
wolotsomg, n. book-teaching.
woma (Ot.?), n. branch or leaf of the mountafn-cabbage or
fan-paUn-tree (gdd^ctpalme) ; s. wyeitso, n.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
woma — woAbe. 337
woma = wadurumlibi , n. pestle of the „fufu" - mortar;
(Ol.fr. wo; to pound and ba, ma, Gft: bi, little one;
comp. w^ibi, Ol. w^iama.)
womo (generally wO), n. lifting up; taking up; exaltation
etc. fr. wo, V.
womo, = wO, n. outcrying, hooting; fr. wo, v.
wOmo, n. watching; fr. w5, v.
won, pi. wodsi, n. very probably = wolo, n. watchman,
see wO, V. and wolomo, n.) fetish; idol (s. amagS, n.);
Ocj^c, Slbflott, demon; something holy or belonging
to the fetish; comp. wonkpS etc., ye won, v. inf. won-
yeli, to eat fetish, i. e. to eat s. th. prepared under fe-
tish-ceremonies, to ascertain ones truthfulness; ko m. k.
ye — , V. to eat fetish with some body, to make a cove-
nant of mutual faithfulness and assistance etc. The african
theology is shortly the following: God (Nyonmo, Na*
nyonmo, Mawu, Nyonmo Mawu) is the highest Being,
the only one, the creator of heaven and earth; the
fetishes (wodsi), heaven, earth, sea, rivers, trees etc.
but considered as spiritual or personal Beings, are his
sub-deities, whom he has given the g6vemment and
care of the world, demons, good and bad, male and
female; there are such common to all (f. i. earth, sea);
or to a part of men (rivers etc.); to a tribe, a town,
a family, a single person; a person may possess a
fetish or demon (wontse, n.) or be possessed by one
(okomfo, kramo, gbalo, otutufo, n. etc.); comp. won md
m. k. , V. (the fetish takes hold of s. b.) to be possessed
by a fetish; m. k. md won, v. to take hold of a fetish,
to possess one etc. Besides there are innumerable things
holy to, or belonging to, or made effectual by, a fetish,
as cords (woAkpdi), to be tied about the body or the
house; teeth, chains, rings, etc. worn and the likel
whidi gave rise to the absurd believe, that the African
makes any thing, even a bottle, a tork etc. his God:
and hasty travellers and other people not having time
to ask and to learn have sustained this saying, whilst
a comparison with religious things and superstitions in
the very heart of Christendom would have fully explai-
ned the matter without castmg the African together no
more with men, but with brutes. Comp. wo. Ad. th. 8.
Ot. ob6som, n.
wo^ba, n. fetish-leaf or plant.
wonbe, n. fetish-time. •
Zimmermann, Akra-Vocib. 22
dbyGoogk
338 HoAbi — wQhlalo.
>vQnbi, n. fef ish-diild ; a child given over to a feti^, or
born or cast into or baptized into a fetish, bearii^ its
name and bringing yearly sacrifices, or even serving the
fetish (or priests) the whole life -time (ild-he ke won,
V. to dash one's self to the fetish).
wonbilo, n. person asking the fetish.
wonbimQ, n. fetish-asking.
wonbc, n. fetish-cry; fetish-dress or covering.
wonbo, n. fleeing to a fetish for protection; fr. bo won, v.
wonbolo, n. person fleeing to a fetish for protection.
wonbQ, n. fetish-tent, -hut.
wonbu, n. fetish-hole; -cave.
wonbu, n. respect to the fetish, fr. bu won, v.
wQhdsalo, n., fetish - servant ; idolater; heathen; fr. dsa
won, V.
wQiidsalodsen, n. life or character of a heathen.
wondsamo, n. fetish-service; idolatry; heathenish religion.
wgndsamobe, n. time of fetish-service.
wondso, n. fetish-dance.
wondsolo, n. fetish-dancer.
wondsomo, n. blessing of the fetish.
wonfa, n. fetish-river; -brook; -lake.
wohfelo, n. fetish-maker; person preparing either idols or
things connected with the fetish.
wonfemo, n. fetish-making, -preparing.
wgngbale, n. fetish-prophesy.
wongbalQ, n. fetish-prophet.
wongbi, n. fetish-day.
wongu, n. abdication of the fetish; s. -kpamo, - kwamo,
n.; fr. gu won, v.
wongbomo, pi. -mei, n. person belonging to the fetish.
wonhe, n. fetish-place.
wonheno, pi. -henii, n. things belonging to a fetish, fur-
niture etc.
wonka, n. fetish-trial.
wonkS, n. a kind of plates given to the fetish.
woMe, n. fetish-present.
wQnkp3,n. fetish-cord, bound about the body, the houses etc.
wonkpe, n. fetish-assembly.
wonla, n. fetish-fire.
woAld, n. fetish-blood.
wonlai, n. fuel for the fetish.
wonlala, n. fetish-song.
wonlalg, n. fetish-singer.
dbyGoogk
woftlamo — woAtSe. 389
wonlamQ, n. fetish-singing.
wonlamo, n. fetish-dream.
woAJo» n. meat holy or given to the fetish.
wonlomo, n. fetish-curse.
wonlnmo, n. principal fetish.
wonmdn, n. fetish-toivn.
ivonmdAbii, pi. n. towns people of a fetish.
wonmo, pi. woftmei, n. = wongbomo, n.
wonmdlo, D. a person taking hold of, or being possessed
by a fetish; s. wQn, n. mo won, v. and won mo m.
k. V.
wonm6mo,n, possession of ? fetish ; fetish-fury; -madness,
wonmla, wonmra, n. fetish-law.
wonmumo, n. fetish-spirit.
wQnmutsuru, n. fetish-palmoil.
wQnM, n. wife of a fetish.
wQnM, n. fetish-art.
wonniitsumo, n. fetish- work, -busings,
wohniiyeli, -niiyenii, n. fetish-food.
wonn5, pi. wonnii, n. thing belonging to the fetish,
wonnu, n. fetish- water,
wonna, pi. h!, n. a male-fetish (s. won, n.).
wonnumo, n. felish-drinking; comp. wonyeli, n.
wonon, n. a kind of wide turkish trowsers, worn especially
by Mahomedans, but also by other natives in war or
travelling,
won-onukpa, n. headfetish.
won-onufu, n. fetish-snake,
won-osofo, n. fetish - priest ; s. osofo, wolomo, wohtse,
okomfo, n. etc.
wonsane, n. fetish-palaver.
wonsu, n. shape, form, character etc. of a fetish, s. su, n.
wonsuban, n. th. s.
wohsu6mo, n. fetish-service,
wonsuolo, n. fetish-servant,
wonte, n. fetish-stone,
wontemosane, n. fetish-mystery,
wontemohe, n. hiding place of a fetish,
wontdlo, n. transgressor against the fetish,
wontdmo, n. transgression against the fetish; s. td, v.
wonto, n. fetish-bottle,
wontse, pL -tsemei, n. lit. possessor of a fetish ; a person
having a fetish at his service; fetish-priest; comp. woyO;
wolomo, osofo, okomfo, n. etc. Ad. wotSe^ n.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
340 woAlSedSomo — wosehfle.
wontsedsomo , n. blessing of a fetish-priest. '
ivQntsedSO, n. dance of a fetish-priest.
woM§efemo, n. act of a fetish-priest.
wontso, pi. -t§ei, n. fetish-tree.
wontsSlo, n. fetish-teacher.
WQntsdmo, 0. change into a fetish; fetish-teaching; -doctrine.
wofit§one, n. a machine used for fetish-purposes, miracles
etc.
wont§u, n. fetish-house, -room; fetish temple; s. gbatsu, n.
wont§fllo, pi. -tsOdsi, n. fetish-servant,
wontsulo, n. performer of fetish -ceremonies, adorations,
sacrifices etc. fr. ts^ won , v. -comp. wondsalo and won-
felo, n.
wQnt§umo, n. fetish-business, fetish-work ; performance of
of fetish-ceremonies, sacrifices etc.; fr. tSu won, v.; comp.
wondsamo and wonfemo, n.
wontu, n. fetish-gun.
wonwadsemo, n. affirmation or confirmation of or by a
fetish,
wgnwe, n. fetish-house (and yard),
wonweku, n. fetish-family,
wonwebii, pi. n. fetish-domestics,
wonwenu, n. fetish-male-house-slave.
wonweyO, n. fetish-female-house-slave,
wonwiemo, n. fetish-word, -language,
wodyeli, n. s* woyeli fr. ye won, v. fetish-eating,
wonyelilo, n. s. woyebilo: fetish-eater,
wonyelisane, n. palaver of fetish-eating,
wonyi, n. fetish-head,
wonyih, n. fetish-opinion,
wonyitso, n. = wgnyi, -yin.
wonyO, n. female fetish; goddess; comp. woAnfl, wohiiSf,
woyo, n.
wQsa, n. sleeping mat.
wosane, n. palaver of to morrow, i. e. unknown, future
palaver.
WQse, n. lit. behind to morrow; day after to morrow; fu-
ture; moko lee wose, no body knows the future; adv.
the day after to morrow, in future, by and by etc.
wQsebe, n. future time.
wQsebii, pi. n. future generation; comp. blemabii ; nmgne-
bii, n. etc. /
wosedse, -dsen, n. future world, -life, -state, s. dSe, »•
WQsehlle, n. future life.
dbyGoogk
WQSenii — WOyrfilo. 341
^QS^nii, pi. n. future things. '
v^Qseno, n. sing, of the former; future thing; s. th. belong*
ing to the future.
i^osenyo, n. pi. wQsebii, future person.
vroso (= hoso), inf. iivosomo, v. to shake; to move to and
fro (y. a. and n.); sikpon woso, the earth shook; woso
or ^osomo Amele, ring (shake) the belL!
-wosolo, n. shaker; ringer.
Dvosomo, n. shaking, tossing etc.
DVQSomo, n. perching of fowl; s. s6, sdma, v*
i^osomohe, n. phce for fowl to perch on.
wosuma, n. a kind of sea-lichens.
woto, n. honey-bottle.
wQto, n. delay for or preparation for to morrow.
w^tsq! address to grown up persons: our father, comp.
ata, n.
wotse, Ad. = wontSe.
wQtse, pi. -tsemei, n. possessor, raiser of fowl.
wotsere, pi. wQtsedsi, n. fowl-feather; comp. Isere, n.
yrOtSo, n. tree containing (wild) honey.
wQtso, n. a stick for fowl to pereh on.
wotsdne, n. trap for buffaloes.
wQtsu, n. fowl-house; sleeping room, butseesetSu; comp.
wo, n.
wi^motsu, n, watch-house; fr. wO, v.
wowoIq, pi. wQwodsi, n. fowl-egg.
wQwolokao, n. cake of eggs.
wQwoloniiyenii, pi. n. food of eggs.
woya, n. going to sleep.
woya, wuoya, n. fishing (in the sea) fr. ya wo, -wuo, v.;
comp. also wolenyo, n.
woyabe, n. fishing-time, -season.
woyeli, n. eating of fowl.
woyeli (=wQhyeli), n. fetish-eating; eating of something
prepared under fetish -ceremonies by two parties as a
token o mutual faithfulness and under the ^pprehensiop,
that the party breaking the agreement will be killed by
the fetish; it is especially done by allies at war with
an enemy; aggreement, covenant etc. Comp. the making
Qf a covenant in the old Testament, and the words: ye
egbo, v.; kpS, pSn, v.
woyebilo (instead of wQ^yelilo, wonyelg), n. a party or
person eating fetish; a party of a covenant; ally,
woyelilo, n, fowl-eater.
dbyGoogk
Hi wOyeiilo — *wui.
wOyelilQ, n. honey-eater.
i/voyeli, n. sleepiness; fr. wo ye, v.
woyelilo, -yelo, n, sleepy person.
woyO (instead of wonyO, n. which compare, or woAnye,
comp: wQi&tSe, n.), n. fetish-priestess.
wQyo-atade, n. attire of a fetish-priestess,
wra, s. wara, wala, n.
wrake, wrakewrake, adj. and adv. large, -ly.
wrao, adv. unexpectedly, boldly,
wrjawra, adv. natural sound made by snakes in dry grass;
gbe — , V. to sound so.
wre, s. wySre.
wrekese, adj. and adv* rough, coarse; — ly.
wri, s. wiri, v.
wroke, v. inf. wrokemo, to be overripe (of nuts etc., that
they fall down; comp. srgke, v. of fleshy fruits); to
fall down,
wroo, V. inf. wrgomo, to be overripe, like the former,
wu, V. inf. wU, to fight, to war; wu ta, inf. tawQ, to make
war; comp. no, v.; to bath, swim (in the sea) to wallow;
wunsQ, V. to bath in the sea, inf. wumo); comp. sere, v.;
dsu, v., dsale, v., fg, v.; to be very frequent, super-
fluous,
wu nii ahe, v. to be very frequent, to lie about,
'wu, in address without possess, pronominal augment, awu;
pi. wumei, n. husband. Comp. ata, awo, aM, M etc.
Ot. kunu, Adn. hQno, n.
wu, fighting, warring, battle, fr. wu, v.; comp. ta, tawu;
ndmQ, blgmo, be, n. etc.
wu, pi. wui, n. bone; hard kernel or seed of fruit; seed;
generally used in the pi. form in the latter sence.
wub6, n. seed-time,
wubi, n. child of the husband by an other wife (if spoken
of by the wife); step-child; comp. hdbi, bienyebi, n.
wudo and
wudgwudQ, adj. and adv. weak, — ly; ye — , v. to be
weak,
wudfa, pi. wuiadframo, n. breaking of bones, bursting of
seed.
wudSen, n., life, state, character of a husband; married
stale of men; comp. yOwye, n.
WtidSi, pi. of wulu, adj. comp. also wolo, n.
wui, pi. n. seed; s. wu, n.
'wui, awui, n. murder; s. ye awui, v.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
*wuiyeli — wule. S43
''WoiyeU, n. murder; ^voaoding.
'if?uiyelo, n. murderer,
livukuomo, D. bone-breaking.
i^ula, inf. wulamo, v. to adorn; to dress; to attire; to bring
out, to perfect; to fall (s. wule, bule, v.), to end, to
come to end; etc. to be full; mimusu ewul^, I feel
putfed up.
wula he, v. inf. hewulamo, to dress, adorn, one's self.
wula hewQ, v. to dress about.
Yfula hie, inf. hlewulamo, y. to adorn the face.
>?ula mil, y. to adorn inwardly; to fall into, in; to end
in s. th.
wula na, v. to trim,*;^dress the end etc. s. na, n.
wula nane, y. to dress, adorn the foot,
wula no, inf. nowulamo, v. to dress the surface; to fall
upon; f. i. if some crime is searched out and the per-
son who committed it, found, it is said: ewula eno, it
fell upon him, or if a person curse an* other, he ans-
wers: omusu awula ono, may thy curse fall upon thy-
self! —
wula nine, y. to adorn the hand, arm.
wula sa, y. to dress the bed.
wula se, y. to adorn the backpart, behind,
wula si, inf. siwulamo, y. to fall or come to the ground;
to be perfect; ehi kg wula si, it is good and perfect or
to perfection; a still more peculiar phrase is; yi yawula
si, the head comes to the ground, it is perfect, &iished;
done, f. i. beni yi yawula si, adyerbial sentence = at
last; lastly; cnMic^, jwl^^t; when it came to the end — .
wula yi, — yit§o, y. to dress, adorn the head ; hif. yiwu-
lamQ.
wulalQ, n. dresser, adorner, outfitter, fr. wula, y.
wulalond, n. outfitters-art; dressing art.
wulamo, n. adornment; dress; attire; (S^mucf; perfection,
end; fall; fr. wula, y.; comp. expressions as: hUe kg
wulamg, good with perfection, i.e. perfect goodness, etc.
wularngbg, n. dressing time.
WuIamQgbena, n. order, manner of dressing,
wule, inf. wuIemQ, y. a. and n. to fall, break, crumble,
tumble down; einPflrjcn, einfaflcn; s. wula, y.; to bruise;
comp. bule, y:; to fall down (of a dress), i. e. to be
to long; atade le ewule ya, the dress is far to long;
comp. also wu, y.
dbyGoogk
344 widek^ — woyA.
wuleke, D. guilt, kpe — fd m. L bo, ▼. to biag gnSt «pott
s. b. comp. wide, y. and ke, n.
wulelo* D. a person breaking something down, hurting
s. th. etc.
wnlemOy n. fall; roin; braise; length (of dress).
Words not found under ^wn*" * most be soaght for
under „wo^ •», comp. the introductory remark under
W.;f.i.
wolo = wolo, n. hide, skin, leather; paper, book (pi. wodsi).
wulo, n. warrior; bather, diyer; fr. wu, v.
wulo, wnolo, wqIo, n. egg.
wolo, wolo, y. to cough.
wulokg, n. 9Bei^n)a{ier?
wolomo = wolomo, n. highest fetish-priest.
wulotio, pi. -t§ei, n. oar; s. wirimotso, n.
*wulu, ewulu, pi. wudsi, adj. great, large, big; comp. kple,
kpetenkple, adj. and da, v.
wuludQ = wuruda, adj. and adv. cold; cool; clear; coldly,
cooly; clearly,
wumo, n. bathing, divmg, wallowing; frequency; jsuper-
fluity; commonness,
wumotekle, wumotfakoto, n. bathing^^dress.
'wuM, awuM, n. jealousy,
'wundsane, n. palaver of jealousy,
'wunayeli, n. jealousy,
•wuftayelo, n. jealous person,
wuo == wO, n. buffalo; frequent in the neighbourhood of
the river Volta.
wuokon, n. buffalo-horn,
wuowolo, n. buffalo-hide,
wuo = wo, n. honey,
wuo = wo, n. fowl,
wuowolo = wowolo, n. fowl-egg.
wuo = wo, n. fishing (or sea, s. wo, AdA. n. sea); ya-, v.
to go afishing in the sea; s. wolenyo, n.
wuoya, = woya, n. fishing,
wurudo = wuludu, adj. and adv.
wu§o = n§o, n. sea (comp. wo, Adn. n. sea, and yio,
Ayigbe, th. s.).
wuta, s. wu and wu ta, v.
wut§Q, pi. -tsemei, n. husbands father, father in law; s.
Sana, n.
wuya, n. going to war fr. wu, v. ya wu, v. to go to war.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
wuyft — wyi hie. 345
-wujd, adj. and adv. loose, wide; -ly, -ly; oottnp. yO, adj.
and adv.
'iv^a, owya, n. a small bush-animal of the size of a weasel;
the name is an imitation of its cry.
yvy^, inf. wye, v. to marry (% woman, only said: of a man,
8. gba, v.); -yO, inf. yowyi, v. the same; to live in the
state of matrimony with a woman; to live with a woman
(also unlawfully) for a longer season; s. ke-WQ, y. and
kpe yO, V.
wye, n. inarriage (with a woman); matrimony; comp. yo-
wye, gbS and gbla, n.; yokpemo, n.
wyedsen, n. married life, state of matrimony; living with
a woman,
wyega, n. marriage-ring,
wyegbena, n. marriage-custom, -right, -manner.
i^yei, n. black pepper; the fruit of the mountain -cabbage
(gdc^expalmc), of the size of a child's-head, reddish yel-
low colour and taste similar to that of a gourd or bump-
kin. Comp. also gbgwyei and anaiwyei, two different
kinds of black pepper; and peo, n. dan. word, used for
black pepper, if imported-
wyeitso, pi. -tsei, n. shrub, producing black pepper* moun'>
tain-cabbage (%ai)tx)palmt).
wyekenii, n. marriage-presents.
wyemama, n. cloth given at marriage.
wyenii, pi. n. dowry ; gift to a woman in entering marriage ;
comp. gblanii, yokpemonii, n.
wyere, inf. wyeremo, v. to warm one'sself; to be wafmed;
to be burned; ewyere hulCi, he is burned by the sun.
wyere, n. Ot. (= ml, n. in GS) the chestbone; wyere ho
he and wyere ho, inf. wyereho, v. to be sad,, cast down;
comp. ewyere eho ehe^ he is sad.
'wyereho, awyereho, n. sadness.
'wyerehofo, n. sad person.
wyeremo, n. warming; burning.
wyesa, n. marriage-bed.
wyesane, n. matrimonial palaver.
wyetseremo, n. divorce.
wyi, inf. wyl, v. to avoid, to pass by; au^aei^cn; wyi te,
to avoid a stone in digging or walking.
wyi he, inf. hewyl, hewyimo, v. to draw one's self aside;
to shove one's self out of the way; wyi- ohe fio, make
a little way,
wyi hie, v. to avoid^ the face; to turn the face.
dbyGoogk
346 wyi na — Y.
ii^yi na, v. to avoid the edge etc.
yiy\, n. evasion; avoiding; passing by; going aside.
yifyit, =a i/vie, v. to speak.
i^fyielQ, n. = wielo, n. speaker.
wyiemg, n. «= wiemo, n. ipeaking.
wyie, 11^. wyiemQ, v. to grini corn on the common native
miU, consisting of a large flatt stone which is fixed and
on which the women grind with an egg-shaped small
stone (Ot. th. s.); comp. also gble, v.
wyie, n. mill; large millstone which is fixed, under mill-
stone.
wyiebi, n. (Ot. wyiema) the small or upper mill -stone,
which is handled by the grinding woman.
wyiefemg, n. mill-making.
wyiegba, n. breaking or quarrying of millstones.
wyielo, n. grinding woman; (miller).
wyieyo, n. th. s.; yo wyielo, th. s.
wyielolala, n. song of grinding women.
wyifemo, n. grinding.
wyiemobe, n. grinding time.
wyiemogbemo, n. sound of the mills.
wyiese; n. place behind the mill, where the grinding wo-
man stands; comp. the costums of the Bible.
wyiesesane, n. palaver of grinding women; see the next
word.
wyiesewiemo, n. talk, prattle; ®en)dfdS^e, ®ef(]^n)d^e; such
as women use to have when grinding in company.
wyi§§i, n. grinding-place, where one or several mills are
standing, to which the baking-ovens or stoves are added;
comp. latesi; kpatasi, n. etc.
wyiete, n. = wyie, n. millstone.
wyietso, n. scaffolding of a mill.
wjietsu, n. mill-room.
wyieyo, pi. -yei, n. grinding woman.
wyimQ = wyl, n.
wyiri, = wiri, v. to row.
wyiwylwyi, adj. and adv. thin; -ly; fe -, v. to be thin.
wyoroke, or
wyeroke, s. wroke, v.
T.
The semivowel y as well as w has the peculiarity,
that the liquid consonants m and n always except the
palatal form ft if preceeding it; before i (as in yi,
dbyGoogk
Ya — ya dfdaft, 347
jitSo, yitSoii Yilo, n. etc.) it is sometimes scarcely heard
and sometimes it is pronounced a strong hissing sound
betwixt y, z and s, so in yi, v. to flogg; Ayisft and
AsisS (Azisft), Ayigbe pr. n. of the mouth of the Yolta.
Ya, inf. yS, aorist, perfect «id fut. tense poss. ,,te'', v.
to go (Ol. ko); a verb ftr more frequently employed
as notional and auxil. verb, than „go" and „ge^cn"; to
move; to remove (v. n.); ke m. k. or n. k. ya; to go
with s. b. or s. th.; to take off; to bring away, to re-
move, to accompany; etc.; aux. v. to indicate the direc-
tion from near to far (s. ba, v. the contrary), and always
prefixed to verbs preceeded by a verb of movement in
this direction; 6ya n) eyafe noko, he is going (to go)
to do s. th.; comp. the „©affeK)utfc^" dialect of Basle:
„\ will go gd luegd'S I will go to look; in this way
ya (or ba) is combined with the notional verh in all its
tenses, s. § 27. 28 and the tables; a different combina-
tion, corresponding with an english and gennan is that
with the following verb in the infinitive, as: ya femo,
go to do, ge(ien ju t()un, ju madl^en; ya wa, to go to
war, fricgcn flcfeen, in ben Six\e% ge^en etc. Also ke-ya
(ke-te) is used as an auxiliary verb very frequ^tly (s.
kg, V. ke-ya, v. ke-ba, v.) to express the direction of an
action, as: Enyleo ke-yaa Gd, he walks (and goes) to
Akra ; eyin ke-te Osu, he went off (and went) to Chri-
stiansborg; comp. also ke-yasi, v.; ke-t§6, ke-dse etc.
and in Ot. de-ko, ba, fi, v. etc.
ya afi, v. to go aside.
ya ba, V. to go to come; used in a parting salutation:
Miya ba! (1 go to come!) pi. WoyS ba! (We goto come!)
Good bye! Answer: Ya ba dsogba! pi. Nyeyaa ba dso-
gba! (Goto come well!) Farewell! (3omp. Ot. Ya brao!
Ya Owura! etc. in salutation-forms,
ya-ba, double v. to go and return; miya maba, I Will go
(and return); to go to and fro; 6ya eba, he goes to
and fro.
ya e! Answering salutation to aiko or eiko, ei nye ko!
which see (pcrh. = go well!)
>a dan, v. to go into the mouth, i. e. to be eatable; ene
yaa mo dan, this does not go into one's mouth, is not
eatable,
^a d§ano, v. to go to market.
ya dfeiaA, v. to go to the necessary (lit. inio the grass);
comp. ya tso no* v. etc.
dbyGoogk
818 ya CI — ya t8o nft.
;a fjB, inf. ftyft, v. to go lo the river, well, brook, water,
generally to draw water (s. ye nu, v.), but also to bath,
wash etc.
ya gbobimo, v. to go shooting, s. ya mile, v.
ya he, — hewo, v. to go |t s. th., about s. Ih.
ya hie, inf. hleyS, v. to go a]|ead, forward, on ; to prosper ;
comp. ya ng, v.
ya ko, — koA, v. to go into the bush.
ya ko na, v. to go to the necessary; s, ya t§o no, v. etc.
ya kose, v. to go to the plantation, country; s. kose and
mHik, n.
yakpo no, v. to go into the yard; i. e. -outside (comp.
Hebr. nfTi and the contr. ya t§un, v.).
ya lai, v'. to go for wood, fuel (comp. le lai).
ya mftn, v. to go to town (contr. of ya kose, v.)«
ya manse, v. to go over land, far away; in bie ^rembe
ge^en (comp. ya §Ia, n.).
ya mile, t. to go ahunting.
ya mli, inf. mliyd, y. to go in, into; to enter = bote; to
hold = ho, ho mli, v.; contracted: yafi, v,
ya musun, y. to enter the belly, used of medicin, poison
etc,,* comp. ya dan, v.
ya na, v. to go at, along, according to etc.
ya nil ase, v. to go to the necessary; s. ya tSo ng etc.
ya hmdh, v. to go to the plantation, to work on the plan-
tation,
ya ng, inf. noya, y. to go upon; to go on, to proceed
(comp. ya hie, y.); to prosper; to thriye, s. ho, y., fi, y.,
fere, y.
ya nane no, y. to go on foot,
ya niitSumo, y. to go to work,
ya m. k. nd, y. to go to s. b., inf. Adya.
ya nuye, y. to go for water,
ya pa = ya fa, n. th. s.
ya se, inf. seya, y. to go back, behind etc.
ya segbe, y. to go backward.
ya sese, t. to go backward,
ya §i, y. to go downward; to go under s. th.
ya §i§i, y. to go down; s. yi Si, y.
ya Sla, y. to go home; = ya mah, y. s. §la, n.; and =
ya we, y.
ya ta, y. to go to war = ya wu, y.
ya t§o no, y. to go to the necessary; s. tSo no, ko na,
pii ase; etc.
dbyGoogk
ya tSuA — yaya'- ^*'
ya t§un, v. lit. to go into the room, inside etc. Con^.
hcbr. nn^2 and the contr. ya kpo no, ▼•
ya wa, v., and
ya wa nane, v. == ya tso no, v.
ya we, v. to go home; comp. ya s!a, v.
ya wo, V. to go to sleep; miya wO, I go to sleep! i. e-
Good night! Answ. \a wo dSogba! Go sleep well!
ya wa, V. to go to war = ya ta, v., to go bathing,
ya wuo, inf. wuoyS, or
ya wO, inf. wOya, v. to go afishing; s. wO, woo, n.
ya, n. going, walk; movement; comp. hetsimo, ba, n. etc.
and nylemo, n.
ya, n. net, fishing-net; fd -, v. inf. yafd, to cast the net;
comp. gbe lo; he, v. etc.
ya, n. wonder, astonishment; Ad. th. s.; only used in the
phrase: fe ya, v. and Me fe ya, v. inf. yafemo and hle-
yafemo, v. to be astonished, to wonder; comp. na kpe
he, fe nakpe, he dS6, v. etc. Perhaps the word is con-
• nected with
ya, shortened from ySra, n. funeral-custom; s. yara,y«ra, n.
yabe, n. time of going.
yafelo, n. person wondering = hieyafelo, ij.
yafelo, n. partaker of a fimeral-custom, fr/fe ya = ySra, v.
yafemo = hfeyafemo, n. astonishment, wonder; s. nakpe,
ahubo, n. etc.; fr. fe ya, v.
yafemo = ySrafemo, n. performance of the funeral-custom;
fr. fe yftra, ySra, ya, v.
yafo, n. weeping; lamentation; comp. ya = ySra, n. and
fo, V. Ad. th. s. from foya, v. to weep,
yafolo, n. weeper,
yafonu, pi. -nui, n. tear.
yaf5, n. net-casting,
yafdlo, n. person casting a net.
yahe, n. place of going to. Negbe d§i oyahe? lit. Where
is thy goingplace? Where are yau going to? What are
you walking about?
yahegbe, n. liberty to go.
yaiyai, adj. and ady. naked; -ly; yaiyai, n. nakedness; ke
ehe yaiyai; naked; ny!e — , v. to walk naked,
yaiyaiaft, n. lit. in nakedness; nakedness,
yaiyainylelo, n. naked person,
yaiyainylemo, n. walking naked. '
yayai, a^j. etc. etc. th. s.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
850 yaka — yfilo.
yaka, n. vanity, nothingness; nonsense; immorality; adj.
and adv. useless, vain, good for nothing; uselessly, vain-
ly; umfonfi; ke — , v. to give gratis.
yakabi, n. a bad child.
yakadSen, n. vain, bad, useless life, state or charakter.
yakayaka, n. adj. and adv. (corroboration of the former);
th. s.; fe — , to act immoraly; comp. fe yakavakanii, v.
th. 8. *
yakayakagbomo, pi. -mei, n., and
yakayakamo, pi. -mei, n. a vain, empty, useless, immoral
person.
yakayakaniifelo , n. fool (in scriptural sense) ; person com-
mitting immoral acts.
yakayakaniifemo, n. foolishness; nonsense; vain act; im-
morality.
yakayakand, pi. -nii, v. vain, empty, useless, immoral thing,
act or deed; fe yakayakanii, v. to do such things, espe-
cially to lead a dissolute, unchast life; to commit "whore-
dom; comp. the next word and bo adfaman, nyennyen-
tsui, ahofi etc.
yakayakaniifelo, n. = yakayakafelo, n.
yakayakaniifemo, n. = yakayakafemo , and
yakayakaniitsiimo, n. useless, empty, vain, immoral, sinful
work, act, lewdness, unchaslity etc.; fe — , v. to commit
such acts = fe yakayakanii.
yakasane, n., and
yakayakasane, n. a vain, empty, bad matter or palaver.
yakandke, n. (a noun found only by W. Hanson = noko
ni ak^o yaka, something which is given gratis) grace; gift
of grace; comp. anumnyam, hienyam; domo, dromo etc.
}^akasedT, n. vain lust, desire.
yakasedilo, n. person desiring after vain things.
yakatfa, adj. and adv. useless, vain; -ly; -ly; -p6, guite
useless, -ly; -kwa, th. s.
yakayakatSe, pi. -mei, n. a vain, useless person = yaka-
yaiagbomo^ n.
yakayakawiemo, n. vain, empty, useless, bad word, -lan-
guage.
yakayakayO, pi. -yei, n, bad woman.
yakp«i n. net-cord.
yMa, n. s. ySra, y6ra, ya, n.
yale, n. engl. yard, the place as well as the measure;
s. kpo, kpo no, mdnten; and kuku, abas^, n.
yal6, n. net-weaving.
dbyGoogk
yalo — ye. 35t
yal6> n. the goer; scarcely used except in compounds.
yalolo, D. netweaver.
yaii, = ya mli, v. to go in.
yano (ya no), n. lit. on or at the ftineral- custom (comp.
dsa and dSano, M and ndno> asa and asano etc.); ete
yang (or ya no), he went to the funeral-custom.
yanobii, pi. n. people at the funeral-custom.
yanods, n. spirit drunk at a funeral custom.
yangdSd, n. funeral dance.
yanodSolo, n. funeral-dancer.
yanomama, n. funeral-dress.
yanotSe, pi. -mei, n. person leading a funeral custom.
yaratSe, th, s. (more used).
yanotutfa, n. funeral-gunfire.
yanotutfalo,. n. person firing guns at a funeral-custom.
yanotutsofS, n. funeral-gun-powder.
yanowe, n. funeral-house.
yanoya, n. going to a funeral-custom.
yanoyO, pi. -yei, n. woman at a funeral-custom.
ySra, yfira, = ya, yang, n. funeral-custom, consisting of
many ceremonies, as washing dressing and providing for
the corps, as well as the actual burial; weeping, lamen-
tation, singing, dancing, mm-^or palm -wine drinking,
gun-firing etc., sometimes days and weeks together* In
later ^periods all this is repeated. Formerly, and even
now, when it can be done secretly, men, especially wives
and slaves are slaughtered on the graves of people of
importance to accompany and serve them in the world
to come. Fe — , v. inf. ySrafemg, to perform this
custom. Comp, ya, yang, n. and their compounds.
yarafelg, n. a person attending the funeral-custom.
yftrafemg, n. funeral-custom; performance of the funeral-
custom; = yafemg, n. y^rafemg, n.
vasamg, n. net-mending.
yasi, ke-yasi, keyasi, aux. v., see ki, aux. v. and ya, aux. v.
and si, aux. v.
yayam, Adn. n. = esa, sin; pe yayam = fe esa, v. to
do sm.
yayampem, Ad. n. = esafemo, n. sinning, sin.
yayampelg. Ad. n. = eSafelg, n. sinner.
ye, inf. ye and yeli, impert. ye, nyeyea, v. (Adn. th. s.,
Ot.'di) to eat, to feed (v. n.), to devour, to destroy;
to effect; to anoy, to gnaw, to trouble; ^ttwalttn, f^ttt^
f^ett; fKtItcn; to have to do with, to occupy; to enjoy;
dbyGoogk
Mi ye.
to use, to use up; to live, to live by; to treat; to trans-
act; to negotiate; to spend; to commit; to behave, to
behave as s. th., to keep the office of, to be (comp. le,
nu, ml, fe he mit§umo, fite; fe, bo, t§u, ba; ye, dsi, v.
' • etc.). This very frequently and extensively employed
verb (for ivhich not only the same idea in other afric.
languages is to be compared, but also in German, Engl.,
Latin, Greek, Hebrew) is generally clearly defined by its
subject or object or bolh; without object it can only be
used in the first sense and even then the object is thought
to it or „nii** (things) added. The most common com-
binations are the following:
1) with other verbs (double-verbs): he n. k. ye,
inf. reg. hemo ke yeli, irreg. heyeli (Adn. th. s., inf. hem
ke yem, Ot. gye-di), lit. to take (except, buy) and eat,
i. e. to believe s. th.; he m. k. ye, and: he m. k. no'
ye, to believe s. b. ; to believe in (upon, on) s. b.; in
Ayigbe and Aku or Yoruba the same two ideas are com-
bined to express that of believing; comp. also: hie ka
m. k. or n. k. no; n5 h!e fd no; md mli; hie mli^ v.
etc. ha m. k. n. k. ye, v. to give s. b. s. th. to eat; ho
n. k. or m. k. ye, v. to sell s. th. or s. b. for use (and
use); ke n. k. ye, i^^to «at with s. th.; ke m. k. ye, v.
to agree with s. b. ; and ke m. k. ye na, v., Jo nego-
tiate, to transact business with s. b., to bargain with
s. b. ; ke m. k. ye nii, v. to eat with s. b. ; lo n. k. ye,
V. to take s. th. up to eat; mo -ye, v. to catch or take
hold and eat; na-ye, v. to see, find, have to eat, to
wish to eat; no-ye, v. to take to eat; to eat with, =
ke-ye nii, v.; sa-ye, v. to prepare to eat; §a-ye, v. to
roast and eat; se-ye, v. to let s. th. come to eat; §i-
ye, V. to fry to eat; tao-ye, v. to seek to eat; to-ye, v.
to keep to eat; tse-ye, v. to pluck s. th. to eat; etc. etc.
Similar combinations will, according to the above, easily
be understood; and also the syntax of such sentences;
f. i. mihe Nyonmo no miye, 1 believe in God; mikele
yeo, 1 aggree with him; amekemi ye na ShQ, they bar-
gained with me a long time; mike awale ye nii, 1 eat
with a spoon; ekemi ye nii fane, he dined with me;
eh6 ebi po eye, he sold even his child and (eat) used
it (sc. the money); Sua gbomei pi eye, he has (got)
. many men for use; ehSmni noko miye, he gave me s. th.
to eat etc.
2) with a grammatical subject: fe! ye, inf. fei-
dbyGoogk
ye — ye amim. 353
yeli, V. to be cold; to have cold fever; fel yemi, I am
cold (mic^ friert c«); samo ye, v. inf. s&noyeli (obscen),
to feel necessity to make water; hdmo ye, v. to be
troubled by hunger; to hunger; hdmo yemi, I am hungry;
kona (tsono, dfeiafi, niiase etc.) ye, v. obscen, to feel
necessity to go to the necessary; kumai ye, v. to be
troubled by thirst, to thirst; hela ye, v. =?= he ye, v.
to be sick; inf. helayeli; heyeli (but comp. he -ye and
ye he, v.); mli ye, v. to be troubled inwardly; musufi
ye, v. - - in the belly; t§ui ye, v. to be troubled in the
heart; mitsui nye, I am troubled; wo ye, inf. woyeli, v.
to be sleepy; wo yele, he is sleepy; comp. wo lo m. k.;
etc. other moje figurative expressions as: fa ye SikpoA,
the river eats the land; ta ye mei pi, war devoured
many; etc. will easily be understood after these;
3) with a grammatical or otherwise modifying
object:
ye n. k. abo, inf. aboyeli, v. to swing in s. th., eye koyo
abo, he swings in 'the air; moko yakwoo atfele ni aaSa
ye esisi ni eeye koyo abo, prv. nobody ascends a ladder
that is shall be snatched away under him and he swing
in the air.
ye 6boi, v. to be a houseboy, to serve as a boy; s. ye
kuple; etc. inf. nboiyeli.
ye ablade, inf. abladeyeli, v. to be or act as a nobleman,
8. ablade.
ye ad§ato or ad§oto, v. to have the yaws; s. adsato, n.
ye adufude, v. to be intemperate. ♦
ye afS, V. inf. afayeli, to take, to be on, to act on, one side.
ye afi, inf. afiyeli, v. to live or use or spend or pass away
or be old a year; to celebrate the new year, - - a cer-
tain day in the year; bad ?ReuiaJ)r begc^cn, cincn
Sa^rdtag bege^^en; miye afii 30, I am 30 years old;
always to be construed with the perfect tense; Josef eye
afli 30, Josef is (and was) 30 years old; etc. Comp.
ye gbi, - gbldstird; - otyi etc.
ye agbo, v. to become great, honourable; inf. agboyeli.
ye ahe, s. ye he, = ye amehe.
ye ah!, v. inf. ahlyeli, to boast against anoAer; to mock;
f. i. if 8. b. has got s. th. and the other not, and the
first boast against him, it is said: Eyele ahl.
ye amim (prh. = anim, Ot. = face), inf. amimyeli, v. to
wrong, cheat one; ubet»ottf)Ctten ; eyemi amim, he
wronged me.
Zimmermaan, Akra-Vocab. 23
Digitized by VjOOQIC
364 ye amralo — ye fa.
ye amralo or amrado, v. to be governor.
ye ana, s. ye na.
ye mo, s. ye no.
ye anokwa, fcnokwale, inf. aDQkwayeli, v. to be true.
ye apa, inf. apayeli (Ot. di apa), v. to go or work for hire,
to live by hirework; eye — , he does hirework; comp.
bo apa, V.
ye asafoafSe, v. to be headman of a company; see asa-
fotse, n^
ye ase, s. ye se.
ye-a§isi, s. — si, §isi.
ye aten, v. to settle betwixt two parties; s. bu atcn, v.
and ye sane, v.
ye awui (Ot. di awui; awui = death), inf. awuiyeli, v.
to kill; to wound, to hurt; gbekg le ke kakla le aye
ehe awui, the child will hurt itself with the knife.
ye awun9, inf. awunSyeli, v. to be jealous; ke m. k. ye -,
- - - with s. b.; s. awuM, n.
ye aye, v. inf. ayeyeli, to bewitch;' eyemi aye, she be-
witched me; s. aye, n.
ye ayilQ, v. to be justified; from the custom of sprinkling
ayilQ or white clay on the right arm of the acquitted
person (also used as a sign of virginity ot a newly mar-
ried woman the day after the weddiag).
ye ba, bai, v. to eat or live by leaves or plants; comp.
bayelo, n. •
ye be, v. to spend time; s. ye afi, gbl etc.
ye hem (Ot. di hem), inf. bemyeli, v. to be innocent, free
of guilt; righteous; comp. ye fo, v. bu hem and fo, v.;
d§a, v., dSadse, v.
ye buada, inf. buadayeli (Ot. di buada), v. to fast; comp.
hi nmS, V.
ye dfei, v.- to live upon grass.
ye dsra, inf. dsrayeli, v. to trade.
ye ed§iird, v. inf. edsiirdyeli, to be benefitted; comp. fe
edStirC, v.
ye egbo, inf. egboyeli, v. to be alike; ke m. k. ye egbo,
to be like s. b., to be the same in rang, state ete.
ye emu, inf. lanuyeli, v. to be whole (and holy ?), to be
innocent, intact; chast; sound, entire etc. s. emu and
mu, adj. in Gd and Ot.; eyee emu, it is not whole.
ye esa, inf. eSayeli, v. to be in disadvantage, tm 9{a^(iett
fepn; contr. of ye edstiro.
ye fa, inf. fayeli, v. to have the Guineaworm („fa**).
dbyGoogk
ye ft — ye heU. 355 ^
ye ft, V. (s. ye afi) to eat a part, half etc.
ye feo, V. inf. feoyeli, to joke, to mock.
ye m. k. he feo, v. to mock one; to make one a joke.
ye fo, inf. foyeli, v. to be guilty; unrighteous etc. to be
condemnable; the contr. of ye hem, v.; comp. fo, n.
ba fo,-v.
ye frl, inf. friyeli, v. to be free; comp. ye he, v.
ye gbe, v. to take away place or space.
ye m. k. gbekg, v. to be younger than s. b.; comp. ye
onukpa, t.
ye gbeye, inf. gbeyeyem, Adn. v. = §e gbeye, to fear, be
afraid.
ye gb!, inf. gbiyeli, v. to life, enjoy, use, spend, celebrate
a day; maye gbll ekpa ye d§ei, I will spend -six days
there. Comp. ye afi, — nydA, ol§i etc. A peculiar ex-
pression to be remarked is : „ Yee gb! ko" (instead „ayee
gbi ko", „not a day was passed"") = soon after, soon
afterwards; comp. „fe se le", „fe fio", „ye no gbll le
amli"", and other conjunctive or adverbial sentences, in
which the form- or auxiliary verb has lost its subject.
^e gbidsiiro, inf. gb!dsdr5yeli, v. to celebrate a festival, to
keep a holy day; comp. edsdrd, adj.
ye gbljgbli, v. to be lunatic; inf gbligbliyeli.
ye gbo, s. ye egbo, v.
ye gbomo, v. to use a person; to seH a person and spuid
the money.
ye gbosinii, v. to inherit things left by a deceased person ;
inf. gbosiuiiyeli.
ye gidigidi, inf. gidigidiyeli, v. to be confused.
ye guo (Ot. di gwa), inf. guoyeli, v. to trade. .
ye hSmo, inf. hSmQyeli, v. to go or be in advance; see
hSmo, n. nyie bimo> v. ts5 hSmo, yi hSmo, v.
ye he, ye hewo, v. to eat about, of s. th.
ye he, v. refl., inf. heyeli, to enjoy, use etc. one's self,
to be free, at liberty, a free man; comp. ye m. k. nydft,
V. the contr., and he kS, v., ye fn, v. and see: he ye, v.
and he -ye, v.
ye be amim, v. to wrong one's self.
ye he awui, v. to hurl one's self; to kill one's self; s. ye
awui, V.
ye he ifeo, inf. hefeoyeli, v. to mock at.
ye he no, v. to govern one's self; s. ye no, v.
ye hela, v. to have a sickness.
23*
dbyGoogk
356 ye h!e — ye nkdnya.
ye "hie, = ye amim, inf. hieyeli, v. to deceive, (o cheat,
to v?rong.
ye h5mo, v. to be hungry; s. h5mo ye, v.
ye hQlO, v. to enjoy the sun.
ye ka, v. to live upon crabs,
ye ko, V. to take away or use up the bush (by cultivating,
building etc.); comp. ye gbe, sikpofi etc.
ye koloi, v. to live upon animals.
ye kon (dan.), v. lo be king; s. ye mant§e» v. Ad. th. s.
ye kdnira (Ot. di kdnim), inf. kSnimyeli, v. to gain the
victory; to overcome; = ye no, gbe ta na, v. etc.
ye kuple, V. to be a cooper,
ye kpekpeo, inf. kpekpeoyeli, v. to glean,
ye kpiti, inf. kpitiyeli, v. to be leprous; s. kpiti, n.
ye lo, V. to be flesh-eating; to live upon meat, fish, flesh;
inf. loyeli.
ye lumo, inf. lumoyeli, v. to be a governor, prince etc.
s. lumo, n.
ye mfin no, inf. mai&noyeli, v. to rule the town,
ye mSnnii, v. to enjoy or use public property,
ye mdnnye, inf. mannyeyeli, v. to be queen; s. mannye, tu
ye mSht§e, inf. mantSeyeli, v. to be king; s. mftAtSe; ye
n. k. no mSntse, to be king over s. th.; comp. fe mafi-
tse, V. and wo mantSe, v.
ye mantSo nii, v. to be heir of the king: s. ye nii, v.
ye mensre, v. to be doctor,
ye mli, v. to eat inside.
ye m. k, ah!, no, se etc., s. ye ahl, se, no etc.
ye na, inf. nayeli, v. to bargain, to negotiate; ke m. k.
- -, V. - - vnth s. b.
ye nddsian, inf. nSdsianyeli, v. to take one's place, to act
or be in one's stead ; mibi aye minSdsian, my son shall
take my place; to be instead ^f, to represent etc.; s.
nddSiaA, n.; damo nSidsian, yi nSidsian, v.
ye nii, inf. niiyeli, v. to eat („things", so that the verb
cannot be mistaken); to enjoy, possess, inherit things;
mone aye minii, this person will be mine heir,
ye nii ano, v. to hold, possess, rule, inherit etc. things,
ye nkomo (Ot. di nkomo), inf. nkomoyeli, v. to be sad;
to mourn. ,
ye nkdnya, inf. nkdnyayeli, v. to do wonders (as sorcerers
do); to enchant; = fe afal, v.; «. nkdnya, n.; okomfo,
n. and comp. the Ot. v. konu
dbyGoogk
ye no — ye sreftke. 357
ye no, inf. noyeli, v. to hold, to keep; to observe, to
obey, ameye Nyonmo kitai le ano, they kept the com-
mandments of God; comp. md mli, to, fe, bo toi, gbe
na etc.; to rule, to govern, tegteren, ujalten; to have
power over; to inherit, to possess etc., to gain the vic-
tory = ye konim, v.
ye nla, v. to be double; s. bo mpaii, v.
ye m. k. nydn, inf. nydnyeli, v. to make, treat, keep, use
s. b. as a slave.
ye nyontso, inf. nyontsoyeli, v. to master; to lord; to rule;
^ertWcn; to be master, lord, possessor; ye n. k. no
nyontso, to be master over s. th.
ye Nyonmo-abolo, v. and
ye Nyontso-niiyenii, v. to take the Lords supper.
ye odase, inf. odaseyeli, v. to bear witness, to witness; ye
m. k. he odase, to bear witness about s. b.
ye of6, inf. of6yeli, v. to forage; s. na ofo, v. th. s.
ye ok6mfo, v. to be a diviner, s. okomfo, n.
ye onukpa, inf. onukpayeli, v. to be old; to be an old
person, an elder, a grandee; s. onukpa, n.; ye m. k.
onukpa, v. to be older than s. b., comp. ye gbeke;
eyemi onukpa afe afii ekpa, he is about 6 years older
than I; but comp. Nyonmo dsi onukpa, God is the oM
one, without comparison.
ye otsame, v. to be speaker.
ye otsi, v. to spend a week; to celebrate a week.
ye oy^, V. to be quick; s. fe and he fe oyd, v. th. s.
ye oyai, oy^ya, v. th. s. •
ye sane, inf. saneyeli (Ot. di asem), v. to settle or judge
a matter, palaver etc. to lead or plead ones tause; to
defend one; comp. kodso, v., bu aten, v., ye ateft, v.;
fa he, v., dsie na, v. etc.
ye so, inf. seyeli, v. to cheat, hurt, deceive s. b., eye mise,
he cheated me; comp. sisi, sisiu, v.; and na se, v.
ye segbe, v. to have to do behind.
ye seke, inf. sekeyeli, v. to be mad; to rave; to rage;
also figuratively used of love, lust, desire, zeal, bravery,
etc. of animals, when very lively unruly, wild etc. f. i.
okpongo nye seke, the horse is wild; comp. yin kg, v.,
yin ts6, v., dfim, v.
ye s^mo, v. to be steward, headboy, assistant etc., see
semo, n.
ye Sfio, V. to be the next in age, rang, etc.; s. seo, n.
ye srenke, v. to be carpenter.
dbyGoogk
358 yc Si — ye.
ye 8i, v. to eat s. th. down.
ye Sikpojd, v. to occupy the ground, the land; to take away
place, comp. ye gbe, v.; to use the land,
ye Sikpojd no, v. to govern the land,
ye §i§i, v. to eat the rest; to have to do with the reason
of any thing,
ye ta no, v. to be over the army,
ye tatSe, v. inf. tatSoyeU, to be field-marshal; §eIbf^aupN
man fepn; s. tatSe, n.
ye lipen, inf. tipenyeli, v. to be of the same age; ke m. k.
ye — , V. to be as old as s. b. ; comp. ye onukpa, v.
ye to, -toi, v. to live upon or by small cattle,
ye t§e , V. to be father, author, possessor of s. th. or s. b.,
s. tse, n. ; wo m. k. tse, v.
ye tSeiayibii, v. to live upon fruits,
ye tso, n. to eat, gnaw, spoil wood,
ye t§ofdtse, V. to be doctor, s. tsofKtse, n.
ye tsu, V. to spoil a room,
ye wa, v. to live upon snails; to eat snails,
ye wo, V. to live upon fowl,
ye wolo, V. lit. to eat the book; to swear by kissing the
bible after the english fashion of swearing.
j^^ won, inf. wonyeli, generally woyeli, v. to eat food pre-
pared by fetish-ceremonies to test one's fidelity; ke m.
k. ye woA, V. to make a covenant with s. b.; s. won, n.
ye wonnii, v. to have to do with fetis^things.
ye wonsane, v. to be attached to the cause of the fetish;
s. tsu woi^, V. and wonsane\ n., to settle a fetish-
palaver,
ye wontst, v. to be a fetish-priest,
ye wolo, ye wowodsi, v. to eat eggs; to live upon eggs,
ye woyo, v. to be a fetish-priestess. ^
ye! int. halloo! halloh! heh! y6! na okpoAgo! ye! na na
okpongo! halloo! (see) a horse! Comp. e&\ int. and the
next word,
ye, *6! int. (Ot. = to be good); ui
in addressing father, mother et(
dear! mama dear!
ye =z yei, pi. of yo, n. woman;
yg = yeli, n. eating; using; etc. i
ye, inf. yg, v. (always connected
„nu", water) to draw; fd^cpfen;
to draw water; ya nuyt, th. s.
dbyGoogk
ye — ye. 359
y«, iat yemo (adj. fmrn eyen) v. to be white, to whiten;
lo bkatli (v. n.); to be whitish; ye fata, -futafata, to be
very white; 8. futa, adj. and comp. di, v. t§u, v. Aoli,
v.; bAso yere, B-; he ye, v. to be oatside while; hie ye,
to hive a white face etc.
ye, Adn. v. = kwe, to look.
y^ Adn. V. = ll, se, to suffice.
ye, V. (irreg. and defective, use* as auxiliary verb; Ato,
ne, Ot. wi>, Ayigbe, le, Aku or Yoruba, h, ni, mbe);
imperf. tense yo (=yeo); fut. -(seldom used) aye, ge-
nerally hi, 4sd etc. take Ibe place of it; without imperat.
and infidft.; neg. voice be, v. which see; to exist, to
be, lo be somewhere, to live, to be in, at s. place
(comp. dsi, V. , nr-, v.) ; to b« at hand , at home, comp.
Nyonmo \e, there is a God or God is; eye, he is here,
at home; ebe, be is not here, not at home, 'dead; noko
ye, fliere is something, nokonoko be, there is nothing;
to be true, real, eyen, it is true or so, jeben, it is not
■ true, »ot so; comfk ye mli, yen, v. and be mli, ben, v.;
to be, auxiliary verb or copula » connected with nouns
and a^iectives expressing the predicate, f. i. ye feo, to
be beautiful (comp. Ot. ye, v. ye few, th. s. and Ga fe,
?.; comp; alio dSi, v. and esp, §33 at the end; many
adjectives, especially such as are also adverbs can only
be construed with ye (used as predicate) but not as
apposition ; others, f. i. feo, fefeo; tan, tanian; have when
used as predicate the irimple, when as apposition, the
double form ; f. i. ye tan, to be ugly ; gbomo tanta^, an
-ugly person; to have, to possess; miye noko, I have
something; mibe sika, I bave no money; to be right,
ggod enough etc.; esp. in the prase'; aye! let it! it is
good! all right! it is enough! ed fei, la§ gut fepn ! The
greatest difficulty is in the use of this verb as a prepo-
sitive verb (See Riis Otyi Gr. § 194 — 196 and Voc. under
vo, prep.); as ya, ba, ke-ya, ke-ba, ke-d§e etc. it is used
to connect an object of locality with a verb having already
an object, or not by itself requiring an object of loca-
lity; it cannot be translated and is not to be taken for
the preposition „in'' (s. mli, n.) though it often seems
to take its place; comp. the following instances: Ewo,
he sleeps; ewo ye t§u mli, he sleeps (being) in the
room; eta tsun, he sits in the room; eta si, he sits
(down); eta si ye tSuft, he sits (downjicing) in the
room; if there is no mistake possible, it may be left out;
dbyGoogk
360 ye abeku^e — ye da.
f. i. eba fili mli, he came in a oirriage; d^a okpoAgo
no, - - on a horse; but: eba Osu ye ftii nM, ye
okpoAgo ng. If the object of time or place is put in ad-
vance and a subject wanding for „ye^» it is either left
out, or put behind; but sometimes like fe, ye, r*, also
put in advance without subject ; comp. „No -be le ndi
miba" (= miba y e no be le mli) or „iio he le mli raita
jre'S or „ye no be le m\\ miba, I came in that time ; in
questions ye is always put behind or left out : Meni mli
ohle ene ye? or: meiii mli ohie ene ye? or: meni mli
ohle ene? In what didst thou carry this^ Sometimes
ye in two difierent signification may stand besides each
other, as: Eye ye no be le mli, he was at hand in that
time. Once an infinitive* (absolute) met my ear: „yQ
ekemi yo^ being he was with me; analogous to which,
„ye ekemi ye", being he is with me, may be expec-
ted; as this absolute infinitive often appears in such sim-
ple forms; t i. ye ekemi ye (not:- yeli ekemi ye) etc.
ye abekugbe> v. to be on the left, sMe; northward.
ye adeka, v. to have a?box.
ye adeka mli, v. be in a box.
ye akrowa, v. to be or dwell in a village.
ye amane, - - mli, v. to be in trouble; to suffer; s» na
amane, v.; pi, v., na n6, v.
ye anaigbe, v. to be westward; = ye yiteAgbe.
ye anumnyam, \» to have glory, honour; grace; == hie ye
nyam; s. ye nyam, v.
ye asane, v. to have a boil.
ye basabasa, v. to be disorderly.
ye be, V. to have quarrel.
ye bii, V. to have children.
ye biWo, V. to be little.
ye bie, V. to be here.
ye biegbe, v. to be this way.
ye blabla, v. to be violent.
ye bleo, v. to be mild, slow etc.
ye bloblo, V. to be thin, lean.
ye boboka, ?. to be lazy; sickly.
ye bodobodo, v. to be soft; weak.
ye bokSgbe, v. to eastward.
ye boimo, v. (to be) in the beginning.
ye boko, V. to be light; soft; strong; fe-, th. s.
ye bonbon, v. = dse fQ, v. to stiiA.
ye da, v. to be always (at hand).
dbyGoogk
ye dS — y© eSa. 361
ye da, V. to be before.
ye dane, v. = ye da, v.
ye daft, V. to be in one's mouth.
ye dalei, v. to have dollars, to be rich; ye darei, drai,
th. 8.
yt den, ▼. to be in the hand, power, possession (TJ3); ye
m. k. den, v. to be in hand etc. of some body,
ye deka, v. to have tme, leisure; 3^'^ SWuge ^aben; deka
be hewQ Ic mibaa, because there was no time there-
fore I did not come; miye deka agbene, 1 have time
now.
ye dem, v. to be even, plain; s. trotro, adj. and ye tro-
tro, V.
ye dendeden, v. to be hard,
ye densd, v. to be different.^
' ye derele, v. to be sickly.
ye dfeian, v. to be, live in the grass, field; s. dfeian, n.
ye dfSnmo, v. ta have understanding.
ye df^nmo 6kpa, v. to have a good understanding,
ye dteiri, v. to have a treasure, capital for trading,
ye din, -edin, v. = 41, v. to be black,
ye dolwDdokp, V. = doko, v. to be sweet,
ye drele , v. to be slimy.
ye dsa no (or dsano) v. to be on the market-place,
ye dgal« na, v. to be right, straight, upright,
ye dseh (= dse mli) , v. to be or live in the world (see
&e, n.); to exist, to live; ebe d§en, he is not. in the
world, be is dead,
ye dsei, dsemei, v. to be there,
ye d§emeiniian, v. to be tbere-about.
ye dsen or
ye dseAba, v. to have a character, behaviour, report,
ye dsenba akpa, v. to have a good character, report,
ye dsuetei, dfetei, v. to have silver, be rich; s. ye dalei,
nii, sika etc.
ye dududadu, v. to be tasteless; s. -wurududfldu, v.
ye dun mli , v. to be in darkness,
ye eflo, V. to be empty.,
ye ekoro, v. to be single; for one's self, peculiar; s. ekoro,
adj.; sro, v., sroto, adj.
ye enmon, v. to be raw.
ye enoli, v. to be greeo; = noli, v.
ye esa, v. to have sin, be sinful; mihe be eSa, I am
sinless.
dbyGoogk
362 ye atSuru — ye he.
ye atsuni, = tsu, v. to be red.
ye eye A, == ye, v. to be white.
ye falefaie, v. to be clean = he tSe, v.; mli tie, v. etc.
ye l^na, v* to be or live at the riTer.
ye fafi, y. to be open, plain.
ye teftten, V. to be dirt^, sickly. •
ye feo, V. to be thin, hght, tasteless.
ye fiase, v. to be in the cellar, stoie, prison.
ye fi,d§itefid§ite, v. to be unruly, unquiet; s. flefle, flafla
et«.
ye fltrifitri, v. th. s.
ye fifio = ye biblo, v. to be small,
ye fio, V. = ye bibi, v. to be small,
ye fintd, V. to be little; to be few. '
ye fintd, V. to be narrow,
ye fitSofitso, V. to be exact.
ye flafla, v. to be sanguinic, lively, unruly; active ;r rash,
ye flefle, hie jrt flefle, v. to be light milled, frivolous,
ye flofloflo, V. to be distant, remote; s. son, ad^
ye frdird, v.- to be freaks moist, well watered,
ye futafuta, v. to be very white; fl§e ye, v. to ^ white,
ye futufuiu, V. to be nrfxed; s*. fulu, v.
ye fefefe, v. to be safe, sound, complete,
ye gbe, v. to have way, place, room,
ye gbei, V. to have a name; to be? of reputation. .
ye gbede, v. to be weak.,
ye gbena, v. to be right, in orttr; s. ^n^ n.
ye gbekd, v. to be a child, young,
ye gbekSbiiaSi, v. to be iq chSdhood.
ye gbeke nasi, v. to be evealBg; - - in the evening,
ye gbele na, v. to be a| the point of death,
ye gbele mli, v. to be m death.
yp gbese, v.. to have the menstruation; s. gbese, n.
ye gbeten, v. to be in (the middle of) the way.
ye gbeye, v. to be fearful, horrible, aweful.
ye gbohladSen, v. to be in hades.
ye gboiatohe, v. to be in a* inn for strangers, travellers,
ye ged§6, v. to be large, broad,
yt geg^ge, V. to be hard.
ye gidigidi, v. to be disorderly, unruly, disturbed,
ye godsO, godSogodSo, v. to be long, slender,
ye hail, v. to be bright, clear,
ye haoma, v. to have trouble,
ye he, V. to be about, for, around s. b. or s. th.
dbyGoogk
ye he ko — ye krofi. 36S
ye he koy v. to be in a place, s. he, n.
ye hedggle, v. to have peace, be at peace.
ye hefShe, v. to be every where.
ye hegbe, v. to have way, allowance, authority, plenipo-
tence; 93oOmadl;t ^aben.
ye hemo, v. to hive a sweet-heart, coDCubiDe.
ye heniitsumo, v. to be id want of.
ye henowoniQ, v. to have honour,
ye heft, v. to be bright, clear; = ye ha&, v.
ye herefi, v. to be warm, hot. ,
ye hewale, v. to have power,
ye m. k. or n. k. hewQ, v. to be about, for, because of,
8. b. or s. th. = ye he, v.
ye heyeli, v, to have faith; liberty,
ye hehehe, v. to be bloooiiDg, blossoming,
ye hiahla, v. to be clean,
ye m. k. or n. k. hie, v. to be in the face, front of, before
s. b. or s. th.
ye hlekftmo, v. to have life, to be alive; s. ye wala.
ye hleme, v. to be content,
ye hietsre, v. to be in want of pastfme, to be homesick;
Sangen>etle ^aben} ^timrDeb Ifaben.
ye hirihirj, = ye gidigidi, v. to be confused,
ye kakadan, v. to be long,
ye kafk, kankan, v. to be bright,
ye keketg, v. to be very dry.
ye ketekete, v. to be exact,
ye koklo, kokro, v. to be large and round,
ye kon, v. to be or live ip the bush,
ye kose, v. to be or lire in the plantation or eonatpy.
ye kpakpatd, v. to be go^» biard> sirong eW.
ye kpalekp^Ie,. v. ta be bdU.
ye kplene» v. to be void, desert » desolate^
ye kpetekpete, v. to be glutinoifts^ «ofl; weak,
ye kpi, kpiti, V. to fee ihkky niuiddy^
ye kpinti^, kpintinkpUA, v. to be sound, safe, whote^ strong,
ye kpilio, v. to be short,
ye kplanS, = ye kpene, v.
ye kple, kplei, kpleikplei^ kpetenkpl^, v. to be large,, gvec^,
big etc.
ye kplekple, v. to be fro ward, uwiulj;, unqmidt; preeodou^.
ye kp5, V. to be simple, quiets 5Wld. .
ye kramfikrae^, v. to fe©) ferce; ^ejwiy.
ye krgii, v. to be simple, genuin, clear, pure, hoJor;
dbyGoogk
364 ye kroAkroA — ye ii^ mli.
ye kroAkroA, v. th. s. (corroborated).
ye krukru, v. to be unruly; ye kplekple.
ye kuku, V. to be short.
ye kunlti, v. to h% woolen.
ye kutruku, v. to be round, in a circle.
ye legelege, v. to be thin, slender, as snakes etc.
ye man, v. to be or live in town; s. ye kose, v. th. contr.
ye manse, v. to be over land, on a journey, in a far
country; in tet gtemtc, flbctlanl) fcpn.
ye manyamftnya, v. |i have a rough surface.
ye masei, v. to be at the side of s. b.
ye mata, matamata, v. to be slimy, soft.
ye miiK, V. to be ©on tent, have joy = ml Se, v.
ye mli, yen, neg. be mli, bgn, v. to be inside, inwardly,
in; to be so; to be true, real; eyeft lo ebeA? is it so
or is it not so? yen! (often without gram, subj.) it is
so, it is true! ben kwra! it is not true at all!
ye m. k. mli§i, v. to be in s. body's bosom.
ye mlumlu, v. to be dusty.
ye m5n, v. to be in a fort, stonehouse, to live there.
ye mobo, v. lo be phied, to be a pity; eye mobo, it is
a pity; enii ye mobo, he is to be pitied.
ye momo, v. to be or exist already.
ye momosa, v. to have existed or been a long time before,
a long time ago.
ye mudsi, v. to be dirty. /
ye musuft, v. to be in the bdly.
ye musu, V. to be a curse.
ye na, v. to be at the mouth, brim, shore etc. to be ac-
cording to, 8. na, n.
ye nabii, v. to have grandchildren.
ye nabu, v. to hare a mouth, opening, end, brim, shore etc.
ye nane, v. to have a foot ; neg. be nane, to have no foot,
i. e. to be unable to walk.
ye nadsiaii, v. to be in the place, instead of s. b., to be
the representative of s. b. ; comp. ye nadSiaA, v.
ye nadShsigbe, ▼. to be eastward, = ye bokagbe.
ye nakai, v. to be so.
ye nakai lolo, v. to be still so; to be so so; fo fo fepn.
ye nakpe, v. to be wonderful, to he a wonder.
ye nanyo, v. to have a friend.
ye fia, V. to have art, dexterity.
ye M mli, v. to be, or to be performed, or done, artfully,
cmuuDgly.
dbyGoogk
ye nS — ye Awanedse. 365
ye ^, V. to have a \vife.
ye Mno (na no) or nSmli (nSf mli>, v. to live or be in
the field, desert; s. M, n.
ye nam, ye nail, v. to be cold.
ye neke, v. to be so.
ye nibii and
ye nil, V. to have or possess things, to be rich,
ye nine, v. to have hands; neg. be nine, v. to have no
hands, i. e. to be unable to work because of a bad hand ;
comp. ye nane, v.
ye niian, v. to be in or among things, -dSemei niian, to
be thereabout,
ye niitgomo, v. to have work, business, a trade; to be
engaged,
ye ninedsiirdgbe, v. to be on the right hand or side, south-
ward,
ye nmol<}, v. to be laughable,
ye nmon, v. to be in the plantation.
ye nmotgAmoto, v. to be miry,
ye'nd, n6 ko, noko, v. to have something; neg. be noko,
to have nothing; pi. ye nii, v.
ye d5 mli, v. to be in a vessel,
ye no, v. to be over, on, above s. th.; to have a cover;
s. no, n.
ye nofSnd, v. to have every thing,
ye m. k. 66, v. to be al, near, with, by s. k,, s. nd, n.;
eyo min5, he is with me.
ye nogbe, v. to have access,
ye nsra mli, v. to be in camp,
ye nSo mli, ye nson, v. to be or live in the sea.
ye nsogbe, = ye ninedsiirdgbe, v. to be southward,
ye nsokpo, v. to be on a island,
ye nsona, v. to be at the sea-shore,
ye nSono, v. to be on sea.
ye nSonnyiemo, mil, v. to be on a voyage,
ye ng^ose, v. to be behind or beyond the sea, i. e. far
away; comp. manse, n.
ye nsosisi, ¥. to be on the bottom of the sea.
ye nt4, V. to be double.
ye nu mli, nun, v. to be or live fat the water,
ye Aulan, v. to be bright.
ye nwanedse, v. to be doubtful; neg. be nwaneiSe, v. to
be undoubtedly true, gweifello^j be Awanedse, often used
without gr^. subject, = jweifello^, jweifetto^ne, o^m
d by Google
368 . ye AwlAwfi — ye Sia.
3n>e{fel; be iiwanedSe nl eba, without doubi he came»
o^^ne ^miUU et fam.
ye fiwanwfi, V. = ye nakpe, v. to be suqirising, wondcr-
ful» astonishing; Ot. wo ftwofiwa, v.
ye nwatanwatfi, v. to be grisled; ye AweteAwete, th. s.
ye nwei, v. to be or live above, up stairs, on high, in
heaven,
ye liweihte, v. to be at the firmament,
ye nySfifinyfiAfi, v. to be swarming (of vermfai etc.) roughly,
ugly,
ye AyaAemo (or nya^kemg), v. to be dirty, disgusting,
ye nySnyftnyS, v. to be sour, acid,
ye nyemi, v. to have a brother or sister (•efdjiw^er).
ye nyeramnyeram, v. to be dazzling = nyera, nyeram, v.
ye nylemo mli, v. to be on a journey,
ye nyomo, nyddsi, v. to have debts,
ye nyOn, v. to be in the night; to happen in the night,
ye nybh, v. to be or happen in (a certain) month; eba
mind ye ny5n n\ d§i ete le mli, he came to me (beilQ)
in the third month,
ye nydn (pi. nyddsi), v. to have a slave,
ye nyont§o, v. to have a master.
ye oblahlaf), v. to be or happen in youth,
ye oUbiyeiaat v. to be in virginiti, youth (of women),
ye odasefo, v. to have a witness,
ye okadi, v.^o have a sign,
ye okplo he, v. to be at ti^le.
ye oy^, v. to be quick.
ye pepepe, v. to be exactly so; s. ye fitfiofltSo, ketekete.
ye sakasaka, v. to be disorderly,
ye sane, v. to have a palaver,
ye se, V. to be on the back, to be back, behind; to be
left; s. se, n.
y% segbe^ v. to be backward, behind,
ye setsun, V. to be in the backroom, bedroom,
ye skam, v. to be a shame,
ye son, V. to be genuin.
ye sulaii, v. to be hairy,
ye susuma, v. to have a sonl, a shadow.
ye §i, siSi, v. to be u»der s. b. or s. th.
ye §i§i, V. to be on the ground, down, down stairs (ye
nwei, tfa. cotttr.) ; to have a signification, reason, ground,
foundation, bottom,
ye s!a, v. to be at home; to have a house, home.
dbyGoogk
ye 8ihHe — ye won. 367
ye Sihile, V. id have « dweHidg. -
ye Sika, v. to have goW, be rich; 8. ye nil, v.
ye Sikpofi, v. to be on earth, to live on 6arth; to have
land,
ye §i§i, s. ye §i, v.
ye SiSidSe, v. to have a beginning,
ye soft, V. to be far away,
ye s6§6§d, V. lo be pointed,
ye ta mil, v. to be in the anny, in war.
ye tan, v. to be ugly, hateful,
ye ten, ye te len, v. lo be amidst, in the middle,
ye toi, V. to have ears, i. e. to be obedient; neg. be toi,
to be disobedient; s. toi; n.; to have small cattle; see
to, n.
ye toindsgle, v. to have rest or peace (for the ears),
ye trotro, v. to be smooth,
ye tsretSrei, v. to be rent, ragged; thin, watery,
ye t§u mli, tSun, v. to be in the room, inside; to be in
prison,
ye tsui, v. to have a heart; to be courageous,
ye tSuidstird, n. to have a good heart, to be glad, happy,
ye tsokatSoka and
ye tsukat§6ki^ tsikatsika, tSakatSdka, v. to be in a hubbub,
in disorder. • .
ye tsuse, = ye gbese* v. to have the menstruation,
ye tsuyiten, v. to be on the housetop.
ye tukutuku, v. to be fat, round ; - t§ukutSuku, th. s.
ye triintra, v. to be speckled,
ye tuntu, V. to be dark ; - - in the very, middle,
ye tutantQ, v. to be dark,
ye veveve, v. to be hard.
y€ vl, V. to be weakly,
ye vO, V. to be deep; very deep,
ye wala, v. to have liife, be alive,
ye walaheremg, v. to have salvati<Hi.
ye walaherelo, v. to be a saviour,
ye we, v. to be or live in one's house, dwelling home;
comp. we, sia and t&u, b.
ye webii, v. to have domestics,
ye wese, v. to be froward.
ye wiemo ko, v. to have a word (to speak),
ye wo mli, won, v. to be in sleep,
ye woA, ye won mli, v. to be in sleep.
dbyGoogk
368 ye woA — yeiawiemo.
ye won, ye woA mli, v. Bt. to be in a fetish, to be bora
on him, s. fo — wo won mli, v.
ye won, V. to have a fetish.
ye wolo mli, v. to be (found) in a book, in a paper,
ye wolonkwe, v. to be in school,
ye wyiese, v. to be behind the mill,
ye wyiesi, v. to be on the grinding place,
ye yaka, v. to be vain, useless; gratis,
ye yano, v.' to be at a funeral-custom,
ye yidsiemo, v. to have praise,
ye yin, v. to be in the head, mind,
ye ytt«ft, v. to be on the top.
ye yitSo, v. to have a hand (for thinking); be yilSo, to
have no head, be thoughtless,
ye yit§o kpakpa, v. to have a good head, eincn guten Stcp^
f)aUn; to be gifted for learning,
ye yukuyuku, v. to be full of small things, children, people,
ye yurudu, v. to be cool.
etc. etc.
ye, n. being; having; inf. of ye, v. seldom used; f. i., ye
ekemi yo, being he was with me; s. also, yo, n.
y^ = yemo, n. whitening; whiteness, fr. ye, v.
ye, n. drawing (of water); ia^ ©d^Spfcn.
ye, adj. and adv. hot; holly (of pepper etc.).
yei (ye), pi. n. of yO, n. women; feminine animals,
yeiabi, n. women-child, unmanly person,
yeiagbei, n. women^name.
yeianii, n. female things,
yeiasane, n. female-matter; women's palaver,
yeiatade, n. female dress,
yeiahela, n. women-sickness,
yeiahie, n. women -face.
yeiasenylelo, n. person running after women ; SBetberfned^t.
yeiasenlemo, n. running after women,
yeianoyeli, n. women-government,
yeiana, n. women's cunning.
yeianSnii, n, implements of women,
yeianiitsumo , n. women-work; -business; -behaviour,
yeiasu, ydasubSn, n. kind , behaviour, character of women,
yeiasuomo, n. women-love,
yeiatsu, n. women-house, -room,
yeiawe, n. women-house, -dwelling; they live generally in
a separate house,
yeiawiemo, n. women'stalk.
dbyGofOgk
ygla — yerehomo. 369
yila, 8. yajra, ySra, yfi, n. fi^ieralH^ustom.
yele, v. 8. yere, to find, meet,
yfile, n. s. yere, n. yams.
yell, n. (s. times yele, yen, yere, may be heard); eating,
' enjoying; devouring; effection; use; annoyance, trouble;
treatment , transaction, negotiation ; business , occupatioiH
govemement, rule; spending; behaviour; life; being ,«tc.
etc. fr. ye, v.
yelilg, yelo, n. scarcely used alone, but most frequently
in combinations; eater, annoyer etc. fr. ye, Vi
yelihe, n. place of eating, transaction, government; rank;
station etc.
yem, Adn, n. = yeli, n.
yen, = ye mli, v. neg. be mli, deffective verb; to be true,
to be so; to be real; s. ye, def. and aux. v.
yere, v. inf. yeremo (corroboration of ye), to find, to meet,
yere na, inf. nayeremo, v. to overtake or come upon un-
. awares.
yeremg, n. meeting,
yere, pi. yedsi, n, yams; the best kind of it; compare
„afaseo" or „afaso", n.: there are many kinds ot ^y^r^^
again; yere ebo, the yams is bearing or getting large in
the ground; corap. bay ere, kwakwrakwa, n. etc.
yereba, n. leaf or plant of yam&.
yerebe, n. time of yams,
yerebo, n. bearing of yams,
yerede, adj. and adv. hard, continual; -ly; -ly; fe— , to
persevere; to be hard; perplexing; troublesome,
yered^d^d^de , adv. imitating the sound of running
'(of the steps); ehle foi yered6d6d6d^d6 ; he ran away
hop hop hop etc.
yeredgfemo, n. perseverance,
yeredgiemo, taking out of yams; yams-harvest.
yeredQlo, n. yams-planter,
yeredumo, n. yams-planting,
yeredumobe, n. time for yams-planting,
yerefa, -fSmo, n. == yeredsiemo.
yerehetolo, n. yams-peel,
yerehdlo, n. yams-seller,
yerehftmo, n. yams-selling,
yerehomo, n. yams-cookhag.
yerehulo, n. — yeredulo; cultivator of yams.
yerehOmo, n. cultivation of yams.
Zim'mermann, Akra-Yocab. 24
dbyGoogk
370 yerekadteio — yi.
yerekadimo, n. snpplyfng of wanting yams-plants, wbfch
have not grown.
yereklata, n. a slice of yams.
yerekuku, n. piece of yams; - yerekukud^.
yerekutu, n. a small fence for preserring yams i».
jFerenko, n. small heaps of ground round the yams-plant r
8% nkQ, n. and bo nko, v.
yereniiyenii, pi. u. food of yams.
yeresQ, n. ground producing yams.
yeretsS, n. yamsdigging.
yeretso, n. pi. -tsei, n. the stick put to the yams-plant,
that it may run up at it.
yeretsu, n. room for keeping yan^.
yereyeli, n. ^amseating; the first eating of yams is con-
nected with many ceremonies; before the fetish eats yams
(before the lime of „H6mQWo"), no body is allowed to
eat; the next person eating is the king etc. etc. The
reason of this may be, that unripe yams are very un-
healthy, whilst before the new yams comes in, provisions
are very scarce, which is a temptation to eat the yams
too soon; and to prevent this, the fetish-law is resorted
to, as also against pigs-meat, the cutting certain shadow-
or other useful trees etc.
yere and
yeri, s. yeli, n. eating; using etc. s, ye, v.
ygrgke, v. s. yjroke, v. to loose.
yetre, n. europ. word, pease,
yeye, yeyei, redupl. v. of ye, v. to eat.
yeyeye (fr. ye, v. to trouble), adj. and adv. troubling;
unquiet in mind; etc. fe — , v. to be troubled, driven
about = tsui ye, v.
yejeyefelo, n. a troubled person.
yey€yefemo, n. trouble, disturbance m mind, unquietness
etc. = tsujyeli, n.
yeyeyesane, n. troublesome palaver. •
yeyeyewieiiio, n. troublesome word.
yi, pi. yimg; inf. yi, yimo, ylle, v. to strike, f^tagcn;
to flogg; yile! flogg him! ^so used of other similar
movements, to pick, bite of birds, te knock, kick etc.
of animals; to wetlen (s. Germ, ^pettfd^en") of rain;
Nybnmo yimi §hu pam, rain wettened me through aind
through (s. Nyonmo, n.) ; to strike a road, cinfd&lagew,
eincn SB eg cinfc^Iagcli^^s. yi mK, yiA, v., to enter upon
a journey, to go away; off; nyese Ifi eyifr, the day
dbyGoogk
yi — yi tSu. 371
before yesterday he went off; to strike root, SBurjel
Wlagcn (yi fS, -sisifa); to strike of* fall down; to come
down; s. yi si, v.; to be full (inf. yile); to be suffi-
cient; eyi obd, it is quite full; ameyimQ obdbdbd, they
are quite full; etc. mli yi, inf. mliyile, v. to be inwardly
full; etc.; to fill; etc.
yi, n. head, and its combinations see afterwards.
yi daii, v. to fill the mouth.
yi den, V. to flogg on the palm of the hand; to fill the
hand.
yi fa, V. to fill the river; fa yi, the river is full; s. also
yi", V.
yi f§, V. to be half full; to strike roots; s. yi sisifS, v.
yi gbe, = ko gbe, v. to strike a road; eincn SBcg ein*
fc^Iagen; to 'fill a pot.
yi hdmo, v. to take the lead, to go in advance.
yi hie, hiegbe, v. th. s.
yi he, v. to flogg one's self.
yi mli, yin (which see); inf. mliyi, v. to strike in, into;
to take a road; to enter a journey; to go away; to fill
the inside; eyi mli obd, he or it filled the inside.
yi musu, v. to fill the belly. ,
yi na, nabu, v. to strike on the mouth.
yi n3dsian, v. inf. nSdsianyT, -yimo, to remain on the same
spot; to move in a circle (in argument).
yi no, V. inf. noyi, noyimo, to come down upon s. th. or
s. b., loflo yi mino, a bird descended upon me.
yi nu, V. to be full of water.
yi se, V. to flogg on the back.
yi si, V. inf. SiyimQ, siyi, to strike the ground, to descend,
to come down; to alight on the ground; sometimes used
as aux. V. to express the reaching or coming to the
ground of a movement expressed by a preceeding verb ;
f. i. egbk ke-yi si, it rent in two (till it reached) to the
ground, it rent quite down. A peculiar expre.ssion is
yi m. k. si, v. to descend s. b., i, e. to let the fetish
descend upon s. b.; to nnake s. b» a fetish -priest (who
therefore often are seen to wear an iron chain round
their neck, by which they pretend to make the fetish ^
descend.
yi §isi, V. to strike the ground; to fill the bottom etc.
yi sisifS, v. to strike roots.
yi tSo, inf. tsoyi, tSoyimo, v. to drum.
yi t§u, V. to fill a room.
24*
dbyGoogk
372 yi.
yi, (Ot. ti., AAh, yi) head. As in other languages this
word is very extensively used in various ways; and as
da , de , hie, he mli, na, no, se, §i§i, tSui etc. it appears
very often as gram, subject or object. The principal
significations are: top (comp. yiten); beginning, principle;
life; individual (poll; head; piece, 5topf; @tu(f), f. i.
ameyi ete, they three; number, comp. yibo; price, comp.
yinii; sum; a sum of money about 2 shilling and 9d. worth,
or 50 String of x^owries (german 1 fl. 40 kr., firench frs.
3,50); cowries are generally counted by these „heads";
then „yi, yin, yitso" are generally used for most of the
faculties of head and heart, = reason, mind, memory,
thought, understanding etc. The principal combinations
are the following: 1) yi as (gram.) object: ba yi; inf.
yiba, V. to spare, fd^oncn, »etf(fionen; bi yi si, v. to
ask about one's head, i. e. life, by a fetish-priest, a certain
ceremony; bo m, k. yi, v. to cry against s. b.; bo yi,
V. inf. yibo, to number; bu yi? s. yibO; da yi §i, v. to
congratulate one's self for recovering, saving etc. by a
feast and sacrifice; dfa yi, v. to break or crush the head
by falling etc. ; d§e m. k. yi, v. to come from s. b. head,
mind, device etc.; dse m. k. yi, v. to come away from
s. b. head, memory; to be forgotten; = h!e kpa no,
d§ie yi, inf. yidsiemo, v. to praise; dso m. k. yi, v. to
bless one's head; fS yi, v. inf. yifSmo, to cry at one,
to reproach one = nS m. k. yi; fite yi, v. to spoil the
head, mind; fo yi, v. to wash the head; fo yi, v. inf.
yifo (old: yipo) to cut one's head off, to behead; fa yi,
V. to comb the hair; gba yi, v. to cleave the head; to
part the hair, fd^eiteln; gbe yi, v. to strike out a sum;
to fill tip a sum; gble yi, v. to open the head, mind
{but comp. yift gble, v.); gbo yi, v. to plait the hair;
ha yi, v. to cover the head; here moko yi wala, v.
to save one, amgeiv, inf. yiwalaheremo; kpa yi, v.
to make one's head bald; kpo yi, v. to shave the head,
= §e yi; kp6 m. k. yi wala, to redeem one's life; inf.
yiwalakpdmQ; ku yi, v. to cut the hair; le yi, v. to know
one's mind; see le m. k. yitSo, yin; mS yi §i, v. to lay
the head down, to bow down; s. koto, v. bu §i, v.;
mo yi, V. to attack the head (of sickness) ; na ra. k. yi,
V. to see one's mind, thought ; nS Yn. k. yi, inf. yinS, v.
to cry at s. b. = f5 yi; to command one; an^errf(ficn;
M m. k. yi se, v. to shut behind s. b., to shut one in;
nme yi si, v. inf. yigiAme, = nme tSui si, v. to have
dbyGoogk
yi ba — yi ^a. 3t3
patience; nme oyi Si fio, have a lillle patience! M yi
fd m. k. kue no, v. to fall about s. body's neck; nu
m. k. yi, v. to hear s. body's mind, meaning, reason;
pSIm (or p^, kpSn) m. k. yi , v. to make a conjuration
against s. body's life; pila yi, v. to wound the head;
po yi = fo yi; sa m. k. yi, v. to fit s. b/s mind; §e
yi , V. to shave the head ; si yi, v. to knock against the
head; to yi, s. to yin, v. tfa yi, v. to strike the head;
tse m. k. yi se, inf. yisetsemo, v. to call s, b. back ; tSi
m. k. yi se, v. inf. yiset§imo, v. lit. to knock or push
s. b. backward; to push one down; to drive one, urge
one OB, forward; ts6 m. k. yi, v. to turn oWs head,
to make one mad; tsole yi, v. 'to lay the head on a
pillow; wa m. k. yi, v. inf. yiwale, to use one cruelly;
to persecute, illtreat, abuse one; enyontso wale yi, his
master illtreads him; s. yi wa, v.; wadse m. k. yi, inf.
"•yiwadsemo, v. to harden one's head, mind etc.; wo m. k.
yi, wo m. k. yi no, v. to elevate, exalt s. b. ; wo m. k.
yi, V. inf. yiwO and yiwom©, to cry one out; to hoot one
out; wule yi, v. to hurt the head; yi m. k. yi no, v. to
descend ppon s. b.'s head; etc. 2) yi as gram. subj.
and possessive definition :
yi ba, v. to get a head, i. e. reason, understanding.
yi bo, V. inf. yibo, to grow or get large heads (of yams).
yi bu, V. Inf. yiba, to be lightminded (no longer used; s.
fe yibQ, v. yibulo; hie ye flefle, yitso ye flefle, v.
yi di m. k. (di, Qt. = ye, in GS), v. to be giddy.
yi fa, V. to be of large, sufficient number.
yi he si, V. to fall down headlong; ben ilopf am ffioben
jerfctmcttern ; esp. made use of in a horrible curse or
deprecation: „Oyi ahe si ni ogbol" „may thy head be
crushed to the ground that thou diest!" and th. s. as
noun: oyiaheSi, = pestilence; Ad. th. s.
yi ka, V. inf. yikamo, s. yin kS; v.
yi kpa, v. inf. yikpale, to be bald; s. kpale, n.; k{)ale*
kpale, adj., yikpatAtse» n.
yi na wala, v. inf. yiwalana, to be safe, sound; to be pre-
served; to he saved; s. here yi wala and Ol. ti nya
nkwa, V.
yi sa, V. to have a fi^t head, mind, good faculty.
yi U, V. to have a big head; esika yi ti, his gold-lump is
big, he is rich.
yi wa, inf. yiwale, J. to be hard-headed; to be cruel; comp.
wa m. k. yi; wadse yi; v. hie wa, v. tsui wa, v. etc.
dbyGoogk
374 yl wo — yile.
(yi wo, inf. yiwO, v. to be proud).
yi ke ID. L ya §oA, v. the head goes for away with s. b.,
i. e. to be lost in thought, wonder etc.
yiba, n. sparing ; Setf((?i>nuiig, ©doming ; exemption ; fr. ba yi, v.
yibalo> n. person sparing s. b., taking care for s. b.
yibii, pi. n. fruits of trees; wo — , r. to bear — .
yibiiwO , n. fruit bearing ; fruitfulness.
yibo, n. mumber, sum.
yiba, n. lightmindedness ; fe-, v. to be lightminded = hie
ye flefle, v.
yibabi, n. lightminded child.
yibadSeft, n. lightminded character, life, etc.
yibafemo, n. lightminded act.
yibulo,.n* lightminded person.
yibuniit§umo, n. lightminded, careless bieiness.
yibunayeli, n. lighminded transaction; fr. ye yiba na, v.
yibusane, n. matter of lightmindedness.
yibasu, n. lightminded frame, character; -subaA, n. th. s.
yidi, V. giddiness; fr. yi di, ?.
yidg, n. heat of the head; head-ache.
yidSielo, n. person praising s. b. fr^^ d§ie*yi, y.
yidsiemo, n. praise.
}idsiemQlaIa, n. song of praise,
yifalg, n. reproacher,
yifdmo, n. reproach,
yifomosane, n. reproachful palaver,
yifdmgwiemo, n. reproachful word, language,
yifo, yifomg, n. beheading,
yifolo, n. beheader.
yifamo, n. combing of the hair,
yigbamo, n. parting of the hair,
yigbomo, n. plaiting of the hair,
yiba and yihamo , n. covering of the head.
yikSmg, s. yinkdimg, n. madness,
yikpale, n. baldness.
yikpatatSe, n. baldheaded man; Jta^ItO!pf.
yikpomg, n. shaving of the head = yiSeniQ » n.
yikule, n. number, sum = yibo, n.
yikulo, n. cutter of the hair.
yikamQ, n. haircutting.
YilQ („striker*9, pr. n. of one of the towns on the Krobo
mountain (that of Oloko Patu in the West) ; comp. Ma-
' nya, pr. n.
yile, n. knowledge of one's opinion; also yiAl§, n.
dbyGoogk
ytt« — yiMolo. 875
yile, n. fulness, fr. yi, v.
yilo, n. striker, fr. yi, ,v.
yimo, n. striking; filling etc. fr. y\, v.
^imu, n. division, party.
yimujimu, adj. and adv. parted; in parties.
yinSlo, n. person crying at s. b.
ylMino, n. crying at s. b.; ^u()errf4^e^; fr. na yi, v.
yin, V. = yi mli, inf. mliyl and mliyimo, lo strike in or
out (f. i. a road); ctnf(^laflcn (einen SBcg); einc Sleife
antteten; wegge^en; eyiA ete, he want away.
yin = yi mli, n. inside of the head; mind, reason, faculty;
understanding; opinion, meaning; also this word is fre-
quently used in the compounds: the principal ones are:
ba m. k. yi&, v. to come into one's head; be yin, v.
s. ye yin; hi yin, v. to ask one's opinion; bo yin toi,
V. to listen to one's reason or opinion; bu yin, v. to
esteem one's opinion; dsie ^ii^i, v. to produce one's opi-
nion; fd yin, v. th. s.; kf yin, v. to say one's opinion;
na yin, v. to see one's opinion, mind, etc.; nd yin, v,
to take one's opinion; nu — , to hear it; te — , to con-
ceal — ; to yin, v. to propose; to make a proposal,
design, project, purpose, etc. inf. yiifito; a peculiar use
of this compound is to be observed in phrases like:
Mitoo midient§e miyin mifee, I did not do it according
to my own design, or from myself; lolo yin, v. to per-
plex one's mind; tSiyiAta, y. to mention one's opinion ;
tsake -, V. to change -; tsd -, v. to turn -, to show-;
wie-, V, to speak one's mind; ya-, v. to enter one's
head; ye-, v. to be in one's mind; neg. be -; yi yin,
V. to fill the head; yo-, v. to perceive one's mind etc.
yin gble, inf. yingblemo, v. to be mad.
yin kS, v. inf. yinkamg, th. s.
yin t§6, v. inf. yihtsdmo, th. s.
yinbimQ, n. asking one's opinion.
yin f6, ake... lit. the whole opinion (sc. is), that — lo
suppose that, = „fe, ake"; eyin fe, ake enye, he sup-
posed, that it was his mother.
yingblemo, n. madness; s. sekeyeli, yinkHmg, yintSdmo,
th. s.; openmindedness; comp. yingble, gble ^in, v.
yinkdmg, n. th. s.
yinto, n. proposal, design, project; purpose; 93orfa^; fr.
to yin, V.
yintofemg, n. execution of ones purpose.
yintolg, n. proposer, designer.
dbyGoogk
376 yiAtdtdlo — yiSttmelo.
yiMdldlg, n. perplexer of one's mind; fr. tdtd yift, ?.
yi6tdt5mo» n. perplexing, disturbance of mind.
yiAts5io» n* mad person, fr. yiia tsd, v. and turner, shower
of mind fr. i^6 yin, v.
yintSdmOy n. madness; change, turning, showing of mind.
yifitsakelQ, n. changer of mind, opinion; fr. tsake yiA, v.
yihtsakemg, n. change of mind, opinion, comp. df^finiQ-
tSakemo, n. and tSuiAtSakemo , n. etc.
yiAwiemo, n. speaking out of one's mind, fr. wie yiA, v.
yinii, pi. n. lit. head -things, s. yi, n. price of a slave,
price; Jlaufi)rcid, godfaaf^fiimme, Xvtqov.
yino (yind, yinO)» n. lit. what is one's head, life; time
which a person lives, generation {ysvea), periode etc.,
mantse Herode yino, dm ^(SiXeoaq ^HqcoSov, in the time
of Herode, the king etc.; blemabii le ayino, the time
of the ancients; nmenebii le aying, the present time or
generation, wosebii le aying, the future generation e!c.
adv. above, on, upon the head; s. also beyino, n.
yinobii, pi. n. persons of a generation; generation (if the
people of it are meant collectively),
yinonii , pi. n. things, customs manners, etc. of a generation,
yinosane, n. a' matter of a whole generation,
yipdhmg, yipllmo, yikpgnmo, n. conjuration against s. b.'s.
life,
yiri (yire, yere) , v. inf. yiriniQ (Ot. th. s.) ; corroboration
of yi, V. to be ful; to be overful; to overflow, to swell,
to flood,
yirimg, n. overflowing, flood,
yisale, n. ripeness of head, mind etc.
yisamo, n. ordering of head or hair,
yis!?, n. hindpart of the head; ^interfopf; occiput.
yisetSemo, n. back- calling.
yiset§ilo, n. person urging one on.
yisetsimo, n. pusiiing down; pushing forward, urging on,
fr. l^i m. k. yi se, v.
yisetSirelo and yiset§iremo, th. s. from the pi. form of the
verb; tsire yi se.
yiselo> n* shaver of the head.
yiSemo, n. shaving of the head = yikpomo, n.
yi§i, V. s. *yi ^h v. to descend,
yisi, n. place under the head; contrary of yiteA; but comp.
also nadsiaSi, n.
yi§i£imelo» n. patient person, fr. Ame yi Si = nme tSui
iij v.; to tSui Si, v.
dbyGoogk
yisiAme — yitgo. 377
yiSiAmt^, -nil}, n. patience.
yiSiwulamo, n.; s. yi ya wula si under wula §i, v.
yite, yile mli, yiten, pi. yiteaA, n. lit. head -middle, top,
highest point of s. th.; head -point of wind, i. e. west;
s. yitengbe> n. nSidsiasi, n. etc. ; as tSuiyited, n. house-
top ; tsoyiten, n. tpp of a tree etc. ba yiten, v. to come
to or on the top; be yiten, neg. of ye yiten; bu yiten,
V. to cover the top of the head etc., damo yiten, v. to
stand on the top; d§e yiten, v. to come from the top
etc. dSie - , v. to take down - - , ha - , v. to cover r - ;
ka-, V. to lie on--; kfi-, v. to break - -; lo-, v. to
take off--; ma-, v. to set or build on - -; na -, v. to
see - - ; ga -, v. to whitewash^ the top (of flatt-topped
houses); se-, v. to shave the top or crown of the head;
to reach the top ; ta - , v. to touch - - ; ya yiten , v. to
go on the lop ; ye yiten, v. to be on the top , neg. be - ;
yi yiten, v. to strike the top, etc. etc. Verbs of which
yiten is the subject will be easily understood ; f. i.
yiten fg, v. to be wet on the top.
yiten gbi, v. to be dry on the top.
yiten ka, v. to be open on the top.
yileh le, v. to be broad on the top,
yiten ta heko, v. to reach with the top to some place.
yitenba, n. coming on the top.
yitenba, n. covering of the top.
yitendamg, n. standing on the top.
yitengbe, n. head-or top-way; west; west-ward; comp.
nadsiasigbe, n.
yitenka, n. covering of the top.
yitenkamo, n. lying on the top. '
yitenma, n. building, setting on the top.
yitensa, n. whitewashing of the top.
yitenpampaso, n. crown of head; ©^eitel.
yitentfi, -mg, n. touching of, or sitting on the top.
yitenya, n. going on the top.
yitso (negligently pronounced 1tso), pi. yitsei, n. (lit. head-
tree or stick, comp. Hietso, gbomot§o, satso, kanetSo etc.),
head (as frequently used as „yi", n.); also figuratively:
princip; beginning etc. (comp. 15^X1 and n^lfi^XH, x€(paXrj,
xe^icdaiov; caput, ^au:pt, Siop^, heat and all the deri-
vations from them). Also the use of „yitso" in com-
pounds is as frequent as that of „yi'S but more plain
and not so much diversified in its signification. Observe
the following and the rest will be easily understood:
dbyGoogk
S78 yil§o — yitSon.
^itSo ba, V. to get a head, i. e. understandifig ; yilSo or
yitSon (which see) fa, v. to have a large understandifig;
yitso gba m. k., v. to have headache; miyilSo gbami, Ut.
my head cracks me, I have headache (comp. yitSo wa
he, v., of stronger pain); yitSo gbla m. k., v. to be drawn
away by imagination; to be absent etc.; yitSo gbo$ v.
comp. yitsonwolo gbo, v., yitso he Si, v. to strike one's
head to the ground; yitSo sa = yi sa, v.; yitSo wa> v.
to have a hard head to learn; yitso wa he, v. to have
head-ache; fever; yitso wo, v. to be selfcontent, self-
complacent; yit§o ya m. k. Son, v. to be carried away
by one's thoughts, imagination; yitSo ye flefle =» h!e ye
flefle, V. to be lightminded; etc. etc. Objective combin.
ba m. k. yitso, v. to come into one's head; b@ yitSo, neg.
of ye yitso, v.; dse yitso, v. to come from one's head;
fi -, V. to bind s. th. about the -; fo -, v. to <;ut - -;
fo -, V. to wash - -; gba -, v. to cleave -; ha -, v. to
cover--; h! -, v. to remain in one's head, memory;
kfi -, V. to break - -; le -, v. to know - -, opjnioB etc.
mSi yitso Si, v. to bow down; m6 yitso, v. to attack the
head (sickness); na -, v. to see one's opinion; Se -, v.
to shave the head; wo -no, v. to lift up the head;
ya -, V. to enter the head; ye -, v. Jo be in the head;
neg. be yitso, etc. etc. Comp. yi, n. yift, n. yitsoA, n.
and their compounds.
yitsogbamo, n. headache, fr. yitSo gba, v.
yitSofimQ, n. binding about the head; fr. ft yitSo, v.
yitSofolQ, n, beheader; fr, fo yitso, y.
yitSofO, -fomo, n. beheading.
yitSoha, -hamg, n. covering of the head; fr. ha yilSo, v.
yitsohewale, n. head-ache; fr. yilSo wa he, v.
yitsQi, n. hair (of head, comp. tSoi, hetSoi).
yitSokamo, n. breaking of ooe's head.
y its on (== yin and used like it in many compounds), in-
stead of yitSo mli, n. inside of the head; mind;
meaning, opinion; understanding etc.; „moko lee moko
yitSoA, prv., no body knows any body's head inside, i. e.
mind, opinion; ba yitSoA, v. to come into the head,
mind == ba yiA, ba yitSo, v.; dSe yitSoii, v. to come
bom the heatl, mind; dse yitSoA, v. to come out of the
mind; le yitSon, v. to know the mind; na -, v. to see
• -; sa -, V. to befit the mind; to -, v. to lay up in the
TBXoiy to mind; tSake -, v. to change - -; ya yitsoA, v.
dbyGoogk
yitSon d§o — yiji. 379
to go to head, nrind, heart; ye -, v. to be in - -, oeg.
be -; etc. etc.
yitSon d$o, inf. yitSondsoIe, v. to have peace in mind; to
hare a cool head (contr. of yititon do la, yitSo gba, v.
etc.); to be free from head-ache.
yitSoA fa, v. to have a large compreheasive mind, me-
mory etc.
yitSoa gble, v. and
yitSoft ka, = yiA k5, v. to be mad.
yitSon sa, v. to be ripe in mind.
yitSon tsd, v. to be mad (tJcrrurft, im Jto^)f Derrucft
fcpn).
yitSonbS, n. coming to mind.
yitSondSole, n. coolness of head; peace of mind.
yitgoAgblemg , -kdmo> -tSdme, n. = yingblemg etc. mad-
ness.
yitSonono, n. skull. ^ «
YitSoftoifiohe, n. Golgota.
yiti^oAsale, n. ripeness.
yitloAto, n. storing or laying s. th. up in mind, memory.
yitSofLtSakemo, n. change of mind.
yitSoAwolo, pi. -wod§i, n. lit. the book of the head, i. e.
reason, memory;* -gbo, v. to loose reason or memory.
yilsoftWogbele, n. loosing of reason or memory.
yit§osale» n. fitness of head.
yitSoSe, n. shaving the head.
yiti^elo^ B* shaver of the head.
yiU^oHirad, n. bowing,
yitSotSakemQ, s. yintSakemo and yitSontsakemp, n.
yitfiowaie, n. hardness of head; unfitness for learning.
yitsowO) n* sleep of head, i. e. selfcontentmeni, selfoom-
placency; comp. dada, v. in Ot., and laka, v. in 6i^ to
flatter, deceive, by which the head goes to sleep.
yiwale, n. hardness of head; cruelty; persecution, ill treat-
ment, fr. yi wa and wa yi, v.
yiwalQ, n. cruel person, hard person.
yiw&, n. lifting up of the head; prMe.
yiwadSemo, n. hardening of bead, mind etc.
yrwQmo, n. crying at one, crying one out; hooting, fr.
wo m. k. yi.
yiwuleme> n- hurting of the head^ fir. wule yi, t.
yiyi, inf. yiyim9, v. to reason, remonstrate, redupl. oi yi
(comp. ako the Ot. v. yi = d§e and d§ie in Ga, v. to
dbyGoogk
380 yiyi ale6 — yo.
produce); ke in. k. yiyj, v. to reason with s. b. (s. yiyi,
Ol. v.).
yiyi ateft, inf. ate/iyiyimo, v. th. s. betwixt two parties,
comp. ated, n.; bu aten, v., ye ate6, v.; ke m. k. yiyi
aten, v. to reason with one.
yiyilo, n. remonstrater, reasoner.
yiyiniQ, n. reasoning, remonstrating; comp. abo nwane-
. d§e, n.
yiyomo, n. perceiving one's head etc., fr. yo ro. k. yi, v.
yo, inf. yomo, v. to perceive, to acknowledge, to re-
cognise; miyoole don, I know him no more, no longer.
yo he, inf. heyomo, v. to recognise one's self; to recognise
s. b. or s. th. , - - about.
yo hie, inf. hieyomo, v. to recognise one's face.
yo mli, inf. mliyomo, v. to perceive the inside.
yo nd, v^ to recognise a likeness, picture; s. nd; to per-
ceive a plan (of a house etc.).
yo no, V. to perceijys the upper part etc.
yo se, inf. seyomo, v. to perceive the backside, the con-
sequence; yo m. k. se, to perceive one's doing, way etc.
yo sisi, inf. Sisiyomo, v. to perceive the ground, reason,
meaning etc.; s. si§i, n.
yo yi; yin; yitSo, yitSon, v. to perceive one's head, mind,
opinion etc. ^
yO, = yomo, n, perceiving, perception, recognition; ac-
knowledgment.
yd, pi. irreg. yei, n. woman, female; feminine; she;
used in con^inations to indicate the feminine gender;
comp. na, n. hi, n. and § 24. 25; f. i. biyo, n. female
child, daughter; gbek^yO, n. female child, girl; toyO, n.
female sheep or goat; abolobatSoyO, n. femiale breadleaf-
tree etc. Comp. also M, n. wife; bi yO §i, inf. yosibi-
mo, V. to ask for a wife (into marriage); fite yO, v. to
spoil a woman, to deflower a girl; fo yO, v. to bring
forth or beget a girl; to midwife; ke yc wo> v. to sleep
or lie with a woman; kpe yd, inf. yokpemo, v. lit. to
; meet a woman; to wed; to marry; to keep the nuptials,
marriage; to make a certain ceremony answering to the
„butruwO'' of men, which is often done long before or
after marriage; comp. wye yO, v. gbS, gbld, v. (only used
of women) etc.; le yO, v. to know a woman (in the
sense of the Bible); (tSui) md yO, v. to fall in love with
a woman (in the better sence, comp. sumo yo, v.); nd
yd, V. to take a wife, = wye yd, v.; sumo yd, v. to
dbyGoogk
yo -r yogblfi. 881
love a iwoman (generally in a bad sence of ^^horemon-
gery or adultery) ; tSe yO he ba, v. to espouse a woman ;
to be engaged to a woman; tSe yO, v. to call a woman
(in A bad sence); tua yO, v. to ravish a woman (some-
times used of minor offences, f. i. to enter a womans
apartment without knocking at the door, or being called;
to come near to a woman washing herself etc.); wye
yO, V. inf. yowye, to marry a woman (only used of
men, s. gba, v.), to live in marriage or state of matri-
mony (said of the husband); also used of unlawful living
with a wonian for a longer periode; comp. ewyele yaka,
he lives with her vainly, i. e. unlawful; etc. etc.
yo, n. a very neat, small kind of antelopes.
yO, yiu (fr. the Ot. yiw), adv. yes, well; all right etc.,
comp. H! §, hg; odSogba! etc.
yo (=:yeo), irreg. imperf. tense of ye, v. to be; but against
the rule used like an aorist, and ye , the aor. tense, like
the pres. tense.
yO, n. being = ye; irreg. infinitive of ye, v. to be.
yo,n. bean; husk; ^filfenfru(i&t; comp. akpatramo, n.; abo-
bgi, n., yetre, n.
yobi, pi. yeiabii, n. effeminate person.
yobo, adj. and adv., and
yoboyobo, adj. and adv. weak; -ly = gbed6, adj.
yodsen, n. life, state, character of a woman.
yod§0, n. dance of a woman.
yodsOyo, n. female dancer.
yodSa, n. washing, bathing of a woman.
yodsuhe, n. washing-place of a woman.
yofitelo, n. spoiler of women.
yofitemg, n. spoiling of women.
yofolo, n. midwife, s. fg yo, v.
yofomo, n. begetting or bringing forth of a girl; midwifery,
fr. fo yO, V.
yofoyo, pi. yeifoyei, n. woman having born children; mo-
ther; comp. nye biianye, n.
yofiemo, n. dismissing of a woman (s. nSfiemo); fr. fie
y«, V.
yofemQ, n. womans play.
yofemo, n. desire of women.
yoga, n. womans ring.
yogbiyO, n. married woman.
yogblS, n. marriage (of a woman); s. gbfi, v.
dbyGoogk
382 yohe — yokpemokao.
yohe, n. pudenda (decent expression; comp. gbemi, n. and
nuhe, n.).
yohoro, n. woman with child; s. horo> adj.
yofaumo, n tilling of women (for which they are seldom
used).
ygi, n. an eatable fruit or husk; s. yQ, n.
yoitso, pi. -tsei, n. lit. beans-tree; a tree of bard wood,
used for building etc. and bearing husks; a kind of acaeia.
yoks, n. trid of a woman.
yokemo, n. saying of a woman.
yok^mo, and
yokomOj^n. travails of women.
yokpelo, n. (scarcely iised) marrying man; comp. ayem
forowu, n. person letting a woman perform the „yokpe'
mo" -custom.
yokpemo (Ad. yokpem), n. lit. meeting of a woman (but
generally with an indefinite subject „akpe yo", they meet
a woman, man begegnet eincr grau ob. toerfammelt ^^
mit tt)r, s. kpe, v.); wedding (especially the public
wedding -ceremony, in which the bride, „ayemf6ro",
parades the street, adorned with plenty of gold, fwre-
cious beads etc. and accompanied by her female friends;
there being also much feasting, dancing etc.); nuptials;
raarriagej, matrimony; comp. yowye, gbla, n.; a certain
ceremony of women with the same parading dancing etc.,*
but which may be made long before or after marriage
(»yowye", „gbla"), and answers the „butruw5" (n. which
see) of men.
yokpemo-atade, n. wedding dress.
yokpemo-aspatre, n. wedding shoes.
yokpemobe, n. wedding-time.
yokpemobii, n. wedding guests, s. inaloi, n.
yokpemgdd, n. wedding-wine.
yokpemodsO, n. wedding-dance.
ydipeDftodSolo, n. wedding-dancer.
yokpemodsomo, n. wedding blessing.
yokpemofo, n. parading of a wedding; s. fo, v.
yokpemgga, n. wedding-ring.
yokpemQgb^na, n. wedding-custom.
yokpemogb!, n. wedding-day.
yokpemohe, n. wedding-place.
yokpemoholQ, n. wedding-cook.
yokpemohomo, n. wedding-cooking.
yokpemokao, n. wedding-cake.
dbyGoogk
yokpemokenii , — yonii. 383
yokpemokenii, pi. n. wedding presents.
yokpemokpl, n. wedding-band.
yokpemokpQ, n. wedding-knot; wedlock.
yotpemolala, n. wedding^song.
yokpemolai, n. wedding-fuel; the fuel for brewing the wed-
ding beet which the bridegroom has to procure.
yokpemglo, n. wedding-meat.
yekpemomS, n. dough (or flour grinded wet) for the wedding.
yokpemomlinii, s. yokpemonii, n.
yokpemgnii, n. things belongmg to a wedding.
yokpemoniiyenii, pi. n. wedding-dinner (or -supper); -meal.
yokpemonma, n. food for a wedding.
yokpemgnd, pi. yokpemonii, n. which see.
yokpemo-okplo, n. wedding-table.
yokpemosa or yokpemo-asa, n. wedding haU.
yokpemosa, n. wedding-bed.
yokpem^samo, n. wedding-preparation.
yokpemosane, n. wedding-palaver.
yokpemosolemo , n. wedding-servke; wedding-prayer; co-
pulation.
yokpemosi^Io , a. aDattnc€r of a weddiog; geners^y chil-
dren, beating a brass-pan; publisher of bans.
yokpemosiemo, n. anunciation of a wedding; bans, publish-
ing of bans.
yokpemotse, n. the father who has to care for or arrange
the wedding.
yokpemotSu, n. wedding-room.
yokpemowe, n. wedding-house.
yokpem^yl^, n. woman attending a wedding.
yolipdmo, n. redemption of a woman.
yolakamo, n. flattering, deception of women.
yulala, n. women song. *
y«lg, n. kaowing of a woman; fir. le y(x, v.
yol^) n. feeding, bringing up, eduealioii ol a girl.
yolobii, pi. n. malt-stuff; the husks ol com from whicA
beer has been brewed.
yolo, n. perceiver, etc. fr, yo, v.
yomo, B. pcreeptlon; aoknawleignent, roDognitlon.
yOmo, pi. yeimedsi, n. old^woman; matron; s. nume, n.
yomu, yo mu (s. emu), n. a ckasle woman, virgin; see
oblayo, n.
yoM, n. woman-cunning, woman-art.
yonQmo, n. woman-salutatioa; — visit.
yonii, pi. n. things belonging or peculiar to woman.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
384 yoAd — yiirudafemo.
yori5, n. faking of a wife.
ydroke, inf. yorgkemo, v. to loose; to unwind thread;
comp. frake, v. sroke, v. etc.
ydrgkemg, n. loosing,
yosegbe, n. way after women,
yosenyielo, u. women-hunter. ^
yosenylemo, n. walking after women,
yosuomo, n. woman's-love ; loving of a woman (the latter
in a bad sense fr. sumo yo» v.
yoiibimo, n. asking for a woman fr. bi yo 8i, v.
yotSeio, n. a whoremonger.
yotSemo, n. whoring.
yotSu, n. womans apartment,
yowe, n. woman's house,
yowiemo, n. woman's word, language, speech,
yowy^, n. taking of a wife; marriage; matrimony; living
together with a woman ; fr. wye yo, v. ; comp. kpe yo^ v.
ii6 yo, V. 9nd gba, v. and wye, n.
yowyemamai, n. cloth for marrying,
yowyenii, pi. n. things given to a woman on marrying her.
yowyesika, n. '•money given when marrying; dowry; SKor^
gengabe.
yoyo, n. a female „yo" -antelope,
yo, adj. and adv. long, large; -ly, -ly.
yuku, and
yukuyuku, adj. and adv. ftill of little things, of little one's,
of people, life, activity; fe — , v. to be so.
yukuyukubii, pi. n. the little one's,
yukuyukufemo, n. swarming; buzzle, activity, life etc.
yuludii, adj. s. yurudo.
yuma, n. (a word from the interior,, perh. connected with
the Hebrew „gimel" , as well* as the words in europ.
languages for it), camel; s. aflukpongo and afukpoAo, n.
yumabi, n. young camel,
yumahetsoi, n. camel-hair.
yumanO, n. male camel.
yumayO, n. female camel,
yurudu, yurududu, adj. and adv. cool; -ly; comp. wurudO;
fe — , V. to be cool. •
yurudufemo, n. cool state.
dbyGoogk
385
Adanme- Appendix.
a. Grammatical Sketch.
§ 1. Introduction.
In giving a few additional remarks about the AdSnme
Dialekt of the GS-language, I neither pretend an ability to
speak or understand it so far, as to carry on a conversa-
tion in it. All I wish is to give what I have gathered
partly by personal intercourse whilst travelling or from
people about me who came from that country and partly
from a by no means perfect translation of St. Johns Gospel
from Gd into AdSiime by an Addnme - Catechist (Christian
Obobi from Kpon or Poni) and a few other writings; to
be used as stepping stones towards more extensive future
researches.
1. The AdSnme (lit. AdSgbe, Adain-gbe, -nmc, voice
or language of AdS; comp. G3, pr. n. and Ayigbe, pr. n.,
and gbg, n.) is the mother dialect of the G3, spoken by
a far more numerous nation than the latter, sc. by all the
people dwelling between the Gft- country, the sea shore,
river Volta and the Akwapim-mountains, except 9 Ayigbe-
towns on the western shore of the Volta; compricing the
following towns and their dependencies: Tema, Kpoii
(Pony); GbugbrS (Prampram), Nuno (Ningo) and Ada
along the sea-coast; Asadsale^ Osudoku and Kpon (or
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 25
dbyGoogk
386 AdSAme-Appendix.
Tete Wyim from its founder) at the western shore of the
Yolta, and Krobg (with its two principal towns Yilo and
Manya on the Krobo- mountain) and §ai or Siai (also
with two towns on the Sai-mountain) at the foot of the
Akwapim-mountains; to which is to be added the Agotim-
Iribe in the east of the river Volta with three principal
towns; altogether about 50—60,000 souls, as far as we
now know.
2. The reason why G5, and not Adanme was chosen
to become especially the written dialect, is the moral and
political supremacy of the proper Ga tribe over the Ad5-
nme- as well as the other tribes around and the earliar
uninterrupted occupation of the G§ country by Missionaries.
3. The character of the Adanme-dialect, by which it
is distuinguished from GS proper, is expressed by its being
called the mother -dialect of the latter, it is harder (Ad.
po, pe, GS: fo, fe etc.), shorter (Adn.: pem, Ga: femo;
etc.; Ad. la, GS: lad§e etc.), purer and not so much
mixed with the Otyi-languagc, and hence more primitive.
The difiference between GSl proper and AdSAme is generally
as great as that between the saxon or high -German and
the swabian or swiss Dialects of thegerman language; though
the Adafime of the coast, Asad§ale and Osddoku and even
Sai is nearer to G9 proper, than that of KrobQ, and that
bordering at the Ayigbe mixed with Ayigbe words. The
difiference between the AdSAme of Tema till Nuno on the
one and Krobo on the other hand is neariy as great as
that between the former and Gfi proper; the limits of
both being uncertain and people accostumed to it under-
stand eachother mutually.-
§2. Soimds.
The sounds of AdSnme may be represented by the
same Alfabet as those of Ga, but very probable the letters
dbyGoogk
Addnme-Appendix. 387
^y and z must be added (as v to GS) from the Ayigbe
(Comp. ®4)Iegcr« ©^Ififfcl jur 9lttgIo*®^)rad^c); „w" being
an aspirated ,,w" or a labial „h^' as if one "would blow a
feather from a freshly written paper), and ,,z'* being simi-
lar to the engl., not to the german z.
As for changes of sounds it is to be observed, that the
initial f in 69 is often p, but sometimes also tf in Adfi-
nme, the terminational n is m; mo also m; b is sometimes
m; the initial ml, m is h, ne; y often h, k sometimes d,
etc. etc., as examples will show. The AdSiime Dialect
as the Otyi- and the Ayigbe- language is in general far
more melodious than GS proper and this may be the
reason, why there are so few GS and so many AdSnme-
and Otyi- songs. But our slight acquaintance with the
AdSnme does not allow as to enter into this sul)ject.
§ 3. Roots.
The roots and their formation are in general the same
in Adanme and in 69; only instead of the many Otyi
roots which have crept into 69 the Adfinme has more
pure 6S-roots (s. § 1, 3.) and instead of the radical con-
sonants f; y; b etc.; in 69, p, n, m. etc. are more fre-
quent in Addnme (s. § 2) ;
comp.: Ad. d§eh9 (fr. d§e, v.)> 69:,afl (Ot. th. s., fr. the
Otyi, V. fi).
„ d§e na, 69: dse tsere, Ot. ade kye, v. to
get daylight.
„ dSe dsQ, 69: dSe na, Ot. ade sa, y. to get
night.
„ edso! it is peace! 69: bleo! th. s., Ot. breo!
(Salutation).
„ h!, V. to sit, dwell; 69: ta, th. s., Ot. tra,
ta, te.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
388 Adddme-Appendix.
and Ad. po, to cut; G5: fo;
„ pe, to make; ,, fe;
„ ne, to be .(somewhere); „ ye;
„ ma, to come; ,, ba;
„ mo, thou ; « bo ; etc. Comp. the
small Adn.-Vpcab. If the Ad^nme form of a root is nearer
to the Otyi-root than that of the Gd, it is a sign, that the
original root is a common western african one (as there
are many to be found in comparing the neighbouring lan-
guages) and not a root derived from the Otyi in particu-
lar; comp. f. i. the roots hue and pue in Ot. and Adil.
and gblfs, pue, gbu in 69; etc. In general seem the
strengthened consonants kp, gb, hm, iivf, hw, etc. to be
more frequent in GS, than in AdSAme, f. i. Ad. hue and
bli, G. gble, to open; Ad. hie, name; G. gbei; Ad. bio,
way; GS: gbe; Ad. bue (pue); to pierce; GS; gbu (comp.
the root: bu); etc. But contrarily is the Adn. initiating
consonant yjuy'' shortened into n in GS, s. Ad. nya, Ot.
nya, G§: na, n. mouth; v. to find, to get; nyu, water, Gfi:
nu (Ot. nsu); Ad. gble, once, G3: pen, Ot. th. s.; etc.
Secondary roots, especially such as have the form of stems
and branches in Ga, have in Adanme still the primitive
form; f. i.
Ad. dse, GS: dsie, v. to take out;
„ suo, „ sumo, V. to love;
„ da, „ damo, v. to stand;
„ la, „ ladse, v. to loose;
„ kple, „ kpleke, v. to descend;
,, hre, „ here, v. to take up;
comp. also stems, as:
Ad. le, G3: lele, vessel;
„ hflo, „ homo, hunger; etc.
In the forms we shall partially find the same law, thai
the Adn. is more primitive and short, than the G§. Still
dbyGoogk
Addnme-Appendix^ 389
in roots, steins and forms also cases of the contrary may
be found, as this is to be expected, because of the con-
tinual (circular) movement of languages. — The few secon-
dary Addnme roots will be averted to among the forms
and in the Ad. Vocabulary.
§ 4. Forms and pure formwords.
As it is to be expected, the greater difference between
this Dialect and the G§ proper is to be found, as we have
seen, not in the roots, but in the forms. Though the
pure formwords, that is the radical pronouns, as the roots
or radical elements of all the forms, still remain very close
to those in Ga, and only appear more primitive. In their
most simple form, that is as subjective pronominal aug-
ments of verbs and possessive pronominal augm. of nouns
initiating, and as dbjective pronominal-augments of verbs,
terminating words they are the following:
1) subjective:
i- (in Krobo), mi-, m-, n-, n; I; Gft: mi.
o*, thou.
e-, he, she, it.
wa-, we; G. wo -.
nye-, you.
a-, they; G. ame -.
a-, they; G. a-.
2) possessive:
i- (Krobo), ye-, mi-, ami-, mami-; my; G. mi.
0-, thy.
e-, his, her, its.
wa-, G. W0-, our.
nye-, „ th. s., your.
a-, „ ame-, their.
a-, n th. s., their, indefinite; German: man.
dbyGoogk
390 Adfitoie-Appendix.
3) objective;
- mi, m',
6. th. 8.
me.
-0,
M «
thee.
-le,
W »
him, her (it).
-wo, -0
W W
us.
-nye,
W »
you.
- me.
« ame.
them
and mei,
people, indef.
4) Independent pers. pronouns.
mami, ami, imi, mi, GS: mi, I.
mo, „ bo, thou.
Ifi,
„ le, he, she.
wo,
„ wo, we.
nye,
„ nye, you.
ame? me
„ ame, they.
See, nimli, nime.
„ mei, people, man.
pi. n.
(This latter forms of the pronouns are combined also
with the verb dsi, to be s
. th., instead of the subjective
or perh. also the objective
forms as in 6d;
f. i. midSi,
I am it.
modsi.
thou art it.
ledsi.
he is it.
wodsi,
we are it.
nyedSi,
you are it.
medSi,
they are it.
or: ndmlo dSimi,
a man am I.
„ dSio, dSimc
}, „ „ art thou.
« dSile,
„ „ is he.
nimli dSiwo;
men are we.
„ dSinye,
« „ yee.
„ dSime,
„ „ Ihey.)
dbyGoogk
AdHnme-Appendix. 39 1
These radical formwords together with a few notional
words Used as formwords (esp. mi, m; n. n5, n., ba,
ma, V. n6, v. ni, v. be, v. etc.) are the elements used
for forms, as in 6^ and the related family of languages,
though they can not be in every instance traced back to
their respective roots. — Excepted from these outward
forms, initial and terminational augments or pre- and suf-
fixes, are the inward changes of the roots, as they are
to be also in Danme observed, but not so frequently as
in Ga, the former being more primitive: there occurred
only a few instances to me, sc. regularly the change of
the vowel ^«,Umtaut") indicating the aor. neg. s. Tab, I.
and 11.; and a few irregular ones, f. i. da (G. dsa), v. to
be straight; dra (G. dsadSe), v. to straighten; d§e (G. th.s.),
to come forth; dse and dsie (G. dsie), v. to bring forth;
de and dro, v. to say; ndmlg, pi. ndmJi and nimli, n.
man; etc. comp. the vocabulary.
After these we can enumerate the initial and termina-
tional forms (augments and affixes) and their use, just as
they appear at the verbal roots and 2, as they are to be
found less regularly at other wordforms, especially simple
stems :
dbyGoogk
392
Table I.
AdSAme-Appendix.
Adfinme-Forms. Corresponding Gft-Forms.
1
m
o
wa
nye
ko
ko
mo
p6
pe
pe
pe
pe
fe
pe
fe
p6
p6
p6
p6
pe
pe
pe
i=
a'fe
fe)
-! ame
■! a
i
wa
bd
iam^
— ' fe
(KrQbo Dial.)
(Sea-Coast-Dial.)
or
mi
mi
0
wo
nye
ka
a
fe,
f6,
f6,
fe,
fe,
fe,
fe,
fe,
pe.
f6,
fe
fe
f^,
f6,
f6,
f6,
fe,
fe.
: —
fe,
Aor.Tense,indical.
posit, of the v.pe,
to do, to make.>
they did.
they did, man
t(^at; it was done.
Fut. tense, ind.pos.
S. A. Table U.;
-will do.
Perfect tense, ind.
pos. they have
done; it has been
' done,
perf. tense ind. pos.
have done; he
has done,
aor. t. ind. posit.
he did.
aor. tense pot. pos.
(he) shall do, may
do etc.
aor. ind. pos. I did.
aor. ind. pos. thou
didst,
aor. ind. pos. we
did.
aor. ind. pos. you
did.
impert. and pot.
negat. do not!
positively used af-
ter ka, kg, that,
Q, ) s. Table II. and
Ad. Spec,
mg ! impert. and posit.
sing, do!
dbyGoogk
AddAme-Appendix.
393
7able I.
Addnme-Forms. Corresponding 6S-fonns.
1
o
!
kpa
pe
—
—
sa —
fe,
—
na
pe
pe
^i
na
fe,
feo,
pe
pe
'!
~
~
~
~
•
fee,
1
aor. tense, iterat.
pes. to do again.
aor. tense, perfec-
tive mood; pos.
to have done
doing ; oroptat.
to wish to do.
imperf. tense ind.
pos. do or did.
I imp. tense ind. neg.
do or did not do.
?
?
r
s
pe
we —
—
—
e
fe
ko
-^
pe
pe
he J
—
—
-1
femo
fe
'!
pe
' ' 1
pe
pe
m )
mi
—
—
fe
mo,
—
pe
mi
C def. art.
fe
mo
le.
i
pe
mi
mi
fe
mo
le.
ye
pe
mi
wa
pe
mi
C —
wo
fe
mo
le,
a
pe
mi
c —
ame
fe
mo
le.
a
pe
mi
C —
a
fe
mo
le,
pe
pe
m
m
. —
—
fe
mo
i.
pe
pe
mi
mi
^ —
—
fe
mo
ile,
pe
lo
—
—
fe
lo
—
pe
lo
I
pe
\Q
t —
—
fe lo'
i,
pe
ll
neg. perf. ind.
a kind of participle
or verbal noun,
doing.
inf. doing; n. deed.
the deed.
my deed.
our deed,
their deed.
„ „ (indef.)
pi. form, deeds.
Ih. s. with defln.
article (o).
pers. verbal noun:
doer, maker.
pi. form.
dbyGoogk
394
Table L
AdiAme-Forms.
A4tiiMe*Appenda.
Corresponding (M-Fonns.
w^mm
"sB
g
J*
pe
nS
pe
»
pe
w
pe
be
pe
be
pe
be
pe
ko
pe
1q I g Ime
I
he
e
we
m!
lit. to be doings m
mlm
I lit. to be not
doing.
|naA
9
o
o
fe
fe
fe
lo
i le,
A,
pi. form with def.
art.'
pres. tense iod.
pos. to be doiBg;
Comp reye,th.s.
in Ot. and le wg
me, th. s. in Ayi-
gbe.
pres. and fat. tease
neg. Comp. be,
neg. of ye, in GS.
would not do.
m
0
e
wa
nye
a
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
p6
p6
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
be
e
i
i
i
iO
Kr.
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
o)
mi
le
nye
wo
me t -ii
hi
hio
me
3'a
ba
mi
0
e
wo
nye
amo
a
fe
fe
fe
fe
fe
fe
mi
lo
nye
wo
amo
amo
— {combined conjaga-
j lion; logo lo do.
— th. 8. to come lodo.
Ireduplic^t verb or
I frequent, mood.
'inf. or verbal noun
"'^' of it.
pi. form.
dto. with def. art.
w n it in
with subjective and
objective augm.
dto.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
AdSAme-Appendix.
395
TwiMe I.
Adanme-Forms.
Corresponding 6a-Forms.
T
I
i
1
'
aa
fe
ame
with augm. of the
a
ma
pc
me
—
—
— '
)
ame
ama
fe
ame
—
fut. tense, they
a*
fe
ame
shall make them.
m
ma
ma
pe
pe
—
—
—
—
ma
fe
—
I shall do . .
o
ma
fe
—
—
—
—
00
fe
—
.....
thou shalt do.
e
ma
fe
—
—
—
—
ee
fe
—
—
he shall do etc. etc.
i
h
Ad
ne
pe
pe
pe
pe
he 1
e
ici!
D.
—
mim
ml
fe
fe
fe)
feJ
I am often or fre-
quently doing.
etc.
etc.
Regarding the employment of these forms see Table li.
and HI. and the Ad. Specimen.
Besides these there are the following forms to he ob-
served, which are employed at other wordfonns: mami -
= i, ye, G. mi -, poss. pron. augm., my; f. i. maminyemi,
my brother or sister; mami = ami, indep. pron., I; nd -,
pi. nihi - , nil - before and - A5, - nihi, - nii, after a word,
answer to the Gd: mo, pi. mei, person; nd, pi. nii, thing;
nyo, pi. mei and hi, man; f. i. ndyayam; G. ndfdn, a bad
thing or deed; mofdii, a bad person; Gdnd, pi. Gdme,
Gali; a Gd-man; G. Ganyo, pi. Gamei; ndmlo, pK ndmli,
nimli, niime, man pers. , seems to have been the element,
from which the form - \q , answermg the engl. and germ.
- er, is taken; comp. pelQ, pi. peli, pelome, n. maker.
But a most peculiar form is the dem. pron« - o, sufQxed
to nouns and sentences (i. e. the last word of them) an-
swering the pron. or definit. art. h in Gfi, no i^ Ot., la,
a fn Ayigbe; engl. „the^; it can not be written separately
aa in Ot. and Gfi, but must be, as in Ayigbe suffixed to
dbyGoogk
396 AdiAme-Appendix.
the word, the more so as it frequently preoeeds the suf-
fixed plural form of it; comp. kaselo, 6. th. si, disciple;
with def. art. kaselQ$, pi. kaseli, kaselohi, kaselome; with
def. art. kaselio, kaseliome, kaseloQme or kaselomeo; if ad-
ded to the impers. verbal noun ending with -m, -mi (Ga:
-mo), the latter form is used for suffixing the article; f. i.
yokpem, wedding; yokpemio, the wedding; pi. yokpemhi,
yokpemi, with art. yokpemio, yokpemigme and yokpenii-
meo. After sentences it is generally strengthened into
-one and also -no alone used; f. i. benS mdeleone, bene
mdeleno or (Krobo-Dial.) benS ideloo, Ga: beni mikgle le,
when I told him (lit. the time when I told him); comp.
also ami ne, ami one, Kr. Dial, imi no = G. mi lo; mo
no = bo lo, le no, le le, wo no, wo lo, I (with stress
on it) or, as for me, thee, him, as — etc. Farther is to
be remarked uuder the forms derived from notional words
the suffixed ^m"" (= mimi, mi, G. mli, il; Ot. mu, m;
Ay. me, m, n. inside), as a form expressing the relation
of locality and as in Gd, often connected with other words
and forms; and the termination J"" = dSi, ni, v. to be
something; G. dsi, ni, n; f. i. anokwai, G. anokwan ==
anokwa d§i, it is true; yekakei, = G. mikomen, it is 1
alone; and also the irregular pU form of the verb „gbo**,
to die; agbohi = G. amegboi, they died; etc. etc. The
Vocabulary exhibits more of these especially as to augments
of nouns and adjectives, which however are less frequent
than in Gd and Otyi, esp. initial ones. (3omp. also the
foil. §§. and the Ad. Specimen.
§ 5. The combination and Syntax in general.
Combination and Syntax (only different, because in the
former words combined are writteh together, in the latter
they are left separate) is in general the same as in Gd»
dbyGoogk
Addnme-Appendix. 397
if the different forms are duly taken into account; the verb
forms the centre mih which all the other words and parts
of speech organically are combined; either in a subjective
or objective relation to it; the subject or object may again
be defined by a preponed or postponed noun or pronoun
or a postponed adjective, and the verb by an other verb,
or an only grammatical subject or object ; besides number,
class, person etc. serving as definitions to every one of
them I can therefore generally refer to the „gram. Sketch
of the Ga-Language and have here only to observe a few
cases, in which the Danme Dialect differs from 6§ proper;
though some are already referred to in the preceeding §§.
The auxiliary verbs „ft§", G. ye, and n6; na, G. th.
s. and kpa, G§: sa, seem to be more closely united to
their respective notional verbs, of which they express the
relations of time, locality, instrumentality, and modality,
than this is the case in Ga. As the auxiliary verb „ke"
in G§ does not require a subject of its own (i. e. the sub-
jective pronominal augment is not repeated), and it can
stand close to its notional verb, if not separated from it
by a subject or object; so these tree auxiliairies are also
closely united with their notional verbs and the first more-
over has its notional ver^ for its object, wilst in GS the
same relation (the present tense) is expressed by a mere
tense-form; comp. nng pehe or in6-pehe (G. lit. miye femo
or min5 femo, but now intirely contracted into mimfe), I
tm doing; M^ ndko pehe or pel, I am something doing,
i. e.* I am doing something, G. mlmfe noko; comp. the
Engl, with the Germ.: f,xS) bin etmod t()ucnb;" — nna-wo
no, G. mina mi^vo no, I have exalted (already) and:
makpa-wo no, G. masa mawo no, I will exalt again (Comp.
Job. 12,28. accord, to Hanson and in the Ad. Coast-dialect).
That the object of such double verbs stands betwixt both,
if there is only one, is rule in Ga and Adanmc.
dbyGoogk
398 Adftnme-Appendix.
§ 6. The verb aad its forms in particular.
All the forms of the verb in Gft have their correspond-
ing forms in Adanme» but Ihe latter has three or four
moods regularly or at least more developed, of which their
are only traces in GS; we may call them the frequen-
tative, iterative and perfective or optative and
perhaps consecutive or subjunctive mood. The scan-
tiness of the materials and the limits of knowledge , time
and space do only allow a rough sketch and if names are
not fitly chosen, the student must look to the materials
given. nPe"", to do, is chosen as an example and only
where it does not suffice, other verbs are taken. It is a
matter of course that because of the above mentioned rea-
sons many forms must be given by analogy.
dbyGoogk
Adfitime-AppeD4ix. 899
Table n.
I. Indicative mood,
A. Positive voice, B. Negative voice.
1. Aorist tense.
N.
i
m
o
e
wa
n;ye
a
a
a
a
wa
N. did or made.
etc.
G. wof6.
H ate.
0, etc. he was
madcjlhouwast
made ;$ubj. and
obj. combinat.
o, they see thee,
me, we s. them,
etc.
N.
i
m
0
e
wa
nye
a
pe
Pi
P»
Pi
Pl
Pi
Pi
Pi
P»
P>
P»
P>
PI
i J N. did not do.
( „ „ „ make.
I did not do.
mifee.
etc.
>G.
G. wQfee.
^ ( amefee.
^ lafee.
mi==d§eemi,ili8
o noti, thoujhe.
le Comp.theOt.
ye, neg. nye,
to do ; to be.
mi, he did not or
does not make
me.
Ihey do not
Iiucy uu iiui
8. thee, Ihbu
art not seen.
2, Imperfect tense.
N.
pe
or N.
pe
m
pe
0
pe
e
pe
i
na
e
so
e
su
e
'wo
Q\N.doesordid;
e^ uses to do.
0, I did
0, thOu didst.
ome, he made
them,
a, 1 see
" } it suffices.
Omi, he honours
me
Either neg.
or
m
m
or
pi
pe
aor.
perfect.
I did not.
we, I don't or
have not done,
e { 1 J.J ^^^ ggg^
'jidid
we, I don't see.
did not suffice,
su I we, I do not „
wT .mi he does not or
I did not honour
i me.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
400
Table IL
AdUiiiie-Appeiidix«
I. hiictttTe Bool
A. PositiYC Yoice. B, NegatiYe yoicc.
2, Imperfect tense.
8 i I
nfe 6^0,011110, G.nlewo- ! a m
omi le, sen- |
tencewithde- j
fioite art. - o. '
5. Perfect tense.
N. has done
G«: N. fefe.
I have done.
<• fe
pe
1
pe
6
pe
h
pe
wi
pe
nyfe
pe
k
pe
k
na
me; with obj.
augm. „me."
they have seen.
N. e
pe
i
pe
0
pe
e
pe
wa
pe
nye
pe
a
pe
a
na
me, they did not
ho noor them
or they were
not honoured.
we, N. has not
done,
we, 1 have not
done;G.:mif6ko.
we
we
we
we
weme, they have
not made them,
we, they have not
seen.
N. ng
ng
ing
MS
eng
wang
nyeng
ang
ang ndko
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
pe
he]
1 I
N. isdomg;
G. N. mife,
mfe.
'I S
he, they are
doing s.th.G.
anieinfe n. k.
N. be
pe
be
pe
be
pe
be
pe
ibe
pe
mbe
pe
mbe
pe
obe
pe
ebe
pe
^\abe
pe
nyebe
pe
abe
pe
abe ndko
pe
abe ndko
pe
..^1 N. is not do-
? ling; G.N.
* \ efen.
J® (lam not do-
, iing;G.raifeA.
i
i
i
i
i
i, they are not
he, doing any
thing, G.ame-
fen noko.
dbyGoogk
AdaAme-Appendix.
401
Table n.
I. Indicative mood.
A. Positive voice.
B. Negative voice.
5. Future tense.
1
o
N. ba
pe
3
As in the present tense.
N. ma
pe
N. will do.
N. be
pe
he etc.
N. ? a
pe
or be
pe
i
mba
pe
1
mbe
na
he lamnotsee-
mona
pe
I will do.
mbe
na
e ingorlshall
ma
pe
1
mbe
na
] not see.
oma
pe
ema
pe
etc. etc.
U. Potential mood.
1. Aorist tense.
N. 6
^konS <
i
pe
ba
^ipe
iba'pe
6ba
6ya
,w6
N. will, shall or
may do; G. N.
^fe.
m = G. „koni
^ba mU*" that
(it) may be
fulfilled.
1 shall do.
etc. etc.
, I shall go to do.
, thou shall co-
me to do.
, he shall go to
do.
G. wofe(a).
„ nyefe(a).
„ am^fe(a),
^fea.
N.
k6|pe
ik6 pe
ok6 pe
eko pe
wako pe
nyeko pe
ako pe
akoba pe
akoya
fe
etc
N. shall not do.
I shall not do.
etc. etc.
G. kafe.
G. nyekafea etc.
they shall not
come or go to
do.
Comp. coi^.
The fut. tense has not oc-
curred to me, but is easily
to be formed according to
analogy.
ZimiDermano, Akra-Vocab.
20
d by Google
402
Table n.
Addnme-AppeDdir.
lU. Imperative mood.
A. Positive voice. B. Negative voice.
1. Aortst tense.
r
Root.
Pe
! G. femo! do
(it)!
* U
pe ! do il not! G.
; kafe.
mo pe
! G. femo ! do
mok6
pe ! do it not! G.
thou it!
kafe.
nye
pe
! G.nyefea!do
you it!
nyek6
pe
! G.nyekafea!do
you not do it.
l^rg'pe
mone
nyenS
pel
p6
he! Be doing it!
! th. s.
! Be ye doing il!
2. Present tense.
Be
mobe
nyebe
pe
pe
pe
he! Be not do-
ing it!
i! sing.
! plur.
Has not occurred to me.
N.
IT. Frequentative mood.
1, Aorist tense.
pelpeJN. did fre- I N. | pifpT.
pe Ipei' quently
2. Imperfect tense.
N. Ipe
peg; or pepee,
pepei.
The same.
3. Perfect tense,
N. fe| pe Ipei. | N. | pelpewe.
4, Present tense, .^
pehe. N. be pe pehe.
pel. „ pe pel.
bge etc. j „ bQJbQe.
-5. Future tense,
N. ma|pe|pei. j The same as the former.
N. A6[pe
„ bo
dbyGoogk
AdMme-Appendit.
Table IL
T. Iterative mood.
A. Positive voice. B. Negative voice.
1. Aorist tense.
403
99
1
1
1 ,
f
N. kpa pe
G.: N. saefe, j N. kpa
N. did again,
repealed to do;
did once more.
pi
2. Imperfect tense.
N. kpa
,, kpa
„ kpa
„ kpa
pe
pe
ba
su
0,N. made again
a, came again,
ii, arrived again.
The same as the former
or the pres. neg.
5. Perfect tense.
N. ^kpa'pe N. fesa Me, in; N. fekpa pe
1 GS: N. has
1 done again. ;
we, N. fesa cf^ko,
N. has not done
again.
4. Present tense.
N. kpa
or tie
pe
pen
he, N.mlsamfe;
I kpahe, N. mlsa
mfe, N. is do-
ing again.
N. be
pen
1
Q kpahe, N. is
not doing
again.
5. Future tense.
N. ihakpa
pe
N.Will do ag-l
ain;G^:N.asa The same as the former.
afe. 1
TI. Perfective or Optative mood.
1. Aorist tense.
N. naj
orN.nae
pe
pe
N. na efe in
Ga;N. finished
or accompli-
shed doing; N.
wished to do.
th.s. (seldom).
N. nae
N. ne
N, ne e
pe
pe
pe
N. did not ac-
complish to do;
did not wish to
do,
th. s.
26 ♦
dbyGoogk
404
Table IL
AdSAme-Appendix.
TL VedwtiYt or Optative mood.
Positive voice. B. Negative voice.
2. Imperfect tense.
99
I
N. naa pe o, N. fioishes
doing, or:
N. naa pale wishes to do
5. Perfect tense.
I 1 N. hasaccom- j N. naweipe
N. fena pe ( plished doing ; '
or „ ena e pe i wishes to h^ve
The same as aorist. neg. or
perfect neg.
S. na
or tie
G.: N. n^koefe,
N. has not yet
done; does not
done. wish to have
done.
4. Present tense.
I N. ebe 'peml nae,N.nanafe,
in G5: N. is
I not accom-
I - plishing, not
i I wishing to Ao,
pe he
pem nae,N. is accom-
plishing to do,
wishing to do;
G.:N.mlnamlfe.
5. Future tense.
N. man^
pe N. will accom-
I plish to do;
, wishes to do.
The same as in the pres. tense.
VII. Consecntive or Sabjanctive mood.
Aorist tense.
Of this mood only a few traces have appeared to me,
which I give here, and with which „ka", auxil. verb in
G§ and its divers uses are to be compared.
kS N. ko
pe I (that) N. does
> or might do;
I G.: (ake) N.
; feo ; comp. Mt.
i 3, 9. 11. 14.
! KrobQ-Dial. k
I GS; also: ko,
I koni, in G3.
kS N. kojpe
dsi-
that N. not made
= pot. mood;
comp. Joh. 11,
37; but
kune ekojgbo we, he would not
. have died. Job.
I 11,32.
dbyGoogk
Addiime- Appendix. ^ 405
There farther appeared to to me four different verbal
nouns, sc. three impersonal and one personal; the former
again appearing under different forms:
1. Impersonal verbal nouns.
P^"^ I pi. pemhi, pemi; with def. article, pemhio, pernio
P®"^^ and pemiome; G. femo, pi. femoi, infinitive form
and n. doing; deed; making; bag J()im, bic Zf)at
pehe, shortened into pee, pe'i, pe; (G. fe? or no cor-
relating form); a kind of participle, but used also
as noun: „doing"; see esp. the form of the present
tense; h^pehe, be doing; bepehe, be not doing,
pepehe i
pepee ' n. (inf. of pepe, redupl. or freq. mood); doing,
pepei ) deed; comp. also: bobge, gbebei, gbogboe etc.
pep 6 fr. bo, gbe, gbo v. etc. In G.: fefemo and the
like; but seldom used.
From the second of these forms may have derived
the frequent infinitive form in G. and Adn. formed only
by the lengthening of the rad. vovvel, as: ba, coming; ya,
going; gbe, killing; bO, crying etc. Comp. also the diff.
Otyi infinitive forms.
2. Personal, verbal noun.
pelo> pi- peli, pelohi, peU^me; Mrith def. art. peloome or
pelomeo, G. felo (Ot. yofo): doer, maker.
Other forms of the verb are either slight modifications
arising from the difference of sounds or exceptions, which
if they occurred to me are referred to in the Ad. Voca-
bulary.
The conjugation of verbs combined with the aux. v.
ba and ya , which have only been referred to in the pot.
mood, is as in G§ developed throughout all the moods and
tenses, but is quite regular, as in 6d,
dbyGoogk
406 AdSAme-Appeadix.
Plnral forms of verbs, which are frequently to be met
with in 6S but are wanting in Otyi, I did not find, though
there may be some. Once kuku, red. of ku, v. to take;
GS: ko, pi. kglo, occurred to me for „kolo".
The relation of the verb to its subject and object is
the same, as in Ga.
The question does as in G§ not effect the verb or its
relation to its subj. or obj., except that the word put in
question is, if possible, put in advance for stress* sake and
the infinitive absolute frequently used for this purpose.
Only one interrogatory particle, sc. „be", but not at the
end, as in GSi, but at the beginning of the question, has
occurred to me, s. be, interr. part, in the Voc.
§ 7. Prononn, noun and adjective or Subject and Object
and th^ir definitions.
The subject and object of a verb may be a pronoun,
noun or adjective (or* adverb or numeral,^ but gram-
matically treated as noun, pronoun or adjective); and may
be as such moreover defined by number (person), class,
gender, possessive pronoun or noun, appositive noun or
adjective and each of these parts of speech may be ex-
pressed by a mere form, or a word, or a sentence. The
Ddnme being only a Dialect of the G3, we refer generally
to the grammatical sketch of the latter and mention only
such forms in Danme as differ from it.
1. The personal pronouns as they are expressed by
augments of the verb as well as their independent forms
we have seen in the preceding §§. Here we have only
to give them and the others in a tabular order as far as
they have occurred to us; they are:
dbyGoogk
Ada^me-Appendix.
407
Table m.
1. Personal Pronovm.
Substantive Pron.
Adjective Pr. | Adverbiarl Pron.
a. Subject.
i-,m-,mi|j
m-,n-, n-*
0-, thou
e-, he, she, it.
wa-, 'we
nye-, you
a-, they
b. Object.
-mi,-m';me.
-o, thee.
-le,hiin,her.
-wo, us.
-nye, you.
-me, them.
c. Possessive, d. Independnt.
. . ami,
ami -, mami-|
ye
i-
my.
mami,
I.
0-, thy. mo, thou.
e-, his, her, its. le, he, she.
wa-, our. wo, we.
nye-, your, nye, you.
a-, their. me, they.
There are no'
adjective perso-'
nal pronuns in Gd
and Addnme, the
possessive pro-
nouns being sub- 1
stantive.
2. Demonstrative Pronouns.
ene, this; pi. eneme, 'ne, pi. neme.|
enetseme. -0, -one, -ne;l
ndne, G. mone; and no- the; def. art.
ne; this person; this ISke, pi. kSk^me,
thing. I kike, „ klkeme,
pi. nihine, niine, nii-| with ne follow-
neme. ing; such; this
le (be, she), even he,^ same;G.neke-
even she. i ne.
no, IoIq, that. dsH-ne, G. nakai
i -le, that same.
hie, pi. hieme, G.
hie; here; hence,
ledse, pi. ledseme»
G. dsei,dsemei;
there, thence,
pioko, G. biane,,
now; immedia-
tely.
d§a,d§ane,G.agbe-
ne, now; then,
dsa, G. nakai , so,
thus.
kikSy G. neke, so.
dbyGoogk
406
UL
S. ImUrro§atk€ Promomu,
SnbftantiTe Pros.
Adjectire Pr.
Adrerbial Proa.
1
bene? ) Gi:iiaaM>?who
d€ lebc? when?
Bieiie?> and meoi? me?
G. te beni?
DC? ) n«? what?
t
dSie? G. n^be?
where, whence?
kg.k5?G.te.ten?
how?
li ape kS? how is
it?
4. BdaOve Prommns.
ni, G. ni, who, what.
ni, G. nl, who.
bene; where,
which.
which.
whence.
ndni, Gi : moni and noni;
ben«, when; how.
who, what.
bong, how.
pi. nihini, whidi, that.
ndnS, when, how.
niiii^.
Comp. heni, beni
and bgni (noni)
inGa.
5. L
tdefimU Pronouns,
n5, pi. nlhi, nil, nime,
ko, pi. kome; G.
ko,one; einR ein*
me ; some bod^ ; some
ko, pi. kome;
mal.
thing; comp. mo, pi.
some;
heko, somewhere,
mei and nd, pi. nii
ko; a, an; G. th.
G- th. s.
and nihil, in GS.
s. indef. article.
lebeko, sometime.
ndko, pi. nihikome, nii-
ligbioko, someday.
kome, G. moko, noko.
Compare also adi
'erbs and numerals
th. same.
and the ^
Vocabulary.
2. Nouns and adjectives are defined as to their class
(personal, impersonal, individual or collective) by their word-
form, which must be sought for in the vocabulary; as to
their gender by adding the nouns nyumu, Gd: na, male;
and yo, G. the same, female, to them as in GS; as to their
number by their termination. The singular number has
dbyGoogk
AdftAme-Appendix.
409
only a few regular terminations; f. i. personal: -nd, 6.
'Uyo and -mo; -lo, G. th. s.; Ot. -fo; Kyerepon: -ho,
Ayigbe: to, la, a; impers. no, G. th. s. ; m, mi, G. mo;
-e, i, G. th. s. compare also § 4 and 6; but there are two
regular and a few irregular plural-forms: the first may be
called the personal and the second the impersonal plural-
form, though the distinction is not strickly kept up and
both used even at the same word; Ihey are: -me (comp.
pronoun „me*S G. ame, mei); and -hi, shortened into „i"
which even may effect the preceeding vowels of the word
and change them into ni"^ (in GS „hPS only pi. form of
na, man and „i'S most common Gg-pl. form) both of which
may be modified by adding' the definite article, as will be
shown. Compare the following words.
Singular form.
Pers. pi. form.
Impers.
plural form.
ndmlg,
G3: gbomo; man,
nSmlgme?
nomli, nimli.
person.
nime, irreg.
pelo,
„ felo, maker
pelome, with art.
pelohi, peli;
peloome, pelomeg.
with art. pe-
Gdnd,
„ GSnyo, GSman,
Game ?
Jio.
nyumu
„ nti (pi. hi) man,
Gall, Galio.
. male,
— — —
nyumui.
y«.
„ y5,M; (pi. yei,
yi; with art.
nSmei) , wo-
yiome.
man; wife;
— — —
tsolo,
^ t§ulo, bofo; ser-
tsolome, tSoHome
tsolohi, tsoli.
vant, messenger;
(with art.)
nyemi,
„ th.s.pl.nyemimei,
nyemime, with art.
nyemihi.
brother, sister,
nyemiome.
tSe,
„ th. s. pi. tsemei,
father.
tseme; tseome.
~—
nye.
„ th. s. pi. nyemei,
mother,
nyeme,
*—
tSo,
„ th. s. pi. irreg.
t§ei, tree.
with art. tsoome.
tsohi, tsihi.
sane,
„ th. s. pi. slldSi,
matter.
with art. saneome.
sanehi.
etc. etc.
etc.
dbyGoogk
410 AdftAme-Appendix.
The irregular pi. forms mast be referred to in the
Vocabulary; the adjectives if they accept any plural form,
have „hi, i".
3. The next definition, which is used to define nouns
and sentences, is that by the dem. pronoun or the def.
art.: -o, -one, -ne; which is added to nouns, mostly in
the first form and often before the plural form ; and to the
last word of sentences mostly in the last two forms (in
the Krobo-dialect also in the first); to define them as known;
nondefinition being ei%er left unexpressed or expressed
by „ko".
4. Nouns are moreover defined possessively by pro-
nouns prefixed, as we have seen or noun preponed; or
appositively by nouns or adjectives or numerals, definite
and indefinite, postponed ; or by sentences in the place of
these prepositions or appositions; as in 63; f. i. etse, his
father, bi t§e, father of a child; child's father; t§e niiatse,
rich father, t§6 akpa, good father, t§e n^ hi, th. s.
S 8. Riimerals.
1. The definite numerals which, as in Gd, have form
and place of adjectives from „one^ to „nine^, but the form
of nouns in tens, hundreds and thousands, differ only slightly
from those in GS; they are:
k^ke, and = Gd: ekome, ekq, kome, ko; one.
^nyo, G. th. s. two.
fete, n n n three,
fewe, ewye, ewyie, G. edfe, four.
five.
six.
seven.
eight.
nine.
dbyGoogk
fenuQ,
G. enumo,
fekpa,
„ th. s.
kp6go
n kpawo.
kpanyo ,
„ th. 8.
n^,
n nehQ,
Ad&lime Appendix.
nyoAm^ G. th. s.
ten.
ke kake.
eleven.
ry ke enyo,
twelve.
,1 ke ete,
thirteen.
ke ewye,
fourteen.
etc. etc.
nyonmai enyo, or nyonm^nyo,
twenty.
nyonmai enyo ke kake,
twenty one.
nyonm^le,
thirty.
nyonm^wye,
fourty.
nyonmenuo ,
fity.
nyonm^kpa,
sixty.
nyonm^kpago ,
seventy.
nyonm^kpanyo,
eighty.
nyoilmenS,
ninety.
late, Ay. Ih. s. ; Ga and Ot., oh6.
hundred.
lafai enyo,
two hundred,
lafai ete,
lafai ewye etc.
akpe, G, th. s. Ot. apira,
thousand.
kpei enyo.
two thousand,
akpei nyonm^,
ten thousand.
411
akpe kake ke lafai kpanyo ke nyoAmemg ke kpago, 1857.
Connected with nd-, pi. nihi, nii; persons or things are •
expressed with the number, ndkake, G. nokome, one thing,
mokome, one person; nihi enyo or nd enyo, two persons;
two things etc.
ndkrgkrS, G. moklenklefi, ndklenkleng; and
krSkr^nd, G. kleMlenmo, -nd, the first person; --thing;
nd enyo, or n5nd dSi enyo, the second;
n5n6 dsi ete, the third etc.
kakekake or ekomekome, one each, one by one;
enyoenyo, two each; two by two etc etc.
dbyGoogk
412 AdftAme-Appendix.
2. Indefinite numerals are:
kake; one; some; only; alone; G. eko, ko, kome; keke.
eko, pi. ekom^, ekomei, some; einige^, einige; etli(t)f^,
etlid^e.
babaQ, much; many; G. babao.
bobOyo, bobOyoyo; little, few ; G. bibio, flfio; flo.
Ifa (Coast-Dial), tsoa (Kr.-Dial.) and tSo; every: all;
G. fe; fid, pid; used in the sing, with reduplication
of the noun connected with it, as in GS: notfand,
n5t§uand every thing or person; S^^^^mann; 3«l>n>^^f^;
Gd: ndf^n5, mofemo;
pi. nihi tfa, -tsod, tso, G. nii fla, -fS; mei fe; all
things or persons;
iSo tsoa tso, G. Iso K tso, every tree; etc. etc.
Comp. Pronouns ; Tab. III. and § 9 and Yocab.
§ 9. Adverbs and Coiyanctions.
Both of these have to do again more directly with the
verb; the first kind of words, — according to their original
nouns, adjectives and verbs — , to define the verb or to
express the relations of time, place or locality; manner or
modality, intensity, frequency etc.; they are treated by the
language like other regular objects and are very numerous*
• as it is one of the peculiarities of the african languages
belonging to this family to corroborate verbs ^ith adverbs
of the same notion, though different forms (sometimes words
from a neighbouring language) as well as with their own
infinitives; they must be looked for in the Voc. The latter,
the conjunctions^ serve to connect one verb with another
or, what is the same thing to connect sentences (but never
nouns, which is always done by verbs; s. ke, nd, iiS, v.
etc.); either coordinately or adversatively or subordinately.
They are mostly old verbs or short sentences as in G3;
and we only enumerate here the principal ones:
dbyGoogk
Addfime-Appendix. 413
ne, ni, G. ni, and (from dsi, ni, to be);
se; si; Si; G. si, but (from d§i, ni. to be);
formely both were only one word, as it is still so
with „na" in Otyi. *
ka, kg, ke (ade); G. ake, Ot. se; that; saying; "IDX^-
(In some cases followed by the consecutive mood; s.
Table II.)
ke, kedSi, G. th. s., Or. se; if; followed by the indi-
cative mood.
ak^se, akdse, G. akesi; that; but that.
etfaka, epeoka, G. etfake, because.
dsShe, G. nohewo, therefore.
lebene, G. bene; then.
dsane, G. agbene> then.
kong, G. koni; with following potential mood; that; ba§/
bamit.
nfe, G. n\, th. s.
dsikune, if; with foil, consecutive; GS: dsikule.
etc. etc. etc.
§ 10. The Interjections
and some natural sounds do not organically belong to any
part of speech; but are abrupt exclamations of either a
single word or sentence or even a natural sound imitating
some unarticulated sound. They are in AdSnme and Ga
and all the african and perhaps all the unwritten far more
numerouns, than in written languages and therefore stabile
one's ; but demand a greater acquaintance with the language
to be gathered and properly understood, than we have at
present.
dbyGoogk
414
Some Specimen of the Adanme Dialect
of the Ga-Language.
I. As spoken along the Sea-Coast:
1. Histories (written
a. Dlidelo falafo.
^Bene ^ale Oura Loko ya
Hula Qe> nna nyomu ko n^
ehenme fula, n^ ede dli a^
huo nele y6 ^), Edemi, kg
nhle bolo ne % mahSle eko
n^ 6ye^); ne nhSle; bene
nhale one*), edemi, k^ ma-
tSdle bojoo nya^J, ne ewomi
bio ^) amihu ndelg ke : „Da-
bida ! se 6h! si !" ^) L§hfi eke :
by a native of Kpon.)
a. A drunken blind man.
When we went with Mr. L.
to Keta, I saw a man and
his eyes were blind, and he
was drunk and hungry. He
told me, if I carry bread, I
may give him some to eat;
and I gave him; when I had
given him, he told me that
1 shall show him the price
of the bread and he would
pay me ; and I also told him,
saying: „No, but it shall be
left!" And he also said: „No,
no ; but I will give thee cow-
1) hfio nele ye, pres. tense of huo yele; „hunger was
eating him.**
2) ne, def. article of sentences = one, generally after
„k6**, if; also in Ga. .*
3) pot. mood: „that he may eat;** i.e. „to eat.**
4) „Qne", def. sentence art. after „bene**, G3: beni - le.
6) „t§6 n6ko nya,** G. „tsd n. k. na;" to show the
price of s. th.
6) „wo hio," lit. to pay a debt; i. e. to pay; G. wo
nyomo, v.
7) „6M si;** G. „aM §i;** pot. mood: „ they may leave
it,'* it may be let!
dbyGoogk
Addnme-Appendix.
41S
^Dabidabi se mahdo holanu!"*
Keke ne yemukulim fu ^ ne
nsile ne ledse.
b. Kpom-Sane.
Tsalseme*) anyemi ko nS
n^ atselekg: Amanko*. Kl-
k^ matSe ne niiatse lo hola-
nulse dsile: ewo ehe naa-
kpa : ebui ^) nokonoko. Bene
pe se one*), eke enyemi n§-
pei*), ne enyemi ko elue nya
ne etso, ne edo Amankoa t§o.
Ne (pe) ahu^) ne Amankoa
nu, ka manokotomahi t§o
enyemio 0 G3, n^ ebahe h5-
lami-dseniike-bahame. Aman-
koa isQ n5 ke-ba Tesjli kg,
ke ana enyemio ne, agbele
hale. Bene Tesili yawole
ka«) nyOm ng heko ne atse
ries !" Then I got angry and
(I) left him there.
b. Kpon- or Pony-History.
There was a brother of
my father's, who was called:
Amankoa. This king was a
possessor of things or cowries
(i. e. rich) : he was very proud :
he esteemed nobody (or noth-
ing). Afterward he was quar-
reling with his brother and his
brother bit (off part) of his ear
and it fell off, and it grieved
Amankoa too much. Long af-
terwards Amankoa heard, that
townelders sent his brother to
Akra to fetch (their) monthly
wages for them. Amankoo
sent some body to the Tesi-
people, saying: if they see
his brother, they should kill
him for him. When theTesi-
people went and lay in am-
bush for him in a place called
„Afrodu", they (Ht. these
1) „mukulim fa- == mli fQ in G5: the belly sweUs;
to get angry.
2) ^Tsatse, pi. tSatseme," n. irreg. = my father, my
father's; Gr. mitse.
' 3) „ebui," aor. neg. fr. bu, to esteem.
4) Lit: „When it was' afterward,** as in G3.
5) „ngpei,** pres. t.: of pe, to cry; to quarrel; G.
bio, V.
6) Lit: „And was a long time,** i. e. long afterwards ;
G. th. s. '
7) nyemio, brother, with def. art. „.o**, „the ^brother
of him.**
8) „wo ka,** V. to lie in ambush; G. th, s.
dbyGoogk
416
AdfiAme-Appendix.
kg ; „ Afrodu" ne, Te§itseine *)
nc nule ne abafile. Te§il§eme
ne akele bahK AmaAkoa, kone
lenitSe epele boni esuQ. Si
Boafo kg sa fo dse adg, ne
Tesili wo etrom ke-bah§
Amafikoa, ne Amankoa bako
hulamidSe womi, ne eke-ba-
heo hulamidSeniQ , ne ej^a-
yeo.^j Epe seo, ne eM noko-
toiname dge , metfa a^aso
M Amankoa he, ne anule,
koni akpO womio M ede.
Blofond ko ng mdm, atsele
kg Filip ; e^akele nii, ne eba-
dale si. NSkotoma ko lie
weom ^) ne al§ele kg ; Ofosu
Obrim; eha anule ne aflle.
Bene Boafo nu, eyako tso-
boti ke-bafya eyim; keke ne
egbo. Bene egbo seo ne,
niome ye gbeye. Ndkotgrna
ko ke: anu eyOo hu ne agbe-
le ; tsatse ke : Dabi, se ako-
gbele! Keke ne ndkotoma ko
sd klante, ne ekebafya eyOo,
Tesi-men) cought and boand
him. The Te§i-men would
give him -to Amankoa, that
he himself may do unto him,
as he liked. But that Boafo
ran away from their hands;
and the Tesi people took his
load and gave it to Amankoa,
and^ankoa took the wages-
book and received the wages
with it (from Government)
and eat them. Afterward it
was grieving to the grandees;
they all went to snatch (it)
from Amankoa and to catch
him and to take the book
from him. There was a Euro-
pean in the town , called Fi-
lip ; he had given him a pre-
sent and he came to thank
him. (Now there) was a
Grandee in Ihe house , called
Ofosu Obrim; he had him
caught and bound. When
Boafo heard (this) he went
and took a club and gave
him a stroke on his head; then
he died. After he was dead,
the people were afraid. A
Grandee said: his wife shall
also be caught and killed; my
father said: „No, she shall
not be killed!" Then a Gran-
dee drew the sword to cut
her head off, but my father
ran after him, saying, he shall
1) „Tesili** and „Tesitseme," th. s., „the Tesi-people.**
2) The danish Government gave monthly allowances to
some headmen, and an account-book for them: whoever pos-
sessed such a book, received the money.
3) = G. we le mli, „in the house.**
dbyGoogk
Adftnme-Appendix.
417
se tSatSe sa fo ke nyle ese»
kg : ekogbele. Keke ne ewo
klanteo no efd yQQ enme le>
ne Manteg bafya tSatSe nine
nwe goleku ne epole, pie
boboyo *), ne el§e nya.
Beni Nugoli nu, kS Kpomli
bagbe yoQ ne, Nuguli ami fO
babao; ne Kpomli hQ ye gbeye
k9 Gdli bahame. Abawo
Amahkoalie-ya M no yawo
amramom, ne atSS ') eyi; ne
akpale ase ke-ba mam bakn^
kao') atfihl, ne a§i mS, ne
ayahl AsadSale. Naguli ke
Amankoa wekuli baha tSatse-
me anihi fufQfu. Monemone>
ke ona tSatSe nine Awe go-
legn, epo ne at§a, se pado-
ku M monemone. Se kikS-
m&yd ne, agbele dSid agblle
iii6, no le nU«
not kill her. Then he lifted
up is sword, to cut the wo-
man down, and the sword
struck my father's thumb and
cut it nearly off. When the
Ningo-people heard, that the
Kpong-People were going to
kill the woman, they got the
very angry; and the Kpong-
people also were afraid that
the GS- people would come
to plunder them. They took
Amankoa (s' body) out into
the field, put him into a hole,
and took his head off; and
they returned into the town,
took up their guns, left the
town and went and dwelled
in AsadSale. The Ningo-
people and AmaAkoa's family
plundered all the things of
my fathers entirely. To day,
if thou see my father's thumb,
it is cut and healed; but the
scar is there this day. But
as for that towns -woman,
whether she was killed or
not, that I do not know.
1) pie boboyo = G. fe fio =^ wants litte = nearly.
2) t§§ and t§o, v, G. t§e, v. to go off; to take off.
3) knkn, v. = kolo* pi. of ko, v. in G3: to take,
gather.
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab*
27
dbyGoogk
418 Adftdme-Appendix.
2. Parts of translations from 6ft into D&Uiie.
a. Job. 11. From a translation of a native of Kpong (Pony)
at the Sea-coast, from W. Hansons G3-translation into
Danme.
Johane saneakpa, yi nyonma
ke kake (11).
1. Dsal^ hiot3e ko n^, Lazaro,
edSe Betania, Maria ke no
2. nyemiyo, Marta, mS mi. | (No
Maria nh n6 nku kpa Mawetse
Qne, nfe en5 yibuom tsu ena-
neme aheg d§i ndne enyemi
3. Lazaro nS hionne gne). | No-
he ne enyemyiome *) tgo ke- 1) = „enyemiyei le" in
ba end ake: „Mawet§e, n^,^) G^- ^s sisters (with def.
ndne odgO eheo nShioniie!" ^'^' ^,» . . ,
4.N6ne Jesu nu ene ne, eke: ^j^od of na, v.
„Hio nenc, pi gbend nya, se
5. Mawu henowomio he!** | DSa-
1^ Jesu doj) Marta ke no nye-
6. miy6Q ie Lazaro he. | Nohe
ne, bene enu, kS eM hionue
one ehl si n^ hekake n^ eh^o
7. ligbil enyo sou. | * Kone no
se one ede ekaselogme kg:
„Nyeha way a Judea ekon!" |
8. Ekaselogme dele kg: „Owura,
kpitio ne nfe Judafogme fi6-
harae n^ afiao') tehi, ne oya 3) fya, v. to strike; perh.
9. ledse ekon?« | Jesu here ng: pl- fia; comp. GS: tla, pi
.PI nmlefiaae*) nyonma ke ^^^^nmlefiafiaei (abrid-
enyo ng dsenane mi? Kedsi g^^^. j^^^g
no nyle piani ne, etewe, ka
10. ena d§e ne he la. I Si kedSi
dbyGoogk
Adafime-Appeodk. 419
n5 nyle nyO mi ne, ete^ 0 U 1) assiiiplated imperfect
11.1a be emi." | Ede ene: no ^^^^se = teo fr. te,v. to
se ne edeme kg: „WahQe stumble.
Lazaro M mahe woe, se nya
kone matsSle n^ maheg mi.'' |
12. Keke ne ekaseloome kg:
^Nyontso, kemahe*) eM-wge 2) Object in advance for
13. ne, ehe batsg." | K6ne egbo- stress' sake.
gbo he munyu Jesu tu '), se 3) tu munyu, v. to speak.
abu ka mahe ke hedsQm he
14. etu. I Dsalg, edeme pS, kg: '
15. ^Lazaro gbo!" | ne nyehe ne
nsuoQ*) ka mbe ledse, kone 4) nsuoo=misum(?§,im-
nyena nyehe nyeye, se nye- perfect tense.
16. ha waya eho." | Kgke ne
Toma, ndne atSeele Didimoo
deasibi-kaselgomeke: „Nye-
ha wakele ya, kone wakgle
17. bagbo!'' I Bene Jesu baa ne,
ena ka no fd si^) n6 muQ mi 5) = ka gi, Ga; to lie;
ligbll ewye momo. | t^ ^^s*-
18. (Dsale Betania bekfi Jerusa-
lem ape forlonhi nyonma ke
19. enuo). |. Ne Judafoome ati nihi ^^ medueham ; me, being
pi ba Marta ke Maria nd ke the object of dueham is
medueham^) ne anyeminyu- here retained instead of
20. muo he. | Kone Marta, none -a; adueham, their comfort
emi ka Jesu maa ne, eya- which they give; medue-
. , »if . IV .1 ham, their comfort which
kpele; se Maria hi ^^^Q^^- \ thejveceiYe;(}fihoth„B.m^^
2 1 . Kone Marta de Jesu kg : Ny on- duehamo ;" but comp. edue-
tsQ, ona one bie dsikune ma- bamQandledaeham9,which
minyeminyumuo kogbowe.^ | expresses the same differ-
22. Tsebene nle ka dsa tete, nd- ^f ^ ^ ^^ ^^^ is ^^^^ ^^
.* * .... .. there met with.
tfanS ne obi Mawu ne, Mawu ^^ j^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^
23. ahao." I Jesu dele kg: „Onye- junctive mood. S. Table H.
minyumuQ M batsS ekon!"" | at the end.
27» ,
dbyGoogk
420 AdSAme-Appendix.
24. Marta dele kg: „Nle kft ebaie
si ekon M siteo mi nS nya-
25. gbe-ligb!o.** | Jesu dele kg:
„Amidsi*) silete ke yiwana- 1) Comp. § 4.
mio : none heo yeno yeo ne,
kedSi egbo tele ne eh^ bah!
26. ekoA; | ne ndsasesa nfe he') 2) = h!e, n. inGS: face:
. « V i_ v^ h5 n6, V. to be alive. h6
n6 n^ heo yeno yeo ne , be- "^ "^» *• **" "'^ ~*'^''' "^
gboe ') ligbioko : oM ene he- 3'^ neg.'pres. indie.
27. ye?" | No dele k6: „A!
Owura, nne-he maye, kg mo-
dsi *) Krislo, Mawu bio ne,
nSne baba d§eo mio ne!" |
28. Ne bene ede ene , eko bio
ne eb5l§e Maria enyemiyoo
ga mi eke: ,,Nyonlsoo ba, ne
29. enSo t§ee!" | Ne n6ne enu
keke ne ete si mramra ne
30. eba en5. | Dsale Jesu nawe
ne eba mS mi, se enS bene
31. Marta kele kpe neo. | Kone
Judafoome n^ kele n6 weo
mio nfe n6le komo y^o, none
ana kS Maria te si mramra
d§e kpo one* atiule aki : „£ya
pumheo eyafoye n6 ledse." |
32. Bene Maria su bene Jesu n^
one ne enale eno si M ena-
nehi asi ne edele kg: „Nyon-
tso» ona oM hie dsikune ma-
33. menyumuo*) kogbowe!" | N6-^ 4) mamenynmu = mami-
ne Jesu na k5 efig-yafoe ke nycminyumu; brother.
Judafoome hO n^ kele baa ka
aiie-yafoe one, nohe ne emu-
mio mi ta ne ehao ehe ne
ekg: „DSie nyekele.fS?" |
34. Adele kg : „Owura, ba nfe oba-
dbyGoogk
Addnme-AppendiXi 421
35. ye I" I Jesu foya. | Keke ne
36. Judafoome kg: Ye, bone edo
37. ehe!" | Ati niikome kg: N5-
ne, nfe blii ^) fulafohi ahSn- 1) blii = blio, imperf.
mehi one'i enyewe kS eko- tense.
ha^) nyumunetelekogbo?"! ^2)^ Subjunctive mood. 8.
38. Nohe ne Jesu mi kpata ') ekoA 3) \^^^^^ ^^^^
(ne) eba pumheo. Muo dsi
39. ne te fo si nS nya. | Jesu
ke : „Nyedse teo ! " Marta ndne
gboo *) nyemiyoo dele ke : 4) gbo, with def. art., G5
„Nyont§o ! piokene edge fu moni gbo le.
momo, se eye ligbii ewye." |
40. Jesu dele kg: Mewemo^J kg: 6) -mo, instead of. the
„Kedsi oheyene, obanaMa- obj. augm. -0, thou; for
41. wu henowomio?" | Keke ne ^^^^^\ sake.
adSe teg ne bene and gbo-
gboo fd, ne Jesu wo ehenme-
hi ano ekg : „Tsalse *) ndao 6) irreg. = GS ata or
42. si, kS obomi tue:'| ne nle mitse, my father,
ka oboomi tue dane, se bo
nihi nk da sio he nkg, kone
43. ahe-ye kS mo otsQUii." | Bene
etii ene ne, ekpS ke gbi nwa:
44. „Lasaro, dsekpo!" | Ne no-
ne ^gboo^)dse kpo pnmamahi 7) perf. tensct with def.
fi eninehi ke enanehi ne duku art. affixed.
fi ehe. Jesu deme kg : „%a-
45.penele nb nyehS eya. | Dsali^
Jud^fogme n^ ba Maria h6
nfe ana nihi n^ Jesu pe one
46. ami pi he eng ye. | Se ati
niikome kg big ke-ya Farisig-
me and ne ademe nihi n^
Jesu peg.
dbyGoogk
422 AdMme-Appemlix.
II. As spoken inKrobo (translated by a Calecliist).
Mateo saneakpa yi HI.
1. Se 6g le*) ligMIO mio Jo- 1) le, F^n. demonstrat.
hane,BapUsilQobaneedgad§e = no in GS: that, those.
2. ng Judea Mo mi, | ne ede
kg: „Nyetsake nyetSuhi, se
hyom kondyemio su ta^). [ 2) su-ta, double v. =
3. Se none dSi nene Jesaia, gba- Seta in Gft; to arrive.
Iqq, de ne ehe k6: „N6ko
gbl n^ kpaa hOhQi ne nS no»
ne eAedehe') kg: ^Nyedara 3) pres. tense of ^de", v.
AwetSeo bloo, ne hyepe eblo-
4. hi fikdflkdQme tutQtu one! |
Ne Ifi Johaneo kgg*) ake tu- 4) kg, pron. G. n06, the
so ') hebom lo etade, ne yfo- same.
mikpS ft emlgm, ne enma dsi ^MQso, back-horse; so
5.balahl keMnoho. | Dsiane«) l,^ TZi^^LXI
adSe Jerusalem ke Judea tSo ^) g) ^^ t^e Coast „dSale" ;
kfi Jordan niiamig tso aba now.
6. eno. I Ne ebaptisime iie Jor- 7) = tfa, at the Coast,
dan mi, ne adsie ahe yaya- ^^ ^ ^^'' ^•
7. mio akpo. | Se bene ena Fa-
risibigme ke Sadukibiome ba-
bao ma ebaptisiomio he ne,
edeme kg: „SiDdhi afs^!
Mene ^^^^y^^^^^y^^^^^ 8) tu n6ko fo = d. Aio
8.ne maa nya fo»)? | DSianc ^^^^ ^^.^ ^ ^^ j^^ ^^^
nyewo yiblihi nfe sa tfltsa- g^ th.
9. kem. | Ne nyekosusu Ae nye- 9) iAe = Me at the Coast;
mi kg: WatSe d§i Abraham! pres. tense,
se ine nye«) dehe kg: Ma- 1?) Subjimct. or conse-
f lox I.* 1. ..lox 4 k; cutive mood, s. Table 11.
wu kony g *«) ka ekong *«) tehi ^^ ^^ ^^^
neekoA6-pe*®)bihi*0 ekond- ix) pi. of hi, child; G.
10. ha*®) Abraham. | Se gbieo fd hi, pi. bii.
dbyGoogk
Adftome-Appendix;, 423
si Ae tSohi asisipokuome aoQ: 1) combination of tSo^
kone tsohitsotgo^) n^ wl^) yi- tree and tSo, all; = Ga:
blihi kpakpao. ahele afd si, ^^^^^^ ^^ery tree.
4 4 t .* c 1 II • ^) iieg. aor. of wo, to
11. ne asake n6-fo lam, | Inu ne 1^^^^^^
ibaptisinye ne nyum hSi tfi-
tSakem, sedene bane yeseg
ehe -wa pern', jid tokotahi ne
ese ^) k§ ikoh^Q, le emabapli- 3) nog. aor. of sa, v. to
sinye ne Mumi nfe he t§QO be fit.
12. ke lam. | Ndne esatSine ne
ed^m, ne emabe esugb^o pe-
p^p^, ne emabua eiimdo (nya)
ewo egbaom, se nmetfiio n^
eke la nb gbowe masSi!'* |
13. Keke ne Jesu dse Galilea
eba Johane nd iie Jordan ng,
14. kone le ebaptisile. | Se Jo-
hane kplfiwele ekS: «Esa kg
momonokobapti8imi,nemoba ^^ ^ j^^^^ ^^^ ^ ^^ ^^^
15. yeno ne?" | Se Jesu be no*) g^^^
edelekg: ^Moha*^) blgdsiane, 5) imperat. sing.
se kikg sa, kS wagbe dam tso
nya!^ Keke ne ekplele. |
16. Ne Jesu bene abaptisile one
edse nyuQ mi pigsQ ne ed§e
kpo ; ne n6, hyom bli ne enQ,
ne ne, Mawu Mumio, nh ene-
sikplehe ka lahwe (la>Ve) nfe
17. eba eng. | Ne ne, gbl dse
hyom, ne ede ekg: Ibi ne
ado ehe, n^ ibo adsogle
ne
i«
dbyGoogk
424
Adfi&me-Appendix.
A christian hymn translated from the 6s,
by a Catechist
Kpakpa be sugbfi ne dq,
DSahe d^ waho
N^ wagbu*) hygm bloft no
LoIq ne wana
HedSom tSeo^):
WaAe ndna ne hie;
Hyomi d§i watSeo') mdm
NyehS waho!
Ga:
Kpakpa be Sikpo& ne nQ,
NohewQ wo baB,
Ni w(}tS6 Aweigbe le no,
No le wobana
HedSole le:
Wohe midsrawo ye bie ;
Nwei dSi woSihilehe:
NyehSa woyaa!
Nothing good is on this earth,
Therefore let as go:
Let us turn to heavenward:
There then we shall know
The Lord of peace:
Here afflictions are at hand
Heaven is our fatherland:
So let us go!
Ga:
NyoAmo bi Tele
Ni bagbo, yo!
None nl dowQ tSo!
Wooba, o!
Yo! yo! y6! minyanyo!
Native songs.
Mawu bi Tete
Nfe bagbo! yO!
Ndne nfe dowo tSd!
Wama 0!
Yo, yO, yd! ndhwHe!
1) ghu, V. to open; Ai&. to torn through, to go
through.
2) „the father, author. Lord**.
3) nWatSeo mam**, „our fathers town".
dbyGoogk
AdftAme-Appendiju
425
Mei ba, 8i mei bakoo, yo\
fim^ne n\ wQtSe bako!
Yo! yol yo! minanyo!
®otM (Stflgebomet
3fr«, in Parb! fa,
S)a^ ifi'd, U)ad und }U fef^t
((^merjt!
O, mx n)oQen fommen!
3a, ia, ia, inein gteunb!
9Ran (am mi tarn bod^nt^t!
ia!
^eut% la uHfet JBater nod^
nidl)t ial
3a, ia, ia, mein greunfe!
Nil ba, si nii beO, y6\
Mone n^ watSe be lolo!
Yo, yO, yO, — ndhwele!*)
It is God's first-born
Who died! oh!
This is yrhat grieves us too
^ much!
We will come! o!
0 yes! o yes! my friend!
People came, but people
come not yet! oh!
To day, when our father has
not yet come!
Yea, yea, yea, my friend!
•) = iny friend!
These two little songs were extemporized by the chil-
dren of the village Odumase in Krobo after the first fruits
of the Krobo -tribe had been baptized there, to which
event the second seems to point. They have a very sweef
native tune.
Digitized by VjOOQI^
426 AdlAme-Appfflidix.
Adanme-Vocabulary.
Most of the words are the same in G5 proper and
AdSnme, or the difference is exeedingly slight: such are
not mentioned in this small vocabulary. Most of the words
it contains are extracted from writings in the dialect of
Kpoii spoken along the sea-coast, some are in use at ErQbg.
A.
A — , subjective and possessive personal pron. third pers.,
pi. numb., answering in G^ to the definite „ame" and
the indefinite „a'' which distinction is wanting in Adn.
(s. Ot. W0-, WQ-, won-); they, (people, man); their,
a*, shortened from the aux. v. ba, ma, of the fnt. tense;
shall, will; as in Gd.
aba — , G. „aa", they will, they shall; ama — , th. s.
dblogwa and
ablogba, n. G§: ablogwa, chair,
ablogbapelg, n. chair-maker,
abos^m, n. G. and Ot. abons^m; in Tesi already: abonS^m,
devil,
abus^, th. 8. Kr. D.
AdSnme, DSnme, pr. n. GS and Ot. the same (people, land
and language of); Ad&ime.
ade (fr. de, v. to say), =» ake in G3: saying; that; comp.
IDX^ in Hebr. (seldom used; s. k§, kg, k6, th. s.
adsale (Ayigbe), n. soap = samla in G9i (comp. gware in
Otyi and d§ale, v. in G9.
afani, n. a river fish,
agbeli, n. cassada; G. duade; Ot. th. s.
aggkake, n. G. hleo, single cowry.
Ihu, adv. G. th. s. long, a long time; much; ne ng ShQ
ne (G. n\ ye IhG le) = after a long time,
akdse, G. akgsi, conj» that.
dbyGoogk
akSse — bem. 427
ako -, GS: aka -, ameka -, they shall not -, impert. and
pot. neg.; ak6gbele! they shall not kill him! he shall
not be killed! See Table II., also the subjunctive or
consecutive mood at the end.
akpa (form of the aux. v. kpa, 6. sa, to express the itera-
tive mood) =,6a: asa, asan: again; t i. akpa ade, again
they said; s. kpa, v.
akpapem, kpakpapem, n. G. ekpakpafemo, n. good work.
alind, G. aleend, lit. it is not known, i. e. perhaps.
alugudd. Ay., Ot* and GS th. s. n. unbleached calico or
cottoneloth.
ami, indep. pron. (Kr. D. imi), GS: mi, min?; I; comp.
mami, th. s. ; also „my" = ye.
aminitse, pr. G. midientse, I myself.
amramom, n. hole?
anokwa, G. and Ot. th. s. and anokwale, - kware, n. truth.
apafono, G3 : apafonyo, Ot. opani, n. hired person ; pi. apa-
fob!, apafome; apafoK.
asibi, sibi, asibi; n. friend; adv. pron. each-other; G. na-
nyo, nanyo - , n.
awelSe, wetse, pi. -tSeme; Ht. housefather, master, Lord,
= nyontsQ.
B.
ba == ma, v. to come; aor. neg. be.
ba, aux. v. of the fut. tense, used as „will, shall*' in Engl.;
G3, ba, wa, a or reduplication of the vowel of the pro-
noun; f. i. mbape, GS: male; omade, obade, GS: ooke;
I will do; thou wilt say etc. Ot. be, aux. v. Comp.
also the Adn. v. ma, to come; as frequently used.
babaa (Kr. Dial.) = babao, adj. and adv. much.
bala, pi. balahi, G. balabii, n. locust.
be, neg. voice of the v. ne, v. which see; to be not; to
be not in s, place, to be absent; to be not the case;
to have not, possess not (GS: be» Ot. nni, neg. voice
of „wo", v.); also used as aux. v. of the pres. and fut*
neg. voice, ind. mood; bepehe, bepee, bepei, bepe, will
not do, is not doing; s. ne, v.
be = G. be, V. to sweep.
bem, = be mli, v. to sweep inside, to sweep out.
d by Google
428 Ad&toie-Appendix.
be, interrog. particle (s. h^, v. and be, aux. t.); G3 be;
but put in advance: Be emanyS? =: EenyS be? in Gd:
He can, is it not? Comp. also „ani^*.
be, neg. voice, aor. tense, of the verb ba, ma, to come
(63: baa),
be = bie, n. G. gbei, name,
be, n. time, as in GS.
belebem and beyind, n. G. beyind, time; conj. when,
bem (neg. voice of the verb n|m = ng mi, to be in, to
be true); to be not in, not true, not so; comp. GS: ye
mli, yen, neg. be mli, ben, th. s.
bSnfi = men^, n6? int. pron. who? G. namo? n6? me?
what? G. meni?
benS, rel. pron. when; as, how (s. bo, bone); GS: beni,
boni; „ben6 pe se one" — „beni fe se le" in G3; when
.it was afterwards, adverbial sentence = afterwards,
bene, G, benke, Ol. ben, v. inf. benem; to be near, to
approach,
benem, n. G. beAkemQ, nearness, approach; neighbourhood,
bi, pit bihi and bime; with definite article: bigme, G. bi,
Ot. ba, Ayigbe: vi; n. child, young one; little one; de-
minutive termination,
bi, V. inf. bim, G. th. s. to ask.
bi si, inf. sibim, v. to ask for (f. i. a woman to marry, to
woo),
bie, n. G. gbei; name,
binyumu, pi. -mui, n. son; G. binO.
biyo, pi. biyl, biyiome (with, art.), n. daughter,
blefo, G. able, Ot. abrow, n. maize,
blefogu, G. ablekuli, n. maize-grain; blefonu (Kr. D.), th. s.
bli, inf. blim, v. G. gble, to open. Comp. hue, v. th. s.
blima, n. G. blema, old time.
blimatSeme, G. blematsemei, n. people of old.
bio, pi. blohi, n. G. gbe, Ot. kwan; way; la bio, v. inf.
blglam; to loose the way, to err; G. ladse gbe, du
gbe, V. Comp. blohu, n. street.
Mohe, G. gbehe, n. way-place; place, room,
bo dsQ (Ot. bo dyo), v. inf. bod§om, v. to have pleasure,
rest,
bo tue, inf. tuebom, v. to listen, obey. Kr. D. S. bu tue, v.
bo, = bo, bOni in Gft; n. manner, mode; conj. how; =
bele in G3, when; then.
4)0, V. G. gbe, to be old, weak,
bobo, adj. bibio, little.
dbyGoogk
boboio — da sb 429
boboio, boboyo, boboyoyo, adj. 6. bibiO, fi6, fiflO, little;
adv. th. 8.; pie boboyo, G. fe fio, wants little; adv. nearly.
bokwe, gbokwe, G. gbeke, n. evening; adv. in the evening.
bolo, G. abol6, n. baked maize-bread.
bone, G. boni, rel. pron. as, how; s. bgnS, th. s.
bu, G. th. s., V. inf. bubui; to esleem, to judge. Comp.
bu, V. in Ot.
bu, V. G. bo; only used in the con^bination :
bu tue, inf. Iflebum, tuebubui, G. bo toi, to listen, to hear-
ken, to obey.
bu, buom, G. t§gi, n. hair; s. yibu, yibuQm, n.
bua dso, bu d§o, G. mT se, Ol. bo to yem; to have a
quiet, cool, peaceful breast or chest, to be content, joy-
ful; s. bo dso, V. th. s. (Kr. D.) *
bua nya, inf. nyabuam, v. to gather.
bubui, n. fr. bu, v. judgement.
hue, n. G. gbe, pot; pi. bueme.
bue, inf. buem, v. G. boi and gble, Ot. bue, pue, to open,
to begin; comp. also pue in GS and Ot.; bu, n. and
gbu, V. in Ga.
boim and
buem, n. G. boimo, gblemo, beginning; opening.
bulo, n. (fr. bu, v. to judge) judge.
buom, n. s. bu, hair.
D.
da, V. inf. dam, to be great, G. da; to be right, Ga: dSa,
sa, s. also dra, dara, v.; to stand, Gd: damo; to remain,
Ga: hi, v.; eda! il is right! well! mo da hie, = damo
bie! (in GS) stand (tliou) here! Comp. also the Ot.
V. da.
da bio, G. dsa gbe, v. to be right, the right way.
da he, v. inf. hedam, to stand about.
da h!e, da h§, G. damo h!e; sa h!e; to stand before; to
be right before.
da mi^ dam, inf. midam, v. Ga: damo mli, to stand in,
into.
da nya, G. damo na, v. to stand at; to be right according
to 8. th., s. nya, n.
da no, G. damo no, v. to stand upon.
da se, G. damo se, v. to stand behind, backward.
da si, G. damo si, v. to stand on the ground, to stand;
== G. da §i, Ol da ase, to thank.
dbyGoogk
430 4^Sitane-Appendix.
dfl, dam, n. right; G. dsale; law, CA and Ot. mla, mra, n.
dfi, 6. th.s. Ot. nsS, n. yiint; spirit; de dS, v. to be drank;
Ga: to da, V.
dablo, G. dsagbe, n. right, straight way; right; straight-
ness; adv. right, rightly,
dddem, n. drunkenness.
dadelQ, n. drunken person; drunkard,
dalo, n. righteous person fr. da, v.; = dsalo in GS.
dam, dami, n. G. dsale, right; righteousness; straightness;
uprightness; fr. da, v.; law = mla, mra in G. and Ot.
damnii, pi. n. G. dSalenii; right or righteous things; rights;
damlg, pi. damli, n. judge; lawyer.
dara, dra, v. = dSadse in Ga; to straighten; to justify fr.
da, v.; comp. dea; dsadse, v.
dase, G. odase, Ot. adanse, n. witness, testimony; ye dase,
V. to witness; inf. daseyem.
daseyelQ, G. odaseyelo, odasefo, n. witness, person bearing
witness,
daseyem, n. witnessbearing, witnessing; witness,
de, inf. dem; redupl. dede, v. GS: ke, Ot. se; to say;
to tell; s. also ade, conj. and comp. the roots de in Ol.
and ke, in Ga.
dg, G. th. s., n. the palm of the hand; hand;' power etc.
= -p in Hebr.; kpo ne noko dg, G. he ye m. k. de,
to take from one's hand,_power etc.
de, G. to, V. to be full; de da, = G. to da, to be drunk,
dea, T. Kr. Dial. = dara, to straighten,
dede, redupl. v. of de, to say.
dede'i, n. saying,
dehe, n. th. s.
dem, with def. art. demio, G. kemo, kemo le, n. saying;
talk,
dem, n. fulness,
dgm = dg mi, G. deii, n. inside of the hand ; adv. in the
hand, power etc. Ot. nsam.
demsane, G. densane>, n. palaver of or in one's hand power;
n. k. demsane, some body's palaver,
dfa, V. inf. dfam (G. ye dsra; comp. d§ra, v.) to trade;
comp. dsa no, n. in Ga and gua, n. in Ot.
dfa, n. price; G. dsra.
dfa wa, inf. dfawam, v. to be dear; G. dsra wa, v^
dialo, n. merchant; dsrayelo in Ga; Ot. gwadifo.
dfam, n. G. dSano, market; G. dsrayeli, trading.
dbyGoogk
dfonmd ~ d§e if a. 431
dfomod, pt. -nii, nihi, n. wares.
dfg, neg. perf. voice dfew6, v. G. and Ot. df6n, to think,
to consider,
di, aor. neg. of de, v. to say; to be ful.
dibli, n. G. dun; darkness,
do, V. inf. dodoe?
do, V. G. th. 8. to be hot, to grieve.
do he, inf. hcdodoe, hedgm; v. to love; G. th.s., Ot. do, v.
do, doin, dohe, doe, dodoe, n. heat; grief.
dra, (fr. da, v. to be right), v. G. dsa and sa, to be right,
fit; = Ga: dSadse, v. to righten, to rectify; to straigh-
ten; but comp. also dsadsa, v. and dea, dSadse, v.
dralo, n. rectifier; justifier.
dram, n. rectification; justification,
dro (fr. de, v.?), v. to say = ke in G3.
dsa, inf. dsam, v. G. th. s., to adore; to worship,
dsa and
dsale (Coast-Dial), conj. and adv. then; now; G. agben^,
Ot. afeyi; comp. d§ane, dsiane, th. s.
dsSi, adv. G. nakai, no; Ot. sa; so, thus; pron. that; pi.
dsSma, with def. art. dSSiome.
dsa, V. = G. ha, V. to give; but also „ha" is used.
d§a heblo, V. Ga: ha hegbe, to give allowance, privilege;
etc. s. heblo, n. Inf. heblodsam.
dsadsa = dSadse in Ga, v. to rectify, straighten; to make
straight, right; comp. also dra, v. and
dsadSe, v. th. s.
dsahe, conj. G. nohewo, therefore; s. lolohe, th. s.
dsakg, adv. G. nakai, so; comp. also: kike,
dsalg r=: d§a, dSane, d§iane, adv. now.
dsane and dSiane, Kr.D. adv., G. agbene, Coast*Dial. dsal^,
now; then,
dse, inf. d§em and dSedSei, Ga: dse, v., dse, v.; dsie, v.;
to come away, of, to come or go fotlh; to come out,
from; to bring forth, take out etc., dse ke ho = G. yin
ke te, V. to start, be off.
d§ehe, Ga: d§e, d§e, dsie he or hewo (s. he, n.); to come
from or bring from a place; to come from, of, because
of etc.; comp. mehedse = menihewQ in Ga: why (does
it come)? »c§n>cgen? n>arum?
dse mi, d§em, v. Ga: dse mli, d§e mli, d§ie mli; to come
out from the inside, to bring out, forth etc.
dse nya, inf. nyadSem; v. G. dsie na, to interprete, to
speak for s. b.
dbyGoogk
432 AdflAme-Appendix.
dSe no 9 V. G. th. s. and dSe no, dSie no» v. to come oS^
take off.
dSe nQ, inf. nddSem, 63: dSe ftiyane, to doubt; kS ndko
- -, to dispute yfiih s. b.
dSe si, inf. sidSem, 6. dSe, dSe, dSie si; to come to light;
to bring to light, to reveal; = dSedSe, y. in Gi, to echo,
be known,
dse - tSd, double v., G. dSie - tSd, to (take out and) show
to s. b.
di§e yi, inf. yid§em, GS: dSie yi, to take out one's head;
to praise; s. dSie yi, th. s.
d§e, n. G. th. s. world etc. dsem, =?= G. d§en, n. th. s.
and adv. in the world, in life etc.
dse d§o, inf. dSedSom, dsedsodsoe, v. G. die na, v. to get
night (lit. the world gets cool).
dSe na, inf. dsenam, dsena (dSenanI), G. d§e tSore, v. to
get day, daylight; s. na, v. to see.
dSedSom and
d§ed§od§oe, n. G. dSenamo; evening, night; eveningtwilight;
the whole day till nightfall.
d£Sh3, n. year; Gd: afi, Ot. afi, afnhyia; comp. fi, v. in
Ot. and dSe, v. in Ga and Ad.
dsekoli, pi. n. G3: dsegddsi or dSekodSi, the mountainers,
people from Akwapim.
dSena and
dSenam, n. G. dSetSeremo, morning, day-light; the next day.
dsenano, n. GSi: dSetSereno, n. morning; the next day;
dsenano one = dSetsereno le, the next morning,
dsi, neg. voice dse, v. G. d§i, v. to be (something); but
comp. also pe, v. and nS, v. The verb „d§i^ seems to
be used as in G3; f. i. nomlo dSile, G. gbomo dSile, he
is a man ; it is a person ; besides it is used as auxiliary
in a multifarious way; f. i. ke d§i kg? GS: te ten, te
fe ten? how? how is it? Sometimes it is shortened
into „i^ and affixed to the preceeding word, as: anokwai
(G. anokwan) = anokwa d§i.
dSiane, Kr. Dial = dsane, dsai^, adv. now; G.' a^ene.
(dSi (Ay.), n. G§: nwei, heaven.)
d§ihe no, G&: nohewo lo, conj. therefore; s. dsdhe, conj.
th. 8.
dSie, adv. pron. GS: negbe? where? whence?
di§ie, inf. dSiem = d§e, dSem; G. th. s. to bring forth, —
to light.
dSie yi, inf. yidSiem, G. th« s. v. to praise.
dbyGoogk
dSikune — eko. 433
dsikune, G. dSikale, adv. and conj. perhaps; after a sen-
tence:, if; comp. ke, kedsi; G5: kedSi, ke; d§ikule; it
is followed by the subjunctive mood; as: „ong hie dSi-
kune, maminyeminyumu kogbowe.
dso, V.
d§Q, inf. d§oin and dsQdsoe, v., GS: th. s., Ot.dyo; to
get cool, to cool, to get quiet, tame; to be at peace;
to have rest; he dso, inf. hedsom, hedSodsoe, v. to be
at rest, peace; to be lame etc. tue dso, inf. tuedSom,
tuedsodsoe, v. to have peace in the ears, to have peace;
comp. G5: toih dso; Ot. asom dyo, v.
d§o he, inf. hedsom; G5 th. s. to rest.
dsohe (Krobo: dsShe), G5: nohewo ni, hewo ni, therefore.
d§Qkwe, Kr. D., n. evening; Coast Dial, gbokwe; G. gbeke.
dsokwSyo, pi. irreg. dsokwewi (s. vi in Ay. = bi, child);
child; little child; G. gbeke; abifao, n. *
du, inf. dum, v. Gd: dsu, v. to wash one's self all over,
to bath.
due, n. comfort ; Ot. and G. th. s. hS due,' inf. duehto, v.
to comfort.
duehalo, n. comforter.
duehSm, n. comforting; GS: duehdmo, n.
dum, n. washing, bathing.
dumhe, n. washing place.
dumnii, n. washing things.
dumnyu, n. water for washing.
dumtSu, n. wash-room.
dunya, n. podex.
The letter „e** alone or initiating words as a pro-
nominal (subjective or possessive) augment indicates the
third person singular of the person pron. „he, she, it**,
„his, her, its", without distinction of gender and class
as in GS; besides that it seems to initiate a number
of adjectives and numerals too and seems also to be
the augment of the pot. mood; the perfect tense and
neg. voice. Words therefore not found here must be
sought for under the next consonant.
e — , pron. augm. „he, she, it**; „his, her, its**; f. i. epe,
he did it; ebi, her child etc. as in G3. Comp. le, pron.
eko and
Zimmermann, Akra-Yocab. 28
dbyGoogk
434 AdSAme-Appendix.
ekome, num. 'kome, pi. ekomei, th. s. as in Gg: one; some;
but see also kake.
ekon, adv. th. s. as in Ga, but also used in the beginning
of sentences ; again, once more ; comp. kpa, v. and akpa,
verbal conj.
ene, pi. enenie, enet§^rae, GS: ene, mone, none, de-
monstr. pron. this; these; this person; this thing,
enyo, num. two.
enuQ, Gd: enumo, Ot. anum, num. five,
enuoenuo, num. each five, five^ by five,
epeoka (lit. ^ it is that, s. pe, v.) G. elfake, efeke; edsake;
Ot. efise, conj. because,
ele, G. th. s. num. three,
eteete, three and three,
etfaka, G. etfake, conj. because,
ewe, G. edfe, num. four.
®^y? \ num. Kr. Dial. th. s.
ewyie J
eye = ye, poss. pron. augment, my.
The letter ^f** changeth with p, f , tf in GS and Otyi;
before y, when there is no nasalisation, it most very
probably always be pronounced f.
Fa, V. to be enough?, s. hie, ye, v.
fa, == pa, n. river.
fS, G. afa, n. half; adv. aside; gQ fa, G. t^ afa, v. to
turn aside; inf. fagCim, n.
fe, V. s. pe, V.
ff, inf. fim, G. th. s. to bind.
fia (fya), inf. fiam, v. Ga: tfa, pi. tfia, v. to strike; to cast;
to build. Perh. fia is pi. form of fya, as tfia, pi. form
of tfa in Ga.
fia si, inf. sifiam, = G. tfa si, v. to strike down, to fall
down; to be an out- cast,
fie (fyie), inf. fiem, Ga: fie, Ot. fyie, v. to pour out, to
scatter; to cast out; comp. also fa, v. in Ga.
fie (fye), inf. fyem or fiem, G. fe, v. to play,
fie, n. k. ha, v. G. ye m. k. he feo, to joke with s. b.;
to mock at s. b.
fie, G. fei, «. cold; fie ye, v. inf. fteyem, to be cold; G.
fel ye, v.
fielo, n. person pouring out.
dbyGoogk
fiem — gba. 435
fiem, n. G. (iemo^ outpouring; casting ont or aiivay.
fielo, fyelo, n. pla^^er.
flem, fyem, n. playing, play.
fififi, adv. G. th. s. closely; concealedly.
flkdlik5, adj. narrow; G. fintd.
Firao, Fyirao, Ot. th. s. , G. Silao, pr. n. of the river Volta
(Ayigbe: Amu),
fila, s. fula, V. to be bUnd; Ot. and Gd th. s.
fo, V. to weep; G. th. s.; s. foye.
fo, n. = Ga: foi, running, race? ma fo, sa fo, ta fo, =
Gd: d§o foi, v. to flee; inf. fomam; fosam; fotOm.
fo, inf. fgm, G. th. s., v. to beget; to bear; to bring forth,
fd, inf. fdm, G9 : fd, Ot. fdm, v. to transgress, to do wrong
(fe^len, r>txfe\)Un, dfuxrccveiv^; to cast; sake-f6, double v.
== G. §e-f5, to cast away,
fd si, fo si, V. inf. sifde, G. fo si, to cast down; to lay
down; to lie down, on the ground; to lie; G. kSi Si, y.
folo, n. weeper.
folo, n. parent; pi. foil, folome.
fdlo = mofdn in G9, n. bad man, evil-doer; pi. fdli«
fom and fgmi, pi. fomhl, n. birth,
foya, V. and
foye, V. to weep; inf. yefo and yafo, in Ga th. s.
fa, n. fale, in G., fulness; adj. and adv. full; fully.
fQfd, adj. full; G. obo, obdbo.
fufofu, th. s.
fufafu, adv. G. th. s. altogether = kwra.
fula, inf. falam, G. th. s. and Hla, Ot. fila, fula; v. to be
blind,
fulafo, n. a blind man.
fuso, n. lit. back-horse, camel; s. yuma, th. s.
fya, fye, fyie, etc. see und. fia, fie, fie etc.
fya, pi. fia, V. inf. fyam; G. tfa, pi. tfla, to strike, cast;
build,
fyam, n. striking; casting; building.
G.
Gd, GS: ns, Ot. nyansa, n. art; cunning; gd mi = G. M
mli, in or by deceit, cunningly.
gSga, adj. long, high; G. kakadaft; Ot. teftteii.
Ga, pr. n. GS; Akra.
Gand, pi. Gali, n. Akraman; Akrapeople.
gba, n. bam; G. abono.
28*
dbyGoogk
436 AdSnme- Appendix.
gbe, V. inf. gbem, gbegbei, G. gbe, to kill; to quench; to
wipe out etc.; agbele dsio agblle dSid no le nli, G.
agbele d§iO agbeele dsio no le milee; whether he was
killed or not, that I do not know; to flog; G. th. s.
gbe hie, gbe hg, GS: gbe hie, v. inf. hSgbem or hlegbe-
gbei, to make one ashamed,
gbe he, G. th. s. inf. hegbem, hegbegbei, v. to kill one's
self,
gbe nya, inf. nyagbegbei, G. gbe na, v. to finish; = to
m. k. in Ga: to tire,
gbe-fia, double v. = G. gbe-f3, v. to disperse; to be
dispersed,
gbede (Ay. th. s.), n. hyena; GS: klan.
Gbedekpo, pr. n. (hyena's hill) of a village near Amrahia.
gbegbe, gbegbei, n. killing; murder; quenching; wiping away
or out; GS: gbe, n.
gbend = G. gbele, n. death.
gbenddSe, n. hades,
gbeye, G. th. s. n. fear; dread; awe; ye -, v. to fear; inf.
gbeyeyeyei, gbeyeyem; GS: se gbeye; koye gbeye! be
not afraid!
gbeyeyelo, n. coward; G. gbeyeselo, n.
gbeyeyeyei, n. fearing; dreading; awe.
gbi, neg. vbice of the verb gbe, to kiH.
gbe, gbl, n. G. gbe, voice; word, language; tu -, v. to
speak a word; G. wie gbe, v.
gbie, n. ax; GS: lema.
gble, adv. ever; with neg. voice: never; jc, nie; Gfi and
Ot. pen.
gblo = Wo, G. gbe, n. way.
gbo, G. th. s., Ot. wu, V. inf. gbogboe, to die.
gbogboe, gbom or gbonS, n. death; GS: gbele; gbo, n.
gbogboe, pi. gbogbohl, and
gbono, pi. gbohi; GS: gbonyo, pi. gbohi, n. dead person;
corps,
gbogbohiadsem, n. hades'; SobtenweU.
gbogboerau, G. gbonyobu, n. grave,
gbokwe = bokwe, G. gbeki, n. evening; Kr. Dial, dsokwe.
godofue, n. madness; G9: seke, ni godofue, v. to be mad.
godo, pi. godohi, n. star = hwalami, n.
goleku, n. thumb ; nwe - , n. th. s.
gu, V. inf. gugue, gum; G5: tso, comp. gu, v. in Ot.; to
turn, to change; comp. kpale, v.
gu he, V. to turn one's -self.
dbyGoogk
gti mi — he hia. ' 437
gu mi, gum, v. to turn in, - - into ; G. ts5 mli, v.
ga haram,- G. tsd hSmo, v. to turn ahead; to go in ad-
vance.
gu, G. kuli, n. single grain, drop.
gu, adj. G. eflo, emt^^.
gue, V. to take, to choose; GS: nd, hala, v.; but see also
hara, ni, v. in Adn.
gugue, n. 6. tSitsi; breast; chest.
gOgQe, gum, in turning; change; fr. gu, v.
H before w is very probable only one sound fre-
quently found in Ayigbe and expressed by Missionary
Schlegel through w ; comp. § 2 : Sounds.
ha, V. G. th. s. to cover; to plunder.
ha, inf. ham, G. Ih. s.; v. to give; aor. neg. hi, G. haa.
ha due, inf. dueham, v. to give „due! due!" (a comfor-
ting word) to comfort; trSjien, fetn S3ci(eib bcjeigeu;
Ga th. s.
hao, inf. haom, v. to trouble; to be troubled; G. th. s.
haolo, n. troubler.
haom, pi. haomhl, haomi, n. trouble, Ga: haomo, n.
hara, inf. haram, v. G. hala, tao, na; to choose; to seek;
to find; Ot. ta, fife, v.
haram, n. choosing, choose; G. halamo; seeking; G. tao-
mo; finding; G. namo.
haram, n. front; G. hamg; gu haram, to go in front, Ga:
tsd hamg, v.
he, V. G. th. 8. and here, to receive; to take; to accept.
he-fd si, double v. to cut dov^rn.
he nQ, G. here no, Kr. Dial; to answer; s. to he, th. s.
he, n. G. th. s., self; body; outside, the contrary of mi;
Ot. hu, h6; place; Ot. ba, G. he; used as he, hewQ in
Ga, as a postposition; d§e he; G. dse or dse hewo (to
come), therefrom; therefore; bu he, v. to cover one's
self; du he, G. d§u he, v. to wash one's self; la he,
Ga: ladse he, te he, v. to loose or to conceal one's
self; tsi he = to he in Ga, to answer; tso he == tsu
he in Ga; inf. hetsgm, to purify one's self etc.
he dso, G. th. s., inf. hedsom, v. to have rest, peace.
he hia, v. inf. hehiam, to be in distress; G, th. s. and he
dsra, V.
dbyGoogk
438 ^ AdS^me-Appendix.
he tSo> T. inf. hetSom, to be clean, pure; G. he tse; to be
or go off; G. he tse, v.
he wa, inf. hewam, v. to be strong ; G. th. s.
he ye, v. to be sibk?
he, adj. new; G. th. s., other; G. kroko; s. also muno, adj.
h6, inf. hfim , v. to carry in hand ; G. h!e, v. th. s.
h§, hie, G. hie (Ot. ani, anim), n. face; countenance;
front; etc. used as hie in G3; f. i. kpata he or h^m,
inf. hekpatam, h^mkpatam, to destroy; G. kpata hie, v.
th. s.
h^ ba no, v. to remember. G. th. s.
h5 or hem pe y5, G. hie fe ya, v. to be astonished; inf.
hSmyapem; ah^m pe ya, G. amehle fe ya, they are
astonished.
h§ kS, inf. hekdm; v. to live; Gd: hie kS, v.
M hi, inf. hehim, lit. the face remains; to lire.
hg M, V. th. s.
he tse, y. inf. faetsem, to awake; Gd: hie ts^; but t§^ h^
or hem, G. tsle hie, to awaken.
hebem and
hebebe, G. hengho, n. passover; ba^ SSorbeigel^cn.
heblo, n. allowance; privilege; plenipotence ; Gd: hegbe.
heblodsSm, n. giving of allowance; G. hegbehamo, n.
hebu, hebuom, n. hair about the body; G. het§oi, n. : comp.
yibu, n.
hebom, n. Kr. Dial. th. s.
hehlam, n. distress.
hekalo, n. a living person.
hekgm, n. life; G. hlekamo.
hem md si, v. = Ga: hie me, to be content.
hemkpatam, n. destruction; G. hIekpatamQ, n.
hemuno, G. hekroko, n. an other place; s. muno, adj.
bene, pron. G. heni, where, whence.
henowom, n. honour; G. henowomo, n.
hesitem, n. arousing; fr. te he si, v.
heto, n. G. th. s. answer; fr. to he.
hetsem, n. awaking; awakening.
hetsglo, n. G. hetselg, n. pure, holy person.
hetsgm, n. cleanness; purity; holiness; fr. he Iso, v.
hewam, n. G. hewale, strength; power.
hewamwom, n. encouragement; empowering.
hi, inf. him, v. to sit; G5 and Ot. ta, tra; te; to re-
main; Ga: hi, to dwell etc. hie hi, he hi, v. to live.
hi mi, him, v. to sit into; to remain in s. th.
dbyGoogk
hi no — huhO. 439
hi ne, (j. ia nQ, v. to sit upon; to ride.
hi si, hi si, G. ta si, hi si; v. to sit down; to remain
to live etc. Ot. te ase, v.
hia, hie, inf. hiam, hiem, v. to suffice, to reach; GS; §e,
fa, V. Comp. also ye, v.
hIa, v. G. th. s., to he needful, wanting, troubling, ehlami,
1 am in trouble,
hie, V. to continue; G. hi, and hie mli, v. Comp. hS, v.
hie ,- Kr. Dial. = ye in the C. Dial , G. kwe, v. to look,
hie, adv. here; Ot. ha, G. hie.
hlo, pi. hlohl, n. sickness; G. hela; hlo nu = v., he ye
in G^: to be sick; ene hlo nui, he is sick,
hio, n. G. nyomo; debt, price; wo hlo, G. wo nyomg, v.
to pay; inf. hiowom.
hiom, hyom, n. heaven; hight; adv. on high; up; G, iiwei, n.
higmi si = Nyonmo si in Ga: v. to thunder,
higmisim, n. thundering.
hiotse, pi. hlotseme, n. sick person; G. helatse.
hiowolo, n. payer.
hiowom, n, paying (of a debt) ; payment ; G. nyomo wo, n.
ho, .V. aor. neg. hoi, hui, hwi to go, to come, to pass, to
go; Gfi: ho, ya, ba, v.; dse - ho, double v. = G. yin-
te, V. to start, be off.
ho (hwo, wo, wo), n. honey; G. wo.
holanu, holohu; also hulanu (Ay. hotfi), n. cowries; s. also
trema (G. and Ot.).
holami-dse, n. and monthly wages,
holami-dsenii, n. th. s. GS: nydndsenii, th. s.
holanulse, pi. -tseme, n. possessor of cowries; rich man;
trematse, th. s.
hram, K. Dial, = haram, GS: hamo, n. advance; adv. in
advance,
hre, here, inf. hrem, herem, v. to receive; lo save; G.
here, v. ,
here or hre wanam; inf. wanamhrem; v. to save (one's
life); Ga: here wala.
hre yiwanam, inf. yiwanamhrem, v. th. s. (Tw^eiv; G. here
yiwala, v.; Ot. kye nkwa, v.
hrem, n. reception; saving,
ho, Ga: hu, moh, adv. also; though; again,
hue no, neg. hui no, G. wo no, v. to exalt,
hue, pi. hueme, n. friend; G. sientse, n,
h&hQ, V. to murmur; G. th. s,
d by Google
440 Adfinme-Appendix.
huhfihft, adv. murmuringly; tfi munyu — , y.' lo munnur,
G. wie hOhfihQ, v.
hQhQi, adv. aloud.
Hold, pr. n. Keta?
hulami, holami, n. moon; month,
hulamidse, -nil, monthly wages; G. nydtoiiyenii; comp.
h\valami.
hQno, n. husband; Ot. kunu,, GSi: wu (perh. the Ad. =
wuno).
huQ, adv. again; s. hu, adv.
huo, n. hunger; G. h6mo, Ot. okom; hfio ye noko, v. Inf.
huoyem, to be hungry; -^ungcrn; huo yemi, 1 am hungry;
cd ^ungcrt mid^; to want in general.
hQoyelo, n. hungry person.
hfloyem, »G. hdmgyeli, n. hunger; hungering; want,
hwalami or >Valami, n. G. nulami (fr. hyom-la-bi; G. nwei
la-bi), star,
hwe = hiie, n. friend; s. also nohwele, n.
hwo, ^0, G. wo, n. the next day; to morrow; adv. th. s.
hwo se = G. WQ se, adv. after to morrow; n. future,
hyowe, n. heaven,
hygm, G. nwei, n. heaven; adv. above.
I.
As in Ga the vowel „i" does not initiate words; hot
it is used in the Krobo- Dialect for the pronominal
subjective and possessive augment first person sing.,
i-, I, my; f. i. iba, I came; ibi, my child. In the
dialect of the coast the former becomes „mi, m, n, n**;
the latter „ye"; s. § 4 of the Appendix. Besides it
terminates words = ni, ii in Ga, instead of the v. dsi;
f. i. anokwai, it is true.
imi, indep. pron. 1. pers. sing, in the K.-Dial., I; C.-Dial.
ami, mami; G. mi.
imi UQ, as for me.
imihu, I also.
K.
Ka, V. th. s. as in Ga, to fix; to try etc.
ka, n. trial; fixing; ambush, wo -, inf. kawom, v. to lie in
ambush; G. th. s.
ka, V. or ke, v. G. ke, to be long.
dbyGoogk
M — kedSL 441
kg, V. to lie, as in 6a; n5-ka, or ftgrka, double v. to lay;
nd-ka no, v. to lay on.
ka, y. G. tamo, Ot. sa, se, to be like; used as aux. v. like
,,tamo", „tamo ake", „take", „ake"; = like, like as, as ;
i. i. ka yo ko, G. tamg yo ko, as a woman.
ka, kg, verbal conj. = G. ake, Ot. se, se; as; that; because,
= Ga: ke, kedsi, Ot. se, if; but comp. also „d§ikune",
conj. edemi ka ebama, he told me that he will come;
G. ekemi ake ebaba; ka ope kike one, abagbeo, if thou
do this, thou wilt be killed! G. ke ofe neke ne, aagbeo!
kadra, n. bill-hook; G. adeda; Ot. adare.
kake-ekome in Ga (which is also used), num. one.
kalo, n. tryer; apprentice; disciple = kaselo, n.
kase, inf. kasem, v. to learn, to imitate; G. th. s.
kaselo, pi. kaseli, kaselome, kaselohi, with def. article: ka-
seliome, kaseloome, n. disciple; apprentice.
kasem, n. learning; imitating; imitation; apprenticeship.
ke, G. th. s. V. inf. kem, to present, grant; give a present;
ekemi nihf, he gave me presents.
ke (ke), inf. kem; G. ke, v. to say, to tell; comp. de, dro,
V. th. s.
ke, V. as in Ga: to be long; s. also ka, v.
kg, kg, aux. V, as in 6. to lake, to be with; used to ex-
press communion and therefore to unite two subjects
or objects or their definitions under one notional
verb; f. i. akewo ba or afcewo ma, they came with
us; G. amekewo ba; besides that it is as in Ga connected
with verbs as n5, ng, to use those which are intransi-
tive transitively, f. i. ke-ba, ke-ma, to come with, i. e.
to bring; ke-hl si, to sit down with, to set down; etc.
or to indicate an instrumentality, f. i. ke-pe, to do with;
to make with; comp. k^, v. in the Ga-Vocab. and § 28
in the Ga-Sketch.
ki (kg), G. ke, kedsi, Ot. se -a; verbal conj. if (comp.
//fl^f^^t/' //flefagt" in German, also used as conditional
conjunctions).
kg (ke, ka, ade), conj. G. ake, Ot. se, se, that; saying used
as the hebr. "^D^<^, greek 6m.
kg, pron. even the same, adv. put after the verb, comp.
kgne, as in Ga: still; ema kg, he came still.
kg-kg, adv. interr^g. pron. G. te-ten? Ot.-deii? how? kg
ape kg? G. te ape ten? te afe ten? Ot. eye den? how
is it?
kedSiy conj. if; as in Ga; neg. kedsi.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
442 Adfihme-Appendix.
ke-ho = G. ke-ya, v. (lo go) to.
ke-basu, G. ke-ba§i, v. (lo reach) to.
keke ne, G. keke le, conj. then.
kake and
keke^= kr^kr^, G. kleifikleh, adv. in the beginning.
keke, kekei, n. length; fr. ke, v.; G. kgle, n. ISele, n.
k^kg, adv. = Ukg, G. neke, so, thus.
kelo, n. talker.
kern, n. talk, saying; G. kemo, n.
k^ne, G. k^le, adv. still, k^ne ema, still he came; or:
ema k^, th. s.
kesa, G. lolo, keke, adv. still; only; la kenye n6 boboyo
kesa, the light is with you a little white only; „la
kenye ye fio keke" in Ga.
ketiapopoe, n. circumcision, fr. po ketia, v. to circumcise;
G. ketiafo, n.
kek§, pi. klk^mei, klk^tSemei, adverbial pron. such; these;
so; G. neke.
kino, kuno, n. cock; G. wonQ, n.
ko-, ko-, == GS ka-, aux. v. or prefix of the neg. pot.
or imperative mood; f. i. kope, mokope! don't (thou)!
nyekope ! don't (you) ! — JlIso used as prefix of a sub-
junct. mood; s. Table II. and specimen,
kd, V. G. th. s. to bite.
kobe, kowe, kope (Ay. kofi?), n. G. and Ot. akrowa, plan-
tation-village,
kdli, n. shoulder; G. kdin.
kdlino, n. upper shoulder,
kdlisi, n. under shoulder; armhole.
'kome, G. th. s. num. one; pi. komei, some; einigc; nihl-
komei or nlhlkome, some persons or things; G. mei-
komei, niikomei, nokomei, nibii komei; comp. kake, num.
komo, G. and Ot. nkomo, n. sadness; ye-, to be sad.
komoyeyei, n. sadness; sad state; mourning,
kong, conj. G. koni, that; ba§, bamit; gr. tva; comp. k^,
k|, k9, conj.
koh and
kond, pi. kondh! (perh. from the dan. „kong^) n. king;
ye — , V. to be king; but comp. mSitse^ n.
kondyem, n. kingdom; government,
koron, kroh; G. kron; adj. single, simple, genuine, pure;
holy,
kotekote, adv. exactly; G. ketekete.
kotokroboe, n. a kind of bark, used as spices; G. krobgo, n.
dbyGoogk
kpa — Kpom. 443
kpa, V. to do once more, to repeat; used as an aux. v. to
express the iterative mood, as „8a" in G3; f. i. ekpa
epe, or ekpape, s. Table H., he again did it, akpa epe,
th.^s. comp. akpa, and esa efe and asan efe in Gd.
kpa, inf. kpSmj kpfikpa, kpSkpai, v. to cr)^; to Wow; to
sound etc. Comp. kpS, bo, big, gbe, v. in G.; pe in
Adh.; and pai in Ot.
kpa, G. gbo (H. kpon?) n./ stranger, guest.
kpakpa^ adj. good; G. th. s.
kpakpa, adv. truly = nine!
kpaka, inf. kpakam, v. to drive.
kpakalo, n. driver; dragge^.
kpakam, n. driving; dragging.
kpale, inf. kpalem, G. kpale, gbale, ka se; v. to return; to
turn in sonoewhere; comp. kpa, v. to repeat and kpa, v.
in Ga; Ot. pa, v.
kpale se, G. ku se; v. to return.
kpalelo, n. returner.
kpalem, n. return.
kpalo, n. cryer.
kpam, kpakpai, n. cr^; sound.
kpe, G. th. s. , V. inf. kpem, to meet.
kpe yo, V. inf. yokpem, to meet a woman, to marry; to
wed; s. kpe yO and wye yo, v. in Ga.
kpemhe, n. G. kpehe, meeting- place.
kpe, n. and
kpeti, G. ten; n. middle, midst; adv. in the middle; amidst,
s. also ti, n.
kpe, V. inf. kpem, G. gbe^ to sound.
kpem, n. sound.
kpelekple, adj G. kpetenkple, great.
kpla, V. G. kula, kua, to kneel; - si', v. to kneel down.
kple, G. kpleke, v., inf. kplem; to descend.
kple §i, inf. sikplem, v. to descend, come down; G. kple-
ke §i, v.; comp. App. §1.3.
kplA, adj. and adv. G. th. s. sound, well; soundly; well;
wholly; entirely.
kpd, G. th. s. and he, v. inf. kpdm; to take from; to re-
deem; nkpd n§ edem, G. mihe ye eden, I took it from
his hand.
kpo, V. inf. kpom, G. th. s. to break off; to crumble off.
kpo, n. lumb; knot; hill; island.
Kpom, G. Kpon, pr. n. of a town, at the river Volta, about
50 miles up from its mouth, on its western shore near
dbyGoogk
444 Adftftme-Appendix.
Mount „Yogag5," where the river turns from a due
southern to a south eastern direction and is full of rocks.
The town was founded some 50 years ago by a man
called „Tete Wyim" and is called so by the Akwapim-
people still ; it soon got large by the addition of many
fugitives, slaves, debtors etc. who found abundant pro-
tection in the many ^islands" („kpo" = island) of the
river and abundant labour and food in the latter too.
Though inhabited by a mixed and rough set of people,
the town is thriving, having the best river canoes, the
greatest share of the salt- and palm-oil trade and enjoy-
ing the neighbourhood of the rich and thriving Krobo-
country. The language of the town is half AdSinme, half
Ayigbe.
Kpom, Kpon, G. Kpoh, pr. n. (hill, s. Akropoh, Mam-
pofi in Ot. Kponkpo in Ga), of a sea town betwixt
Tema and Gbugbra (in the Maps: „Pony'').
kpulu, G. and Ayigbe the s., jug; mug; cup.
fcr^kr^, 6. klenklen, adj. and adv. first; at first; in the be-
ginning.
krSkrgkrS, th. s.
krombi, 6. kromobi, n. firstborn.
ku , V. inf. kum, 6. th. s., to break.
kuku, red. verb, G. kdmokOmo, v. to breack repeatedly;
many things etc.
kuku = kolo, V. in 6a : to gather, take up; akuku atdi,
they took up their guns.
kuma, G. kumai, n. thirst; kuma ye, v. to be thirsty; kuma
yem, cd burfiet mi^; I am thirsty.
kumaku, n. a kind of bread.
kumayem, n. thirsting.
kuno = kdnQ, G. wgna, n. cock.
kwQ, neg. aor. kw^', inf. kwom, v. to assend, to climb.
L.
La, V. Inf. lam, G. la, ladse, v. to hang, to hook; to loose;
to be lost; to err; to be concealed; 'to conceal; to dis-
appear, to vanish etc. Comp. also te, v. in G.
la bio, inf. blglam, v. to loose the way.
la he, inf. helam, v. to conceal one's self. ^
la h6, V. to vanish before s. b. G. lad§e hie, v.
la mi, V. to be lost in s. place; to conceal one's self in
s. place.
dbyGoogk
la no — M'-. 445
la no, n. G. §|u no, to cover, conceal; to deny.
la, n. fire.
lads, n. G. ladsd, spittle.
lafa, num. hundred, pi. tb. s. and lafai, Ay. th. s. lafa etc,
three hundred; G. and Ot. oh^.
lahOe (law6?), n. dove, pigeon; G. okpo, n.
Lawe, pr. n. of males,
le, G. th. s., V. inf. le, neg. li, to know,
le, n. pi. lehl, vessel, ship; boat, canoe; G. lele, pi. ledSi.
le, pron., 1. indep. == Ga: le; be, she, it; 2. objective
terminational augment, as in G3: -le, him, her (it). Comp.
§ 4 of the App. and -o, one, ne, pron. in Adn.
lebe, G. be, n. time. Comp. also lebi, legbu in GS; and
le, V. in Ayigbe.
ledsei, ledso, G. dsei, pi. ledseme, adv. pron. there, thence;
comp. hie. Comp. le , v. in Ayigbe = ne in Adn.
lenitse, pron. G. ledientse, lenientse (lit. „he the author")
he himself, himself; comp. ankasa in Otyi.
li, neg. voice of the verb le, to know; nli, I don't know;
ali, it is not known ^ they don't know; s. allnd, adv.^
ligbi, G. gbi, n. day; comp. lebe, ledsei, etc. and G.
lebi.
ligbllabo, G. gbllabo, adv. and conj. as long as.
ligbloko, adv. G. gbikogblko, ever, always ; with neg. voice
never; \t, tiic.
loko, adv. dani in GS: before,
lolo, adv. G. dS, before; G. th. s. still; nodi); ebe lolo, he
has not yet (or „8till" not) come,
loko, adv. = G. ko, once; also used to express the neg.
voice of the perfect tense,
lolo, G. no; that.
lolohe, conj. therefore; G. nohewo.
lolo so, after that,
lowe, n. G. bulu; fool.
M.
M is in G5 sometimes hardened into „b* and changes
also with other liguids, as n, n, 1.
M'- (before labials; comp. n-, n-); G. th. s. and mi-, pro-
nominal subjective augment (scarcely used possessively,
s. ye-), 1. pers. sing. 1; mba, mma, I came; mpe, 1 made
etc. Comp. also: i, mi, and imi, ami and mami, pron.
dbyGoogk
446 AddAme-Appendix.
-m' = mi, G. mli, A., Ot. mu, m*; Ay. me, m', inside;
s. roi, n.
-m* = mi, obj. pron. me.
ma- (and mba, miba-), propominal augment m' and tempus-
augment of the fut. tense „a'' combined, as in GS: 1
will- I shall-; mape, I shall do it; mahl si, I will sit
down,
ma, inf. ma, neg. aor. me (sometimes ba); G. ba, Ot. th.
s. , Ay. fa , V. to come ; auxil. v. of the fut. tense ; mape,
shall or will do.
rod, n. coming,
ma §i, inf. §imfi, or
raa si, inf. sima, G. ba si, v. to come down, to be hum-
bled; ma noko si, to humble s. b.; G. ba m. k. si, v.;
to come down, descend = yi si in Ga.
mS, V. to build, to set; as in Gh; aor. neg. me.
ma, pi. mahl, n. town; people; tribe; nation; land etc. as
in Ga; man, th.s.; mam and manm, G. man, Ot. manm,
inside of the town," inner town; adv. in town,
mahe, n. sleep, G. wo; but see wo, v.
noaka, n. G. manku, n. part of a town, quarter; tribe,
mam, s. ma, n.
mami- == ami-, indep. pron. and pronominal possessive
augment, but seldom used, comp. ye, of the 1. pers.
sing. my.
mami, n. pi. mamime; = nyemi, brother or sister; ®c*
f^roiiler; maminyumu, n. brother; mamiyo, n. sister;
but perh, = my brother, my sister; comp. nyemi.
manm, s. ma, n.
manye, n. queen,
mase, G. masei, n. side,
mase, G. manse, n. far country; adv. far away,
matre, n. whoredom; adultery; = adfaman, n.
ma»se, pi. malseme, n. king; G. mantse, n. Comp. kono, n.;
ye matse, v. inf. matseyeye, to be king; to reign.
matSeyeye, n. kingdom; reign; government; G. mantSe-
yeli, n.
matseyeyehg, n. place of a kingdom,
mawetse, pi. -tseme, n. master. Lord; s. awetse, nyontso, n.
Mawu, Ay. th. s. G. Nyonmo, Mawu Nyohnio, Ot. Nyame;
NyankopoA, pr. n. of God ; used as Nyonmo in Ga, which
see; comp. also hiom, n.
mayo, n. G. wo, sleep, = mahe.
me, V. G. me, v. to wait; to expect; neg. aor. ml.
dbyGoogk
me — mglu. 447
me, pron. third pers. pi. = ame in G3: they.
-me, obj. pronominal augm. of the third pers. pi. , OS, am?,
them; pi. termination of persons; G. -mei; with the
definite article -orae, f. i. kaselo, pi. kaselome, with def.
article kaseloome ; comp. in Ot. „nom" after some plural
nouns.
mehedse? G. mehewo? why? (lit. from what it came?)
memle, n. wild fig-tree; G. agbamitso, n.
mene? int. pron. G. namo? who? G. meni? when? see
also: n§?
menehe? int. pron. G. menihewo, why?
metfa = amefia, they all.
ml, neg. v. to be not in want of; s. me, v.
mimi and
mi, m*; G. mli,~n. Ot. mu, m; Ay. me, m*; inside; con-
trary of he; used very frequently as gram. subj. or obj.
as mli in Ga, which see. Connected witli ¥erbs as their
object it is sometimes taken together with them in the
termination m (G. n, Ot. m. Ay. m); as: AS mi, ngm,
to be in, to be so, to be true; Ga, yen; Ot. wom;
Ay. lem; ba mi, ma mi, bam, mam, v. to come in, to
be fulfilled ; G. ba mli , ban etc. Comp. also nouns as
mam, inside of town; mukulim, — of belly; yim, — of
head etc. G. man, musun, yin etc.
mi Aim, mimi Aim, v. G. mli fli, v. to exult; to rejoice.
mi fCI, iHf. mifQm, v. to swell inside, to be angry; G. mli
fu, v.; s. mukulim fu, v. th. s.
mibam, n. fulfillment; fr. ba mi, v.
mimam, n. th. s.
miflim, n., mimiflim, n. exultation; joy.
mifum, n. anger; G. mlifu; Ot. bofti, n.
mi§i, misi, n. G. mlisi, n. bosom; (B(l)ve%.
mlem, G. he, n. loitis.
mlemi, G. mliten, n. th. s.
mlemle, adj. G. kwoAkwoA; high; deep; s. also gSgS, adj.
mo, indep. pron. sec. pers. sing. G. bo, thou; it is gene-
rally also, used in the imperat. mood sing, mope! = G.
ferao! do it! moho, go! it is also used subjectively and
objectively besides „o« etc.
mgdenbobge, n. diligence fr. bomoden, v. G. th. s. to be
diligent.
mgdenbolo, n. diligent person.
moku, G. moA, adv. gtt>at; though; truely etc. Ot. mom.
mglu, n. morning; adv. in the morning.
dbyGoogk
448 Adfiiame-Appendix.
mone, n. to da^; adv. tb. s.
monemone, adv. this very day. G. nmene, nmeneme*
nmenenmene ; comp. also: dSeenmo, adv. in Ga.
mu, inf. mum, to breathe; G. th. s.
mu, G. bu, n. hole, cave,
mu (and nu) = G. md, v. to catch,
mukuli, n. G. musu, belly,
mukulim, G. musun, in the belly; inside; -fQ = mi fu, v.
to be angry; inf.
mukulimfOm, n. anger.
mum, mumi, n. breathing; breath; spirit; G. mumo, n.
muno, pi. munohl and munokome, adj. other; G. Kroko.
munyo, munyu, n. G. wiemo, word; language; tQ-, v. inf.
munyutum, to speak,
munyutulo, n. speaker,
munyutilm, n. speaking; speech,
musubolo, n. blasphemer,
musuboboe, n. blasphemy; G. musubo, fr. bo musu, v.
(Ol. G. and Adn. th. s.).
N.
The letter „n** or „n** before palatals, becomes „m**
before labials and changes besides with 1, r, and d.
N-, n-, pronominal subjective augment of the 1. pers. sing.
= mi, in Ot. and G., I; but only used in the Danme
of the Sea-coast;- in Krobo it is „i-", and m-, connected
with a following formative vowel; f. i. nle, Kr.-Dial. ile,
G. mile, I know; nke, Kr. ike, G. mike, I said; etc. but
comp. maba, I ^all come, in DSnme and GSl.
' n and n (as m) may occur in the middle of a word (by
combination) = mi$ inside, in; as in GS, Ot. and Ayigbe;
though not as terminating word, when ^m^ is preferred
(Ga, A).
na, V. G. th. s., Ot. hu, to se^; = G. nina, to overtake.
The word seems not quite regularly conjugated, f. i.
n€\ lo, behold; neg. aor. ne, saw not; neg. perf.
nawe, has not seen. As in GSl it is used as a perfective
and oblative aux. v.; s. na, v. in G.; but comp. also
nya, v.
na mi, inf. minam, v. to get with child; G. na musu; ii6
ho^ V.
na nya, G. na na, v. inf. nyanam, nyanahe, nyanae, nya-
nanae, to understand; lit. to see the end.
dbyGoogk
na — t^. 449
na, pi. nahi, n. 6. tsina, Ot. nantyi; cow, ox; Stinb.
Ayigbe: nyi (one of the DoAko-languages: tSi).
nabi, n. calf,
nanyumu, n. ox.
nawomi, n. cow-hide.
nay5, n. cow.
M, V. G. th. s., to press: to shut etc.
ha nd£o yi, inf. yinSm, v. (G. nft moko yi); to sbu^ one
in; to press upon one's head; to command, urge s. b.;
eiticn an^crtfi^en.
M, n. field (G. th. s.).
M no, n. th. s.; adv. on or in the field. 6. th. s.
nane, pi. nanehi, n. foot. G. th. s.
nanemi, nanem, n. = Gd: nMsian, lit. in the feet; place,
stead; adv. instead,
nawe, s. na, v.
ne, n^, G. ni, conj. and. Ay. th. s.; Ot. na.
ne, nS, G. nl, rel. pron. who, what; conj. that, ba§, ba^
mit (comp. kS, kg, kg).
ng, interrog. pron. = namo? meni? me? nS? in Gfi, who;
what? Comp. also: benS? menS? th. s.
'ne, ene, G. th. s. pi. ngme, netSemei, dem. pron. this;
these,
ne, one, G§: le, Ot. no; in the Krobo-Dialect only -o
■ (added to the last word) ; dem. pron. or def. article „the**,
but only used to define whole senteuces, after which it
follows; comp. o, le, pron. and to in Greek.
n6! interj. (irreg. inperat. sing, of na, v. to see) lo! be-
hold ! G. na. Comp. also hie ! and ye ! G. kwe ! Ot. fye
(fe)!
ne, neg. aor. of na, to see.
nS, V. irreg. neg. voice „be" (G. be); employed, esp. as
an auxiliary; it is used for the Ga:'ye, Ot. wo, Ay. le;
to be somewhere, somehow; to have etc.; and for the
GSl: no, also used in Adn. (Ot. de), to take; which
are to be compared. Besides the extensive use like the
Gd ye and nd, its use as an auxiliary of the present
tense (G. ml, mim, m-, n-, n-, Ot. re- = de; Ay. le-
me, le-m*) is especially to be observed; comp. § 6 of
the Append, and be, aux. v., as also the following in-
stances: Krobo-Dial.: nS noko pehe, Coast-Dial: M
noko pee or pei/ to be s. th. making, fr. the verb pe,
to make (G. fe, comp. „mimfe"); pehe or pei may be
called a participle. The neg. voice, at the same time
Zimmermann, Akra-Vocab. 29
dbyGoogk
450 Addnme-Appendix.
thai of the fut, is thea: be pehe, be pel, to be not
making, doing; *comp. pewe, to have not made and pi,
did not make, do, was not, is not. Comp. also no, v.,
kg, v.; hi, pig, pe, v. which three latter must as in
Ga, supply the fut. tense, „ng" being defective.
ii^ hionu, V. to be sick,
nene, rel. pron.pl. niiame, nihine; G. moni, noni;^meiDi,
niini; who, what, that; dem. pron. , G. mone, none, this
person; this thing; ind. pron. G. mo, no, some body,
some thing,
ni, V. = dsi, G. th. s., to be (something); Ot. th. s.
nihi, pi. n. from n5, G. nii, nibii; mei; things, persons,
people; comp. nimli and ndmli fr. n5mlo, n. and nii, pi.
of no, n.; also nime = nihi.
nihikome, pi. n. of nokome; some persons, some things;
G. meikomei, niikomei.
nii = nihi, pi. n. things, persons; G. nii, nibii; mei.
niiami, niiam, n. G. niian, lit. inside of things; place; comp.
bedseme-niiam, G. dsemei-niian, thereabout,
niiame, pi. rel. pron., G. meini; who; Kr.-Dial.
niiatse, pi. -tseme, n. G. th. s., rich person,
niienyi, num. G. mei enyo, two persons,
niikome = nihikomei, pi. n. ^
niime or nime, irreg. pi. of nomlo, n. man. Comp. this;
with def. art. niome.
nimli, pL n. th. s. men , people,
niilele, or nolele, n. G. niile, knowledge.
niilelQ, nolelo, pi. -li, -lorae, with def. art. -lio, -loome,
-Igmeo, n. G. niilelo, wise, knowing person; sage.
nine! G. lelen! int. truly! certainly! amen! comp. ekpakpa!
th. s.
nine, pi. ninehi, n. G. th. s. hand, arm.
nini, n. shadow; sdul; G. susuma; Ot. sunsum, sunsum,
sunsuma.
niipem, with def. art.: niipemio, pi. niipemhi, niipemi; iiii-
pehi, n. doing; deed; act; G. niifemo. *
niiyelo, n. G. th. s., eater,
niiyeyg, n. G. niiyeli, fr. ye nii, v. eating; food,
nitse (tse = father, author), G. dientSe, nientse; n. and
pron. pi. nitseme; self, selves; aminitSe, myself; lenitse,
(he) himself, etc.
lime, V. to set, lay; G. th. s.
nme no, v. == boi in G5, to begin,
nm^tfu, n. chaff; s. tutru; G. tutu.
d by Google
hvaiQ — ndkake. 451
Amle, pi. Amlehi, o. bell; -fia, v. to strike the hour.
Amlefiam, n. striking of the bell ; hour, time ; 6. Amlettft, n.
no, dem. pron. as in 69: that; pi. nome, nohi; but more
used is „1o1q*S th. s. Kr.-Dial.
nd, n. andmdef. pron., 6. mo, n5; person; thing; ^^manb,
@tn>ad; pi. nii, nime, nihi; with def. art. niome; nihio
etc. This word is as much used, especially in compounds,
as the two corresponding words in Gd, though persons
and things are not so plainly distinguished by it; as f. i.
not only the personal pi. form nime, but also the more
impers. pi. form nihi, nii is applied to persons.
no, n. G. th. s. surface, cover, upper part; contrary of si,
sisi; used as adv. and postposition = on, upon, up
(comp. hygm, hiom) etc. ba no, ma no, v. to come on ;
bu ng, V. to cover up; h! no, v. to sit upon, etc.; with
their respective personal and impersonal verbal nouns,
as: nobum, covering; nohllo, onsitter, i. e. rider etc.
-nd, answering the Gd -nyo, n. == man; used as a per-
sonal masculine termination; Krobgnd, n. a Krobgnian;
pi. Kroboli, Krobome; KrobQmen, -people.
n6 = G. nyd, v. to fall; inf. ndm; nde, ndhe, ndnde.
n6 si, G. nyo Si, v. to fall down.
no, V. G. th. s., to take; to be agreeable; used as aux. v.
= ke; f. i. n5-pue no, G. n5-fie no, v. to go on; to
go forward; nd-hS, v. to (take and) give; hd-pe, v. to
take and make; nd ndko pe ndko, v. to make s. th. or
s. b. into s. th. or s. b. *
nd ho, V. G. th. s. to conceive; s. na mi, v. th. s.
nd, n. G. th. s. neighbourhood; nearness; adv. and post
at, by, near etc. Comp. also mase, n.
nddfalo, n. G. dsrayelilo, merchant, trader; s. dfa, v.
nddsdlo, n. doubter; disputer, G. liwanedS^lo.
ndds^m, n. doubting; doubt; dispute; fr. dSd nd; G. dSe
nwane, v.
nd-enyo (f. i. ndmlo nd-enyo, two persons) num. perh. =
yi enyo in G3, two (persons or things; comp. niienyi,
num. th. s.
ndgbogbo, n. G. gbonyo, mogbonyo, a dead person; corps.
ndhe, G. mohewo» nohewo, for whose sake; therefore;
wherefore; s. also: dsShe, conj.
ndhwel6» Kr.-Dial., n. friend.
ndkake, num. G. mokome, nokome; one person or thing;
s. ndkome, th. s.
29»
d by.Googk
452 Adfi6me-Appendix.
ndko, adv. pron. 6. moko and noko; somebody, s. th.; pi.
nihikbme; niikome.
ndkome (pi. nihikome), G. mokome, nokome; numb., one
(thing or person); some; comp. also: ndkake, th. s.
ndkotoma, pi. -mame; with def. art. -mameo and maome;
grandee ; old person ; elder ; G. onukpa , n.
ndkpd, n. (G. gbo; ace. to Hanson: mokpon). stranger,
guest.
ndlelQ, n. = niilelo, n. wise man.
ndmlo, n. pi. ndmli, nimli, nime, G. gbomo, mo; per-
son, man; comp. also no, n.
nSmlotso, pi. -tsohi, G. gbomotso, n. body; human body,
ndmlgtsu, n. European ; white man ; G. blofonyo, Ot. broni.
n6ne, pron. rel. = moni, noni in G3: who, what; that;
dem. = mone, none in G. this; pi. nihine, Kr. -Dialect:
niiame; also used as conj. = kone, that; ia% bamit.
nosasesa, nSsaisa, G. mofemo; every (body); comp. n6-
tfand, n.
ndtfand, G. ndfSnd, ndfiand; mofemo, moflamo; every thing
every body. Kr.-Dial. ndt§oan5, ndtsonS.
n5suomnd, n. something wished for or loved; some body
loved; wish, will; comp. suomonand, pi. suomonanii,
th. s.
noyayampem ; pi. - pemi, peihhi ; with def. art. - pemiome,
G. ndsafepiQ, n. sinful deed, act; dfjuxqvrjfia.
nra, inf. nram, v. to dream; G. la, v.
nram, n. dream; G. lamo, n.
nu, V. inf. num, G. md; to catch,
nu, n. G. mu, oil; po-, v. to anoint,
nupom, n. anointing.
nu, V. to drink, G. th. s., inf. num, nunui.
nulQ, n. drinker,
num, and
nunui, n. drinking,
nua, nue; s. nwa, ftwe.
nunt§o and nunt§o, n. s. nyontso.
nwa, pi. nwahi, adj. great; large; 6. wulu, adj.
nwe, pi. nwehi, n. finger; toe; G. wao, n.
nwe goleku, n, thumb,
nya, v. Ot. tbis., G3 na, to get; to reach; comp. also
na, V.
nya, G. na, Ot. ano, n. mouth, opening; etc. used as
grammat. subj. and obj. as in G3: f. i. nya tso, inf. nya-
tsQm; G. na t§e, v. to have a pure mouth; to speak
dbyGoogk
nyabam — nyumCi. 453
pureljr; etc. and gbe nj^a, inf. nyagbem, nyagbe, nagbe-
gbe , to finish ; G. gbe na ; na nya , inf. nyanam, to un-
derstand etc. etc.
nyabam, n. sharpness; fr. nya ba, v. to be sharp; G. naba.
nyagbe; nyagbem; nyagbegbe, n. finishing; end, aim etc.
G. nagbe; fr. gbe nya, v.
nyagbelo, n. finisher; SSoUcnber.
nyagolQ, n. lier; G. amalelo.
nyanalo, n. understanding person,
nyanam, n. understanding,
nyasa, n. G. adesa, tale, fable,
nyalsolo, n. person speaking purely,
nyatsom, n. pure language, speech, fr. na t§Q, v.
nyg, V. G. th. s., to be able,
nyemi, pi. nyemime, n. brother or sister, ® cf^iwijier ; G.
th. s.; comp. also mame and mami, n. th. s.
nyeminyumu, n. brother.
nyemiyO, n. sister; pi. with def, art. nyemiyiome, sisters,
nyimi (pi. of nyonraa, num. ten) ; nyimi ewe, nyimi ewyie,
Kr.-Dial. forty; etc. But nyonmai seems also to be used;
comp. § 8, App.
nyimi enyo, twenty,
nyimi ete, thirty.
„ ewyie, fourty.
„ enuQ, fifty.
„ ekpa, sixty.
„ kpago, seventy.
„ kpanyo, eighty.
. „ n6, ninety.
nyo, nyom, G. nyo, nyOn, n. night; adv. at nighttime,
nyom? = hygm, n. heaven; G. nwei; adv. above.
nydgue» nyogwe, G. nydn, n. slave.
nyont§o, G. th. s., pi. -tsgrne, n. master. Lord; comp.
mawetse, awetse, wetse, n. th. s.
nyu, G. nu, n. water.
nyumu = G, nubu, n. water hole; waterwell.
nyumu, pi. -mui, n. G. nO, man, male.
O.
The vowel „o" (subjective, possessive and objective
pronominal augment of the sec. pers. sing., „thou, thy,
thee") does not in AdSinme initiate so many words, as
in Ga, the former being generally shorter; but where
dbyGoogk
454 AdftAme-Appendix.
it appears, it seems to be a personal augment of
nouns. Words not found under it must be sought for
under the next consonant.
0-, pron. augm. „lhou, thy;" somelimes „mo" is used for
it; Ga „o.**
-0, pron. augm. thee; sometimes -mo.
-'g, pron. obj. augment = Wo, G. Ih. s. us.
-g, pronominal augment expressing the def. article, G. le»
Ot. no, Ay. la, a; „the." It is either terminating the
words or is inserted in plural nouns and pronouns b e -
fore the plur. form; esp. before -me; f. i. kaselo, pi.
kaseli, kaselohi, kaselgme; with def. art. kaselio, -lohio;
kaseloome, kaseliome; or „ome" may be taken as the
plur. form, of the art. itself; comp. „nom" after some
nouns without pi. form in Otyi. If afiSxed to the im-
personal verbal nouns ending with m, mi, they accept
generally the latter form; f. i. mum, with def. art. mu-
mio. The full form of it is „Qne'' and it appears some-
times so, especially after sentences, when it is affixed to
their last word; but also „q" or „ne" alone are used;
the former more frequently in the Krobo-, the latter in
the Coast-Dialect; t i. „bene emao" or: „bene emagne"
or: „bene emane," when he came; Gfi: beni eba le.
-00, obj. pron. augm. -o and def. art. o affixed to it;
G. -wo le.
obaka (lit. „wilt thou say'')» interrog. particle initiating
questions, f. i. „obaka esuoo?" Does he really love
thee?
odanta, b. G. th. s. Ay. odada, underdress of women; see
also boi, n. in GS.
ohla, n. poverty, need; G. and Ot. th. s., fr. hla, v.
ohlatSe, pi. -tSome, n. poor man.
okplo, pi. -me, n. G. th. s. table.
one, dem, pron. or def. art. shortened into o' and 'ne, G.
le, Ot. no; the; also used, as „le" in Ga, to define sen-
tences; 8.-0, def. art.
oso, *80, Ay. th. s., very probably a word of one of the
Donko Languages from the interior; horse; Ot. oponko,
G. okpongo.
osofo, Ot., n. priest.
osofondkotoma, n. high-priest; G. osofonukpa.
dbyGoogk
Pa — pete si. 455
The letter p, ivhich is in (^Sl frequently softened
into f, or strengthened into „kp**, if initiating words,
is found in the Danme far more frequently; it changes
besides with f and b in GS.
Pa, V. G. Ih. 8. and fa, v. to suffice.
pa, n. G. fa, by old people:, pa; river, brook.
p§, adv. G. f§n, openly.
padoku, n. scar.
pali, n. G. f§, sisifd, root.
pamkpQ, n. river-iland.
pSn, V. G. and Ol. th. s., to conjure; lo make a covenant.
panya, G. fana, n. river-shore; river-bank; esp. region about
the Volta, whioh is the only known large river in the
neighbourhood,
panyanihi, -nime, -nimli, n. people about the river,
panole, n. river-vessel; - canoe,
panonyielo, n. traveller on the river,
panonylem, n. river-journey,
panoniitsom, n. business on the river,
pe, inf. pem, pepei, pepe, pehe; neg. aor. pT; G. fe and
pe, V. to do, to make, to be (used as „ye" in Otyi).
The verb is as extensively used as in GS, compare it
there,
pe emu, G. ye emu, v. to be whole,
pe, inf. pem, pei, pepei, pehe; G. be; bio; bo; to cry
(but comp. kpa, v.); to quarrel,
pee, pehe, pei, n. doing; deed,
pei, G. bei, n. quarrehng; quarrel,
pelo, n. doer^ maker; G. felo.
pelo, n. G. belo, blolo; cryer; quarrelsome person; enemy,
p^le, V. s. pig.
pem, pfimi; n. doing; making; deed; G. pemo, femo.
pSne, inf. penem, G. pene and fSne, v. lo open, unloose;
comp. bli; G. gble; and hue, v.
pfinelo, n. opener.
pSnem, n. opening,
pepei, pep6, n. doing, making; deed fr. frequent, mood
of pe.
pete, adv. G. th. s. openly; comp. pS.
pete, V. G. kpete, to cleave,
pete si, inf. sipetem, to cleave or stick to the ground.
dbyGoogk
456 AdftAme-Appendix.
pi, aor. neg. of pe; used as dSe, GS: dSee, to be not;
adv. not; pTmi, not I; aor. neg. of pie, v. to suffice;
to be insufficient.
pT, adj. and adv. G. and Ot. th. s. much; many,
pia = fia, fya, v. G. tfa, pi. tfia, to strike, cast,
pia si, V. G. tfa §i, to be cast down; to cast one's self
down; - - - away; to be an outcast,
piani, plane, G. fane, n. noon; daylight; day; daytime; Ot.
awyia. Contr. nyO, nyOm, n.
pie 9 inf. piem, aor. neg. pi, G. se, fa; to suffice; G. fe, to
want, pie boboyo, G. fe fio, it wants little; i. e. neariy.
piem, n. sufficiency; want, fr. pie, v.
piokS, piokSne, adv. G. bene, biane; now; immediately.
piQSQ, adv. G. biane » &mrd, quickly; soon; now; just now.
plopio, ploplopio, adj. and adv. pointed; -ly; G. §ds5sd.
pis, V. to turn; to overturn; to pour out; to become; Gd:
t§d, butu; fose; fle §i. Comp. also pie, kplS in G.,
p6ne, V. in Otyi.
po, inf. pom, popoe, pohe, G. fo, po; to cut.
po nya, inf. nyafom, v. to cut off; G. fo na.
pode, V. to lie.
podem, n. lie.,
poku, n. = pali, G. fS; root.
pO, V. inf. pQm, pQpfii, pQhe, G. fQ; to bury,
pue, inf. puem, puepue, G. fie, v. to cast out, to pour out.
pue no, G. fie no, v. inf. nopuem, to go on; to go farther;
Ot. gu so, V.
pue si, V. G. fie Si; inf. sipuem, to pour out, down; to
be poured out, to the ground,
puem, n. outpouring; outcasting.
pOm, n. burial,
pumhe, n. burial-place.
pQpdi, n. burial.
S.
The consonant s changes frequently with s, and be-
fore the vowels i and e they are used promiscue in
Adafime, being more frequently s near the mountains;
where, in the Otyi-Language, s is not purely to be
found.
Sa, V. inf. sam, sahe, sasae, G. sa ; to be fit, right, worthy ;
neg. aor. s^; to esteem; to fit, to prepare. Comp. also:
sa, se, V. in Otyi.
dbyGoogk
sa nya — sipSm. 457
sa nya, y. G. sa na; to taste.
sa, V. G. Sa, to snatch; to witinow; to angle.
sa fo, v. G. sa foi, to run*
sS, V. G. sa; to burn; to draw (f. i. a sword).
'safo, asafo, n. G. and Ot. th. s. company; troop.
sake-fd, double v., G. se-fd; to cast away.
sam, G. samo, n. preparation.
saminya, adv. G. odsogba, well, good; right; saminya! all
right! very well!
sanmayo, pi. -yi, n. G. oblayo; girl; young woman; virgin,
satsine, n. G. §atsene, a large callabash used for winnowing,
se = si, si, conj. Ga: si; but; for.
se and se, n. G. se, back; adv. back; behind; used as
gram. subj. and obj. as in Ga; f. kpale se, v. to return,
segba, C. Dial., n. G. sikpong; earth; comp. sugbd, n.
sekpalQ, n. person returning,
sekpalem, n. return, fr. kpale se, v.
sewe, n. G. tsese; a wooden vessel of size and form of a
large dish; carved of one piece of wood,
si and si, v. inf. sim, G. si; Ot. si, to knock; to leave,
si and si^= se, conj. G. si; but; for.
si and si, n. G. si; ground;. bottom; time, f. i. si kake,
once; adv. dlown; away; used as gram. subj. and obj.
as in GS; f. i. sa si and sra si, v. to take a walk; G.
sra si; kple si, v. to descend; G. kpleke si; su si, and
su si - ta, V. to arrive; to be at hand; G. se si and se
si - ta; fia si, G. tfa si, v. to cast one's self away, be
an outcast; te si, to arouse, to arise; hi si, to sit down
etc. etc.
sidam, n. standing fr. da si, to stand; thank; fr. da si, to
thank,
sifiam, G. sitfd, n. abjectedness; fr. fia si, v.
sikplem, sikplehe, n. descending; descent, G. Sikplekemg;
fr. kple si, v.
sima, n. humiliation; fr. ma si, v.
simam; n. standing; laying; fr. ma si, v.
sina, V. to dislike?
sind, pi. sindhi, n. G. sind and onufu;' serpent; snake.
G. th. 8.
sinya, n. G. Slna, door.
sipam, n. root, developement, meaning, signification, fr. pa
- si, G. fa Si, V. to bring forth; to come out.
dbyGoogk
458 Adfitoe-Appendix.
sisa, sisahe, sisasae, sisram, n. walking, walk; fr. sa si and
sra si, v. G. Sra si, to lake a walk; Ot. pase, v.
sisi, G. siSi, n. ground; bottom; reason; meaning; signifi-
cation etc. adv. down. Used as gram. subj. and obj. as
in G3.
sisitsdm, n. interpretation fr. Is6 sisi, v. G. sisitsdmo.
sisum, n. arrival; sufficience, fr. su si. v.
siyihe, siyim, n. G. siyimQ, descend; descension.
so, V. G. sd, to snatch from s. b.
80, osQ, n. Ay. th. s., very probable a word of one of the
Donko Languages from the interior (perh. orig. from
DID); horse; G. okpongo; Ot. oponko.
soft, G. th. s., adj. and adv. pure, genuine, entire; entire-
ly; still.
soQ, adv. th. s.
sonyumu, n. male horse; stallion.
soyo, n. female horse, mare.
su, V. G. se, to reach; to arrive; to be at hand; neg. aor.
sue, sui.
su si, V. to reach down, entirely; to arrive; G. §e si, v.
su - 1§, G. se - ta, and
su si-ta, double v., G. se si - ta, to arrive, to be at
hand; to be near.
sugba, Kr. Dial. (s. segba), n. G. sikpon, earth; ground.
suluenapopoe = ketiapopoe, n. G. ketiafo, n. circumcision.
sum, n. arrival.
sumo, V. to serve; G. th. s., Ot. som,
suo, inf. suom, v. G. sumo, Ot. po, to like, to love; to
wish, to will; aor. neg. sume.
suolo, n. lover; G. th. s.
suom, n. love; liking; will; wish; G. suomo, n.
susu, V. Ot., G. and Ay. th. s., to think, to measure.
susum, n. thinking, measuring; thought.
susuhe, susue, n. arrival.
susulo, n. thinker; measurer.
S.
§ cannot ^be considered as a proper initial AdaAme
sound or letter; it appears frequently, but promiscue
with „s**; f. i. sa and sa, sa and sa, si and si are
heard; words therefore, beginning with §, may be sought
for under „s** f. i. „si§i** under „sisi**; „si** under
«si" etc.
dbyGoogk
Ta — tsebene. 459
T.
Ta, V. to touch. G, Ih, s.
IS, V. to be done; Ot. sa, G. IS; su-ta, su si -13, double
V. to reach; to arrive; G. se-lS, th. s.
ta or ta, tarn, n. law; G. kit§ and mla; but s. also mra, n,
and dam, da, n.
taku, n. lake; G. kpakpo; lagune.
tami, n. scourge, whip; G. kplebii.
te, V. G. th. s. to arise,
te si, inf. site; G. th. s., to gel up, arise; G. ya nwei, to
go up, ascend,
te, pi. tehi, G. th. s., n. stone,
tenyubue, n. stony water jug.
Tesi, pr. n. of a town.
Tesitsen^e and Tesili, pr. n. people from Tesi; Tesipeople.
tfa, adj. C. Dial., G. fia, Kr. Dial, tso, tsoa, all; betwixt
the reduplicated noun = every; notfano, every body;
— thing; te tfa te, every stone,
ti, V. to give, = ha,- V.
ti = kpe, kpeti, n. G. ten, Ot. ntam, middle, midst; adv.
amidst; among,
to, pi. tohi, n. small cattle, sheep or goat,
tobiyo = G. tobi, n. kid or lamb; comp. boboyo, adj.
dsekweyo, n.
tokota, n. G. th. s. , sandals,
loro or tro, inf. torom, trom, v. C.Dial. to carry (on the
head) = G. tere, tre, v.
torom, trom, n. carrying; load; G. dSatiu, n.
tsapl (?), neg. v. to be not at all (comp. pi, neg. v. of pe,
and dsl, neg. of dsi, v.).
tsatse, n. C. Dial, my father, G. ata, mitse; Kr. Dial, itse;
pi. tsatseme.
tse, y. G. th. s. to go off, to loose.
ts6, V. inf. tsem, G. ts6 and tsle, v. to come away, off;
to take off, out; to pluck; to awake; to waken,
tse, inf. tsem, v. G. th. s., to call,
tse 9 pi. tseme, n. father, possessor, author; inhabitant etc.
just as in Ga.
tse, conj. = ke, kedsi, if; G. ke, kedsi; though, G. th. s.
tsebene, conj. G. tSebele, nevertheless, notwithstanding;
ubrigen^, io6).
dbyGoogk
460 Adfi]lime-Appendix.
l§i, V. to mention; G. t§i ta, v. to answer; G. to he, v.
which is also used.
l§ie, n. to conceal; G. and Ot. siu; comp. la, v.
tso, n. pi. tsohi, tsihi, tsii, G. tso, pi. tsei; tree, stick;
stem; stalk; tgohitSotso, every tree.
l§0, G. t§u, tse, tse, v. to send; to work; to be pure;
to purify; to go off, to loQse; to pluck; he \sq, inf. he-
tsom, to be pure, holy; tso he, v. inf. hetsgm, to pu-
rify; to sanctify. Cora, also tse, tse, v.
tS6, inf. t§5m, G. th. s. v. to show, to teach; comp. also:
gu and gbu, v.; and pig, v.
tSd nya, inf. nyatsom, G. tgo na, v. to show the price;
to offer for sale,
tso, adv. G. th. s., much, too much.
ISO, tso, tsoa, Kr. Dial. = tfa, C. Dial, and fia, f6, in GS:
adj. all; every; s. tfa; tso tso tso, every tree; notsono,
every thing or body,
tsoboti, n. G. tsokpoti, club of wood,
tsolo, pi. tsolohi, tsoli; with def. art. tSoHome; G. tSulo,
niitsulo ; bofo ; servant ; labourer ; messenger ; angel,
apostle; fr. tso, v.
t§6lo, G. th. s. n. teacher,
tsom, n. wock; purity etc. fr. tso, t.
ts5m, n. doctrine; turn, etc. fr. t§6, v.
t^owi, adj. bibio.
tsui and
tsuhi, pi. n. heart; G. tsui; Ay. tsi, n.
to, V. G. to, v.; to lay, to order; GS: wie, y. to speak;
G. dsadse, v. to explain. Comp. to in Ay. and Ot.;
and lu, V.
tu fo = du fo, t. G. dso foi, Ot. tutu mirik^, to run; to
run away, to flee; comp. sa fo, he fo, th. s.
tu munyu, v. G. wie, tsi ta, v. to speak; to mention,
tfl he munyu, v. to speak about,
tue, n. G. toi, ear; bo tue, G. bo toi, v. to listen, obey;
to be obedient,
tueboboe, n. listening, obedience,
tuebolo, n. obedient person,
tu, pi. tuhi, 6. tsu, n. room; house; s. we, n.
tdm, n. speaking; speech;, G. wi^mo; — ke tS5m, n. 6.
dsadSemo ke tsomo, n. admonition,
tutru, n. G, tutu, chaff,
tutotu, a4j. G. trdmO; even, plafn, smooth.
dbyGoogk
via — welSo. 461
V.
The letter and sound „v** (like the engl. „v") does
not belong to the GS-language and I met only with it
in one word in Adanme besides the few mentioned
under it in Ga proper; very probable all from the
Ayigbe or E\Ve. The word is:
via, n. G. nma, Ot. hwam; sweet sense; sweet odour.
W.
Wa, V. inf. warn; G. th. s., to be hard, heavy, strong;
r= G. da, V. to be large; to be grown; dfa wa = G.
dsra wa, v. (o be dear; precious. The word is modified
by gram, subjects and objects combined wilh it, as in
Ga;'f. i. he wa, v. to be (bodily) strong, well; inf. hc-
wanam and hewam; he wa, v. to be hardfaced, hard,
covetous etc. etc. and wa he, v. to have pain ; wa yi, v.
to treat cruelly; etc. Comp. he, hg or hie; mi; mu-
kuli; nya; no; si, sisi, tsui, yi etc.
wa-, subjective and possessive pronominal augment of the
1. pers. pi, we, our; GS: wo; comp. also: - wq, obj.
wahe, n. our-selves; about us etc. G. wohe and wohewo.
wahe, our face,
wami, worn*, our inside,
wano, our thing or person; ours,
wano, our surface etc.
wanya, our mouth etc. etc.
wanam, n. G. wala, life,
wati, our midst,
wayi, our head,
we, aor. neg. of wa, v.
we, n. G. th. s. and s!a, Ot. fi; house, home; weom, inside
of the house (heaven?),
wenyumu, n. male domestic,
weyo, pi. -yi, n. female domestic,
webihi, webii, with def. art. webiome, pi. n. G. webii,
domestics,
wetse, awetse, pi. -tseme, n. housefather, housemaster,
master, lord = nyontsQ and mawetSe. Comp. slatSe and
nyontso in Gd.
wetso, pi. -tsohi, -tsihi, n. lit. houseslem; family, tribe;
Stamm; G. weku; akutgo, n.
dbyGoogk
462 Ads Ame- Appendix.
wet^ombihi, wefgombiome, pi. n. members of a family,
tribe etc.
wl, aor. neg. of wo, v.
woi V. inf. worn, wowoe; aor. neg. wT; G. Ih. s., to lift up;
to take, to carry, of heavy things; to exalt, honour;
often combined with gram. subj. or obj. as: he, he, mi,
nya, no, si etc.
wo no, V. to lift up, exalt; 6. th. s.
wo si, inf. siwom; G. th. s., to promise; G. bo koko, v.
to warn, threaten.
wO, G. th. 8., n. buffalo; 93uffel, wilber Od^fe.
wo, n. Ay. wu, G. wuso, nso, Ol. po; sea; corop. woya-
lo, n. and G. Tvolenyo, n. and ya wO, v.
wo, n. G. won, fetish, idol; demon. See „won" in the
Ga-Vocab.
WQ, indep. pron. we; G. th. s.; and
- wo, - 'o, obj. pronom. augm. G. th. s., us.
wo, V. to sleep; comp. mahe.
wo, n. sleep.
wolo, woyalo, pi. -li, n. fisherman; G. wolenyo, pi. wolei.
womi, n. skin; parchment; paper; book; letter; GS: wolo,
Ot. ahuma.
womblo, n. seaway; seaward; south; G. nsongbe, n.
wodsalo, n. from dsa wo, v. and
wotsolo, wot§ulo, n. fr. tso wo, tsuwo, v., fetish-servant;
idolater; G. wondsalo, wontsulo, n.
wosi, n. east (under-sea?); G. boka; nadsiasi, n.
woyalo, n. pi. woli; fisherman; s. wolo, n.
wu? 8. wo (Ay. ^u), n. sea.
The aspirated w or hw appears in a few words per-
haps of Ayigbe or E>Ve-origin, as:
Walami or hwalami, n. star; s. also: godoi and nulami in
G3; comp. hyom; holami, n.
wo or hwo, G. wo, n. to morrow.
iVae, ^e and hue, hwe, n. friend, etc. etc.
dbyGoogk
Ya — yibli. 463
Y.
The semi -consonant „y** changes with the liquids
as well the aspirata.
Ya, v. G. th. s., aor. neg. ye, to go; comp. also ho, also
used as auxil. verb as in Ga in combination with verbs;
s. Table 11. and comp. § 28 in the Ga-Sketch.
\a = yara, G. th. s., n. fun^ralcoslum; Jobtenffage; see
ya, yara in the Gli-Voc; pe -, v. to perform this cere-
monies,
ya, n. astonishment, wonder; hi pe yS; pe ya, v. to be
astonished, to wonder,
yakanoke, n. G. th. s., free present; grace (only used by
W. Hanson in his translation of the Gosp. of Mat. and
Joh. into Ga).
yapem, n. burial-ceremony; astonishment: s. ya, n.
ya^a, adj. G. efon, bad, evil,
yayam, n. G. efon, esa; Ot. bone, evil, sin.
yayampelo, n. sinner,
yayamppm, n. sinful act.
yayampepei, n. sin.
ye, inf. yem; v. G. th. s., to eat, to enjoy; to use
etc. etc. As extensively employed as in GS, which see.
Aor. neg. yl.
>e dase, inf. daseyem, v. to bear witness; G. ye odase,
Ot. di adanse, v.
ye no, inf. noycm, v. to rule; G. th. s.
ye, eye, indep. pron. 1. prs. sing. I, = imi, ami, mami;
G. mi.
ye- (Coast-Dial. = Kr. Dial. „i"), poss. pronom. augm.
my; f. i.
yend, my thing or person,
yese, my back; behind me, after me.
ye, C. Dial., v. to look, behold; G. kwe; Kr. Dial. hie,.
Ot. fye or fe, v.
yelo, n. eater, user; ruler,
yelo, n. beholder; overseer = kwelo in Ga.
yem, yeye, n. eating; using; use etc. fr. ye, v.
yi, V. to come down from above, G. th. s.
yi si, V. to descend; G. .yi si.
yi, n. head, G. th. s., as extensively used as in GS,
which see.
yibli, pi yiblihi, n. fruit of trees; G. yibii.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
46 4 AdSiime-AppeDclix.
yidsiem, yid§em, n. praise, fr. d§ie or dse yi, v. G. yi-
d§iemo, n.
yim, n. inside of head, brain; mind, reason, as „yin**, n.
^ in G3 and as extensively used,
yiwam, n. strength of head, hardness; G. yiwale.
yiwanam, n. life; here n5ko — , v. to save s. b., aoa^eiv;
comp. yiwala, xl in Ga.
yiwanamherelo , n. saviour,
yiwanamherem, n. salvation.
yO, pi. yi, n. woman, female; also used to distinguish the
gender of men and animals; s. nyumu; G. th. s.; wife,
6. nS, n.; fio yo, v. and kpe yo, v. to marry,
yo, yoku, n. mountain; G. gon; yo gSg§ or yo nwa, a high
mountain.
YogSga, n. pr. of a high mountain at the river Volta on
the boundaries of KrQbo and Akwamu; having the form
of a resting lion,
yohuno, n. G. ayemforowu; Ot. ayemforokunu, bridegroom,
yokpem, n. wedding; s. yokpemQ in the G. Yoc.
yonoe, yondm, n. wedding; taking of a wife, marriage,
yono, n. top of a mountain,
yoyikpeti, n. th. s.
dbyGoogk
Digitized by VjOOQIC
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
dbyGoogk
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11